HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E786 Series

HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E78625, E78630, E78635

HP Color LaserJet Managed Flow MFP E78625, E78630, E78635

Service Manual

www.hp.com/support/colorljE786mfp
 HP Color LaserJet Managed E786,
E78625, E78630, E78635 - Service Manual

SUMMARY

This guide provides theory of operation, troubleshooting, and repair information.

Legal information
Copyright and License

© Copyright 2023 HP Development

Company, L.P.

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation

without prior written permission is
prohibited, except as allowed under the
copyright laws.

The information contained herein is subject

to change without notice.

The only warranties for HP products and

services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such
products and services. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable
for technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained herein.

Edition 5, 4/2024
Revision History

View a list of document revisions.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP
products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be
liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

Table Revision History

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Number

5 April 2024 Updated Echo PCA components to non orderable, see PCA overview,
Echo PCA, Parts and diagrams: PCA, and EMR diagrams: PCA.

Added new feature "Low Volume Print Mode" in Service Functions, see
Service menu.

Added instructions after replacement of Registration unit, see Special

instructions: Adjust the Regi-roller reset setting after replacement.

Added new part number (Kit-Screws c-clips e-clips kit) Parts and
diagrams: Covers

4 March 2024 Added new remove and replace procedures for the following:

● HP LaserJet Managed E826, E82650, E82660, E82670, HP Color

LaserJet Managed E877, E87740, E87750, E87760, E87770 - Removal
and replacement: Stacker Unit with PQ diagnostics

● HP LaserJet Managed E826, E82650, E82660, E82670, HP Color

LaserJet Managed E877, E87740, E87750, E87760, E87770 - Removal
and replacement: Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics

3 January 2024 Added ILSB information for PQ Diagnostics

Optional input and output devices configuration

Print Quality Diagnostics output devices

Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher or Booklet finisher with

Print Quality Diagnostics

Updated Remove and replace chapter.

Added: Essential adjustments when replacing or reinstalling the

supplies or LLCs

2.11 September, 2023 Add footnote to Booklet Maker speed.

2.10 August, 2023 Update exit unit PN from JC90-01856A to JC90-01876A per HPPK PR
378.

Changed PN and part description of "Riser for HDD, USB ports

(4XN67-60001)" to "SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit (4XN67-67001)" per
HPPK PR #377.

iii
 Table Revision History (continued)

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Number

2.9 May, 2023 Updated HCI cassette remove/replace per HPPK PR 348.

Update workgroup stand part numbers per HPPK PR 347.

Updated LSU content per HPPK PR 344.

Updated printer dimension content per HPPK PR 334.

Removed invalid video links form ISA WUR topics (200/100-sheet) per
HPPK PR 328.

2.8 April, 2023 Updated drum and developer part numbers (theory) per HPPK PR 321.

Added drawer type physical keyboard (5QK47-60002 ) content in

multiple topics (theory, remove/replace, EM diagrams, parts) per HPPK
PR322.

2.7 March 2023

Added starter toner cartridge information to supplies specifications
table per HPPK PR 307.

Updated 10.1 control panel PN per HPPK PR 302.

Updated inner finisher sensor callout (theory) per HPPK PR 301.

Updated theory chapter formatter PN to 6CF14-67003 (2 topics) per

HPPK PR 286.

Updated theory chapter image drums and developer units part

numbers per HPPK PR284.

2.6 February 2023 Updated theory chapter (output devices) to include Print Quality
Diagnostics (ILSB) content per HPPK PR 279.

Updated theory chapter (hardware configuration) to include SSD

content per HPPK PR 278.

Updated parts chapter (base engine / inner finisher) per HPPK PR

267/268.

2.5 January 2023 Deleted ADF image sensor service part number and associated
content per HPPK PR 261.

Added Card Reader Rotation Adapter Kit (other options) per HPPK PR
256.

Updated ISA part numbers per HPPK PR257.

Updated Tarot platen parts illustration and FFC PNs per HPPK PR 258.

2.4 January 2023 Added part numbers for all CMF panel colors per portal request 238.

2.3 January 2023 Added control panel diagnostic button note per HPPK PR228. See
Control panel – 10.1 inch.

2.1 January 2023 Updated graphic for CIS Platen PCA and Tarot platen PCA in Theory
Chapter

iv Revision History
Table Revision History (continued)

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Number

2.0 January 2023 Made the following updates per HPPK portal request #219:

● Updated the printer dimensions in the product information/

specifications section.

● Updated a couple of callouts in two images in the theory/feeding

system section.

● Updated image of the screw caps in the remove-replace > rear

upper cover section.

1.1 December 2022 Added keyboard overlay part numbers (theory/parts chapters) per
HPPK portal ticket 205.

1.0 September 2022 Service manual initial release

v
 Conventions used in this guide

Learn about the conventions used in this publication.

TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.

NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.

CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the
product.

WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury,
catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.

vi Conventions used in this guide

Table of contents

1 Product information, configurations, and specifications........................................................................................................................................ 1

Printer views ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
Printer front view................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
Printer back view................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2
Interface ports view......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Control-panel view............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4
Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6
Basic specifications........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6
Supported operating systems.......................................................................................................................................................................7
Mobile printing solutions................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Printer dimensions ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8
Operating-environment range..................................................................................................................................................................... 11
General specifications...................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Print specifications............................................................................................................................................................................................. 12
Scan specifications............................................................................................................................................................................................ 12
Copy specifications............................................................................................................................................................................................ 13
Paper handling specifications.................................................................................................................................................................... 14
Supplies..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................16
Maintenance parts (Long Life Consumables (LLC)).................................................................................................................................17
Network and software specifications..............................................................................................................................................................18
Network interface ................................................................................................................................................................................................18
Options....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................19
Optional input and output devices configuration.........................................................................................................................19
Option specifications....................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Color skin configuration..................................................................................................................................................................................27

2 Product installation and maintenance .............................................................................................................................................................................30

Product installation...................................................................................................................................................................................................................30
Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................30
PM table (Preventive Maintenance)...................................................................................................................................................................30
Cleaning................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 32
Cleaning the paper dust stick .................................................................................................................................................................... 32
Cleaning the ACR (CTD) Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................... 34
Cleaning the LSU window .............................................................................................................................................................................. 35
Cleaning the scanner glass..........................................................................................................................................................................37
Cleaning the ADF CIS (Contact Image Sensor).............................................................................................................................38
Inspection procedures................................................................................................................................................................................................38
LLC removal and replacement procedures .................................................................................................................................................40
Counter reset after LLC replacement .............................................................................................................................................................. 41

3 Theory of operation........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 42
Base printer ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 42
Covers (1 of 2)..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 42

vii
 Covers (2of 2) ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 43
Feeding system................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 44
Feeding system overview.............................................................................................................................................................................. 44
Feeding system workflow................................................................................................................................................................... 45
Feeding system roller............................................................................................................................................................................46
Feeding system sensors......................................................................................................................................................................47
Feeding system motors and solenoids .................................................................................................................................... 49
Tray 1 unit ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................50
Tray 1 unit overview .................................................................................................................................................................................50
Tray 1 unit operation................................................................................................................................................................................ 53
Tray 1 unit driving....................................................................................................................................................................................... 55
Tray 2/3 unit.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 55
Tray 2/3 unit overview............................................................................................................................................................................ 55
Tray 2/3 operation ....................................................................................................................................................................................63
Tray 2/3 driving ...........................................................................................................................................................................................65
Registration unit and loop sensing.........................................................................................................................................................66
Registration unit and loop sensing overview.......................................................................................................................66
Registration unit operation ...............................................................................................................................................................69
Loop sensor operation ..........................................................................................................................................................................70
Registration unit driving .......................................................................................................................................................................70
Exit unit..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................71
Exit unit overview........................................................................................................................................................................................71
Second exit unit (Optional)..................................................................................................................................................................73
Job separator (optional).......................................................................................................................................................................75
Exit unit operation .....................................................................................................................................................................................76
Exit unit driving ............................................................................................................................................................................................77
Second exit unit driving ........................................................................................................................................................................78
Duplex unit .................................................................................................................................................................................................................78
Duplex unit overview...............................................................................................................................................................................78
Duplex unit operation ............................................................................................................................................................................80
Duplex unit driving ....................................................................................................................................................................................81
Toner flow system............................................................................................................................................................................................................81
Toner flow overview ............................................................................................................................................................................................81
Toner flow workflow.................................................................................................................................................................................81
Toner flow sensors.................................................................................................................................................................................. 82
Toner flow motors.....................................................................................................................................................................................83
Toner flow system ...............................................................................................................................................................................................84
Toner cartridge ..........................................................................................................................................................................................85
Toner duct ......................................................................................................................................................................................................89
Toner Collection Unit (TCU)................................................................................................................................................................94
Image creation..................................................................................................................................................................................................................98
Image creation overview................................................................................................................................................................................98
Image creation workflow ....................................................................................................................................................................98
Image creation sensors ......................................................................................................................................................................99
Image creation motors........................................................................................................................................................................101
Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)........................................................................................................................................................................... 102
Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) overview......................................................................................................................................... 102
Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) operation .......................................................................................................................................104
Adjusting the laser scanner assembly skew error........................................................................................................106

viii
 Developer and drum unit .............................................................................................................................................................................108
Developer and drum unit overview ...........................................................................................................................................108
Developer and drum unit operation........................................................................................................................................... 113
Developer and drum unit driving.................................................................................................................................................. 114
Image Transfer Belt (ITB) ............................................................................................................................................................................... 115
Image Transfer Belt (ITB) overview ............................................................................................................................................. 115
Image Transfer Belt (ITB) operation.............................................................................................................................................117
Image Transfer Belt (ITB) driving....................................................................................................................................................117
Second Transfer (T2) unit..............................................................................................................................................................................119
Second Transfer (T2) unit overview............................................................................................................................................119
Second transfer unit operation....................................................................................................................................................120
ITB cleaning unit .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 121
ITB cleaning unit overview................................................................................................................................................................ 121
ITB cleaning unit operation ............................................................................................................................................................. 122
Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit...................................................................................................................................................... 123
Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit overview.................................................................................................................... 123
Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit operation.................................................................................................................. 126
Color Toner Density (CTD) operation ........................................................................................................................................127
Color plane registration shutter driving .................................................................................................................................127
Fuser unit................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 128
Fuser unit overview............................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Fuser unit temperature control..................................................................................................................................................... 131
Fuser release operation..................................................................................................................................................................... 131
Fuser wrap jam sensor operation.............................................................................................................................................. 132
Fuser driving ..............................................................................................................................................................................................133
Environmental sensor, fan, switch ....................................................................................................................................................................134
Environmental sensor, fan, switch overview..................................................................................................................................134
Control panel ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................136
Control panel – 10.1 inch.................................................................................................................................................................................136
Control panel – 8 inch .....................................................................................................................................................................................138
Hardware configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................................139
PCA overview........................................................................................................................................................................................................139
Formatter ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 142
Trusted Platform Module (TPM)................................................................................................................................................................147
Riser card .................................................................................................................................................................................................................147
Riser card for HDD ................................................................................................................................................................................148
SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit..................................................................................................................................................148
Riser card for HDD, USB ports, and accelerator board (optional)...................................................................... 149
Accelerator (optional)..................................................................................................................................................................................... 149
Storage .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................150
Solid-state drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................150
Hard disk drive..........................................................................................................................................................................................153
eMMC..............................................................................................................................................................................................................154
USB hub PCA ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 155
Island Of Data (IOD) ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Echo PCA .................................................................................................................................................................................................................156
Power key PCA......................................................................................................................................................................................................157
Keyboard PCA .......................................................................................................................................................................................................157
Toner Collection Unit full sensor PCA.................................................................................................................................................158

ix
 Paper size sensor PCA..................................................................................................................................................................................159
Drum CRUM PCA ...............................................................................................................................................................................................159
Toner cartridge CRUM PCA........................................................................................................................................................................160
Eraser PCA .............................................................................................................................................................................................................160
Fuser CRUM PCA................................................................................................................................................................................................ 161
Control panel PCA.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 161
Control panel base PCA .................................................................................................................................................................... 162
Control panel PCA – 10.1 inch.......................................................................................................................................................... 162
Control panel PCA – 8 inch...............................................................................................................................................................163
High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS).......................................................................................................................................................164
Lower Voltage Power Supply (LVPS).....................................................................................................................................................166
Fuser Drive Board (FDB) ................................................................................................................................................................................167
Integrated Scan Asset .........................................................................................................................................................................................................168
Automatic document feeder system: 200sh Flow ADF, 200sh ADF........................................................................................168
ADF cover................................................................................................................................................................................................................168
200-sheet ADF unit...........................................................................................................................................................................................168
ADF system overview..................................................................................................................................................................................... 170
200-sheet ADF workflow................................................................................................................................................................... 170
ADF sensors............................................................................................................................................................................................... 170
ADF system motor / solenoid / roller..........................................................................................................................................171
Lift plate unit...........................................................................................................................................................................................................173
Pickup unit................................................................................................................................................................................................................174
Deskew unit.............................................................................................................................................................................................................175
Scan and exit unit ...............................................................................................................................................................................................176
Document feeder simplex operation...................................................................................................................................................176
Deskew operation ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 179
Document feeder hinges operation .................................................................................................................................................... 179
ADF image scanner cleaning ...................................................................................................................................................................180
ADF PCA...................................................................................................................................................................................................................180
Automatic document feeder system: 100sh Flow ADF, 100sh ADF...........................................................................................181
ADF cover.................................................................................................................................................................................................................181
ADF unit .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 182
ADF system overview.....................................................................................................................................................................................183
ADF workflow ............................................................................................................................................................................................183
ADF sensors...............................................................................................................................................................................................183
ADF system motor / roller.................................................................................................................................................................184
Lift plate unit..........................................................................................................................................................................................................185
Pickup unit...............................................................................................................................................................................................................186
Scan and exit unit ..............................................................................................................................................................................................186
Document feeder simplex operation...................................................................................................................................................187
Deskew operation .............................................................................................................................................................................................188
Document feeder hinges operation ....................................................................................................................................................189
ADF image scanner cleaning ...................................................................................................................................................................190
ADF PCA...................................................................................................................................................................................................................190
Scanner system: Tarot Platen...............................................................................................................................................................................191
Scanner workflow ..............................................................................................................................................................................................191
Cover .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 192
Sensor, motor.......................................................................................................................................................................................................193

x
 Image scanner and flat-bed glass cleaning ..................................................................................................................................193
PCA ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................194
Scanner system: CIS Platen .................................................................................................................................................................................194
Cover ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................195
CIS platen sensors and motors ..............................................................................................................................................................195
Image scanner and flat-bed glass cleaning ..................................................................................................................................196
PCA ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................196
Input devices................................................................................................................................................................................................................................197
Workgroup stand............................................................................................................................................................................................................197
Workgroup Dual Cassette Feeder (DCF, Tray 4, 5)................................................................................................................................198
DCF (Tray 4, 5) covers......................................................................................................................................................................................198
DCF (Tray 4, 5) feeding system workflow ..........................................................................................................................................199
DCF (Tray 4, 5) unit............................................................................................................................................................................................200
DCF (Tray 4, 5) roller.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 201
DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors ................................................................................................................................................................................. 202
DCF (Tray 4, 5) motors....................................................................................................................................................................................203
DCF (Tray 4, 5) operation..............................................................................................................................................................................204
DCF (Tray 4, 5) motor operation.............................................................................................................................................................. 205
DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA...........................................................................................................................................................................................206
Workgroup High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4) .................................................................................................................................207
HCI (Tray 4) cover ...............................................................................................................................................................................................207
HCI (Tray 4) workflow......................................................................................................................................................................................208
HCI (Tray 4) unit...................................................................................................................................................................................................209
HCI (Tray 4) roller ...............................................................................................................................................................................................209
HCI (Tray 4) sensors .........................................................................................................................................................................................210
HCI (Tray 4) motor .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 212
HCI (Tray 4) operation ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 213
HCI (Tray 4) motor operation...................................................................................................................................................................... 214
HCI (Tray 4) PCA .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 215
HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 216
Output devices ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................217
Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker...............................................................................................................................................217
Detailed Specifications .................................................................................................................................................................................217
Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker covers................................................................................................................ 223
Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker unit overview ................................................................................................ 226
Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker workflow ............................................................................................... 226
Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors ..................................................................................................227
Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker motors and solenoids................................................................. 232
Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker rollers...................................................................................................... 235
Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker PCAs........................................................................................................ 236
Bridge unit...............................................................................................................................................................................................................237
Bridge unit overview.............................................................................................................................................................................237
Stapler-stacker finisher ............................................................................................................................................................................... 239
Entrance unit............................................................................................................................................................................................. 239
Punch unit (optional)..............................................................................................................................................................................241
Tray diverter unit .....................................................................................................................................................................................244
Top exit unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 247
Top output tray unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 248

xi
 Main exit unit.............................................................................................................................................................................................250
Paddle unit.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 252
End fence unit .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 255
Tamper unit .................................................................................................................................................................................................257
Stapler unit.................................................................................................................................................................................................260
Ejector unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 264
Main output tray unit............................................................................................................................................................................267
Paper holding unit ..................................................................................................................................................................................270
Buffer unit ....................................................................................................................................................................................................273
Booklet maker......................................................................................................................................................................................................278
Booklet entrance unit..........................................................................................................................................................................278
Booklet paddle unit ..............................................................................................................................................................................280
Booklet end fence unit........................................................................................................................................................................ 281
Booklet presser unit............................................................................................................................................................................ 283
Booklet tamper unit ............................................................................................................................................................................. 285
Booklet stapler unit...............................................................................................................................................................................287
Booklet fold unit......................................................................................................................................................................................290
Booklet diverter unit............................................................................................................................................................................ 295
Booklet exit unit .......................................................................................................................................................................................297
Booklet output tray unit ....................................................................................................................................................................299
PCA .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................302
Finisher main PCA.................................................................................................................................................................................302
Booklet maker PCA ..............................................................................................................................................................................305
Manual staple PCA...............................................................................................................................................................................306
Inner finisher ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 307
Detailed specifications................................................................................................................................................................................ 307
Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 311
Inner finisher overview..................................................................................................................................................................................313
Inner finisher workflow.......................................................................................................................................................................313
Inner finisher sensor............................................................................................................................................................................314
Inner finisher motor and solenoid..............................................................................................................................................316
Inner finisher roller ................................................................................................................................................................................ 317
Inner finisher PCA .................................................................................................................................................................................. 317
Punch unit (optional)........................................................................................................................................................................................318
Punch unit overview .............................................................................................................................................................................318
Punch unit operation............................................................................................................................................................................ 321
Entrance unit......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 321
Entrance unit overview....................................................................................................................................................................... 321
Diverter unit.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 323
Diverter unit overview........................................................................................................................................................................ 323
Diverter unit operation .......................................................................................................................................................................324
Exit unit..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 325
Exit unit overview................................................................................................................................................................................... 325
Paper support unit............................................................................................................................................................................................327
Paper support unit overview..........................................................................................................................................................327
Paper support unit operation ....................................................................................................................................................... 328
Paddle unit............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 329
Paddle unit overview........................................................................................................................................................................... 329
Paddle unit operation ..........................................................................................................................................................................331

xii
 End fence unit...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 332
End fence unit overview ................................................................................................................................................................... 332
End fence unit operation..................................................................................................................................................................333
Tamper unit ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................334
Tamper unit overview .........................................................................................................................................................................334
Tamper unit operation........................................................................................................................................................................335
Stapler unit............................................................................................................................................................................................................336
Stapler unit overview..........................................................................................................................................................................336
Staple and staple cartridge...........................................................................................................................................................338
Stapler unit operation........................................................................................................................................................................339
Ejector unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................................340
Ejector unit overview ..........................................................................................................................................................................340
Ejector unit operation......................................................................................................................................................................... 342
Output tray and paper holding unit .....................................................................................................................................................343
Output tray and paper holding unit overview ...................................................................................................................343
Output tray and paper holding unit operation .................................................................................................................346
PCA ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................347
Inner finisher main PCA .....................................................................................................................................................................347
Inner finisher rear joint PCA...........................................................................................................................................................349
Print Quality Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................................................................................350
Print Quality Diagnostic overview......................................................................................................................................................... 351
Print Quality Diagnostic workflow.............................................................................................................................................. 351
Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................... 352
Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................356
Print Quality Diagnostic operation ...........................................................................................................................................359

4 Problem solving...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................361
General troubleshooting guide......................................................................................................................................................................................361
Troubleshooting process ........................................................................................................................................................................................361
Determine the problem source...............................................................................................................................................................361
Power subsystem...................................................................................................................................................................................361
Control panel checks..........................................................................................................................................................................364
Individual component diagnostics ...........................................................................................................................................369
Tools for troubleshooting........................................................................................................................................................................................372
Problem-solving checklist ...........................................................................................................................................................................372
Step 1: Check that the printer power is on ...........................................................................................................................372
Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages...................................................................................................372
Step 3: Test print functionality ......................................................................................................................................................372
Step 4: Test copy functionality......................................................................................................................................................373
Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality.............................................................................................................................373
Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality..........................................................................................................................373
Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer..............................................................................................................373
Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality..........................................................................373
Factors that affect printer performance..............................................................................................................................374
Print menu map...................................................................................................................................................................................................374
Print current settings pages .....................................................................................................................................................................374
Additional tools for troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................................375
Remote Admin .....................................................................................................................................................................................................375
Required software and network connection......................................................................................................................375

xiii
 Connect a remote connection......................................................................................................................................................377
Disconnect a remote connection.............................................................................................................................................. 382
Clear paper jams .........................................................................................................................................................................................................383
Paper jam locations........................................................................................................................................................................................383
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams........................................................................................................................................384
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?......................................................................................................................385
31.13.yz jam error in the document feeder ......................................................................................................................................385
13.A1 jam error in tray 1 (multipurpose tray)....................................................................................................................................387
13.A2, 13.A3, 13.A4 jam errors in tray 2, tray 3, or the optional 2 x 520-sheet trays............................................388
13.E1 jam error in the output bin .............................................................................................................................................................390
13.B9, 13.B2, 13.FF jam errors in the right door and fuser area.........................................................................................390
HP service and support ...........................................................................................................................................................................................391
How to search for printer documentation.................................................................................................................................................393
How to search WISE for printer information and documentation ................................................................................393
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP)....................................................................................................................399
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal)........................................................................................400
Control panel messages document (CPMD) ......................................................................................................................................................402
Error codes (types and structure) ...................................................................................................................................................................402
Image-quality troubleshooting guide (IQTG)........................................................................................................................................................404

5 Control panel menus..................................................................................................................................................................................................................406

Pre-boot menu options .......................................................................................................................................................................................................406
Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.......................................................................................................406
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.............................................................................408
Remote Admin................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 416
Required software and network connection................................................................................................................................. 416
Telnet client................................................................................................................................................................................................. 416
Network connection..............................................................................................................................................................................417
Connect a remote connection................................................................................................................................................................. 418
Start the telnet server function at the printer................................................................................................................... 418
Start the telnet client function at the remote computer ..........................................................................................420
Disconnect a remote connection......................................................................................................................................................... 422
Reports menu............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 423
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 425
Copy menu....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................467
Scan menu....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................476
Fax menu (when a fax option is installed)..............................................................................................................................................................505
Print menu ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................509
Supplies menu ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................509
Trays menu.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 510
Support Tools menu............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 510
Service menu................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 510
Event Log .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 511
Counts ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 512
Coverage Report ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 513

xiv
 Scanner Settings............................................................................................................................................................................................... 513
Serial Number...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 514
Service ID................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 514
Cold Reset Paper............................................................................................................................................................................................... 515
Low Alerts................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 515
Reset Supplies Level ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 515
Consumables Access Control................................................................................................................................................................. 516
Software Version ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 516
Service Reports...................................................................................................................................................................................................517
ACS Page Adjustment ....................................................................................................................................................................................517
Print Adjustment .................................................................................................................................................................................................517
Buckle Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 518
Finisher Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 519
Reset Engine NVM ............................................................................................................................................................................................527
Engine NVM Read/Write.............................................................................................................................................................................. 528
Sensors ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................530
Component tests..............................................................................................................................................................................................539
TR Control Mode ...............................................................................................................................................................................................546
Drain............................................................................................................................................................................................................................547
Low-temperature Idling Mode..................................................................................................................................................................548
Altitude Adjustment........................................................................................................................................................................................549
Humidity ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................550
Footer........................................................................................................................................................................................................................550
PTT Test Mode.....................................................................................................................................................................................................550
Test Support.........................................................................................................................................................................................................550
Part Replacement Count ............................................................................................................................................................................. 551
Reset Supplies..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 551
Fax V.29 Speed................................................................................................................................................................................................... 552
Maintenance menu .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 552
Backup/Restore.................................................................................................................................................................................................553
Import/Export......................................................................................................................................................................................................553
ACR Reference Adjustment......................................................................................................................................................................553
Auto Color Registration ...............................................................................................................................................................................553
Full Auto Color Registration......................................................................................................................................................................554
Custom Color ......................................................................................................................................................................................................555
Auto Tone Adjustment................................................................................................................................................................................... 555
CTD Sensor Cleaning....................................................................................................................................................................................556
Setting Standard Tone..................................................................................................................................................................................556
Manual Tone Adjustment .............................................................................................................................................................................557
Color Calibration................................................................................................................................................................................................557
Calibrate Scanner............................................................................................................................................................................................558
ITB Heating Mode.............................................................................................................................................................................................558
USB Firmware Upgrade................................................................................................................................................................................558
Enhanced 1200 DPI Print Quality...........................................................................................................................................................558
License Management ...................................................................................................................................................................................558
Troubleshooting menu ..............................................................................................................................................................................................561
Configuration/Status Pages .................................................................................................................................................................... 562
Fax Reports........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 562
Other Pages ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 562

xv
 Fax T.30 Trace Report....................................................................................................................................................................................563
Fax V.34....................................................................................................................................................................................................................563
JBIG Compression...........................................................................................................................................................................................563
Fax Speaker Mode...........................................................................................................................................................................................564
Fax Service Log..................................................................................................................................................................................................564
IP Fax Trace Report .........................................................................................................................................................................................564
IP Fax Log Level ..................................................................................................................................................................................................564
IP Fax Multitasking...........................................................................................................................................................................................564
PQ Troubleshooting Pages ........................................................................................................................................................................564
Color Band Test..................................................................................................................................................................................................568
Advanced Print Quality Pages ................................................................................................................................................................568
Event Log ................................................................................................................................................................................................................568
Paper Path Page................................................................................................................................................................................................569
Run Fax Test..........................................................................................................................................................................................................569
Retrieve Diagnostic Data............................................................................................................................................................................569
Retrieve Fax Diagnostic Data..................................................................................................................................................................569

6 Remove and replace....................................................................................................................................................................................................................570

Before servicing........................................................................................................................................................................................................................570
Order parts by authorized service providers ..........................................................................................................................................570
Ordering ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................570
Orderable parts ..................................................................................................................................................................................................570
How to use parts lists and diagrams..............................................................................................................................................................570
ESD precautions ............................................................................................................................................................................................................571
Service approach.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................571
Precautions when replacing parts....................................................................................................................................................................571
Before performing service ....................................................................................................................................................................................572
After performing service ........................................................................................................................................................................................572
Post-service test ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................573
Print-quality test .................................................................................................................................................................................................573
Copy-quality test................................................................................................................................................................................................573
Fax-quality test ....................................................................................................................................................................................................573
Parts removal order.........................................................................................................................................................................................573
Essential adjustments when replacing or reinstalling the supplies or LLCs ...............................................................................573
How to perform the ACR Reference Adjustment..................................................................................................................................574
How to perform Auto Color Registration.....................................................................................................................................................577
How to perform LSU Skew Adjustment.........................................................................................................................................................578
How to perform Auto Tone Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................................581
How to set Standard Tone ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 582
How to Reset Supplies.............................................................................................................................................................................................585
Base printer ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................586
Covers..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................586
Base covers..........................................................................................................................................................................................................586
Removal and replacement: Rear upper cover .................................................................................................................586
Removal and replacement: Rear lower cover...................................................................................................................589
Removal and replacement: Controller cover ....................................................................................................................593
Removal and replacement: Exit rear cover.........................................................................................................................595
Removal and replacement: Left top cover ..........................................................................................................................598

xvi
 Removal and replacement: Left upper cover....................................................................................................................600
Removal and replacement: Left cover ...................................................................................................................................604
Removal and replacement: Middle upper cover.............................................................................................................608
Removal and replacement: Right upper cover .................................................................................................................610
Removal and replacement: Right rear cover......................................................................................................................618
Removal and replacement: Right front cover.................................................................................................................... 621
Removal and replacement: Right middle cover............................................................................................................... 623
Removal and replacement: Hardware integration pocket (HIP) cover............................................................630
Removal and replacement: Middle left cover ................................................................................................................... 632
Removal and replacement: Exit cover stacker ................................................................................................................634
Removal and replacement: Inner cover................................................................................................................................636
Removal and replacement: Front lower cover...................................................................................................................647
Removal and replacement: Front cover assembly .......................................................................................................650
Removal and replacement: Tray 2, 3 color panel............................................................................................................653
Removal and replacement: Exit stacker upper cover.................................................................................................655
Feeding system.............................................................................................................................................................................................................662
Right door assembly ......................................................................................................................................................................................662
Removal and replacement: Right door assembly..........................................................................................................662
Removal and replacement: Right door front link ............................................................................................................668
Removal and replacement: Right door front damper ..................................................................................................673
Tray 1 unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................................680
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 unit....................................................................................................................................680
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 paper empty sensor............................................................................................ 692
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 clutch .............................................................................................................................. 704
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 roller kit (pickup/forward/reverse)................................................................711
Tray 2-3 units.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 714
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 or Tray 3......................................................................................................................... 714
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup assembly..................................................................................................... 716
Removal and replacement: Tray 2, 3 roller kit (pickup/forward/reverse)........................................................ 724
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 empty and stack height sensors................................................................728
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 open and paper size sensor.......................................................................... 737
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup drive assembly ........................................................................................741
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup motor..............................................................................................................745
Removal and replacement: Tray 3 pickup assembly ................................................................................................... 750
Removal and replacement: Tray 3 empty and stack height sensors................................................................ 757
Removal and replacement: Tray 3 open and paper size sensor..........................................................................765
Removal and replacement: Tray 3 pickup drive assembly ...................................................................................... 769
Removal and replacement: Tray 3 pickup motor .............................................................................................................773
Removal and replacement: Tray heater................................................................................................................................. 777
Removal and replacement: Feed drive assembly ......................................................................................................... 780
Removal and replacement: Feed motor.................................................................................................................................785
Removal and replacement: Tray Feed 2 sensor.............................................................................................................. 790
Removal and replacement: Tray Feed 3 sensor.............................................................................................................. 796
Registration unit and loop sensing unit............................................................................................................................................803
Removal and replacement: Registration unit....................................................................................................................803
Removal and replacement: Registration sensor..............................................................................................................811
Removal and replacement: Paper dust holder assembly.........................................................................................819
Removal and replacement: Registration drive assembly........................................................................................ 822
Removal and replacement: Registration and Tray 1 motor.......................................................................................827

xvii
 Removal and replacement: Registration clutch...............................................................................................................831
Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer (T2) unit........................................................................................838
Removal and replacement: Loop sensor 1, 2 .....................................................................................................................840
Removal and replacement: Loop sensor actuator .......................................................................................................845
Removal and replacement: Right door exit assembly................................................................................................848
Removal and replacement: Fuser out sensor ................................................................................................................... 851
Exit unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................854
Removal and replacement: Exit unit ........................................................................................................................................854
Removal and replacement: Output bin 1 full sensor .....................................................................................................857
Removal and replacement: Actuator-bin full exit ............................................................................................................861
Removal and replacement: Lever-actuator bin full exit and spring TS ...........................................................863
Removal and replacement: Exit stack guide......................................................................................................................866
Duplex unit.............................................................................................................................................................................................................869
Removal and replacement: Duplex assembly ..................................................................................................................869
Removal and replacement: Duplex jam sensor................................................................................................................875
Removal and replacement: Duplex motor........................................................................................................................... 879
Toner flow ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................885
Toner cartridge...................................................................................................................................................................................................885
Removal and replacement: Toner dispense and duct motor assembly (Y, M) ..........................................885
Removal and replacement: Toner dispense and duct motor assembly (C, K)...........................................892
Removal and replacement: Toner dispense motors (Y, M, C, K)............................................................................902
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (control panel method)............................................................908
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (disassemble method) ..............................................................911
Removal and replacement: Toner CRUM module assembly................................................................................... 917
Duct unit ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................927
Removal and replacement: Toner guide unit......................................................................................................................927
Removal and replacement: Toner duct unit......................................................................................................................... 951
Removal and replacement: Toner duct motor (Y, M).....................................................................................................965
Removal and replacement: Toner duct motor (C, K) .......................................................................................................971
Toner collection unit .......................................................................................................................................................................................980
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU).............................................................................................980
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit detection sensor.................................................................982
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) drive assembly.......................................................999
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) motor.............................................................................1011
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) full sensor ................................................................1023
Image creation.............................................................................................................................................................................................................1038
Laser scanner unit (LSU) ...........................................................................................................................................................................1038
Removal and replacement: Laser scanner unit (LSU)...............................................................................................1038
Developer and drum.....................................................................................................................................................................................1045
Removal and replacement: Drum unit..................................................................................................................................1045
Removal and replacement: Developer powder.............................................................................................................1048
Removal and replacement: Drum and developer drive assembly ..................................................................1060
Removal and replacement: Developer unit......................................................................................................................1065
Removal and replacement: Drum motor (Y/M/C).......................................................................................................... 1070
Removal and replacement: Drum motor (K and ITB)...................................................................................................1075
Removal and replacement: Drum home sensor........................................................................................................... 1079
Removal and replacement: Developer motor (K/Y/M/C) .........................................................................................1083
Image transfer belt (ITB) ............................................................................................................................................................................1088
Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB)................................................................................................1088

xviii
 Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) engage motor ............................................................1095
ITB cleaning unit ..............................................................................................................................................................................................1099
Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) cleaning unit kit.........................................................1099
Color plane registration (CPR).................................................................................................................................................................1101
Removal and replacement: Color plane registration (CPR) unit..........................................................................1101
Removal and replacement: CPR sensor............................................................................................................................... 1112
Removal and replacement: CPR shutter drive assembly ....................................................................................... 1123
Removal and replacement: CPR shutter motor .............................................................................................................1135
Removal and replacement: CPR shutter sensor...........................................................................................................1148
Fuser unit................................................................................................................................................................................................................1161
Removal and replacement: Fuser unit ...................................................................................................................................1161
Removal and replacement: Fuser and exit drive assembly...................................................................................1164
Removal and replacement: Fuser motor.............................................................................................................................1168
Removal and replacement: Exit motor...................................................................................................................................1173
Removal and replacement: Fuser support bracket......................................................................................................1177
Environmental sensor, switch, and fan........................................................................................................................................................ 1179
Base sensor, switch, and fan................................................................................................................................................................... 1179
Removal and replacement: Outer temperature humidity sensor assembly, sensor and
holder ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1179
Removal and replacement: LVPS FDB fan assembly .................................................................................................1184
Removal and replacement: Fuser fan duct assembly...............................................................................................1189
Removal and replacement: LSU fan........................................................................................................................................1193
Removal and replacement: Developer fan assembly................................................................................................1199
Removal and replacement: Front door switch assembly.......................................................................................1203
Removal and replacement: Right door switch assembly.........................................................................................1217
Base control panel..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1221
Removal and replacement: Control panel..................................................................................................................................... 1221
1 Remove the middle upper cover.......................................................................................................................................... 1222
2 Remove the control panel ........................................................................................................................................................ 1222
3 Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................................................................................. 1223
PCAs.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1224
Main PCA ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................1224
Removal and replacement: Formatter..................................................................................................................................1224
Removal and replacement: Riser card and cradle......................................................................................................1230
Removal and replacement: Rivet-HDD ................................................................................................................................ 1234
Removal and replacement: Cradle ......................................................................................................................................... 1236
Removal and replacement: Hard disk 500GB ..................................................................................................................1241
Sub PCAs...............................................................................................................................................................................................................1245
Removal and replacement: Accelerator card (optional)..........................................................................................1245
Removal and replacement: USB hub PCA..........................................................................................................................1249
Removal and replacement: Island of data (IOD)............................................................................................................ 1256
Removal and replacement: Echo PCA and rivet ...........................................................................................................1260
Removal and replacement: Power key................................................................................................................................. 1265
Removal and replacement: Keyboard (Flow models) .................................................................................................1273
Removal and replacement: Fax card (optional)............................................................................................................. 1282
Power supply PCAs ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1285
Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply (HVPS)........................................................................ 1285
Removal and replacement: Low-voltage power supply (LVPS)...........................................................................1290
Removal and replacement: Fuser-drive board (FDB)................................................................................................. 1295

xix
 Integrated scanner asset (ISA)...................................................................................................................................................................................1300
Whole unit........................................................................................................................................................................................................................1300
200-Sheet ISA for z and dn bundles .................................................................................................................................................1300
Removal and replacement: Integrated scanner for z and dn bundle (5QK36A/5QK35A)..............1300
100-Sheet ISA ...................................................................................................................................................................................................1306
Removal and replacement: Integrated scanner for Flex-build (5QK34A) ...................................................1306
ADF (Automatic document feeder)...............................................................................................................................................................1309
200-Sheet ADF for dn bundle ................................................................................................................................................................1309
Removal and replacement: ADF (200sh)............................................................................................................................1309
Removal and replacement: ADF CMF panel..................................................................................................................... 1317
Removal and replacement: ADF white backing kit (200sh)....................................................................................1319
Removal and replacement: ADF pickup roller kit (200sh) ...................................................................................... 1324
Removal and replacement: ADF PCA (200sh) ................................................................................................................1329
Removal and replacement: ADF flat-flexible cable (200sh)..................................................................................1335
Removal and replacement: ADF power cable (200sh) .............................................................................................. 1341
Removal and replacement: ADF hinge kit (200sh)........................................................................................................1347
Removal and replacement: ADF hinge damper module (200sh)......................................................................1354
100-Sheet ADF...................................................................................................................................................................................................1361
Removal and replacement: ADF CMF panel (100sh)...................................................................................................1361
Removal and replacement: ADF pickup roller kit (100sh) .......................................................................................1363
Removal and replacement: ADF PCA (100sh) ................................................................................................................. 1367
Removal and replacement: ADF flat-flexible cable (100sh)....................................................................................1373
Removal and replacement: ADF power cable (100sh).............................................................................................. 1379
Removal and replacement: ADF hinge kit (100sh)........................................................................................................1384
Removal and replacement: ADF white backing kit (110sh).....................................................................................1388
Flatbed Scanner (Tarot).........................................................................................................................................................................................1394
Whole unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................................1394
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner whole unit........................................................................................1395
Covers ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1402
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner rear cover........................................................................................1402
PCA, harness, and sensor........................................................................................................................................................................1404
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner PCA assembly..............................................................................1404
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner FFC 50 pin.......................................................................................1408
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner FFC 68 pin........................................................................................ 1413
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner discrete power cable...............................................................1418
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner flatbed open sensor................................................................ 1422
Flatbed Scanner (CIS)............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1425
Whole unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1425
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner whole unit........................................................................................ 1425
Covers .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1432
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner rear cover........................................................................................ 1432
PCA, harness, and sensor........................................................................................................................................................................1434
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner PCA assembly..............................................................................1434
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner discrete power cable...............................................................1437
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner FFC 68 pin........................................................................................ 1441
Input device (workgroup) .................................................................................................................................................................................................1445
DCF device (workgroup)........................................................................................................................................................................................1445
Covers ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1445

xx
 Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover ............................................................................................1445
Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover..............................................................................................1448
Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) left cover................................................................................................1450
Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door............................................................................................... 1452
Removal and replacement: Tray 4, 5 CMF panels........................................................................................................1454
Removal and replacement: Caster wheel ..........................................................................................................................1457
Removal and replacement: Holder wheel kit...................................................................................................................1459
Unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................1462
Removal and replacement: Tray 4, 5 cassettes.............................................................................................................1462
Roller........................................................................................................................................................................................................................1464
Removal and replacement: DCF roller kit ..........................................................................................................................1464
Sensor .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1467
Removal and replacement: Tray 4, 5 paper size sensors....................................................................................... 1467
Removal and replacement: Tray 4 pickup assembly ..................................................................................................1470
Removal and replacement: Tray 4 paper empty and stack height sensors ..............................................1475
Removal and replacement: DCF feed 4, 5 sensor ........................................................................................................1479
Removal and replacement: Tray 5 pickup assembly .................................................................................................1484
Removal and replacement: Tray 5 paper empty and stack height sensors .............................................1490
Motor .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................1494
Removal and replacement: DCF pickup drive assembly........................................................................................1494
Removal and replacement: Tray 4 pickup motor ...........................................................................................................1497
Removal and replacement: Tray 5 pickup motor ..........................................................................................................1499
Removal and replacement: DCF feed drive assembly.............................................................................................1502
Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) feed motor............................................................................................1504
PCA and harness............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1507
Removal and replacement: Tray heater.............................................................................................................................. 1507
Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA.............................................................................................................. 1511
Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door open switch holder assembly ........................ 1513
Removal and replacement: DCF IF harness ..................................................................................................................... 1516
Removal and replacement: DCF motor harness........................................................................................................... 1519
Removal and replacement: DCF sensor harness........................................................................................................ 1522
Removal and replacement: DCF size harness...............................................................................................................1528
HCI (workgroup) .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1532
Covers .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1532
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) right cover ................................................................................................... 1532
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) rear cover ....................................................................................................1534
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) left cover.......................................................................................................1536
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) right door......................................................................................................1538
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) front CMF panel.......................................................................................1540
Removal and replacement: Caster wheel ......................................................................................................................... 1542
Removal and replacement: Holder wheel kit...................................................................................................................1544
Unit .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................1547
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) unit .....................................................................................................................1547
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) cassette........................................................................................................1550
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) pickup assembly..................................................................................... 1552
Roller........................................................................................................................................................................................................................1556
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) roller kit..........................................................................................................1556
Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1559
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) feed sensor ................................................................................................1559

xxi
 Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) paper empty and stack height sensors.................................1565
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) knockup home and shift tray end sensors.......................... 1570
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift tray empty and home sensors ..........................................1576
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift tray level sensor 1 and 2........................................................ 1579
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) tray open sensor ....................................................................................1583
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) gate solenoid home sensor............................................................1586
Removal and replacement: HCI right door open switch holder assembly................................................1589
Motor .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................1593
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift and lift motors ..............................................................................1593
Removal and replacement: Shift plate.................................................................................................................................1596
Removal and replacement: Knockup plate assembly ...............................................................................................1601
Removal and replacement: Paper gate...............................................................................................................................1605
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) feed motor drive assembly.............................................................1608
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) pickup motor drive assembly.........................................................1610
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift gate solenoid..................................................................................1613
PCA and harness............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1617
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) PCA.................................................................................................................... 1617
Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA.........................................................................................................1620
Removal and replacement: HCI main IF harness......................................................................................................... 1624
Removal and replacement: HCI motor IF (pick and feed).......................................................................................1626
Removal and replacement: HCI inner drawer..................................................................................................................1631
Output device ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................1634
Stapler/stacker and (or) Booklet finisher .................................................................................................................................................1634
Cover .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................1634
Removal and replacement: Front door ................................................................................................................................1634
Removal and replacement: Caster cover..........................................................................................................................1636
Removal and replacement: Left lower cover...................................................................................................................1638
Removal and replacement: Left upper cover..................................................................................................................1646
Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray...........................................................................................................1656
Removal and replacement: Top output tray.....................................................................................................................1659
Removal and replacement: Main output tray...................................................................................................................1661
Removal and replacement: Rear cover...............................................................................................................................1663
Removal and replacement: Front cover..............................................................................................................................1666
Removal and replacement: Punch cover ........................................................................................................................... 1670
Removal and replacement: Top cover...................................................................................................................................1672
Removal and replacement: Top door .....................................................................................................................................1675
Removal and replacement: Right upper cover .............................................................................................................. 1678
Removal and replacement: Front lower left cover .......................................................................................................1681
Removal and replacement: Front lower right cover ...................................................................................................1686
Removal and replacement: Shaft hinge - door ..............................................................................................................1688
Removal and replacement: Caster..........................................................................................................................................1691
Removal and replacement: Caster fix nut.........................................................................................................................1694
Removal and replacement: Booklet front cover ........................................................................................................... 1697
Bridge unit (or) Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics .....................................................................................................................1699
Removal and replacement: Bridge unit (or) Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics.........................................1699
Removal and replacement: Bridge door sensor........................................................................................................... 1703
Removal and replacement: Bridge entrance sensor................................................................................................ 1709
Removal and replacement: Bridge exit sensor............................................................................................................... 1714

xxii
 Removal and replacement: Bridge motor............................................................................................................................1721
Entrance unit....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1727
Removal and replacement: Entrance sensor .................................................................................................................. 1727
Removal and replacement: Entrance motor assembly............................................................................................1742
Removal and replacement: Entrance motor.....................................................................................................................1746
Punch unit............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1750
Removal and replacement: Punch unit................................................................................................................................ 1750
Tray diverter unit ..............................................................................................................................................................................................1752
Removal and replacement: Top jam cover assembly ................................................................................................1752
Removal and replacement: Tray diverter ........................................................................................................................... 1756
Removal and replacement: Top door open switch ...................................................................................................... 1760
Removal and replacement: Tray diverter cam ............................................................................................................... 1764
Removal and replacement: Tray diverter home sensor ...........................................................................................1772
Top exit unit.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1780
Removal and replacement: Top exit sensor..................................................................................................................... 1780
Removal and replacement: Exit motor assembly ........................................................................................................ 1790
Removal and replacement: Exit motor................................................................................................................................. 1793
Top output tray unit ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1796
Removal and replacement: Top lower feed assembly.............................................................................................. 1796
Removal and replacement: Tray extension.......................................................................................................................1805
Removal and replacement: Top output tray paper full sensor...........................................................................1808
Main exit unit .......................................................................................................................................................................................................1815
Removal and replacement: Main exit sensor...................................................................................................................1815
Removal and replacement: Main exit cam motor assembly................................................................................ 1822
Removal and replacement: Main exit cam home sensor........................................................................................1827
Removal and replacement: Main exit cam motor ........................................................................................................1832
Removal and replacement: Front door switch ............................................................................................................... 1837
Paddle unit...........................................................................................................................................................................................................1843
Removal and replacement: Paddle.........................................................................................................................................1843
Removal and replacement: Paddle motor assembly ................................................................................................1853
Removal and replacement: Paddle home sensor........................................................................................................1858
Removal and replacement: Paddle motor.........................................................................................................................1864
End fence unit.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1870
Removal and replacement: End fence home sensor ................................................................................................ 1870
Removal and replacement: End fence motor assembly.........................................................................................1884
Removal and replacement: End fence motor..................................................................................................................1889
Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch guide.....................................................1895
Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch lower guide.......................................1905
Tamper unit ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................1914
Removal and replacement: Front tamper...........................................................................................................................1914
Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor......................................................................................... 1925
Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor .......................................................................................................... 1937
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper........................................................................................................................... 1947
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor.......................................................................................... 1957
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor ...........................................................................................................1968
Stapler unit..........................................................................................................................................................................................................1980
Removal and replacement: Stapler unit .............................................................................................................................1980
Removal and replacement: Staple cartridge..................................................................................................................1986
Removal and replacement: Stapler front sensor.........................................................................................................1988

xxiii
 Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-front and mid-rear sensors ...........................................................1996
Removal and replacement: Manual staple sensor ....................................................................................................2003
Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor ..................................................................................................2009
Ejector unit .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2017
Removal and replacement: Ejector unit.............................................................................................................................. 2017
Removal and replacement: Ejector sensor......................................................................................................................2031
Removal and replacement: Ejector 1 home sensor....................................................................................................2047
Removal and replacement: Ejector 1 motor sensor ..................................................................................................2062
Removal and replacement: Ejector 2 motor sensor ..................................................................................................2077
Main output tray unit................................................................................................................................................................................... 2092
Removal and replacement: Main output tray................................................................................................................. 2092
Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack sensor .................................................................2095
Removal and replacement: Main output tray lower limit sensor.......................................................................2107
Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor sensor.................................................................................2119
Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor drive assembly ............................................................ 2123
Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch.....................................................................2127
Paper holding unit ...........................................................................................................................................................................................2137
Removal and replacement: Front and rear paper holding sensor....................................................................2137
Removal and replacement: Paper holding home sensor.......................................................................................2150
Removal and replacement: Paper holding motor drive assembly...................................................................2163
Buffer unit .............................................................................................................................................................................................................2176
Removal and replacement: Buffer solenoid assembly.............................................................................................2176
Removal and replacement: Buffer motor ..........................................................................................................................2183
Booklet finisher (only) ..............................................................................................................................................................................................2187
Booklet maker...................................................................................................................................................................................................2188
Removal and replacement: Booklet maker ......................................................................................................................2188
Removal and replacement: Harness guide......................................................................................................................2198
Booklet entrance unit ..................................................................................................................................................................................2210
Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance unit......................................................................................................2210
Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance sensor............................................................................................. 2223
Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly...................................................2237
Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance motor.................................................................................................2241
Booklet paddle unit ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2252
Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle home sensor................................................................................... 2252
Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle motor assembly............................................................................ 2256
Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle motor ..................................................................................................... 2261
Booklet end fence unit............................................................................................................................................................................... 2266
Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence home sensor............................................................................ 2266
Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence motor..............................................................................................2279
Booklet presser unit ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 2291
Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor.................................................................................. 2291
Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper...................................................................................................................2296
Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper home sensor................................................................................... 2313
Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper motor .................................................................................................... 2331
Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper sensor................................................................................................. 2349
Booklet stapler unit.......................................................................................................................................................................................2367
Removal and replacement: Booklet stapler.....................................................................................................................2367
Removal and replacement: Booklet staple cartridge..............................................................................................2384
Booklet fold unit...............................................................................................................................................................................................2387

xxiv
 Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade assembly.................................................................................2387
Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade home sensor .......................................................................2399
Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly ................................................................ 2405
Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor............................................................................................2411
Removal and replacement: Booklet blade home sensor ........................................................................................ 2417
Removal and replacement: Booklet blade motor ....................................................................................................... 2434
Removal and replacement: Booklet fold motor assembly ................................................................................... 2440
Removal and replacement: Booklet fold motor............................................................................................................ 2444
Booklet diverter unit.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2449
Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter.................................................................................................................. 2449
Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter home sensor................................................................................. 2466
Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor assembly .......................................................................... 2473
Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor...................................................................................................2479
Booklet output tray unit ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2485
Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray.......................................................................................................... 2485
Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray sensor........................................................................................ 2488
PCA .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2496
Removal and replacement: Main PCA................................................................................................................................. 2496
Removal and replacement: PCA.............................................................................................................................................. 2502
Miscellaneous parts......................................................................................................................................................................................2512
Removal and replacement: Finisher mounting brackets........................................................................................ 2513
Inner finisher ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2515
Whole unit and rail.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2516
Removal and replacement: Inner finisher ......................................................................................................................... 2516
Removal and replacement: Guide rails............................................................................................................................... 2520
Cover .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................2524
Removal and replacement: Front cover assembly .....................................................................................................2524
Removal and replacement: Top cover assembly ........................................................................................................ 2528
Removal and replacement: Middle cover assembly................................................................................................. 2534
Removal and replacement: Punch cover assembly..................................................................................................2540
Removal and replacement: Output tray assembly.................................................................................................... 2544
Removal and replacement: PCA cover...............................................................................................................................2548
Removal and replacement: Finisher sub stay assembly........................................................................................ 2551
Removal and replacement: Rear cover - base.............................................................................................................. 2562
Removal and replacement: Rear cover - punch ...........................................................................................................2566
Removal and replacement: Lock release handle........................................................................................................2569
Removal and replacement: Main interface harness .................................................................................................2572
Removal and replacement: Exit bin full...............................................................................................................................2583
Punch unit............................................................................................................................................................................................................2586
Removal and replacement: Hole punch.............................................................................................................................2586
Removal and replacement: Punch waste full sensor............................................................................................... 2592
Entrance unit..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2602
Removal and replacement: Entrance sensor ................................................................................................................ 2602
Removal and replacement: Entrance motor assembly ...........................................................................................2607
Removal and replacement: Entrance motor....................................................................................................................2618
Removal and replacement: Entrance motor timing belt ........................................................................................ 2629
Removal and replacement: Entrance roller.....................................................................................................................2635
Removal and replacement: Middle roller...........................................................................................................................2646
Exit unit..................................................................................................................................................................................................................2654

xxv
 Removal and replacement: Exit roller assembly .........................................................................................................2654
Removal and replacement: Exit sensor .............................................................................................................................2663
Removal and replacement: Exit sensor actuator ........................................................................................................2673
Removal and replacement: Exit motor assembly .......................................................................................................2683
Removal and replacement: Exit motor................................................................................................................................2688
Paper support unit........................................................................................................................................................................................2693
Removal and replacement: Rear paper support.........................................................................................................2693
Removal and replacement: Paper support home sensor.......................................................................................2701
Removal and replacement: Paper support motor assembly ............................................................................. 2709
Removal and replacement: Paper support motor........................................................................................................2717
Removal and replacement: Front paper support.........................................................................................................2726
Paddle unit...........................................................................................................................................................................................................2733
Removal and replacement: Main paddle assembly...................................................................................................2733
Removal and replacement: Sub paddle assembly .....................................................................................................2743
Removal and replacement: Main paddle home sensor.......................................................................................... 2750
Removal and replacement: Main paddle motor assembly ................................................................................... 2757
End fence unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................2761
Removal and replacement: End fence sensor ................................................................................................................2761
Tamper unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2772
Removal and replacement: Front tamper.......................................................................................................................... 2772
Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor ..........................................................................................................2779
Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor......................................................................................... 2787
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper...........................................................................................................................2795
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor ..........................................................................................................2802
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor.........................................................................................2809
Stapler unit..........................................................................................................................................................................................................2816
Removal and replacement: Stapler assembly...............................................................................................................2816
Removal and replacement: Staple cartridge.................................................................................................................. 2821
Removal and replacement: Stapler position sensor.................................................................................................2824
Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor ..................................................................................................2836
Ejector unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2845
Removal and replacement: Ejector ....................................................................................................................................... 2845
Output tray and paper holding unit ..................................................................................................................................................2854
Removal and replacement: Output tray motor assembly ....................................................................................2854
Removal and replacement: Output tray motor.............................................................................................................2860
Removal and replacement: Output tray motor sensor............................................................................................2867
Removal and replacement: Output tray lower limit switch assembly...........................................................2874
Removal and replacement: Output tray top of stack sensor kit .......................................................................2881
Removal and replacement: Paper holding actuator................................................................................................. 2892
Removal and replacement: Paper holding kit ................................................................................................................2903
Removal and replacement: Paper holding solenoid ..................................................................................................2914
Removal and replacement: Paper holding sensor..................................................................................................... 2925
PCA and switch ...............................................................................................................................................................................................2936
Removal and replacement: PCA..............................................................................................................................................2936
Removal and replacement: Rear joint PCA......................................................................................................................2948
Removal and replacement: Front cover switch............................................................................................................2958
Removal and replacement: Top cover switch ................................................................................................................2969
Removal and replacement: Docking sensor ...................................................................................................................2974
Stacker or bridge unit with print quality diagnostics.......................................................................................................................2978

xxvi
 Stacker assembly with print quality diagnostics....................................................................................................................2978
HP LaserJet Managed E826, E82650, E82660, E82670, HP Color LaserJet Managed E877,
E87740, E87750, E87760, E87770 - Removal and replacement: Stacker Unit with PQ
diagnostics ..............................................................................................................................................................................................2978
Bridge unit with print quality diagnostics ....................................................................................................................................2983
HP LaserJet Managed E826, E82650, E82660, E82670, HP Color LaserJet Managed E877,
E87740, E87750, E87760, E87770 - Removal and replacement: Bridge unit with PQ
Diagnostics.............................................................................................................................................................................................2983

7 Parts and diagrams ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................2991

Base printer ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................2991
Covers................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2991
Parts and diagrams: Covers...................................................................................................................................................................2991
Tray 1...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2994
Parts and diagrams: Tray 1 ......................................................................................................................................................................2994
Tray 2, 3.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................2995
Parts and diagrams: Tray 2, 3 ................................................................................................................................................................2995
Registration and loop sensors and duplex .............................................................................................................................................2997
Parts and diagrams: Registration and loop sensors and duplex.................................................................................2997
Exit unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3000
Parts and diagrams: Exit unit (1 of 2)................................................................................................................................................ 3000
Parts and diagrams: Exit unit (2 of 2)................................................................................................................................................3002
Toner cartridge...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3002
Parts and diagrams: Toner......................................................................................................................................................................3002
Duct assembly............................................................................................................................................................................................................3003
Parts and diagrams: Duct assembly ...............................................................................................................................................3004
Toner collection unit (TCU)..................................................................................................................................................................................3005
Parts and diagrams: Toner collection unit...................................................................................................................................3005
Laser scanner unit (LSU)......................................................................................................................................................................................3005
Parts and diagrams: laser scanner unit....................................................................................................................................... 3006
Developer...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3006
Parts and diagrams: Developer ......................................................................................................................................................... 3006
Drum.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3008
Parts and diagrams: Drum..................................................................................................................................................................... 3008
ITB ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3009
Parts and diagrams: ITB............................................................................................................................................................................3009
CPR........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3011
Parts and diagrams: CPR...........................................................................................................................................................................3011
Fuser ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3012
Parts and diagrams: Fuser ......................................................................................................................................................................3012
Sensor and fan ............................................................................................................................................................................................................3013
Parts and diagrams: Sensor and fan ...............................................................................................................................................3013
PCA.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3014
Parts and diagrams: PCA..........................................................................................................................................................................3014
ADF / Image scanner assembly.................................................................................................................................................................................3016
Image scanner assembly (ISA)........................................................................................................................................................................3016
Parts and diagrams: ISA ............................................................................................................................................................................3016
200sh ADF ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................3018
Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (1 of 2)..........................................................................................................................................3018

xxvii
 Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (2 of 2).........................................................................................................................................3019
100sh ADF ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................3020
Parts and diagrams: 100sh ADF (1 of 2)..........................................................................................................................................3020
Parts and diagrams: 100sh ADF (2 of 2)..........................................................................................................................................3021
Tarot platen.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................3021
Parts and diagrams: Tarot platen........................................................................................................................................................3021
CIS platen ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3022
Parts and diagrams: CIS platen ..........................................................................................................................................................3023
Input devices........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3024
Workgroup Dual cassette feeder (DCF, Tray 4, 5)..............................................................................................................................3025
Parts and diagrams: DCF (1 of 2).........................................................................................................................................................3025
Parts and diagrams: DCF (2 of 2) ........................................................................................................................................................ 3027
Workgroup High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4) .............................................................................................................................3029
Parts and diagrams: HCI (1 of 2)...........................................................................................................................................................3029
Parts and diagrams: HCI (2 of 2)...........................................................................................................................................................3031
Output device .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................3032
Inner finisher ................................................................................................................................................................................................................3033
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (1 of 5)....................................................................................................................................3033
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (2 of 5)...................................................................................................................................3034
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (3 of 5)...................................................................................................................................3036
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (4 of 5)...................................................................................................................................3038
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (5 of 5)...................................................................................................................................3040
Stapler/Stacker finisher.......................................................................................................................................................................................3042
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4) ..........................................................................................................3042
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4) .........................................................................................................3044
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4) .........................................................................................................3046
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4) ......................................................................................................... 3047
Booklet finisher ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................3049
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (1 of 5)..............................................................................................................................3049
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (2 of 5).............................................................................................................................. 3051
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (3 of 5).............................................................................................................................3053
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (4 of 5).............................................................................................................................3055
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (5 of 5).............................................................................................................................3056
Print Quality Diagnostics output devices ...............................................................................................................................................3058
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher or Booklet finisher with Print Quality Diagnostics ...3058
Parts and diagrams: Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics .......................................................................................3059
Alphabetical parts list.......................................................................................................................................................................................................3060
Base printer ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................2991
Covers ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................2991
Parts and diagrams: Covers........................................................................................................................................................2991
Tray 1........................................................................................................................................................................................................................2994
Parts and diagrams: Tray 1...........................................................................................................................................................2994
Tray 2, 3..................................................................................................................................................................................................................2995
Parts and diagrams: Tray 2, 3.....................................................................................................................................................2995
Registration and loop sensors and duplex ..................................................................................................................................2997
Parts and diagrams: Registration and loop sensors and duplex......................................................................2997
Exit unit................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3000
Parts and diagrams: Exit unit (1 of 2) .................................................................................................................................... 3000

xxviii
 Parts and diagrams: Exit unit (2 of 2).....................................................................................................................................3002
Toner cartridge................................................................................................................................................................................................3002
Parts and diagrams: Toner...........................................................................................................................................................3002
Duct assembly.................................................................................................................................................................................................3003
Parts and diagrams: Duct assembly....................................................................................................................................3004
Toner collection unit (TCU) ......................................................................................................................................................................3005
Parts and diagrams: Toner collection unit........................................................................................................................3005
Laser scanner unit (LSU) ..........................................................................................................................................................................3005
Parts and diagrams: laser scanner unit ........................................................................................................................... 3006
Developer........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3006
Parts and diagrams: Developer .............................................................................................................................................. 3006
Drum ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3008
Parts and diagrams: Drum.......................................................................................................................................................... 3008
ITB .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................3009
Parts and diagrams: ITB ................................................................................................................................................................3009
CPR ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................3011
Parts and diagrams: CPR................................................................................................................................................................3011
Fuser........................................................................................................................................................................................................................3012
Parts and diagrams: Fuser ...........................................................................................................................................................3012
Sensor and fan.................................................................................................................................................................................................3013
Parts and diagrams: Sensor and fan ....................................................................................................................................3013
PCA ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................3014
Parts and diagrams: PCA...............................................................................................................................................................3014
ADF / Image scanner assembly......................................................................................................................................................................3016
Image scanner assembly (ISA).............................................................................................................................................................3016
Parts and diagrams: ISA.................................................................................................................................................................3016
200sh ADF ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3018
Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (1 of 2)...............................................................................................................................3018
Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (2 of 2)..............................................................................................................................3019
100sh ADF ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3020
Parts and diagrams: 100sh ADF (1 of 2)...............................................................................................................................3020
Parts and diagrams: 100sh ADF (2 of 2)...............................................................................................................................3021
Tarot platen .........................................................................................................................................................................................................3021
Parts and diagrams: Tarot platen.............................................................................................................................................3021
CIS platen............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3022
Parts and diagrams: CIS platen ...............................................................................................................................................3023
Input devices................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3024
Workgroup Dual cassette feeder (DCF, Tray 4, 5)...................................................................................................................3025
Parts and diagrams: DCF (1 of 2)..............................................................................................................................................3025
Parts and diagrams: DCF (2 of 2)............................................................................................................................................. 3027
Workgroup High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4)..................................................................................................................3029
Parts and diagrams: HCI (1 of 2)................................................................................................................................................3029
Parts and diagrams: HCI (2 of 2)................................................................................................................................................3031
Output device..............................................................................................................................................................................................................3032
Inner finisher.....................................................................................................................................................................................................3033
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (1 of 5) ........................................................................................................................3033
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (2 of 5)........................................................................................................................3034
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (3 of 5) .......................................................................................................................3036

xxix
 Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (4 of 5) .......................................................................................................................3038
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (5 of 5) .......................................................................................................................3040
Stapler/Stacker finisher ...........................................................................................................................................................................3042
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)...............................................................................................3042
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)..............................................................................................3044
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)..............................................................................................3046
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4).............................................................................................. 3047
Booklet finisher...............................................................................................................................................................................................3049
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (1 of 5) ..................................................................................................................3049
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (2 of 5) .................................................................................................................. 3051
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (3 of 5) .................................................................................................................3053
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (4 of 5) .................................................................................................................3055
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (5 of 5) .................................................................................................................3056
Print Quality Diagnostics output devices....................................................................................................................................3058
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher or Booklet finisher with Print Quality
Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................................................................3058
Parts and diagrams: Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics ............................................................................3059
Numerical parts list............................................................................................................................................................................................................3082
Base printer ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................2991
Covers ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................2991
Parts and diagrams: Covers........................................................................................................................................................2991
Tray 1........................................................................................................................................................................................................................2994
Parts and diagrams: Tray 1...........................................................................................................................................................2994
Tray 2, 3..................................................................................................................................................................................................................2995
Parts and diagrams: Tray 2, 3.....................................................................................................................................................2995
Registration and loop sensors and duplex ..................................................................................................................................2997
Parts and diagrams: Registration and loop sensors and duplex......................................................................2997
Exit unit................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3000
Parts and diagrams: Exit unit (1 of 2) .................................................................................................................................... 3000
Parts and diagrams: Exit unit (2 of 2).....................................................................................................................................3002
Toner cartridge................................................................................................................................................................................................3002
Parts and diagrams: Toner...........................................................................................................................................................3002
Duct assembly.................................................................................................................................................................................................3003
Parts and diagrams: Duct assembly....................................................................................................................................3004
Toner collection unit (TCU) ......................................................................................................................................................................3005
Parts and diagrams: Toner collection unit........................................................................................................................3005
Laser scanner unit (LSU) ..........................................................................................................................................................................3005
Parts and diagrams: laser scanner unit ........................................................................................................................... 3006
Developer........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3006
Parts and diagrams: Developer .............................................................................................................................................. 3006
Drum ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3008
Parts and diagrams: Drum.......................................................................................................................................................... 3008
ITB .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................3009
Parts and diagrams: ITB ................................................................................................................................................................3009
CPR ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................3011
Parts and diagrams: CPR................................................................................................................................................................3011
Fuser........................................................................................................................................................................................................................3012
Parts and diagrams: Fuser ...........................................................................................................................................................3012

xxx
 Sensor and fan.................................................................................................................................................................................................3013
Parts and diagrams: Sensor and fan ....................................................................................................................................3013
PCA ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................3014
Parts and diagrams: PCA...............................................................................................................................................................3014
ADF / Image scanner assembly......................................................................................................................................................................3016
Image scanner assembly (ISA).............................................................................................................................................................3016
Parts and diagrams: ISA.................................................................................................................................................................3016
200sh ADF ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3018
Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (1 of 2)...............................................................................................................................3018
Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (2 of 2)..............................................................................................................................3019
100sh ADF ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3020
Parts and diagrams: 100sh ADF (1 of 2)...............................................................................................................................3020
Parts and diagrams: 100sh ADF (2 of 2)...............................................................................................................................3021
Tarot platen .........................................................................................................................................................................................................3021
Parts and diagrams: Tarot platen.............................................................................................................................................3021
CIS platen............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3022
Parts and diagrams: CIS platen ...............................................................................................................................................3023
Input devices................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3024
Workgroup Dual cassette feeder (DCF, Tray 4, 5)...................................................................................................................3025
Parts and diagrams: DCF (1 of 2)..............................................................................................................................................3025
Parts and diagrams: DCF (2 of 2)............................................................................................................................................. 3027
Workgroup High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4)..................................................................................................................3029
Parts and diagrams: HCI (1 of 2)................................................................................................................................................3029
Parts and diagrams: HCI (2 of 2)................................................................................................................................................3031
Output device..............................................................................................................................................................................................................3032
Inner finisher.....................................................................................................................................................................................................3033
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (1 of 5) ........................................................................................................................3033
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (2 of 5)........................................................................................................................3034
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (3 of 5) .......................................................................................................................3036
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (4 of 5) .......................................................................................................................3038
Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (5 of 5) .......................................................................................................................3040
Stapler/Stacker finisher ...........................................................................................................................................................................3042
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)...............................................................................................3042
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)..............................................................................................3044
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)..............................................................................................3046
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4).............................................................................................. 3047
Booklet finisher...............................................................................................................................................................................................3049
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (1 of 5) ..................................................................................................................3049
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (2 of 5) .................................................................................................................. 3051
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (3 of 5) .................................................................................................................3053
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (4 of 5) .................................................................................................................3055
Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (5 of 5) .................................................................................................................3056
Print Quality Diagnostics output devices....................................................................................................................................3058
Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher or Booklet finisher with Print Quality
Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................................................................3058
Parts and diagrams: Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics ............................................................................3059

8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams.......................................................................................................................................3105

xxxi
 Base printer ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................3105
EMR diagrams: Tray 1...............................................................................................................................................................................................3105
EMR diagrams: Tray 2/3.........................................................................................................................................................................................3106
EMR diagrams: Registration and loop sensors....................................................................................................................................3108
EMR diagrams: Exit unit.........................................................................................................................................................................................3109
EMR diagrams: Toner cartridge......................................................................................................................................................................... 3111
EMR diagrams: Toner Duct................................................................................................................................................................................... 3112
EMR diagrams: Toner collection unit ............................................................................................................................................................3113
EMR diagrams: LSU ...................................................................................................................................................................................................3114
EMR diagrams: Developer....................................................................................................................................................................................3115
EMR diagrams: Drum ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 3117
EMR diagrams: ITB.....................................................................................................................................................................................................3118
EMR diagrams: CPR ..................................................................................................................................................................................................3119
EMR diagrams: Fuser..............................................................................................................................................................................................3120
EMR diagrams: Sensor and fan........................................................................................................................................................................ 3121
EMR diagrams: PCA ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3123
Input devices.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................3131
EMR diagrams: Input devices.............................................................................................................................................................................3131
Output devices ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3132
EMR diagrams: Inner finisher............................................................................................................................................................................ 3132
EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher .................................................................................................. 3142

Appendix A Certificate of Volatility.....................................................................................................................................................................................3161

Certificate of Volatility .......................................................................................................................................................................................................3161

Glossary of terms ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................3164

Index............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3174

xxxii
List of videos

View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the number of paper jams............................. 385

View a video of how to clear a jam in the document feeder................................................................................................................................385

View a video of how to clear a jam in tray 1...................................................................................................................................................................... 387

View a video of how to clear a jam in tray 2, tray 3, and the optional trays...............................................................................................388

View a video of how to clear a jam in the output bin.................................................................................................................................................390

View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area.............................................................................................................390

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.................................................................................................... 392

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users..................................................................................................................................392

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).......................................................393

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP] search).............................393

View a video of how to access WISE for HP channel partners.........................................................................................................................400

View a video of removing and replacing the rear upper cover..........................................................................................................................586

View a video on how to replace the rear lower cover.............................................................................................................................................. 589

View a video of removing and replacing the controller cover............................................................................................................................ 593

View a video of removing and replacing the exit rear cover................................................................................................................................595

View a video of removing and replacing the left top cover.................................................................................................................................. 598

View a video on how to replace the left cover...............................................................................................................................................................604

View a video of removing and replacing the middle upper cover................................................................................................................... 608

View a video of removing and replacing the right upper cover..........................................................................................................................610

View a video of removing and replacing the right rear cover..............................................................................................................................618

View a video of removing and replacing the right front cover............................................................................................................................ 621

View a video of removing and replacing the drum unit...........................................................................................................................................623

View a video of removing and replacing the HIP cover...........................................................................................................................................630

View a video of removing and replacing the middle left cover.......................................................................................................................... 632

View a video of removing and replacing the exit cover stacker........................................................................................................................634

View a video of removing and replacing the inner cover.......................................................................................................................................636

View a video of removing and replacing the front lower cover..........................................................................................................................647

View a video of removing and replacing the front cover....................................................................................................................................... 650

View a video of removing and replacing the right door...........................................................................................................................................662

xxxiii
 View a video of removing and replacing the right door front link....................................................................................................................668

Video showing how to remove and replace right door front damper........................................................................................................... 673

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 1 clutch..................................................................................................................................... 704

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 1 roller kit...................................................................................................................................711

View a video of removing and replacing Tray 2.............................................................................................................................................................. 714

View a video of removing and replacing Tray 3.............................................................................................................................................................. 714

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 roller kit................................................................................................................................ 724

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 roller kit................................................................................................................................ 724

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 empty sensor.................................................................................................................. 728

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 stack height sensor....................................................................................................728

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 pickup drive assembly............................................................................................... 741

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 pickup motor.................................................................................................................... 745

View a video of removing and replacing the 2cnd pickup assembly.............................................................................................................750

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 empty sensor...................................................................................................................757

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 stack height sensor.................................................................................................... 757

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 open and paper size sensor................................................................................ 765

View a video of removing and replacing the tray 3 pickup drive assembly..............................................................................................769

View a video of removing and replacing the tray 3 pickup motor.....................................................................................................................773

View a video of removing and replacing the tray heaters..................................................................................................................................... 777

View a video of removing and replacing the feed drive assembly..................................................................................................................780

View a video of removing and replacing the feed motor........................................................................................................................................ 785

View a video of removing and replacing the feed 2 sensor................................................................................................................................. 790

View a video of removing and replacing the feed 3 sensor................................................................................................................................. 796

View a video of removing and replacing the registration unit........................................................................................................................... 803

View a video of removing and replacing the registration sensor...................................................................................................................... 811

View a video of removing and replacing the paper dust holder........................................................................................................................ 819

View a video of removing and replacing the registration drive assembly................................................................................................ 822

View a video of removing and replacing the registration and Tray 1 motor.............................................................................................. 827

View a video of removing and replacing the registration clutch.......................................................................................................................831

View a video of removing and replacing the T2 unit..................................................................................................................................................838

View a video of removing and replacing the loop sensor 1..................................................................................................................................840

View a video of removing and replacing the loop sensor 2.................................................................................................................................840

xxxiv
View a video of removing and replacing the loop sensor actuator................................................................................................................845

View a video of removing and replacing the right door exit assembly........................................................................................................848

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser out sensor........................................................................................................................... 851

View a video of removing and replacing the exit unit...............................................................................................................................................854

View a video of removing and replacing the output bin 1 full sensor.............................................................................................................857

View a video of removing and replacing the actuator-bin full exit................................................................................................................... 861

View a video of removing and replacing the lever-actuator bin full exit..................................................................................................... 863

View a video of removing and replacing the actuator bin full exit spring TS.......................................................................................... 863

View a video of removing and replacing the exit stack guide............................................................................................................................ 866

View a video of removing and replacing the duplex assembly......................................................................................................................... 869

View a video of removing and replacing the duplex jam sensor.......................................................................................................................875

View a video of removing and replacing the duplex motor................................................................................................................................... 879

View a video of removing and replacing the toner dispense and duct motor assembly (Y, M)................................................. 885

View a video of removing and replacing the toner dispense and duct motor assembly (C, K).................................................. 892

View a video of removing and replacing the toner dispense motors...........................................................................................................902

View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges using the control panel..................................................................908

View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges by disassembling................................................................................. 911

View a video of removing and replacing the toner CRUM module assembly.......................................................................................... 917

View a video of removing and replacing the toner duct unit................................................................................................................................951

View a video of removing and replacing the toner dispense and duct motor (Y, M)..........................................................................965

View a video of removing and replacing the toner dispense and duct motor (C, K)............................................................................ 971

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit..................................................................................................................980

View a video of removing and replacing the TCU detection sensor..............................................................................................................982

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit drive assembly............................................................................ 999

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit motor...................................................................................................1011

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit full sensor......................................................................................1023

View a video of removing and replacing the LSU...................................................................................................................................................... 1038

View a video of removing and replacing the drum unit.........................................................................................................................................1045

View a video of removing and replacing the developer powder.................................................................................................................... 1048

View a video of removing and replacing the drum and developer drive assembly......................................................................... 1060

View a video of removing and replacing the developer unit.............................................................................................................................1065

View a video of removing and replacing the drum motor Y/M/C.................................................................................................................... 1070

xxxv
 View a video of removing and replacing the drum motor K and ITB............................................................................................................ 1075

View a video of removing and replacing the drum home sensor...................................................................................................................1079

View a video of removing and replacing the developer motor Y/M/C........................................................................................................ 1083

View a video of removing and replacing the developer motor K................................................................................................................... 1083

View a video of removing and replacing the ITB........................................................................................................................................................1088

View a video of removing and replacing the ITB engage motor.....................................................................................................................1095

View a video of removing and replacing the ITB cleaning unit kit.................................................................................................................1099

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR unit.............................................................................................................................................1101

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR front sensor......................................................................................................................... 1112

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR center sensor.....................................................................................................................1112

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR rear sensor...........................................................................................................................1112

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR shutter drive assembly.............................................................................................. 1123

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR shutter motor.................................................................................................................... 1135

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR shutter sensor..................................................................................................................1148

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser unit...........................................................................................................................................1161

View a video of removing and replacing the outer temperature humidity sensor assembly.................................................... 1179

View a video of removing and replacing the LVPS / FDB fan assembly.....................................................................................................1184

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser fan duct assembly...................................................................................................... 1189

View a video of removing and replacing the LSU fan.............................................................................................................................................. 1193

View a video of removing and replacing the developer fan assembly....................................................................................................... 1199

View a video of removing and replacing the front door switch.......................................................................................................................1203

View a video of removing and replacing the right door switch.........................................................................................................................1217

View a video of removing and replacing the Control-panel assembly 25.6 cm (10.1 in 2nd).........................................................1221

View a video of removing and replacing the Control-panel assembly 20.3 cm (8 in)....................................................................... 1221

View a video of removing and replacing the formatter......................................................................................................................................... 1224

View a video of removing and replacing the riser card and cradle..............................................................................................................1230

View a video of removing and replacing the hard-disk drive rivet................................................................................................................ 1234

View a video of removing and replacing the hard disk drive cradle............................................................................................................ 1236

View a video of removing and replacing the hard disk drive.............................................................................................................................. 1241

View a video of removing and replacing the accelerator card........................................................................................................................1245

View a video of removing and replacing the USB hub PCA................................................................................................................................1249

View a video of removing and replacing the IOD.......................................................................................................................................................1256

xxxvi
View a video of removing and replacing the echo PCA........................................................................................................................................ 1260

View a video of removing and replacing the power key PCA............................................................................................................................1265

View a video of removing and replacing the keyboard (fold type)................................................................................................................. 1273

View a video of removing and replacing the fax card............................................................................................................................................ 1282

View a video of removing and replacing the HVPS..................................................................................................................................................1285

View a video of removing and replacing the LVPS................................................................................................................................................... 1290

View a video of removing and replacing the FDB......................................................................................................................................................1295

xxxvii
1 Product information, configurations, and
specifications

You will learn more about the product information, configurations, and specifications.

Printer views
Learn more specifically about the different views of the printer.

Printer front view

Locate features on the front of the printer.

Figure 1-1 Printer front view

1 2

14
13 5
6

13 6

8
9
10

11
12

Product information, configurations, and specifications 1

 Table 1-1 Front view part description

Item Description

1 Automatic document feeder cover, for access for clearing

jams

2 Automatic document feeder input tray

3 Automatic document feeder output tray

4 Control panel with color touchscreen display (tilts up for

easier viewing)

5 On/off button

6 Right door, for access for clearing jams

7 Easy-access USB port

Insert a USB flash drive for printing or scanning without a

computer or to update the printer firmware.

NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.

8 Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)

9 Front door, for access to the toner cartridges

10 Power connection

11 Tray 2

12 Tray 3

13 Output bin

14 Hardware integration pocket (HIP), for connecting accessory

and third-party devices

NOTE: Not shown: A pull-out keyboard is included under the control panel for z models only.

Printer back view

Locate features on the back of the printer.

2 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

 Figure 1-2 Printer back view

Table 1-2 Back View Part Description

Item Description

1 Back cover

CAUTION: There is risk of electric shock. This cover

should only be opened by a qualified service technician.

2 Interface ports

3 Thumbscrew

CAUTION: The thumbscrew should be tightened with a tool

after both initial installation and subsequent access to the
formatter cover.

4 Serial number and product number label

Interface ports view

Locate the interface ports on the printer formatter.

Interface ports view 3

 Figure 1-3 Interface ports view

1
2
3

4
5

Table 1-3 Interface ports view

Item Description

1 Hi-speed USB 2.0 host port for connecting external USB devices (this port might be covered)

NOTE: For easy-access USB printing, use the USB port near the control panel.

2 SuperSpeed USB 3.0 host port for connecting external USB devices (this port might be covered)

3 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port

4 Slot for a cable-type security lock

5 SuperSpeed USB 3.0 printing port

Control-panel view
The control panel provides access to the printer features and indicates the current status of the printer.

NOTE: Tilt the control panel for easier viewing.

The Home screen provides access to the printer features and indicates the current status of the printer.

NOTE: The features that appear on the Home screen can vary, depending on the printer
configuration.

4 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Figure 1-4 Control-panel view
1 2 3 4

Reset Sign In i ? 12:42 PM

5
Copy Scan Print Fax

Table 1-4 Control-panel view

Item Control Description

1 Reset button The Reset button returns the printer to default settings
and is always present if users are not logged in.

The Reset button is not present when the Sign Out

button is present.

Touch the Reset button to resume and release jobs from

the previous pause state and interrupt mode, reset the
quick copy count in the copy count field, exit special
modes, reset the display language and the keyboard
layout.

2 Sign In or Sign Out button Touch the Sign In button to access secured features.

Touch the Sign Out button to sign out of the printer. The
printer restores all options to the default settings.

NOTE: This button displays only if the administrator has

configured the printer to require permission for access
to features.

Control-panel view 5
 Table 1-4 Control-panel view (continued)

Item Control Description

3 Information button Touch the information button to access a screen that

provides access to several types of printer information.
Touch the buttons at the bottom of the screen for the
following information:

● Display Language: Change the language setting for

the current user session.

● Sleep Mode: Place the printer into sleep mode.

● Wi-Fi Direct: View information for how to connect

directly to the printer using a phone, tablet, or other
device with Wi-Fi (only available when the optional
wireless accessory is installed).

● Wireless: View or change wireless connection

settings (only available when the optional wireless
accessory is installed).

● Ethernet: View or change Ethernet connection

settings.

● HP Web Services: View information to connect and

print to the printer using HP Web Services (ePrint).

4 Help button Touch the Help button to open the embedded help
system.

The status line provides information about the overall

printer status.

5 Applications area Touch any of the icons to open the application. Swipe the
screen sideways to access more applications.

NOTE: The available applications vary by printer. The

administrator can configure which applications appear
and the order in which they appear.

On Flow printers the Scan button is replaced by the

Scan+ button .

Touch the Scan+ button to send a scan job to multiple

destinations at once, including email, SharePoint,
network folder, USB drive, fax, or printed hard copy. It also
includes a preview mode that supports simple editing.

6 Copy button Touch the Copy button to start a copy job.

7 Home-screen page indicator Indicates the number of pages on the Home screen or in
an application. The current page is highlighted. Swipe the
screen sideways to scroll between pages.

Specifications
Learn about the specifications.

Basic specifications
Learn about the basic specifications of the printer.

6 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Supported operating systems
Learn about supported operating systems.

The following information applies to the Printer-Specific Windows PCL 6 and HP print drivers for macOS
and to the software installer.

Windows: The HP Software Installer can be downloaded from the printer support website for this printer
and installs the correct "HP PCL 6” print driver, depending on the Windows operating system, along
with optional software when using the software installer. Download the "HP PCL 6" print driver from the
printer-support website for this printer: www.hp.com/support.

macOS: Mac computers are supported with this printer. Download HP Easy Start either from 123.hp.com
or from the Printer Support page, and then use HP Easy Start to install the HP print driver. HP Easy Start
is not included in the HP Software Installer.

1. Go to 123.hp.com/LaserJet.

2. Follow the steps provided to download the printer software.

Linux: For information and print drivers for Linux, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.

UNIX: For information and print drivers for UNIX®, go to www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts.

Table 1-5 Supported operating systems and print drivers

Operating system Print driver installed (from the software on the web)

Windows 7, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver is installed for this operating system as
part of the software installation.

Windows 10, 32-bit, 64-bit, and ARM64 The “HP PCL-6” printer-specific print driver is installed for this operating system as
part of the software installation.

Windows 11, 64-bit, and ARM64 The “HP PCL-6” printer-specific print driver is installed for this operating system as
part of the software installation.

Windows Server 2008 R2, 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver is available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

Windows Server 2012, 64-bit The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

Windows Server 2012 R2, 64-bit The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

Windows Server 2016, 64-bit The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

Windows Server 2019, 64-bit The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

Windows Server 2022, 64-bit The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

macOS 12 (Monterey), macOS 11 (Big To install the print driver, download HP Easy Start from 123.hp.com. Follow the steps
Sur), macOS 10.15 (Catalina) provided to install the printer software and print driver.

Supported operating systems 7

 Table 1-5 Supported operating systems and print drivers (continued)

Operating system Print driver installed (from the software on the web)

Debian 10,11, OpenSuse 15.1,15.2,15.3, Print drivers are available at specific operating system web sites.
Fedora 31,32,33,34,35, Rhel 6,7,8, Ubuntu
20.04,20.10,21.04,21.10, linuxmint 20.1,20.2,
Manjarolinux 20.2,21.0.7, Zorin 15,16
Mxlinux 21, Elementary 6P

NOTE: Supported operating systems can change. For a current list of supported operating systems,
go to support.hp.com for HP's all-inclusive help for the printer.

NOTE: For details on client and server operating systems and for HP Smart UPD driver support for
this printer, go to www.hp.com/go/smartupd. Under Additional information, click the links.

Table 1-6 Minimum system requirements

Windows macOS

● Internet connection ● Internet connection

● Dedicated USB 1.1 or 2.0 connection or a network ● 1 GB of available hard-disk space

connection

● 2 GB of available hard-disk space

Mobile printing solutions

Learn what HP offers for mobile printing solutions.

HP offers multiple mobile solutions to enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop, tablet,
smartphone, or other mobile device. To see the full list and to determine the best choice, go to HP
Customer Support - Knowledge Base.

● Apple AirPrint

● Mopria Certified

● WiFi Direct Printing

● NFC Touch to Print

● ePrintIT PrinterOn

Printer dimensions
Learn about the printer dimensions.

8 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Figure 1-5 Printer and dual cassette feeder dimensions (fully open)

1490 mm
(58.66 in)

50 mm
100 mm
(2.0 in)
(3.9 in)

995 mm
1170 mm (39.17 in)
(46.0 in)

Printer dimensions 9
 Figure 1-6 Printer, dual cassette feeder, and inner finisher dimensions (fully open)

1490 mm
(58.66 in)

50 mm
(2.0 in)
100 mm
(3.9 in)
1407 mm
(55.42 in)
1095 mm
(43.11 in)

10 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

 Figure 1-7 Printer, booklet finisher, and 2K high-capacity input dimensions (fully open)

1490 mm
(58.66 in)

50 mm
100 mm
(2.0 in)
(3.9 in)

1701.7 mm
1095 mm (66.99 in)
(43.11 in)

Operating-environment range
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain specifications.

Table 1-7 Operating-environment specifications

Environment Recommended Storage

Temperature 15° to 27°C (59° to 80.6°F) 10 to 32.5°C (50 to 90.5°F)

Relative humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity (RH) 10% to 80% relative humidity (RH)

General specifications
Learn about general specifications for printer models.

Table 1-8 General specifications

Item Specification

ASIC GigaTron Quad 1.6 GHz ARM A72 + Dual 1.4 GHz ARM A53

Memory 6 GB

Operating-environment range 11
 Table 1-8 General specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Storage 500 GB HDD

Connectivity (I/O standard) Gigabit LAN

USB 3.2 Gen 1 (USB 3.0) Device

USB 3.2 Gen 1 (USB 3.0)/2.0 Host ports

TPM

Power Requirement Input voltage: 110 to 127Vac (+/- 10%), 220 to 240Vac (+/- 10%), 50/60 Hz (+/- 3%)

Sound Power Level Blue Angel UZ-205

● 25 ppm: ≤7.0 Bel(A)

● 30 ppm: ≤7.1 Bel(A)

● 35 ppm: ≤7.2 Bel(A)

ISO, Idle

Sound Pressure Level ≤30dB(A)

Print specifications
Learn about the print specifications.

Table 1-9 Print specifications

Item Specification

Print speed (normal, A4/letter) E78625: 25 ppm

E78630: 30 ppm

E78635: 35 ppm

Resolution 600 dpi

Print Languages HP PCL 6, HP Postscript level 3 emulation, PDF (v 1.7), AirPrint™ compatible

Supported Network Protocols IPv4/IPv6: Apple Bonjour Compatible (Mac OS 10.2.4 or higher), SNMPv1/v2c/v3, HTTP, HTTPS,
FTP, TFTP, Port 9100, LPD, WS Discovery, IPP, Secure-IPP, IPsec/Firewall

IPv6: DHCPv6, MLDv1, ICMPv6

IPv4: Auto-IP, SLP, Telnet, IGMPv2, BOOTP/DHCP, WINS, IP Direct Mode, WS Print

Other: NetWare NDS, Bindery, ePrint

USB printing Yes

Scan specifications
Learn about the scan specifications.

12 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

 Table 1-10 Scan specifications

Item Specification

Scan Speed (normal, A4) E786/E731 dn models ADF: Simplex 90 ipm/Duplex 180 ipm

E786/E731 z models ADF: Simplex 120 ipm/Duplex 240 ipm

Input Capacity E786/E731 dn models ADF: 75 gsm/200 sheets

E786/E731 z models ADF: 75 gsm/200 sheets

Grayscale Levels 256

Scan File Format Digital Send: PDF, Hi-Compression PDF, JPEG, TIFF, MTIFF, XPS, PDF/A

Scan to easy access USB: Hi-Compression PDF, PDF, JPEG, TIFF, MTIFF, XPS, PDF/A

Print from easy access USB: PDF, PS, JPEG, TIFF, PNG, Print Ready files (.prn, .pd, .cht)

Scan Size Maximum ADF:

297 x 437 mm (11.7 x 17.2 in)

Flatbed:

297 x 437 mm (11.7 x 17.2 in)

Scan Size Minimum ADF:

148 x 210 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in)

Standard Media Size (ADF) Legal, Oficio, Executive, Statement, Ledger, A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, 16K

● Width: 148 - 297 mm (5.8 - 11.7 in)

● Length: 148 - 432 mm (5.8 - 17 in)

Media Weights (ADF) Feeding: 45 to 200 g/m² (12 to 53 lb)

IQ: 45 to 120 g/m² (12 to 32 lb)

Copy specifications
Learn about the copy specifications.

Table 1-11 Copy specifications

Item Specification

Copy Speed (Normal, A4, E78625: 25 cpm

default rate from flatbed or
ADF) E78630: 30 cpm

E78635: 35 cpm

Copy Speed (Normal, letter, E78625: 25 cpm

default rate from flatbed or
ADF) E78630: 30 cpm

E78635: 35 cpm

Copy Speed (Normal, A3, E78625: 13 cpm

default rate from flatbed or
ADF) E78630: 16 cpm

E78635: 19 cpm

Copy specifications 13
 Table 1-11 Copy specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Copy Speed (Duplex, A3) E78625: 8 ipm

E78630: 11 ipm

E78635: 12 ipm

Copy Resolution Black Text: Up to 600 x 600 dpi

Color Text and Graphics: Up to 600 x 600 dpi

Copier Reduce/enlarge Flatbed: 25 to 400%

ADF: 25 to 400%

Paper handling specifications

Learn about the paper handling specifications.

Table 1-12 Paper handling specifications

Item Specification

Input Capacity Tray 1: 100 sheets (80 gsm)

Tray 2: 520 sheets (80 gsm)

Tray 3: 520 sheets (80 gsm)

Custom Media Sizes (metric) Tray 1: 98 x 148 mm (3.9 x 5.8 in) to 297 x 432 mm (11.7 x 17 in)

Tray 2: 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in) to 297 x 364 mm (11.7 x 14.3 in)

Tray 3: 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in) to 297 x 432 mm (11.7 x 17 in)

Standard Media Sizes Tray 1:

A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, A6, RA4, SRA4, B4 (JIS), B5 (JIS), B6 (JIS), 10x15cm, Oficio, 8K, 16k, Postcard
(JIS), Dpostcard (JIS), Envelope B5, Envelope C5, Envelope C6, Envelope DL

Tray 2:

A5, A4, B4, B5 (JIS), B5 (ISO), Statement, Letter, Legal, Folio, Oficio, 16K

Custom (148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in) to 297 x 364 mm (11.7 x 14.3 in))

Tray 3:

A5, A4, A3, B4, B5 (JIS), B5 (ISO), Statement, Letter, Ledger, Legal, Oficio, Folio, 8K, 16K

Custom (148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in) to 297 x 432 mm (11.7 x 17 in))

Media types supported Tray 1:

Plain, Thin, Bond, Hole Punched, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Thin CardStock, Letterhead, Thick,
Cotton, Colored, Archive, Thin Glossy, Heavy weight, Extra Heavy Cardstock, Envelope, Label,
Transparency

Tray 2, 3:

Plain, Thin, Bond, Hole Punched, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Thin CardStock, Letterhead, Thick,
Cotton, Colored, Archive, Thin Glossy, Heavy weight, Extra heavy weight

14 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Table 1-12 Paper handling specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Media Weights Tray 1:

● Thin: 60~70 g/m²

● Plain: 71~90 g/m²

● Thin Glossy: 106~163 g/m²

● Thick: 91~105 g/m²

● Heavy weight: 106~130 g/m²

● Extra Heavy weight 1: 131~175 g/m²

● Extra Heavy weight 2: 176~220 g/m²

● Extra Heavy weight 3: 257~300 g/m²

● Heavy Cardstock: 221 ~ 256 g/m²

● Envelope: 75~90 g/m²

● Label: 120~150 g/m²

● Transparency: 138~146 g/m²

Tray 2, 3:

● Thin: 60~70 g/m²

● Plain: 71~90 g/m²

● Thin Glossy: 106~163 g/m²

● Thick: 91~105 g/m²

● Heavy weight: 106~175 g/m²

● Extra Heavy weight: 176~220 g/m²

Standard Media Sizes 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in) to 297 x 432 mm (11.7 x 17 in)
(duplex)

Media Weights (duplex) 60 to 176 g/m²

Media types supported Plain, Thin, Bond, Hole Punched, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Thin CardStock, Letterhead, Thick,
(duplex) Cotton, Colored, Archive, Thin Glossy, Heavy weight

Table 1-13 Paper trays and accessories

Trays and accessories Availability

Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity) Included

Tray 2 (520-sheet capacity) Included

Tray 3 (520-sheet capacity) Included

2 x 520-sheet paper tray/stand Optional

2,000-sheet high-capacity input tray/stand Optional

Printer stand Optional

Paper handling specifications 15

 Table 1-13 Paper trays and accessories (continued)

Trays and accessories Availability

Stapler/stacker finishing accessory Optional

Booklet maker finishing accessory Optional

Inner finisher accessory Optional

2/3 hole punch accessory Optional

2/4 hole punch accessory Optional

Swedish hole punch accessory Optional

HP Job separator Optional

HP Second exit Optional

Supplies
Learn about the supplies.

Table 1-14 Supplies

Item Product number Average yield

Black toner cartridge1 W9140MS Approx. 10,000 pages

Starter toner (APJ only)

Cyan toner cartridge1 W9141MS Approx. 9,000 pages

Yellow toner cartridge1 W9142MS Approx. 9,000 pages

Starter toner (APJ only)

Magenta toner cartridge1 W9143MS Approx. 9,000 pages

Starter toner (APJ only)

Black toner cartridge1 W9140MC Approx. 14,500 pages

Standard

Cyan toner cartridge1 W9141MC Approx. 12,000 pages

Standard

Yellow toner cartridge1 W9142MC Approx. 12,000 pages

Standard

Magenta toner cartridge1 W9143MC Approx. 12,000 pages

Standard

Black toner cartridge1 W9150MC Approx. 29,000 pages

High capacity

Cyan toner cartridge1 W9151MC Approx. 24,000 pages

High capacity

16 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

 Table 1-14 Supplies (continued)

Item Product number Average yield

Yellow toner cartridge1 W9152MC Approx. 24,000 pages

High capacity

Magenta toner cartridge1 W9153MC Approx. 24,000 pages

High capacity

Black imaging drum W9074MC Approx. 200,000 pages

CYM imaging drum W9075MC Approx. 135,000 pages

1Print cartridge life is approximate, based on average A4 /Letter-size page count with ISO coverage.
Declared cartridge yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. Actual yields vary considerably based
on images printed and other factors. For more information, visit www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.

NOTE: Depending on the print pattern and job mode used, the lifespan of the consumable can vary.

IMPORTANT: Toner cartridges or other supplies must be purchased in the same country/region as
the printer being used. Otherwise, new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with the
printer. This is due to differing configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the
conditions of a specific country/region.

Maintenance parts (Long Life Consumables (LLC))

Learn about the printer maintenance parts.

HP recommends replacing the following maintenance parts at specific intervals to make sure the printer
produces quality copies and to extend the service life of the printer.

Some of the printer parts have a shorter lifespan than the life of the printer.

Table 1-15 Maintenance parts

Item Product number Life

Toner collection unit (TCU) W9048MC 33,700 pages

Black developer unit 5PN57A 400,000 pages

Yellow developer unit 5PN58A 400,000 pages

Magenta developer unit 5PN59A 400,000 pages

Cyan developer unit 5PN60A 400,000 pages

Fuser unit (100V) 5PN50A 400,000 pages

NOTE: Only for Japan

Fuser unit (110V) 5PN61A 400,000 pages

Fuser unit (220V) 5PN62A 400,000 pages

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit 5PN63A 400,000 pages

ITB cleaner 5PN64A 200,000 pages

Transfer roller 5PN65A 200,000 pages

Maintenance parts (Long Life Consumables (LLC)) 17

 Table 1-15 Maintenance parts (continued)

Item Product number Life

Pickup/ Forward/ Reverse (separation) 5PN66A 300,000 pages

roller (for Tray 2-X)

Tray 1 (MP) Pickup/ Forward/ Reverse 5RC02A 200,000 pages

(separation) Roller

ADF roller kit J8J95A 150,000 pages

NOTE: Depending on print patterns and the job mode used, maintenance part lifespans vary. See
Replacing the maintenance part for further instructions.

Network and software specifications

Learn about the network and software specifications.

Network interface
Learn about the network interface.

Network OS

Windows

● Windows 7

● Windows 10

● Windows 11

● Windows Server 2008 R2

● Windows Server 2012

● Windows Server 2012 R2

● Windows Server 2016

● Windows Server 2019

Mac

● macOS 12(Monterey)

● macOS 11(Big Sur)

● macOS 10.14(Mojave)

● macOS 10.15(Catalina)

Linux

● CentOS 8, 64-bit

● Ubuntu 20.04.2.0 LTS

● Fedora 33

18 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

 ● Red Hat Enterprise Linux 8

Others

● Unix (HP-UX, Solaris, SunOS, SCO)

Table 1-16 Network interfaces

Type Protocol Details

Network Protocol TCP/IP TCP/IPv4, HTTP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, LDAP,

SMTP, SSL/TLS, IPSec, DNS, WINS, SLP,
Bonjour, SSDP, DDNS, DHCP/BOOTP,
IPv6

Network Protocol NetBIOS over TCP/IP Supported

Network Protocol Others HTTPS, IPSec, 802.1x

IP Addressing Static IP Supported

IP Addressing Auto IP Supported

IP Addressing BOOTP Supported

IP Addressing DHCP Supported

SNMP/MIB Access MIB-2 (RFC 1213) Supported

SNMP/MIB Access Host Resource MIB (RFC 2790) Supported

SNMP/MIB Access Printer MIB (RFC 3805) Supported

SNMP/MIB Access Finisher MIB (RFC 3806) Supported

SNMP/MIB Access HP Compatibility Supported partially

SNMP/MIB Access SNMP Trap Supported

Printing Protocols Windows Printing (SMB) Not supported

Printing Protocols LPR/LPD Supported

Printing Protocols IPP Supported

Printing Protocols Port 9100 Supported

Device Discovery DNS Supported

Device Discovery Dynamic DNS Supported

Device Discovery Multicast DNS (Bonjour) Supported

Device Discovery WSD (including Print and Scan) Supported (Print and Scan)

Device Discovery SLP Supported

Device Discovery uPNP (SSDP) Supported

Options
Learn about printer options and accessories.

Optional input and output devices configuration

Learn about the optional input and output devices configuration.

Options 19
 The E877, E826, E786, E731, E785 and E730 series have optional input devices and output devices.

NOTE: The figure below is representational only. Individual devices might appear different from what
is shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-8 Optional input and output devices configuration

10 11 12

16

13
15 17

9
14

2 4 6
1
3 5 7

NOTE: There may be a difference between the appearance of your printer and the photo.

Table 1-17 Optional input and output devices configuration

# Description Part E877 E826 E786 E731 E785 E730

number series series series series series series

1 HP High Capacity Input Tray 6GW56A Not Not Not Not

Side (sHCI) available available available available

2 HP LaserJet Workgroup 6GW54A Not Not

Cabinet available available

3 HP LaserJet Department 6GW53A Not Not Not Not

Cabinet available available available available

4 HP LaserJet Workgroup 2000 6GW48A Not Not Not Not

Sheet High Capacity Input available available available available
Tray (HCI)

5 HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High 6GW57A Not Not Not Not

Capacity Tray Department available available available available
(HCI)

6 HP LaserJet Workgroup Dual 6GW46A Not Not

Cassette Feeder (DCF) available available

7 HP LaserJet Dual Cassette 6GW47A Not Not Not Not

Department Feeder (DCF) available available available available

20 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Table 1-17 Optional input and output devices configuration (continued)

# Description Part E877 E826 E786 E731 E785 E730

number series series series series series series

8 HP LaserJet Spacer 6GW58A Not Not Not Not Not

available available available available available
NOTE: This option is
required if installing the
Stapler/Stacker or Booklet
finisher.

9 HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher 6GW51A Not Not

Not Not available available
HP LaserJet Booklet finisher 63C81A available available
with Print Quality Diagnostics Not Not
available available
NOTE: The following options
are available:

● 15 HP LaserJetHole
Punch 2/3 Accessory -
Y1G10A

● 15 HP LaserJet Hole
Punch 2/4 Accessory -
Y1G11A

● 15 HP LaserJet
Hole Punch Swedish
Accessory - Y1G12A

● Y1G14A - HP LaserJet
Stapler/Stacker Finisher
Refill Staple Cartridge
(not shown)

● Y1G13A - HP LaserJet
Inner Finisher and
Booklet Maker Finisher
Refill Staple Cartridge
(not shown)

10 HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker 6GW55A Not Not

Finisher Not Not available available
63C80A available available
HP LaserJet Booklet finisher Not Not
with Print Quality Diagnostics available available

NOTE: The following options

are available:

● 15 HP LaserJetHole
Punch 2/3 Accessory -
Y1G10A

● 15 HP LaserJet Hole
Punch 2/4 Accessory -
Y1G11A

● 15 HP LaserJet
Hole Punch Swedish
Accessory - Y1G12A

● Y1G14A - HP LaserJet
Stapler/Stacker Finisher
Refill Staple Cartridge
(not shown)

Optional input and output devices configuration 21

 Table 1-17 Optional input and output devices configuration (continued)

# Description Part E877 E826 E786 E731 E785 E730

number series series series series series series

11 HP LaserJet Workgroup Job 6GW52A Not Not

Separator available available

12 HP LaserJet Department Job 6GW50A Not Not Not Not

Separator available available available available

13/1 HP LaserJet Inner Finisher 6GW49A

4
NOTE: The following options
are available:

● 14 HP LaserJet Inner
Finisher Hole 2/3 Punch
- 155P7A

● 14 HP LaserJet Inner
Finisher Hole 2/4 Punch
- 155P8A

● 14 HP LaserJet Inner
Finisher Swedish Punch
- 155P9A

● Y1G13A - HP LaserJet
Inner Finisher and
Booklet Maker Finisher
Refill Staple Cartridge
(not shown)

NOTE: Inner finisher

supports up to 60 ppm.

15 HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Y1G10A Not Not

Accessory available available

15 HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Y1G11A Not Not

Accessory available available

15 HP LaserJet Hole Punch Y1G12A Not Not

Swedish Accessory available available

16 HP LaserJet Second Exit Y1G23A Not Not

Available Available
NOTE: This option is
required if installing the
Stapler/stacker, Booklet
Finisher, Inner Finisher, or job
separator.

17 HP LaserJet Stacker with 63C82A Not Not Not Not

Print Quality Diagnostics Available Available Available Available

Option specifications
Learn about option specifications.

Table 1-18 HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Feeder option specifications

Item Specification

Part number 6GW46A

22 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Table 1-18 HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Feeder option specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Capacity 520 x 2 sheets

Media sizes ● Tray 4: 139.7 mm x 210 mm – 297 mm x 431.8 mm (5.5 in x

8.27 in – 11.69 in x 17 in)

● Tray 5: 139.7 mm x 210 mm – 297 mm x 431.8 mm (5.5 in x

8.27 in – 11.69 in x 17 in)

Media types Thin/Plain/Thick/Heavy Weight/Extra Heavy

Weight/Letterhead/Pre-Printed/Hole Punched/Colored/Bond/
Recycled/Glossy/Thin Glossy/Thick Glossy

Media weight ● Thin paper: 60–70 grams per square meter (16–18.5 lb)
(duplex)

● Plain paper: 71–90 grams per square meter (18.5–24 lb)

(duplex)

● Thick paper: 91–105 grams per square meter (25–28 lb)

(duplex)

● Heavyweight paper: 106–130 grams per square meter

(28.2-34.5 lb) (duplex)

● Extra Heavyweight paper: 131–175 grams per square

meter (34.8-46.5 lb) (duplex)

● Letterhead: 71–90 grams per square meter (18.5–24 lb)

(duplex)

● Preprinted: 71–90 grams per square meter (18.5–24 lb)

(duplex)

● Hole-punched paper: 71–90 grams per square meter

(18.5–24 lb) (duplex)

● Colored: 71–90 grams per square meter (18.5–24 lb)

(duplex)

● Bond paper: 105–120 grams per square meter (28-32 lb)

(duplex)

● Recycled: 60–90 grams per square meter (16-24 lb)

(duplex)

● Glossy: 106–130 grams per square meter (28.2-34.5 lb)

(duplex)

● Thin glossy: 106–130 grams per square meter (28.2-34.5

lb) (duplex)

● Thick glossy: 131-175 grams per square meter (34.8-46.5

lb) (duplex)

Sensing ● H/W install detect: Yes

● Paper empty and low level detect: Yes

● Paper type detect: No

● Paper size detect: Yes

Dimensions 566 mm x 630 mm x 308.2 mm (22.3 in x 24.8 in x 12.1 in)

Weight Net 20.35 kg (55.9 lb), packing 20.35 kg (44.9 lb)

Option specifications 23
 Table 1-19 HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Tray Department option specifications

Item Specification

Part number 6GW48A

Capacity 2000 sheets at 80 grams per square meter (20 lb)

Media sizes A4, letter

Media types Plain paper, thin paper, thick paper, punched paper

Media weight 60 to 220 grams per square meter

Sensing ● H/W install detect: Yes

● Paper empty and low level detect: Yes

● Paper type detect: No

● Paper size detect: Yes

Table 1-20 HP High Capacity Input Tray Side (sHCI) option specifications

Item Specification

Part number 6GW56A

Capacity 3000 sheets at 80 grams per square meter (20 lb)

Media sizes A4, letter

Media types Plain paper, thin paper, thick paper, punched paper

Media weight 60 to 300 grams per square meter

Sensing ● H/W install detect: Yes

● Paper empty and low level detect: Yes

● Paper type detect: No

● Paper size detect: Yes

Table 1-21 HP LaserJet Department Cabinet option specifications

Item Specification

Part number 6GW54A

Dimensions 566 mm x 630 mm x 266 mm (22.28 in x 24.80 in x 10.47 in)

Weight (net) 14 kg 30.86 lbs

Table 1-22 HP LaserJet Job Separator Department option specifications

Item Specification

Part number 6GW50A

Capacity 125 sheets at 80 grams per square meter

24 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Table 1-23 HP LaserJet Inner Finisher option specifications

Item Specification

Part number 6GW49A

Capacity 500 sheets stacking, internal

Staple cartridge capacity 5000 staples/cartridge

Stacking ● Top tray: 50 sheets (A4/LT at 80 grams per square meter)

● Finishing tray: 500 sheets (A4/LT at 80 grams per square

meter)

Stapling ● Maximum number of sheets: 50 sheets stapling with 90

grams per square meter sheet

● Stapling positions: Front flat and corner (45), dual, rear

flat and corner (45)

Saddle stapling N/A

Offline stapling N/A

Offset at non-staple job Yes

Offset at staple job N/A

Output stacking Face down

Table 1-24 HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher option specifications

Item Specification

Part number 6GW55A

Capacity 65 sheets stapling, 3,250 sheets stacking

Staple cartridge capacity 5000 staples/cartridge

Stacking ● Top tray: 250 sheets (A4/LT at 80 grams per square

meter)

● Finishing tray: 3000 sheets (A4/LT at 80 grams per

square meter)

Stapling ● Maximum number of sheets: 65 sheets stapling with 90

grams per square meter sheet

● Stapling positions: 2 corners (single, 45 degree), center

(double)

Offline stapling Yes

Offset at non-staple job Yes

Offset at staple job Yes

Output stacking Face down

Table 1-25 HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher option specifications

Item Specification

Part number 6GW51A

Option specifications 25
 Table 1-25 HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher option specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Capacity 65 sheets stapling, 2000 sheets stacking

Staple cartridge capacity 5000 staples/cartridge

Stacking ● Top tray: 250 sheets (A4/LT at 80 grams per square

meter)

● Finishing tray: 2000 sheets (A4/LT at 80 grams per

square meter)

Stapling ● Maximum number of sheets: 65 sheets stapling with 90

grams per square meter sheet

● Stapling positions: 2 corners (single), center (double)

Saddle stapling Maximum number of sheets: 25 sheets stapling with 80 grams

per square meter sheet

Offline stapling Yes

Offset at non-staple job Yes

Offset at staple job Yes

Output stacking Face down

Table 1-26 HP LaserJet Hole Punch Accessory option specifications

Item Specification

Part number HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory: Y1G10A

HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory: Y1G11A

HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Accessory: Y1G12A

Available unit Auto change 2/3 hole or auto change 2/4 hole, Swedish 4

Media weight 52–300 grams per square meter

Table 1-27 HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole Punch option specifications

Item Specification

Part number HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3 Punch: 155P7A

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4 Punch: 155P8A

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Punch: 155P9A

Available unit Auto change 2/3 hole or auto change 2/4 hole, Swedish 4

Media weight 52–256 grams per square meter

Table 1-28 Other options

Part Part number

HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Accy Y1G22A

26 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

 Table 1-28 Other options (continued)

Part Part number

HP LaserJet Second Exit Accy Y1G23A

HP Accessibility Assistant 478C2A

HP Removable Hard Drive Enclosure 2NR12A

HP Accessibility Kit 2TD64A

HP JetDirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless Accy 3JN69A

HP Legic Reader 3JN69A

HP Internal USB Ports 4XN67A

HP MFP Analog Dual Fax 810 Accessory 5QK14A

HP LaserJet Workflow Accelerator Card(z model only) 6HN30A

HP Secure Ultimate Performance TAA Hrd Disk Drive 6HN31A

HP MFP Analog Dual Fax 811 Accessory (BBU only) 7ZA07A

HP MFP Analog Single Fax 800 Accessory 7ZA08A

HP MFP Analog Single Fax 801 Accessory (BBU only) 7ZA09A

HP Jetdirect LAN Accessory 8FP31A

HP Secure Ultimate Performance Hard Disk Drive 9EQ11A

HP Foreign Interface Harness B5L31A

HP SmartCard NIPRNet Solution for US Government CC543B

HP SmartCard SIPRNet Solution for US Government F8B30A

HP USB Universal Card Reader X3D03A

HP Card Reader Rotation Adapter Kit1 63C82-67029

HP HIP2 Keystroke Reader Y7C05A

HP SIM for HID iClass for HIP2 Reader Y7C07A

1 The Card Reader Rotation Adapter Kit is helpful when the card insertion angle/direction is not aligned
with the card reader.

Color skin configuration

Learn about the color skin configuration.

The E877, E826, E786, E731, E785 and E730 series provides various color skins to satisfy customer's
needs.

NOTE: The figure below is representational only. Individual devices might appear different from what
is shown in the following figure.

Color skin configuration 27

 Figure 1-9 Color skin configuration

Table 1-29 Color skin configuration

No Color type Description E877 E826 E786 E731 E785 E730

series series series series series series

1 Mineral gray Printer cover set 190A2A 190A3A 190A0A 190A1A 190A0A 190A1A

(Scanner front cover, Front door,

Cover for tray 2, 3)

Dual Casset Feeder (DCF) cover 190A4A 190A4A 190A6A 190A6A 190A6A 190A6A
panel

High Capacity Input (HCI) tray 190A5A 190A5A 190A7A 190A7A 190A7A 190A7A
cover panel

Cabinet cover panel 190A8A 190A8A 190A9A 190A9A 190A9A 190A9A

2 Persimmon Printer cover set 190B2A 190B3A 190B0A 190B1A 190B0A 190B1A

(Scanner front cover, Front door,

Cover for tray 2, 3)

Dual Casset Feeder (DCF) cover 190B4A 190B4A 190B6A 190B6A 190B6A 190B6A
panel

High Capacity Input (HCI) tray 190B5A 190B5A 190B7A 190B7A 190B7A 190B7A
cover panel

Cabinet cover panel 190B8A 190B8A 190B9A 190B9A 190B9A 190B9A

3 Green Printer cover set 190C2A 190C3A 190C0A 190C1A 190C0A 190C1A

(Scanner front cover, Front door,

Cover for tray 2, 3)

Dual Casset Feeder (DCF) cover 190C4A 190C4A 190C6A 190C6A 190C6A 190C6A
panel

High Capacity Input (HCI) tray 190C5A 190C5A 190C7A 190C7A 190C7A 190C7A
cover panel

Cabinet cover panel 190C8A 190C8A 190C9A 190C9A 190C9A 190C9A

4 Mellow yellow Printer cover set 190D2A 190D3A 190D0A 190D1A 190D0A 190D1A

(Scanner front cover, Front door,

Cover for tray 2, 3)

28 Chapter 1 Product information, configurations, and specifications

Table 1-29 Color skin configuration (continued)

No Color type Description E877 E826 E786 E731 E785 E730

series series series series series series

Dual Casset Feeder (DCF) cover 190D4A 190D4A 190D6A 190D6A 190D6A 190D6A
panel

High Capacity Input (HCI) tray 190D5A 190D5A 190D7A 190D7A 190D7A 190D7A
cover panel

Cabinet cover panel 190D8A 190D8A 190D9A 190D9A 190D9A 190D9A

5 Purple reign Printer cover set 190F2A 190F3A 190F0A 190F1A 190F0A 190F1A

(Scanner front cover, Front door,

Cover for tray 2, 3)

Dual Casset Feeder (DCF) cover 190F4A 190F4A 190F6A 190F6A 190F6A 190F6A
panel

High Capacity Input (HCI) tray 190F5A 190F5A 190F7A 190F7A 190F7A 190F7A
cover panel

Cabinet cover panel 190F8A 190F8A 190F9A 190F9A 190F9A 190F9A

Color skin configuration 29

 2 Product installation and maintenance

You will learn more about product installation and maintenance.

Product installation
For more information about hardware, engine, and accessory installation for the printer, review the
following document.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP - Installation Guides

Maintenance
Learn about preventive maintenance and printer cleaning procedures.

PM table (Preventive Maintenance)

HP recommends cleaning and checking the following maintenance items at the specified intervals.

Some easy items are strongly recommended to be executed during every visit, regardless of the page
count, to make sure the printer produces quality copies and to extend the service life of the printer. Also,
HP recommends inspecting consumable parts and replacing if needed to reduce the visit count. After
replacing, a counter reset should be done to make sure the next replacement window is clear.

NOTE:

● Use the table below as just a reference. The page counts below assume a color usage ratio of 40%.

● Depending on the printing patterns and the job mode used, consumable part lifespans vary.

● Toner cartridges and the Toner Collection Unit are excluded from this table because they are
classified as supplies, not long life consumables (LLCs).

In the table below, the follwing abbreviations are used:

● C: Clean

● I: Inspect

● R: Replace

The counts below indicate the recommended engine counter value for each item (Engine life 1,200K).

Table 2-1 Preventative Maintenance

Type Item 200K 400K 600K 800K 1000K Notes

1200K

Clean/ Paper dust C C C C C Recommend

Inspect holder ed at every
visit

30 Chapter 2 Product installation and maintenance

Table 2-1 Preventative Maintenance (continued)

Type Item 200K 400K 600K 800K 1000K Notes

1200K

Clean/ ACR (CTD) C C Needed

Inspect Sensor when ITB is
replaced

Clean/ LSU window C C C C C Recommend

Inspect ed at every
visit

Clean/ Scanner C C C C C Recommend

Inspect glass ed at every
visit

Clean/ ADF CIS C C C C C Recommend

Inspect (Contact ed at every
Image visit
Sensor)

Clean/ Paper guide I I I I I Recommend

Inspect adjustment ed at every
check in visit
Trays

Consumable K OPC I/R I/R I/R I/R I/R

check

Consumable Y/M/C OPC I/R I/R I/R I/R Assumes

check 40% color
usage

Consumable ITB Cleaner I/R I/R I/R I/R I/R

check

Consumable Intermediate I/R I/R

check transfer belt
(ITB)

Consumable Transfer I/R I/R I/R I/R

check roller

Consumable Fuser I/R I/R

check

Consumable K Deve units I/R I/R

check

Consumable Y/M/C Deve I/R Assumes

check units 40% color
usage

Consumable Roller kit for I/R I/R I/R I/R I/R Recommend
check Tray 1 ed at every
visit

Consumable Roller kit for I/R I/R I/R I/R I/R Recommend
check Tray 2-x ed at every
visit

Consumable ADF Roller kit I/R I/R I/R I/R I/R Recommend
check ed at every
visit

PM table (Preventive Maintenance) 31

 Cleaning
Use the procedures below to carry out regular cleaning procedures.

Cleaning the paper dust stick

Learn about cleaning the paper dust stick.

It is recommended that the paper dust stick be cleaned at every visit. There is no message on the
control panel when it is time for the paper dust stick to be cleaned, so technicians need to carry out this
task proactively. Use the following procedure to complete this task.

1. Open the front door.

2. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) by releasing the tabs and pulling it straight out of the printer.

1
1
2

NOTE: Maintain the position of the TCU as you pull it out from the printer. This will ensure that you
do not spill any waste toner in the printer. Once the TCU is fully removed, do not place it on its side
with holes facing down.

32 Chapter 2 Product installation and maintenance

3. Pull out the paper dust stick.

4. Remove the paper dust.

Figure 2-1 Remove the paper dust

5. Insert the paper dust stick back into the slot.

Cleaning the paper dust stick 33

 6. Replace the TCU by pushing in on both sides until the tabs snap into place.

7. Close the front door. Make sure the cover is securely closed. If the message still appears, repeat
this process.

Cleaning the ACR (CTD) Sensor

Use the following procedure to clean the ACR (CTD) sensor.

The engine has the feature of ACR (CTD) sensor cleaning automatically with the motor driving the
sensor cover shutter open and closed. Nonetheless, we recommend you clean the sensor manually at
every ITB replacement to make sure the sensor is clean.

34 Chapter 2 Product installation and maintenance

 1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the ITB cleaner and ITB unit.

For instructions on removing these items, see Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB)
cleaning unit kit

3. Clean the sensor window using a lint-free cloth while pushing the shutter to right.

4. Replace the ITB cleaner and ITB unit, and close the right door.

Cleaning the LSU window

It is recommended that the LSU window be cleaned during every maintenance visit. Use the following
procedure to complete this task.

NOTE: This task must be implemented when the printer power is on because of the LSU shutter
position.

Cleaning the LSU window 35

 1. Open the front door.

2. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) by releasing the tabs and pulling it straight out of the printer.

1
1
2

NOTE: Maintain the position of the TCU as you pull it out from the printer. This will ensure that you
do not spill any waste toner in the printer. Once the TCU is fully removed, do not place it on its side
with holes facing down.

36 Chapter 2 Product installation and maintenance

 3. Clean the LSU window for each color using the cleaning bar attached inside the front cover.

Insert the cleaning bar into the hole for each color. Push it in and pull it out several times to clean
the window, as shown in the images below.

4. Replace the cleaning bar and the TCU, and then close the front door.

Cleaning the scanner glass

It is recommended that the scanner glass be cleaned during every maintenance visit. Use the following
procedure to complete this task.

1. Open the ADF by lifting it up.

Cleaning the scanner glass 37

 2. Clean the image scanner area and flat-bed glass using a lint-free cloth.

3. Close the ADF.

Cleaning the ADF CIS (Contact Image Sensor)

It is recommended that the ADF CIS (Contact Image Sensor) be cleaned during every maintenance visit.
Use the following procedure to complete this task.

1. Open the ADF by lifting it up.

2. Clean the CIS scanning area, located underneath ADF, using a lint-free cloth.

3. Close the ADF.

Inspection procedures
Use the following procedures to inspect the printer during maintenance visits.

Inspect paper guide adjustment in trays

Checking paper guide adjustment and paper loading status is recommended during every visit. This is
important in order to reduce paper jams. Many paper jams occur due to incorrect paper stacking in the
trays.

1. Fan the paper.

38 Chapter 2 Product installation and maintenance

2. Load the paper. Make sure the paper guides are correctly adjusted.

Inspect consumables (LLC life remaining)

The check of consumable life remaining is recommended at every visit so that the LLC is replaced at
the proper time, and does not exceed its end of life. Active replacement is recommended if the LLC life
remaining low. This will maintain the expected print quality and, also help to reduce extra visits.

Find the Print Supplies information report by using the following control panel menu navigation:

1. Select the following control panel menus:

● Support tools

● Service (Enter Pin: 03078622)

● Advanced service

● Service reports

2. Select Supplies information report and click the Print button.

Inspection procedures 39
 Check the life remaining for each LLC in the Supplies information report. Refer to the following LLC (Long
life consumable) list.

Table 2-2 Long life consumables (LLCs)

Item Part number Life Remark

Yellow OPC W9075MC 135,000 pages

Magenta OPC W9075MC 135,000 pages

Cyan OPC W9075MC 135,000 pages

Black OPC W9074MC 200,000 pages

ITB cleaner 5PN64A 200,000 pages Manual counter reset

Intermediate transfer belt 430H4A 400,000 pages Manual counter reset. ITB
(ITB) unit kit cleaner involved in this kit

Transfer roller 5PN65A 200,000 pages Manual counter reset

Fuser unit (100V) 5PN50A 400,000 pages Only for Japan

Fuser unit (110V) 5PN61A 400,000 pages

Fuser unit (220V) 5PN62A 400,000 pages

Yellow developer unit 5PN58A 400,000 pages Manual counter reset

Magenta developer unit 5PN59A 400,000 pages Manual counter reset

Cyan developer unit 5PN60A 400,000 pages Manual counter reset

Black developer unit 5PN57A 400,000 pages Manual counter reset

Pickup/Forward/Separation 5PN66A 300,000 pages Manual counter reset

roller (for Tray 2-x)

Pickup/Forward/Separation 5RC02A 200,000 pages Manual counter reset

roller (for Tray1)

ADF roller kit (for 200 sheets z J8J95A 150,000 pages Manual counter reset
and dn bundles)

ADF roller kit (for 100 sheets 5RC01A 75,000 pages Flex-build bundle only
flex bundle)
Manual counter reset

NOTE: Maintenance part lifespans will vary depending upon printing patterns and the job mode used.

LLC removal and replacement procedures

Use the following links to see removal and replacement procedures for long-life consumables (LLCs).

● Removal and replacement: Fuser unit

● Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) cleaning unit kit

● Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB)

● Removal and replacement: Drum unit

● Removal and replacement: Developer unit

40 Chapter 2 Product installation and maintenance

 ● Removal and replacement: Tray 1 roller kit (pickup/forward/reverse)

● Removal and replacement: Tray 2, 3 roller kit (pickup/forward/reverse)

● Removal and replacement: ADF pickup roller kit (100sh)

● Removal and replacement: ADF pickup roller kit (200sh)

Counter reset after LLC replacement

The LLCs listed below require their counter reset manually after replacement. LLCs not listed here have
EEPROM/CRUM counters that are reset automatically.

● ITB cleaner (use steps 1 and 2)

● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit kit (use steps 1 and 2)

● Transfer roller (use steps 1 and 2)

● Developer units (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black) (use steps 1 and 2)

● Pickup/Forward/Separation roller (for Tray 2-x) (use steps 1 and 2)

● Pickup/Forward/Separation roller (for Tray1) (use steps 1 and 2)

● ADF roller kit (for 200-sheet dn/z bundles ADF or 100-sheet Flex ADF) (use steps 3 and 4)

Reset the counter from the control panel using the following instructions.

1. For all LLCs except the ADF roller kit: Select the following menus:

● Support tools

● Service (Enter Pin: 03078622)

● Reset supplies

2. Select the LLC being replaced, and then click the Reset button.

3. For the ADF roller kit LLC only: Select the following menus:

● Settings

● Manage Supplies

● Reset supplies

4. Select the Document Feeder Kit item, and then click the Reset button.

Counter reset after LLC replacement 41

 3 Theory of operation

You will learn more about theory of operation.

Base printer
Learn about the theory of operation for the base printer.

Covers (1 of 2)
Learn about the printer covers.

Figure 3-1 Covers (1 of 2)

C9

C8

C10
C22~~
C13

C15~
C11
C16

C14

C17

C19

C20

C21
C12
C18

42 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-1 Covers (1 of 2)

Callout Part name Part number

C8 Middle cover 6EQ94-40028

NOTE: Located behind the middle upper cover (towards the rear of the printer)
under the ISA whole unit.

C9 Middle upper cover 6EQ94-40017

C10 Right upper cover 6EQ94-40015

C11 Right rear cover 6EQ94-40006

C12 Right front cover 6EQ94-40005

C13 Right middle cover assembly 5QJ90-60114

C14 HIP cover 6EQ94-40032

C15 Middle left cover 6EQ94-40031

C16 Exit cover stacker 5QJ90-60116

C17 Inner cover 5QJ90-60117

NOTE: This cover is behind the front cover (C19).

C18 Front lower cover 6EQ94-40011

NOTE: This cover is behind Tray 2.

C19 Front cover assembly 5QJ90-60118

C20 Tray2 cover - CMF panel 5QJ90-40022

C21 Tray 3 cover - CMF panel 5QJ94-40016

C22 Exit stacker upper cover 6EQ94-40010

Covers (2of 2)
Learn about the printer covers.

Covers (2of 2) 43
 Figure 3-2 Covers (2of 2)

C4

C6

C1 C3

C5

C2 C7

Table 3-2 Covers (2of 2)

Callout Part name Part number

C1 Rear upper cover 6EQ94-40014

C2 Rear lower cover 6EQ94-40004

C3 Controller cover 6ER04-61005

C4 Exit rear cover 6EQ94-40009

C5 Left top cover JC63-04534B

C6 Left upper cover 6EQ94-40012

C7 Left cover 5QJ90-60115

Feeding system
Learn about the feeding system.

Feeding system overview

Learn about the feeding system overview.

44 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 The feeding system is responsible for the process ranging from picking up paper to ejecting it out of the
machine. This system is mainly composed of Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, registration unit, loop sensing unit, exit
unit, and duplex unit.

Feeding system workflow

Learn about the feeding system workflow.

Figure 3-3 Feeding system workflow

Table 3-3 Feeding system workflow

Callout Part name Description

1 Tray 1, 2, 3 Store paper for printing, picks up and transfers the paper to the registration
unit

2 Registration unit Arranges the paper moved from the tray

3 Loop sensing unit Controls the paper moving speed between the drum and the fuser

Feeding system workflow 45

 Table 3-3 Feeding system workflow (continued)

Callout Part name Description

4 Exit unit Discharge the paper to the outside of the product or move the paper path to
the duplex unit for duplex printing

5 Duplex unit Allow a paper to move from the exit unit to the registration unit for duplex
printing

Feeding system roller

Learn about the feeding system roller.

Figure 3-4 Feeding system roller

Table 3-4 Feeding system roller

Callout Part name Part number Description

R2 Tray 1 pickup roller JC93-01721B Pick up a paper on the tray

R3 Tray 1 forward roller 5QJ90-67001 Move a paper inside the machine

46 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-4 Feeding system roller (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

R4 Tray 1 reverse roller 5QJ90-67001 Prevent multiple paper feeding into the machine

R5 Tray 2 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Pick up a paper from the knock-up plate of the tray

R6 Tray 2 forward roller JC93-01726A Move a paper to the feed roller

R7 Tray 2 reverse roller JC93-01726A Prevent multiple paper feeding into the machine

R8 Tray 3 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Pick up a paper from the knock-up plate of the tray

R9 Tray 3 forward roller JC93-01726A Move a paper to the feed roller

R10 Tray 3 reverse roller JC93-01726A Prevent multiple paper feeding into the machine

R11 Tray 2 feed roller NA Move a paper to the registration roller

R12 Tray 3 feed roller NA Move a paper to the registration roller

R14 Registration roller NA Arrange a paper moved from the tray and moves the
paper to the ITB - second transfer roller

R15 Exit roller NA Move a paper to the exit unit

R16 Exit 2 feed roller (optional) NA Move a paper to the exit 2 unit

R17 Exit 2 roller (optional) NA Move a paper to the exit 2 unit

R18 Duplex 1 roller NA Move a paper to the duplex unit during duplex printing

R19 Duplex 2 roller NA Move a paper to the registration roller

Feeding system sensors

Learn about the feeding system sensors.

Figure 3-5 Feeding system sensors

Feeding system sensors 47

 Table 3-5 Feeding system sensors

Callout Part name Part number Sensor type Description

S1 Tray 1 paper empty 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (reflect) Check whether a paper is on
sensor the Tray 1

S2 Tray 2 empty sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check whether a paper is on
the Tray 2

S3 Tray 2 stack height 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Set the proper height of paper
sensor to make a contact with the
pickup roller

S4 Tray 2 feed sensor 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (reflect) Check whether the paper
correctly comes from the Tray
2

S5 Tray 2 open, paper JC93-01408A – Check whether the tray is

size sensor closed, make signals to identify
the paper size

S6 Tray 3 empty sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check whether a paper is on
the Tray 3

S7 Tray 3 stack height 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Set the proper height of paper
sensor to make a contact with the
pickup roller

S8 Tray 3 feed sensor 0604-001490 Photo interrupter (reflect) Check whether the paper
correctly comes from the Tray
3

S9 Tray 3 open, paper JC93-00018B – Check whether the tray is

size sensor closed, make signals to identify
the paper size

S10 Registration sensor 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (reflect) Check whether the paper
comes into the registration unit

S11 Loop sensor 1 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check whether the paper is
moved with the proper speed
and movement by the fuser

S12 Loop sensor 2 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check whether the paper is
moved with the proper speed
and movement by the fuser

S13 Fuser out sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check whether the paper
escapes well from the fuser

S14 Out bin 2 full sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check whether the paper
correctly goes out on the output
bin, and it is loaded up to the
maximum capacity

S15 Out bin 2 full sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check whether the paper goes
(optional) out on the output bin correctly,
and it is loaded up to the
maximum capacity.

S16 Duplex jam 1 sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Move a paper to the duplex unit
(optional) during duplex printing

S17 Duplex jam 2 sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check whether the paper goes
through the duplex unit

48 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Feeding system motors and solenoids
Learn about the feeding system motors and solenoids.

Figure 3-6 Feeding system motors and solenoids

Table 3-6 Feeding system motors and solenoids

Callout Part name Part number Motor type Description

M1 Feed motor JC31-00163A Hybrid stepping motor Drive the Tray1 rollers, feed
rollers, and trans roller

M2 Tray 2 pickup motor 5QJ90-64002 Stepping motor Drive the Tray 2 pickup, forward,
and reverse rollers or knock-up
plate

M3 Tray 3 pickup motor 5QJ90-64002 Stepping motor Drive the Tray 3 pickup, forward,
and reverse rollers or knock-up
plate

M4 Registration and Tray JC31-00123B Hybrid stepping motor Drive the registration roller and
1 motor Tray 1 roller

M29 Exit motor JC93-01686A Stepping motor Drive the rollers in the exit unit
to move the paper from the
fuser unit to the exit unit

M5 Exit 2 motor JC93-00336A Stepping motor Drive the exit 2 roller (optional)

Feeding system motors and solenoids 49

 Table 3-6 Feeding system motors and solenoids (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Motor type Description

M6 Duplex motor JC93-01687A Stepping motor Drive the rollers in the duplex
unit to move the paper from the
exit unit to the registration unit

SL1 Tray 1 pickup solenoid JC33-00029B Solenoid Move the pickup roller up and
down

SL2 Return gate solenoid JC33-00031B Solenoid Change the paper path to the
(optional) second exit unit

Tray 1 unit
Learn about the Tray 1 unit.

Tray 1 unit overview

Learn about Tray 1 unit overview.

The Tray 1 unit picks up the paper and delivers to the registration unit.

To ensure that the paper is placed on the Tray 1, a reflective type of tray empty sensor is placed on
the side of the paper doorway. The Tray 1 unit is equipped with three rollers to pull a paper and push
it into the inside of the printer, each called pickup, forward, and reverse roller. The pickup roller moves
downward to pull the paper, which is controlled by the Tray 1 solenoid. The Tray 1 pickup clutch controls
the timing of three rollers’ rotation coming from the registration and Tray 1 motor. The Tray 1 feed roller is
mounted to move the pulled paper into the registration unit. The Tray 1 clutch controls the timing of the
Tray 1 feed roller’s rotation coming from the registration and Tray 1 motor..

50 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-7 Overview of Tray 1 unit

Tray 1 unit overview 51

 Figure 3-8 Detail view of Tray 1 unit

Table 3-7 Parts information for Tray 1 unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U2 Tray 1 unit JC90-01869A Pick up a paper and delivers to registration unit

52 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-7 Parts information for Tray 1 unit (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

M4 Registration and Tray 1 JC31-00123B Drive the Tray 1 feed roller, and pickup/forward/reverse
motor rollers

CL1 Tray 1 clutch JC47-00037A Control the timing of Tray 1 feed roller’s rotation coming
from the registration motor

K1 Tray 1 roller kit 5RC02-67001 Include pickup, forward, and reverse rollers

R2 Tray 1 pickup roller JC93-01721B Pick up a paper on the Tray 1

R3 Tray 1 forward roller 5QJ90-67001 Move a paper inside the printer

R4 Tray 1 reverse roller 5QJ90-67001 Prevent multiple paper feeding into the printer

SL1 Tray 1 solenoid JC33-00029B Move the pickup roller up and down

S1 Tray 1 paper empty sensor 0604-001381 Check whether a paper is on the Tray 1

U1 Right door assembly JC95-02247A

1 Right door front link JC66-03235A

2 Right door front damper JC66-01425A

Tray 1 unit operation

Learn about Tray 1 unit operation.

1. The paper empty sensor detects whether a paper on Tray 1.

Figure 3-9 Tray 1 operation, view 1

2. The Tray 1 solenoid moves rightward.

3. Step 2 makes Tray 1 pickup roller moves downward until it touches the paper on the tray.

Tray 1 unit operation 53

 Figure 3-10 Tray 1 operation, view 2

4. The Tray 1 pickup roller moves the paper to the Tray 1 forward and reverse rollers (callout 4).

5. The Tray 1 forward roller moves the paper to the registration unit (callout 5).

Figure 3-11 Tray 1 operation, view 3

6. The Tray 1 pickup roller returns to the original position to wait for the next printing job (callout 6).

Figure 3-12 Tray 1 operation, view 4

54 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Tray 1 unit driving
Learn about Tray 1 unit driving.

Figure 3-13 Tray 1 unit driving

● Tray 1 driving: 1 registration and Tray 1 motor > 2 gear > 5 gear > 7 clutch/gear, Tray 1 pickup roller, Tray
1 forward roller

Tray 2/3 unit

Learn about the Tray 2/3 unit.

Tray 2/3 unit overview

Learn about the Tray 2/3 unit overview.

The Tray 2/3 units store paper. The Tray 2/3 pickup assembly picks up and transfers the paper to the feed
roller. Then the feed roller sends the paper to the registration unit.

NOTE: The initial setting of the Tray 2/3 unit is based on ISO216 standard. In countries where letter
size paper is used as the base, the tray guide must be adjusted to store the paper correctly before
printing.

Tray 1 unit driving 55

 Tray 2/3 cassette
Learn about Tray 2/3 cassette operation.

In the tray cassette section, there are a front guide and a rear guide to properly load the paper that is
adjustable for the paper to fit. And inside, there is a knock-up plate operated by the pickup motor, which
serves to lift the paper for the pickup process.

Figure 3-14 Overview of Tray 2/3 cassettes

Table 3-8 Overview of Tray 2/3 cassette

Numbe Part name Part number Description

r

U3 Tray 2 cassette 5QJ90-60111 Stores paper

U4 Tray 3 cassette 5QJ90-60119 Stores paper

56 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-15 Detail view of Tray 2 cassette

Table 3-9 Detail view of Tray 2 cassette

Callout Part name Part number Description

1 Rear guide NA Guide to keep the paper well organized and settled

2 Knock-up plate NA Raise the leading edge of the paper for pickup process

3 Front guide NA Guide to keep the paper well organized and settled

Figure 3-16 Detail view of Tray 3 cassette

Table 3-10 Detail view of Tray 3 cassette

Callout Part name Part number Description

1 Rear guide NA Guide to keep the paper well organized and settled

2 Knock-up plate NA Raise the leading edge of the paper for pickup process

3 Front guide NA Guide to keep the paper well organized and settled

Tray 2/3 pickup assembly

Learn about Tray 2/3 pickup assembly.

Tray 2/3 pickup assembly 57

 The Tray 2/3 pickup sections have a pickup roller, a forward roller, and a reverse roller that pulls the
paper from the tray.

The Tray 2 empty sensor checks whether a paper is loaded on the tray. The stack height sensor
detects the proper height to raise the knock-up plate to a position where it can be picked up. When the
appropriate pressure is formed between the pickup roller and the paper, and the pickup roller and the
forward roller are driven by the pickup motor, the paper is picked up and the reverse roller prevents a
multiple paper feeding. The feed sensors detect whether the paper leading edge is on the pickup roller
or the forward roller during pickup process.

Figure 3-17 Overview of Tray 2 pickup assembly

Table 3-11 Overview of Tray 2 pickup assembly

Callout Part name Part number Description

U5 Tray 2 pickup assembly JC93-01728A –

K3 Tray 2 roller kit 5PN66-67001 Roller kit for Tray 2 or Tray 3 includes pickup, forward and
reverse roller

R5 Tray 2 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Pick up a paper from the knock-up plate of the tray

R6 Tray 2 forward roller JC93-01726A Move a paper to the registration roller

R7 Tray 2 reverse roller JC93-01726A Move a paper to the registration roller

S2 Tray 2 empty sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the tray is empty

S3 Tray 2 stack height sensor 0604-001393 Check how much paper is loaded in the tray

S4 Tray 2 feed sensor 0604-001381 Check whether picking up a paper is properly processed

S5 Tray 2 open, paper size JC93-00018B Check whether the tray is closed, make signals to
sensor identify the paper size

M2 Tray 2 pickup motor 5QJ90-64002 Drive the Tray 2 pickup, forward, and reverse roller or the
knock-up plate

58 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-18 Detail view of Tray 2 pickup assembly

Table 3-12 Parts information for Tray 2 pickup assembly

Callout Part name Part number Description

U5 Tray 2 pickup assembly JC93-01728A –

R5 Tray 2 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Pick up a paper from the knock-up plate of the tray

R6 Tray 2 forward roller JC93-01726A Move a paper to the registration roller

R7 Tray 2 reverse roller JC93-01726A Move a paper to the registration roller

1 Tray 2 empty sensor NA Check whether the tray is empty

actuator

S2 Tray 2 empty sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the tray is empty

S3 Tray 2 stack height sensor 0604-001393 Check how much paper is loaded in the tray

Figure 3-19 Detail view of Tray 2 cassette, side view

Tray 2/3 pickup assembly 59

 Table 3-13 Parts information for Tray 2 pickup assembly, side view

Callout Part name Part number Description

M2 Tray 2 pickup motor 5QJ90-64002 Drive the Tray 2 pickup, forward, and reverse roller or the
knock-up plate

Figure 3-20 Overview of Tray 3 pickup assembly

Table 3-14 Overview of Tray 3 pickup assembly

Callout Part name Part number Description

U6 Tray 3 pickup assembly JC93-01729A –

K3 Tray 3 roller kit 5PN66-67001 Roller kit for Tray 2 or Tray 3 includes pickup, forward and
reverse roller

R8 Tray 3 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Pick up a paper from the knock-up plate of the tray

R9 Tray 3 forward roller JC93-01726A Move a paper to the registration roller

R10 Tray 3 reverse roller JC93-01726A Move a paper to the registration roller

S6 Tray 3 empty sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the tray is empty

S7 Tray 3 stack height sensor 0604-001393 Check how much paper is loaded in the tray

S8 Tray 3 feed sensor 0604-001490 Check whether picking up a paper is properly processed

S9 Tray 3 open, paper size JC93-00018B Check whether the tray is closed, make signals to
sensor identify the paper size

U10 Tray 3 pickup drive 5QJ90-64001 –

assembly

M3 Tray 3 pickup motor 5QJ90-64002 Drive Tray 3 pickup, forward, and reverse roller or the
knock-up plate

60 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-21 Detail view of Tray 3 pickup assembly

Table 3-15 Parts information for Tray 3 pickup assembly

Callout Part name Part number Description

U6 Tray 3 pickup assembly JC93-01729A –

R8 Tray 3 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Pick up a paper from the knock-up plate of the tray

R9 Tray 3 forward roller JC93-01726A Move a paper to the registration roller

R10 Tray 3 reverse roller JC93-01726A Move a paper to the registration roller

2 Tray 3 empty sensor NA Check whether the tray is empty

actuator

S6 Tray 3 empty sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the tray is empty

S7 Tray 3 stack height sensor 0604-001393 Check how much paper is loaded in the tray

Figure 3-22 Detail view of Tray 3 pickup assembly. side view

Table 3-16 Parts information for Tray 3 pickup assembly, side view

Callout Part name Part number Description

U10 Tray 3 pickup drive 5QJ90-64001 –

assembly

Tray 2/3 pickup assembly 61

 Table 3-16 Parts information for Tray 3 pickup assembly, side view (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

M3 Tray 3 pickup motor 5QJ90-64002 Drive Tray 3 pickup, forward, and reverse roller or the
knock-up plate

Tray 2/3 paper size sensor, tray heater

Learn about Tray 2/3 paper size sensor, tray heater.

The Tray 2/3 paper size sensor recognizes the paper size, at the same time the tray open sensor detects
whether the tray is opened or closed. The tray heater can be installed to prevent image defects or
curling of printed paper. This part is available as an option.

Figure 3-23 Detail view of Tray 2/3 paper size sensor, tray heater

Table 3-17 Parts information for Tray 2/3 paper size sensor, tray heater

Callout Part name Part number Description

S5 Tray 2 open, paper size JC93-00018B –

sensor

S9 Tray 2 open, paper size JC93-01408A –

sensor

U7 Tray heater 110V Y1G22-67901 Dry the damp paper with heating pipe

U8 Tray heater 220V Y1G22-67902 Dry the damp paper with heating pipe

c Tray heater connector NA Supply power to the tray heater

Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor

Learn about Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor.

The paper from the Tray 2 goes through the Tray 2 feed roller to the registration unit. The feed 2 roller
detects whether a paper is correctly comes from the tray. The paper from Tray 3 goes through the Tray 3
feed roller and feed 2, 3 sensor to the registration unit. The feed roller is driven by the feed motor.

62 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-24 Detail view of Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor

Table 3-18 Parts information for Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor

Callout Part name Part number Description

R11 Tray 2 feed roller NA Move a paper to the registration roller

R12 Tray 3 feed roller NA Move a paper to the registration roller

S4 Tray 2 feed sensor 0604-001381 Check whether the paper correctly comes from Tray 2

S8 Tray 3 feed sensor 0604-001490 Check whether the paper correctly comes from Tray 3

Figure 3-25 Detail view of Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor, side view

Table 3-19 Parts information for Tray 2/3 feed sensor, roller, motor, side view

Callout Part name Part number Description

M1 Feed motor JC31-00163A Drive the rollers of Tray1 and the feed rollers

Tray 2/3 operation

Learn about Tray 2/3 operation.

1. When the tray is closed, the tray input lever is pushed.

Tray 2/3 operation 63

 Figure 3-26 Tray 2/3 operation, view 1

2. The pickup roller moves down to contact the surface of the paper.

3. The Tray 2 or Tray 3 motor drives the knock-up plate to move upward to the paper to the pickup roller.

Figure 3-27 Tray 2/3 operation, view 2

4. The pickup roller moves the paper forward. The forward roller makes the paper move into
registration roller, and the reverse roller prevents multiple sheets of paper from being lifted at once.

64 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-28 Tray 2/3 operation, view 3

5. The feed roller moves one sheet of paper to the registration roller.

Tray 2/3 driving

Learn about Tray 2/3 driving.

Figure 3-29 Tray 2/3 driving, view 1

● Pickup: Tray 2/3 pickup motor > clockwise rotation > 1 gear > 2 gear (Tray 2/3 pickup roller)

● Tray lift: Tray 2/3 pickup motor > counterclockwise rotation > 1 gear > 3 gear > 4 gear > 5 gear > 6
gear and coupler (lift plate)

Tray 2/3 driving 65

 Figure 3-30 Tray 2/3 driving, view 2

● Feed 2 driving 1 feed motor > 2 gear > 3 gear, feed 2 driving

● Feed 3 driving 1 feed motor > 2 gear > 4 gear, feed 3 driving

Registration unit and loop sensing

Learn about registration and loop sensing.

Registration unit and loop sensing overview

Learn about registration unit and loop sensing.

Paper passes out of the tray through the registration unit and loop sensor toward the fuser unit.

Paper moves to the registration unit. It stops the paper for a very short period and aligns with the leading
edge of the paper correctly. Registration motor drives the registration roller so that the paper goes
between the ITB and second transfer roller. The paper reaches the loop sensor. The rotation speed of
the fuser unit is finely adjusted according to the change of the loop sensor signal. The paper passing
through the fuser goes out through the fuser out and the paper moves toward the exit unit.

66 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-31 Overview of the registration and loop sensing unit

Table 3-20 Overview of the registration and loop sensing unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U11 Registration unit 5QJ90-60129 Arrange the paper moved from the tray

S10 Registration sensor 0604-001381 Check whether the paper comes into the registration
unit

R14 Registration roller NA Align with the leading edge straight, moves the paper to
the drum and second transfer roller

U13 Second transfer roller 5PN65-67001 –

1 Loop sensor actuator JC66-05625A Make the signal changed when touching the paper

S11 Loop sensor 1 0604-001393 Check whether the paper is moved with the proper
speed and movement by the fuser

S12 Loop sensor 2 0604-001393 Check whether the paper is moved with the proper
speed and movement by the fuser

S13 Fuser out sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper moves out from the fuser
without a paper jam

M4 Registration and Tray 1 JC31-00123B Drive registration roller

motor

U15 Paper dust holder JC93-00078C Remove and store dust from the paper
assembly

Registration unit and loop sensing overview 67

 Figure 3-32 Detail view of registration and loop sensing unit, view 1

Table 3-21 Detail view of registration and loop sensing unit, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

U11 Registration unit 5QJ90-60129 Arrange the paper moved from the tray

S10 Registration sensor 0604-001381 Check whether the paper comes into the registration
unit

R14 Registration roller NA Align with the leading edge straight, moves the paper to
the drum and second transfer roller

Figure 3-33 Detail view of registration and loop sensing unit, view 2

Table 3-22 Detail view of registration and loop sensing unit, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

1 Loop sensor actuator JC66-05625A Make the signal changed when touching the paper

S11 Loop sensor 1 0604-001393 Check whether the paper is moved with the proper
speed and movement by the fuser

S12 Loop sensor 2 0604-001393 Check whether the paper is moved with the proper
speed and movement by the fuser

S13 Fuser out sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper moves out from the fuser
without a paper jam

68 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-34 Detail view of registration and loop sensing unit, view 3

Table 3-23 Detail view of registration and loop sensing unit, view 3

Callout Part name Part number Description

M4 Registration and Tray 1 JC31-00123B Drive registration roller

motor

Figure 3-35 Detail view of registration and loop sensing unit, view 4

Table 3-24 Detail view of registration and loop sensing unit, view 4

Callout Part name Part number Description

U15 Paper dust holder JC93-00078C Remove and store dust from the paper
assembly

Registration unit operation

Learn about registration unit operation.

1. The paper is moved into the registration until it reaches the registration roller.

Registration unit operation 69

 Figure 3-36 Registration unit operation

2. The registration roller keeps moving the paper toward the roller for a short period of time to align
with the leading edge straight.

3. The registration roller moves the paper to the drum and second transfer roller.

NOTE: Problems such as skew may occur due to the incorrect alignment of the paper. To correct this,
Service Tools has a function to adjust the timing of the registration roller’s resume operation.

Loop sensor operation

Learn about loop sensor operation.

Figure 3-37 Loop sensor operation

1. If the fuser unit moves the paper slower than the proper level, the curl of the paper accumulates and
touches the loop sensor actuator (callout a), it makes loop sensor (callout b) signal change.

2. The fuser operation speed is increasing slightly, and it makes the curl of the paper decreased until
the loop sensor signal turns back to the original state.

Registration unit driving

Learn about registration unit driving.

70 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-38 Registration unit driving

● Registration unit driving: 1 registration motor > 2 gear > 3 gear > 4 clutch/gear, registration drive

Exit unit
Learn about the exit unit.

Exit unit overview

Learn about the exit unit.

The exit unit is the last step of printing, and it discharges the paper to the outside of the product or
moves the paper through the paper path so that the it can be moved toward the duplex unit for duplex
printing.

The exit works a role of discharging the paper to the out bin. It is composed of an output bin 1 full sensor
that checks whether the paper is correctly discharged to the output bin and the stacked paper exceeds
the maximum capacity. In case of duplex printing, before discharging the paper, reverse the direction of
rotation of the roller to move the paper to the duplex unit. The exit roller to move the paper to the out bin
or duplex unit is driven by the exit motor.

Exit unit 71
 Figure 3-39 Overview of the exit unit

Table 3-25 Overview of the exit unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U17 Second exit unit (Optional) Y1G23-67001 An accessory to increase duplex printing speed,
essential for the finisher installment

U18 Job separator (Optional) 6GW52-67901 Second tray

U16 Exit unit JC90-01876A –

S14 Out bin 1 full sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper correctly goes out on the
output bin, and it is loaded up to the maximum capacity

R15 Exit 1 roller NA Moves a paper to the exit 1

U19 Exit stack guide JC90-01864A Guide the paper to sit well on the tray

M29 Exit motor JC93-01686A Drive the rollers in the exit unit to move the paper from
the fuser unit to the exit unit or from the exit unit to the
duplex unit

Figure 3-40 Detail view of the exit unit

Table 3-26 Detail view of the exit unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U16 Exit unit JC90-01876A –

72 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-26 Detail view of the exit unit (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

U18 Job separator (Optional) 6GW52-67901 Second tray

S14 Out bin 1 full sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper correctly goes out on the
output bin, and it is loaded up to the maximum capacity

R15 Exit 1 roller NA Moves a paper to the exit 1

Figure 3-41 Detail view of the exit unit, side view

Table 3-27 Detail view of the exit unit, side view

Callout Part name Part number Description

M29 Exit motor JC93-01686A Drive the rollers in the exit unit to move the paper from
the fuser unit to the exit unit or from the exit unit to the
duplex unit

Second exit unit (Optional)

Learn about the second unit overview.

Second exit unit is an accessory that is installed to make the duplex speed reduction when only the exit
1 unit is used equal to the simplex printing speed. In particular, this unit must be installed when installing
the inner finisher, stapler-stacker finisher or booklet finisher.

The out bin full 2 sensor is installed to check whether the paper is discharged to out bin 2, and at the
same time to check whether the out bin 2 is full. There is a duplex jam 1 sensor to check if the paper has
entered the duplex part correctly when printing duplex.

The exit 2 motor works for transferring paper to out bin 2 or in case of duplex printing operate opposite
direction so that the paper moves to the duplex unit. In this case, return gate solenoid moves so that the
paper path moves to the duplex unit direction.

Second exit unit (Optional) 73

 Figure 3-42 Overview of the second exit unit

Table 3-28 Overview of the second exit unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U17 Second exit unit Y1G23-67901 –

S15 Out bin 2 full sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper correctly goes out on the
output bin, and it is loaded up to the maximum capacity
(Optional, included in job separator)

M5 Exit 2 motor JC93-00802A Drive the exit 2 feed roller and exit 2 roller

S16 Exit 2 Sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper correctly moves to the duplex
unit

R16 Exit 2 feed roller NA Moves a paper to the exit 2 roller

R17 Exit 2 roller NA Moves a paper to the exit 2 or the duplex unit

Figure 3-43 Detail view of the second exit unit, view 1

Table 3-29 Detail view of the second exit unit, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

SL2 Return gate solenoid JC33-00031B Open or closes the paper path in case of printing to the
out bin 2

74 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-29 Detail view of the second exit unit, view 1 (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

S15 Out bin 2 full sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper correctly goes out on the
output bin, and it is loaded up to the maximum capacity
(Optional, included in job separator)

M5 Exit 2 motor JC93-00802A Drive the exit 2 feed roller and exit 2 roller

Figure 3-44 Detail view of the second exit unit, view 2

Table 3-30 Detail view of the second exit unit, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

S16 Exit 2 Sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper correctly moves to the duplex
unit

R16 Exit 2 feed roller NA Moves a paper to the exit 2 roller

R17 Exit 2 roller NA Moves a paper to the exit 2 or the duplex unit

Job separator (optional)

Learn about the job separator.

Figure 3-45 Job Separator (Optional)

Job separator is an output accessory which is installed at the exit 2 unit in the exit unit for storing paper
discharged to the out bin 2.

Job separator (optional) 75

 Figure 3-46 Overview of job separator

Table 3-31 Overview of job separator

Callout Part name Part number Description

U17 Second exit Y1G23-67001 Required when installing the job separator

U18 Job separator 5QK03-61008

1 Exit 2 tray NA Store printed paper

Exit unit operation

Learn about the exit unit operation.

Figure 3-47 Exit unit operation

1. In case of simplex printing to out bin 1, a paper flows through the paper path (callout 1).

Figure 3-48 Exit unit operation, view 1

2. In case of duplex printing, the exit motor rotates opposite direction to move the paper to the duplex
unit (callout 2).

76 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-49 Exit unit operation, view 1

3. When using the optional exit 2 unit, return gate solenoid moves to the direction of the arrow (callout
3) so that the paper moves to the out bin 2 direction.

Figure 3-50 Exit unit operation, view 1

Exit unit driving

Learn about the exit unit driving.

Exit unit driving 77

 Figure 3-51 Exit unit driving

Exit driving: 7 exit motor > clockwise rotation > 8 gear

Duplex driving: 7 exit motor > counterclockwise rotation > 8 gear

Second exit unit driving

Learn about the second exit unit driving.

Figure 3-52 Second exit unit driving

Second exit driving: 1 exit 2 motor > 2 gear > 3 gear > 4 gear

Duplex roller: 1 exit 2 motor > 2 gear > 5 gear > 6 gear

Duplex unit
Learn about the duplex unit.

Duplex unit overview

Learn about the duplex unit.

78 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Duplex unit is a device that allows paper to move from the exit unit to the registration unit for duplex
printing.

The paper returned from the exit unit or second exit unit moves through this unit mounted on the right
door. Duplex jam 2 sensor is applied in the middle of the duplex unit paper path to check whether the
paper flows through the duplex unit correctly. The operation of this unit is run by the duplex motor
mounted on the back of the right door unit.

Figure 3-53 Overview of the duplex unit

Table 3-32 Overview of the duplex unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U20 Duplex assembly JC95-02292A –

S17 Duplex jam sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper goes though the duplex unit

M6 Duplex motor JC93-00802A Drive rollers to move the paper from the exit unit to the
registration unit

Duplex unit overview 79

 Figure 3-54 Detail view of the duplex unit

Table 3-33 Detail view of the duplex unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

S17 Duplex jam sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper goes though the duplex unit

M6 Duplex motor JC93-00802A Drive rollers to move the paper from the exit unit to the
registration unit

R18 Duplex 1 roller NA Move a paper to the duplex 2 roller

R29 Duplex 2 roller NA Move a paper to the registration roller

Duplex unit operation

Learn about duplex unit operation.

1. In case of duplex printing, a paper turns back and moves to the duplex unit from the exit unit or the
second exit unit (callout 1).

Figure 3-55 Duplex unit operation, view 1

2. Duplex motor drives feeding rollers so that the paper goes through the duplex unit (callout 2).

80 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-56 Duplex unit operation, view 2

3. The paper arrived at the registration roller starts the next printing (callout 3).

Duplex unit driving

Learn about duplex unit driving.

Figure 3-57 Duplex unit driving

● Duplex unit driving: 1 duplex motor > 2 gear

Toner flow system

Learn about the toner flow system.

Toner flow overview

Learn about the toner flow overview.

Toner flow workflow

Learn about the toner flow workflow.

Duplex unit driving 81

 Figure 3-58 Toner flow workflow

Table 3-34 Toner flow workflow

Callout Part name Description

1 Toner cartridge Store the toner and moves the toner to the toner reservoir when printing

2 Toner duct Moves the toner to the developer unit

3 Image creation Form images and transfers toner to the paper to print out

4 Toner collection unit Receive discarded toner from drum and ITB and store it

Toner flow sensors

Learn about the toner flow sensors.

82 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-59 Toner flow sensors

Table 3-35 Toner flow sensors

Callout Part name Part number Sensor type Description

S19 Yellow toner residual JC32-00024A Inductance sensor Detect the toner level in the
amount sensor cartridge

S20 Magenta toner JC32-00024A Inductance sensor Detect the toner level in the
residual amount cartridge
sensor

S21 Cyan toner residual JC32-00024A Inductance sensor Detect the toner level in the
amount sensor cartridge

S22 Black toner residual JC32-00024A Inductance sensor Detect the toner level in the
amount sensor cartridge

S23 Toner collection unit 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Detect whether toner collection
detection sensor unit is installed

S24 Toner collection unit JC93-00492A Photo interrupter (reflect) Detect whether the toner
full sensor collection unit is full

Toner flow motors

Learn about the toner flow motors.

Toner flow motors 83

 Figure 3-60 Toner flow motors

Table 3-36 Toner flow motors

Callout Part name Part number Motor type Description

M7 Yellow toner dispense SS216-80501 Stepping motor Drive the yellow toner cartridge
motor

M8 Magenta toner SS216-80501 Stepping motor Drive the magenta toner

dispense motor cartridge

M9 Cyan toner dispense SS216-80501 Stepping motor Drive the cyan toner cartridge
motor

M10 Black toner dispense SS216-80501 Stepping motor Drive the black toner cartridge
motor

M11 Yellow, magenta, cyan SS216-80501 Stepping motor Transfer yellow, magenta, cyan
toner duct motor toner from toner cartridge to
developer unit

M12 Black toner duct SS216-80501 Stepping motor Transfer black toner from the
motor toner cartridge to the developer
unit

M13 Toner collection unit JC31-00166A Stepping motor Drive toner collection unit auger
motor

Toner flow system

Learn about the toner flow system.

84 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Toner cartridge
Learn about the toner cartridge.

Toner cartridge overview

Learn about the toner cartridge overview.

The toner cartridge is a unit that safely stores toner for printing and supplies toner in the duct direction
during printing.

When the toner cartridge is mounted on the product, the toner shutter opens to create a passage for
the toner to flow to the toner duct, and at the same time, the toner dispense motor rotates, preventing
the toner cartridge from being removed from the printer. If it is determined that there is no toner in the
toner cartridge, the toner unlock function is activated, and when the user selects it in the control panel,
the toner cartridge can be replaced in the printer.

The toner is transferred to the toner duct unit by driving the toner dispense motor. Through the auger
inside the toner cartridge, the toner moves toward the toner shutter and falls into the toner duct by
gravity.

Figure 3-61 Overview of the toner cartridge

Table 3-37 Overview of the toner cartridge

Callout Part name Part number Description

U21 Yellow, magenta toner JC93-01680A –

dispense and reservoir
motor assembly

M7 Yellow toner dispense SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply yellow toner to reservoir
motor

M8 Magenta toner dispense SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply magenta toner to
motor reservoir

Toner cartridge 85
 Table 3-37 Overview of the toner cartridge (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

U22 Cyan, black toner dispense JC93-01680A –

and reservoir motor
assembly

M9 Cyan toner dispense SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply cyan toner to reservoir
motor

M10 Black toner dispense SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply black toner to reservoir
motor

U23 Yellow toner cartridge – W9142-67005 Store yellow toner

standard yield

U24 Magenta toner cartridge – W9143-67005 Store magenta toner

standard yield

U25 Cyan toner cartridge – W9141-67006 Store cyan toner

standard yield

U26 Black toner cartridge – W9140-67005 Store black toner

standard yield

U27 Yellow toner cartridge – W9152-67007 Store yellow toner

high yield

U28 Magenta toner cartridge – W9153-67007 Store magenta toner

high yield

U29 Cyan toner cartridge – high W9151-67007 Store cyan toner

yield

U30 Black toner cartridge – W9150-67007 Store black toner

high yield

U31 Toner CRUM module JC93-01822A Part where the toner cartridge plug is connected
assembly

Figure 3-62 Detail view of the toner cartridge, view 1

Table 3-38 Detail view of the toner cartridge, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

U23 Yellow toner cartridge – W9142-67005 Store yellow toner

standard yield

86 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-38 Detail view of the toner cartridge, view 1 (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

U24 Magenta toner cartridge – W9143-67005 Store magenta toner

standard yield

U25 Cyan toner cartridge – W9141-67006 Store cyan toner

standard yield

U26 Black toner cartridge – W9140-67005 Store black toner

standard yield

U27 Yellow toner cartridge – W9152-67007 Store yellow toner

high yield

U28 Magenta toner cartridge – W9153-67007 Store magenta toner

high yield

U29 Cyan toner cartridge – high W9151-67007 Store cyan toner

yield

U30 Black toner cartridge – W9150-67007 Store black toner

high yield

Figure 3-63 Detail view of the toner cartridge, view 2

Table 3-39 Detail view of the toner cartridge, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

M7 Yellow toner dispense SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply yellow toner to reservoir
motor

M8 Magenta toner dispense SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply magenta toner to
motor reservoir

M9 Cyan toner dispense SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply cyan toner to reservoir
motor

M10 Black toner dispense SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply black toner to reservoir
motor

Toner cartridge operation

Learn about toner cartridge operation.

Toner cartridge operation 87

 1. Toner dispense motor drives when toner concentration sensor requires to supply the toner to the
developer unit (callout 1).

Figure 3-64 Toner cartridge operation

2. Toner auger drives, toner moves in the direction of the arrow (callout 2).

3. Toner moves toward the developer unit (callout 3).

Toner dispense and toner cartridge unlock driving

Learn about toner dispense and toner cartridge unlock driving.

88 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-65 Toner dispense, toner cartridge lock (clockwise)

Toner dispense, toner cartridge lock (clockwise)

● Toner dispense and lock driving: 9 PM-STEP motor > 10 gear > 11 gear > 12 gear > 13 gear > 14 gear >
17 coupler (toner cartridge and lock)

Toner cartridge unlock (counterclockwise)

● 9 PM-STEP motor > 10 gear > 11 gear > 12 gear > 13 gear > 15 latch > 16 holder > 18 holder

Toner duct
Learn about the toner duct.

Toner duct overview

Learn about the toner duct overview.

The toner duct unit serves to receive toner from the toner cartridge and transfers it to the developer
unit. The toner level in the cartridge is detected by the toner residual amount sensor which is located at
the toner duct unit. Toner flow is operated by the toner duct motor.

Toner duct 89
 Figure 3-66 Overview of toner duct

Table 3-40 Overview of the toner duct

Callout Part name Part number Description

U32 Yellow toner duct unit 5QJ94-40001 Transfer yellow toner from toner cartridge to developer
unit

U33 Magenta toner duct unit 5QJ94-40001 Transfer magenta toner from toner cartridge to
developer unit

U34 Cyan toner duct unit 5QJ94-40001 Transfer cyan toner from toner cartridge to developer
unit

U35 Black toner duct unit 5QJ94-40001 Transfer black toner from toner cartridge to developer
unit

U36 Yellow toner guide unit JC93-01802A –

S19 Yellow toner residual JC32-00024A Detect the yellow toner level in the cartridge
amount sensor

U37 Magenta toner guide unit JC93-01802A –

S20 Magenta toner residual JC32-00024A Detect the magenta toner level in the cartridge
amount sensor

U38 Cyan toner guide unit JC93-01802A –

S21 Cyan toner residual JC32-00024A Detect the cyan toner level in the cartridge
amount sensor

U39 Black toner guide unit JC93-01802A –

S22 Black toner residual JC32-00024A Detect the black toner level in the cartridge
amount sensor

U21 Yellow, magenta toner JC93-01680A –

dispense and duct motor
assembly

90 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-40 Overview of the toner duct (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

M11 Yellow, magenta toner duct SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply yellow and magenta toner
motor to the developer unit

U22 Cyan, black toner dispense JC93-01680A –

and duct motor assembly

M12 Cyan, black toner duct SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply cyan and black toner to
motor the developer unit

Figure 3-67 Detail view of the toner duct, view 1

Table 3-41 Detail view of the toner duct, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

U32 Yellow toner duct unit 5QJ94-40001 Transfer yellow toner from toner cartridge to developer
unit

U33 Magenta toner duct unit 5QJ94-40001 Transfer magenta toner from toner cartridge to
developer unit

U34 Cyan toner duct unit 5QJ94-40001 Transfer cyan toner from toner cartridge to developer
unit

U35 Black toner duct unit 5QJ94-40001 Transfer black toner from toner cartridge to developer
unit

Toner duct overview 91

 Figure 3-68 Detail view of the toner duct, view 2

Table 3-42 Detail view of the toner duct, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

U36 Yellow toner guide unit JC93-01802A –

S19 Yellow toner residual JC32-00024A Check whether the yellow toner cartridge is empty
amount sensor

Figure 3-69 Detail view of the toner duct, view 3

Table 3-43 Detail view of the toner duct, view 3

Callout Part name Part number Description

M11 Yellow, magenta toner duct SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply yellow and magenta toner
motor to the developer unit

M12 Cyan, black toner duct SS216-80501 Drive toner cartridge to supply cyan and black toner to
motor the developer unit

Toner residual amount sensor operation

Learn about the toner residual amount sensor operation.

92 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 1. When the toner is left enough in the toner cartridge, toner consumption is calculated by an
algorithm.

Figure 3-70 Toner residual amount sensor operation

2. If toner in the toner cartridge runs out, the toner residual amount sensor (callout a) detects the
toner level in the cartridge by checking carrier amount and displays a toner with very low message.

Toner duct operation

Learn about the toner duct operation.

Figure 3-71 Toner duct operation

1. Toner comes from the toner cartridge when the toner concentration sensor checks toner is very low
for creating the images at the developer unit.

2. Toner from the toner cartridge move to the toner duct unit.

3. Toner moves to the developer unit by the auger which is operated by the toner duct motor.

Toner duct operation 93

 Toner duct driving
Learn about toner duct driving.

Figure 3-72 Toner duct driving

● Yellow, magenta toner duct driving: 1 PM-STEP motor > 2 gear > 3 gear > 4 gear > 5 gear

● Cyan, black toner duct driving: 1 PM-STEP motor > 6 gear > 7 gear > 8 gear

Toner Collection Unit (TCU)

Learn about the Toner Collection Unit (TCU).

Toner Collection Unit (TCU) overview

Learn about the Toner Collection Unit (TCU).

The toner collection unit receives and stores waste toner from developer unit, drum unit and ITB unit.

When the toner collection unit is installed, the toner collection unit detection sensor identifies that
whether the toner collection unit is correctly attached. As waste toners accumulate in this unit, a toner
collection motor and an auger connected to it help to load the toner flat into the unit. When the waste
toner becomes full inside the toner collection unit, the toner collection unit full sensor detects it and
displays a warning message, which guides the customer to replace the unit at an appropriate time.

NOTE: The Toner Collection Unit (TCU) is interchangeably used with the Waste Toner Bottle (WTB).
These are synonymous for related parts or terms.

94 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-73 Overview of the toner collection unit

Table 3-44 Overview of the toner collection unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U40 Toner collection unit X3A83-67923 Store the toner waste

S23 Toner collection unit 0604-001393 Detect whether the toner collection unit is installed
detection sensor

U41 Toner collection unit drive JC93-00445A –

assembly

M13 Toner collection unit motor JC31-00166A Move the auger so that the waste toner is stored flat
inside the unit

S24 Toner collection unit full JC93-00492A Detect whether the toner collection unit is full
sensor

Figure 3-74 Detail view of the toner collection unit, view 1

Toner Collection Unit (TCU) overview 95

 Table 3-45 Detail view of the toner collection unit, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

U36

Figure 3-75 Detail view of the toner collection unit, view 2

Table 3-46 Detail view of the toner collection unit, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

S23 Toner collection unit 0604-001393 Detect whether the toner collection unit is installed
detection sensor

S24 Toner collection unit full JC93-00492A Detect whether the toner collection unit is full
sensor

M13 Toner collection unit motor JC31-00166A Move the auger so that the waste toner is stored flat
inside the unit

Toner collection unit operation

Learn about the toner collection unit operation.

1. After printing, the remaining toner moves from the developer, drum, and ITB cleaning unit to the
toner collection unit.

96 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-76 Toner collection unit operation, view 1

2. The waste toners accumulated inside the toner collection unit are spread flat by an auger operated
by the toner collection unit motor.

Figure 3-77 Toner collection unit operation, view 2

3. The toner collection unit full sensor transmits LED beam, then receives the reflected value from the
toner collection unit so that it checks whether the toner collection unit is full.

Figure 3-78 Toner collection unit operation, view 3

Toner collection unit operation 97

 Toner collection unit driving
Learn about toner collection unit driving.

Figure 3-79 Toner collection unit driving

● Toner collection driving: 1 toner collection unit motor > 2 gear

Image creation
Learn about image creation.

Image creation overview

Learn about the image creation overview.

Image creation workflow

Learn about the image creation workflow.

Figure 3-80 Image creation workflow

98 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-47 Image creation workflow

Callout Part name Description

1 Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) Construct a latent image by removing electric charges by a laser on the
surface of the drum

2-1 Developer Receive toner from reservoir unit and makes toner have electrical properties

2-2 Drum Receive toner from the developer unit and creates the image

3 Image Transfer Belt (ITB) Combine the four color-toners to transfer the toner onto the paper

4 Second transfer Transfer the image formed on the ITB onto the paper

5 ITB cleaning Remove toner generated during printing and color registration patterns
generated during color plain registration process

6 Color Plane Registration Superpose cyan, magenta, yellow, and black 4 colors to express images
(CPR) correctly

7 Fuser Apply heat and pressure to the toner particles to adhere to the paper

Image creation sensors

Learn about the toner flow sensors.

Figure 3-81 Image creation sensors

Table 3-48 Image creation sensors

Callout Part name Part number Sensor type Description

S27 LSU temperature NA – Sense the temperature inside

sensor LSU

Image creation sensors 99

 Table 3-48 Image creation sensors (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Sensor type Description

S28 LSU LD power 1,2,3,4 NA – Generate the laser light by color

S29, LSU Hsync 2,3 NA – Decide the starting point of a

S30 line

S25 LSU shutter open NA Photo interrupter (sensing) Check whether the LSU cover is
sensor open or closed

S26 LSU shutter close NA Photo interrupter (sensing) Check whether the LSU cover is
sensor open or closed

S31 Yellow toner NA Density sensor Measure toner concentration

concentration sensor in the yellow developer unit to
control the amount of supplying
toner

S32 Magenta toner NA Density sensor Measure toner concentration in

concentration sensor the magenta developer unit to
control the amount of supplying
toner

S33 Cyan toner NA Density sensor Measure toner concentration

concentration sensor in the cyan developer unit to
control the amount of supplying
toner

S34 Black toner NA Density sensor Measure toner concentration

concentration sensor in the black developer unit to
control the amount of supplying
toner

S35 Yellow drum home 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check the operation of the
sensor yellow drum motor

S36 Magenta drum home 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check the operation of the
sensor magenta drum motor

S37 Cyan drum home 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check the operation of the cyan
sensor drum motor

S38 Black drum home 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check the operation of the
sensor black drum motor

S39 ITB engage sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Check the position of the color
transfer roller

S40 Front CPR sensor JC32-00014A Density sensor Detect front side image density

S41 Center CPR sensor JC32-00014A Density sensor Detect center image density

S42 Rear CPR sensor JC32-00014A Density sensor Detect rear side image density

S43 CPR shutter sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Detect shutter location

S44 Thermostat NA – Cut off the power supply to

the halogen lamp by opening
the circuit when the fusing belt
becomes abnormally hot

S45 Thermistor NA Non-contact type Measure the surface

temperature of the fuser belt by
2 non-contact type thermistors

S46 Wrap jam sensor NA Density sensor Identify whether wrap jam
occurs inside the fuser unit

100 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-48 Image creation sensors (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Sensor type Description

S51 Fuser gap sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (sensing) Make the fuser pressed or
released

P18-1 Yellow eraser NA – Convert drum surface potential

to the initial state

P18-2 Magenta eraser NA – Convert drum surface potential

to the initial state

P18-3 Cyan eraser NA – Convert drum surface potential

to the initial state

P18-4 Black eraser NA – Convert drum surface potential

to the initial state

Image creation motors

Learn about the image creation motors.

Figure 3-82 Image creation motors

Table 3-49 Image creation motors

Callout Part name Part number Motor type Description

M14 LSU motor NA Polygon motor Apply the laser to the drum
surface as a line

M15 LSU shutter motor NA Stepping motor Drive the LSU shutter

M21 Yellow drum motor JC31-00123C BLDC motor Drive the yellow drum

M22 Magenta drum motor JC31-00123C BLDC motor Drive the magenta drum

M23 Cyan drum motor JC31-00123C BLDC motor Drive the cyan drum

Image creation motors 101

 Table 3-49 Image creation motors (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Motor type Description

M24 Black drum motor JC31-00123C BLDC motor Drive the black drum and ITB
unit

M25 Yellow, magenta, cyan JC31-00123B Stepping motor Drive the yellow, magenta, cyan
developer motor developer unit

M26 Black developer JC31-00123B Stepping motor Drive the black developer unit
motor

M27 ITB engage motor NA Stepping motor Detach or attach the color
transfer roller to the drum

M29 Fuser, exit motor JC93-01084A BLDC motor Drive the fuser unit, the exit1
roller, and the exit trans roller

M30 Fuser gap motor JC31-00144G Stepping motor Make a contact with the
fuser belt and the pressure
roller when printing. The motor
detaches the fuser belt from
the pressure roller after printing

M27 CPR shutter motor JC31-00078A DC motor Drive the CAM to change the
(not shutter location
shown)

Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)

Learn about the Laser Scanning Unit (LSU).

Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) overview

Learn about the Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) overview.

The Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) constructs a latent image by removing electric charges by a laser on the
surface of the drum.

The LSU temperature sensor detects the inside temperature of the LSU. In case of detecting
temperature change inside the LSU, Color Plain Registration (CPR) will be performed. The LSU Laser
Diode (LD) power makes a laser, driving the LSU motor to expose the laser on the drum as a line.

The LSU skew adjustment is operated manually to align the cyan, magenta and yellow colors parallel to
the black color with reference to the ACR result.

The LSU shutter is closed when the front door or side cover is opened and the power is on. This protects
the LSU window from toner contamination. Except in this instance, the LSU shutter stays open. The LSU
shutter sensor checks the operation of the LSU shutter.

IMPORTANT: HP recommends performing the CPR reference adjustment in Service Tools when any of
the following occur:

● Initial printer setup

● LSU, OPC unit, Deve unit, or ITB unit is reinstalled or replaced

● CPR image issues caused by an ACR error

102 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-83 Overview of the laser scanning unit

Table 3-50 Overview of the laser scanning unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U42 LSU unit JC97-05148A Develop an image on the drum surface

M14 LSU motor NA Apply the laser to the drum surface as a line

M15 LSU shutter motor NA Drive the LSU shutter

S25 LSU shutter close sensor NA Check where the LSU cover is open or closed

S26 LSU shutter open sensor NA Check where the LSU cover is open or closed

M16 Yellow LSU skew NA Adjust the parallel alignment of the yellow color based on
adjustment knob the black color

M17 Magenta LSU skew NA Adjust the parallel alignment of the magenta color based
adjustment knob on the black color

M18 Cyan LSU skew adjustment NA Adjust the parallel alignment of the cyan color based on
knob the black color

S27 LSU temperature NA Sense the temperature inside LSU

S28 LSU LD power NA Generate the laser

S29 LSU Hsync 2 NA Decide the starting point of a line

S30 LSU Hsync 3 NA Decide the starting point of a line

Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) overview 103

 Figure 3-84 Detail view of the laser scanning unit

Table 3-51 Detail view of the laser scanning unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

M15 LSU shutter motor NA Drive the LSU shutter

S25, LSU shutter sensor NA Check where the LSU cover is open or closed
S26

S28 LSU LD power NA Generate the laser

S30 LSU Hsync 3, 4 NA Decide the starting point of a line

U38

Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) operation

Learn about the Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) operation.

1. The LSU shutter is closed to prevent glass contamination. When replacing toner, replacing LLC
components, or doing other maintenance, the LSU shutter motor drives to open and close the
sensor.

Figure 3-85 Laser scanning unit operation

2. The LSU shutter is opened to emit laser scanning beam to the drum surface.

104 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

3. The polygon motor (Callout b) operates, making laser diode power to generate the laser. The F1
(callout c) and F2 (callout c) refract the laser to reach the drum surface. The potential of the drum
surface exposed to the laser changes in the form of an image.

Figure 3-86 Laser scanning unit operation

4. There are 2 LSU Hsync boards with 1 beam detection sensors (2 sensors in total). The 2 beams
generate horizontal sync (Hsync) by detecting the beam from the LSU LD power located at the scan
start point, and scan the data based on this Hsync.

Figure 3-87 Laser scanning unit operation

5. Adjustment.

a. Sub Scan line position for the cyan, magenta, and yellow color

The adjustment of the sub scan line position for the cyan, magenta, and yellow color is based
on the line position for the black color. The printer measures the gap between the lines of each
color in the pattern on the ITB. When the gap of a color is incorrect, the printer moves the image
of the color up or down on the sub scan axis. To do this, it changes the laser write timing for that
color.

b. Main Scan line position for the cyan, magenta, and yellow color

When the printer detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, it changes
the laser write start timing for each scan line.

c. Magnification Adjustment for the cyan, magenta, and yellow color

When the printer detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the LD clock
frequency for the required color.

d. Skew for the cyan, magenta, and yellow color

The adjustment of the skew for the cyan, magenta, and yellow color is based on the line position
for black color.

Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) operation 105

 Adjusting the laser scanner assembly skew error
Learn about adjusting the laser scanner assembly skew error.

1. Check the skew error.

a. Execute the CPR.

Machine Setup > General Settings > Image Management > Auto Color Registration

b. Print a CPR report.

SVC (Tech) Mode > Information > Print Reports > Auto Color Registration

c. Check the [Y] [M] [C] skew data in the CPR report.

NOTE: If CPR fails, do not refer to [Y] [M] [C] Skew Data.

When CPR is successful, the correct [Y] [M] [C] skew data appears in the CPR report (for the
current scanner assembly).

IMPORTANT: The standard skew data value is 200. If the skew data in the report is 200, skew
adjustment in not necessary.

Figure 3-88 CPR report skew data

2. Adjust the skew error.

a. Open the front cover. Remove the toner collection unit.

b. Locate the three screw adjustment holes.

106 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-89 Y/M/C skew adjustment holes

Y M C

c. Use a Phillips screwdriver to make the adjustment.

NOTE: One click is equal to 1/7 dot.

● Skew date: 200: No adjustment needed.

● Skew date: < 200: Rotate the driver in a counterclockwise direction

For example, if the skew data is 192 200 — 192=8 clicks in the counterclockwise (CCW)
direction.

● Skew date: > 200: Rotate the driver in a clockwise (CW) direction

For example, if the skew data is 213: 200 — 213=13 clicks in the clockwise direction.

Figure 3-90 Skew adjustment

CW:
Skew date > 200

CCW:
Skew date < 200

Adjusting the laser scanner assembly skew error 107

 3. Recheck the skew error.

a. Execute the CPR after skew adjustment.

Machine Setup > General Settings > Image Management > Auto Color Registration

b. Print a CPR report.

SVC (Tech) Mode > Information > Print Reports > Auto Color Registration

c. Check the [Y] [M] [C] skew data in the CPR report.

d. If the values for YMC is 200 ±7, the skew adjustment is complete.

NOTE: If the value does not meet the target, repeat steps 1 through 3 again.

Developer and drum unit

Learn about the developer and drum unit.

Developer and drum unit overview

Learn about the developer and the drum unit.

The developer unit receives toner from the reservoir unit and creates images by the toner with the drum
unit.

The toner concentration sensor determines whether the toner in the developer unit is insufficient. In this
case, the developer unit receives the toner from the reservoir unit. The newly supplied toner is evenly
mixed with the existing toner by the mixing auger. At this time, the developer unit's roller and auger are
driven by the developer motor. The end of the developer unit is connected to the waste toner duct, the
wasted toner after developing process are thrown away to the waste toner duct.

The drum unit receives toner from the developer unit and develops the image. Most of the developed
toner is moved to the transfer unit to combine the yellow, magenta, cyan, and black colors and prints out
on a paper. Remaining toners that are not relocated to the transfer unit are separated from the drum by
the cleaning blade and moved to the waste toner duct.

The drum unit is driven by the drum motor, and the black drum motor drives not only the black drum unit
but also the ITB at the same time. As for the rotation of the drum motor, the drum home sensor checks
whether the drum motor rotates.

NOTE: When replacing drum or drum motor, running “Full Auto Color Registration” in Service Tools is
recommended.

108 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-91 Overview of the developer

Table 3-52 Overview of the developer

Callout Part name Part number Description

U47 Yellow developer unit 5PN58-67001 Mix and charge the yellow toner with the carrier, and
deliver them to the drum unit

U48 Magenta developer unit 5PN59-67001 Mix and charge the magenta toner with the carrier, and
deliver them to the drum unit

U49 Cyan developer unit 5PN60-67001 Mix and charge the cyan toner with the carrier, and
deliver them to the drum unit

U50 Black developer unit 5PN57-67001 Mix and charge the black toner with the carrier, and
deliver them to the drum unit

K4 Yellow developer powder – –

kit

K5 Magenta developer – –
powder kit

K6 Cyan developer powder kit – –

K7 Black developer powder kit – –

S31 Yellow toner concentration NA Measure toner concentration in the yellow developer unit
sensor to control the amount of supplying toner

S32 Magenta toner NA Measure toner concentration in the magenta developer

concentration sensor unit to control the amount of supplying toner

S33 Cyan toner concentration NA Measure toner concentration in the cyan developer unit
sensor to control the amount of supplying toner

Developer and drum unit overview 109

 Table 3-52 Overview of the developer (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

S34 Black toner concentration NA Measure toner concentration in the black developer unit
sensor to control the amount of supplying toner

U51 Drum, developer drive JC93-01661A –

assembly

M23 Yellow, magenta, cyan JC31-00123B Drive yellow, magenta, cyan developer unit
developer motor

M24 Black developer motor JC31-00123B Drive black developer unit

Figure 3-92 Overview of the drum

Table 3-53 Overview of the drum

Callout Part name Part number Description

U43 Yellow drum unit W9075-67001 Receive yellow toner from the developer unit and
create the image

U44 Magenta drum unit W9075-67001 Receive magenta toner from the developer unit
and create the image

U45 Cyan drum unit W9075-67001 Receive cyan toner from the developer unit and
create the image

U46 Black drum unit W9074-67001 Receive black toner from the developer unit and
create the image

U51 Drum, developer drive JC93-01661A –

assembly

110 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-53 Overview of the drum (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

M19 Yellow drum motor JC31-00123C Drive the yellow drum

M20 Magenta drum motor JC31-00123C Drive the magenta drum

M21 Cyan drum motor JC31-00123C Drive the cyan drum

M22 Black drum and ITB JC31-00123C Drive the black drum, the ITB, and the ITB cleaning
motor unit

S35 Yellow drum home 0604-001393 Check the operation of the yellow drum motor
sensor

S36 Magenta drum home 0604-001393 Check the operation of the magenta drum motor
sensor

S37 Cyan drum home 0604-001393 Check the operation of the cyan drum motor
sensor

S38 Black drum home 0604-001393 Check the operation of the black drum motor
sensor

Figure 3-93 Detail view of the developer and drum, view 1

Table 3-54 Detail view of the developer and drum, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

U43 Yellow drum unit W9075-67001 Receive yellow toner from the developer unit and create
the image

U44 Magenta drum unit W9075-67001 Receive magenta toner from the developer unit and
create the image

U45 Cyan drum unit W9075-67001 Receive cyan toner from the developer unit and create
the image

U46 Black drum unit W9074-67001 Receive black toner from the developer unit and create
the image

U47 Yellow developer unit 5PN58-67001 Mix and charge the yellow toner with the carrier, and
deliver them to the drum unit

U48 Magenta developer unit 5PN59-67001 Mix and charge the magenta toner with the carrier, and
deliver them to the drum unit

Developer and drum unit overview 111

 Table 3-54 Detail view of the developer and drum, view 1 (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

U49 Cyan developer unit 5PN60-67001 Mix and charge the cyan toner with the carrier, and
deliver them to the drum unit

U50 Black developer unit 5PN57-67001 Mix and charge the black toner with the carrier, and
deliver them to the drum unit

Figure 3-94 Detail view of the developer and drum, view 2

Table 3-55 Detail view of the developer and drum, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

S31 Yellow toner concentration NA Measure toner concentration in the yellow developer unit
sensor to control the amount of supplying toner

Figure 3-95 Detail view of the developer and drum, view 3

Table 3-56 Detail view of the developer and drum, view 3

Callout Part name Part number Description

M19 Yellow drum motor JC31-00123C Drive the yellow drum

112 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-56 Detail view of the developer and drum, view 3 (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

M20 Magenta drum motor JC31-00123C Drive the magenta drum

M21 Cyan drum motor JC31-00123C Drive the cyan drum

M22 Black drum and ITB motor JC31-00123C Drive the black drum, the ITB, and the ITB cleaning unit

M23 Yellow, magenta, cyan JC31-00123B Drive yellow, magenta, cyan developer unit
developer motor

M24 Black developer motor JC31-00123B Drive black developer unit

S35 Yellow drum home sensor 0604-001393 Check the operation of the yellow drum motor

S36 Magenta drum home 0604-001393 Check the operation of the magenta drum motor
sensor

S37 Cyan drum home sensor 0604-001393 Check the operation of the cyan drum motor

S38 Black drum home sensor 0604-001393 Check the operation of the black drum motor

Developer and drum unit operation

Learn about the developer and drum unit operation.

Figure 3-96 Developer and drum unit operation

1. The auger (callout 1) mixes the developer and the toner.

2. The toner concentration sensor (callout 2) detects whether the toner in the developer unit is at an
appropriate level to create an image.

3. Toner in auger moves toward to the development roller (callout 3).

4. Drum surface is charged with (-) charge using by a charging roller (callout 4).

Developer and drum unit operation 113

 5. Toners at the development roller moves to drum roller at the point facing each other (callout 5).

6. When the transfer process is over, the eraser returns the drum surface potential to its original state
(callout 6).

7. The cleaning blade removes the remaining toner from the drum surface (callout 7).

Developer and drum unit driving

Learn about developer and drum unit driving.

Figure 3-97 Developer and drum unit driving, view 1

Figure 3-98 Developer and drum unit driving, view 2

114 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-99 Developer and drum unit driving, view 3

1. Developer drive

● Black developer drive: 7 black developer motor > 9 gear

● Cyan developer drive: 10 cyan developer motor > 11 gear

● Magenta developer drive: 10 magenta developer motor > 13 gear > 14 gear

● Yellow developer drive: 10 yellow developer motor > 13 gear > 15 gear > 16 gear

2. Drum drive

● Black drum drive: 1 black drum and ITB motor > 4 gear and coupler

● Cyan drum drive: 5 yellow, magenta, cyan drum motor > 6 gear and coupler

Image Transfer Belt (ITB)

Learn about the Image Transfer Belt (ITB).

Image Transfer Belt (ITB) overview

Learn about the Image Transfer Belt (ITB).

The Image Transfer Belt(ITB) combines the four-color toners to transfer the toner on the paper.

Each color toner image on the four drums is transferred to the ITB by the first transfer roller inside the
ITB unit.

The image overlapped by four colors is transferred to the paper by the transfer 2 roller. The remaining
toners are removed by the cleaning blade and transferred to the toner collection unit. This process is
completed with one rotation of the ITB.

The ITB engage motor attaches and detaches the yellow, magenta, cyan and black transfer rollers from
drum unit. At the same time, the ITB engage sensor detects whether the ITB is engaged. This movement
will save color toner and color drum lifespan. The ITB engage sensor checks the position of the color
transfer rollers.

Image Transfer Belt (ITB) 115

 Figure 3-100 Overview of the ITB

Table 3-57 Overview of the ITB

Callout Part name Part number Description

K8 ITB and cleaning unit kit 430H4-67001 Include image transfer belt and ITB cleaning unit

U52 Image transfer belt (ITB) 5QJ90-60146 Combine and transfer the color toners

S39 ITB engage sensor 0604-001381 Check the position of the color transfer roller

M25 ITB engage motor JC93-00452A Detach or attach the color transfer roller to the drum unit

Figure 3-101 Detail view of the ITB, view 1

Table 3-58 Detail view of the ITB, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

U52 Image transfer belt (ITB) 5QJ90-60146 Combine and transfer the color toners

116 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-102 Detail view of the ITB, view 2

Table 3-59 Detail view of the ITB, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

M25 ITB engage motor JC93-00452A Detach or attach the color transfer roller to the drum unit

Image Transfer Belt (ITB) operation

Learn about the Image Transfer Belt (ITB) operation.

The toner moves from the drum unit to the ITB (callout 3) by the 4 first transfer rollers (callout 2).
This four-color superimposed image moves to the ITB driving roller (callout 1) and touches the second
transfer roller to transfer the image on the paper. The black drum motor (callout 4) drives the ITB (callout
3) using the ITB driving rollers (callout 2) and gears.

Figure 3-103 Operation of the ITB

Image Transfer Belt (ITB) driving

Learn about Image Transfer Belt (ITB) driving.

• T1 engage: 1 T1 engage motor > • 2 gear

Image Transfer Belt (ITB) operation 117

 Figure 3-104 ITB driving, view 1

Figure 3-105 ITB driving, view 2

118 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-106 ITB driving, view 3

ITB drive: 1 black drum and ITB motor > 2 gear > 3 gear and coupler

● ITB engage drive: 4 ITB engage motor > 5 gear

Second Transfer (T2) unit

Learn about the Second Transfer (T2) unit.

Second Transfer (T2) unit overview

Learn about the Second Transfer (T2) unit overview.

The second transfer unit transfers the image formed on the ITB to paper.

The second transfer unit is a roller facing the image transfer belt, and it has the opposite polarity of the
toner by receiving high voltage from the HVPS. At the same time, the roller contacts the ITB and creates
pressure to transfer the toner to the paper, moving the paper from the registration unit to the fuser unit.

Figure 3-107 Overview of the second transfer unit

Second Transfer (T2) unit 119

 Table 3-60 Overview of the second transfer unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U13 Second Transfer (T2) unit 5PN65-67001 –

R19 Second Transfer (T2) roller NA Create a constant pressure in contact with the ITB to
help the image transfer process, and moves the paper to
the fuser

Figure 3-108 Detail view of the second transfer unit

Table 3-61 Detail view of the second transfer unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U13 Second Transfer (T2) unit 5PN65-67001 –

R19 Second Transfer (T2) roller NA Create a constant pressure in contact with the ITB to
help the image transfer process, and moves the paper to
the fuser

Second transfer unit operation

Learn about the second transfer unit operation.

1. The HVPS transfers a voltage opposite to the toner delivered on the ITB to the second transfer roller.

Figure 3-109 Operation of the second transfer unit

120 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 2. The paper aligned with the registration roller enters between the first transfer roller (callout a) and
the second transfer roller (callout b). The image transferred to the ITB (callout c) is moved to the
paper by the pressure between the and rollers.

ITB cleaning unit

Learn about the ITB cleaning unit.

ITB cleaning unit overview

Learn about the ITB cleaning unit overview.

The ITB cleaning unit removes the toner generated during printing and color registration patterns
generated during the color plane registration process. The removed toner is transferred to the toner
collection unit.

Figure 3-110 Overview of the ITB cleaning unit

Table 3-62 Overview of the ITB cleaning unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

K8 Image transfer kit 430H4-67001 Include the image transfer belt and the ITB cleaning unit

U54 ITB cleaning unit 5PN65-67001 Remove the waste toners from the ITB, transfer them to
the toner collection unit

M22 Black drum and ITB motor JC31-00123C Drive the black drum, the ITB, and the ITB cleaning unit

ITB cleaning unit 121

 Figure 3-111 Detail view of the ITB cleaning unit, view 1

Table 3-63 Detail view of the ITB cleaning unit, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

U54 ITB cleaning unit 5PN65-67001 Remove the waste toners from the ITB, transfer them to
the toner collection unit

Figure 3-112 Detail view of the ITB cleaning unit, view 2

Table 3-64 Detail view of the ITB cleaning unit, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

M22 Black drum and ITB motor JC31-00123C Drive the black drum, the ITB, and the ITB cleaning unit

ITB cleaning unit operation

Learn about the ITB cleaning unit operation.

1. The cleaning blade (callout 1) inside the cleaning unit is always in contact with the ITB (callout 2) and
removes the used toner from the belt.

122 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-113 Operation of the ITB cleaning unit, view 1

2. The removed toner moves toward the toner collection unit by the toner collection auger (callout 3).
The toner collection auger is rotated by the black drum drive motor.

Figure 3-114 Operation of the ITB cleaning unit, view 2

Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit

Learn about the Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit.

Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit overview

Learn about the Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit overview.

The Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit is the part not only superposing four colors such as cyan,
magenta, yellow and black to express images correctly, but also keeping image density in a proper level.

The CPR unit is located below the ITB and reads yellow, magenta, cyan and black toner level. There is a
shutter to prevent foreign debris from contaminating the CPR sensor. When operating the CPR feature,
the CPR shutter opens with the CPR shutter sensor and the CPR shutter motor. Three CPR sensors are
installed at the left, center, and the right side of the CPR unit which detects the registration condition to
adjust printing positions correctly.

NOTE: Color Plane Registration (CPR) is interchangeably used with Auto Color Registration (ACR).
These are synonymous for related parts or terms.

In case of poor color plane registration, “White gap” or “Fuzzy or blurred image” prints out.

Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit 123

 Figure 3-115 White gap and fuzzy, blurred image

Figure 3-116 Overview of the color plane registration

Table 3-65 Overview of the CPR

Callout Part name Part number Description

U55 Color plain registration 5QJ83-60108 –

(CPR)

S40 Front CPR sensor JC32-00014A Detect front side image density

S41 Center CPR sensor JC32-00014A Detect center image density

S42 Rear CPR sensor JC32-00014A Detect rear side image density

S43 CPR shutter sensor 0604-001393 Detect the CPR shutter location

124 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-65 Overview of the CPR (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

M27 CPR shutter motor JC31-00078A Drive the CAM to change the shutter location

Figure 3-117 Detail view of the CPR, view 1

Table 3-66 Detail view of the CPR, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

S40 Front CPR sensor JC32-00014A Detect front side image density

S41 Center CPR sensor JC32-00014A Detect center image density

S42 Rear CPR sensor JC32-00014A Detect rear side image density

Figure 3-118 Detail view of the CPR, view 2

Table 3-67 Detail view of the CPR, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

S43 CPR shutter sensor 0604-001393 Detect the CPR shutter location

M27 CPR shutter motor JC31-00078A Drive the CAM to change the shutter location

Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit overview 125

 Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit operation
Learn about the Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit operation.

When the product reaches the specific conditions, color plane registration is performed to form a
correct image on the paper.

1. When the CPR shutter motor is running, the position of the CAM changes.

2. The CPR shutter is moved in the direction of arrow.

Figure 3-119 Operation of the CPR, view 1

3. The CPR sensors are exposed.

Figure 3-120 Operation of the CPR, view 2

4. A CPR test pattern is printed on the ITB, and then the three CPR sensors analyze the image
positions.

126 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-121 Operation of the CPR, view 3

Color Toner Density (CTD) operation

Learn about the Color Toner Density (CTD) operation.

The center-located ACR sensor serves as the Color Toner Density (CTD) sensor at the same time. It
emits an LED beam to a patch which is transferred to the ITB belt surface and detects toner density to
optimize printing image quality.

Figure 3-122 Color Toner Density (CTD) operation

Color plane registration shutter driving

Learn about the color plane registration shutter driving.

Color Toner Density (CTD) operation 127

 Figure 3-123 Color plane registration shutter driving

CPR shutter driving: 1 CPR shutter motor > 2 gear

Fuser unit
Learn about the fuser unit.

Fuser unit overview

Learn about the fuser unit.

The fuser unit applies heat and pressure to the toner particles to adhere to the paper. The fuser unit is
composed of fuser section and fuser/exit driving section.

Figure 3-124 Overview of the fuser unit

Table 3-68 Overview of the fuser unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U56-1 Fuser unit 100V 5PN50-67001 –

U56-2 Fuser unit 110V 5PN61-67001 –

U56-3 Fuser unit 220V 5PN62-67001 –

128 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-68 Overview of the fuser unit (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

M28 Fuser motor JC31-00123B Make a contact with the fuser belt to transfer heat and
pressure on the paper and toner, and drive the fuser
pressure roller and fuser exit roller

3 Fuser support bracket JC61-07804A Fix the fuser at the base printer firmly so that it does not
move

Figure 3-125 Detail view of the fuser unit, view 1

Table 3-69 Detail view of the fuser unit, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

S44 Thermostat NA Cut off the power supply to the halogen lamp by opening
the circuit when the fusing belt becomes abnormally hot

S45 Thermistor NA Measure the surface temperature of the fuser belt by 2

non-contact type thermistors

S46 Wrap jam sensor NA Identify whether a wrap jam occurs inside the fuser unit

S51 Fuser gap sensor NA Check whether the fuser is released

Fuser unit overview 129

 Figure 3-126 Detail view of the fuser unit, view 2

Table 3-70 Detail view of the fuser unit, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

R21 Fuser belt NA Receive heat from the halogen lamp and transfer it to the
toner and paper

R22 Fuser pressure roller NA Make a contact with the fuser belt to transfer heat and
pressure on the paper and the toner and drive the paper
moves to the exit unit

S46 Wrap jam sensor NA Identify whether a wrap jam occurs inside the fuser unit

1 Halogen lamp NA Create heat to the fuser belt to adhere the toner to the
paper

2 Fuser out brush NA Remove static electricity from the printed paper

Figure 3-127 Detail view of the fuser unit, view 3

130 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-71 Detail view of the fuser unit, view 3

Callout Part name Part number Description

M28 Fuser motor JC31-00123B Make a contact with the fuser belt to transfer heat and
pressure on the paper and toner, and drive the fuser
pressure roller and fuser exit roller

Fuser unit temperature control

Learn about the fuser unit temperature control.

Figure 3-128 Fuser unit temperature control

1. Two thermistors detects the fuser belt surface temperature. In case of narrow width paper printing,
these thermistors effectively identify differences of the surface temperature, and controls how to
turn on the halogen lamp not to be overheated.

2. In case of abnormal temperature increment without control, the thermostat cuts off the circuit
forcibly not to prevent abnormal operation.

Fuser release operation

Learn about the fuser release operation.

When starting a printing job, the fuser motor drives to the direction of arrow (callout 1) to make the
pressure between the fuser belt and the fuser pressure roller. After finishing a printing job, the fuser gap
motor rotates so that the fuser belt is released. And the fuser gap sensor detects whether the fuser is
correctly released or pressurized.

Fuser unit temperature control 131

 Figure 3-129 Fuser release operation

Fuser wrap jam sensor operation

Learn about the fuser wrap jam sensor operation.

Wrap jam of the fuser unit may cause accidents such as a fire. To prevent this, the wrap jam sensor
safely detects in three methods.

Figure 3-130 Wrap jam in the fuser unit

1. The thermistor detects the sudden temperature change and temperature increasing slope of the
fusing belt to determine if wrap jam has occurred.

2. The reflective type wrap jam sensor identifies an error by immediately detecting the case of
wrapping paper around the fusing belt.

132 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-131 Fuser wrap jam sensor operation

3. The current sensor measures the change in current applied to the fuser motor to check whether a
wrap jam has occurred.

NOTE: If a fuser wrap jam occurs by the fuser wrap jam sensor, the value should be reset by the
Service Tools.

Fuser driving
Learn about fuser driving.

Figure 3-132 Fuser driving

● Fuser driving: 1 fuser motor > clockwise rotation > 2 gear > 3 gear

● Fuser releasing: 1 fuser motor > counterclockwise rotation > 4 gear > 5 gear > 6 gear

Fuser driving 133

 Environmental sensor, fan, switch
Learn about the environmental sensor, fan and switch.

Environmental sensor, fan, switch overview

Learn about the environmental sensor, fan and switch overview.

To accurately implement the operation algorithm of the product according to the environment, an
internal temperature sensor, an external temperature sensor, and a humidity sensor are installed inside
the device.

As the product is used, the temperature of the internal main parts or the inner parts of the machine
rises, which can degrade the product's performance. To prevent this, fans are installed to make outside
air enter various areas.

Two switches are equipped to read the opening and closing of the front door and the right door.

Figure 3-133 Overview of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor

Table 3-72 Overview of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor

Callout Part name Part number Description

S47 Inner temperature sensor 1404-001417 Detect the internal temperature of the printer

U58 Outer temperature, 5QJ90-40002 Detect the external temperature of the printer
humidity sensor assembly

S48 Outer temperature, JC32-00015A –

humidity sensor

1 Holder outer temperature, JC61-08680A –

humidity sensor

134 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-72 Overview of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

U59 LVPS and FDB fan JC93-01786A –

assembly

F1 LVPS and FDB fan JC31-00162A Dissipate heat generated by the LVPS and the FDB

U60 Fuser fan assembly 5QJ90-40125 –

F2 Fuser fan 5QJ91-80501 Dissipate heat generated by the fuser

F3 Right door fan JC31-00160C –

U61 LSU fan assembly JC93-01784A –

F4 LSU fan JC31-00160C Dissipate heat generated by the LSU

U62 Developer fan assembly 5QJ90-40126 –

F5 Developer fan 5QJ91-80501 Dissipate heat generated during EP process

S49 Front door switch JC93-00466A Check whether the front door is open

S50 Right door switch JC93-01467A Check whether the right door is open

Figure 3-134 Detail view of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor, view 1

Table 3-73 Overview of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor

Callout Part name Part number Description

F2 Fuser fan 5QJ91-80501 Dissipate heat generated by the fuser

Environmental sensor, fan, switch overview 135

 Figure 3-135 Detail view of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor, view 2

Table 3-74 Overview of the temperature and humidity measurement sensor

Callout Part name Part number Description

F1 LVPS and FDB fan JC31-00162A Dissipate heat generated by the LVPS and the FDB

F5 Developer fan 5QJ91-80501 Dissipate heat generated during EP process

Control panel
Learn about the control panel.

Control panel – 10.1 inch

Learn about the control panel – 10.1 inch.

The control panel consists of the LCD to show UI, touch sensor for user to set the device from UI, and
audio codec/speaker for sound. This control panel uses the 10.1 inch capacitive type touch sensor and
1280x800 WXGA LCD.

● Control-panel assembly 25.6 cm (10.1 in 2nd): 5QK42-60104

NOTE:

● Control panel - 8 inch

– The diagnostic button always works.

● Control panel - 10 inch

– The diagnostic button works when the printer is in Sleep mode or when the control panel is
physically disconnected from the formatter.

– When the printer is in Ready mode, pressing the diagnostic button stops control panel
operation. To reactivate the control panel, press the button again (or do nothing for 10
seconds).

136 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-136 Overview of the control panel – 10.1 inch

Table 3-75 Overview of the control panel – 10.1 inch

Callout Part name Part number Description

U59 Control-panel assembly 5QK42-60104 –

25.6 cm (10.1 in 2nd)

1 Touch sensor NA OGS (One glass solution) type capacitive touch sensor

2 LCD NA 10.1 inches 1280x800 WXGA LCD

3 Control panel front cover NA –

4 Control panel PCA NA Control panel PCA

5 Control panel rear cover NA –

6 Hinge NA –

7 Control panel hinge cover NA –

8 Interface PCA NA Interface PCA between formatter and LCD PCA

9 Hinge holder NA –

Control panel – 10.1 inch 137

 Table 3-75 Overview of the control panel – 10.1 inch (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

10 Control panel hinge NA –

bracket

Control panel – 8 inch

Learn about the control panel – 8 inch.

The control panel consists of the LCD to show UI, touch sensor for user to set the device from UI, and
audio codec/speaker for sound. This control panel uses the 8 inch capacitive type touch sensor and
1024x768 XGA LCD.

● Control-panel assembly 20.3 cm (8 in): 3SJ15-60101

Figure 3-137 Overview of the control panel – 8 inch

Table 3-76 Overview of the control panel – 8 inch

Callout Part name Part number Description

U60 Control-panel assembly 3SJ15-60101 –

20.3 cm (8 in)

138 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-76 Overview of the control panel – 8 inch (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

1 Touch sensor NA OGS (One glass solution) type capacitive touch sensor

2 LCD NA 8 inches 1024x768 WGA LCD

3 Control panel front cover NA –

4 Control panel PCA NA Control panel PCA

5 Control panel rear cover NA –

6 Hinge NA –

7 Control panel hinge cover NA –

8 Interface PCA NA Interface PCA between formatter and LCD PCA

9 Hinge holder NA –

10 Control panel hinge NA –

bracket

Hardware configuration
Learn about the hardware configuration.

PCA overview
Learn about the PCA overview.

Hardware configuration 139

 Figure 3-138 Overview of the PCAs

Table 3-77 Overview of the PCAs

No. Part name Part number Description

P1 Formatter 6CF14-67003 Handle the video controller, engine controller and scan
controller

P2 Trusted platform module 3SJ03-60001 Store and generates encryption keys that can be used
(TPM) for device authentication
(not orderable)

P3-1 Riser card for HDD 3SJ01-60001 Connect the hard disk to the formatter

P3-2 SVC-Internal USB 4XN67-67001 Connect the hard disk to the formatter
Expansion Kit

P3-3 Riser card for HDD and 3SJ02-60001 Connect the hard disk and the accelerator to the
two USB type C, and formatter
accelerator board

P4 Accelerator 6HN30-67001 Accelerate DSP (Digital Signal Processing) and OCR

(Optical Character Recognition) performance supporting
the z-bundle

140 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-77 Overview of the PCAs (continued)

No. Part name Part number Description

P5-1 Storage 933853-010 Store operating system and machine data to operate the
(HDD) printer system

733M6-69001
(SSD)

P5-2 eMMC B5L32-60004 Store operating system and machine data to operate the
printer system

P6 USB hub 3SJ04-60002 Interface with the Main PCA, USB device, and HIP2
options

P7 Island of data (IOD) 3SJ06-60001 Store the machine configuration and the engine control
data

P8 (see Echo (Not orderable) T3U64-60001 Collect internal acoustics information via microphone for
Note) (Not orderable) system diagnosis
For more information, see
Note For more
information, see
Note

S32 Toner collection unit full JC92-02471A Detect the waste toner level of the toner collection unit
sensor

P10 High voltage power supply JC44-00240C Generate 15 high-voltage channels, which include ITHV
(HVPS) (4), MHV (4), DEV (4), FUSER, SAW, 2THV(+/-)

P11 Low voltage power supply (110V) Supply electric power to the main board and other
(LVPS) 5QJ90-60014 boards. The voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V
from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety protection
(220V) modes for over current and overload.
5QJ90-60015

P12 Fuser drive board (FDB) (110V) Supply the voltage to fuser AC, heater, and main PCA
JC44-00210F

(220V)
JC44-00211F

P13 Power key 3SJ33-60007 Turn on or off the printer

P14-1 Keyboard (fold type) 5QK47-60001 Connect the keypad with the formatter

P14-2 Keyboard (drawer type) 5QK47-60002 Connect the keypad with the formatter

P18-1 Single FAX card 7ZA08-67001 Optional fax kit card

P18-2 Single FAX card - BBU 7ZA09-67001 Optional fax kit card - BBU

P18-3 Dual FAX card 5QK14-67001 Optional fax kit card

P18-4 Dual FAX card - BBU 7ZA07-67001 Optional fax kit card - BBU

U60-1 Keyboard (fold type) JC93-01742A Physical keyboard

assembly – US English

U60-2 Keyboard (fold type) JC93-01743A Physical keyboard

assembly – UK English

U60-3 Keyboard (drawer type) 63C82-67021 Physical keyboard

assembly – US English

U60-4 Keyboard (drawer type) 63C82-67023 Physical keyboard

assembly – UK English

PCA overview 141

 Table 3-77 Overview of the PCAs (continued)

No. Part name Part number Description

Not Keyboard overlay kit (FR, IT, 5851-6019 Language specific keyboard overlay
shown RU, DE,ES,UK Kybd)

Not Keyboard overlay kit (FR- 5851-6020 Language specific keyboard overlay
shown CN, ES-LA, ES,US Kybd)

Not Keyboard overlay kit (FR- 5851-6021 Language specific keyboard overlay
shown SW, DE-SW, DA,UK Kybd)

Not Keyboard overlay kit 5851-6022 Language specific keyboard overlay

shown (ZHTW, ZHCN)

Not Keyboard overlay kit (ES, 5851-6023 Language specific keyboard overlay
shown PT)

Not Keyboard overlay kit (JA- 5851-6024 Language specific keyboard overlay
shown KG, JA-KT)

Not Tray 2 open, paper size JC93-00018B Detect the size of the paper in the tray
shown sensor
(S5)

Not Tray 3 open, paper size JC93-00018B Detect the size of the paper in the tray
shown sensor
(S9)

Not Drum CRUM 3SJ07-60001 Include an IC chip for drum unit operation and life cycle
shown counting
(P15)

Not Eraser JC92-02744A Erase the negative charges on the surface of the drum
shown after printing
(P16)

Not Fuser CRUM 6CF14-60001 Include an IC chip for maintaining the fuser unit life cycle
shown counting, and provides a connection interface for the
(P17) fuser gap sensor operation

Not Toner cartridge CRUM PCA 3SJ07-60001 Include an IC chip for toner cartridge operation and life
shown cycle counting
(P19)

Not Control panel base PCA 3SJ15-60001 –

shown
(P20)

Not Control panel PCA 10.1 in 5QK42-60001 –

shown
(P21-1)

Not Control panel PCA 8 in 3SJ15-60002 –

shown
(P21-2)

NOTE: Echo PCA is removed from printers manufactured after April 2024 due to the design changes
implemented in these printers. The removal of this part does not affect the function of the printer. The
part is not available for purchase (cannot be ordered) and is not used in printers.

Formatter
Learn about the formatter.

142 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

The formatter handles the video controller, engine controller and scan controller. This PCA receives print
data from the host through the network or USB port, and it receives copy data from the Scan Controller.
It takes this information and generates printable video bitmap data. It controls all modules required to
print: LSU, HVPS, FAN, Fuser, etc.

The formatter consists of the main processor, memory (DDR4 6GB), 1G Ethernet PHY, Micom (Power
control), Video/CP/FAX signal interface connection, motor driving IC, Engine signal interface connection,
and power interface.

The main processor (Quad Core 1.6GHz CPU) of the formatter controls video, engine, CP display and
communicates with various devices. The hard disk is connected to the formatter by the riser, or eMMC is
installed for the system operation.

● Formatter part number: 6CF14-67003 (P1)

Figure 3-139 Formatter

Table 3-78 Formatter connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Main-J1 Control panel 22pin JC39-02781A

Power key PCA

Main-J2 Control panel 19pin HDMI JC39-02780A

Main-J4 Control panel USB 2.0 host 4pin USB JC39-02780A

Formatter 143
 Table 3-78 Formatter connections (continued)

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Main-J5 LSU shutter motor 17pin JC39-02774A

LSU shutter open sensor

LSU shutter close sensor

Drum fan

Main-J7 FAX 20pin Dual Fax 810: 5QK14A

Dual Fax 811: 7ZA07A

Single Fax 800: 7ZA08A

Single Fax 801: 7ZA09A

Main-J8 LVPS-CN2, LVPS-CN3 20pin JC39-02778A

Main-J9 USB host – –

Main-J10 Outbin 1 full sensor 36pin JC39-02756A

Second exit motor

Return gate solenoid

Duplex jam 2 sensor

Outbin 2 full sensor

Right door open switch

Fuser fan

ITB engage sensor

Island of data (IOD)

Main-J11 Trusted platform module (TPM) 20pin PCA 3SJ03-60001

(not orderable)

Main-J12 CPU Fan 4pin 1205-1597

(not orderable)

Main-J15 Riser-HDD 64pin PCA Riser for HDD: 3SJ01-60001

SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit:

4XN67-67001

Riser for HDD, USB ports,

Accelerator: 3SJ02-60001

Main-J19 Front, center, rear CPR sensor 17pin 5QJ90-50009

Main-J20 USB 3.0 host 9pin USB –

Main-J21 Network 12pin RJ45 –

Main-J22 Mini USB port 9pin USB –

Main-J26 CPU – –

Main-J30 Echo PCA 6pin PCA 3SJ11-60108

144 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-78 Formatter connections (continued)

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Main-J31 Yellow, magenta, cyan, black toner 16pin JC39-02761A

residual amount sensor

Main-J33 USB host – –

Main-J64 SSA-J3 4pin 3SJ11-50006

Platen power outlet

Main-J67 LVPS-CN4 28pin JC39-02779A

FDB-CN9

Developer fan

Tray 2 paper size sensor

Tray 3 paper size sensor

LVPS fan

Main-J69 Fuser CRUM 28pin JC39-02754A

Fuser gap sensor

Thermistor

Fuser wrap jam sensor

Fuser motor

Exit motor

Main-J70 Registration motor 34pin JC39-02764A

Feed 1 sensor

Registration sensor

Registration clutch

Tray 1 clutch

ITB engage motor

Black drum and ITB motor

Main-J71 Tray 2 paper empty sensor 28pin JC39-02765A

Tray 2 stack height sensor

Tray 2 pickup motor

Feed motor

Tray 3 paper empty sensor

Tray 3 stack height sensor

Tray 3 pickup motor

Feed 2 sensor

Main-J74 Black developer motor 10pin JC39-02769A

Formatter 145
 Table 3-78 Formatter connections (continued)

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Main-J75 Yellow, magenta, cyan, black eraser 36pin JC39-02772A

Yellow, magenta, cyan, black developer

CRUM

Yellow, magenta, cyan, black drum home

sensor

Main-J76 Yellow-magenta-cyan developer motor 40pin JC39-02773A

Yellow, magenta, cyan drum motor

Magenta d

Main-J77 Yellow, magenta, cyan, black toner 26pin JC39-02080A

concentration sensor

Front door open switch

Toner collection unit detection sensor

Toner collection unit motor

Main-J80 CPR shutter motor 14pin JC39-02753A

CPR shutter sensor

Outer temperature and humidity sensor

Toner collection unit full sensor

Main-J81 LSU 50pin FFC –

Main-J84 Drum MEMS PCA 6pin JC39-02768A

Main-J86 Yellow, magenta, cyan, black toner 40pin JC39-02757A

dispense motor

Yellow-magenta, cyan-black toner duct

motor

Yellow, magenta, cyan, black toner

cartridge CRUM

Main-J88 Tray 1 paper empty sensor 30pin JC39-02766A

Tray1 solenoid

Duplex motor

Fuser out sensor

Duplex fan

Loop sensor 1

Loop sensor 2

Duplex 2 jam sensor

Main-J90 HVPS 11pin JC39-02775A

Main-J91 HVPS 35pin FFC 5QJ90-50002

Main-J93 Finisher 16pin JC39-02072A

146 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-78 Formatter connections (continued)

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Main-J94 DCF 18pin 5QK02-50002

HCI

Main-J95 SSA-J9 50pin FFC 3SJ11-50021

Platen interface 2

Main-J96 SSA-J4 68pin FFC 3SJ11-50022

Platen interface 1

Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

Learn about the Trusted Platform Module (TPM).

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a hardware-based encryption device. It stores and/or generates
encryption keys that can be used for device authentication.

NOTE: When the formatter needs to be replaced, the TPM should be re-installed to the new formatter
after reset password for retain key security credentials.

● Trusted platform module part number: 3SJ03-60001 (P2) (not orderable)

Figure 3-140 Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

Table 3-79 Trusted Platform Module (TPM) connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

TPM-J1 Main-J11 PCA 3SJ03-60001

(not orderable)

Riser card
Learn about the riser card.

The riser card is a connecting board between the formatter and the data storage. There are 3 types of
riser card depending on the storage type and the accelerator installment.

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 147

 Riser card for HDD
Learn about the riser card for HDD.

● Riser card for HDD part number: 3SJ01-60001 (P3-1)

Figure 3-141 Riser card for HDD

Table 3-80 Riser card for HDD connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Riser1-J1 HDD 500gb HDD 500GB hard disk drive

933853-010

Riser1-C1 Main-J15 PCA 3SJ01-60001

SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit

Learn about the SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit ports.

● SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit part number: 4XN67-67001 (P3-2)

Figure 3-142 SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit ports

Table 3-81 SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit ports connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Riser2-J1 HDD HDD 500GB hard disk drive

933853-010

Riser2-J4 USB port – –

148 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-81 SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit ports connections (continued)

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Riser2-J5 USB port – –

Riser2-J7 NA – –

Riser2-C1 Main-J15 PCA 4XN67-67001

Riser card for HDD, USB ports, and accelerator board (optional)
Learn about the riser card for HDD, USB ports, and accelerator board.

● Riser card for HDD, two USB Type C ports, and accelerator board part number: 3SJ02-60001 (P3-3)

Figure 3-143 Riser card for HDD, two USB Type C ports, and accelerator board

Riser card for HDD, two USB Type C ports, and accelerator board

Table 3-82 Riser card for HDD, two USB Type C ports, and accelerator board connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Riser3-J1 HDD HDD 500GB hard disk drive

933853-010

Riser3-J4 USB port – –

Riser3-J5 USB port – –

Riser3-J7 ACC-C1 PCA 3SJ30-60001

Riser3-C1 Main-J15 PCA 3SJ02-60001

Accelerator (optional)
Learn about the accelerator.

The accelerator enhances DSP (Digital Signal Processing) and OCR (Optical Character Recognition)
performance supporting the z-bundle. This module interfaces with the riser card.

● Accelerator part number: 6HN30-67001 (P4)

Riser card for HDD, USB ports, and accelerator board (optional) 149
 Figure 3-144 Accelerator

Table 3-83 Accelerator connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Acc-J2 Fan – –

Acc-C1 Riser3-J7 PCA 3SJ02-60001

Storage
Learn about the storage.

Solid-state drive
Learn about the solid-state drive.

Overview
An optional solid-state drive (SSD) is available. The SSD ensure that the printer operates quickly and in a
stable manner.

● Solid-state drive part number: 733M6-69001 (P5)

Figure 3-145 SSD 733M6A / 733M6-69001

150 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Solid-state drive (SSD) kit configuration
Some parts included in the kit are not required to install the SSD.

NOTE: Save unused kit parts to install with other HP kits.

Figure 3-146 SSD kit contents

1 2

4
3

Reference number Description

1 SSD/cradled (used in this kit)

2 Rivets/screws/plate-ground (used in this kit - save screws and plate-ground)

3 PCA for assembly with 4XN67A (not used in this kit - save)

3 PCA for assembly with 6HN30A (not used in this kit - save)

Solid-state drive (SSD) kit installation considerations

The required pars for a SSD installation depend on the specific printer accessories environment/
configuration.

● SSD only

● SSD with USB ports

● SSD with USB ports and an accelerator card

If migrating data from an HDD to an SSD, both the HDD and SSD should be installed on the riser card.
The data automatically transfers when the product is turned on.

After completing the migration the HDD can be removed. However, if an accelerator board isalso
installed, the data must first be backed up through the following process.

1. Install HDD and SSD at the sheath adapter, and then execute booting for data migration.

2. After data migration process is done, remove the HDD. Install the SSD and accelerator card on the
scabbard adapter.

Solid-state drive 151

 Solid-state drive (SSD) configurations
The following figures show the SSD configurations for auto-data migration.

Figure 3-147 HDD auto-data migration configuration

3
1

Reference number Description

1 M.2 SSD + Support (included with the SDD kit)

2 HDD

3 Porthos riser card (included with the SDD kit)

Figure 3-148 HDD / USB expansion port auto-data migration configuration

3
1

Reference number Description

1 M.2 SSD + Sheath adapter (included with the SDD kit)

2 HDD

3 Athos riser card (included with the USB expansion kit accessory)

The following figure shows the SSD configurations requiring manual data migration (for more
information, see Solid-state drive (SSD) kit installation considerations).

For this configuration, use the follow steps for data migration.

1. Install HDD and SSD at the sheath adapter, and then execute booting for data migration.

152 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 2. After data migration process is done, remove the HDD. Install the SSD and accelerator card on the
scabbard adapter.

Figure 3-149 HDD / USB expansion port / Accelerator data migration configuration

Reference number Description

1 M.2 SSD + Scabbard adapter (included with the SDD kit)

2 Accelerator

3 Aramis riser card (included with Accelerator kit accessory)

Hard disk drive

Learn about the hard disk drive.

A 500GB hard disk drive is initially installed in the machine to save operating system and machine data
which operates the printer system.

● Hard disk drive part number: 933853-010 (P5-1)

Hard disk drive 153

 Figure 3-150 Hard disk, 933853-010 (Toshiba)

Hard disk, 933853-010 (Toshiba)

Table 3-84 Hard disk connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Hard disk Riser1-J1 – –

Riser2-J1

Riser3-J1

eMMC
Learn about the eMMC.

In the case of dn bundle, a 32 GB eMMC that stores system files and information necessary for product
operation such as firmware is installed instead of a hard disk drive.

● eMMC part number: B5L32-60004 (32GB, P5-2)

Figure 3-151 eMMC

eMMC

Table 3-85 eMMC connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

eMMC Main-J26 PCA

154 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

USB hub PCA
Learn about the USB hub PCA.

USB Hub PCA is used to interface with the formatter, walkup USB port, HIP2 and keyboard options. It
interfaces through USB2.0 communication.

● USB hub PCA part number: 3SJ04-60002 (P6)

Figure 3-152 Hub Board PCA

Table 3-86 USB hub PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

USB-J1 Main-J4 (MX3/4) USB2.0 Type-B JC39-02780A (MX3)

Main-J9 (MX7) 5QJ94-50002 (MX4)

5QK03-50006 (MX7)

USB-J2 HIP2 (MX4) USB2.0 Mini-B

USB-J3 Walkup USB port USB2.0 Type-A

USB-J4 HIP2 (MX7) USB2.0 Mini-B

USB-J5 Keyboard-J1 USB2.0 Type-A 5QK03-50017

Island Of Data (IOD)

Learn about the Island Of Data (IOD).

The IOD PCA has two EEPROMs and one RTC battery.

One EEPROM stores the machine configuration data and the engine control data. These data are used
for all system operation (system parameter, device status, tech information, and service information).
The RTC battery supplies power to store time information even when the machine power is turned off.
The RTC battery (CR2032) needs to be replaced when the time information of the machine is not saved.

● Island Of Data (IOD) part number: 3SJ06-60001 (P7)

NOTE: If IOD is removed from Formatter by replacing IOD or Formatter, the date and time of the
product stored in Formatter will be deleted. In this case, be sure to set the date and time again after
restarting the product.

USB hub PCA 155

 Figure 3-153 Island Of Data (IOD)

Island Of Data (IOD)

Table 3-87 Island Of Data (IOD) connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

IOD-J1 Main-J10 8pin JC39-02756A

IOD-B1 Battery CR2032 –

Echo PCA
Learn about the echo PCA.

The echo PCA is used for Smart Device Service (SDS). This PCA collects internal acoustics information
via microphone for the system diagnosis.

NOTE: Echo PCA, Rivet echo, and Echo-J1: These parts are no longer orderable and removed from
printers manufactured after April 2024. The removal of these parts is due to the design change
implemented in the printer. This change does not affect the function of the printer.

● Echo PCA

● Rivet echo PCA (Callout 1)

Figure 3-154 Echo PCA

Table 3-88 Echo PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Echo-J1 Main-J30 6pin 3SJ11-60108 (Not orderable)

156 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Power key PCA
Learn about the power key PCA.

The power key PCA is used to implement the soft-power switch.

● Power key PCA part number: 3SJ33-60007 (P13)

Figure 3-155 Power key PCA

Table 3-89 Power key PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Power-CN1 Main-J1 5pin JC39-02781A

Power-SW1 – Switch –

Keyboard PCA
Learn about the keyboard PCA.

The keyboard PCA an optional part which is used to connect with the keyboard assembly and the printer.
It interfaces with the USB hub PCA through USB mini communication.

NOTE: Both types of keyboards (folding/drawer) will be found in the field due to a manufacturing
overlap.

● Keyboard (fold type) PCA part number: 5QK47-60001 (P14-1)

● Keyboard (drawer type) PCA part number: 5QK47-60002 (P14-2)

● Keyboard (fold type) assembly – US English: JC93-01742A (U60-1)

● Keyboard (drawer type) assembly – UK English: JC93-01743A (U60-2)

● Keyboard (fold type) assembly – US English: 63C82-67021 (U60-3)

● Keyboard (drawer type) assembly – UK English: 63C82-67023 (U60-4)

Power key PCA 157

 Figure 3-156 Keyboard (fold and drawer type) PCAs

Fold type

Drawer type

J3
J2

Table 3-90 Keyboard PCA

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

Key-J1 USB-J4 11 pin 5QK03-50010

Key-J2 Keypad 26 pin (FFC) 5851-6603 (Keypad-US)

5851-6604 (Keypad-UK)

Key-J3 USB hub PCA USB2.0 Type-A 5QK03-50017

Figure 3-157 Keyboard assembly

Fold type Drawer type

U60

Toner Collection Unit full sensor PCA

Learn about the Toner Collection Unit full sensor PCA.

The Toner Collection Unit full sensor PCA detects the waste toner level of the toner collection unit.

● TCU full sensor PCA part number: JC93-00492A (S24)

158 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-158 TCU full sensor PCA

Table 3-91 TCU full sensor PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

TCU-CN1 Main-J80 4pin JC39-02753A

Paper size sensor PCA

Learn about the Paper size sensor PCA.

The paper size sensor PCA is used to detect the size of the paper in the tray.

● Paper size sensor PCA part number: JC93-00018B

Figure 3-159 Paper size sensor PCA

Table 3-92 Paper size sensor PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Paper-CN3 Main-J67 4pin JC39-02779A

Drum CRUM PCA

Learn about the drum CRUM PCA.

The drum CRUM PCA includes an IC chip for drum unit operation and life cycle counting.

Paper size sensor PCA 159

 ● Drum CRUM PCA part number: 3SJ07-60001 (P15)

Figure 3-160 Drum CRUM PCA

Table 3-93 Drum CRUM PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

DCRUM-J1 Main-J75 4pin JC39-02772A

Toner cartridge CRUM PCA

Learn about the toner cartridge CRUM PCA.

The toner cartridge CRUM PCA includes an IC chip for toner cartridge operation and cycle counting.

● Toner cartridge CRUM PCA part number: 3SJ07-60002

Figure 3-161 Toner cartridge CRUM PCA

Table 3-94 Toner cartridge CRUM PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

DCRUM-J1 Main-J86 4pin JC39-02757A

Eraser PCA
Learn about the eraser PCA.

The eraser PCA has one LED. The LED is used for erasing the negative charges on the surface of the
drum after printing.

● Eraser PCA part number: JC92-02744A (P16)

160 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-162 Eraser PCA

Table 3-95 Eraser PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Eraser-J1 Main-J75 4pin J39-02772A

5QJ90-50008

Fuser CRUM PCA

Learn about the fuser CRUM PCA.

The fuser CRUM PCA includes an IC chip for maintaining the fuser unit life cycle counting. It also
provides a connection interface for the fuser gap sensor.

● Fuser CRUM PCA part number: 6CF14-60001

Figure 3-163 Fuser CRUM PCA

Table 3-96 Fuser CRUM PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

Fuser-CN1 Fuser EEPROM, fuser gap sensor 5pin NA

interface

Fuser-CN2 Fuser gap sensor 3pin NA

Control panel PCA

Learn about the control panel PCA.

The control panel PCA manages the control panel operation communicating with the formatter.

● Control panel base PCA part number: 3SJ15-60001

Fuser CRUM PCA 161

 ● Control panel – 10.1 inch PCA part number: 5QK42-60001

● Control panel – 8 inch PCA part number: 3SJ15-60002

Control panel base PCA

Learn about the control panel base PCA.

Figure 3-164 Control panel base PCA

Table 3-97 Control panel base PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

CP-J1 Main-J1 14pin 5QJ94-50003

CP-J2 Main-J2 19pin 5QJ94-50002

CP-J3 Micom (STM32) 10pin NA

CP-J4 RFID 3pin NA

CP10.1-J1

CP-J5 CP8-J1 50pin NA

Control panel PCA – 10.1 inch

Learn about the control panel PCA – 10.1 inch.

162 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-165 Control panel PCA – 10.1 inch

Table 3-98 Control panel PCA connections – 10.1 inch

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

CP10.1-J1 CP-J5 50pin NA

CP10.1-J2 LCD 40pin NA

CP10.1-J3 Touch IC 10pin NA

CP10.1-J4/J5 Touch screen panel 50pin NA

CP10.1-J6 Speaker 2pin NA

Control panel PCA – 8 inch

Learn about the control panel PCA – 8 inch.

Control panel PCA – 8 inch 163

 Figure 3-166 Control panel PCA – 8 inch

Table 3-99 Control panel PCA connections – 8 inch

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

CP8-J1 CP-J5 50pin NA

CP8-J2 LCD 40pin NA

CP8-J3 Touch IC 10pin NA

CP8-J4 TSP 80pin NA

CP8-J5 Speaker 2pin NA

High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)

Learn about the High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS).

The High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) PCA generates 15 high-voltage channels, which include ITHV(4),
MHV(4), DEV(4), SAW, 2THV(+/-).

● High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) part number: JC44-00212D (P10)

164 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-167 High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)

Table 3-100 HVPS PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number Error when disconnected

HVPS-CN1 Main-J91 35pin, FFC 5QJ90-50002 Print out blank page

HVPS-CN2 Main-J90 10pin JC39-02775A 63.00.01

HVPS- Yellow developer 2 wires –

OUT301

HVPS- Yellow drum 2 wires –

OUT101

HVPS- Magenta developer 2 wires –

OUT401

HVPS- Magenta drum 2 wires –

OUT151

HVPS- Cyan developer 2 wires –

OUT501

HVPS- Cyan drum 2 wires –

OUT201

HVPS- Black developer 2 wires –

OUT601

HVPS- Black drum 2 wires –

OUT251

HVPS- Yellow ITB 2 wires –

OUT701

HVPS- Magenta ITB 2 wires –

OUT751

HVPS- Cyan ITB 2 wires –

OUT801

High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) 165

 Table 3-100 HVPS PCA connections (continued)

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number Error when disconnected

HVPS- Black ITB 2 wires –

OUT851

HVPS- Saw plate 2 wires –

OUT1051

HVPS- Second transfer 2 wires –

OUT901

Lower Voltage Power Supply (LVPS)

Learn about the Lower Voltage Power Supply (LVPS).

The Lower Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) board supplies the electric power to the main board and other
boards. The voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety
protection modes for over current and overload.

● Lower voltage power supply (LVPS) part number: (110V) 5QJ90-60014 (P11-2), (220V) 5QJ90-60015
(P11-1)

Figure 3-168 Lower Voltage Power Supply (LVPS)

Table 3-101 LVPS PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number Error when disconnected

LVPS-CN1 FDB-CN7 2pin JJC39-02818A No power supply

166 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-101 LVPS PCA connections (continued)

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number Error when disconnected

LVPS-CN2 Main-J8 9pin JC39-02778A No power supply

LVPS-CN3 Main-J8 11pin JC39-02778A 30.01.44, 63.00.20

LVPS-CN4 Main-J67 3pin JC39-02779A 30.01.44, 63.00.20

Fuser Drive Board (FDB)

Learn about the Fuser Drive Board (FDB).

The Fuser Drive Board (FDB) supplies voltage to the fuser AC, the heater, and the formatter.

● Fuser Drive Board (FDB) part number: (110V) JC44-00210F (P12-2), (220V) JC44-00211F (P12-1)

Figure 3-169 Fuser Drive Board (FDB)

Table 3-102 Fuser Drive Board (FDB) PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number Error when disconnected

FDB-CN1 AC inlet 2pin JC39-01581A No power supply

FDB-CN2 Base printer tray heater 2pin JC39-01584A

FDB-CN3 DCF, HCI tray heater 2pin JC39-02187A

FDB-CN6 Fuser heating lamp 3pin 5QK02-50001 50.FF.01

FDB-CN7 LVPS-CN1 2pin JC39-01585A No pwer supply

Fuser Drive Board (FDB) 167

 Table 3-102 Fuser Drive Board (FDB) PCA connections (continued)

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number Error when disconnected

FDB-CN9 Main-J67 10pin JC39-02779A 50.FF.0E

FDB-CN10 Tray heater switch 4pin JC39-01583A

Integrated Scan Asset

You will learn more about the integrated scan asset (ISA).

Integrated scan asset (ISA) is a device that scans a user's document and allows it to be saved to a file
or printed. This machine consists of an Auto Document Feeder (ADF) that can scan a large batch of
documents automatically, and a Platen that scans documents one by one from the flatbed.

Automatic document feeder system: 200sh Flow ADF, 200sh ADF

You will learn more about automatic document feeder system: 200sh flow ADF and 200sh ADF.

ADF cover
Learn about the ADF cover.

Figure 3-170 ADF cover

Table 3-103 ADF cover

Callout Part name Part number

C601 ADF front cover NA

C602 ADF rear cover NA

C603 ADF top cover NA

C604 ADF input tray NA

C605 ADF CMF panel 5QJ90-40056

200-sheet ADF unit

Learn about the ADF unit.

168 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-171 ADF unit, view 1

Table 3-104 ADF unit, view 1

Callout Part name Part number

U601 200-sheet Flow ADF(1) 5QJ90-67012

U602 200-sheet ADF(2) 5QJ90-67011

K601 ADF roller kit 5851-7202

K602 ADF hinge kit 5QJ90-67004

1 ADF hinge damper module 5QJ90-67006

K603 ADF white backing kit 5QJ90-67005

NOTE: The 200-sheet Flow ADF(1) and 200-sheet ADF(2) are all the same except for the ADF multi-
feeding sensor installation.

● 200-sheet Flow ADF: ADF multi-feeding sensor is installed

● 200-sheet ADF: ADF multi-feeding sensor is not installed

Figure 3-172 ADF unit, view 2

200-sheet ADF unit 169

 Table 3-105 ADF unit, view 2

Callout Part name Part number

K602 ADF hinge kit 5QJ90-67004

1 ADF hinge damper module 5QJ90-67006

K603 ADF white backing kit 5QJ90-67005

NOTE: The 200-sheet Flow ADF(1) and 200-sheet ADF(2) are the same except for the ADF multi-
feeding sensor installation.

● 200-sheet Flow ADF: ADF multi-feeding sensor is installed

● 200-sheet ADF: ADF multi-feeding sensor is not installed

ADF system overview

You will learn more about ADF system overview.

200-sheet ADF workflow

Learn about the ADF workflow.

Figure 3-173 ADF workflow

Table 3-106 ADF workflow

Callout Unit name Description

1 Lift plate Move an original document upward so that it is on the pickup paper
path

2 Pickup Pick up an original document to the deskew unit inside the ADF

3 Deskew Adjust a skew of the original document

4 Scan Scan an original document

5 Exit Discard scanned documents to the ADF out-bin

ADF sensors
Learn about the ADF sensors.

170 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-174 ADF sensors

Table 3-107 ADF sensors

Callout Part name Part number Description

S601 ADF paper long size NA Check the size of a paper in length
sensor

S602 ADF paper short size NA Check the size of a paper in length
sensor

S603 ADF paper width sensor NA Check the size of a paper in width

S604 ADF lift sensor NA Check the pickup ready position of a paper

S605 ADF paper present sensor NA Check whether there is no paper on lift plate

S606 ADF multi feed sensor(*) NA Check the multi feeding of paper

S607 ADF deskew sensor NA Check the paper arrival at the deskew roller and set the
time to start the deskew roller

S608 ADF top of page sensor NA Check whether the paper is arrived at the sensor. Then
determine the starting point of the document scanning

S609 ADF image scanner NA Scan the back side of the paper

S610 ADF cover sensor NA Check whether the ADF cover is open or closed

(*) only for 200sh Flow ADF

ADF system motor / solenoid / roller

Learn about the ADF system motor / solenoid / roller.

ADF system motor / solenoid / roller 171

 Figure 3-175 ADF system motor / solenoid / roller, view 1

Table 3-108 ADF system motor / solenoid / roller, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

K601 ADF roller kit 5851-7202 Pickup, forward, and retard roller

M601 ADF lift plate motor NA Make the lift plate move up and down

M602 ADF feed motor NA Drive the pickup roller, the forward roller, the retard roller,
the scan roller, and the exit roller

Figure 3-176 ADF system motor / solenoid / roller, view 2

Table 3-109 ADF system motor / solenoid / roller, view 2

Callout Part name Part number Description

R601 ADF pickup roller NA Pick up a paper

172 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-109 ADF system motor / solenoid / roller, view 2 (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

R602 ADF forward roller NA Move a paper out of the pickup roller to the inside of the
ADF

R603 ADF retard roller NA Prevent multiple papers from feeding in contact with the
forward roller

R604 ADF deskew roller NA Align the leading edge straight, move the paper to the
scan area

R605 ADF scan roller NA Send the paper out of the deskew roller to the exit roller

R606 ADF exit roller NA Discharge the paper

Lift plate unit

Learn about the lift plate unit.

The lift plate unit is the place to store the original documents and lifts a paper up to touch the pickup
roller.

When original documents are stacked on the tray, at first the paper present sensor checks whether
there is no paper. Then the paper short size sensor, the paper long size sensor and the paper width
sensor detects what size of paper is loaded on the tray. As scanning continues, the feed motor moves
the lift plate up to ensure that the paper is picked up stably. When all paper runs out, the tray returns to
the initial position.

Figure 3-177 Detail view of lift plate unit

Table 3-110 Detail view of lift plate unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

S601 ADF paper long size NAa Check the size of paper in length
sensor

S602 ADF paper short size NA Check the size of paper in length
sensor

S603 ADF paper width sensor NA Check the size of paper in width

S605 ADF paper present sensor NA Check whether there is no paper on the lift plate

M601 ADF feed motor NA Move the lift plate up and down

Lift plate unit 173

 Table 3-110 Detail view of lift plate unit (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

S610 ADF cover sensor NA Check whether the ADF cover is open or closed

Pickup unit
Learn about the pickup unit.

The pickup unit takes a paper out of the lift plate and moves it to the deskew roller.

The pick-up down clutch moves the pickup roller downward. The paper rises by the movement of the
lift plate, and for a certain period, the pickup roller moves upward so as not to touch the paper. The lift
sensor detects where the pickup roller is located, then the lift plate stops. The pickup roller, the forward
roller, the retard roller are rotated by the feed motor and make the paper is moved forward. At this
moment, the forward roller and the retard roller rotate in the opposite directions to each other to prevent
from multi-feeding..

The paper moves through the multi feed sensor to the deskew roller. During this process, the multi feed
sensor detects whether a multiple page of paper come from the pickup unit. If a multi-feeding error
comes up, it returns to the lift plate to be picked up again.

Figure 3-178 Detail view of pickup unit, view 1

Table 3-111 Detail view of pickup unit, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

K601 ADF roller kit 5851-7202 Include in the pickup roller, the forward roller, and the
retard roller

R601 ADF pickup roller NA Pick up a paper

R602 ADF forward roller NA Move the paper out of the pickup roller to the ADF inside

R603 ADF retard roller NA Prevent multiple paper from feeding in contact with the
forward roller

M601 ADF feed motor NA Drive the retard roller

S606 ADF multi feed sensor(*) NA Check the multi-feeding of paper

(*) only for 200sh Flow ADF

174 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-179 Detail view of pickup unit, view 1

Table 3-112 Detail view of pickup unit, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

M601 ADF feed motor NA Drive the retard roller

Deskew unit
Learn about the deskew unit.

The deskew unit receives a paper that has passed through the multi-feeding sensor, aligns the paper in
the width direction and sends it to the scan roller. When a paper enters the deskew sensor, the deskew
roller rotates after a certain period. The leading edge of the paper is aligned by the deskew roller since
the forward roller sorts the paper with the stuck roller. During this process, the deskew motor rotates the
deskew roller.

Figure 3-180 Detail view of deskew unit

Table 3-113 Detail view of deskew unit, view 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

M603 ADF deskew motor NA Drive the pickup roller, the forward roller, and the deskew
roller

Deskew unit 175

 Scan and exit unit
Learn about the scan and exit unit.

The scan and exit unit receive a paper from the deskew roller, and then scan the image from the paper
and discharge it to the out-bin.

A paper passes through the scan roller rotated by the feed motor. The top of page sensor detects
whether the paper is correctly located and determines the starting point of the scanning. After the
scanning process, the paper is discharged by the exit roller which rotates by the exit motor.

Figure 3-181 Detail view of scan and exit unit

Table 3-114 Detail view of scan and exit unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

M602 ADF feed motor NA Drive the scan roller and the exit roller

R605 ADF scan roller NA Send a paper out of the deskew roller to the exit roller

S608 ADF top of page sensor NA Check whether the paper is arrived at the sensor, and
then decide to start scanning

S609 ADF image scanner NA Scan the back side of the paper

R606 └ADF exit roller NA Discharge the paper to the out-bin

Document feeder simplex operation

Learn about the document feeder simplex operation.

The following is the basic sequence of operation for a document feeder job.

1. The ADF cover sensor detects (callout 1) when the cover door is in the closed position.

176 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-182 Document feeder simplex operation, view 1

2. The ADF paper present sensor (callout 2) activates when paper is loaded onto the input tray. Then
the paper length sensors (callout 4) and the paper width guide (callout 3) identify the paper size.

Figure 3-183 Document feeder simplex operation, view 2

3. The ADF lift plate motor rotates to raise the lift plate and the pickup roller starts to pick up the
loaded paper.

Figure 3-184 Document feeder simplex operation, view 3

4. The ADF multi feed (ultrasonic) sensor is activated when the leading edge of the media is driven
past the sensor.

Document feeder simplex operation 177

 Figure 3-185 Document feeder simplex operation, view 4

5. The ADF deskew sensor activates when the leading edge of the paper passes it.

6. The leading edge of the paper drives into the nip point of the deskew drive roller and the deskew
pinch rollers. This creates a curl at the leading edge of the paper (callout 5).

Figure 3-186 Document feeder simplex operation, view 5

7. The deskew motor rotates the deskew roller to pull the paper into the scan roller.

8. The pickup clutch stops the turning and allows both the pickup and forward roller to turn freely while
the paper is pulled in by the deskew roller.

9. The feed motor drives the leading edge of the paper into the top of page sensor (callout 6). The
scanner begins the scanning and the data retrieval process.

10. The ADF multi feeding (ultrasonic) sensor is deactivated when the trailing edge of the paper passes
the sensor.

11. Paper is discharged to the output bin. The scanner ends the scanning and the data retrieval
process.

12. If the copy job is completed, the ADF paper present sensor is deactivated. The ADF pickup up down
clutch raises the pick roller or if the copy job is not completed, the ADF paper present sensor still
operates. The printer firmware detects additional pages in the input tray and the process repeats.

178 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Deskew operation
Learn about the deskew operation.

Sliding side guides on the input tray make sure that the paper stack is correctly aligned at the center of
the input tray when the paper is loaded in the tray. The correct position of the loaded paper is parallel
with the direction of travel into the document feeder paper path.

The document feeder further reduces paper skew due to an improper loading of the paper in the input
tray by buckling the paper to create a paper buffer.

The document feeder aligns with the leading edge of the paper, parallel with the deskew drive rollers
before it is driven further into the document feeder paper path.

Figure 3-187 Deskew operation

Document feeder hinges operation

Learn about the document feeder hinges operation.

NOTE: The left and the right document feeder hinges are different parts. During repairs, they must be
clearly identified and installed in the correct orientation. The parts are essential so they should not be
installed in the wrong position.

The document feeder hinges allow positioning the assembly vertically above the scanner glass to
accommodate the placement of books and other objects up to 25 mm (1.0 in) in height on the scanner
glass. The document feeder still closes (the bottom of the document feeder is kept parallel to the
scanner glass) and allows the printer to operate.

The document feeder hinges provide the height adjustment of 25 mm (1.0 in) when a maximum
downward force of 4.5 kg (10 lb) is applied at the front edge of the assembly, with the fulcrum (such
as the spine of a book) centered on the scanner glass and parallel to its long axis.

The document feeder will withstand a downward force of at least 4.5 kg (10 lb) applied at the front
edge center of the assembly—when the fulcrum (such as the spine of a book) is located anywhere on
the scanner glass and parallel to its long axis—without breaking, deforming, detaching or experiencing
performance degradation.

The document feeder hinges support the assembly in the open position and prevent the document
feeder from suddenly closing with a damaging or in a loud manner.

The hinges can hold the document feeder static in all positions higher than 100 mm (3.93 in); measured
at the front of the assembly. Less than 2.3 kg (5 lb) of force is required to open or close the document
feeder.

The hinges allow the document feeder to open to a maximum angle of 65° from the horizontal position
(this angle will not allow the printer to tip over).

Deskew operation 179

 Figure 3-188 Document feeder open (book mode)

Figure 3-189 Document feeder open (maximum 65°)

ADF image scanner cleaning

Learn about the ADF image scanner cleaning.

Wipe the image scanner area with a soft cloth or microfiber. To maintain optimal document scanning
performance without scanning image quality problems, the image scanner area should be cleaned
periodically.

Figure 3-190 ADF image scanner cleaning

ADF PCA
Learn about the ADF PCA.

180 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 ● 200sh flow ADF PCA part number: 5QJ90-67008

● 200sh ADF PCA part number: 5QJ90-67013

Figure 3-191 ADF PCA connections

Table 3-115 ADF PCA connections

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

ADFg-J1 ADF lift plate motor FFC 6pin NA

ADFg-J2 ADF top of page sensor FFC 4pin NA

ADFg-J3 ADF deskew sensor FFC 4pin NA

ADFg-J4 ADF paper width sensor 3pin NA

ADFg-J5 ADF cover open sensor 9pin NA

ADF multi feed sensor – receiver

ADF lift sensor

ADFg-J6 ADF paper long size sensor 6pin NA

ADF paper short size sensor

ADFg-J7 ADF multi feed sensor – transmitter 5pin NA

ADF paper present sensor

ADFg-J8 ADF feed motor 6pin NA

ADFg-J9 ADF deskew motor 6pin NA

ADFg-J10 P\ADF power inlet 4pin NA

ADFg-J11 Connecting with the platen FFC 30pin NA

Automatic document feeder system: 100sh Flow ADF, 100sh ADF

You will learn more about Automatic document feeder system: 100sh Flow ADF, 200sh ADF.

ADF cover
Learn about the ADF cover.

Automatic document feeder system: 100sh Flow ADF, 100sh ADF 181
 Figure 3-192 ADF cover

Table 3-116 ADF cover

Callout Part name Part number

C601 ADF front cover NA

C602 ADF rear cover NA

C603 ADF top cover NA

C604 ADF input tray NA

C605 ADF CMF panel 5QJ90-40056

ADF unit
Learn about the ADF unit.

Figure 3-193 ADF unit, view 1

Figure 3-194 ADF unit, view 2

182 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-117 ADF unit

Callout Part name Part number

U701 100-sheet ADF 5QJ90-40056

K701 ADF roller kit 5QJ83-67002

K702 ADF hinge kit 5QJ83-67003

K703 ADF white backing kit 5QJ90-67005

ADF system overview

You will learn more about ADF system overview.

ADF workflow
Learn about the ADF workflow.

Figure 3-195 ADF workflow

Table 3-118 ADF workflow

Callout Unit name Description

1 Lift plate Moves an original document upward so that it is on the pickup

paper path

2 Pickup Picks up an original document to the deskew unit inside the ADF

3 Scan Scans an original document

4 Exit Discards scanned documents to the ADF out-bin

ADF sensors
Learn about the ADF sensors.

Figure 3-196 ADF sensors

ADF system overview 183

 Table 3-119 ADF sensors

Callout Part name Part number Description

S701 ADF paper long size NA Checks the size of a paper in length
sensor

S702 ADF paper short size NA Checks the size of a paper in length
sensor

S703 ADF paper width sensor NA Checks the size of a paper in width

S704 ADF paper present sensor NA Checks whether there is no paper on lift plate

S705 ADF top of page sensor NA Checks whether the paper is arrived at the sensor. Then
determines the starting point of the document scanning

S706 ADF image scanner NA Scans the back side of the paper

S707 ADF cover sensor NA Checks whether the ADF cover is open or closed

ADF system motor / roller

Learn about the ADF system motor / roller.

Figure 3-197 ADF system motor / roller, view 1

Figure 3-198 ADF system motor / roller, view 2

184 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-120 ADF system motor / roller

Callout Part name Part number Description

M701 Main motor NA Drives the pickup roller, the forward roller, the deskew
roller, the scan roller, and the exit roller

R701 ADF pickup roller NA Picks up a paper

R702 ADF forward roller NA Moves a paper out of the pickup roller to the inside of the
ADF

R703 Deskew roller NA Moves paper out of the forward roller to the scan roller

R704 Feed roller NA Sends the paper out of the deskew roller to the exit roller

R705 Exit roller NA Discharges the paper

K701 ADF roller kit 5QJ83-67002 Includes the pickup, forward rollers and the friction pad

1 Friction pad NA Prevents multiple paper feeding in contact with the

forward roller

Lift plate unit

Learn about the lift plate unit.

The lift plate unit is the place to store the original documents and lifts a paper up to touch the pickup
roller.

When original documents are stacked on the tray, at first the paper present sensor checks whether
there is no paper. Then the paper short size sensor, the paper long size sensor and the paper width
sensor detects what size of paper is loaded on the tray. As scanning continues, the feed motor moves
the lift plate up to ensure that the paper is picked up stably. When all of the paper runs out, the tray
returns to the initial position.

Figure 3-199 Detail view of lift plate unit

Table 3-121 Detail view of lift plate unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

S701 ADF paper long size NA Checks the size of paper in length
sensor

S702 ADF paper short size NA Checks the size of paper in length
sensor

S703 ADF paper width sensor NA Checks the size of paper in width

Lift plate unit 185

 Table 3-121 Detail view of lift plate unit (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

S704 ADF paper present sensor NA Checks whether there is no paper on the lift plate

S706 ADF cover sensor NA Checks whether the ADF cover is open or closed

Pickup unit
Learn about the pickup unit.

The pickup unit takes a paper out of the lift plate and moves it to the deskew roller.

The pick-up down clutch moves the pickup roller downward. The pickup roller, and the forward roller are
rotated by the ADF main motor and make the paper is moved forward. At this moment, the friction pad
makes a resistance with the paper to prevent from multi-feeding.

Figure 3-200 Detail view of pickup unit

Table 3-122 Part information of pickup unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

K701 ADF roller kit 5QJ83-67002 Includes in the pickup roller, the forward roller, and the
retard roller

R701 ADF pickup roller NA Picks up a paper

R702 ADF forward roller NA Moves the paper out of the pickup roller to the ADF
inside

1 Friction pad NA Prevents multiple paper from feeding in contact with the
forward roller

M701 ADF main motor NA Drives the pickup roller and the forward roller

Scan and exit unit

Learn about the scan and exit unit.

Scan and exit receive paper from the deskew roller, scan it, and then exit. The scan roller is driven by
the main motor. Paper passes through the scan rollers and the top of page sensor. The top of page
sensor detects the paper position and determines the starting timing of the scan. The scanned paper is
discharged by the exit roller driven by the main motor.

186 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 The scan and exit unit receive a paper from the deskew roller, and then scan the image from the paper
and discharge it to the out-bin.

The top of page sensor detects whether the paper is correctly located and determines the starting point
of the scanning. After the scanning process, the paper is discharged by the exit roller which rotates by
the ADF main motor.

Figure 3-201 Detail view of scan and exit unit

Table 3-123 Detail view of scan and exit unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

M701 ADF feed motor NA Drives the feed roller and the exit roller

R704 ADF feed roller NA Sends paper out of the deskew roller to the exit roller

S705 ADF top of page sensor NA Checks whether the paper is arrived at the sensor, and
then decides to start scanning

S706 ADF image scanner NA Scans the back side of the paper

R705 ADF exit roller NA Discharges the paper to the out-bin

Document feeder simplex operation

Learn about the document feeder simplex operation.

The following is the basic sequence of operation for a document feeder job.

1. The ADF cover sensor detects (callout 1) when the cover door is in the closed position.

Document feeder simplex operation 187

 2. The ADF paper present sensor (callout 2) activates when paper is loaded onto the input tray. Then
the paper length sensors (callout 4) and the paper width guide (callout 3) identify the paper size.

3. The ADF main motor rotates, the pickup roller starts to pick up the loaded paper..

4. The ADF deskew sensor activates when the leading edge of the paper passes it.

5. The ADF main motor rotates the deskew roller to pull the paper into the feed roller.

6. 6. The pickup clutch stops the turning and allows both the pickup and forward roller to turn freely
while the paper is pulled in by the deskew roller.

7. The ADF main motor drives the leading edge of the paper into the top of page sensor(Callout 6). The
scanner begins the scanning and the data retrieval process.

8. Paper is discharged to the output bin. The scanner ends the scanning and the data retrieval
process.

9. If the copy job is completed, the ADF paper present sensor is deactivated. The ADF pickup up down
clutch raises the pick roller or if the copy job is not completed, the ADF paper present sensor still
operates. The printer firmware detects additional pages in the input tray and the process repeat.

Deskew operation
Learn about the deskew operation.

Sliding side guides on the input tray make sure that the paper stack is correctly aligned at the center of
the input tray when the paper is loaded in the tray. The correct position of the loaded paper is parallel
with the direction of travel into the document feeder paper path.

The document feeder further reduces paper skew due to an improper loading of the paper in the input
tray by buckling the paper to create a paper buffer.

188 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 The document feeder aligns with the leading edge of the paper, parallel with the deskew drive rollers
before it is driven further into the document feeder paper path.

Figure 3-202 Deskew operation

Document feeder hinges operation

Learn about the document feeder hinges operation.

NOTE: The left and the right document feeder hinges are different parts. During repairs, they must be
clearly identified and installed in the correct orientation. The parts are essential so they should not be
installed in the wrong position.

The document feeder hinges allow positioning the assembly vertically above the scanner glass to
accommodate the placement of books and other objects up to 25 mm (1.0 in) in height on the scanner
glass. The document feeder still closes (the bottom of the document feeder is kept parallel to the
scanner glass) and allows the printer to operate.

The document feeder hinges provide the height adjustment of 25 mm (1.0 in) when a maximum
downward force of 4.5 kg (10 lb) is applied at the front edge of the assembly, with the fulcrum (such
as the spine of a book) centered on the scanner glass and parallel to its long axis.

The document feeder will withstand a downward force of at least 4.5 kg (10 lb) applied at the front
edge center of the assembly—when the fulcrum (such as the spine of a book) is located anywhere on
the scanner glass and parallel to its long axis—without breaking, deforming, detaching or experiencing
performance degradation.

The document feeder hinges support the assembly in the open position and prevent the document
feeder from suddenly closing with a damaging or in a loud manner.

The hinges can hold the document feeder static in all positions higher than 100 mm (3.93 in); measured
at the front of the assembly. Less than 2.3 kg (5 lb) of force is required to open or close the document
feeder.

The hinges allow the document feeder to open to a maximum angle of 65° from the horizontal position
(this angle will not allow the printer to tip over).

Document feeder hinges operation 189

 Figure 3-203 Document feeder open (book mode)

Figure 3-204 Document feeder open (maximum 65°)

ADF image scanner cleaning

Learn about the ADF image scanner cleaning.

Wipe the image scanner area with a soft cloth or microfiber. To maintain optimal document scanning
performance without scanning image quality problems, the image scanner area should be cleaned
periodically.

Figure 3-205 ADF image scanner cleaning

ADF PCA
Learn about the ADF PCA.

190 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 ● 100sh Flow ADF PCA part number: 5QK34-67001

Figure 3-206 ADF PCA connections

Table 3-124 ADF PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

ADFp-J1 Connecting with the platen FFC 22pin NA

ADFp-J2 ADF power inlet 8pin NA

ADFp-J3 ADF paper width sensor 6pin NA

ADF paper present sensor

ADFp-J4 ADF top of page sensor 3pin NA

ADFp-J5 ADF cover open sensor 3pin NA

ADFp-J6 ADF paper long size sensor 6pin NA

ADF paper short size sensor

ADFp-J7 LED 2pin NA

ADFp-J8 ADF main motor 6pin NA

Scanner system: Tarot Platen

You will learn more about the scanner system: Tarot Platen.

Scanner workflow
Learn about the scanner workflow.

The scanner converts an original document image into data. To scan an original document, the scanner
uses a CIS image sensor which stores and transfers the converted image data to the storage space or
transfers it to the printer engine for copy.

Scanner system: Tarot Platen 191

 Figure 3-207 Tarot platen workflow

Table 3-125 Tarot platen workflow

Callout Unit name Part number Description

U811 Tarot platen 3SJ11-60103 –

1 Flat-bed glass NA The glass that places the original document when
performing single-sided scanning

2 Size sensing NA Detects the original document size

3 Driving NA Moves the image scanner to scan the original document

4 Image scanner NA Scans the original image and convert it to data

5 PCA Y6V12-60035 Interfaces with the formatter and the ADF

Cover
Learn about the cover.

Figure 3-208 Tarot platen cover

Table 3-126 Tarot platen cover

Callout Unit name Part number

C811 Tarot platen front cover NA

C812 Tarot platen rear cover 3SJ11-40008

192 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-126 Tarot platen cover (continued)

Callout Unit name Part number

C813 Tarot platen left cover NA

C814 Tarot platen right cover NA

C815 Tarot platen upper cover NA

Sensor, motor
Learn about the sensor and motor.

Figure 3-209 Tarot platen sensor, motor

Table 3-127 Tarot platen sensor, motor

Callout Unit name Part number Description

M811 Tarot motor NA Moves the image scanner to scan the original document

S811 Paper size detection NA Detects the original document size

sensor

S812 Image scanner NA Scans the original image and convert it to data

S813 ADF open sensor NA Detects whether the ADF is open

Image scanner and flat-bed glass cleaning

Learn about cleaning the Tarot high speed (HS) platen image scanner and flat-bed glass.

Wipe the image scanner area with a soft cloth or microfiber. To maintain optimal document scanning
performance without scanning image quality problems, the image scanner area should be cleaned
periodically.

Sensor, motor 193

 Figure 3-210 Image scanner and flat-bed glass cleaning

PCA
Learn about the PCA.

● Tarot platen PCA part number: Y6V12-60035 (P811)

Figure 3-211 Tarot platen PCA connections

Table 3-128 Tarot platen PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

SSAt-J1 Tarot motor, paper size detection sensor 1, – 3SJ11-50023

2, ADF open sensor

SSAt-J3 Power inlet 4pin 3SJ11-50006

SSAt-J4 Formatter interface 1 68pin FFC 3SJ11-50022

SSAt-J6 Power outlet to ADF – NA

SSAt-J7 ADF interface – NA

SSAt-J8 ADF scanner – NA

SSAt-J9 Formatter interface 2 50pin FFC 3SJ11-50021

SSAt-J10 Image scanner 40pin FFC 3SJ11-50020

Scanner system: CIS Platen

You will learn more about the scanner system: CIS Platen.

194 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Cover
Learn about the cover.

Figure 3-212 CIS platen cover

Table 3-129 CIS platen cover

Callout Unit name Part number

C821 CIS platen front cover NA

C822 CIS platen rear cover 5QJ83-40020

C823 CIS platen left cover NA

C824 CIS platen right cover NA

C825 CIS platen upper cover NA

CIS platen sensors and motors

Learn about the sensors and motors.

Figure 3-213 CIS platen sensor, motor

Table 3-130 CIS platen sensor, motor

Callout Unit name Part number Description

M821 CIS motor NA Moves the image scanner to scan the original document

S821 Paper size detection NA Detects the original document size

sensor

S822 Image scanner NA Scans the original image and converts it to data

Cover 195
 Table 3-130 CIS platen sensor, motor (continued)

Callout Unit name Part number Description

S823 ADF open sensor NA Detects whether the ADF is open

Image scanner and flat-bed glass cleaning

Learn about cleaning the Tarot high speed (HS) platen image scanner and flat-bed glass.

Wipe the image scanner area with a soft cloth or microfiber. To maintain optimal document scanning
performance without scanning image quality problems, the image scanner area should be cleaned
periodically.

Figure 3-214 Image scanner and flat-bed glass cleaning

PCA
Learn about the PCA.

● Tarot platen PCA part number: 3SJ00-60109 (P821)

Figure 3-215 CIS platen PCA connections

Table 3-131 CIS platen PCA connections

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

SSAc-J1 ADF open sensor – 3SJ00-50009

SSAc-J2 Power inlet 4pin 3SJ11-50006

196 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-131 CIS platen PCA connections (continued)

CN Number Connection Type Harness Part number

SSAc-J3 Formatter interface 68pin FFC 3SJ00-50010

SSAc-J4 CIS platen motor – 3SJ00-50008

SSAc-J5 Paper size detection sensor 1, 2 – 3SJ00-50007

SSAc-J8 Paper size detection sensor 3 4pin FFC 3SJ00-50012

SSAc-J9 Power outlet to ADF - NA

SSAc-J10 ADF Interface - NA

SSAc-J11 Unused - -

SSAc-J12 Image scanner 20pin FFC 3SJ26-50001

SSAc-J13 Length sensor 3 - NA

Input devices
Learn about the input devices that are available for these printers.

Workgroup stand
Learn about the workgroup stand.

Stand is an optional part that supports the base printer and serves to store ancillary items.

Figure 3-216 Workgroup stand, view 1

Table 3-132 Workgroup stand, view 1

Callout Part name Part number

1 Stand 6GW54A

C100 Stand CMF panel NA

2 Caster wheel 6109-001138

Input devices 197

 Table 3-132 Workgroup stand, view 1 (continued)

Callout Part name Part number

K101 Holder wheel kit (for the front side only) 6GW46-40011

NOTE: When installing a stand, there is an empty space between the base printer and the stand.
Additional part is in operation to prevent rodents from entering inside the product.

● Cover side lower blocker Part number: X3A64-40004

● Sheet side lower blocker Part number: X3A64-40005

Empty space between the base printer and the stand and cover/sheet side lower blocker (Callout 3 &
Callout 4)

Figure 3-217 Workgroup stand, view 2

Table 3-133 Workgroup stand, view 2

Callout Part name Part number

3 Cover side lower blocker X3A64-40004

4 Sheet side lower blocker X3A64-40005

Workgroup Dual Cassette Feeder (DCF, Tray 4, 5)

The Dual Cassette Feeder (DCF) is optional, and provides additional paper capacity for the printer.

DCF (Tray 4, 5) covers

Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) covers.

198 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-218 DCF (Tray 4, 5) covers

Table 3-134 DCF (Tray 4, 5) covers

Callout Part name Part number

C101 DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover 5QJ98-40015

C102 DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover 5QJ98-40014

C103 DCF (Tray 4, 5) left cover 5QJ98-40017

C104 DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door 5QJ98-61006

C105 Tray 4 CMF panel 5QK03-40033

C106 Tray 5 CMF panel 5QK03-40035

1 Caster wheel 6109-001138

K101 Holder wheel kit (for the front side only) 6GW46-40011

DCF (Tray 4, 5) feeding system workflow

Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) feeding system workflow.

Figure 3-219 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) feeding system workflow

DCF (Tray 4, 5) feeding system workflow 199

 Figure 3-220 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) feeding system workflow

Table 3-135 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) feeding system workflow

Callout Part name Description

1 Tray 4 Stores paper

2 Tray 4 pickup unit Picks up paper to the DCF feed roller

3 Tray 5 Stores paper

4 Tray 5 pickup unit Picks up paper to the DCF feed roller

5 DCF feed unit Moves paper to the base printer

DCF (Tray 4, 5) unit

Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) unit.

Figure 3-221 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) unit

Table 3-136 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U101 DCF (Tray4, 5) unit 6GW46-67001 –

U102 Tray 4 cassette 5QJ98-61009 Stores paper

U103 Tray 5 cassette 5QJ98-61007 Stores paper

200 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-136 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) unit (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

U104 Tray 4 pickup assembly 8GR90-60007 –

U105 Tray 5 pickup assembly 8GR90-60007 –

DCF (Tray 4, 5) roller

Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) roller.

Figure 3-222 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) roller

Figure 3-223 Detail view of DCF(Tray 4, 5) roller

Figure 3-224 Detail view of DCF(Tray 4, 5) roller

DCF (Tray 4, 5) roller 201

 Table 3-137 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) roller

Callout Part name Part number Description

K101 DCF roller kit 5PN66-67001 –

R101 Tray 4 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Picks up a paper from the Tray 4

R102 Tray 4 forward roller JC93-01726A Moves a paper to the Tray 4 feed roller

R103 Tray 4 reverse roller JC93-01726A Prevents multi paper feeding

K101 DCF roller kit 5PN66-67001 –

R104 Tray 5 pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Picks up a paper from the Tray 5

R105 Tray 5 forward roller JC93-01726A Moves a paper to the Tray 5 feed roller

R106 Tray 5 reverse roller JC93-01726A Prevents multi paper feeding

R107 Tray 4 feed roller NA Moves a paper to the base printer

R108 Tray 5 feed roller NA Moves a paper to the Tray 4 feed roller

DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors

Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors.

Figure 3-225 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors

Figure 3-226 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors 1 of 2

202 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-227 Detail view of DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors 2 of 2

Table 3-138 Parts information of DCF (Tray 4, 5) sensors

Callout Part name Part number Description

S101 Tray 4 feed sensor 0604-001490 Checks whether a paper comes from the tray correctly

S102 Tray 4 paper empty sensor 0604-001393 Checks whether the tray has no paper

S103 Tray 4 stack height sensor 0604-001393 Sets the proper height of paper to make a contact with
the pickup roller

S104 Tray 5 feed sensor 0604-001490 Keeps the proper distance between papers on the paper
path

S105 Tray 5 paper empty sensor 0604-001393 Checks whether the tray has no paper

S106 Tray 5 stack height sensor 0604-001393 Sets the proper height of paper to make a contact with
the pickup roller

S107 Tray 4 paper size sensor JC93-00018B Checks the opening and closing of the tray and signals to
identify the paper size

S108 Tray 5 paper size sensor JC93-00018B Check the opening and closing of the tray and the
signals to identify the paper size

1 Tray heater connector NA Connects the tray heater

S109 DCF (Tray4, 5) right door JC39-01696A Checks whether the tray 4, 5 right door is open
open switch

U7 Tray heater 110V Y1G22-67901 Dries damp paper with a heating pipe

U8 Tray heater 220V Y1G22-67902 Dries damp paper with a heating pipe

DCF (Tray 4, 5) motors

Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) motors.

DCF (Tray 4, 5) motors 203

 Figure 3-228 Overview of DCF (Tray 4, 5) motors

Figure 3-229 Detail view of DCF motors

Table 3-139 Parts information of DCF (Tray 4, 5) motors

Callout Part name Part number Description

M101 DCF (Tray 4) pickup motor 5QJ90-64002 Drives the Tray 4 pickup, forward, and reverse rollers or
knock-up plate

M102 DCF (Tray 5) pickup motor 5QJ90-64002 Drives the Tray 5 pickup, forward, and reverse rollers or
knock-up plate

M103 DCF (Tray 4, 5) feed motor 5QJ90-60023 Drives the Tray 4, 5 feed roller

DCF (Tray 4, 5) operation

Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) operation.

1. When the tray is closed, tray input lever is pushed (callout 1).

2. The pickup roller moves down to contact with the surface of the paper, and the reverse roller moves
upward to make a contact with the forward roller (callout 2).

204 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 3. Tray motor drives the knock-up plate to move paper upward to the pickup roller (callout 3).

4. The pickup roller moves the paper forward. The forward roller makes paper move into the feed roller.
The reverse roller prevents the printer from mufti-feeding (callout 4).

5. The feed roller sends the paper to the trans roller.

DCF (Tray 4, 5) motor operation

Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) motor operation.

DCF (Tray 4, 5) motor operation 205

 Figure 3-230 DCF (Tray 4, 5) motor operation, view 1

● Pickup: Tray 4, 5 pickup motor > clockwise rotation > 1 gear > 2 gear (pickup roller, forward roller)

● Tray lift: Tray 4, 5 pickup motor > counterclockwise rotation > 1 gear > 3 gear > 4 gear > 5 gear > 6
gear & coupler (knock-up plate)

Figure 3-231 DCF (Tray 4, 5) motor operation, view 2

● DCF feed driving: 1 DCF feed motor > 2 pulley and gear > 3 gear & coupler (feed roller, trans roller)

DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA

Learn about the DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA.

DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA connects to the formatter to control the DCF operation.

● DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA part number: 6GW46-60001 (P101)

Figure 3-232 DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA

206 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-140 DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

DCF-CN3 DCF right door open switch 2pin JC39-01696A

DCF-CN5 Tray 4 pickup motor 17pin JC39-01691A

Tray 5 pickup motor

Feed motor

DCF-CN6 Tray 4 paper empty sensor 18pin JC39-01692A

Tray 4 stack height sensor JC39-01693A

Tray 5 paper empty sensor

Tray 5 stack height sensor

DCF-CN7 Main-J94 18pin 5QK02-50002

DCF-CN9 Tray 4 open, paper size sensor 8pin JC39-01695A

Tray 5 open, paper size sensor

Workgroup High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4)

Learn more about Workgroup High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4).

The High Capacity Input (HCI) device is optional. It provides additional paper capacity for the printer. The
HCI consists of the shift tray that stores excess paper, the lift tray that supplies paper to the pickup, and
the feeding system that supplies paper to the base printer.

HCI (Tray 4) cover

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) cover.

Figure 3-233 HCI (Tray 4) cover

Workgroup High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4) 207

 Table 3-141 HCI (Tray 4) cover

Callout Part name Part number

C201 HCI (Tray 4) right cover 5QJ98-40024

C202 HCI (Tray 4) rear cover 5QJ98-40014

C203 HCI (Tray 4) left cover 5QJ98-40025

C204 HCI (Tray 4) right door 5QJ98-61014

C205 HCI (Tray 4) front CMF panel 5QK09-40024

1 Caster wheel 6109-001138

K201 Holder wheel kit (for the front side only) 6GW46-40011

HCI (Tray 4) workflow

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) workflow.

Figure 3-234 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) workflow

Figure 3-235 Detail view of HCI (Tray 4) workflow

208 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-142 Detail view of HCI (Tray 4) workflow

Callout Part name Description

1 Shift tray Loads an excess number of papers for printing, and

when the lift tray runs out of paper, it moves the paper to
the lift tray

1-1 Shift gate Arranges the paper and opens the gate to move the
paper to the lift tray during the shifting process

2 Lift tray Stores paper for printing

HCI (Tray 4) unit

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) unit.

Figure 3-236 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) unit

Table 3-143 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) unit

Callout Part name Part number Description

U201 HCI (Tray 4) unit 6GW48-67001 –

U202 HCI (Tray 4) cassette 5QJ98-61015 Stores paper

U203 HCI (Tray 4) pickup 8GR90-60001 –

assembly

HCI (Tray 4) roller

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) roller.

HCI (Tray 4) unit 209

 Figure 3-237 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) roller

Figure 3-238 Detailed view of HCI tray 4 roller (1 of 2)

Figure 3-239 Detailed view of HCI tray 4 roller (2 of 2)

Table 3-144 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) roller

Callout Part name Part number Description

K201 HCI (Tray 4) roller kit 5PN66-67001 –

R201 HCI (Tray 4) pickup roller 5QJ90-60128 Picks up a paper from the lift tray

R202 HCI (Tray 4) forward roller JC93-01726A Moves a paper to the Tray 4 feed roller

R203 HCI (Tray 4) reverse roller JC93-01726A Prevents multi paper feeding

R204 HCI (Tray 4) feed roller NA Moves a paper to the tray 4 trans roller

HCI (Tray 4) sensors

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) sensors.

210 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-240 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) sensors (1 of 2)

Figure 3-241 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) sensors (2 of 2)

Table 3-145 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) sensors

Callout Part name Part number Description

S201 HCI(Tray 4) feed sensor 0604-001490 Checks whether paper is ready to move to the base
printer

S202 HCI(Tray 4) paper empty 0604-001393 Checks whether the tray has paper
sensor

S203 HCI (Tray 4) stack height 0604-001393 Sets the proper height of the paper to make contact with
sensor the pickup roller

S204 HCI(Tray 4) knock-up home 0604-001393 Detects the home location of the knock-up plate
sensor

S205 HCI(Tray 4) shift tray home 0604-001393 Detects the home location of the shift tray
sensor

S206 HCI(Tray 4) shift tray end 0604-001393 Detects the end location of the shift tray
sensor

S207 HCI(Tray 4) shift tray level 0604-001393 Detects the amount of paper on the shift tray
sensor 1

S208 HCI(Tray 4) shift tray level 0604-001393 Detects the amount of paper on the shift tray
sensor 2

S209 HCI(Tray 4) shift tray empty 0604-001393 Checks whether paper is loaded on the shift tray
sensor

HCI (Tray 4) sensors 211

 Table 3-145 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) sensors (continued)

Callout Part name Part number Description

S210 HCI(Tray 4) tray open 0604-001393 Checks whether the tray is open
sensor

S211 HCI(Tray 4) shift gate 0604-001393 Detects whether the shift gate is closed
solenoid home sensor

S212 HCI(Tray 4) right door open JC90-01385A Checks whether the right door is open
sensor

HCI (Tray 4) motor

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) motor.

Figure 3-242 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) motor

Figure 3-243 Detailed view of HCI motor (1 of 3)

Figure 3-244 Detailed view of HCI motor (2 of 3)

212 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-245 Detailed view of HCI motor (3 of 3)

Table 3-146 Overview of HCI (Tray 4) motor

Callout Part name Part number Description

M201 HCI (Tray 4) paper shift JC31-00125A Moves the shift tray to the lift tray
motor

1 Shift plate JC81-07481B -

M202 HCI (Tray 4) tray lift motor JC31-00109A Moves the lift tray upward so that a paper is picked up

U204 Knock-up plate assembly 6GW48-60003 -

3 Paper gate JC81-07478B

M203 HCI(Tray 4) feed motor 5QJ90-60023 Drives HCI(Tray4) feed and trans roller

M204 HCI(Tray 4) pickup motor 5QJ90-64002 Picks up paper

SL201 HCI(Tray 4) shift gate JC33-00031B Drives the shift gate

solenoid

HCI (Tray 4) operation

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) operation.

1. When a paper on the lift tray runs out, the paper on the shift unit moves to the lift tray. The HCI (Tray
4) shift gate solenoid moves so that the shift gate opens to make paper move to the lift tray.

Figure 3-246 HCI (Tray 4) operation, view 1

HCI (Tray 4) operation 213

 2. The HCI (Tray 4) shift motor operates, moving the shift tray to the lift tray side. The HCI (Tray 4) shift
tray home and end sensor control how much the shift motor is operating. After the tray shifting
process, the shift tray moves back to the original position and the shift gate solenoid turns back to
the initial location.

3. If the HCI (Tray 4) tray is closed by the HCI (Tray 4) tray open sensor, knock-up plate moves upward
until paper reaches the HCI (Tray 4) stack height sensor.

Figure 3-247 HCI (Tray 4) operation, view 2

HCI (Tray 4) motor operation

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) motor operation.

Figure 3-248 HCI (Tray 4) motor operation, view 1

● HCI (Tray 4) pickup driving: 1 HCI (Tray 4) pickup motor > 2 gear (pickup roller, reverse roller)

214 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-249 HCI (Tray 4) motor operation, view 2

● HCI (Tray 4) feed driving: 1 HCI (Tray 4) feed motor > 2 pulley & gear (feed roller) > 3 gear & coupler
(trans roller)

Figure 3-250 HCI (Tray 4) motor operation, view 3

● HCI (Tray 4) paper shift driving: 1 HCI (Tray 4) paper shift motor > 2 coupler (shift plate)

● HCI (Tray 4) tray lift motor: 1 HCI (Tray 4) tray lift motor > 2 coupler (knock-up plate)

HCI (Tray 4) PCA

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) PCA.

HCI (Tray 4) PCA connects to the formatter to control the HCI operation.

● HCI (Tray 4) PCA part number: 6GW48-60001 (P201)

HCI (Tray 4) PCA 215

 Figure 3-251 HCI (Tray 4) PCA

Table 3-147 HCI (Tray 4) PCA

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

HCI-CN301 Main-J56 18pin JC39-02605A

HCI-CN302 sHCI-CN301 18pin JC39-02604A

HCI-CN502 Tray 4 paper empty sensor – JC39-02280A

Tray 4 stack height sensor JC39-02602A

Prefeed 4 sensor

Tray 4 feed sensor

HCI-CN601 Tray 4 pickup motor 10pin JC39-02601A

Tray 4 feed motor

Tray 4 right door open sensor

HCI-CN901 HCIsub-CN5 17pin JC39-02286A

HCI tray open sensor JC39-02356A

HCI-CN902 Tray 4 lift motor 6pin JC39-02282A

Tray 4 shift motor

HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA

Learn about the HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA.

The HCI sub PCA is a joint board to communicate with the sensors inside the shift tray and the HCI PCA.

● HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA part number: JC92-02792A (P202)

216 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-252 HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA

Table 3-148 HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

HCIsub-CN1 Tray 4 shift tray level sensor 1 6pin JC39-02351A

Tray 4 shift tray level sensor 2

HCIsub-CN2 Tray 4 shift tray home sensor 6pin JC39-02352A

Tray 4 shift tray end sensor

HCIsub-CN3 Tray 4 shift tray empty sensor 7pin JC39-02352A

Tray 4 knock-up home sensor

HCIsub-CN4 Tray 4 shift tray solenoid home sensor 9pin JC39-02355A

HCIsub-CN5 HCI-CN302 14pin JC39-02356A

HCIsub-CN6 Tray 4 shift gate solenoid 3pin –

Output devices
You will learn more about output devices.

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker

You will learn more about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker.

Detailed Specifications
Learn about the detailed specifications of the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker.

Stapler-stacker finisher
Table 3-149 Stapler-stacker finisher detailed specifications

Item Stapler-stacker finisher Booklet maker

Speed PPM 18.3~70,(70ppm) 18.3~70,(70ppm)

Output devices 217

 Table 3-149 Stapler-stacker finisher detailed specifications (continued)

Item Stapler-stacker finisher Booklet maker

Stack Capacity Main 3,000 sheets 2,000 sheets

(A4/Letter 80gsm)
Top 250 sheets 250 sheets

Paper Size Main Statement SEF ~ 320 x 457 Statement SEF ~ 320 x 457

Top 98 x 148 ~ 13" x 19.2" (330×1200) 98 x 148 ~ 13" x 19.2" (330×1200)

Paper Weight Main 52 ~ 350 gsm 52 ~ 350 gsm

Top 52 ~ 300 gsm 52 ~ 300 gsm

Offset (Non Staple) 15mm(minimum) 15mm(minimum)

※Exception SRA3 and larger size.

Staple Clinching position ● Front/Rear Corner(45°,Flat) ● Front/Rear Corner(45°,Flat)

● Dual ● Dual

Paper weight 52~256 gsm 52~256 gsm

Capacity 65 sheets (90gsm) 65 sheets (90gsm)

Cartridge Capacity 5,000 clinching/cartridge 5,000 clinching/cartridge

Offline Yes Yes

Hole Punch Paper weight 52 ~ 300 gsm 52 ~ 300 gsm

available unit (Auto NA2/3, EU2/4, Swedish NA2/3, EU2/4, Swedish

change)

Booklet maker
Table 3-150 Booklet maker specifications

Item Description

Set Speed PPM 18.3~70(70ppm)

See Footnote: 1

Paper size B5 SEF ~ 12'' x 18''

Paper weight 60 ~ 120 gsm

Staple + Fold Capacity(80gsm) 25 sheets

Fold Capacity(80gsm) 5 sheets

Tray Capacity 5 sets / 25 sheets

Staple Cartridge Capacity 5,000 clinching/cartridge

218 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-150 Booklet maker specifications (continued)

Item Description

C - Folding 3 sheets

Letter SEF, A4 SEF (52~90gsm)

1 The output speed of booklet making is the same as the device's printing speed, which varies depending on paper size, printing
mode, etc. Depending on specific usage conditions, such as the paper size used and the number of copies, the output speed
may decrease by up to 90% of the product's maximum output speed.

Physical
Table 3-151 Physical

Module Option Size Module Weight Packed Weight

(Reference) W X D X H [mm] [Kg] [Kg]

Stapler-stacker 751.7 x 610 x 1016.4 40 62

Booklet maker 751.7 x 610 x 1016.4 62 84.5

Hole punch 80 x 485 x 235 2.8 4.1

Paper size
Table 3-152 Paper size specification

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H

52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t

A5 210 8.3X5. LEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O X X

X14 8
8

State 216 8.5X5. LEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O X X

ment X14 5
0

Letter 279 11X8.5 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

X21
6

A4 297 8.3X11. LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

X21 7
0

B5(JIS) 257 10.1×7.2 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O X X

X18
2

B5(ISO 250 9.8×6.9 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O X X

) X17
6

Detailed Specifications 219

 Table 3-152 Paper size specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H

52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t

Execut 267 10.5X7. LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

ive X18 3
4

No 9 98X 3.9X8. SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

Env 225 9

Monar 98.4 3.9×7.5 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

ch Env ×19
0.5

Postca 101. 4.0×6.0 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

rd 6×1
52.4
4x6

A6 105 4.1X5.8 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

X14
8

No 10 105 4.1×9.5 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

Env ×241

DL Env 110× 4.3×8.7 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

220

C6 Env 114× 4.5×6.4 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

162

B6 128 5.0x7.2 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

x18
2

State 140 5.5X8. SEF O X O X X X O X O X O X X

ment X21 5
6

A5 148 5.8X8. SEF O X O X X X O X O X O X X

X21 3
0

C5 Env 162 6.4×9.0 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

×22
9

B5(ISO 176× 6.9×9.8 SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O X X

) 250

B5(JIS) 182 7.2X10.1 SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O O X

X25
7

Execut 184 7.3X10. SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O O X

ive X26 5
7

220 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-152 Paper size specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H

52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t

16k 195 7.7X10. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X27 6
0

A4 210 8.3X11. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O O

X29 7
7

Legal 216 8.5X14 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X35
6

Letter 216 8.5X11 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O O

X27
9

Folio 216 8.5X13 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X33
0

Oficio 215. 8.5×13. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

9×3 5
42.9

C4 Env 229 9.1X12. SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

×32 8
4

Tabloid 254 10 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O O X

X37 X14.7
4

B4 257 10X14. SEF O O O F/R X O O O X O O O X

X36 3
4

8K 270 10.6X1 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X39 5.4
0

Ledger 279 11X17 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X43
2

A3 297 11.7X16. SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X42 5
0

Tabloid 304. 12×18 SEF O X O X X X X X X X X O X

8×4
Extra 57.2

SRA3 320 12.6×17. SEF O X O X X X X X X X X X X

×45 7
0

Detailed Specifications 221

 Table 3-152 Paper size specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H

52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t

13"x19. 330 13x19.2 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

2" x48
7

Custo W9 W3.86- - X NA O NA NA NA N N N N NA NA NA
m 8-32 12.59 A A A A
0
L5.5-18
L13
9.7-
457.
2

* “F/R” means front side and rear side can be supported.

Media performance
Table 3-153 Media performance

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple HP BM

Cover Content C-Fold

Plain (71-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Thick (91-105 g/m2) O O O O O X X

Heavy weight (106-175 g/m2) O O O O O X X

Extra Heavy weight 1 (176-216 O O O O O X X

g/m²)

Extra Heavy weight 2 (217-256 O O O O O X X

g/m2)

Extra Heavy weight 3 (257-300 O O X O O X X

g/m2)

Extra Heavy weight 4 (301-325 O X X X X X X

g/m2)

Thin (60-70 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Cotton (75-90 g/m2) O O X X X X X

Colored (75-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Pre-Printed (75-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Recycled (60-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

222 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-153 Media performance (continued)

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple HP BM

Cover Content C-Fold

Bond O O O O O O X

Archive (75-105 g/m2) O O O O O O X

Letterhead O O O O O O X

Pre-Punched O O O X X X X

Thin Cardstock (105-163 g/m2) O O O O X X X

Thick Cardstock (170-216 g/m2) O O O X X X X

Heavy Cardstock (217-256 g/m2) O O O X X X X

Extra Heavy Cardstock 1(257-300 O O X X X X X

g/m²)

Extra Heavy Cardstock 2(301-325 O X X X X X X

g/m2)

Thin Glossy (106-169 g/m2) O O O O O X X

Thick Glossy (170-216 g/m²) O O O X O X X

Heavy Glossy (217-256 g/m2) O O O X O X X

Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X O X X X X X

Thick Envelope (217-256 g/m2) X O X X X X X

Transparency (138~146 gsm) O O X X X X X

Labels (120~150 gsm) X O X X X X X

Tab O O X O X X X

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker covers

Learn about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker covers.

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker covers 223

 Figure 3-253 Front-left view of the stapler-stacker finisher

Table 3-154 Front-left view of the stapler-stacker finisher

Callout Part name Part number

C901 Front doors 5QK09-60106

C902 Caster cover JC63-04985B

C903 Left lower cover (stapler-stacker) 5QK09-40041

C904 Left upper cover 5QK09-40040

Figure 3-254 Front-left view of the bookler maker

Table 3-155 Front-left view of the booklet maker

Callout Part name Part number

C903-1 Left lower cover (booklet maker) 8GS05-60124

C905 Booklet maker output tray 8GS05-60126

224 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-255 Rear-right view of the bookler maker

Table 3-156 Rear right view of the booklet maker

Callout Part name Part number

C906 Top output tray 5QK09-40027, 5QK09-40029

C907 Main output tray 5QK09-40028, 5QK09-40029

C908 Rear cover 5QK09-40021

C909 Top cover 5QK09-60108

C910

Figure 3-256 Front view of the bookler maker

Table 3-157 Front view of the booklet maker

Callout Part name Part number

C911 Right uppercover 5QK09-60109

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker covers 225

 Table 3-157 Front view of the booklet maker (continued)

Callout Part name Part number

C912 Front cover 5QK09-40019

C913 Front lower cover L 5QK09-40021

C914 Booklet front cover 5QK09-60105

C915 Front lower cover R 5QK09-40022

C916 Front lower cover 5QK09-40020

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker unit overview

You will learn more about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker unit overview.

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker workflow

Learn about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker workflow.

Figure 3-257 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker workflow

226 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-158 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker workflow

Item Unit Description

1 Bridge unit Moves paper from the printer to the finisher

2 Entrance unit Allows the paper to move into the finisher

3 Punch unit (optional) Makes the holes in a specific location on the paper

4 Tray diverter unit Changes the paper direction to the main output tray or top output
tray

5 Top exit unit Moves the paper from the diverter to the top output tray

6 Top output tray unit Loads paper that has completed its printing job

7 Main exit unit Move sthe paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit with
forward direction or to the buffer unit with backward direction

8 Paddle unit Pushes to the end fence to be aligned towards top and bottom of
the paper

9 End fence unit Sets the standard position of the paper to be aligned towards top
and bottom of the paper

10 Tamper unit Aligns the paper on the right and left side

11 Stapler unit Staples a bundle of an aligned documents

12 Ejector unit Transfers the stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the
output bin

13 Main output tray unit Loads paper that has completed its printing job

14 Paper holding unit Keeps the paper stable when ejecting to the output bin and
controls the output bin movement

15 Buffer unit Maintains the paper inside the unit for a while or moves it to the
booklet maker

16 Booklet entrance unit Moves paper into the booklet maker

17 Booklet paddle unit Moves paper to the booklet end fence

18 Booklet end fence unit Moves paper to the designated position for folding and stapling

19 Booklet presser unit Presses the paper that enters to the booklet tamper unit to prevent
paper being shuffled

20 Booklet tamper unit Aligns the paper on the right and left side to make a booklet

21 Booklet stapler unit Staples a bundle of aligned documents to make a booklet

22 Booklet fold unit Folds a bundle of aligned documents as a booklet

23 Booklet diverter unit Changes the paper direction to the booklet exit unit or the location
to make a C-fold

24 Booklet exit unit Moves paper to the booklet output bin

25 Booklet output tray unit Loads a bundle of booklets

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors

Learn about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors.

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors 227

 Figure 3-258 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors, view 1

Table 3-159 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors, view 1

No Name Part number Type Description

S901 Bridge entrance JC32-00020A Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes to the bridge
sensor entrance unit

S902 Bridge door 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the bridge door is open
sensor

S903 Bridge 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether paper comes to the bridge
exitsensor exit unit

S904 Tray diverter 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the tray diverter sets at the
home sensor home position

S905 Main exit CAM 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checkss whether the main exit CAM sets at
home sensor the home position

S906 Front 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the front tamper sets at the
tamperhome home position
sensor

S907 End fence home 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the end fence sets at the
sensor home position

S908 Paddle 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the paddle sets at the home
homesensor position

S909 Rear 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the rear tamper sets at the
tamperhome home position
sensor

S910 Main exit sensor JC32-00020A Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes to the main exit
unit

S911 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether paper comes to the top exit
unit

228 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-159 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors, view 1 (continued)

No Name Part number Type Description

S912 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes to the entrance
unit

Figure 3-259 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors, view 2

Table 3-160 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors, view 2

No Name Part number Type Description

S913 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A Paper sensor Checks whether paper exits the buffer unit

S914 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A Paper sensor Checks whether paper is on the ejector or not

S915 Top output tray JC82-01039A LED IR, Photo TR Checks whether the top output tray is full or
paper full sensor not

S916 Buffer home 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the buffer roller and the idle
sensor roller are attached or detached

S917 Front paper 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks the location of the paper holding
holding sensor actuator for controlling the position of the main
output tray

S918 Front door JC39-02309A Switch Checks whether the front door is open
switch

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors 229

 Table 3-160 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors, view 2 (continued)

No Name Part number Type Description

S919 Manual staple 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether paper comes to the manual
sensor staple position

S920 Main output tray JC82-01039A LED IR, Photo TR Checks whether the main output tray reaches
top of stack the top of stack
sensor

S921 Stapler front 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Places the stapler in the manual stapling
sensor position

S922 Paper holding 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the paper holding actuator
home sensor sets at the home position

S923 Ejector 2 motor 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector 2 motor is
sensor operational

S924 Stapler mid front 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Places the stapler at the exact stapling
sensor position

S925 Stapler mid rear 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Places the stapler at the exact stapling
sensor position

S926 Main output tray 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the output tray is full
lower limit
sensor

S927 Ejector1 motor 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector1 motor is
sensor operational

S928 Ejector1 end 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector1 sets at the end
sensor position

S929 Ejector1 home 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector1 sets at the home
sensor position

S930 Stapler rear 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the stapler sets at the home
sensor (rear) position

S931 Rear paper 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks the location of the paper holding
holding sensor actuator for controlling the position of the main
output tray

S932 Ejector2 home 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector2 sets at the home
sensor position

S933 Main output tray 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the main output tray motor is
motor sensor operational

S934 Main output tray JC39-02316A Switch Checks whether the main output tray reaches
top of stack at the top of stack
switch

S935 Top door switch JC39-02310A Switch Checks whether the top door is open

230 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-260 Booklet maker sensors

Table 3-161 Booklet maker sensors

No Name Part number Type Description

S936 Booklet entrance 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the paper comes to the bridge
sensor entrance unit

S937 Booklet presser 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet presser sets at
home sensor the home position

S938 Booklet tamper 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet tamper sets at the
home sensor home position

S939 Booklet C-fold 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet C-fold blade sets
blade home at the home position
sensor

S940 Booklet diverter 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet diverter sets at
home sensor the home position

S941 Booklet paddle 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet paddle sets at the
home sensor home position

S942 Booklet end 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet end fence sets at
fence home the home position
sensor

S943 Booklet output JC82-01039A LED IR, Photo TR Checks whether the paper goes to the booklet
tray sensor output bin

S944 Booklet exit JC32-00020A Paper sensor Checks whether the paper goes to the booklet
sensor exit unit

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker sensors 231

 Table 3-161 Booklet maker sensors (continued)

No Name Part number Type Description

S945 Booklet blade 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Checks whether the booklet blade sets at the
home sensor home position

S946 Booklet tamper JC32-00020A Paper sensor Checks whether the paper comes to the
sensor booklet tamper unit

Figure 3-261 Paper path sensors

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker motors and solenoids

Learn about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker motors and solenoids.

232 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-262 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker motors and solenoids

Table 3-162 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker motors and solenoids

No Name Part number Type Description

M901 Paddle motor JC93-01001A Stepping motor Rotates the paddle and moves the paddle
pusher up and downward at the same time

M902 Main exit cam JC93-01155A Stepping motor Rotates the main exit cam to detach the exit
motor roller from the exit idle roller

M903 End fence motor JC93-01001A Stepping motor Moves the front and rear end fence depending
on paper size (width) so that paper is correctly
arranged at the end fence

M904 Front tamper JC93-01001A Stepping motor Moves the front tamper unit
motor

M905 Ejector 2 motor JC93-01168A DC motor Moves the ejector 2 and grabs paper

M906 Ejector 1 motor JC93-01168A DC motor Moves the ejector 1 forward and backward

M907 Paper holding 8GS05-60104 Stepping motor Moves paper holding actuator up when paper
motor goes out to the output bin

M908 Stapler position JC31-00163A Hybrid Stepping Moves the stapler

motor motor

M909 Rear tamper JC93-01001A Stepping motor Moves the rear tamper unit
motor

SL901 Buffer solenoid JC33-00038A Solenoid Holds paper so that it does not to fall out to the
booklet maker during the buffering task

M910 Buffer motor JC93-01152A Stepping motor Moves paper to the buffer space or the booklet
maker

M911 Main output tray JC31-00178B DC motor Moves the main output bin up and down
motor

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker motors and solenoids 233

 Table 3-162 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker motors and solenoids (continued)

No Name Part number Type Description

M912 Entrance motor 3SJ19-80501 Hybrid Stepping Operates the entrance roller, middle roller,
motor and top middle roller when driving forward
and moves the diverter cam when driving
backward

M913 Exit motor 3SJ19-80501 Hybrid Stepping Rotates the main exit roller and the top exit
motor roller

M914 Bridge motor 3SJ19-80501 Hybrid Stepping Rotates the bridge entrance roller, the bridge
motor middle roller, and the bridge exit roller

Figure 3-263 Booklet maker motors and solenoids

Table 3-163 Booklet maker motors and solenoids

No Name Part number Type Description

M915 Booklet entrance JC93-01152A Stepping moto Rotates the booklet entrance roller
motor

M916 Booklet presser JC93-01155A Stepping moto Operates the booklet presser
motor

M917 Booklet C-fold JC93-01154A Stepping moto Drives the booklet C-fold blade and the moving
blade motor guide

M918 Booklet diverter JC93-01153A Stepping moto Drives the booklet diverter
motor

M919 Booklet paddle JC93-01001A Stepping moto Rotates the booklet paddle
motor

234 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-163 Booklet maker motors and solenoids (continued)

No Name Part number Type Description

M920 Booklet end JC93-01155A Stepping moto Moves the booklet end fence up and down
fence motor

M921 Booklet fold JC31-00144A BLDC motor Rotates the booklet fold roller, the booklet C-
motor fold roller, and the booklet exit roller

M922 Booklet blade JC31-00144A BLDC motor Drives the booklet blade
motor

M923 Booklet tamper JC93-01155A Stepping motor Moves the booklet tamper unit
motor

SL902 Booklet end JC33-00038A Solenoid Operates the gripper of the booklet end fence
fence solenoid to grip paper that comes to the booklet end
fence

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker rollers

Learn about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker roller.

Figure 3-264 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker rollers

Table 3-164 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker rollers

No Name Part number Description

R901 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A Moves paper from the machine to the bridge unit

R902 Bridge middle roller JC66-04732A Moves paper from the machine to the bridge unit

R903 Bridge entrance roller JC66-04733A Movese paper from the machine to the bridge unit

R904 Entrance roller JC66-04722A Moves paper from the machine to the exit unit

R905 Middle roller JC66-04724A Moves paper from the machine to the exit unit

R906 Buffer roller JC66-05161A Moves paper to the booklet maker and makes the gap
between the buffer roller and the idle roller so that the
paper remains there for the buffering process

R907 Main exit roller JC66-04726A Moves paper to the ejector unit or the buffer unit and
makes the gap between the main exit roller and the
idle roller so that paper remains there for the buffering
process

R908 Top middle roller JC66-04725A Moves paper to the top output bin

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker rollers 235

 Table 3-164 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker rollers (continued)

No Name Part number Description

R909 Top exit roller JC66-04727A Moves paper to the top output bin

Figure 3-265 Booklet maker rollers

Table 3-165 Booklet maker rollers

No Name Part number Description

R910 Booklet entrance roller JC66-04717A Moves paper from the machine to the bridge unit

R911 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A Presses a stack of paper to fold completely

R912 Booklet c-fold roller JC66-04744A In case of C-fold, presses a stack of paper to fold
completely

R913 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A Moves paper to the booklet output tray unit

Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker PCAs

Learn about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker PCAs.

236 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-266 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker PCAs

Table 3-166 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker PCAs

No Name Part number Description

P901 Manual staple PCA JC92-02789B Shows the manual stapling condition and accepts the
button input for manual staple

P902 Booklet maker PCA 6GW51-60001 Controls the booklet maker module and consists of the
micro-controller and driver ICs

P903 Finisher main PCA 6GW55-60001 Controls the finisher modules and consists of the micro-
controller and driver ICs

Not Hole punch PCA – Controls the hole punch module and consists of the
shown micro-controller and driver ICs

Bridge unit
You will learn more about the bridge unit.

Bridge unit overview

Learn about the bridge unit.

The bridge unit is the unit that transfers paper from the base printer to the finisher.

The bridge entrance sensor detects whether a paper enters into the bridge unit from the base printer.
In the same way, the bridge exit sensor checks whether the paper leaves from the bridge unit to the
finisher inside. The bridge motor drives the bridge entrance roller, bridge middle roller, and bridge exit
roller. It makes the paper moves through the bridge unit. The jam removal door locating at the front side
of the unit helps user to remove the jammed paper.

Bridge unit 237

 Figure 3-267 Overview of the bridge unit

Table 3-167 Overview of the bridge unit

No Part name Part number Description

S902 Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 Detects if the bridge door is open

S901 Bridge entrance sensor JC32-00020A Checks whether paper comes to the bridge entrance
unit

S903 Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 Checks whether paper moves out of the bridge unit

M914 Bridge motor 3SJ19-80501 Rotates the bridge entrance roller, the bridge middle
roller, and the bridge exit roller

R903 Bridge entrance roller JC66-04733A Moves paper from the printer to the bridge unit

R902 Bridge middle roller JC66-04732A Move paper from the printer to the bridge unit

R901 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A Moves paper from the printer to the finisher entrance
unit

238 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-268 Detail view of the bridge unit

Table 3-168 Detail view of the bridge unit

No Part name Part number Description

U901 Bridge unit 5QK09-60110 Moves paper from the printer to the finisher

S902 Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 Detects if the bridge door is open

S901 Bridge entrance sensor JC32-00020A Checks whether paper comes to the bridge entrance
unit

S903 Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 Checks whether paper moves out of the bridge unit

M914 Bridge motor 3SJ19-80501 Rotates the bridge entrance roller, the bridge middle
roller, and the bridge exit roller

R903 Bridge entrance roller JC66-04733A Moves paper from the printer to the bridge unit

R902 Bridge middle roller JC66-04732A Moves paper from the printer to the bridge unit

R901 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A Moves paper from the printer to the finisher entrance
unit

Stapler-stacker finisher
You will learn more about the stapler-stacker finisher.

Entrance unit
You will learn more about the entrance unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Entrance unit overview

Learn about the entrance unit overview.

Entrance unit moves a paper from the bridge unit to the finisher inside. The entrance sensor installed at
the right side of the unit senses whether the paper enters into the finisher. The entrance motor rotates
forward to drive the entrance roller and the middle roller to move the paper from the entrance unit to the
exit area.

Stapler-stacker finisher 239

 Figure 3-269 Overview of the entrance unit

Table 3-169 Overview of the entrance unit

No Part name Part number Description

S912 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A Detects whether paper enters at the entrance unit

M912 Entrance motor 3SJ19-80501 Operates the entrance roller and middle roller when
driving forward

R904 Entrance roller JC66-04722A Moves paper from the entrance unit to the exit unit

R905 Middle roller JC66-04724A Moves paper from the entrance unit to the exit unit

Figure 3-270 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 1

Table 3-170 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

R904 Entrance roller JC66-04722A Moves paper from the entrance unit to the exit unit

R905 Middle roller JC66-04724A Moves paper from the entrance unit to the exit unit

240 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-271 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 2

Table 3-171 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

M912 Entrance motor 3SJ19-80501 Operates the entrance roller and middle roller when
driving forward

Figure 3-272 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 3

Table 3-172 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 3

No Part name Part number Description

S912 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A Detects whether paper enters at the entrance unit

Punch unit (optional)

You will learn more about the punch unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Punch unit overview

Learn about the punch unit overview.

The punch unit is an optional device that punches the holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper.
The punch unit is positioned right after the entrance unit.

In case of 2/3 hole punch, the 5 hole-punches are mounted in the punch unit. As the punch motor rotates
forward, the inner gear moves to the right and the 3 hole-punches are moved downward to make the
holes on the paper. When making 2 holes, the motor rotates in the backward direction and the inner gear

Punch unit (optional) 241

 rotates to the left to drill two holes. The travel distance and position of the hole-punches are detected
and controlled by the 3 punch position sensors.

NOTE: Puncher types are various depending on the country.

Figure 3-273 Overview of the punch unit

Table 3-173 Overview of the punch unit

No Part name Part number Description

U902-1 2-3 hole punch unit Y1G10-67901 –

U902-2 2-4 hole punch unit Y1G11-67901 –

U902-3 Swedish hole punch unit Y1G12-67901 –

Figure 3-274 Detail view of the punch unit

Table 3-174 Detail view of the punch unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Punch scan home sensor NA Detects the home position of the punch unit

2 Punch scan motor NA Transmits the force to move the punch unit in the
horizontal direction

242 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-174 Detail view of the punch unit (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

3 Punch scan edge sensor NA Checks the paper width to make hole on the right
position of paper

4 Punch position sensor NA Detects the travel distance and position of the hole-
punches

5 Punch motor sensor NA Checks whether the punch motor is operational

6 Punch motor NA Transmits the force to make holes on the paper

Punch unit operation

Learn about the punch unit operation.

1. A paper comes into the punch unit, and it is aligned to drill holes. The motor rotates forward or
backward (callout 1), then the punch rail in the punch unit moves in order to move the punch hole
makers.

Figure 3-275 Punch unit operation, view 1

2. The punch position sensors determine the punch rail location (callout 2). It drives the punch hole
makers up and down to make holes (callout 3).

Figure 3-276 Punch unit operation, view 2

Punch unit operation 243

 Figure 3-277 Punch unit operation, view 3

3. In some paper sizes, paper might be jammed in a place where punch hole maker is
located.Therefore, the punch unit moves left and right (callout 4).

Figure 3-278 Punch unit operation, view 4

Tray diverter unit

You will learn more about the tray diverter unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Tray diverter unit overview

Learn about the tray diverter unit overview.

The tray diverter unit is responsible for determining the paper feed direction so that paper can be
ejected to the main output tray or top output tray

The entrance motor rotates this unit. When the entrance motor rotates backward, the phase of the
divertor CAM changes so that the paper path direction changes. The tray diverter home sensor (S4)
checks whether the tray diverter is located at the home position or not.

244 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-279 Overview of the tray diverter unit

Table 3-175 Overview of the tray diverter unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Tray diverter JC61-07205A Selects the paper path of either the main output tray or
the top output tray

S904 Tray diverter home sensor 0604-001415 Checks whether home position of the tray diverter

M912 Entrance motor 3SJ19-80501 Operates the tray diverter cam when driving in the
backward direction

Figure 3-280 Detail view of the tray diverter unit, view 1

Table 3-176 Detail view of the tray diverter unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

1 Tray diverter JC61-07205A Selects the paper path of either the main output tray or
the top output tray

2 Tray diverter cam JC66-04560A Changes the paper path

Tray diverter unit overview 245

 Figure 3-281 Detail view of the tray diverter unit, view 2

Table 3-177 Detail view of the tray diverter unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S904 Tray diverter home sensor 0604-001415 Checks whether home position of the tray diverter

Tray diverter unit operation

Learn about the tray diverter unit operation.

1. When printing out the document to the main output tray, the entrance motor rotates (callout 1) so
that the tray diverter moves downwards to move the paper out to the main output tray.

Figure 3-282 Tray diverter unit operation, view 1

2. In case of top output tray, the diverter cam moves. The tray diverter moves upwards (callout 2) so
that the paper moves out to the top output tray.

246 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-283 Tray diverter unit operation, view 2

Top exit unit

You will learn more about the top exit unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Top exit unit overview

Learn about the top exit unit overview.

The top exit unit sends paper from the tray diverter unit to the top output tray unit.

The top exit sensor detects paper entry into the top exit unit. The entrance motor drives the top middle
roller, and the exit motor transmit the force to rotate the top exit roller so that paper moves to the top
output tray unit.

Figure 3-284 Overview of the top exit unit

Table 3-178 Overview of the top exit unit

No Part name Part number Description

S911 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper has entered at the top exit unit

M912 Entrance motor 3SJ19-80501 Rotate the top middle roller when driving in the forward
direction

Top exit unit 247

 Table 3-178 Overview of the top exit unit (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

M913 Exit motor 3SJ19-80501 Rotate the top exit roller

R908 Top middle roller JC66-04725A Move the paper to the top output tray

R909 Top exit roller JC66-04725A Move the paper to the top output tray

Figure 3-285 Detail view of the top exit unit

Table 3-179 Detail view of the top exit unit

No Part name Part number Description

S911 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 Check whether the paper has entered at the top exit unit

R909 Top exit roller JC66-04725A Move the paper to the top output tray

Top output tray unit

You will learn more about the top output tray unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Top output tray unit overview

Learn about the top output tray unit overview.

The top output tray unit loads discharged paper from the finisher. It has the paper pull sensor to detect
whether the tray is full with the paper.

248 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-286 Overview of the top output tray unit

Table 3-180 Overview of the top output tray unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Top output tray 5QK09-40027 Load the ejected paper

5QK09-40029

S915 Top output tray paper full JC82-01039A Detect whether the tray is full
sensor

Figure 3-287 Detail view of the top output tray unit

Table 3-181 Detail view of the top output tray unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Top output tray 5QK09-40027 Load the ejected paper

5QK09-40029

Top output tray unit overview 249

 Table 3-181 Detail view of the top output tray unit (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

S915 Top output tray paper full JC82-01039A Detect whether the tray is full
sensor

Main exit unit

You will learn more about the main exit unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Main exit unit overview

Learn about the main exit unit overview.

The main exit unit delivers paper from the tray diverter unit to the ejector unit or buffer unit.

The main exit sensor detects whether paper comes in from main exit unit. The exit motor drives the main
exit roller to send the paper to the ejector unit or buffer unit.

Figure 3-288 Overview of the main exit unit

Table 3-182 Overview of the main exit unit

No Part name Part number Description

S910 Main exit sensor JC32-00020A Detect whether the paper entered at the main exit unit

M913 Exit motor 3SJ19-80501 Rotate the main exit roller

R907 Main exit roller JC66-04726A Move the paper to the ejector unit or the buffer unit

1 Main exit cam – Adjust the gap between the main exit roller and the idle
roller for the buffering

S905 Main exit cam home 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the main exit cam
sensor

M902 Main exit cam motor JC93-01155A Rotate the main exit cam

250 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-289 Detail view of the main exit unit, view 1

Table 3-183 Detail view of the main exit unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

M913 Exit motor 3SJ19-80501 Rotate the main exit roller

R907 Main exit roller JC66-04726A Move the paper to the ejector unit or the buffer unit

Figure 3-290 Detail view of the main exit unit, view 2

Table 3-184 Detail view of the main exit unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S905 Main exit cam home 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the main exit cam
sensor

M902 Main exit cam motor JC93-01155A Rotate the main exit cam

Main exit unit operation

Learn about the main exit unit operation.

1. The exit motor drives forward so that paper will moves towards the ejector unit.

Main exit unit operation 251

 Figure 3-291 Main exit unit operation, view 1

2. If the exit motor rotates backwards paper moves towards the buffer unit.

Figure 3-292 Main exit unit operation, view 2

Paddle unit
You will learn more about the paddle unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Paddle unit overview

Learn about the paddle unit overview.

The paddle unit rotates the rubber paddles mounted on the shaft to move paper to the end fence unit,
allowing paper to be arranged well for the next job. The paddle presser is mounted behind the rubber
paddles and presses the end of paper to help paper be stacked well at the end fence unit. The paddle
home sensor checks the home position to drive the paddles. And the paddle motor drives the paddle
and paddle presser.

252 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-293 Overview of the paddle unit

Table 3-185 Overview of the paddle unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Paddle JC90-01480A Moves paper into the end fence unit

2 Paddle presser JC61-07206A Presses the end of bent paper helps paper to be loaded
well at the end fence unit

S908 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the paddle

M901 Paddle motor JC93-01001A Rotates the paddle, and moves the paddle presser up
and downward at the same time

Figure 3-294 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 1

Table 3-186 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

S908 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the paddle

Paddle unit overview 253

 Table 3-186 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 1 (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

M901 Paddle motor JC93-01001A Rotates the paddle, and moves the paddle presser up
and downward at the same time

Figure 3-295 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 2

Table 3-187 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

1 Paddle JC90-01480A Moves paper into the end fence unit

2 Paddle presser JC61-07206A Presses the end of bent paper helps paper to be loaded
well at the end fence unit

Paddle unit operation

Learn about the paddle unit operation.

1. A paper falls downward through the exit unit. The paddles rotate to make the paper moves into the
end fence unit.

Figure 3-296 Paddle unit operation, view 1

2. The paddle presser pushes the end of the paper so as not to be scattered around the paddle unit.

254 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-297 Paddle unit operation, view 2

End fence unit

You will learn more about the end fence unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

End fence unit overview

Learn about the end fence unit overview.

The end fence unit sets the standard position of the paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the
paper. End fence motor operates the two end fences and adjust width of them to stack a bunch of paper
correctly. The end fence home sensor detects the home position of the end fence.

Figure 3-298 Overview of the end fence unit

Table 3-188 Overview of the end fence unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 End fence NA Aligns top and bottom side of paper

S907 End fence home sensor 0604-001393 Detects the home position of the end fence

M903 End fence motor JC93-01001A Moves front and rear end fence depending on paper size
(width) so that paper sits correctly at the end fence

End fence unit 255

 Figure 3-299 Detail view of the end fence unit, view 1

Table 3-189 Detail view of the end fence unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

M903 End fence motor JC93-01001A Moves front and rear end fence depending on paper size
(width) so that paper arranged well at the end fence

Figure 3-300 Detail view of the end fence unit, view 2

Table 3-190 Detail view of the end fence unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

1 End fence NA Aligns top and bottom side of paper

S907 End fence home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the end fence

End fence unit operation

Learn about the end fence unit operation.

1. The end fence motor moves the front and rear end fences in the arrow direction (callout 1)
depending on paper width.

256 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-301 End fence unit operation, view 1

2. A paper goes into the end fence unit by the paddle unit (callout 2). At the same time the end fence
unit aligns the paper to the direction of blue line (callout 3).

Figure 3-302 End fence unit operation, view 2

Tamper unit
You will learn more about the tamper unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Tamper unit overview

Learn about the tamper unit overview.

The tamper unit functions to align the left and right sides of a bundle of paper. When a certain amount
of paper is collected after printing, the tamper unit hits the left and right ends of the paper to align
the paper correctly. Each tamper has a motor on the back side that delivers driving force to move.
The tamper home sensors are mounted on the back side of the unit to check the home position of the
tamper unit.

Tamper unit 257

 Figure 3-303 Overview of the tamper unit

Table 3-191 Overview of the tamper unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Front tamper JC82-00901A Align left and right side of the paper

S906 Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the tamper unit

M904 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A Move the front tamper unit

2 Rear tamper JC82-00898A Align left and right side of the paper

S909 Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the tamper unit

M909 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A Move the front tamper unit

Figure 3-304 Detail view of the tamper unit, view 1

258 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-192 Detail view of the tamper unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

1 Front tamper JC82-00901A Align left and right side of the paper

2 Rear tamper JC82-00898A Align left and right side of the paper

Figure 3-305 Detail view of the tamper unit, view 2

Table 3-193 Detail view of the tamper unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

1 Front tamper JC82-00901A Align left and right side of the paper

S906 Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the tamper unit

M904 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A Move the front tamper unit

2 Rear tamper JC82-00898A Align left and right side of the paper

S909 Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the tamper unit

M909 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A Move the front tamper unit

Tamper unit operation

Learn about the tamper unit operation.

1. A stack of paper is arranged at the end fence unit though end fence unit operation. Then the left and
right tampers arrange both side of the paper.

Tamper unit operation 259

 Figure 3-306 Tamper unit operation, view 1

2. In case of offset printing, the tamper unit moves slightly different from the previous bundles location
so that the next bunch of paper could be shifted.

Figure 3-307 Tamper unit operation, view 2

Stapler unit
You will learn more about the stapler unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Stapler unit overview

Learn about the stapler unit overview.

The stapler units a device installed inside the finisher that staples a bundle of aligned documents.
Documents are collected as a bundle by the tamper unit and the end fence unit for stapling, then stapler
assembly staples the bundle. There are six options to make a bundle.

Figure 3-308 Stapling options

260 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

The stapler unit moves using the stapler motor installed inside. The one home sensor and two position
sensors are mounted so that the stapler can be positioned in the exact stapling position whether it is
stapled on the left, the right, or at the center of the document. Stapling is done by the motor inside the
stapler assembly.

In addition, manual staple feature is available on the front-upper side of the finisher. The manual staple
sensor detects whether a stack of paper comes into the manual staple location or not. The front sensor
makes the stapler moves at the manual staple location.

Figure 3-309 Overview of the stapler unit

Table 3-194 Overview of the stapler unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Stapler unit 8GS05-60116 Staple a bundle of paper

S921 Stapler front sensor 0604-001393 Detect the stapler at the manual stapling position

S924 Stapler mid-front 0604-001393 Detect the stapler location

S925 Stapler mid-rear sensor 0604-001393 Detect the stapler location

S930 Stapler rear sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the stapler

S919 Manual staple sensor 0604-001415 Detect paper when manual stapling

M908 Stapler position motor JC31-00163A Move the stapler

Stapler unit overview 261

 Figure 3-310 Detail view of the stapler unit, view 1

Table 3-195 Detail view of the stapler unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

1 Stapler unit 8GS05-60116 Staple a bundle of paper

2 Staple cartridge JC81-09882A Staple cartridge

S919 Manual staple sensor 0604-001415 Detect paper when manual stapling

Figure 3-311 Detail view of the stapler unit, view 2

Table 3-196 Detail view of the stapler unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S921 Stapler front sensor 0604-001393 Detect the stapler at the manual stapling position

S924 Stapler mid-front 0604-001393 Detect the stapler location

S925 Stapler mid-rear sensor 0604-001393 Detect the stapler location

S930 Stapler rear sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the stapler

M908 Stapler position motor JC31-00163A Move the stapler

Staple and staple cartridge

Learn about the staple and staple cartridge.

1. Staple cartridge: JC81-09882B. Initial staples included.

262 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-312 Staple cartridge for stapler unit

NOTE: Staple handle color may vary (blue or green color).

2. Staple: Y1G14-67901. 3 EA in 1 box.

Figure 3-313 Staple for stapler unit

Stapler unit operation

Learn about the stapler unit operation.

1. The stapler position motor drives the stapler assembly to direction 1. During this process the stapler
assembly moves through the rail using three stapler position sensors (callout 2) and staples a stack
of paper.

Figure 3-314 Stapler unit operation, view 1

2. In case of staple cartridge replacement, the stapler moves to direction 3. During manual stapling,
the stapler moves in direction 4.

Stapler unit operation 263

 Figure 3-315 Stapler unit operation, view 2

Ejector unit
You will learn more about the ejector unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Ejector unit overview

Learn about the ejector unit overview.

The ejector unit ejects a bundle of paper out to the main output tray which consists of the ejector 1 and
the ejector 2. The ejector 1 moves a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector 2 unit.
During this process, the ejector 1 motor transmits the driving force to the ejector1 unit. And ejector 1
motor sensor checks the ejector 1 motor operation. And the ejector 1 home sensor detects the home
position of the ejector 1. The ejector 1 end sensor detects the end position of the ejector 1. When the
paper arrives at the ejector 2 unit, the ejector 2 grabs a stack of paper and ejects it onto the main output
tray. The ejector 2 motor is responsible for this process, and the ejector 2 motor sensor helps it to be
controlled correctly. In addition, the ejector2 home sensor checks the location of the ejector 2.

Figure 3-316 Overview of the ejector unit

Table 3-197 Overview of the ejector unit

No Part name Part number Description

– Ejector unit JC90-01824A

S14 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A Detects whether the paper is on the ejector or not

1 Ejector 1 Moves the stack of paper from the end fence to the
ejector 2

264 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-197 Overview of the ejector unit (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

S927 Ejector 1 motor sensor 0604-001415 Detects whether the ejector1 motor rotates

M906 Ejector 1 motor JC93-01168A Moves the ejector 1 forward and backward

2 Ejector 2 Moves the paper from the ejector 1 to the main output
tray

S932 Ejector 2 home sensor 0604-001415 Detects the home position of the ejector 2

S923 Ejector 2 motor sensor 0604-001415 Detects the ejector 2 motor rotation

M905 Ejector 2 motor JC93-01168A Moves the ejector 2 and grabs the paper

Figure 3-317 Detail view of the ejector unit, view 1

Table 3-198 Detail view of the ejector unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

1 Ejector 1 Moves the stack of paper from the end fence to the
ejector 2

2 Ejector 2 Moves the paper from the ejector 1 to the main output
tray

Figure 3-318 Detail view of the ejector unit, view 2

Ejector unit overview 265

 Table 3-199 Detail view of the ejector unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S927 Ejector 1 motor sensor 0604-001415 Detects whether the ejector1 motor rotates

M906 Ejector 1 motor JC93-01168A Moves the ejector 1 forward and backward

S932 Ejector 2 home sensor 0604-001415 Detects the home position of the ejector 2

S923 Ejector 2 motor sensor 0604-001415 Detects the ejector 2 motor rotation

M905 Ejector 2 motor JC93-01168A Moves the ejector 2 and then grabs the paper

Ejector unit operation

Learn about the ejector unit operation.

1. The ejector 1 (callout 1) pushes aligned paper at the end fence unit to ejector 2 unit.

Figure 3-319 Ejector unit operation, view 1

2. The ejector 2 (callout 2) picks up paper, then moves forward to the main output tray direction.

266 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-320 Ejector unit operation, view 2

Main output tray unit

You will learn more about the main output tray unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Main output tray unit overview

Learn about the main output tray unit overview.

Printouts are stacked on the main output tray. The main output tray moves up and down along the rails
inside the finisher, and the main output tray motor controls those movements according to the signals
of the front & rear paper holding sensor. Main output tray motor sensor checks whether the main output
tray motor rotates properly.

When main output tray hits the lower limit sensor of the main output tray, the machine detects that
paper tray is full. The main output tray top of stack sensor detects that the main output tray is on the top.

Main output tray unit 267

 Figure 3-321 Overview of the main output tray unit

Table 3-200 Overview of the main output tray unit

No Part name Part number Description

C907 Main outputtray 5QK09-40028 Stacking plate for ejected paper

S920 Main outputtraytopof JC82-01039A Checks the upper limit of main output tray
stack sensor (receiver, led)

S926 Main output tray lower limit 0604-001415 Detects the lowest position of the output tray

S933 Main output tray motor 0604-001393 Detects whether the main output tray motor rotates

M911 Main output tray motor JC90-01415B Moves the main output tray up and down

S934 Main output tray top of JC39-02316A Checks the upper limit of main output tray so that
stack switch detects abnormal movement of output tray

268 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-322 Detail view of the main output tray unit, view 1

Table 3-201 Detail view of the main output tray unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

C907 Main outputtray 5QK09-40028 Stacking plate for ejected paper

S920 Main outputtraytopof JC82-01039A Checks the upper limit of main output tray
stack sensor (receiver, led)

S926 Main outputtraylower limit 0604-001415 Detects the lowest position of the output tray

Figure 3-323 Detail view of the main output tray unit, view 2

Table 3-202 Detail view of the main output tray unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S933 Main output tray motor 0604-001393 Detects whether the main output tray motor rotates

Main output tray unit overview 269

 Table 3-202 Detail view of the main output tray unit, view 2 (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

M911 Main output tray motor JC90-01415B Moves the main output tray up and down

Paper holding unit

You will learn more about the paper holding unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Paper holding unit overview

Learn about the paper holding unit overview.

The paper holding unit holds printouts on the main output tray. It has a sensor that detects the height of
stacked paper so that the output tray moves up and down to stack paper in a stable manner.

The paper holding motor lifts the paper holding actuator when printouts come out to the main output
tray. The paper holding home sensor detects the location of paper holding actuator at the home
position. The front and rear paper holding sensor checks the volume of printouts on the main output tray
and makes the main output tray move downward.

Figure 3-324 Overview of the paper holding unit

Table 3-203 Overview of the paper holding unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Paper holding actuator – Control the height of the main output tray and hold
printouts so as not to be scattered

S917 Front paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Detects stacked paper position

S931 Rear paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Detects stacked paper position

S922 Paper holding home 0604-001393 Detects the home position of paper holding actuator
sensor

270 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-203 Overview of the paper holding unit (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

M907 Paper holding motor 8GS05-60104 Lift paper holding actuator up when printouts delivered
to the main output tray

Figure 3-325 Detail view of the paper holding unit, view 1

Table 3-204 Detail view of the paper holding unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

1 Paper holding actuator – Control the height of the main output tray and hold
printouts so as not to be scattered

S917 Front paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Detects stacked paper position

S931 Rear paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Detects stacked paper position

S922 Paper holding home 0604-001393 Detects the home position of paper holding actuator
sensor

2 Left upper cover 5QK09-40040 –

Figure 3-326 Detail view of the paper holding unit, view 2

Paper holding unit overview 271

 Table 3-205 Detail view of the paper holding unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

M907 Paper holding motor 8GS05-60104 Lift paper holding actuator up when printouts delivered
to the main output tray

Paper holding unit operation

Learn about the paper holding unit operation.

1. When printouts are delivered to the main output tray, a paper holding motor moves paper holding
actuator upward to create a paper path to prevent jam (callout 1).

Figure 3-327 Paper holding unit operation, view 1

2. When printouts are stacked on top of the main output tray, the paper holding actuator goes down to
hold them (callout 2).

Figure 3-328 Paper holding unit operation, view 2

3. As paper stacks up on the main output tray, the paper holding actuator is lifted by papers. The front
& rear paper holding sensors make the main output tray moves downward to store more printouts
(callout 3).

272 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-329 Paper holding unit operation, view 3

4. As printouts are stacked on the main output tray, the tray goes down. When it reaches at the end of
its moving range (callout 4), the main output tray touches the lower limit sensor. The sensor detects
that the main output tray is full of printouts.

Figure 3-330 Paper holding unit operation, view 4

Buffer unit
You will learn more about the buffer unit of the stapler-stacker finsher and booklet finisher.

Buffer unit overview

Learn about the buffer unit overview.

The buffer unit keeps paper inside the unit or moves them to the booklet maker. The buffer diverter
creates a paper path so that paper can move to the buffer unit, and the buffer sensor detects whether
paper moved out from the buffer unit. The buffer motor controls buffer roller, and buffer home sensors
checks the location of buffer rollers. The buffer solenoid holds papers so that they do not fall into the
booklet maker while buffering.

NOTE: Buffering: It is to maintain print speed when users print multiple copies continuously. The first
page of a print job stays in the buffer unit for a moment while the previous job is being ejected. After
the previous print job was ejected, the first and second page of the job move to the ejector unit
together.

Buffer unit 273

 Figure 3-331 Overview of the buffer unit

Table 3-206 Overview of the buffer unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Buffer diverter JC61-07204A Make the way to the buffer space

S913 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A Detect whether paper has moved out from the buffer
unit

S916 Buffer home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the buffer roller

M910 Buffer motor JC93-01152A Move the paper to the buffer space or the booklet maker

SL901 Buffer solenoid JC33-00038A Hold the paper to prevent them from falling out to the
booklet maker during buffering

R906 Buffer roller JC66-05161A Move the paper to the booklet maker or makes the gap
so that paper stays in this space

Figure 3-332 Detail view of the buffer unit, view 1

274 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-207 Detail view of the buffer unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

M910 Buffer motor JC93-01152A Move the paper to the buffer space or the booklet maker

Figure 3-333 Detail view of the buffer unit, view 2

Table 3-208 Detail view of the buffer unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S916 Buffer home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the buffer roller

R906 Buffer roller JC66-05161A Move the paper to the booklet maker or makes the gap
so that paper stays in this space

Figure 3-334 Detail view of the buffer unit, view 3

Table 3-209 Detail view of the buffer unit, view 3

No Part name Part number Description

SL901 Buffer solenoid JC33-00038A Hold the paper to prevent them from falling out to the
booklet maker during buffering

Buffer unit overview 275

 Buffer unit operation
Learn about the buffer unit operation.

1. When the buffer motor rotates backward to move the cam, the buffer roller makes a gap so that a
paper can stay inside the buffer unit.

a. When the exit motor rotates backward to drive the main exit roller (R907), paper moves to the
buffer unit through the buffer diverter (callout 1).

Figure 3-335 Buffer unit operation, view 1

b. The main exit cam motor moves the main exit cam so that the main exit roller (R907) is
separated with the idle roller to have a gap, and then paper can stay in this place for a while.

Figure 3-336 Buffer unit operation, view 2

c. When the next sheet comes to the main exit unit, the main exit motor turns the man exit cam so
that the main exit roller is attached to the idle roller.

276 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-337 Buffer unit operation, view 3

d. The exit motor rotates forward and operates the main exit roller. It makes two paper moves to
the ejector together.

Figure 3-338 Buffer unit operation, view 4

2. In case of booklet making job, the buffer unit moves paper to the booklet maker.

a. The buffer motor rotates, the buffer roller (R906) is attached to the idle roller.

b. When paper arrives at the main exit unit, the exit motor rotates backward and moves the main
exit roller (R907) so that paper moves to the buffer unit through the buffer diverter.

Figure 3-339 Buffer unit operation, view 5

c. The buffer motor rotates the buffer roller to move paper to the booklet maker.

Buffer unit operation 277

 Figure 3-340 Buffer unit operation, view 6

Booklet maker
You will learn more about the booklet maker.

Booklet entrance unit

You will learn more about the booklet entrance unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet entrance unit overview

Learn about the booklet entrance unit overview.

The booklet entrance unit receives paper into the booklet maker. The entrance sensor detects whether a
paper enters the entrance unit. The entrance motor drives the booklet entrance roller to move the paper.

Figure 3-341 Overview of the booklet entrance unit

Table 3-210 Overview of the booklet entrance unit

No Part name Part number Description

S936 Booklet entrance sensor 0604-001415 Detects whether paper has come into the booklet
entrance unit

278 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-210 Overview of the booklet entrance unit (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

M915 Booklet entrance motor JC93-01152A Drives the booklet entrance roller

R910 Booklet entrance roller JC66-04717A Moves paper into the booklet maker

Figure 3-342 Detail view of the booklet entrance unit

Table 3-211 Detail view of the booklet entrance unit

No Part name Part number Description

S936 Booklet entrance sensor 0604-001415 Detects whether paper has come into the booklet
entrance unit

M915 Booklet entrance motor JC93-01152A Drives the booklet entrance roller

R910 Booklet entrance roller JC66-04717A Moves paper into the booklet maker

Figure 3-343 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 2

Table 3-212 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

M12 Entrance motor 3SJ19-80501 Operates the entrance roller and middle roller when
driving forward

Booklet entrance unit overview 279

 Figure 3-344 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 3

Table 3-213 Detail view of the entrance unit, view 3

No Part name Part number Description

S12 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A Detects whether paper enters at the entrance unit

Booklet paddle unit

You will learn more about the booklet paddle unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet paddle unit overview

Learn about the booklet paddle unit overview.

The booklet paddle unit pushes paper to the booklet end fence by rotating the rubber paddles. The
booklet paddle motor rotates two booklet paddles, and the booklet paddle home sensor connected to
the lower booklet paddle checks the home position of the booklet paddle.

Figure 3-345 Overview of the booklet paddle unit

280 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-214 Overview of the booklet paddle unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Upper booklet paddle JC66-04718A Moves paper to the booklet end fence unit

1 Lower booklet paddle JC90-01429A, Moves paper to the booklet end fence unit
JC61-07225A,
JC66-04719A

S941 Booklet paddle home 0604-001393 Check the home position of the booklet paddle
sensor

M919 Booklet paddle motor JC93-01001A Drives two booklet paddles

Figure 3-346 Detail view of the booklet paddle unit

Table 3-215 Detail view of the booklet paddle unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Upper booklet paddle JC66-04718A Moves paper to the booklet end fence unit

1 Lower booklet paddle JC90-01429A, Moves paper to the booklet end fence unit
JC61-07225A,
JC66-04719A

S941 Booklet paddle home 0604-001393 Check the home position of the booklet paddle
sensor

M919 Booklet paddle motor JC93-01001A Drives two booklet paddles

Booklet end fence unit

You will learn more about the booklet end fence unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet end fence unit 281

 Booklet end fence unit overview
Learn about the booklet end fence unit overview.

The booklet end fence unit supports paper that enters from the booklet paddle unit, then moves paper
to the designated position for folding and stapling. The booklet end fence motor moves the booklet end
fence up and down. The booklet end fence home sensor checks the home position of the booklet end
fence. The booklet end fence solenoid drives the clamp to hold paper that comes into the booklet end
fence.

Figure 3-347 Overview of the booklet end fence unit

Table 3-216 Overview of the booklet end fence unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet end fence JC90-01432A Supports paper, then moves it to the designated location
to fold or staple

S942 Booklet end fence home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet end
sensor

M920 Booklet end fence motor JC93-01155A Moves the booklet end fence up and down

SL902 Booklet end fence solenoid JC33-00038A Drives the clamp to hold paper that comes into the
booklet end fence

Figure 3-348 Detail view of the booklet end fence unit

282 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-217 Detail view of the booklet end fence unit

No Part name Part number Description

S942 Booklet end fence home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet end
sensor

M920 Booklet end fence motor JC93-01155A Moves the booklet end fence up and down

Booklet end fence unit operation

Learn about the booklet end fence unit operation.

1. The booklet end fence is located at the home position (callout1). When the booklet maker starts its
job, the end fence goes to the direction 2.

Figure 3-349 Booklet end fence unit operation, view 1

2. The booklet end fence unit supports paper comes from the booklet paddle unit and holds paper so
as not to be scattered (callout3). Then it moves to the certain location to fold or staple it (callout 4).

Figure 3-350 Booklet end fence unit operation, view 2

Booklet presser unit

You will learn more about the booklet presser unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet presser unit overview

Learn about the booklet presser unit overview.

Booklet end fence unit operation 283

 The booklet presser unit sort print pages that enter to the booklet maker in order. The Booklet presser
motor moves the booklet presser, and the booklet presser home sensor checks whether the booklet
presser is at the home position.

Figure 3-351 Overview of the booklet presser unit

Table 3-218 Overview of the booklet presser unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet presser JC61-07237A Accumulates paper from the entrance unit not to be
shuffled

S937 Booklet presser home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet presser
sensor

M916 Booklet presser motor JC93-01155A Drives the booklet presser

Figure 3-352 Detail view of the booklet presser unit

284 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-219 Detail view of the booklet presser unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet presser JC61-07237A Accumulates paper from the entrance unit not to be
shuffled

S937 Booklet presser home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet presser
sensor

M916 Booklet presser motor JC93-01155A Drives the booklet presser

Booklet presser unit operation

Learn about the booklet presser unit operation.

1. Paper comes into the booklet presser unit (callout 1). When the training edge of the paper exits the
booklet entrance unit, the presser hits the paper to be bent to the direction of the arrow (callout 2).

Figure 3-353 Booklet presser unit operation, view 1

2. When a next sheet arrives, the presser turns back to the original position (callout 3) so that the
paper falls on the left side of the previous sheet pushed by the booklet presser (callout 4).

Figure 3-354 Booklet presser unit operation, view 2

Booklet tamper unit

You will learn more about the booklet tamper unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet tamper unit overview

Learn about the booklet tamper unit overview.

Booklet presser unit operation 285

 The booklet tamper unit aligns the left and right side of documents for stapling or folding.

The booklet tamper motor adjusts the booklet tampers’ width according to paper size. The booklet
tamper home sensor checks the home position of the booklet tamper.

Figure 3-355 Overview of the booklet tamper unit

Table 3-220 Overview of the booklet tamper unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet tamper JC90-01431A Aligns documents for stapling or folding

S938 Booklet tamper home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet
sensor

M923 Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A Drives the booklet tamper

S946 Booklet tamper sensor JC32-00020A –

Figure 3-356 Detail view of the booklet tamper unit, view 1

Table 3-221 Detail view of the booklet tamper unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

M923 Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A Drives the booklet tamper

S946 Booklet tamper sensor JC32-00020A –

286 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-357 Detail view of the booklet tamper unit, view 2

Table 3-222 Detail view of the booklet tamper unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S938 Booklet tamper home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet
sensor

M923 Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A Drives the booklet tamper

Booklet tamper unit operation

Learn about the booklet tamper unit operation.

When a certain amount of paper is collected, the booklet tamper unit hits the left and right sides of the
paper so that it is aligned correctly for the next process such as stapling or folding.

Figure 3-358 Booklet tamper unit operation

Booklet stapler unit

You will learn more about the booklet stapler unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet stapler unit overview

Learn about the booklet stapler unit overview.

Booklet stapler unit is a device installed inside the booklet maker that staples a bundle of aligned
documents as a booklet.

There is only one option to make a bundle. If the user selects the option, this unit staples at the two
location in the middle of stacks.

Booklet tamper unit operation 287

 Figure 3-359 Overview of the booklet stapler unit

Table 3-223 Overview of the booklet stapler unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet stapler 6GW41-40001

2 Booklet stapler cartridge JC81-09881A

Figure 3-360 Detail view of the booklet stapler unit

Table 3-224 Detail view of the booklet stapler unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet stapler 6GW41-40001

2 Booklet stapler cartridge JC81-09881A

Staple and staple cartridge

Learn about the staple and staple cartridge.

288 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 1. Staple cartridge: JC81-09881B. Initial staples included.

Figure 3-361 Staple cartridge for the booklet stapler unit

NOTE: Staple handle color may vary (blue or green color).

2. Staple: Y1G13-67901. 3 EA in 1 box.

Figure 3-362 Staple for the booklet stapler unit

Booklet stapler unit operation

Learn about the booklet stapler unit operation.

1. When a stack of sheets is collected in booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence (callout 2)
changes its location to be stapled.

2. The booklet stapler (callout 1) staples at the middle of stacks.

Booklet stapler unit operation 289

 Figure 3-363 Booklet stapler unit operation

Booklet fold unit

You will learn more about the booklet fold unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet fold unit overview

Learn about the booklet fold unit overview.

The booklet fold unit is a device installed inside the booklet maker that folds a bundle of aligned
documents as a. This unit consists of two types of blades: blade and c-fold blade. It creates two types of
output.

Figure 3-364 Fold options

The booklet blade motor drives the booklet blades and lightly folds the stack of paper. The folded paper
passes through the booklet fold rollers to be fully folded. The booklet blade home sensor checks the
home position of the booklet blade, and the booklet fold motor drives the rollers that enable folding

In case of c-fold, the booklet c-fold blade motor drives the booklet c-fold blade and lightly folds the stack
of paper once more. The folded paper passes through the booklet c-fold roller to be fully folded. The
booklet c-fold blade home sensor checks the home position of the c-fold blade.

290 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-365 Overview of the booklet fold unit, view 1

Table 3-225 Overview of the booklet fold unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet blade JC93-01163A Pushes a stack of paper to fold

S945 Booklet blade home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet blade
sensor

M922 Booklet blade motor JC31-00144A Drives the booklet blade

M921 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A Drives the booklet roller and c-fold blade

R911 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A Presses a stack of paper to be fully folded

Figure 3-366 Overview of the booklet fold unit, view 2

Booklet fold unit overview 291

 Table 3-226 Overview of the booklet fold unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

2 Booklet c-fold blade JC61-07366A Pushes a stack of paper to fold for the c-fold task

S939 Booklet c-fold blade home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet c-fold blade
sensor

M917 Booklet c-fold blade motor JC93-01154A Drives the booklet c-fold blade

R912 Booklet c-fold roller JC66-04744A In case of c-fold, presses a stack of paper to fold
completely

Figure 3-367 Detail view of the booklet fold unit, view 1

Table 3-227 Detail view of the booklet fold unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

M921 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A Drives the booklet roller and c-fold blade

R911 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A Presses a stack of paper to be fully folded

Figure 3-368 Detail view of the booklet fold unit, view 2

292 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-228 Detail view of the booklet fold unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet blade JC93-01163A Pushes a stack of paper to fold

S945 Booklet blade home 0604-001393 Checks the home position of the booklet blade
sensor

M922 Booklet blade motor JC31-00144A Drives the booklet blade

Figure 3-369 Detail view of the booklet fold unit, view 3

Table 3-229 Detail view of the booklet fold unit, view 3

No Part name Part number Description

2 Booklet c-fold blade JC61-07366A Pushes a stack of paper to fold for the c-fold task

M917 Booklet c-fold blade motor JC93-01154A Drives the booklet c-fold blade

Booklet fold unit operation

Learn about the booklet fold unit operation.

1. In case of v-fold.

Booklet fold unit operation 293

 Figure 3-370 Booklet fold unit operation, v-fold

a. After a stack of paper is collected at a booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence (callout 1)
moves to a designated location.

b. The booklet blade motor (M922) drives the booklet blade (callout 2) to push the center of paper.

c. Paper enters between the booklet fold rollers (R911) by the booklet blade and it is completely
folded between the rollers.

d. d. The folded paper stack is discharged to the booklet output tray via the booklet exit roller
(R913).

2. In case of c-fold.

294 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-371 Booklet fold unit operation, c-fold

a. After a stack of paper is collected at a booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence (callout 1) is
moved to a designated location.

b. The booklet blade motor (M22) drives the booklet blade (callout 2) to push one-third of paper.

c. The paper enters between the booklet fold rollers (R11) by the booklet blade and it is completely
folded between the rollers.

d. The folded sheets move to s location where they will be c-folded by a booklet diverter.

e. The booklet c-fold blade motor(M17) drives the booklet c-fold blade (callout 3), pokes two-thirds
of paper.

f. Paper enters between the booklet c-fold roller (R12) and the booklet fold roller by the booklet
c-fold blade and it is completely folded between the rollers.

Booklet diverter unit

You will learn more about the booklet diverter unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet diverter unit overview

Learn about the booklet diverter unit overview.

The booklet diverter unit determines a paper path to allow the stack of folded paper to exit to the booklet
output tray during the v-fold. In case of c-fold, it makes another paper path so the folded sheets can
move to a location that can be c-folded. The booklet diverter motor drives the booklet diverter, and the
booklet diverter home sensor (S940) checks whether the booklet diverter is at the home position.

Booklet diverter unit 295

 Figure 3-372 Overview of the booklet diverter unit, view 1

Table 3-230 Overview of the booklet diverter unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A Determines the paper path for either the booklet exit unit
or the location for c-fold

S940 Booklet diverter home 0604-001415 Checks the home position of the booklet diverter
sensor

M918 Booklet diverter motor JC93-01153A Drives the booklet diverter

Figure 3-373 Overview of the booklet diverter unit, view 2

Table 3-231 Overview of the booklet diverter unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A Determines the paper path for either the booklet exit unit
or the location for c-fold

S940 Booklet diverter home 0604-001415 Checks the home position of the booklet diverter
sensor

M918 Booklet diverter motor JC93-01153A Drives the booklet diverter

296 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Booklet diverter unit operation
Learn about the booklet diverter unit operation.

1. In case of v-fold, the booklet diverter(callout1) determines the paper path so that the folded sheets
exit to the booklet exit unit and into the booklet output tray.

Figure 3-374 Booklet diverter unit operation

2. On the other hand, in c-fold, it makes another paper path to fold it by c-fold blade (callout 2).

Booklet exit unit

You will learn more about the booklet exit unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet exit unit overview

Learn about the booklet exit unit overview.

The booklet exit unit ejects a stack of v-fold paper to the booklet output tray unit. The booklet exit sensor
detects paper entry into the booklet exit unit, and the booklet fold motor drives the booklet exit roller to
discharge paper.

Booklet diverter unit operation 297

 Figure 3-375 Overview of the booklet exit unit

Table 3-232 Overview of the booklet exit unit

No Part name Part number Description

S944 Booklet exit sensor JC32-00020A Check whether paper has come into the booklet unit

M921 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A Drives the booklet exit roller

R913 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A Moves paper to the booklet output tray unit

Figure 3-376 Detail view of the booklet exit unit

Table 3-233 Detail view of the booklet exit unit

No Part name Part number Description

S944 Booklet exit sensor JC32-00020A Check whether paper has come into the booklet unit

R913 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A Moves paper to the booklet output tray unit

298 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Booklet output tray unit
You will learn more about the booklet output tray unit of the booklet maker.

Booklet output tray unit overview

Learn about the booklet output tray unit overview.

The booklet output tray unit is the place where the ejected paper is stacked. The booklet output tray
sensor detects whether paper is on the booklet output tray or not.

Figure 3-377 Overview of the booklet output tray unit

Table 3-234 Overview of the booklet output tray unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet output tray 5QK09-40017, Stores paper stacks from the booklet exit unit
5QK09-40015

S943 Booklet output tray sensor JC82-01039A Detects whether paper is on the booklet output tray

Booklet output tray unit 299

 Figure 3-378 Detail view of the booklet output tray unit

Table 3-235 Detail view of the booklet output tray unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Booklet output tray 5QK09-40017, Stores paper stacks from the booklet exit unit
5QK09-40015

S943 Booklet output tray sensor JC82-01039A Detects whether paper is on the booklet output tray

Booklet output tray unit operation: loading a large number of booklets

Learn about the booklet output tray unit operation.

Y1G07A Booklet finisher is support available to print a large number of booklets.

1. Remove the booklet output tray (callout 1).

300 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-379 Booklet output tray unit operation, view 1

2. Install the booklet sub tray at the booklet output (callout 2)

Figure 3-380 Booklet output tray unit operation, view 2

3. Install a box to store printouts (callout 3).

Booklet output tray unit operation: loading a large number of booklets 301
 Figure 3-381 Booklet output tray unit operation, view 3

PCA
You will learn more about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker PCA.

Finisher main PCA

Learn about the finisher main PCA.

The stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher main PCA controls operation of the finishers by
communicating with the printer main PCA.

● Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher main PCA part number: 6GW55-60001

302 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-382 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker finisher main PCA connectors

Table 3-236 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker finisher main PCA connectors

CN number Connection Type Harness part number Error code when

disconnected

SS-CN1 Mainboard 16pin JC39-02308A

SS-CN2 Door 2pin JC39-02309A

SS-CN3 Cover 4pin JC39-02631A

Buffer sensor

Entrance sensor

Diverter home sensor

SS-CN4 Entrance motor 22pin JC39-02313A

Tray diverter home sensor

Top exit sensor

Main exit sensor

Rear tamper motor

Entrance motor

Finisher main PCA 303

 Table 3-236 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker finisher main PCA connectors (continued)

CN number Connection Type Harness part number Error code when

disconnected

SS-SN5 Paddle motor 32pin JC39-02313A

End fence motor

Front tamper home sensor

Paddle home sensor

Top output tray paper full

sensor

Manual staple op board

Rear tamper home sensor

Bridge feed motor

Bridge entrance sensor

SS-CN6 Bridge door sensor 18pin 6GW51-50001

Bridge exit sensor

SS-CN7 Punch option 14pin JC39-02314A

Exit motor

Main output tray motor

SS-CN8 Main output tray motor 12pin JC39-02312A

sensor

Top output tray paper full

sensor

SS-CN9 Main output tray top of 2pin JC39-02316A

stack sensor

Stapler head motor

Stapler position motor

SS-CN10 Stapler mid-rear sensor 22pin JC39-02315A

Stapler front-rear sensor

Stapler rear sensor

Ejector 2 motor

Ejector 1 motor

Ejector 2 motor sensor

Ejector 1 motor sensor

304 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-236 Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker finisher main PCA connectors (continued)

CN number Connection Type Harness part number Error code when

disconnected

SS-CN11 Ejector 2 home sensor 26pin JC39-02317A

Ejector sensor

Ejector 1 end sensor

Ejector 1 home sensor

Front tamper motor

Manual staple sensor

SS-CN12 End fence home sensor 13pin JC39-02318A

Stapler front sensor

Paper holding motor

SS-CN13 Booklet output tray full 11pin JC39-02319A

sensor

Main output tray lower limit

sensor

Main output tray top of

stack sensor (LED)

Rear paper holding sensor

SS-CN14 Paper holding home 14pin JC39-02319A

sensor

Front paper holding sensor

Main output tray top of

stack sensor (receiver)

Buffer home sensor

SS-CN17 Buffer motor 10pin JC39-02575A

Buffer solenoid

Booklet maker PCA

Learn about the booklet maker PCA.

The booklet maker PCA controls operation of the booklet maker by communicating with the booklet
maker finisher main PCA.

● Booklet maker PCA part number: 6GW51-60001

Booklet maker PCA 305

 Figure 3-383 Booklet maker PCA connectors

Table 3-237 Booklet maker PCA connectors

CN number Connection Type Harness part number Error code when

disconnected

BM-CN1 Finisher main PCA 16pin JC39-02296A

BM-CN3 Log 4pin

BM-CN4 Stapler 13pin JC39-02301A

BM-CN5 Feed 11pin JC39-02298A

BM-SN6 Tamp 13pin JC39-02298A

BM-CN7 Paddle 14pin JC39-02304A

BM-CN8 Guide 10pin JC39-02304A

BM-CN9 Stopper 9pin JC39-02305A

BM-CN10 BLDC 20pin JC39-02305A

Manual staple PCA

Learn about the manual staple PCA.

The manual staple PCA communicates with the finisher main PCA

Figure 3-384 Manual staple PCA connectors

306 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-238 Manual staple PCA connectors

CN number Connection Type Harness part number Error code when

disconnected

MS-CN1 Finisher main PCA 4pin JC39-02345A

Inner finisher
You will learn more about the inner finisher.

Detailed specifications
Learn about the detailed specifications of the inner finisher.

Table 3-239 General specifications

Item Description

Capacity 550 Sheets (Main 500, Top 50) @ 80gsm

Sensing Paper Jam/Tray Sensing/Stapler/Cover Open

Media Sizes ● Main: 98mm - 320mm x 139.7mm - 457.2mm (3.86in - 12.59in x 5.5in - 18in)

● Top: 98mm - 320mm x 148.0mm - 430.0mm (3.86in - 12.59in x 5.83in - 16.93in)

Media types Plain/Thick/Heavy weight/Thin/Cotton/Colored/Recycled/Bond/Archive/Pre-Punched/Cardstock/

Glossy/Envelope

Media Weight ● Main: 52-256 gsm (13.9-68.3 lb.)

● Top: 52-325 gsm (13.9-86.7 lb.)

Number of Bin 2 (Main/Top)

Dimension (W X D X H) 458 x 491 x 173 mm (18.0 X 19.3 X 6.8 inch)

Weight Net weight: 15 kg (33 lb.)

Packing weight: 18.39 kg (40.53 lb.)

Tray 1 Finishing 50 Sheets @ 80gsm

Capacity

Tray 1 Finishing Mode Stapling (Left, Right, Dual)/Punch (2/3, 2/4, Swedish)

Tray 2 Finishing 500 Sheets @ 80 gsm

Capacity

Table 3-240 Paper Size Specification

Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position

mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL

52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat

A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF O O O X F/R1 O

Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF O O O X F/R1 O

Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

Inner finisher 307

 Table 3-240 Paper Size Specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position

mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL

52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat

A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

B5(JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

B5(ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X O X X X

Monarch Env 98.4 x 190.5 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X O X X X

PostCard 4X6 101.6 x 152.4 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X O X X X

A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X O X X X

No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X O X X X

DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X O X X X

C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X O X X X

B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X O X X X

Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X O X X X

A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X X X

C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X 0 X X X

B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Oficio 215.9 x 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

342.9

C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X O X X X

Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

Tabloid Extra 304.8 x 12 x 18 SEF O X X X X X

457.2

308 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-240 Paper Size Specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position

mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL

52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat

SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF O X X X X X

Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 ~ — O X O X X X

L 140-1200 L 5.5-47.2 (W 98-297 ~

L 140-1200)
1 “F/R” means front side and rear side can be supported.

Table 3-241 Punch specifications

Name Paper size Orientation Punch

mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish

2H 3H 2H 4H 4H

A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF 0 X O X O

Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF 0 X O X O

Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O O O

A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O O O

B5 (JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O X O

B5 (ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O X O

Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O O O

No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X X X X

Monarch 98.4 x 190.5 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X X X X

Env

PostCard 101.6 x 152.4 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X X X X

4X6

A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X X X X

No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X X X X

DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X X X X

C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X X X X

B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X X X X

Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X X X X

A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X O

C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X X X X

B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O

B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O

Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O X O X O

Detailed specifications 309

 Table 3-241 Punch specifications (continued)

Name Paper size Orientation Punch

mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish

2H 3H 2H 4H 4H

16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O X O X O

A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O X O X O

Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O X O X O

Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O X O X O

Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O X O X O

Oficio 215.9 x 342.9 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O X O X O

C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X X X X

Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O X O

B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O X O

8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O O

Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O O O

A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O O O

Tabloid Extra 304.8 x 457.2 12 x 18 SEF X X X X X

SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF X X X X X

Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 ~ — X X X X X

L 140-1200 L 5.5-47

Table 3-242 Media performance

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple Punch

Plain (71-90 g/m2) O O O O

Thick (91-105 g/m2) O O O O

Heavy weight (106-175 g/m2) O O O O

Extra Heavy weight 1 (176-216 g/m²) O O O O

Extra Heavy weight 2 (217-256 g/m2) O O O O

Extra Heavy weight 3 (257-300 g/m2) X O X X

Extra Heavy weight 4 (301-325 g/m2) X O X X

Thin (60-70 g/m2) O O O O

Cotton (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

Colored (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

Pre-Printed (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

310 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-242 Media performance (continued)

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple Punch

Recycled (60-90 g/m2) O O O O

Bond O O O O

Archive (75-105 g/m2) O O O O

LetterHead O O O O

Pre-Punched O O O X

Thin Cardstock (105-163 g/m2) O O O O

Thick Cardstock (170-216 g/m2) O O O X

Heavy Cardstock (217-256 g/m2) O O O X

Extra Heavy Cardstock 1(257-300 g/m²) X O X X

Extra Heavy Cardstock 2(301-325 g/m2) X O X X

Thin Glossy (106-169 g/m2) O O O O

Thick Glossy (170-216 g/m²) O O O X

Heavy Glossy (217-256 g/m2) O X X X

Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X O X X

Thick Envelope (217-256 g/m2) O X X X

Tab O X X O

Cover
Learn about the front view and rear view of the inner finisher.

Figure 3-385 Front view of the inner finisher

Cover 311
 Table 3-243 Front view of the inner finisher

Callout Part name Part number

C951 Front cover 5QK09-60123

C952 Top cover 5QK09-60124

C953 Middle cover 5QK09-60125

C954 Punch cover 8GS05-60114

C955 Output tray 5QK09-60118

C956 PCA tray 5QK09-40004

1 Lock release handle JC66-04233A

Not shown Exit bin full JC90-01546A

Figure 3-386 Rear view of the inner finisher

Table 3-244 Rear view of the inner finisher

Callout Part name Part number

C957 Left cover 8GS05-60113

C958 Rear cover 5QK09-40037

C959 Low cover 5QK09-40018

2 Main interface harness JC39-02169A

Not shown Exit bin full JC90-01546A

NOTE: An exit bin full is included in the product box. This assembly is used for only E877 and E826
series which should be installed at the second exit unit output area.

312 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-387 Exit bin full

Inner finisher overview

You will learn more about the inner finisher overview.

Inner finisher workflow

Learn about the inner finisher workflow.

Figure 3-388 Inner finisher workflow

Table 3-245 Inner finisher workflow

Item Unit Description

1 Punch unit Make holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper

2 Entrance unit Allow a paper to move into the finisher

3 Diverter unit Hold the paper so that the newly printed paper can stay out for
seconds while the stapled bundle of paper moves to the output
tray

4 Exit unit Move the paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit

5 Paper support unit Prevent the paper from being fell down or bent when the long
length paper such as A3 is ejected from the exit unit

6 Main paddle unit Move the paper to the sub paddle

7 Sub paddle unit Move the paper to the end fence

8 End fence unit Set the standard position of the paper to be aligned towards top
and bottom of the paper

Inner finisher overview 313

 Table 3-245 Inner finisher workflow (continued)

Item Unit Description

9 Tamper unit Align the paper on the right and left side of the paper

10 Stapler unit Perform stapling to a bundle of aligned documents

11 Ejector 1 unit Transfer the stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the
ejector 2 unit

12 Ejector 2 unit Grip a stack of paper up and ejects it onto the output tray

13 Output tray unit Stack the job ended paper

14 Paper holding unit Control the output tray movement

Inner finisher sensor

Learn about the inner finisher sensor.

Figure 3-389 Inner finisher sensor

Table 3-246 Inner finisher sensor

No Name Part number Type Description

S951 Entrance sensor 0604-001381 Photo interrupter Check a paper comes into the entrance unit
(reflect)

314 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-246 Inner finisher sensor (continued)

No Name Part number Type Description

S952 Stapler position 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Make the stapler be positioned in the exact
sensor (sensing) stapling position

S953 Front cover JC39-01610A Switch Check whether the front cover is closed or
switch opened

S954 Main paddle 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the main paddle locates at the home
home sensor (sensing) position

S955 Front tamper 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the front tamper locates at the home
home sensor (sensing) position

S956 Output tray 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the output tray motor is operational
motor sensor (sensing)

S957 Output tray JC90-01320A Switch Check the lower limit (=Output tray is full) of the
lower limit switch output tray

S958 Output tray top 0603-001309 Photo TR Check the upper limit of output tray
of stack sensor
(receiver)

S959 Paper holding 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the location of the paper holding
sensor (sensing) actuator

S960 Ejector 2 home 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the ejector 2 locates at the home
sensor (sensing) position

S961 Ejector 2 motor 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the ejector 2 motor is operational
sensor (sensing)

S962 Paper support 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the paper support locates at the home
home sensor (sensing) position

S963 Output tray top 0601-003440 LED IR Check the upper limit of output tray
of stack sensor
(transmitter)

S964 Rear tamper 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the rear tamper locates at the home
home sensor (sensing) position

S965 Top cover switch JC39-01610A Switch Check whether the top cover is closed or
opened

S966 Ejector 1 home 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the ejector 1 locates at the home
sensor (sensing) position

S967 End fence 0604-001381 Photo interrupter Check paper comes into the end fence unit
sensor (reflect)

S968 Punch waste box 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Detect the punch waste box is installed
sensor (sensing)

S969 Punch waste full 0604-001381 Photo interrupter Check the punch waste box is full
sensor (reflect)

S970 Finisher docking 0604-001393 Photo interrupter Check the finisher is installed
sensor (sensing)

S971 Exit sensor 0604-001415 Photo interrupter Check paper comes into the exit unit
(reflect)

Inner finisher sensor 315

 Inner finisher motor and solenoid
Learn about the inner finisher motor and solenoid.

Figure 3-390 Inner finisher motor and solenoid

Table 3-247 Inner finisher motor and solenoid

No Name Part number Type Description

M951 Stapler position JC93-00999A Stepping motor Drive the stapler unit
motor

M952 Exit motor JC31-00169B Stepping motor Drive the exit roller and the sub paddle unit

M953 Main paddle JC93-01001A Stepping motor Drive the main paddle unit
motor

M954 Output tray JC90-01334B DC motor Drive the output tray unit
motor

M955 Rear tamper JC93-01001A Stepping motor Drive the rear tamper unit
motor assembly

M956 Ejector 2 motor JC93-01168A DC motor Drive the ejector 2 unit

M957 Ejector 1 motor JC93-00998A Stepping motor Drive the ejector 1 unit

M958 Paper support JC93-00802B Stepping motor Drive paper support unit
motor

M959 Front tamper JC93-01001A Stepping motor Drive the front tamper unit
motor

M960 Entrance motor JC31-00169B Stepping motor Drive the entrance roller

SL951 Paper holding JC33-00037A Solenoid Move the paper holding actuator
solenoid

316 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Inner finisher roller
Learn about the inner finisher roller.

Figure 3-391 Inner finisher roller

Table 3-248 Inner finisher roller

No Name Part number Description

R951 Entrance roller JC66-04243A Move the paper to the finisher inside

R952 Middle roller JC66-04243A Move the paper to the exit unit

R953 Exit roller JC66-04244A Move the paper to the out bin tray

Inner finisher PCA

Learn about the inner finisher PCA.

Inner finisher roller 317

 Figure 3-392 Inner finisher PCA

Table 3-249 Inner finisher PCA

No Name Part number Description

P951 Finisher main PCA 6GW49-60001 –

P952 Rear joint PCA JC92-02780A Joint PCA between main PCA and several parts such as
punch, stapler, entrance, and front door switch

Punch unit (optional)

You will learn more about the punch unit of the inner finisher.

Punch unit overview

Learn about the punch unit overview.

The punch unit is a device that punches holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper. The punch unit is
located immediately before the entrance unit and punches holes in a paper.

● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3 Punch: 155P7-67001

● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4 Punch: 155P8-67001

318 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Punch: 155P9-67001

NOTE: Puncher types are vary depending on the country or region.

In case of 2/3 hole punch, the 5 hole-punches are mounted in the punch unit. As the punch motor rotates
clockwise, the inner gear moves to the right and the 3 hole-punches are moved downward to make holes.
When making 2 holes, the motor rotates in the counterclockwise direction and the inner gear rotates to
the left to drill two holes. The travel distance and position of the motor are detected and controlled by the
hole punch home sensor and the hole punch motor sensor.

Figure 3-393 Punch unit overview, view 1

For more information, go to the HP WISE support portal and search for HP LaserJet Managed MFP - How
to use the hole punch (c05450959).
Figure 3-394 Punch unit overview, view 2

Table 3-250 Punch unit overview, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

U952-1 2/3 hole punch unit 155P7-67001 –

U952-2 2/4 hole punch unit 155P8-67001 –

Punch unit overview 319

 Table 3-250 Punch unit overview, view 2 (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

U952-3 Swedish punch 155P9-67001 –

M961 Punch motor NA Drive the entrance roller connected by a belt

S972 Punch motor sensor NA Detect whether the punch motor moves correctly

S973 Punch home sensor NA Detect home position of the punch head

P953-1 2/3 hole punch PCA JC92-02773A –

P953-2 2/4 hole punch PCA JC92-02773B –

P953-3 Swedish hole punch PCA 155P9-67001 –

U953 Punch cover assembly 8GS05-60114 Dummy cover instead of the punch unit

S Punch waste full sensor 0604-001381 Detect whether the punch waste box is full

Figure 3-395 Punch unit overview, view 3

Table 3-251 Punch unit overview, view 3

No Part name Part number Description

U952-1 2/3 hole punch unit 155P7-67001 –

U952-2 2/4 hole punch unit 155P8-67001 –

U952-3 Swedish punch 155P9-67001 –

M961 Punch motor NA Drive the entrance roller connected by a belt

S972 Punch motor sensor NA Detect whether the punch motor moves correctly

S973 Punch home sensor NA Detect home position of the punch head

P953-1 2/3 hole punch PCA JC92-02773A –

P953-2 2/4 hole punch PCA JC92-02773B –

P953-3 Swedish hole punch PCA 155P9-67001 –

U953 Punch cover assembly 8GS05-60114 Dummy cover instead of the punch unit

S Punch waste full sensor 0604-001381 Detect whether the punch waste box is full

320 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Punch unit operation
Learn about the punch unit operation.

The punch unit is driven by a punch motor and two associated sensors which are the punch motor
sensor and the punch home sensor. When the motor rotates clockwise (callout 1), the 3 punch hole
heads move and punch 3 holes in the paper. Conversely, when the motor runs counterclockwise (callout
2), the two punch hole reds move and punch two holes in the paper.

Figure 3-396 Punch unit operation, view 1

Entrance unit
You will learn more about the entrance unit of the inner finisher.

Entrance unit overview

Learn about the entrance unit overview.

The entrance unit is located right after the punch unit. This unit is driven by entrance motor which is
installed on the rear of the finisher. This motor is connected to the entrance roller by a belt to transfer
driving force to move paper from the base printer exit unit to the finisher inside. If an error such as paper
jam occurs in the entrance unit, the entrance sensor detects the error and generates an event code
(13.60.xx).

Punch unit operation 321

 Figure 3-397 Entrance unit overview, view 1

Table 3-252 Entrance unit overview, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

S951 Entrance sensor 0604-001381 Detect a paper whether it comes from the base printer
exit unit correctly

M960 Entrance motor 5QK09-60128 Drive the entrance roller to make the paper moved to the
finisher inside

R951 Entrance roller JC66-04243A Move the paper to the finisher exit unit

Figure 3-398 Entrance unit overview, view 2

Table 3-253 Entrance unit overview, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

S951 Entrance sensor 0604-001381 Detect a paper whether it comes from the base printer
exit unit correctly

322 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-253 Entrance unit overview, view 1 (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

M960 Entrance motor 5QK09-60128 Drive the entrance roller to make the paper moved to the
finisher inside

R951 Entrance roller JC66-04243A Move the paper to the finisher exit unit

Diverter unit
You will learn more about the diverter unit of the inner finisher.

Diverter unit overview

Learn about the diverter unit overview.

Figure 3-399 Diverter unit overview, view 1

Table 3-254 Diverter unit overview, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

M960 Entrance motor 5QK09-60128 Drive the feed roller connected by a belt

R952 Middle roller JC66-04243A Drive the paper forward installed in front of the diverter

1 Diverter JC61-06392A Change paper path when a paper goes backward

Diverter unit 323

 Figure 3-400 Diverter unit overview, view 2

Table 3-255 Diverter unit overview, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

M960 Entrance motor 5QK09-60128 Drive the feed roller connected by a belt

R952 Middle roller JC66-04243A Drive the paper forward installed in front of the diverter

Diverter unit operation

Learn about the diverter unit operation.

1. The paper goes forward to the output tray, then the exit roller stops.

Figure 3-401 Diverter unit operation, view 1

2. The paper turns towards the diverter unit, then comes down. It waits for a while until the stapling
operation is finished.

324 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-402 Diverter unit overview, view 2

3. The paper goes out to the output bin with the stapled paper at the same time.

Exit unit
You will learn more about the exit unit of the inner finisher.

Exit unit overview

Learn about the exit unit overview.

The exit unit is the part that moves the paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit. The exit unit
is powered by an exit motor installed on the front of the finisher. The motor and the exit roller are
connected by a single belt. The exit motor rotates counterclockwise so that the paper moves forwards.
The exit sensor is installed right in front of exit roller, it detects whether the paper comes from the
entrance unit correctly.

Figure 3-403 Exit unit overview, view 1

Exit unit 325

 Table 3-256 Exit unit overview, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

S971 Exit sensor 0604-001415 Check whether the passes through the exit unit

M952 Exit motor JC90-01331A Drive the exit roller connected by a belt

R953 Exit roller JC66-04244A Move the paper to the ejector unit

1-1 Rear compile guide JC61-07450A Guide to help paper move through the paper path

1-2 Front compile guide JC61-07449A Guide to help paper move through the paper path

Figure 3-404 Exit unit overview, view 2

Table 3-257 Exit unit overview, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S971 Exit sensor 0604-001415 Check whether the passes through the exit unit

1-1 Rear compile guide JC61-07450A Guide to help paper move through the paper path

1-2 Front compile guide JC61-07449A Guide to help paper move through the paper path

Figure 3-405 Exit unit overview, view 3

326 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-258 Exit unit overview, view 3

No Part name Part number Description

M952 Exit motor JC90-01331A Drive the exit roller connected by a belt

R953 Exit roller JC66-04244A Move the paper to the ejector unit

Paper support unit

You will learn more about the paper support unit of the inner finisher.

Paper support unit overview

Learn about the paper support unit overview.

Figure 3-406 Paper support unit overview, view 1

Table 3-259 Paper support unit overview, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

S962 Paper support home 0604-001393 Detect the paper support guides locate at the home
sensor

M958 Paper support motor JC93-00802B Detect the paper support guides locate at the home

1 Front paper support JC90-01310A Support the paper not to be bended downwards

2 Rear paper support JC90-01311A Support the paper not to be bended downwards

Paper support unit 327

 Figure 3-407 Paper support unit overview, view 2

Table 3-260 Paper support unit overview, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

S962 Paper support home 0604-001393 Detect the paper support guides locate at the home
sensor

M958 Paper support motor JC93-00802B Detect the paper support guides locate at the home

1 Front paper support JC90-01310A Support the paper not to be bended downwards

2 Rear paper support JC90-01311A Support the paper not to be bended downwards

Paper support unit operation

Learn about the paper support unit operation.

1. When a paper goes out to the output tray direction, the paper might be bent to downwards (callout 1)
if the paper is longer than the paper guide.

Figure 3-408 Paper support unit operation, view 1

2. In order to properly eject the paper without disturbing the already stacked paper, two guides extend
in the direction of the arrow (callout 2). As a result, the long paper can be stacked stably without
being pushed toward the tray.

328 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-409 Paper support unit operation, view 2

Paddle unit
You will learn more about the paddle unit of the inner finisher.

Paddle unit overview

Learn about the paddle unit overview.

Figure 3-410 Overview of the paddle unit, view 1

Table 3-261 Overview of the paddle unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

S954 Main paddle home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the main paddle

M953 Main paddlemotor JC90-01331A Drive the main paddle unit connected by a belt

1 Main paddle JC90-01327A Move the paper to the sub paddle unit

Paddle unit 329

 Figure 3-411 Overview of the paddle unit, view 2

Table 3-262 Overview of the paddle unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

M952 Exit motor JC31-00169B Drive the sub paddle unit connected by a belt

2 Sub paddle JC90-01336A Get the paper move to the end fence and arrange them
to be stapled correctly

Figure 3-412 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 1

Table 3-263 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

S954 Main paddle home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the home position of the main paddle

M953 Main paddlemotor JC90-01331A Drive the main paddle unit connected by a belt

330 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-263 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 1 (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

M952 Exit motor JC31-00169B Drive the sub paddle unit connected by a belt

Figure 3-413 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 2

Table 3-264 Detail view of the paddle unit, view 2

No Part name Part number Description

1 Main paddle JC90-01327A Move the paper to the sub paddle unit

2 Sub paddle JC90-01336A Get the paper move to the end fence and arrange them
to be stapled correctly

Paddle unit operation

Learn about the paddle unit operation.

1. A paper drops down from the exit unit, then it moves inside the sub paddle unit by the main paddle
unit which is rotated by the main paddle motor.

Figure 3-414 Paddle unit operation, view 1

Paddle unit operation 331

 2. The sub paddle rotates so that the paper goes into the end fence unit. Repeat this process to collect
a certain amount of paper and store it inside the end fence unit.

Figure 3-415 Paddle unit operation, view 2

End fence unit

You will learn more about the end fence unit of the inner finisher.

End fence unit overview

Learn about the end fence unit overview.

Figure 3-416 Overview of the end fence unit

Table 3-265 Overview of the end fence unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 End fence JC61-06428A Align a paper toward top and bottom direction

332 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-265 Overview of the end fence unit (continued)

No Part name Part number Description

S967 End fence sensor 0604-001381 Check the paper is properly loaded into the end fence
unit for paper alignment.

Figure 3-417 Detail view of the end fence unit

Table 3-266 Overview of the end fence unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 End fence JC61-06428A Align a paper toward top and bottom direction

S967 End fence sensor 0604-001381 Check the paper is properly loaded into the end fence
unit for paper alignment.

End fence unit operation

Learn about the end fence unit operation.

1. A paper goes into the end fence unit through the main paddle unit and sub paddle unit. At the same
time the end fence unit is aligned the paper to the direction of line (callout 1).

Figure 3-418 End fence unit operation, view 1

2. The end fence sensor is checking whether the paper goes into the end fence sensor properly.

End fence unit operation 333

 Figure 3-419 End fence unit operation, view 2

Tamper unit
You will learn more about the tamper unit of the inner finisher.

Tamper unit overview

Learn about the tamper unit overview.

The tamper unit functions to align the left and right sides of a bundle of paper in order to staple it to the
correct position. When a certain amount of paper for stapling is collected after printing, the tamper unit
hits the left and right ends of the paper to align the paper correctly. Each tamper has a motor on the
back side that delivers driving force to move. The tamper unit sensors are mounted on the back side of
the unit, to check the position of the tamper unit.

Figure 3-420 Overview of the tamper unit

334 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-267 Overview of the tamper unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Front tamper JC82-00899A Align left and right side of paper

2 Rear tamper JC82-00900A Align left and right side of paper

M955 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A Drive the rear temper unit

S964 Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the reference position of the tamper unit

M959 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A Drive the front tamper unit
assembly

S955 Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the reference position of the tamper unit

Figure 3-421 Detail view of the tamper unit

Table 3-268 Overview of the tamper unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Front tamper JC82-00899A Align left and right side of paper

2 Rear tamper JC82-00900A Align left and right side of paper

M955 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A Drive the rear temper unit

S964 Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the reference position of the tamper unit

M959 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A Drive the front tamper unit
assembly

S955 Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Detect the reference position of the tamper unit

Tamper unit operation

Learn about the tamper unit operation.

1. The paper is arranged at the end of the end fence unit, then front and rear tamper arrange both left
and right side of the paper.

Tamper unit operation 335

 Figure 3-422 Tamper unit operation, view 1

2. In case of offset printing, move the tamping position to the left or right rather than the center of the
output tray. Due to this, the stacking position of the paper is different for each copy.

Figure 3-423 Tamper unit operation, view 2

Stapler unit
You will learn more about the stapler unit of the inner finisher.

Stapler unit overview

Learn about the stapler unit overview.

Stapler unit is a device installed inside the finisher that staples a bundle of aligned documents.
Documents are collected as a bundle by the tamper unit and the end fence unit for stapling, then
stapler assembly staples the bundle. There are six options to make a bundle.

Figure 3-424 Staplling location

336 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

The stapler unit moves using the stapler motor installed inside. The four stapler position sensors are
mounted so that the stapler can be positioned in the exact stapling position whether it is stapled on
the left, the right, or at the center of the document. Stapling is done by the motor inside the stapler
assembly.

Figure 3-425 Overview of the stapler unit, view 1

Table 3-269 Overview of the stapler unit, view 1

No Part name Part number Description

1 Stapler assembly 6GW49-40001 Staple a bundle of paper

S952 Stapler position sensor 0604-001393 Detect and moves the staple assembly position to make
a bundle of paper at the exact location

M951 Stapler position motor JC93-00999A Get the staple assembly move toward top and down
direction of paper

Figure 3-426 Detail view of the stapler unit, view 1

Stapler unit overview 337

 Table 3-270 Overview of the stapler unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Stapler assembly 6GW49-60003 Staple a bundle of paper

2 Staple cartridge 6GW49-40001 Staple cartridge

Figure 3-427 Detail view of the stapler unit, view 2

Table 3-271 Overview of the stapler unit

No Part name Part number Description

S952 Stapler position sensor 0604-001393 Detect and moves the staple assembly position to make
a bundle of paper at the exact location

M951 Stapler position motor JC93-00999A Get the staple assembly move toward top and down
direction of paper

Staple and staple cartridge

Learn about the stapler and staple cartridge.

1. Staple cartridge: JC81-07408B. Initial staples included

Figure 3-428 Staple cartridge for stapler unit

NOTE: Staple handle color may vary (blue or green color).

2. Staple: Y1G13-67901. 3 EA in 1 box.

338 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-429 Staple for stapler unit

Stapler unit operation

Learn about the stapler unit operation.

1. The stapler position motor delivers the stapler assembly (callout 1) to the horizontal direction.

Figure 3-430 Stapler unit operation, view 1

2. The stapler assembly checks front and rear home position and moves where the stapler position
sensors are located depending on stapling types.

Stapler unit operation 339

 Figure 3-431 Stapler unit operation, view 2

Ejector unit
You will learn more about the ejector unit of the inner finisher.

Ejector unit overview

Learn about the ejector unit overview.

The ejector unit moves a bundle of stapled paper out to the output tray direction. The ejector unit
consists of ejector 1 and ejector 2. The ejector 1 transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to
the ejector 2 unit. During this process, the ejector 1 motor transmits the driving force to the ejector 1 unit.
And the ejector 1 home position sensor controls the movement of the ejector 1. When the paper arrives
at the ejector 2 unit, the ejector 2 grabs a stack of paper and ejects it onto the output tray. The ejector 2
motor is responsible for this process, and the ejector2 motor sensor helps it to be controlled correctly. In
addition, the ejector 2 home position sensor is mounted to check the location of the ejector 2.

Figure 3-432 Overview of the ejector unit

340 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-272 Overview of the ejector unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Ejector SS456-61001

2 Ejector 1 NA Moves the stack of paper from the end fence to the
ejector 2

3 Ejector 2 NA Moves the paper from the ejector 1 to the output tray

S960 Ejector 2 home sensor 0604-001393 Detects the home position of the ejector 2

S966 Ejector 1 home sensor 0604-001393 Detects the home position of the ejector 1

M956 Ejector 2 motor JC93-01168A Moves the ejector 2 forward and backward

S961 Ejector 2 motor sensor 0604-001393 Detects the ejector 2 motor rotation

M957 Ejector1 motor JC93-00998A Grabs a stack of paper, then moves it to the output tray

Figure 3-433 Detail view of the ejector unit

Table 3-273 Detail view of the ejector unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Ejector SS456-61001

2 Ejector 1 NA Moves the stack of paper from the end fence to the
ejector 2

3 Ejector 2 NA Moves the paper from the ejector 1 to the output tray

S960 Ejector 2 home sensor 0604-001393 Detects the home position of the ejector 2

Ejector unit overview 341

 Figure 3-434 Parts information of the ejector unit

Table 3-274 Parts information of the ejector unit

No Part name Part number Description

S960 Ejector 2 home sensor 0604-001393 Detects the home position of the ejector 2

S966 Ejector 1 home sensor 0604-001393 Detects the home position of the ejector 1

4 Ejector motor assembly JC90-01309A Moves the ejector 1 and ejector 2

M956 Ejector 2 motor JC93-01168A Moves the ejector 2 forward and backward

S961 Ejector 2 motor sensor 0604-001393 Detects the ejector 2 motor rotation

M957 Ejector1 motor JC93-00998A Grabs a stack of paper, then moves it to the output tray

Ejector unit operation

Learn about the ejector unit operation.

1. The ejector 1 pushes aligned paper at the end fence unit to ejector 2 unit.

Figure 3-435 Ejector unit operation, view 1

2. The ejector 2 grabs paper, then moves forward to the output tray unit direction, then drops the paper
on the output tray.

342 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-436 Ejector unit operation, view 2

Output tray and paper holding unit

You will learn more about the output tray and paper holding unit of the inner finisher.

Output tray and paper holding unit overview

Learn about the output tray and paper holding unit overview.

The output tray moves up and down along the rails inside the finisher, and the output tray motor controls
those movement according to the signals sent from the paper holding sensor. As paper stacks up on
the output tray, the paper holding unit is lifted by papers. When the paper holding sensor is touched, the
output tray moves downward.

The machine detects when the output tray is full as the output tray hits the lower limit switch. The output
tray top of stack sensor is mounted on both left and right sides for the case that the paper holding
sensor breaks down.

The paper holding solenoid lifts the paper holding actuator up when a new bundle of paper come to the
output tray.

Figure 3-437 Overview of the output tray unit

Output tray and paper holding unit 343

 Table 3-275 Overview of the output tray unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Output tray 5QK09-60118 Stores paper

M954 Output tray motor JC90-01334B Move the output tray up and down
assembly

S956 Output tray motor sensor 0604-001393 Detect whether the output tray motor is operational

S957 Output tray lower limit JC90-01320A Detects the lowest position of the output tray
switch

2 Output tray top of stack JC82-01039A Detect abnormal movement of output tray (output tray
sensor kit top of stack sensor receiver + led)

S958 Output tray top of stack NA –

sensor receiver

S963 Output tray top of stack NA –

sensor transmitter

Figure 3-438 Detail view of the output tray unit

Table 3-276 Detail view of the output tray unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Output tray 5QK09-60118 Stores paper

M954 Output tray motor JC90-01334B Move the output tray up and down
assembly

S956 Output tray motor sensor 0604-001393 Detect whether the output tray motor is operational

S957 Output tray lower limit JC90-01320A Detects the lowest position of the output tray
switch

2 Output tray top of stack JC82-01039A Detect abnormal movement of output tray (output tray
sensor kit top of stack sensor receiver + led)

S958 Output tray top of stack NA –

sensor receiver

S963 Output tray top of stack NA –

sensor transmitter

344 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-439 Overview of the paper holding unit

Table 3-277 Overview of the paper holding unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Paper holding actuator JC90-01313A Control the output tray height, and grabs stacked paper
not to be scattered

SL951 Paper holding solenoid JC33-00037A Move paper holding actuator up when paper goes out to
the output tray

S959 Paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Detect stacked paper position

Figure 3-440 Detail view of the paper holding unit

Output tray and paper holding unit overview 345

 Table 3-278 Detail view of the paper holding unit

No Part name Part number Description

1 Paper holding actuator JC90-01313A Control the output tray height, and grabs stacked paper
not to be scattered

SL951 Paper holding solenoid JC33-00037A Move paper holding actuator up when paper goes out to
the output tray

S959 Paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Detect stacked paper position

Output tray and paper holding unit operation

Learn about the output tray and paper holding unit operation.

1. The paper holding actuator helps the paper stay stable on the output tray by pushing the paper
(callout 1). When ejecting the paper, it moves to the inside of the left cover so that the paper properly
stacks on the output tray (callout 2).

Figure 3-441 Output tray and paper holding unit operation, view 1

2. As the paper piles up on the tray, it touches the paper holding actuator to upwards (callout 3) and
changes the paper holding sensor signal.

Figure 3-442 Output tray and paper holding unit operation, view 2

3. Recognizing this, the output tray motor lowers the position of the output tray to the bottom (callout
4), allowing more paper to be stacked.

346 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-443 Output tray and paper holding unit operation, view 3

4. When it reaches the end of the moving range, the output tray lower limit switch is pressed (callout 5),
and the finishing job stops with the output tray full message.

Figure 3-444 Output tray and paper holding unit operation, view 4

5. In the event of an abnormal loading of paper, for example overflow due to a very severe curl, the
signal from the top of stack sensor is changed by being obscured by the paper. Recognizing this, the
machine forcibly terminates printing and displays an error message.

PCA
You will learn more about the inner finisher PCA.

Inner finisher main PCA

Learn about the inner finisher main PCA.

The inner finisher main PCA controls operation of the inner finisher as well as communicate with the
main PCA.

● Inner finisher main PCA part number: 6GW49-60001 (P951)

PCA 347
 Figure 3-445 Inner finisher main PCA

Table 3-279 Inner finisher main PCA

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

IF-CN1 Punch wastebox sensor 12pin JC31-02174A

Finisher docking sensor

IF-CN2 Rear tamper home sensor 26pin JC39-02176A

Output tray top of stack sensor

Exit sensor

end fence sensor

Paper support home sensor

Rear tamper motor

Paper support motor

IF-CN3 Stapler low sensor 40pin JC39-02173A

Stapler ready sensor

Stapler home sensor

Stapler motor

Stapler position motor

Entrance motor

Front cover switch

Punch motor

Stapler position sensor (front home)

Stapler position sensor (rear home)

Punch waste full sensor

Punch motor sensor

Punch home sensor

348 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-279 Inner finisher main PCA (continued)

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

IF-CN4 Ejector 2 motor 15pin JC39-02165A

Ejector 1 motor

Ejector 2 motor sensor

Ejector 2 home sensor

Ejector 1 home sensor

IF-CN5 Main PCA 16pin JC39-02169A

IF-CN6 Output tray lower limit switch 3pin JC39-02178A

IF-CN7 Exit motor 28pin JC39-02168A

Main paddle motor

Output tray motor

Front tamper motor

Output tray motor sensor

Main paddle home sensor

Front tamper home sensor

Paper holding sensor

Output tray top of stack sensor

IF-CN9 Paper holding solenoid 2pin –

IF-CN10 Stapler position sensor (mid front) 6pin JC39-02173A

Stapler position sensor (mid rear)

Inner finisher rear joint PCA

Learn about the inner finisher rear joint PCA.

Inner finisher rear joint PCA locates inside the inner finisher so that it communicates with the inner
finisher mainPCA and transfer signals and commands to the stapler motor, sensor, top door switch, and
the entrance motor.

● Inner finisher rear joint PCA part number: JC92-02780A (P952)

Inner finisher rear joint PCA 349

 Figure 3-446 Inner finisher rear joint PCA

Table 3-280 Inner finisher rear joint PCA

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

IFsub-CN2 IF-CN3 22pin JC39-02173A

IFsub-CN3 Stapler assembly 20Pin FFC JC39-02164, JC39-02177A

IFsub-CN4 Stapler position motor 18pin JC39-02172A

Front stapler position sensor

Rear stapler position sensor

Top door switch

Entrance moto

Print Quality Diagnostics

Learn about the HP Print Quality Diagnostics.

HP Print Quality Diagnostics is a tool for remotely diagnosing print quality operated by Smart Device
Services (SDS). Through this industry-leading technology, the printer is remotely monitored for print
quality health and can receive proactive detailed service diagnostics which reduce overall service costs
and improve customer up-time.

The following conditions must exist to use the Print Quality Diagnostic.

● Optional for the E877 and E786 series printers

NOTE: The Print Quality Diagnostic requires printer firmware version 5.6 or later. Check the
printer firmware version. if necessary, upgrade the printer firmware.

● Powered by the HP Smart Device Service (SDS)

● Enabled by the HP Print Quality Diagnostic Inline Scan Bar

● Printer configuration required

350 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-447 Print Quality Diagnostic printer configuration

1 1

4
3 2

Reference number Description

1 Inline Scanner Bridge Unit with Print Quality Diagnostics

2 Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics

3 Stapler/Stacker finisher with Print Quality Diagnostics or Booklet finisher with Print
Quality Diagnostics

4 For the E786 printers, a second exit unit must be ordered and installed.

For the E877 printers, the second exit unit is factory installed.

Print Quality Diagnostic overview

Learn more about the Print Quality Diagnostic function..

Print Quality Diagnostic workflow

Learn about the Print Quality Diagnostic workflow.

Figure 3-448 Print Quality Diagnostic workflow with stacker

Print Quality Diagnostic overview 351

 Figure 3-449 Print Quality Diagnostic workflow with Stapler/Stacker finisher or Booklet finisher

Table 3-281 Print Quality Diagnostic workflow

Item Unit Description

1 Entrance unit Allows a piece of paper to move into the bridge unit.

2 Inline Scan Bar Scans the test pattern and sends the information for quality
diagnosis and improvement.

3 Feed Allows a piece of paper to move from the entrance unit to the exit
unit.

4 Exit unit Move the page to the output unit.

5 Output tray Receives the pages that have completed the print job.

Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics

Learn about the bridge unit.

Overview
The bridge unit with Printer Quality Diagnostics is a diagnostic device which includes an inline scanning
bar. The inline scan bar scans and then analyzes the printing on the pages at regular intervals to keep
the printer output in optimal condition.

This unit is an essential item for using the Print Quality Diagnostics feature. When this device is installed
on the base printer, it can be connected to a Stacker unit, Stapler/Stacker finisher, or Booklet finisher for
paper stacking.

Detailed specification

NOTE: For general printing, all items supported by the base printer are equally supported.

352 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Table 3-282 Paper specifications of Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics

Item Description

Size for diagnostic LTR (297mm x 216mm), A4 (297mm x 210mm)

Long-edge feed (LEF)

Weight for diagnostic Plain type (71-90gsm)

Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics sensors, motor, rollers, PCAs
Figure 3-450 Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostic sensors

2 1

Callout Part name Part number Description

1 Bridge entrance sensor JC32-00020A Checks that a page came into the
entrance.

2 Scan in sensor JC32-00020A Checks that a page came into the scan
bar.

3 Bridge cover sensor 0604-001393 Checks that the cover is closed or open.

4 Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 Checks that a page came into bridge exit
roller.

Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 353

 Figure 3-451 Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostic motor and rollers

4
3

1 2

Callout Part name Part number Type Description

1 Bridge driving 3SJ19-80501 Stepping motor Drives the bridge unit rollers.
motor

2 ILSB gate JC33-00031B Solenoid Moves the scanning unit gate open and closed.
solenoid

3 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A Moves the page from the machine to the
stacker unit or finisher.

4 Bridge middle JC66-04732A Moves the page from the machine to the
roller stacker unit or finisher.

5 Bridge entrance JC66-04733A Moves the page from the machine to the
roller stacker unit or finisher.

354 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Figure 3-452 Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostic PCAs

Callout Part name Part number Description

1 Inline scan bar PCA NA Controls the inline scan bar and sends
scan data to the formatter.

2 Interconnection PCA NA Communicates between the inline scan

bar PCA and the inline scan bar.

Figure 3-453 Inline scan bar PCA connections

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

J2 Formatter - Stapler/Stacker or 8 pin 63C80-50001

Booklet finisher

J4 Fan 4 pin

J6 Interconnection PCA 19 pin 63C80-50002

Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 355

 Figure 3-454 Interconnection PCA connections

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

J3 Inline scan bar 20 pin 63C80-50003

J2 Inline scan bar PCA 19 pin 63C80-50003

J3 Inline scan bar trigger sensor 3 pin 5QK03-50015

Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics

Learn about the stacker unit.

Overview
The stacker unit with Printer Quality Diagnostics is a diagnostic device used as a paper support for
general paper stacking. The stacker is installed when a Stapler/Stacker finisher or Booklet finisher is not
used. Pages feed through the bridge unit (that includes this diagnostic tool) and into the stacker.

Detailed specification

NOTE: For general printing, all items supported by the base printer are equally supported.

Table 3-283 General specifications of Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics

Item Description

Capacity 500 sheets (A4/LT at 80 grams per square meter)

Sensing Paper Jam/Stacking full/Cover open/Scanning trigger

Media sizes 98-320mm x 139.7-457.2mm

Media weight 60-325gsm

Number of bins 1

Dimensions (W x D x H) 412mm x 497mm x 282mm (including the extended sub tray / not
including the bridge unit)

Weigh 11kg

356 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics sensors, motor, roller, PCA
Figure 3-455 Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostic sensors

Callout Part name Part number Description

1 Stacker full sensor 0604-001393 Checks the output bin for a bin full
condition.

2 Stacker exit sensor 0604-001381 Checks that a page came into the exit
unit.

Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 357

 Figure 3-456 Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostic motor and roller

1 2

Callout Part name Part number Type Description

1 Stacker exit JC93-00336A Stepping motor Drives the exit roller.

motor

2 Stacker exit roller Moves the page to the output bin.

Figure 3-457 Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostic PCA

Callout Part name Part number Description

1 Stacker PCA NA

358 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-458 Stacker PCA connections

CN number Connection Type Harness part number

CN1 Formatter 16 pin JC39-02308A

CN2 Bridge unit 13 pin 63C82-50002

CN3 Bridge unit 5 pin

CN4 Stacker exit motor 10 pin 63C82-50001

Stacker exit sensor

Stacker full sensor

Print Quality Diagnostic operation

Learn about the Print Quality Diagnostic operation.

The Print Quality Diagnostics system outputs test pages for diagnosis at regular intervals, and scans
these pages to make sure that the printer maintains optimal image quality.

The test pages are only output when the following conditions are met.

NOTE: If these conditions are not satisfied, the printer does not perform the diagnostic, but continues
to output print jobs without errors.

● Paper size: A4 or LTR

● Feeding direction: Long Edge Feeding (LEF)

● Paper type/weight: plain type/71-90 gsm

● Load paper in at least one tray except for Tray1 paper stored in the tray

Print Quality Diagnostic operation 359

 Figure 3-459 Print Quality Diagnostic sample pages

360 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

4 Problem solving

Learn about problem solving.

General troubleshooting guide

Learn about general troubleshooting.

Troubleshooting process
Learn about the troubleshooting process.

Determine the problem source

When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts
you to the situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible
causes of the problem. A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem.
The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems.

● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The
flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the
malfunction.

Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:

● Are supply items within their rated life?

● Are supply items Genuine HP supplies?

● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?

NOTE: The customer or service provider is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies
that are in good condition.

Power subsystem
Learn about the power subsystem.

Power-on checks
The basic printer functions should start up when the printer is connected into an electrical outlet and
the power switch is pushed to the on position. If the printer does not start, use the information in this
section to isolate and solve the problem.

If the control-panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control-
panel display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem.

Power-on troubleshooting overview

If the control panel is blank 1 minute after turning on the printer, check the following items:

During normal operation, a cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the printer power is turned on. Place
your hand over the vents at the rear of the printer, next to the formatter, or on the on the rear of the

Problem solving 361

 scanner. If the fan is operating, you will feel air passing out of the printer. You can lean close to the printer
and hear the fan operating.

A fan begins to blow on the right door (fuser), and then the control panel goes through a series of set
up functions. The main motor turns on (unless the left door or cartridge access door is open, a jam
condition is sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You might be able to visually and audibly
determine if the main motor is turned on.

If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine,
formatter, and control panel problems.

1. Make sure that the printer is connected directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip)
that delivers the correct voltage.

2. Make sure that the power switch is in the on position, and then verify that the LED is on.

3. Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational.

4. Depress the button on the back of the control panel to test the control panel functionality.

5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness is connected.

6. Remove any external solutions, and then try to turn the printer on again.

Troubleshooting a blank display, black display, no display, or no power situation

Customers usually report that the control-panel display is not showing anything. It is very important to
collect as much information as possible from the customer about the issue to help resolve it.

Following are some printer behaviors the customer might encounter:

● The control panel is completely blank (no LEDs or back light).

● The control panel is blank, but there might be LEDs illuminated.

● The control panel is blank (LEDs are on or flashing) and the back light is on (but no text visible).

Following are some possible causes of a blank control-panel display:

● No power to the printer.

● The control panel contrast setting is not correctly adjusted.

● The formatter connector(s) are not fully seated into the connector(s) on the DC controller, or the
connectors are not fully seated on the formatter.

● A faulty component is installed on the formatter (for example a memory DIMM, fax PCA, network
PCA, USB device, or other component).

● The formatter is defective.

● The control panel connector is not fully seated, or the control panel is defective.

● The DC controller is defective.

Following are some questions to ask the customer:

● Was the printer newly install or has the printer been properly functioning?

– For a new install, investigate to see if there was any shipping damage to the printer.

362 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 – Did the customer notice any damage to the shipping box or any visible damage to the printer?

● What happened just prior to the control panel going blank?

– Was the printer serviced recently, a power outage occurred?

– Has a lightning storm recently occurred?

– Did the customer recently add a memory DIMM or install a third-party component?

● Make sure to get a complete description of the failure.

– Is the control-panel display completely blank (might be faint text and no back light)?

– Is the control-panel display back light on?

– Has a print job been sent to the printer? The customer might report that their print jobs seemed
to print but when they go to the printer the control-panel display is blank.

Recommended actions
If the control-panel display is completely blank (no LEDs illuminated or no back light) check to see if the
printer is getting power. Listen for fans or any printer initialization sounds when the power is turned on.

If there are no signs of power, then perform the following:

1. Make sure that the printer is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip or
interruptible power supply) that delivers the correct voltage.

TIP: Try using a different power cable if possible.

2. Turn the printer power on, and make sure that the fan(s) run briefly (this indicates that the power
supply is operational).

3. Check if the yellow LED on formatter is flashing. If so, there is a communication issue between the
formatter and the control panel.

4. Turn the printer power off.

5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness (and/or flat cable) is properly connected (and
fully seated), and then turn the printer power on again.

6. Check control panel diagnostics by pressing the button on the back of the control panel to run
different diagnostic tests.

7. Verify the status LEDs are illuminated, but the control-panel display is blank. If applicable: Check
if the contrast setting is adjusted to very low. If so, try turning the contrast knob to see if the
control-panel display becomes visible.

8. From a host computer, send a print job to the printer.

NOTE: If the print job correctly prints, then the problem is most likely to a defective control panel.

9. Turn the printer power off, and then make sure that the memory DIMM is installed in the correct slot
and is fully seated.

NOTE: For some printers, there may be more than one memory DIMM installed. Some printers
have third-party solutions/applications or fonts that use memory.

Recommended actions 363

 10. Remove all of the components/accessories installed on the formatter (for example, hard drive,
solid-state drive, memory DIMM(s), fax PCA, network PCA, USB devices, or other devices).

● Make sure that the formatter is fully seated.

IMPORTANT: This is important because the formatter or a component on the formatter might
be defective or shorted, which causes the printer to lose power.

11. Reinstall the formatter. Make sure that it makes a good connection and is fully seated.

Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are correctly connected and fully seated.

12. Turn the printer power on, and then check the control-panel display.

13. If the printer control panel is properly working, replace each removed component (one at a time) to
determine which one is causing the problem.

CAUTION: Turn the printer power off, and then on again, after replacing a component on the
formatter.

14. If the control-panel display is still blank after performing the above troubleshooting steps, and the
control panel diagnostics do not function, replace the control panel. If the control panel diagnostics
are functioning, then replace the formatter.

Control panel checks

Learn about the control panel checks.

Control panel diagnostic flowcharts

Learn about the control panel diagnostic flowcharts.

Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems.

● Touchscreen is blank, white, or dim (no image).

● Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond.

● Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.

● No control panel sound.

● Home button is unresponsive.

● Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)

Learn about the touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image).

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

364 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 Figure 4-1 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image)

Black display White display Dim display

(no backlight (no image) (no image)
or image)

Is the Home button

Y
illuminated
(bright white)?
Is the product in bright
Open the sunlight?
diagnostic function. If yes, move the
N
product to a
different location.

Touch the display or Home button

to exit sleep mode. Make sure that
the product is plugged in and
the power is turned on. Does an image
appear on the Y
control panel?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
N backlight test.

Turn the product power off.

Does the display
Y Inspect and reseat the
turn on?
control panel cables.
Remove and reseat the
formatter cables.
Make sure that the
Problem solved.
formatter LEDs function. Is the backlight
N Y Y
adjustable?

Are the formatter

LEDs functioning? Problem fixed? Y

Do not replace the control panel.

N Turn the product power off.
Check connection and cables on the formatter
and at the comtrol panel.

Turn the product power off. N

Remove and reseat the formatter
cables.
Do not replace the control panel.
N

Replace the
control panel.

Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone

Learn about how the touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone 365

 Figure 4-2 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
Touchscreen
has an
unresponsive
zone

Is the area of the

touchscreen you are touching
greyed out (intentionally
deactivated)?

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
touch test.

Does the previously

inactive area respond
to a touch?

Y
Turn the product
power off,
and then
on again.

Replace the Does the previously

N inactive area respond
control panel.
to a touch?

Do not replace the

control panel.

No control panel sound

Learn what to do when there is no control panel sound.

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

366 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 Figure 4-3 No control panel sound

Control panel
has no
sound

Open the following menus:

Administration
Display Settings
Key Press Sound
Select the following:
On
Save

Can sounds
be heard?

N
Y

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the sound test.

Can sounds
be heard?
Y

N
Do not replace the
control panel.
Turn the product power off.
Remove the control panel.
Check the cables to the speaker.
Replace the control panel. N Reseat the cables to the speaker.
Turn the product power on.
Can sounds be heard?

Home button is unresponsive

Learn what to do when the home button is unresponsive.

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

Home button is unresponsive 367

 Figure 4-4 Home button is unresponsive
Home button
unresponsive
Note: If illuminated: continue.
If not illuminated: verify that
the power is turned on,
the printer is not in sleep mode,
turn the power off, and
then on again.

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the Home
button test.

Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?

Turn the product power off,

and then on again.

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
Home button test.

Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Y

Replace the Do not replace the

control panel. control panel.

Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)

Learn about when the hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

368 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 Figure 4-5 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)

Hardware integration
pocket (HIP)
not functional
(control panel
functional)

Check that all installed hardware integration

pocket devices are within HP specifications.
The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to
the port. If an installed device attempts to draw
more power than is provided, the port is
automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party
devices with the device manufacturer.

Individual component diagnostics

Learn about individual component diagnostics.

Tools for troubleshooting: LED diagnostics

LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot printer problems.

Understand lights on the formatter

Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the printer is functioning correctly.

Figure 4-6 LEDs

Table 4-1 LEDs

Item Description

1 Heartbeat LED

2 HP Jetdirect LEDs

Individual component diagnostics 369

 HP Jetdirect LEDs
Learn about the HP Jetdirect LEDs.

The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and
the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is
off, a link has failed.

For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, try to manually configure the link
settings on the embedded print server by using the printer control-panel menus.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.

2. Open the following menus:

● Networking

● Ethernet

● Link Speed

3. Select the appropriate link speed, and then select OK.

Tools for troubleshooting: Engine diagnostics

The printer contains extensive internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality,
paper path, noise, assembly, and timing issues.

Defeating interlocks
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the
diagnostic test when the toner cartridge door or right door is open.

Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation (and view the page enter
registration).

WARNING! Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service
personnel should open and run the diagnostics with a door open. Never touch any of the power
supplies when the printer is turned on.

Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock

Learn how to defeat the toner cartridge door interlock.

1. Open the toner cartridge door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in)
strips, and insert the strips into the slot for the cartridge door logic switches.

370 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 Figure 4-7 Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock

Defeat the right door interlock

Learn how to defeat the right door interlock.

1. Open the right door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in)
strips, and insert the strips into the slot for the front door logic switches.

Figure 4-8 Defeat the right door interlock

Tools for troubleshooting

Use the procedure below to test various printer mechanical and electromechanical assemblies.

Defeat the right door interlock 371

 Individual component diagnostics (special-mode test)
Learn about the individual component diagnostics (special-mode test).

This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems.

Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.

Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.

NOTE: The cartridge door interlocks must be defeated to run the component tests.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Select one of the following tests:

● Continuous Scan

● Run Fax Test

3. Select the component test options for the test.

Tools for troubleshooting

Learn about tools for troubleshooting.

Problem-solving checklist
Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the printer.

Step 1: Check that the printer power is on

Learn how to check that the printer power is on.

1. Make sure that the printer is plugged in and turned on. The power button should be lit with a white
light. If it is not, press the power button. If the power button does not light up, check the following
conditions.

● Make sure that the power cable is connected to the printer and the outlet.

● Check the power source by connecting the power cable to a different outlet.

2. If the printer motors do not rotate, make sure that the toner cartridges are installed and that the
doors are all closed. The control panel displays messages to indicate these problems.

Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages

Learn how to check the control panel for error messages.

The control panel should indicate ready status. If an error message appears, resolve the error.

Print a supplies status page to ensure that the supplies are not at or over end of life.

NOTE: HP long-life consumable and maintenance kit life specifications are estimations. Actual
individual life or yield during normal use will vary depending on usage, environment, media, and other
factors. Estimated life is not an implied warranty.

Step 3: Test print functionality

Learn how to test print functionality.

372 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Reports menu, touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu, select the Configuration
Page item, and then touch the Print button to print the report.

3. If the report does not print, make sure that paper is loaded in the tray, and check the control panel
to see if paper is jammed inside the printer.

NOTE: Make sure that the paper in the tray meets specifications for this printer.

Step 4: Test copy functionality

Learn how to test copy functionality.

1. Place the configuration page into the ADF and make a copy. If paper does not feed smoothly
through the ADF, you might need to clean the ADF rollers and separation pad. Make sure that the
paper meets specifications for this printer.

2. Place the configuration page onto the scanner glass and make a copy.

3. If the print quality on the copied pages is not acceptable, clean the scanner glass and the small
glass strip.

Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality

Learn how to test the fax sending functionality.

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tools menu. Touch the Run Fax Test
button to test the fax functionality.

3. Touch the Fax on the printer control panel, and then touch the Start Fax button.

Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality

Learn how to test the fax receiving functionality.

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.

2. Touch the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tests menu. Touch the Run Fax
Test button to test the fax functionality.

3. Use another fax machine to send a fax to the printer.

4. Review and reset the printer fax settings.

Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer

Learn how to try sending a print job from a computer.

1. Use a word-processing program to send a print job to the printer.

2. If the job does not print, make sure that you selected the correct printer driver.

3. Uninstall and then reinstall the printer software.

Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality
Learn how to test the plug and print USB drive printing functionality.

Step 4: Test copy functionality 373

 1. Load a .PDF document or .JPEG photo onto a USB flash drive, and insert it in the USB port near the
control panel.

2. The USB Flash Drive menu opens. Try printing the document or photo.

3. If no documents are listed, try a different type of USB flash drive.

Factors that affect printer performance

Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:

● The software program that you are using and its settings

● The use of special paper (such as heavy paper or custom-size paper)

● Printer processing and download time

● The complexity and size of graphics

● The speed of the computer you are using

● The USB or network connection

● Whether the printer is printing in color or in monochrome

● The type of USB drive, if you are using one

● Environmental factors, such as low temperature or high humidity

Print menu map

Learn how to print the menu map.

To more easily navigate individual settings, print a report of the complete Reports menu.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.

3. Select the Settings Menu Map option.

4. Touch the Print button to print the report.

TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.

Print current settings pages

Learn how to print current settings pages.

Printing the current settings page provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be helpful
in the troubleshooting process.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.

3. Select the Current Settings Page option.

374 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 4. Touch the Print button to print the report.

TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.

Additional tools for troubleshooting

Find additional troubleshooting topics.

Use the links below to go to additional troubleshooting tools topics.

● Pre-boot menu options

See Pre-boot menu options.

● Event log (display and print)

See Event Log.

Remote Admin
The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu (BIOS environment). The
printer functions as a telnet server which uses the telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any
computer (with telnet installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and
interact with the Pre-boot menu.

IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the Pre-boot menu, for security
reasons the Remote Admin connection must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.

This section describes the following Remote Admin items.

Required software and network connection

Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network protocol is installed, and
enabled, on the remote telnet client computer.

NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for computers using a
Windows® operating system.

HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows based system, however, there are
other operating systems that support the telnet network protocol. For information about enabling and
configuring the telnet network protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that
operating system.

Telnet client
All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client installed, however, the telnet
client function might not be enabled by default.

NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 7 Enterprise® operating system.
Screens and menu selections might vary slightly for other operating systems.

Additional tools for troubleshooting 375

 1. Use the Start menu to open the Control Panel, and then click the Programs item to select it.

Figure 4-9 Open the Control Panel

2. Click the Turn Windows features on or off item to select it.

Figure 4-10 Turn Windows features on or off

3. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check box is not checked, click the
box to select it, and then click the OK button.

TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is already enabled. Click the
Cancel button.

376 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 Figure 4-11 Enable the telnet client feature

Network connection
The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the printer for the Remote Admin
function to operate. This means that the telnet client computer must be on the same network as the
printer. The Remote Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or other remote
access network security programs.

If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a virtual private network
(VPN) connection to the network.

Connect a remote connection

Learn how to connect a remote connection using telnet.

Start the telnet server function at the printer

For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present
at the printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.

NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how
the printer is configured.

1. Turn the printer on.

2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a "1/8" with an underscore displays, touch
the middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot menu.

Network connection 377

 3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-12 Select the +3:Administrator item

4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-13 Select the +A:Remote Admin item

5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-14 Select the 1:Start Telnet item

6. Do one of the following

● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to step 7.

Figure 4-15 Telnet connecting message

● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.

378 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 Figure 4-16 Telnet error message

a. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.

b. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.

○ The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is configured to use
DHCP instead.

○ The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP address is incorrect.

c. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.

7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the
information on this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.

NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.

● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.

● Port: The standard telnet port (23).

● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).

Figure 4-17 Telnet server function initialized

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer

The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote computer to the printer.

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer 379

 1. From the Start menu click Run to open a dialog box, type cmd in the Open field, and then click the
OK button to open a Windows command window.

Figure 4-18 Open a command window

2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 4-19 Start a telnet session

3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key.

NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was displayed in step 7 in Start the
telnet server function at the printer.

TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall
or on a different network that the remote telnet client computer. See Network connection.

380 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 Figure 4-20 Establish a telnet connection

4. Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7 in Start the telnet server function at the printer at the
prompt, and then press the Enter key.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer
terminates the Remote Admin connection. The Remote Admin feature must be re-initiated at the
printer. See Start the telnet server function at the printer.

Figure 4-21 Enter the PIN

5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered and the Remote Admin connection is
successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see Pre-boot menu options.

NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecure telnet network protocol connection,
the following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer.

● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer 381

 Figure 4-22 Remote Admin window

Disconnect a remote connection

Learn how to disconnect a remote connection.

The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel or the remote telnet
client computer.

NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin connection from the remote
telnet client computer.

1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the
+3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 4-23 Access the administrator menu

382 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote Admin item, and then press
the Enter key.

Figure 4-24 Access the remote admin menu

3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the
Enter key. The Remote Admin connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer
terminates.

IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present
at the printer do the following:

● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item,
and then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.

Figure 4-25 Terminate the telnet connection

Clear paper jams

Use the procedures in this section to clear jammed paper from the printer paper path.

Paper jam locations

Jams can occur in these locations.

Clear paper jams 383

 1

2
3

Table 4-2 Jam Locations

Item Description

1 Document feeder

2 Output bin

3 Right door and fuser area

4 Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)

5 Tray 2 and Tray 3

Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams

Learn about printer jam clearing auto-navigation.

The auto-navigation feature assists in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control
panel.

When you complete a step, the printer displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all
steps in the procedure.

384 Chapter 4 Problem solving

Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?
To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.

View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the number of paper
jams

1. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this printer.

2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different
package.

3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.

4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten
the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.

5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides
so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.

6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the printer.

7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed
sheets one at a time.

8. Open the Trays menu on the printer control panel. Verify that the tray is configured correctly for the
paper type and size.

9. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.

31.13.yz jam error in the document feeder

The following information describes how to clear paper jams in the document feeder. When a jam
occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

View a video of how to clear a jam in the document feeder

Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams? 385

 1. Open the document-feeder cover.

2. Remove any jammed paper.

386 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 3. Close the document-feeder cover.

NOTE: To avoid jams, make sure the guides in the document-feeder input tray are adjusted against
the document, without bending the document. To copy narrow documents, use the flatbed scanner.
Remove all staples and paper clips from original documents.

NOTE: Original documents that are printed on heavy, glossy paper can jam more frequently than
originals that are printed on plain paper.

13.A1 jam error in tray 1 (multipurpose tray)

Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in Tray 1. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays
an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

View a video of how to clear a jam in tray 1

1. Gently remove the jammed paper.

2. Open and then close the front door to resume printing.

13.A1 jam error in tray 1 (multipurpose tray) 387

 13.A2, 13.A3, 13.A4 jam errors in tray 2, tray 3, or the optional 2 x 520-sheet trays
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2 or Tray 3.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing
the jam.

View a video of how to clear a jam in tray 2, tray 3, and the optional trays

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

NOTE: The procedure to clear a paper jam in Tray 3 is the same as for Tray 2. Only Tray 2 is shown
here.

1. Open the right door.

2. Gently remove any jammed paper.

388 Chapter 4 Problem solving

3. Close the right door.

4. Open the tray.

5. Gently remove any jammed paper.

13.A2, 13.A3, 13.A4 jam errors in tray 2, tray 3, or the optional 2 x 520-sheet trays 389
 6. Close the tray. Printing automatically resumes.

13.E1 jam error in the output bin

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the output bin. When a jam
occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

View a video of how to clear a jam in the output bin

■ If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it.

13.B9, 13.B2, 13.FF jam errors in the right door and fuser area
Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in the right door and fuser area. When a jam occurs, the
control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area

NOTE: The fuser is hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before clearing jams.

390 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 1. Open the right door.

2. Gently remove any jammed paper.

3. Close the right door.

HP service and support

Learn about access to additional service and support information.

Additional service and support for channel partners

Channel partners can use the HP Partner Portal or the Channel Services Delivery Platform (CSDP) to
access the HP Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE).

Find information about the following topics.

HP service and support 391

 ● Service manuals, service cost data, and service advisories

● The latest control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting information

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Printer specifications, warranty, and regulatory information

● Install, configure, and how to information

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.

Access WISE for Channel partners (HP Partner Portal)

1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

2. Select the Services & Support item (near the top of the screen).

3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.

4. Select the Technical Documentation item.

5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Access WISE for Channel partners (CSDP)

1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

2. Select the Knowledge and Training item.

3. Select theHP Technical Documentation item.

4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

392 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 ● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

Additional technical support WISE videos

The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP]
search).

How to search for printer documentation

The CPMD, error codes, and other support documentation for each printer is available on the HP portals.

For HP internal access to WISE, go to WISE.

For HP channel partners access WISE, see Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal)
or Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP).

WISE is available to call agents, service technicians, and HP internal users. The level of detail available
depends on your access credentials. To learn how to find support content in WISE, watch the video here.

How to search WISE for printer information and documentation

These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians, and other internal users.

To learn how to find support content in WISE, watch the video here: Finding Error Code and Control Panel
Message Document in WISE.

TIP: The Product Detail Page (PDP) is available from the WISE home page. Enter, and then select a
product name or number in the Go to a Product Detail Page area (callout 1), or select the …or select your
product from a list item (callout 2) on the WISE home page.

Many types of printer documentation and information are available on WISE. This section details
methods for finding error code descriptions and solutions.

TIP: To view a list of control panel message documents (CPMD) per printer, search for the following
topic in WISE: HP LaserJet, OfficeJet, PageWide, ScanJet Enterprise - Control panel message
document (CPMD) list or click the link below.

● HP LaserJet, HP OfficeJet, HP PageWide, HP ScanJet - Control panel messages document (CPMD),

Service manual, and Service cost data list

How to search for printer documentation 393

 Use one of the following methods to search for CPMD error code information.

● Method 1: Use the WISE home page Error Code Lookup tool

● Method 2: Search for error codes using the WISE search function

● Method 3: Search for error codes using the Product Detail Page

Method 1: Use the WISE home page Error Code Lookup tool
Use the WISE Error Code Lookup tool to find error code troubleshooting procedures using the following
steps.

1. On the WISE home page, click the Error Code Lookup tool icon.

Figure 4-26 WISE Error Code Lookup tool icon

2. Enter a printer model number (for example, M606) in the Error Code Lookup dialog box.

Figure 4-27 WISE Error Code Lookup tool dialog box

3. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example, HP LaserJet Enterprise
M606 series) in the list.

NOTE: Selecting the series item from the drop-down list is recommended for the most accurate
search return.

394 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 Figure 4-28 WISE Error Code Lookup tool drop-down list

M606

4. Type the error code (for example, 13.b2.d2) in the Error Code Lookup keyword field, and then select
the search icon.

Figure 4-29 WISE Error Code Lookup tool search

5. The error code troubleshooting content displays in the All Search Results area.

Figure 4-30 WISE Search results

Method 2: Search for error codes using the WISE search function
Use the WISE search function to find error code troubleshooting procedures using the following steps.

1. On the WISE home page, enter a printer model number (for example, M606) in the Search dialog box.

How to search WISE for printer information and documentation 395

 Figure 4-31 WISE Search dialog box

2. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example, HP LaserJet Enterprise
M606 series) in the list.

NOTE: Selecting the series item from the drop-down list is recommended for the most accurate
search return.

Figure 4-32 WISE Search drop-down list

3. Type the error code (for example, 13.E1.D3) in the Search keyword field, and then select the search
icon.

Figure 4-33 WISE Search

1 2

4. The error code troubleshooting content displays in the All Search Results area.

396 Chapter 4 Problem solving

 Figure 4-34 WISE Search results

Method 3: Search for error codes using the Product Detail Page
Use the WISE Product Detail Page (PDP) to find error code troubleshooting procedures using the
following steps.

1. On the WISE home page, enter a printer model number (for example, M606) in the Go to a Product
Detail page dialog box.

TIP: To find a PDP from a list of products by product type, select the …or select your product from
a list item just below the dialog box.

Figure 4-35 WISE PDP dialog box

2. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example, HP LaserJet Enterprise
M606 series) in the list.

NOTE: Selecting the series item from the drop-down list is recommended for the most accurate
search return.

How to search WISE for printer information and documentation 397

 Figure 4-36 WISE PDP drop-down list

3. Type the error code (for example, 13.E1.D3) in the Error Code Lookup field, and then select the search
icon.

Figure 4-37 WISE PDP search

1 2

4. The error code troubleshooting content displays in the All Search Results area.

Figure 4-38 WISE PDP search results

398 Chapter 4 Problem solving

Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP)
Learn how to access WISE by accessing the HP Channel Services Delivery Platform (CSDP) if you are an
HP Channel Partner.

IMPORTANT: A Partner Admin must requested access, via the CSDP portal, to create a new user
before you can sign into the CDSP portal.

1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

Figure 4-39 CSDP sign-in page

2. On the CSDP home page, click the Knowledge and Training item.

TIP: Use the Knowledge and Training item at the top of the CSDP home page (callout 1), or the
Knowledge and Training action icon (callout 2).

Figure 4-40 CSDP portal home page

1

Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP) 399

 3. Select HP Technical Documentation on the Knowledge and Training page to open the WISE portal
home page.

Figure 4-41 CSDP portal HP Knowledge and Training page

4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Figure 4-42 WISE portal home page

Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal)

Learn how to access WISE by accessing the HP Partner Portal if you are an HP Channel Partner.

NOTE: If this is your first visit to the HP Partner Portal, you will be asked to create an account. Follow
the setup directions using your HP Partner credentials.

View a video of how to access WISE for HP channel partners

1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

Figure 4-43 HP Partner Portal sign-in page

400 Chapter 4 Problem solving

2. On the HP Partner Portal home page, click the Services & Support item.

Figure 4-44 HP Partner Portal home page

3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.

Figure 4-45 HP Partner Portal Service & Support page

Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal) 401

 4. Select the Technical Documentation item.

Figure 4-46 HP Partner Portal Technical Support (WISE)page

5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Figure 4-47 WISE portal home page

Control panel messages document (CPMD)

Learn about the printer control panel messages document (CPMD).

NOTE: A complete CPMD is not included in this service manual.

Check the HP Web Interactive Search Engine (WISE) for more information.

Error codes (types and structure)

Error codes and control-panel messages display on the printer control panel to indicate the current
printer status or situations that might require action. Error codes are numerical, or alphanumerical, and
have a set structure with six characters (example: 13.WX.YZ).

402 Chapter 4 Problem solving

● The first two characters are numeric and represent the system component that is causing the error.
For example, in error code 10.22.15, 10 = Supplies for HP LaserJets.

● The remaining four characters (W, X, Y, and Z values) further define the error.

HP LaserJet and HP PageWide Enterprise error codes are documented in the control panel message
document (CPMD) for each printer.

The CPMD is a comprehensive list of error codes, diagnostic and troubleshooting steps to clear or
resolve the error, and other helpful information such as service mode pins and part numbers.

The CPMD is continually updated and republished with the latest information for the following error
codes.

Table 4-3 ERROR CODES: The first two characters

Error code System Component System Error Description

10.WX.YZ Supplies (LaserJet) Supply error or supply memory error.

11.WX.YZ Real-time clock Internal error with the clock on the formatter.

13.WX.YZ Jam (LaserJet) Paper jam or open door jam error.

15.WX.YZ Jam (PageWide) Paper jam or open door jam error.

17.WX.YZ Supplies (PageWide) Supply error or supply memory error.

20.WX.YZ Printer memory Insufficient memory or buffering error.

21.WX.YZ Page Page complexity causing a decompression error

when trying to process job.

30.WX.YZ Scanner Flatbed scanner error occurring inside the unit.

31.WX.YZ Document feeder Document feeder, scanner, or jam error.

32.WX.YZ Backup, restore, or reset Backup, restore, or reset notification or error.

33.WX.YZ Security Backup, Disk, EFI BIOS, Firmware integrity

(SureStart), or Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
notification or error.

40.WX.YZ Input/Output (I/O) Partition manager, secure erase, or USB

accessory error.

41.WX.YZ Fuser, Laser scanner, or Paper path Miscellaneous error including general and
misprint or mismatch errors typically involving
(but not limited to) the fuser, the laser scanner,
or the paper path.

42.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving the Event Log, Shell,

System Manager, or other component.

44.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving a digital sending

component.

45.WX.YZ OXPd/Web Kit (PageWide) Informational notifications involving the OXPd

Web Kit (communications log).

46.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) Engine communication error.

47.WX.YZ Firmware Job parser or printer calibration error.

48.WX.YZ Firmware PJA job accounting, job management, or job

pipeline error.

49.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware communication error.

Error codes (types and structure) 403

 Table 4-3 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)

Error code System Component System Error Description

50.WX.YZ Fuser (LaserJet) Fuser error.

51.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner beam error.

52.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner startup error.

54.WX.YZ Sensor Sensor error (not jam related).

55.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller communication error.

56.WX.YZ Paper handling (LaserJet) Paper input/output or accessory error.

57.WX.YZ Fan Fan error.

58.WX.YZ Sensor Engine sensor failure.

59.WX.YZ Motor (LaserJet) Motor error.

60.WX.YZ Tray motor error (LaserJet) Tray lifting or pick up error.

61.WX.YZ Engine (PageWide) Print engine error with the 8–bit data package.

62.WX.YZ System (LaserJet) LaserJet internal system error.

Print bar (PageWide) PageWide print system error.

63.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) General engine error (electrical, communication,

etc.).

65.WX.YZ Connector Output accessory connection error.

66.WX.YZ Output accessory Output accessory error.

67.WX.YZ Input accessory Input accessory connection error

69.WX.YZ Duplexer Duplexer error.

70.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller firmware error.

76.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) Power supply fluctuations causes formatter and

DC controller communication issue and results
them not to be in synchronization.

80.WX.YZ Managed device Embedded Jetdirect error.

81.WX.YZ Near Field Communication (NFC) Wireless, Bluetooth or internal EIO error.

82.WX.YZ Memory (hard disk, EMMC, etc.) Disk hardware error.

90.WX.YZ Internal diagnostics Internal test of systems (i.e. disk, CPB, display) or
interconnection error.

98.WX.YZ Hard disk Hard disk partition error.

99.WX.YZ Firmware installer Remote Firmware Upgrade (RFU), firmware install

(engine or accessory), or disk error.

Image-quality troubleshooting guide (IQTG)

For more information about image-quality troubleshooting, see the following topic.

NOTE: A complete IQTG is not included in this service manual.

404 Chapter 4 Problem solving

Click here to see the Image Quality Troubleshooting Guide (IQTG) for this printer.

Image-quality troubleshooting guide (IQTG) 405

 5 Control panel menus

You can perform basic printer setup by using the Settings menu. Use the HP Embedded Web Server for
more advanced printer setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the printer IP address or
host name in the address bar of a web browser.

Pre-boot menu options

The Pre-boot menus are available prior to the printer initializing.

CAUTION: The Format Disk option (printers with a hard-disk drive only) performs a disk initialization
for the entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be
completely lost. HP does not recommend this action.

TIP: The Pre-boot menu can be remotely accessed by using a telnet network protocol to establish an
administration connection to the printer. See Remote Admin.

Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel

Learn how to open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 5-1 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

406 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

2. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.

Figure 5-2 Pre-boot menu

Table 5-1 Pre-boot screen buttons

Use this button to see more information about a selected item.

Use this button to scroll up through menu items.

Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.

Use this button to scroll down through menu items.

Use this button to go back to the previous menu.

Not used.

Use this button to exit a diagnostic test.

Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 407

 3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Pre-boot menu.

4. Touch the OK button to select a menu item.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 5-3 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

2. Use the button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then touch the OK button.

3. Use the button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button.

4. Use the button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button to select it.

5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then touch the OK button.

NOTE: The printer will initialize.

NOTE: Some of the pre-boot options in the following tables are not supported by the current version
of the printer firmware and are included for information only. Future versions of firmware will support
these options.

Table 5-2 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Pre-boot menu

and continues the normal boot process.

If a selection is not made in the initial menu within

30 seconds, the printer returns to a normal boot (the
same as selecting Continue).

If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout

does not apply.

Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is

required to open the Pre-boot menu.

408 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-2 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator This item navigates to the Administrator submenus.

If authentication is required (and the user is not

already signed in) the Sign In prompt displays. The
user is required to sign in.

Download Network This item initiates a Pre-boot firmware download

process. A USB Thumbdrive option will work on all
USB FutureSmart printers. USB or Network connections
are not currently supported.
USB
Thumbdrive

Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk
partitions.

CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item

removes all data.

A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.

The system is not bootable after this action and

a 99.09.67 error displays on the control panel. A
firmware download must be performed to return
the system to a bootable state.

Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data
except the firmware repository where the master
firmware bundle is downloaded and saved).

CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item

removes all data except the firmware repository. A
delete confirmation prompt is not provided.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer

configurations and settings to factory defaults
(customer configurations and settings are lost).

This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing

the firmware image from the active directory
without having to download new firmware code
(printer remains bootable).

Change Select this item to set or change the administrator

Password password.

Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a

password from the Administrator menu. Before the
password is actually cleared, a message will be
shown asking to confirm that the password should
be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm the
action.

When the confirmation prompt displays, press the

OK button to clear the password.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 409
 Table 5-3 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Clear disk Select the Clear disk item to enable using an
external device for job storage. Job storage is
normally enabled only for the Boot device. This will
be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error is displayed.

Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new
secure disk to this printer.

The secure disk already locked to this printer will

remain accessible to this printer. Use this function
to have more than one encrypted disk accessible by
the printer when using them interchangeably.

The data stored on the secure disk locked to this

printer always remains accessible to this printer.

Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure
disk in an unlocked mode for a single service event.
The secure disk that is already locked to this printer
will remain accessible to this printer and uses the
old disk's encryption password with the new disk.

The secure disk that is already locked to this printer

remains accessible to this printer.

Clear Disk Pwd Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the
non-secure disk and clear the password associated
with the yet-to-be installed secure disk.

CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be

permanently inaccessible.

Retain Password Select the Retain Password item to use the non-
secure disk for this session only, and then search
for the missing secure disk in future sessions.

Boot Device Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase
command is a one-pass overwrite, which erases the
entire disk including firmware. The disk remains an
encrypted disk.

Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically

Unlock erase all data on the disk and unlock the disk to
allow a user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. It erases the encryption key. The
encryption key is erased, so the disk becomes a non-
encrypted disk.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.

410 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-4 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal
Device device or get a status about the internal device.

Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase
command erases the entire disk, including firmware.
The disk remains an encrypted disk.

Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically

Unlock erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to
allow the user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The HP High
Performance Secure Hard Disk is erased.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.

External Select the External Device item to erase the

Device external device or get status about the external
device.

Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled.

The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire

disk, including firmware. The disk remains an
encrypted disk.

Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically

Unlock erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to
allow a user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The encryption key is
erased, so the disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.

Table 5-5 Pre-boot menu options (4 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode The network can be configured to obtain the
[DHCP] network settings from a DHCP server or as static.
NOTE: This
configuration is Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition
only active when from the DHCP server.
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 411
 Table 5-5 Pre-boot menu options (4 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

IP Mode Use this item to manually assign the network

[STATIC] addresses.

IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses.

Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask.

Default Use this item to manually enter the default

Gateway gateway.

Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings.

Table 5-6 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Startup Options Select the Startup Options item to specify options
that can be set for the next time the printer is
turned on and initializes to the Ready state.

Show Revision Not currently functional: Select the Show Revision

item to allow the printer to initialize and show the
firmware version when the printer reaches the
Ready state.

Once the printer power is turned on the next time,

the Show Revision item is unchecked so that the
firmware revision is not shown.

Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address
and all customer settings. (This item also returns
all settings to factory defaults.)

NOTE: Items in the Service menu are not reset.

Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed
third-party applications.

Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to skip the printer
calibration for the very next power-initialization
cycle only.

Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock

the Service menu access (both in the Pre-boot
menu and the Device Maintenance menu).

Service personnel must have the administrator

remove the Lock Service setting before they can
open the Service menu.

Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk/

ScanVolume during startup.

412 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-6 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the

printer to initialize as if it is the first time it has
been turned on.

For example, the user is prompted to configure

first-time settings like date/time, language, and
other settings.

Select this item so that it is enabled for the next

time the printer power is turned on.

When the printer power is turned on the next time,

this item is unchecked so that the pre-configured
settings are used during configuration, and the
first-time setting prompt is not used.

Embedded Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable

Jetdirect Off the embedded HP Jetdirect.

By default this item is unchecked so that

HP Jetdirect is always enabled.

WiFi Accessory Select the WiFi Accessory item to enable the

wireless accessory.

Table 5-7 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Diagnostics Diagnostic items are

useful to diagnose
hardware components
and their interface
connections. Use these
items to troubleshoot
specific hardware
components, and the
interface between
them and other
components.

Memory Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run

item to exclude the
Memory diagnostic
when executing
multiple diagnostics.

Short Use the Short item to

select a brief memory
test.

NOTE: This test

requires about four
minutes to execute.

Long Use the Long item

to select an extended
memory test.

NOTE: This test

requires about twenty
minutes to execute.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 413
 Table 5-7 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Disk Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run

item to exclude the
Disk diagnostic when
executing multiple
diagnostics.

Short Use the Short item to

select a brief firmware
self-test.

NOTE: This test

requires about two or
three minutes to
execute.

Long Use the Long item

to select an extended
firmware self-test.

NOTE: This test

requires about sixty
minutes to execute.

Optimized Use the Optimized

item to select a test
that checks the active
sectors on the disk.

NOTE: This test

requires about thirty
minutes to execute.

Raw Use the Raw item

to select a test that
checks every sector on
the disk.

NOTE: This test

requires about fifty
minutes to execute.

Smart Use the Smart item

to select a very brief
test that checks the
drive self-monitoring
analysis and reporting
technology (SMART)
status—the drive
detects and reports
reliability indicators
to help anticipate
disk failures (SMART
status).

CPB Use the CPB item to

verify the integrity of
the copy processor
board (CPB) and
the formatter PCA
connections.

414 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-7 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Interconnect Use the Interconnect

item to verify the
integrity of the
interconnect PCA (ICB)
and its connections.

Run Selected Select the Run

Selected item to
execute a selected
test.

NOTE: If more than

one test is selected,
they are executed in
sequence.

Table 5-8 Pre-boot menu options (7 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to
access to the printer Pre-boot menu remotely, and to
navigate the menu selections from a remote location.

IMPORTANT: A Remote Admin connection must be

initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.

This person will also need to provide a randomly

generated PIN to the remote service technician.
NOTE: For more information about using the
Remote Admin function, see Remote Admin.

Stop Telnet

Refresh IP

System Triage Copy Logs If the device will not boot to the Ready state, or the
diagnostic log feature found in the Troubleshooting
menu is not accessible, then use the System Triage
item to copy the diagnostic logs to a USB flash drive
at the next printer start up.

The files can then be sent to HP to help diagnose the

problem.

Change Svc Use this item to change the Service menu personal
PWD identification number (PIN).

Reset Svc PWD If the Service menu personal identification number

(PIN) has been changed. Use this item to reset it to the
original PIN.

Service Tools Reset Password Use this item to reset the Pre-boot administrator
password.

Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these

values.

Developer Tools Netexec

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 415
 Remote Admin
The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu (BIOS environment). The
printer functions as a telnet server which uses the telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any
computer (with telnet installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and
interact with the Pre-boot menu.

IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the Pre-boot menu, for security
reasons the Remote Admin connection must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.

This section describes the following Remote Admin items.

Required software and network connection

Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network protocol is installed, and
enabled, on the remote telnet client computer.

NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for computers using a
Windows® operating system.

HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows based system, however, there are
other operating systems that support the telnet network protocol. For information about enabling and
configuring the telnet network protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that
operating system.

Telnet client
All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client installed, however, the telnet
client function might not be enabled by default.

NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 7 Enterprise® operating system.
Screens and menu selections might vary slightly for other operating systems.

1. Use the Start menu to open the Control Panel, and then click the Programs item to select it.

Figure 5-4 Open the Control Panel

416 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 2. Click the Turn Windows features on or off item to select it.

Figure 5-5 Turn Windows features on or off

3. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check box is not checked, click the
box to select it, and then click the OK button.

TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is already enabled. Click the
Cancel button.

Figure 5-6 Enable the telnet client feature

Network connection
The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the printer for the Remote Admin
function to operate. This means that the telnet client computer must be on the same network as the
printer. The Remote Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or other remote
access network security programs.

Network connection 417

 If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a virtual private network
(VPN) connection to the network.

Connect a remote connection

Learn how to connect a remote connection using telnet.

Start the telnet server function at the printer

For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present
at the printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.

NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how
the printer is configured.

1. Turn the printer on.

2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a "1/8" with an underscore displays, touch
the middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot menu.

3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 5-7 Select the +3:Administrator item

4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 5-8 Select the +A:Remote Admin item

5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 5-9 Select the 1:Start Telnet item

418 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

6. Do one of the following

● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to step 7.

Figure 5-10 Telnet connecting message

● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.

Figure 5-11 Telnet error message

a. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.

b. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.

○ The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is configured to use
DHCP instead.

○ The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP address is incorrect.

c. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.

7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the
information on this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.

NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.

● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.

● Port: The standard telnet port (23).

● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).

Figure 5-12 Telnet server function initialized

Start the telnet server function at the printer 419

 Start the telnet client function at the remote computer
The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote computer to the printer.

1. From the Start menu click Run to open a dialog box, type cmd in the Open field, and then click the
OK button to open a Windows command window.

Figure 5-13 Open a command window

2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 5-14 Start a telnet session

3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key.

NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was displayed in step 7 in Start the
telnet server function at the printer.

TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall
or on a different network that the remote telnet client computer. See Network connection.

420 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Figure 5-15 Establish a telnet connection

4. Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7 in Start the telnet server function at the printer at the
prompt, and then press the Enter key.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer
terminates the Remote Admin connection. The Remote Admin feature must be re-initiated at the
printer. See Start the telnet server function at the printer.

Figure 5-16 Enter the PIN

5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered and the Remote Admin connection is
successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see Pre-boot menu options.

NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecure telnet network protocol connection,
the following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer.

● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer 421

 Figure 5-17 Remote Admin window

Disconnect a remote connection

Learn how to disconnect a remote connection.

The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel or the remote telnet
client computer.

NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin connection from the remote
telnet client computer.

1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the
+3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 5-18 Access the administrator menu

422 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote Admin item, and then press
the Enter key.

Figure 5-19 Access the remote admin menu

3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the
Enter key. The Remote Admin connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer
terminates.

IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present
at the printer do the following:

● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item,
and then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.

Figure 5-20 Terminate the telnet connection

Reports menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select Reports.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Reports menu 423

 Table 5-9 Reports menu

First level Second level Values Description

Configuration/Status Pages Settings Menu Map Print Shows a map of the entire
control panel system and
View the selected values for each
setting.

Current Settings Page Print Shows a summary of the

current settings for the
View printer. This might be helpful
if you plan to make changes
and need a record of the
present configuration.

Configuration Page Print Shows the printer settings

and installed accessories.
View

HP Flex Build Configuration Print Shows the Flex Buide

Page printer settings and installed
View accessories.

NOTE: 877/826/786/731
printers only.

How to Connect Page Print Shows the network

information typically needed
View to connect the printer to a
network.

Supplies Status Page Print Shows the approximate

remaining life for the
View supplies; reports statistics
on total number of pages
and jobs processed, serial
number, page counts, and
maintenance information.

HP provides approximations
of the remaining life for
the supplies as a customer
convenience. The actual
remaining supply levels
might be different from the
approximations provided.

Usage Page Print Shows a count of all paper

sizes that have passed
View through the printer; lists
whether they were simplex,
duplex, monochrome, or color;
and reports the page count.

File Directory Print Shows the file name and

folder name for files that are
View stored in the printer memory.

Web Services Status Page Print Shows the detected Web

Services for the printer.
View

Color Usage Job Log Print Shows color jobs completed

by the printer.
View

424 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Table 5-9 Reports menu (continued)

First level Second level Values Description

Fax Reports (MFP fax models Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes
only) that have been sent from or
View received by this printer.

Billing Codes Report Print Provides a list of billing codes

that have been used for
View outgoing faxes. This report
shows how many sent faxes
were billed to each code.

Blocked Fax List Print A list of phone numbers that

are blocked from sending
View faxes to this printer.

Speed Dial List Print Shows the speed dials that

have been set up for this
View printer.

Fax Call Report Print A detailed report of the last

fax operation, either sent or
View received.

Other Pages Demonstration Page Print Prints a demonstration page

RGB Samples Print Prints color samples for

different RGB values. Use
the samples as a guide for
matching printed colors.

CMYK Samples Print Prints color samples for

different CMYK values. Use
the samples as a guide for
matching printed colors.

PCL Font List Print Prints the available PCL fonts.

PS Font List Print Prints the available PS fonts.

Secure Drum Data Erase Print Prints the secure drum data
erase pattern to overwrite
any residual image data that
might be left on the drum
from the previous print job.

Settings menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-10 Settings menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

General Date/Time Date/Time Format Date Format DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/Time
Settings Settings menu to
MMM/DD/YYYY specify the date
and time and
YYYY/MMM/DD to configure date/
time settings.

Settings menu 425

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) Select the format

that the printer
24 hours uses to show the
date and time, for
example 12-hour
format or 24-hour
format.

Date/Time Date Select the time Select the time

zone from a list. zone, date, and
time that the
printer uses.

Time Select the date

from a pop-up
calendar.

Time Zone Select the time

from a pop-up
keypad.

Energy Sleep Schedule A list of + (Add) Use to configure

Settings scheduled the printer
events Edit to automatically
displays. wake up or go to
Delete sleep at specific
times on specific
days. Using this
feature saves
energy.

NOTE: You must

configure the date
and time settings
before you can use
this feature.

New event Event Type Select whether to

add or edit a Wake
event or a Sleep
event, and then
select the time
and the days for
the wake or sleep
event.

Time Set the wake or

sleep event time
parameters.

Event Days Select days of the Set the wake or

week from a list. sleep event day
parameters.

426 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Sleep Settings Sleep After Range: 1 to 110 Set the number

Inactivity minutes of minutes after
which the printer
Shut Down Default = 0 enters Sleep or
minutes Auto Off mode.
Touch the existing
number to open
the virtual keypad,
and then increase
or decrease
the number of
minutes.

Display Display Brightness Manual The Manual Use to specify the

Settings setting uses a intensity of the
slider to manually LCD control panel
control the display display.
brightness.

System Sound On* Use to specify

whether you hear
Off a sound when you
touch the screen
or press buttons
on the control
panel.

Language Settings Language Select from a Use to select a

list of languages different language
that the printer for control panel
supports. messages and
specify the default
keyboard layout.
When you select a
new language, the
keyboard layout
automatically
changes to match
the factory default
for the selected
language.

Keyboard Each language has Select the default

Layout a default keyboard keyboard layout
layout. To change that matches the
Flow models it, select from a list language you want
only of layouts. to use.

Information Show connection Use this menu

Screen information* item to display or
hide connection
Hide connection information on the
information Home screen.

DisplayDate and Yes* Select whether to

Time display or hide the
No date and time on
the control panel
Home screen.

Settings menu 427

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Job Status Fewer* Use this feature

Notifications to control how
More many job status
notifications
appear while a job
is proceeding

● If the setting
is Fewer,
there will only
be a
notification to
indicate the
job has been
added to the
job queue
(except Fa,
which always
indicates
success or
failure).

● If the setting
is More, there
will be status
notifications
while the job
is proceeding
including a
completion
notification.

Inactivity Timeout Range: 10-300 Specifies the

seconds amount of time
that elapses
Default = 60 between any
seconds activity on the
control panel and
when the printer
resets to the
default settings.
When the timeout
expires, the control
panel display
returns to the
Home menu, and
any user signed in
to the printer is
signed out.

428 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Clearable On Use this feature

Warnings to set the period
Job* that a clearable
warning displays
on the control
panel. If the
On setting is
selected, clearable
warnings appear
until the Clearable
Warnings button is
pressed. If the Job
setting is selected,
clearable warnings
stay on the display
during the job
that generated
the warning and
disappear from
the display when
the next job starts.

Continuable Auto-continue (10 Use this option

Events seconds)* to configure the
printer behavior
Touch OK to when the printer
continue encounters certain
errors. If the
Auto-continue (10
seconds) option
is selected, the
job will continue
after 10 seconds.
If the Touch OK
to continue option
is selected, the
job will stop and
require the user
to touch the
OK button before
continuing.

Enable Enabled* Use this feature

Device USB to enable or
Disabled disable the USB
port, which allows
connecting to a
computer by using
a USB device.

Settings menu 429

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Jam Auto* This printer

Recovery provides a jam
Off recovery feature
that reprints
On jammed pages.
Select one of the
following options:

Auto: The printer

attempts to
reprint jammed
pages when
sufficient memory
is available. This is
the default setting.

Off: The printer

does not attempt
to reprint jammed
pages. Because no
memory is used
to store the most
recent pages,
performance is
optimal.

NOTE: When
using this option, if
the printer runs
out of paper and
the job is being
printed on both
sides, some pages
can be lost.

On: The printer

always reprints
jammed pages.
Additional memory
is allocated to
store the last few
pages printed. This
might cause a
decrease in overall
performance.

Auto Enabled The printer

Recovery attempts to
Disabled* reprint jammed
pages when
sufficient memory
is available. This is
the default setting.

430 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Enable Disabled Use the Enable

AutoSend AutoSend menu
Enabled* to enable or
disable the
AutoSned feature.
The AutoSend
feature enables
your product
to periodically
send product
configuration
information
including serial
number, event
logs, page usage
counts, and
supplies status
information to HP
web addresses
(URLs), or
email addresses.
Information sent
to HP is used to
improve products
and services, and
to monitor the
product if you
have a relationship
with HP that
provides you
serives such as
proactive cartidge
replacement,
pay-per-page
contracts, support
agreements, or
usage tracking.

Hold Off Print Enabled* Enable this feature

Job if you want to
Disabled prevent print jobs
from starting while
a user is initiating
a copy job from
the control panel.
Held print jobs
start printing after
the copy job is
finished, provided
that no other copy
job is in the print
queue.

Copy/Print Copy Image Preview Display a preview

Settings of the image
before printing it.

Enable Print Enabled Enables the printer

from USB to open a file from
Drive Disabled* a USB drive.

Settings menu 431

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Manage Job Sort Order Job Name* This option

Stored Jobs allows you list
Date the jobs either
alphabetically or
chronologically.

Retain Temporary Do not retain* Sets which

Jobs After Reboot temporary jobs will
Personal jobs only be retained in the
event of a printer
All temporary jobs reboot.

Temporary Job 1-300 Configure global

Storage Limit settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored
in the printer
memory.

The Temporary
Job Storage Limit
feature specifies
the number of
temporary jobs
that can be stored
on the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.

Temporary Stored Off* Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
30 minutes that are stored
in the printer
1 hour memory.

4 hours The Temporary

Stored Job
1 day Retention feature
specifies the
3 days number of
temporary jobs
1 week that can be stored
on the printer. The
4 weeks maximum allowed
value is 300.

Standard Stored Off* Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
30 minutes that are stored
in the printer
1 hour memory.

4 hours The Temporary

Stored Job
1 day Retention feature
specifies the
3 days number of
standard jobs that
1 week can be stored on
the printer. The
4 weeks maximum allowed
value is 300.

432 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Default Print Number of Copies Range: Sets the default

Options 1-32000 number of copies
for a copy
Default = 1 job. This default
applies when the
Copy function or
the Quick Copy
function is initiated
from the printer
Home screen.

Paper Selection Select from a Configures the

list of sizes default paper size
that the used for print jobs.
printer
supports.

Default Custom X Dimension Range: 3-8.5 Configures the

Paper Size inches default paper size
that is used when
Default = 8.5 the user selects
inches Custom as the
paper size for a
print job.

Y Dimension Range: 5-14

inches

Default = 14
inches

Use Inches Enabled*

Disabled

Output Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate

whether the
2-sided original document
is printed on one
or both sides,
and whether the
copies should be
printed on one or
both sides. For
example, select
the 1-sided original,
2-sided output
option when the
original is printed
on one side, but
you want to make
two-sided copies.

Fit to Page (PDF) On Use this feature to

reduce or enlarge
Off* the image/content
of each page to
fit the currently
selected paper
size.

Settings menu 433

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Fit to Page (TIFF, On* Use this feature to

BMP, JPG, PNG) reduce or enlarge
Off the image/content
of each page to
fit the currently
selected paper
size.

Quality and Speed Quick View

Normal*

Fine Lines

434 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Edge Control Automatic* The Edge Control

setting determines
Off how edges are
rendered. Edge
Light Control has
two components:
Normal adaptive
halftoning and
Maximum trapping. Adaptive
halftoning
increases edge
sharpness.
Trapping reduces
the effect
of color-plane
misregistration by
overlapping the
edges of adjacent
objects slightly..

● Automatic:
The printer
uses the
default Edge
Control
setting.

● Off: Turns off

both trapping
and adaptive
halftoning.

● Light: Sets
trapping at a
minimal level,
and adaptive
halftoning is
on.

● Normal:
Trapping is at
a medium
level and
adaptive
halftoning is
on.

● Maximum:
Trapping is at
the highest
level, and
adaptive
halftoning is
on.

Settings menu 435

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Halftone Automatic* Use this feature to

control the default
Smooth halftone screen
that the printer
Detail uses for print jobs.

Select from the

following options:

● Automatic:
The halftone
screen
frequency is
picked
automatically
by the printer
to provide the
best print
quality for a
range of
content.

● Smooth: Low
frequency
halftone
screen
optimized for
printing
smooth
gradients and
vector
graphics.

● Detail: High
frequency
halftone
screen
optimized for
printing
detailed
content, such
as
photographs.

436 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Neutral Grays Automatic* Neutral Grays

determine the
Black Only method for
creating gray
CMYK Gray colors in text,
graphics, and
photographs.

● Automatic:
The printer
combines
colors for
each
document
element to
provide high-
quality output
for most
color printing
needs.

● Black Only:
Generates
neutral colors
(black and
shades of
gray) by using
only the black
color. This
guarantees
neutral colors
without a
color cast
(tint of a
particular
color).

● CMYK Gray:
Generates
neutral colors
(black and
shades of
gray) by
combining
the printer
colors. This
method
produces
smoother
gradients and
transitions to
other colors,
and it
produces the
darkest black.

Settings menu 437

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Envelope Off* Use this feature

Rotate to enable rotation
90 Degrees when printing on
envelopes.
180 degrees
Envelopes are
usually loaded
into the printer
as short-edge
feed. However,
if the Envelope
Rotate function is
enabled, you can
load envelopes as
long-edge feed.
The printer rotates
the image to be
printed so that it
appears correctly
on the envelopes.

● Off (default):
Load
envelopes in
short-edge
feed
direciton.

● 90 degrees:
Load
envelopes in
long-edge
feed
direction.

● 180 degrees:
Load
envelopes in
short-edge
feed direction
with the flap
on the bottom
side.

PCL and Suppress Blank Off* When set to On,

PostScript Pages any blank pages
Settings On will not be printed.

Courier Font Regular* Select which

version of the
Dark Courier font you
want to use. The
factory default
setting is Regular,
which uses an
average stroke
width. The Dark
setting can be
used if a heavier
Courier font is
needed.

438 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Print PS Errors Enabled Use this feature

to select whether
Disabled* a PostScript (PS)
error page is
printed when the
printer encounters
a PS error.

Print PDF Errors Enabled Selects whether a

PDF error page is
Disabled* printed when the
printer encounters
a PDF error.

Personality Auto* Configures the

default print
PCL language or
personality for the
PS printer. Normally
you should not
PDF change the printer
language. If you
change the setting
to a specific
printer language,
the printer does
not automatically
switch from one
language to
another unless
specific software
commands are
sent to it.

PCL Font Settings Font Source Internal Selects the font

source for the
Disk resident user-soft default
font. The list of
available options
varies depending
on the installed
printer options.

Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the

font number for
Default = 0 the user-soft
default font using
the source that
is specified in
the Font Source
menu. The printer
assigns a number
to each font and
lists it on the PCL
font list. The font
number displays in
the Font # column
of the printout.

Settings menu 439

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Font Pitch Range: 0.44-99.99 If the Font Source

option and the
Default = 10 Font Number
setting indicate a
contour font, then
use this feature
to select a default
pitch (for a fixed-
spaced font).

PCL Settings Form Length Range: 5-128 Controls the PCL

print-command
Default = 60 options. PCL is
a set of printer
commands that
HP developed to
provide access to
printer features.

Use the Form

Length feature
to select the
user-soft default
vertical form
length.

Orientation Portrait* Select the

orientation that is
Landscape most often used
for copy or scan
originals. Select
the Portrait option
if the short edge is
at the top or select
the Landscape
option if the long
edge is at the top.

Symbol Set Select from a list Select any one of

of symbol sets. several available
symbol sets from
the control panel.
A symbol set
is a unique
grouping of all the
characters in a
font. The factory
default value
for this option
is PC-8. Either
PC-8 or PC-850
are recommended
for line-draw
characters.

440 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Append CR No* Configure whether

to LF a carriage return
Yes (CR) is appended
to each line feed
(LF) encountered
in backwards-
compatible PCL
jobs (pure text, no
job control). Select
Yes to append the
carriage return.
The default setting
is No. Some
environments,
such as UNIX,
indicate a new line
by using only the
line-feed control
code. This option
allows the user
to append the
required carriage
return to each line
feed.

Media Standard* Use to select

Source and maintain input
Mapping Classic trays by number
when you are not
using the printer
driver, or when the
software program
has no option for
tray selection. The
following options
are available:

Standard: Tray
numbering is
based on newer
HP LaserJet
models.

Classic: Tray
numbering is
based on
HP LaserJet 4 and
older models.

Settings menu 441

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Print Quality Adjust paper types Select from a list If print quality
of paper types problems occur,
use this menu to
Reset Paper Types adjust the Print
Mode for the
paper type in use.
If a user-defined
type (enabled in
the Embedded
Web Server) has
preprinted content
that makes the
sides of the paper
different, set the
paper type as
Marked Paper.

Customize Colors RGB: Office (sRGB)

NOTE: Color
CMYK: SWOP printers only.

Manage Use Requested Exclusively* Controls how the

Trays Tray printer handles
First jobs that have
specified a
specific input tray.
Two options are
available:

Exclusively: The
printer never
selects a different
tray when the user
has indicated that
a specific tray
should be used,
even if that tray is
empty.

First: The printer

pulls from another
tray if the
specified tray
is empty, even
though the
user specifically
indicated a tray for
the job.

442 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Manually Feed Always* Indicate whether

Prompt a prompt should
Unless loaded appear when the
type or size for a
job does not match
the specified
tray and the
printer pulls from
the multipurpose
tray instead.
Two options are
available:

Always: A prompt
always displays
before using the
multipurpose tray.

Unless loaded: A
message displays
only if the
multipurpose tray
is empty.

Size/Type Prompt Display* Controls whether

the tray
Do not display configuration
message displays
whenever a
tray is closed.
Two options are
available:

Display: Shows the

tray configuration
message when a
tray is closed. The
user is able to
configure the tray
settings directly
from this message.

Do not display:
Prevents the
tray configuration
message from
automatically
appearing.

Settings menu 443

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Use Another Tray Allow* Use to turn on

or off the control
Do not allow panel prompt to
select another tray
when the specified
tray is empty.
Two options are
available:

Enabled: When
this option is
selected, the user
is prompted either
to add paper to the
selected tray or to
choose a different
tray.

Disabled: When
this option is
selected, the
user is not
given the option
of selecting a
different tray. The
printer prompts
the user to add
paper to the tray
that was initially
selected.

Alternative Off* Use to load

Letterhead Mode letterhead or
On preprinted paper
into the tray the
same way for all
print jobs, whether
you are printing
to one side of
the sheet or to
both sides of the
sheet. When this
option is selected,
load the paper
as you would for
printing on both
sides. See the user
documentation
that came with
the printer for
instructions about
loading letterhead
for printing on both
sides. When this
option is selected,
the printer speed
slows to the
speed required for
printing on both
sides.

444 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Duplex Blank Automatic* Controls how the

Pages printer handles
Always two-sided jobs
(duplexing). Two
options are
available:

Auto: Enables
Smart Duplexing,
which instructs
the printer not
to process blank
pages.

Yes: Disables
Smart Duplexing
and forces the
duplexer to flip the
sheet of paper
even if it is
printed on only one
side. This might
be preferable for
certain jobs that
use paper types
such as letterhead
or prepunched
paper.

Image Rotation Left to right* The Image

Rotation setting
Right to left allows alternatives
affecting how
Alternate preprinted paper
is loaded into the
tray

NOTE: For
stapled print or
copy jobs, make
sure the Staple/
Collate setting
matches the
Image Rotation
setting as to which
side of paper (left
or right) you want
stapled. If these
setting do not
match each other,
you will need to
change the loading
orientation of the
paper so that the
job is stapled in the
correct spot.

Settings menu 445

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Override A4/Letter Yes* Prints on letter-size

paper when an A4
No job is sent but
no A4-size paper
is loaded in the
printer (or to print
on A4 paper when
a letter-size job
is sent but no
letter-size paper
is loaded). This
option will also
override A3 with
ledger-size paper
and ledger with
A3-size paper.

Unsupported Size Use default size Use this feature

Behavior automatically* to print documents
that are on a
Prompt for user paper size that the
response product does not
support

● Select Use
default size
automatically
to use the
paper size
selected in
Default Print
Options.

● Select
Prompt for
user
response to
be asked to
use the size
selected in
Default Print
Options or to
cancel the
job.

446 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Rotate Offset Automatic Use this feature

to separate each
NOTE: When set Off* copy by rotating
to Automatic, its position in
rotation does not the output bin.
occur if: Two options are
available:
● The tray is
specified in Off: Jobs are
the job and printed normally
the User with separating
Selected Tray each copy.
setting is set
to Exclusively. Automatic: Copies
are rotated
● The specified automatically.
bin in the job
does not
support both
orientations.

● The job is
uncollated.

● The job is
collated, but
only has one
sheet per
copy.

● The job has

mixed paper
size or type.

● The user
selects a
different
paper after
the job has
started.

● A job setting
works only
with a
specific
orientation.

● The Job
Offset setting
is available
and set to On.

Tray Priority Tray 4 You can set the

tray priority. If
Tray 3 first setting is
Tray 1, the printer
Tray 2 automatically
prints from Tray 1
Tray 1 after the current
tray runs out of
paper.

Settings menu 447

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Tray Protection NOTE: You can When this option

select all but one is chosen, the
of the trays. At selected tray will
least one tray be protected. This
must be prevents paper
unselected at all from being fed if
times Use Another Tray
is enabled. If you
Tray 4 select Tray 1, for
example, then Tray
Tray 3 1 is excluded when
using another tray.
Tray 2

Tray 1

Paper Out Action Auto Continue Specify the action

Time-Out the printer will take
when the paper
Auto Continue configured for the
Action print job does not
match the paper
loaded in the input
tray

Scan/Digital Scan+ Image Make optional* Use this menu to

Send Settings Preview configure settings
Require preview that affect scan
apps.
Disable preview

E-mail E-mail Setup Use to configure

Settings settings that
NOTE: Email apply to sending
Settings only documents
through email or
saving documents
to a folder on the
network or on a
USB multi-drive.

The E-mail
Setup Wizard
feature configures
the printer to
send scanned
images as email
attachments. To
open the printer
HP Embedded
Web Server and
set up the email
notification server,
enter the printer IP
address into a Web
browser.

448 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

job options for
Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Settings menu 449

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Network Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

Folder job options for
Settings Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

450 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

SharePoint Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

Settings job options for
Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Settings menu 451

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Scan to USB Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

Drive job options for
Settings Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

452 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Digital Allow Use of a DSS Disabled Configure how

Sending Server the printer
Software Enabled* interacts with the
Setup Allow Transfer to HP Digital Sending
New DSS server Software (DSS)
server. HP DSS
handles digital
sending tasks,
such as faxing,
emailing, and
sending scanned
documents to a
network folder
or USB storage
device.

Use the Allow Use

of a DSS Server
and Allow Transfer
to New DSS
server options
to configure the
printer to use
HP DSS.

Fax Internal Fax Line 1

Modem
Setup Line 2

Fax Send Image Preview

Settings

Fax Dialing Line Monitor Off These settings

Settings Volume control how the
Low* fax modem dials
the outgoing fax
High number when
faxes are sent.

Dialing Mode Tone*

Pulse

Redial 1-5 Minutes

Interval
Default = 5
minutes

Fax Send Fast*

Speed
Medium

Slow

Dialing Prefix

Detect Dial
Tone

Redial on Range: 0-9

Error
Default = 2

Settings menu 453

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Redial on No Range: 0-2

Answer
Default = 0

Redial on Range: 0-9

Busy
Default = 3

General Fax Send Fax Number Enabled If this feature

Settings Confirmation is enabled, you
Disabled* must enter the fax
number twice.

Fax Line Automatic*

Selection
Line 1

Line 2

PC Fax Send Enabled* Enables users

who have the
Disabled correct driver
installed to send
faxes through the
printer from their
computers.

Error Line 1* Enabled* When error-

Correction correction mode
Mode Line 2* Disabled is enabled
and an error
occurs during fax
transmission, the
printer sends or
receives the error
portion again.

Fax Header Prepend* Use to prepend

or overlay the fax
Overlay header page.

454 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Billing Code Enable Billing Off* When billing codes

Settings Codes are enabled, a
On prompt displays
that asks the
user to enter the
billing code for an
outgoing fax. This
prompt does not
appear if the Allow
users to edit billing
codes check box is
not checked.

You can also

use the billing
codes report in the
Reports menu to
view the list of the
billing codes that
have been used
for faxes that have
been sent from the
printer. The list is
grouped by billing
code and also
shows fax details.
This feature can be
used for billing or
usage tracking.

Default Specify a default

Billing Code billing code for
faxing. If you
specify a default
billing code, this
code displays in
the Billing Code
field when the
user sends an
outgoing fax. If this
field is blank, no
default billing code
is provided for the
user.

Minimum Range: 1-16 Specify the

Length required length of
Default = 1 the billing code.
Billing codes can
be between 1 and
16 characters long.

Allow users Off

to edit billing
codes On*

Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ring Volume Off Use to configure
Settings settings for
Low* receiving faxes.

High

Rings To Range: 1-6

Answer
Default = 1

Settings menu 455

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Fax Receive Fast*

Speed
Medium

Slow

Fax Printing Always store faxes If you have

Schedule concerns about
Always print faxes* the security of
private faxes, use
Use Fax Printing this feature to
Schedule store faxes rather
than having them
automatically
print. Open the Fax
Printing Schedule
sub-menu, and
then you can
choose to always
store faxes, always
print them, or you
can set up a
schedule for each
day of the week.

Schedule + (Add) Print incoming If you are using

faxes a fax printing
Touch this to Edit schedule, use this
set up a fax Store incoming menu to configure
printing Delete (trash faxes when to print
schedule if can) faxes.
you selected Time
the Use Fax
Printing Event Days
Schedule
option.

456 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Blocked Fax Fax Number The blocked fax

Numbers to Block list can contain
up to 30 numbers.
When the printer
receives a call
from one of
the blocked fax
numbers, it deletes
the incoming fax.
It also logs
the blocked fax
in the activity
log along with
job-accounting
information.

Add blocked
numbers: Enter a
fax number into
the Fax Number
to Block field, and
then touch the
arrow button to
add a new number
to the blocked fax
list.

To remove blocked
numbers: Select a
number and touch
the Delete button
to delete it from
the blocked fax list.

To clear all blocked

numbers: Touch
the Delete All
button to clear all
of the numbers
from the blocked
fax list.

You also can use

the Blocked Fax
List report in the
Information menu
to view the list of
the fax numbers
that have been
blocked on this
printer.

Settings menu 457

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Default Job Notification Do not notify* Configure

Options to receive
Notify when job notification about
completes the status of a
sent document.
Notify only if job
fails Do not notify:
Turns off this
feature.

Notify when
job completes:
Select to receive
notification for this
job only.

Notify only
if job fails:
Select to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully.

Print E-mail: Select

to receive the
E-mail* notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then enter the
email address for
the notification.

Include NOTE: When

Thumbnail sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a
thumbnail image
of the first page of
the fax in your
notification.

Notification Touch this text

E-mail field, provide the
address email address to
which you want
notifications sent,
and then touch the
OK button.

Stamp On Use this option to

Received add the date, time,
Faxes Off* sender’s phone
number, and page
number to each
page of the faxes
that this printer
receives.

458 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Fit to Page On* Use to shrink faxes

that are larger
Off than Letter-size or
A4-size so that
they can fit onto
a Letter-size or
A4-size page. If
this feature set
to Disabled, faxes
larger than Letter
or A4 will flow
across multiple
pages.

Paper Tray Automatic*

Select from a list

of the trays.

Out Sides 1-sided* Use to describe

the layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First
Page flips up select whether the
original document
is printed on one
side or both sides.

Fax Enable Fax Disabled* Use to forward

Forwarding Forwarding received faxes
Enabled to another fax
machine.

Type of Fax All faxes Use to select the

Job to type of fax jobs
Forward Sent faxes that you want
forwarded.
Received faxes*

Fax IP Fax
Forwarding
Method Internal Modem*

Fax Provide the

Forwarding forwarding phone
Number number, and then
touch the OK
button.

Clear Fax Clears all events

Activity Log from the fax
activity log.

Settings menu 459

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Manage Low Warning Black 0 %* Set the estimated

Supplies Thresholds Cartridge percentage at
0 %* which the printer
Cyan notifies you when
Cartridge 0 %* a toner cartridge is
very low.
Magenta 0 %*
Cartridge
10 %*
Yellow
Cartridge

Document
feeder kit

Low Warning On Displays a

Threshold message on the
Message Off control panel when
a cartridge is very
low.

Very Low Black Cartridge Stop

Behavior
Color Cartridges Continue

Document Feeder Prompt to continue

Kit

Staples Stop

Prompt to continue

Delay Very Stop Yellow Cartridge 0 After a supply

Low Message pages* reaches the very
Continue low state, the
Magenta warning message
Cartridge 0 pages* can be delayed by
a specified page
Cyan Cartridge 0 count.
pages*

Black Cartridge 0
pages*

Restrict Enable Use this feature

Color Use to enable, restrict,
Disable Color or disable color
printing or copying.
Color if allowed*

460 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Color/Black Auto Instructs the

Mix printer when
Mostly Color to switch
Pages between color
and monochrome
Mostly Black printing modes for
Pages the best overall
performance.

Auto: Uses the

mode that is
appropriate for
the first page
of the job. If
necessary, the
printer switches
modes during the
middle of a job and
then stays in that
mode until the job
is finished.

Mostly Color
Pages: The printer
uses color mode
for all jobs, even if
the job contains no
color pages.

Mostly Black
Pages: The printer
uses monochrome
mode until it
detects a color
page. The printer
switches back
to monochrome
mode when
it detects
a sequence
of several
monochrome
pages.

Settings menu 461

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Store Usage On supplies The Store Usage

Data Data provides
Not on supplies a way to
suppress the toner
cartridges from
storing most of
the information
gathered
exclusively for
the purpose of
understanding the
usage of the
printer. Select
the On supplies
setting to store
the data on the
toner cartridge
memory chip.
Select the Not
on supplies setting
to suppress the
information from
being stored on
the memory chip.

Supply Off* Select to

Protection permanently
Protect Supplies protect cartridges
so that they can
be used only in this
product or fleet of
products.

Cartridge Off* Set Authorized

Policy HP to allow
Authorized HP only genuine HP
cartridges to be
used in this
product.

Reset Document Feeder After replacing a

Supplies Kit supply kit, select it
from the list and
touch "Reset."

Manage Job Offset On

Stapler/
Stacker Off

Developer Use this menu

Options to configure
developer settings
for the product.

Networking Ethernet INFORMATION PRINT YES Yes: Prints a page

SECURITY that contains the
REPORT NO* current security
settings on the
HP Jetdirect print
server.

No: A security
settings page is
not printed.

462 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

TCP/IP HOST NAME Use the arrow An alphanumeric

buttons to edit the string, up to
host name. 32 characters,
used to identify
NPIXXXXXX* the printer. This
name is listed on
the HP Jetdirect
configuration
page. The default
host name is
NPIxxxxxx, where
xxxxxx is the
last six digits of
the LAN hardware
(MAC) address.

IPV4 CONFIG BOOTP Specifies the

SETTINGS METHOD method that TCP/
DHCP* IPv4 parameters
will be configured
AUTO IP on the HP Jetdirect
print server.
MANUAL
Bootp (Bootstrap
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration from
a BootP server.

DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration from
a DHCPv4 server.
If selected and
a DHCP lease
exists, the DHCP
Release menu and
the DHCP Renew
menu are available
to set DHCP lease
options.

Auto IP: Use

for automatic
link-local IPv4
addressing. An
address in the
form 169.254.x.x
is assigned
automatically.

If you set this

option to the
Manual setting,
use the Manual
Settings menu to
configure TCP/IPv4
parameters.

DHCP YES
RELEASE
NO*

Settings menu 463

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

DHCP YES
RENEW
NO*

PRIMARY RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
DEFAULT = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System
(DNS) Server.

Secondary Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.

IPV6 ENABLE OFF Use this item to

SETTINGS enable or disable
ON* IPv6 operation on
the print server.

Off: IPv6 is
disabled.

On: IPv6 is
enabled.

ADDRESS MANUAL Use this item

SETTINGS to enable
and manually
ENABLE configure a TCP/
IPv6 address.
ADDRESS

464 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

DHCPV6 ROUTER Router Specified:

POLICY SPECIFIED The stateful
auto-configuration
ROUTER method to be used
UNAVAILABLE* by the print server
is determined by
ALWAYS a router. The
router specifies
whether the print
server obtains
its address,
its configuration
information, or
both from a
DHCPv6 server.

Router
Unavailable: If
a router is
not available,
the print server
should attempt to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.

Always: Whether a
router is available,
the print server
always attempts to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.

PRIMARY RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
DEFAULT = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System
(DNS) Server.

SECONDARY RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
DEFAULT = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.

Settings menu 465

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

PROXY Specifies the proxy

SERVER server to be
used by embedded
applications in the
printer. A proxy
server is typically
used by network
clients for Internet
access. It caches
Web pages, and
provides a degree
of Internet security
for those clients.

To specify a
proxy server, enter
its IPv4 address
or fully-qualified
domain name. The
name can be up to
255 octets.

For some
networks, you
might need to
contact your
Internet Service
Provider (ISP) for
the proxy server
address.

PROXY PORT DEFAULT = 00080 Enter the port

number used by
the proxy server
for client support.
The port number
identifies the port
reserved for proxy
activity on your
network, and can
be a value from 0
to 65535.

IDLE DEFAULT = 0270 The time period,

TIMEOUT in seconds, after
which an idle
TCP print data
connection is
closed (default
is 270 seconds,
0 disables the
timeout).

SECURITY SECURE WEB HTTPS REQUIRED*

HTTPS OPTIONAL

IPSEC KEEP

DISABLE*

FIREWALL KEEP

DISABLE*

466 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Table 5-10 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

802.1X RESET

KEEP*

ANNOUNCE ENABLE*
MENT AGENT
DISABLE

RESET YES
SECURITY
NO*

FIPS KEEP

RESET & REBOOT

DEVICE

LINK SPEED AUTO*

10T HALF

10T FULL

10T AUTO

100TX HALF

100TX FULL

100TX AUTO

1000T FULL

I/O Timeout 15* seconds

Range: 5 to 300

Copy menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Copy menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-11 Copy menu

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Sides Original Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate whether

the original document
2-sided is printed on one or
both sides.

Output Sides 1-sided Use to indicate whether

the copies should be
2-sided printed on one or both
sides.

Copy menu 467

 Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Color/Black (color Automatically detect* Select how the copy

printers only) should be printed.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Prints color documents
in color, and black and
white documents in
black and white. For
mixed documents, the
printer will determine
whether to print in
color or black and
white.

Color: Prints
documents in color.

Black: Prints
documents in black
and white or grayscale.

Quick Sets and Load

Defaults
Save

Options Sides Original Sides 1-sided

2-sided

Output Sides 1-sided

2-sided

Color/Black (color Automatically detect* Select how the copy

printers only) should be printed.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Prints color documents
in color, and black and
white documents in
black and white. For
mixed documents, the
printer will determine
whether to print in
color or black and
white.

Color: Prints
documents in color.

Black: Prints
documents in black
and white or grayscale.

468 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Watermark None* Use this feature to add

a watermark to the
Text document

Secure ● Text: Text is placed

at the center of
the page.

● Secure:
Background text
and pattern that
is barely visible on
the first copy of a
document.

Stamps Top Left Select up to six

preset positions for a
Top Center stamp and configure
the content that will
Top Right be printed there.
Some positions might
Bottom Left require selecting the
stamp from a list of
Bottom Center predefined options.

Bottom Right

Copy menu 469

 Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Image Overlay Add New Image Use this feature to add

an image to each page
None* of a copy job.

After scanning and

saving the desired
image from the control
panel, this image will
be placed behind the
content on each page
of the copy job.

NOTE: To use this

feature, the images
must be scanned from
the scanner glass.

Follow these steps to

copy using an overlay
image.

1. Touch Image
Overlay, touch
Add New Image,
and then follow
the on-screen
instructions to
scan the desired
image from the
scanner glass.

TIP: For best

results, use the
same paper size
and the same
orientation for the
saved image and
the copy job.

2. Select the saved

image that you
want to add to
each page of the
copy job.

3. Start the copy

job, or select the
Preview option
to preview the
output.

Staple None* Sets the position of the

staple on the page.
Top left angled

Two left

Two to

Top right angled

Two right

Top left or right

470 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Hole Punch None*

Three left

Two left

Three top

Two top

Three right

Two right

Two bottom

Four left

Four right

Four left or top

C-fold Max sheets folded Controls the C-fold

together action of the booklet
maker.
Inward fold; opens left
or up

Inward fold; opens right

or down

Outward fold; opens

left or up

Outward fold; opens

right or down

Scan mode Standard Document Book Mode allows the

user to scan pages
Book Mode from a book.

2–sided ID 2–sided ID allows the

user to scan both sides
of an identification
card onto one sheet.

Copy menu 471

 Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Reduce/Enlarge Automatic* Use to scale the

size of the document
Manual up or down. Select
one of the predefined
● 25% percentages, or select
the Scaling field and
● 50% type a percentage
between 25 and
● 63% (Letter to 400. The Auto option
Statement) automatically scales
the image to fit the
● 64% (11x17 to paper size in the tray.
Letter)
NOTE: To reduce the
● 77% (11x17 to image, select a scaling
Legal) percentage that is less
than 100. To enlarge the
● 78% (Legal to image, select a scaling
Letter) percentage that is
greater than 100.
● 85% (Letter to
Exec)

● 100% (Letter to
Legal)

● 105% (Exec to
Letter)

● 122% (Legal to
11x17)

● 131% (Letter to
11x17)

● 131% (Statement
to Letter)

● 150%

● 200%

● 400%

● Custom1

● Custom2

Image Shift Off* Use this feature to

shift the content of
Automatically center the page. This is useful
for moving the image
Manual away from punched
holes, staples, folds, or
binding edges.

Original Size Select from a list of Describes the page

sizes that the printer size of the original
supports. document.

472 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Paper Selection Paper Size For the best color and

image quality, select
Paper Type the appropriate paper
type from the control
Paper Tray panel menu or from the
print driver.

Booklet Booklet Format (Checkbox) Use to copy two or

more pages onto one
sheet of paper so you
can fold the sheets
in the center to form
a booklet. The printer
arranges the pages
in the correct order.
For example, if the
original document has
eight pages, the printer
prints pages 1 and 8 on
the same sheet.

Content Orientation Portrait* For some features to

work correctly, you
Landscape must specify the way
the content of the
original document is
placed on the page.
Portrait orientation
means the short edge
of the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means the
long edge of the page
is along the top. In
the Orientation area,
select whether the
original document has
a portrait or landscape
orientation.

Pages per Sheet One (1) Copies multiple pages

onto one sheet of
Two (2) paper.

Four (4) NOTE: Before using

this screen, use the
Content Orientation
screen to describe the
original document
orientation.

Image Adjustment Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing the
sharpness could make
text appear crisper,
but decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

Copy menu 473

 Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Darkness Use to improve the

overall quality of the
copy.

Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase or
decrease the amount
of white and black in
the colors.

Contrast Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between the
lightest and darkest
color on the page.

Background Cleanup Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.

Automatic Tone

Auto Paper Color

Removal

Optimize Text/Picture Text Use this setting to

optimize the output for
Mixed* a particular type of
content.
Printed picture
Use Text for documents
Photograph that contain mostly
text. This option is
also best suited for
scanning documents
with highlighter marks.

Use Mixed for

documents that
contain a mix of text
and graphics.

Use Printed picture

for line drawings
and preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books. If you
see bands of irregular
intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed
picture to improve the
quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

474 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Erase Edges Front Side Use this menu item

to remove blemishes,
● Top edge such as dark borders
or staple marks, by
● Bottom edge cleaning the specified
edges of the scanned
● Left edge image. In each of
the text boxes enter
● Right edge the measurements, in
millimeters or inches,
Back Side for how much of the top
edge, bottom edge, left
● Top edge edge, and right edge to
clean.
● Bottom edge

● Left edge

● Right edge

Collate Collate on (Sets in If you are making more

page order)* than one copy, select
the Collate on (Sets
Collate off (Pages in page order) option
grouped) to assemble the pages
in the correct order in
each set of copies.

Select the Collate off

(Pages grouped) option
to group the same
pages together. For
example, if you are
making five copies of
an original document
that has two pages,
all five first pages
would be grouped
together and all five
second pages would
be grouped together.

Blank Page Off* When enabled, blank

Suppression pages found in the
Suppress Blank Pages original document are
not included in the
output document.

Automatically Off* Enable this feature

Straighten prior to scanning
Automatically to automatically
Straighten on straighten the scanned
image when pages
are skewed during
scanning.

Copy menu 475

 Table 5-11 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Output Bin Automatically select

Output bin 1

Output bin 2

Alternate bin

Lower booklet bin

Standard bin

Upper bin

Middle bin

Scan menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Scan menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

476 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan to Email File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
● PDF* file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
● PDF/A sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
● JPEG

● TIFF

● MTIFF

● XPS

Resolution

● 600 dpi

● 400 dpi

● 200 dpi*

● 150 dpi

● 75 dpi

Quality and File Size

● Very Low (smaller file)

● Low

● Medium*

● High

● Very High (larger file)

Original 1-sided* Use this feature to describe

Sides the layout for each side of the
2-sided original document

Pages Flip Up Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
page.

Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.

Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Color/Black Automatically detect color or If Automatically detect color

black or black is selected and the
current settings do not allow
Automatically detect color or scanning in black, pages will
gray be scanned in grayscale.

Color

Black/Gray

Black

Scan menu 477

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Watermark None* Use this feature to add a

watermark to the document
Text
Text: Text is placed at the
center of the page.

Stamps Top Left Select up to six preset

positions for a stamp
Top Center and configure the content
that will be printed there.
Top Right Some positions might require
selecting the stamp from a
Bottom Left list of predefined options.

Bottom Center

Bottom Right

Scan Mode Standard Document Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output.

Prompt for Additional Pages Use Standard Document

to scan regular documents
using default scan settings.

Use Prompt for Additional

Pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.

Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.

Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.

Original Size Select from a list of sizes that Describes the page size of
the printer supports. the original document.

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

478 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic Tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.

The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

Scan menu 479

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.

Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed Picture option is also best suited for
scanning documents with a
Photograph highlighter.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed Picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed Picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side

● Top Edge

● Bottom Edge

● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Cropping Do not crop* Use this menu item to specify

Options a method to automatically
Crop to Paper crop the scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop to
Crop to Content Paper option to crop the scan
to the edge of the document
being scanned. Use the Crop
to Content option to scan the
smallest possible area that
has detectable content.

NOTE: The Crop to Paper

option is effective only when
you scan pages by using the
document feeder. It has an
unpredictable effect for
pages that you scan from the
glass.

480 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum Pages Per File output into multiple files.

Blank Page Separator (E877, Touch the Create Multiple

E826, E785, E731 z bundles Files checkbox. Enter the
only) maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
Barcode Page Separator Maximum Pages Per File field.
(E877, E826, E785, E731 z
bundles only) When a file type that does
not support multiple pages
is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.

When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum six of
the email also interacts with
this feature. In this case, the
more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Notification Do Not Notify* Use this feature to receive

notification about the status
Notify When Job Completes of the sent document.

Notify Only If Job Fails ● SelectDo Not Notify to

turn off this feature

● Select Notify When Job

Completes to receive
notification for this job
only.

● Select Notify Only If

Job Fails to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully

Signing and Signing A digitally signed email

Encryption ensures the recipient that you
Encrypt sent this email. An encrypted
message can be opened only
by the recipient.

Scan menu 481

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan to Folder Paths

Network
Folder

File Name

Quick Sets
and Defaults

Options File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
Resolution file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
High Compression (smaller
file)

PDF Encryption

Original 1-sided* Use this feature to describe

Sides the layout for each side of the
2-sided original document

Pages Flip Up Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
page.

Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.

Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or disable color

scanning.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if at least
Black one page has color.

Color: Scans documents in

color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in grayscale.

Black: Scans documents in

black and white with a
compressed file size.

482 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan Mode Standard document* Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output

● Prompt for additional Use Standard document to

pages scan regular documents
using the default scan
settings.

Use Prompt for additional

pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.

Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.

Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.

Content Orientation Portrait* For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Landscape the way the content of
the original document is
placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of
the page is along the top.
In the Orientation area,
select whether the original
document has a portrait or
landscape orientation.

Scan menu 483

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting

to increase or decrease
the difference between the
lightest and darkest color on
the page.

Background Adjust the Background

Cleanup Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a faint
image.

Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or soften
the image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

Automatic The printer automatically

Tone adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background
Cleanup settings to the most
appropriate for the scanned
document.

Auto Paper
Color
Removal
(Flow models
only)

Default Select this to make the

selected Image Adjustment
setting the default value.

484 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Text Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Mixed* type of content.

Printed picture Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Photograph option is also best suited
for scanning documents with
highlighter marks.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to remove

blemishes, such as dark
Back side erase borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
Front side erase of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.

Cropping Do not crop Use this menu item to

Options automatically crop the scan
Crop to content for digital sending. Use the
Crop to content option to
Crop to paper scan the smallest possible
area that has detectable
content.

Blank Page Off* Use to prevent blank pages

Suppression in the original document from
Suppress Blank being included in the output
document.

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically Retry
(E877. E826 z bundles
only)

Scan menu 485

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.

● White page Touch the Create Multiple

Files checkbox. Enter the
● Red/pink page maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
● Green page Maximum pages per file field.

● Yellow page When a file type that does

not support multiple pages
● Any color page is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.

When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum size
of the email also interacts
with this feature. In this case,
the more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

notification about the status
Notify when job completes of a sent document.

Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off this

feature.

Notify when job completes:

Select to receive notification
for this job only.

Notify only if job fails: Select

to receive notification only
if the job is not sent
successfully.

Scan to USB Folder Path

Drive

File Name

Quick Set
Defaults

Options File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
Resolution file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
High Compression (smaller
file)

PDF Encryption

486 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Original sides 1-sided Use to describe the layout

for each side of the
2-sided original document. First
select whether the original
document is printed on one
side or both sides. Then touch
the Orientation setting to
indicate whether the original
has portrait or landscape
orientation. If it is printed on
both sides, also select the
2-sided format that matches
the original document.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or disable color

scanning.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if at least
Black one page has color.

Color: Scans documents in

color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in grayscale.

Black: Scans documents in

black and white with a
compressed file size.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of
the page is along the top.
In the Orientation area,
select whether the original
document has a portrait or
landscape orientation.

Use Automatically Detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically Detect setting.
Using Automatically Detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

Scan menu 487

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Darkness Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.

The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting

to increase or decrease
the difference between the
lightest and darkest color on
the page.

Background Adjust the Background

Cleanup Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a faint
image.

Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or soften
the image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

488 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Automatic The printer automatically

Tone adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background
Cleanup settings to the most
appropriate for the scanned
document.

Auto Paper
Color
Removal
(Flow models
only)

Default Select this to make the

selected Image Adjustment
setting the default value.

Optimize Manually Adjust* Use to optimize the output for

Text/Picture a particular type of content.
Text You can optimize the output
for text, printed pictures, or a
Printed picture mixture.

Photograph Manually Adjust: Use to

manually optimize the setting
for text or for pictures.

Text: Use to optimize the text

portion of the copy when text
and/or pictures are on the
original.

Printed picture: Use for

line drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books.

Photograph: Best suited for

making copies of printed
pictures.

Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to remove

blemishes, such as dark
Back side erase borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
Front side erase of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.

Cropping Do not crop Use this menu item to

Options automatically crop the scan
Crop to content for digital sending. Use the
Crop to content option to
Crop to paper scan the smallest possible
area that has detectable
content.

Scan menu 489

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Blank Page Off* Use to prevent blank pages

Suppression in the original document from
Suppress Blank Pages being included in the output
document.

Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically retry
(E877, E826 z bundles
only)

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.

Blank page separator (E877, Touch the Create Multiple

E826, E785, E731 z bundles Files checkbox. Enter the
only) maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
● White page Maximum pages per file field.

● Red/pink page When a file type that does

not support multiple pages
● Green page is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
● Yellow page ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
● Any color page are generated per original
document.
Barcode page separator
(E877, E826, E785, E731 z When scanning to email,
bundles only) the configuration option that
specifies the maximum size
of the email also interacts
with this feature. In this case,
the more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

notification about the status
Notify when job completes of a sent document.

Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off this

feature.

Notify when job completes:

Select to receive notification
for this job only.

Notify only if job fails: Select

to receive notification only
if the job is not sent
successfully.

490 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Include Select Include Thumbnail to

Thumbnail receive a thumbnail image of
the first page of the job in
your notification.

Scan to Job Sides Original Sides

Storage
● 1-sided

● 2-sided

Output Sides

● 1-sided

● 2-sided

Color/Black Automatically detect Use to enable or disable color

scanning.
Color*
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if at least
Black one page has color.

Color: Scans documents in

color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in grayscale.

Black: Scans documents in

black and white with a
compressed file size.

Scan Mode Standard document*

Book

2-sided ID

Reduce/ Automatic*
Enlarge
Manual

Image Shift Off*

Automatically center

Manual

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.

Paper Paper Size

Selection
Paper Type

Paper Tray

Booklet Booklet Format

Scan menu 491

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

Pages per One

Sheet
Two

Four (right, then down)

Four (down, then right)

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjust Sharpness to clarify

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

492 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.

Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed picture option is also best suited
for scanning documents with
Photograph highlighter marks.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side

● Top Edge

● Bottom Edge

● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Collate Collate*

Collate off

Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten on straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Scan menu 493

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically Retry
(E877. E826 z bundles
only)

Scan to Save Use this feature to save

Sharepoint Settings the current settings as the
default settings for an app or
to create a new Quick Set.
First configure the desired
options. Then touch Save
and choose to either save
the current settings as the
default settings for the app or
as a new Quick Set.

File Type and File Type Select File Type and

Resolution Resolution to select the
Resolution file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
High Compression (smaller
file)

PDF Encryption

Original Auto (keep sides with content) Use this feature to describe
Sides the layout for each side of the
1-sided* original document

2-sided Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
Pages Flip Up page.

Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.

Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Color/Black Automatically detect color or If Automatically detect color

black or black is selected and the
current settings do not allow
Automatically detect color or scanning in black, pages will
gray be scanned in grayscale.

Color

Black/Gray

Black

494 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Stamps Top Left Select up to six preset

positions for a stamp
Top Center and configure the content
that will be printed there.
Top Right Some positions might require
selecting the stamp from a
Bottom Left list of predefined options.

Bottom Center

Bottom Right

Scan Mode Standard Document Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output.

Prompt for Additional Pages Use Standard Document

to scan regular documents
using default scan settings.

Use Prompt for Additional

Pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.

Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.

Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

Scan menu 495

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.

The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

496 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.

Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed picture option is also best suited for
scanning documents with a
Photograph highlighter.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed Picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side

● Top Edge

● Bottom Edge

● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Cropping Do not crop* Use this menu item to specify

Options a method to automatically
Crop to Paper crop the scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop to
Crop to Content Paper option to crop the scan
to the edge of the document
being scanned. Use the Crop
to Content option to scan the
smallest possible area that
has detectable content.

NOTE: The Crop to Paper

option is effective only when
you scan pages by using the
document feeder. It has an
unpredictable effect for
pages that you scan from the
glass.

Scan menu 497

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.

Blank page separator (E877, Touch the Create Multiple

E826, E785, E731 z bundles Files checkbox. Enter the
only) maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
Barcode page separator Maximum Pages Per File field.
(E877, E826, E785, E731 z
bundles only) When a file type that does
not support multiple pages
is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.

When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum six of
the email also interacts with
this feature. In this case, the
more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Notification Do not notify* Use this feature to receive

notification about the status
Notify When Job Completes of the sent document.

Notify Only If Job Fails ● Select Do not notify to

turn off this feature

● Select Notify When Job

Completes to receive
notification for this job
only.

● Select Notify Only If

Job Fails to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully

Remote Scan Use the Remote Scan

Request Request app to scan and
send documents requested
by a remote computer.

Remote scans are initiated on

a computer with applications
such as TWAIN Software
or other AirPrint Compatible
devices

498 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan+ Common Scan Redact and Sign Scan Shortcuts can be used
Shortcuts to quickly set up a job for
OCR specialty tasks.

Document Separation

Barcode Separation

Sticky Notes and Envelopes

2-sided ID

Auto Sense Fastest Scan Speeds Auto Sense Presets make it

Preset easy to optimize a scan job
Best Productivity for fastest scan speeds or
(Recommended) best productivity.

● Fastest Scan Speeds

disables some
automatic features,
which requires less
image processing and
allows scanning at
the fastest speeds
available.

● Best Productivity
enables several
automatic features,
including automatic
sides, automatic content
orientation, automatic
image straightening,
and automatic image
optimization.

NOTE: Unlike Quick Sets,

Auto Sense Preset presets do
not affect destinations and
recipients.

Watermark None* Use this feature to add a

watermark to the document
Text
● Text: Text is placed at the
center of the page.

Stamps Top Left Select up to six preset

positions for a stamp
Top Center and configure the content
that will be printed there.
Top Right Some positions might require
selecting the stamp from a
Bottom Left list of predefined options.

Bottom Center

Bottom Right

Scan menu 499

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Notification Do not notify* Use this feature to receive

notification about the status
Notify When Job Completes of the sent document.

Notify Only If Job Fails ● Select Do not notify to

turn off this feature

● Select Notify When Job

Completes to receive
notification for this job
only.

● Select Notify Only If

Job Fails to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully

Scan Color/Black Automatically detect color or If Automatically detect color

black or black is selected and the
current settings do not allow
Automatically detect color or scanning in black, pages will
gray be scanned in grayscale.

Color

Black/Gray

Black

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.

Blank page separator Touch the Create Multiple

Files check box. Enter the
Barcode page separator maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
Maximum Pages Per File field.

When a file type that does

not support multiple pages
is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.

When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum size
of the email also interacts
with this feature. In this case,
the more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Signing and Signing A digitally signed email

Encryption ensures the recipient that you
Encrypt sent this email. An encrypted
message can be opened only
by the recipient.

500 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Cropping Do not crop* Use this menu item to specify

Options a method to automatically
Crop to Paper crop the scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop to
Crop to Content Paper option to crop the scan
to the edge of the document
being scanned. Use the Crop
to Contentoption to scan the
smallest possible area that
has detectable content.

NOTE: The Crop to Paper

option is effective only when
you scan pages by using the
document feeder. It has an
unpredictable effect for
pages that you scan from the
glass.

Copy Number of Copies (1 to 9999) Use this feature to set the

Copies number of printed copies.

Output Sides 1-sided* Use this feature to set the

layout and format for the
2-sided output.

Pages flip-up Select from the following

options:

● Use 1-sided for originals

that are printed on one
side of the page.

● Use 2-sided for originals

that are printed on both
sides of the page.

● Select Pages flip-up for

originals othat flip on the
top/bottom edge of the
page, such as calendars.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Automatically detect: Prints

color documents in color, and
Color black and white documents
in black and white. For mixed
Black/Gray documents, the product will
determine whether to print in
color or black and white.

Color: Prints documents in

color.

Black/Gray: Prints documents

in grayscale.

Scan menu 501

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Paper Paper Size Use this feature to select the

Selection paper for the job.
Paper Type
Use Paper Size or Paper
Paper Tray Type to enable the printer
to automatically find the
selected paper size or type.

Use Paper Tray to select a

source tray. Depending on the
administrator's setting, the
product will either print from
that tray first, or it will limit
printing from that tray.

Fax Resolution Standard (100 x 200dpi) Select the resolution for

outgoing faxes. If you
Fine (200 x 200dpi) increase the resolution, faxes
might be clearer but they
Superfine (300 x 300dpi) could transmit more slowly.

Auto Sense Original Auto (keep sides with content) Use this feature to describe
Sides the layout for each side of the
1-sided* original document

2-sided Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
Pages Flip Up page.

Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.

Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

502 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic Tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.

The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

Scan menu 503

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.

Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed picture option is also best suited for
scanning documents with a
Photograph highlighter.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed Picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically Retry
(E877. E826 z bundles
only)

Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.

Advanced File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
Resolution file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
High Compression (smaller
file)

DF EncryptionP

504 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Table 5-12 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan Mode Standard Document Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output.

Prompt for Additional Pages Use Standard Document

to scan regular documents
using default scan settings.

Use Prompt for Additional

Pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.

Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.

Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side

● Top Edge

● Bottom Edge

● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Fax menu (when a fax option is installed)

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Fax menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-13 Fax menu (fax models only)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Dialing Prefix

Fax Recipients

Quick Sets and

Defaults

Fax menu (when a fax option is installed) 505

 Table 5-13 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Options Original Sides 1-sided* Use to describe

the layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First select
whether the original
document is printed
on one side or both
sides. Then touch the
Orientation setting to
indicate whether the
original has portrait or
landscape orientation.
If it is printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.

Watermark None* Use this feature to add

a watermark to the
Text document.

● Watermark Text ● Text: Text is placed

at the center of
● Text Font the page.

● Text Size NOTE: Flow models

only.
● Text Color

Stamps None* Select up to six

preset positions for a
Top Left stamp and configure
the content that will
Top Center be printed there.
Some positions might
Top Right require selecting the
stamp from a list of
Bottom Left predefined options.

Bottom Center NOTE: Flow models

only.
Bottom Right

Resolution Standard (100 x Select the resolution

200dpi)* for outgoing faxes.
If you increase the
Fine (200 x 200dpi) resolution, faxes might
be clearer but they
Superfine (300 x could transmit more
300dpi) slowly. Some file types,
for example a file that
will be processed with
OCR, require a specific
resolution. When these
file types are selected,
the Resolution setting
might be automatically
changed to a valid
value.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

sizes that the printer page size of the
supports. original document.

506 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-13 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Content Orientation Orientation Portrait* For some features to

work correctly, you
Landscape must specify the way
the content of the
original document is
placed on the page.

Portrait: This setting

means the short edge
of the page is along the
top.

Landscape: This
setting means the long
edge of the page is
along the top.

Image Adjustment Sharpness Use to improve the

overall quality of
Darkness the copy. Adjust
the darkness and
Contrast sharpness, and you
can use the
Background Cleanup Background Cleanup
setting to remove
Automatic tone faint images from
the background or
Auto Paper Color to remove a light
Removal background color.

Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase or
decrease the amount
of white and black in
the colors.

Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between the
lightest and darkest
color on the page.

Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.

Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but decreasing
it could make
photographs appear
smoother.

Fax menu (when a fax option is installed) 507

 Table 5-13 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Optimize For: Optimizes the output

for a particular type
Automatically detect Text of content. You can
optimize the output for
NOTE: Flow models Mixed text, printed pictures, or
only. a mixture.
Printed picture
Manually Adjust: Use to
Photograph manually optimize the
setting for text or for
pictures.

Text: Use to optimize

the text portion of the
copy where text and/or
pictures are on the
original.

Printed picture: Use

for line drawings
and preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books.

Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.

Fax Line Selection Automatic* HP MFP Analog Dual

Fax 810 Accessory
Line 1 needs to be installed

Line 2

Blank Page Disabled* Prevents blank pages

Suppression in the original
Enabled document from being
included in the output
document.

Automatically Off* Enable this feature

Straighten prior to scanning to
Automatically automically straighten
Straighten* the scanned image
when pages are
skewed during
scanning.

508 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Table 5-13 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Notification Do not notify* Use to receive

notification about the
Notify when job status of a sent
completes document.

Notify only if job fails Do Not Notify: Turns off

this feature.

Notify When Job

Completes: Select to
receive notification for
this job only.

Notify Only If Job

Fails: Select to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully.

Print menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Print menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-14 Print Options menu

First level Second level Values Description

Print from Job Storage Stored Job to Print Untitled Print a job stored on the
printer.
Stored Faxes

Print from USB Drive USB File to Print Choose file to print on USB Print a job stored on a USB
drive. drive.

Fax Polling Fax Polling Number Use the Fax Polling app to
print faxes sent to another fax
machine.

Supplies menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Supplies menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-15 Supplies menu

First level Values Description

Supplies Summary

Print menu 509

 Table 5-15 Supplies menu (continued)

First level Values Description

Black Cartridge Status

Cyan Cartridge Order HP Part

Magenta Cartridge Pages Printed

Yellow Cartridge Approximate Pages Remaining

Toner Collection Unit Status

Document Feeder Kit Order HP Part

Stapler 1

Trays menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Trays menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 5-16 Trays menu

First level Second level Values Description

Tray 1 Size Select paper size from a list Choose the paper size for the
of supported sizes. tray
Tray 2–x

Type Select paper type from a list Choose the paper type for
of supported types. the tray.

Support Tools menu

The menus under the Support Tools menu contain the options for maintaining the printer and
troubleshooting printer problems. Learn about these menus and settings.

Service menu
Use this menu to access features for diagnosing, maintaining, and repairing the product. You might be
required to sign in to gain access to the Service menu.

● Service Access Code: 03078622

Table 5-17 Service menu

First level Second level Third level

Event Log

Counts

Coverage Report

Scanner Settings

Serial Number

510 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Table 5-17 Service menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level

Service ID

Cold Reset Paper

MPS Settings Low Alerts

MPS Settings Reset Supplies Level

MPS Settings Consumables Access Control

Advanced Service Software Version

Advanced Service Service Reports

Advanced Service ACS ACS Page Adjustment

Advanced Service Adjustment Print Adjustment

Advanced Service Adjustment Buckle Adjustment

Advanced Service Adjustment Finisher Adjustment

Advanced Service *Calibration/Cleaning

NOTE: Refer to the Maintenance menu

map.

Advanced Service Advanced Diagnostics Reset Engine NVM

Advanced Service Advanced Diagnostics Engine NVM Read/Write

Advanced Service Advanced Diagnostics Sensors

Advanced Service Advanced Diagnostics Component Tests

Advanced Service Service Functions TR Control Mode

Advanced Service Service Functions Drain

Advanced Service Service Functions Low-temperature Idling Mode

Advanced Service Service Functions Altitude Adjustment

Advanced Service Service Functions Humidity

Advanced Service Service Functions Footer

Advanced Service Service Functions Low Volume Print Mode

PTT Test Mode

Test Support

Part Replacement Count

Reset Supplies

Fax V.29 Speed

Event Log
Use this menu to view or print a list of the most recent 50 events in the Event Log. For each event, the log
shows the event code, cycle (approximate page count), and description.

Event Log 511

 Counts
Use this menu to see the total number of pages that have been printed to-date by various product
components. Typically, this is only required when a new formatter is installed.

Before replacing the formatter, print a configuration page to obtain the current counts.

● Service Count: Total sum of Mono Service Count added to Color Service Count.

● Mono Service Count: This count tracks all media picked from all media sources on the device. For
jobs with blank sides or interpreted as mono at the time of media pickup, this count will increment +1
(simplex) or +2 (duplex).

● Color Service Count: This count tracks all media picked from all media sources on the device. For
jobs interpreted as color at the time of media pickup this count will increment +1 (simplex) or +2
(duplex).

● Refurbish Count: Use this item to record the page count when the printer was refurbished.

● Document Feeder Kit Count: Total number of pages since the document feeder kit was replaced.

● Document Feeder Kit Interval: Use this item to set the interval that causes the printer to prompt the
customer to replace document feeder kit.

● Clean Rollers Count: Total number of pages since the document feeder rollers were cleaned.

512 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 ● Clean Rollers Interval: Use this item to set the interval that causes the printer to prompt the
customer to clean the document feeder rollers and separation pad.

● ADF Count: Total pages fed through the document feeder.

● Flatbed Count: Total pages scanned form the flatbed.

● ADF Simplex Count: Total single-sided pages fed through the document feeder.

● ADF Duplex Count: Total two-sided pages fed through the document feeder.

● Copy Scan Count: Total copy pages that have been scanned.

● Send Scan Count: Number of scanned pages sent to email.

● Fax Scan Count: Number of scanned pages that have been faxed.

● Copy Pages Count: Number of scanned pages that have been printed.

Coverage Report
Use this menu to print coverage reports based on print, copy, and fax job.

The Reset button restores all coverage estimates to default.

● All: This will print all average coverage values for a print, copy, and fax job.

● Print: This will print the last page coverage and average coverage values for a print job.

● Copy: This will print the last page coverage and average coverage values for a copy job.

● Fax: This will print the last page coverage and average coverage values for a copy job.

Scanner Settings
Use this menu to adjust Scanner setting value manually when a scanned area is inappropriate.

The Clear All button restores all scanner setting values to default.

NOTE: Select the adjustable items on the control panel and adjust the values accordingly.

● Glass – Left edge: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -20 to +20.

● Glass – Rear edge: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -25 to +25.

● ADF – Leading front edge: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -200 to +200.

● ADF – Leading back edge: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -200 to +200.

● ADF – Trailing front edge: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -200 to +200.

● ADF – Trailing back edge: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -200 to +200.

● ADF – Left side front: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -120 to +120.

● ADF – Left side back: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -120 to +120.

NOTE: Negative values crop the edge less and positive values crop the edge more.

Coverage Report 513

 Figure 5-21 Examples of scanner settings

● ADF – Feed direction magnification: Default is 100%. It can be adjusted from 97% to 103%.

Figure 5-22 Examples of Feed direction magnification settings

Serial Number
Use this menu to set the product serial number.

IMPORTANT: Modify the serial number only after replacing the formatter.

Service ID
Use this menu to display the date that the product was first used.

514 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 The Service ID menu eliminates the need to keep paper receipts for proof of warranty.

Cold Reset Paper

Use this menu to reset the default paper size after the replacement of a formatter board in a location
using a different standard paper size.

NOTE: The product will restart automatically when this setting changes.

Low Alerts
Use this menu to enable or disable the Supplies Low message.

The Supplies Low message can be enabled or disabled in these locations:

● Control panel

● SNMP alerts

● Remote monitoring tools, such as the Embedded Web Server

Disabling low alerts has the following effects:

● Supplies Low messages are suppressed.

● Supplies Very Low messages still appear.

● The supplies status levels are visible in all locations.

● The control panel menu options for configuring the Low Message and the Low Threshold Settings
are available, but they have no effect.

Reset Supplies Level

Use this menu to reset customized settings for Supplies Low and Supplies Very Low messages and
alerts.

IMPORTANT: Use this menu for products that are under a service agreement with HP.

● Reset to Level 1: When this option is selected, standard menus for Supplies Very Low are available,
and the Supplies Low Threshold is set to 0%. The Supplies Low messages are enabled and Low
Alerts are enabled. Customer can modify the Supplies Low Threshold and the Low message
behavior.

● Reset to Level 2: When this option is selected, standard menus for Supplies Very Low are available,
and the Supplies Low Threshold is set to 0%. The Supplies Low messages are off and Low Alerts are
enabled. Customer can modify the Supplies Low Threshold and the Low message behavior.

● Reset to Level 3: When this option is selected, standard menus for Supplies Very Low are available,
and the Supplies Low Threshold is set to 0%. The Supplies Low messages are off and Low Alerts are
disabled. Customer can modify the Supplies Low Threshold and Low Message settings are set to
standard values for a product that is not under a service agreement with HP.

● Set to non-HP managed mode: When this option is selected, the menu for Supplies Very Low is
removed. The Supplies Low Threshold and Low Message settings are set to standard values for a
product that is not under a service agreement with HP.

Cold Reset Paper 515

 Consumables Access Control
Use this menu to lock toner cartridges into the product to help prevent early replacement.

Each cartridge will automatically unlock when it reaches the replacement threshold or encounters an
error. Signing in with Admin or Service credentials will also unlock all cartridges for the duration of the
session.

The settings are as follows:

● Unchecked: Disables this function. The Eject button is always selectable.

● Checked: Enables this function. If a toner cartridge is in the locked state, the Eject button is not
selectable.

Software Version
Use this menu to see the following software versions.

● Engine Firmware Version

● Tray 2 Version

● Tray 3 Version

● Tray 4 Version (*Optional)

● Tray 5 Version (*Optional)

● Finisher Version (*Optional)

● Booklet Version (*Optional)

● Punch Version (*Optional)

● EP Version

● Toner Version

● TR Version

● Fuser Version

516 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Service Reports
Use this menu to print the following reports.

● Supplies Information Report

● Auto Color Registration

● Full Auto Color Registration

● Auto Toning History

ACS Page Adjustment

The ACS (Auto Color Sensing) is a functionality that sets color or mono mode based on original images.

Use this menu to set color or mono mode to save the color toner based on how many mono pages
(default is 5 pages) are continuously printed in a print or copy job.

Print Adjustment
Use this menu to adjust the image position manually and perform the Print Margin Test when the printed
area is inappropriate, or the printed image is skewed to one side.

● Image Position

– Select Tray: Select the tray that needs to be adjusted.

– Front-side Horizontal Shift: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -4 to +4.

+: The printed image will be shifted to the right.

-: The printed image will be shifted to the left.

– Front-side Vertical Shift: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -4 to +4.

+: The printed image will be shifted downward.

-: The printed image will be shifted upward.

– Back-side Horizontal Shift: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -4 to +4.

+: The printed image will be shifted to the right.

-: The printed image will be shifted to the left.

– Back-side Vertical Shift: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -4 to +4.

+: The printed image will be shifted downward.

-: The printed image will be shifted upward.

– Apply to all Trays: If it is checked, all trays will be affected.

Service Reports 517

 Figure 5-23 Examples of image position shifts

● Print Margin Test

– A3 Skew Pattern: If this option is selected, the printer will print the A3 skew pattern.

– A4 Skew Pattern: If this option is selected, the printer will print the A4 skew pattern.

– 11x17 Skew Pattern: If this option is selected, the printer will print the 11x17 skew pattern.

– Letter Skew Pattern: If this option is selected, the printer will print the Letter skew pattern.

Buckle Adjustment
Use this menu to adjust the Registration Curl value when a printed image has a skew.

IMPORTANT: Check the paper guide on the tray before performing the Buckle Adjustment.

● Process Speed: Default is Full. Select the appropriate speed for the paper type.

● Fast Feed: Default is Off. If On is selected, the printer will feed paper faster.

● Print Side: Default is Simplex. Select the appropriate print side.

● Paper Source: Default is Tray 1. Select the appropriate tray.

● Registration Curl: Default is 0. It can be adjusted form -5 to +5.

518 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Figure 5-24 Typical faulty image

Finisher Adjustment
Use this menu to adjust settings related to the finisher, such as staple position, folding position, punch
hole position, tamper position, and eject level.

NOTE: This menu will only be shown when a finisher is installed.

● Staple position: Use this menu adjust the staple position on the paper.

– Single Front Corner STS: Use this feature to adjust the front corner staple position on the paper.

+: Move the staple position towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the edge of the paper.

Figure 5-25 Front corner staple position

Finisher Adjustment 519

 – Single Rear Corner STS: Use this feature to adjust the rear corner staple position on the paper.

+: Move the staple position towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the edge of the paper.

Figure 5-26 Rear corner staple position

– Single Front Flat STS: Use this feature to adjust the front flat staple position on the paper.

+: Move the staple position towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the edge of the paper.

Figure 5-27 Front flat staple position

520 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

– Single Rear Flat STS: Use this feature to adjust the rear flat staple position on the paper.

+: Move the staple position towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the edge of the paper.

Figure 5-28 Rear flat staple position

– Dual Front STS: Use this feature to adjust the front staple position of the dual staple on the
paper

NOTE: This menu will only be shown when a booklet finisher or stapler/stacker finisher is
installed.

+: Move the staple position towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the edge of the paper.

Finisher Adjustment 521

 Figure 5-29 Dual front staple position

– Dual Rear STS: Use this feature to adjust the rear staple position of the dual staple on the paper

NOTE: This menu will only be shown when a booklet finisher or stapler/stacker finisher is
installed.

+: Move the staple position towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the edge of the paper.

Figure 5-30 Dual rear staple position

– Dual All STS: Use this feature to adjust the dual staple position on the paper.

NOTE: This menu will only be shown when an inner finisher is installed

+: Move the staple position towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the edge of the paper.

522 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Figure 5-31 Dual staple position

● Punch Hole position: Use this menu to adjust the position of punch holes on the paper.

– STS: Use this feature to adjust the STS position of punched holes on the paper.

NOTE: This menu will only be shown when a booklet finisher or staple/stacker finisher is
installed with a punch unit.

+: Move the position of punched holes towards the front of the device.

-: Move the position of punched holes towards the rear of the device.

Figure 5-32 Punched holes position (up/down)

– DOF: Use this feature to adjust the DOF position of punched holes on the paper.

NOTE: This menu will only be shown when a booklet finisher, stapler/stacker finisher, or inner
finisher is installed with a punch unit.

Finisher Adjustment 523

 +: Move the position of punched holes towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the position of punched holes towards the edge of the paper.

Figure 5-33 Punched holes position (left/right)

● Enable Punch Scan: Use this feature to enable the detection of leading edge of the paper when the
punch is operating.

– On (default): Detect the leading edge of the paper for every page.

– Off: Detect the leading edge of the paper for the first page of the job.

● Tamper Position: Use this menu to adjust the tamper position.

– Front: Use this feature to adjust the front tamper position.

– Rear: Use this feature to adjust the rear tamper position.

+: Move toward the compile center (away from the tamper home).

-: Move away from the compile center (toward the tamper home).

524 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Figure 5-34 Tamper position

● Finisher Eject Level: Use this feature to adjust the eject level to reduce scattering.

+: Higher level (increased feed time).

-: Lower level (decreased feed time).

● Disable Buffering Option: Use this feature to align paper for stapling in staple jobs.

Off (default): The buffering function is enabled.

On: The buffering function is disabled. This will try to align the paper for stapling, but the job speed
will be slower.

● Manual Staple Position: Use this feature to adjust the manual staple position.

NOTE: This menu item will only be shown when a booklet finisher or stapler/stacker finisher is
installed.

+: Move the staple position towards the center of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the edge of the paper.

Finisher Adjustment 525

 Figure 5-35 Manual staple position

● Booklet Staple Position: Use this menu to adjust the staple position of printed booklets for
supported paper sizes.

NOTE: This menu item will only be shown when a booklet finisher is installed.

IMPORTANT: Select paper size you want to use in the menu.

+: Move the staple position towards the leading edge of the paper.

-: Move the staple position towards the trailing edge of the paper.

Figure 5-36 Booklet staple position

● Booklet Folding Position: User this menu to adjust the folding position of printed booklets for
supported paper sizes.

NOTE: This menu will only be shown when a booklet finisher is installed.

IMPORTANT: Select paper size you want to use in the menu.

+: Move the folding position towards the leading edge of the paper.

-: Move the folding position towards the trailing edge of the paper.

526 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Figure 5-37 Booklet fold position

● Booklet C-Folding Position: User this menu to adjust the c-folding of printed pages for supported
paper sizes.

NOTE: This menu will only be shown when a booklet finisher is installed.

IMPORTANT: Select paper size you want to use in the menu.

+: Move the folding position towards the leading edge of the paper.

-: Move the folding position towards the trailing edge of the paper.

Figure 5-38 Booklet C-fold position

Reset Engine NVM

Use this menu to initialize the engine NVM (Non-Volatile Memory) read/write values to the default.

Reset Engine NVM 527

 Engine NVM Read/Write
Use this menu to adjust the NVM configuration value for the printing engine operation.

Table 5-18 Engine NVM Read/Write values

Code Name Type Default

107-0260 Period of ITB Band (Page) Read/Write 200

109-0200 StandBy Center Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0201 StandBy Side Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0205 Warmup Center Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0206 Warmup Side Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0255 Light 60-74g Center Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0256 Light 60-74g Side Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0265 Plain Center Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0266 Plain Side Temperature offset Read/Write 10

109-0275 Heavy 111-130g Center Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0276 Heavy 111-130g Side Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0280 Extra Heavy 131-175g Center Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0281 Extra Heavy 131-175g Side Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0290 Cardstock Center Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0291 Cardstock Side Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0300 Envelope Center Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0301 Envelope Side Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0305 Labels Center Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0306 Labels Side Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0310 Mid-Weight 96-110g Center Read/Write 10

Temperature Offset

109-0311 Mid-Weight 96-110g Side Read/Write 10

Temperature Offset

528 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-18 Engine NVM Read/Write values (continued)

Code Name Type Default

109-0315 Recycled Center Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0316 Recycled Side Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0320 Special Center Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0321 Special Side Temperature Read/Write 10

offset

109-0325 1200 dpi_light 60-74g Center Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0326 1200 dpi_light 60-74g Side Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0330 1200 dpi_plain Center Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0331 1200 dpi_plain Side Read/Write 10

Temperature offset

109-0335 1200 dpi_mid-weight 96-110g Read/Write 10

Center Temperature offset

109-0336 1200 dpi_mid-weight 96-110g Read/Write 10

Side Temperature offset

109-0350 Paperboard Center Read/Write 10

Temperature Offset

109-0351 Paperboard Side Read/Write 10

Temperature Offset

109-0360 Color Transparency Center Read/Write 10

Temperature Offset

109-0361 Color Transparency Side Read/Write 10

Temperature Offset

112-0120 Manual Color Regi X-offset Read/Write 100

Yellow

112-0130 Manual Color Regi X-offset Read/Write 100

Magenta

112-0140 Manual Color Regi X-offset Read/Write 100

Cyan

112-0150 Manual Color Regi X-offset Read/Write 100

Black

112-0160 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Read/Write 200

Yellow

112-0170 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Read/Write 200

Magenta

112-0180 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Read/Write 200

Cyan

112-0190 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Read/Write 200

Black

Engine NVM Read/Write 529

 Table 5-18 Engine NVM Read/Write values (continued)

Code Name Type Default

112-0240 Manual Color Regi Left Width Read/Write 500

Yellow

112-0250 Manual Color Regi Right Read/Write 500

Width Yellow

112-0260 Manual Color Regi Left Width Read/Write 500

Magenta

112-0270 Manual Color Regi Right Read/Write 500

Width Magenta

112-0280 Manual Color Regi Left Width Read/Write 500

Cyan

112-0290 Manual Color Regi Right Read/Write 500

Width Cyan

112-0300 Manual Color Regi Left Width Read/Write 500

Black

112-0310 Manual Color Regi Right Read/Write 500

Width Black

112-0320 Color Regi LSU Skew Yellow Read 200

112-0330 Color Regi LSU Skew Read 200

Magenta

112-0340 Color Regi LSU Skew Cyan Read 200

Sensors
Use this menu to check the status of sensors using each sensor’s callout on the control panel.

Select the callout to display the status of the sensor.

NOTE: This image may differ from your control panel display.

IMPORTANT: Include this information when escalating related issues to the GBU engineer.

530 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-19 Sensor types

Name Reference table

Document Feeder Document Feeder sensors

Flatbed Flatbed sensors

ACR/CTD ACR/CTD sensors

Finisher (Option) Finisher (Option) sensors

Covers Cover sensors

Developer Developer sensors

Drum Drum sensors

Environment Environmental sensors

Fuser Fuser sensors

LSU LSU sensors

Paper Path Paper Path sensors

Power Supply Power Supply sensors

TCU TCU sensors

Toner Residual Amount Toner Residual Amount sensors

Transfer Transfer sensors

Tray Tray sensors

Stacker Stacker sensors

Table 5-20 Document Feeder sensors

Name Type Status

ADF Top of Form Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Paper Path Deskew Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Paper Present Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Width Sensor Input Numeric

ADF Y Length (Short) Input High/Low

ADF Y Length (Long) Input High/Low

ADF Jam Cover Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Paper Path Pick Height Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Ultrasonic Input Numeric

ADF Pick Success Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Top of Form Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Paper Path Deskew Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Paper Present Sensor Input High/Low

ADF Width Sensor Input Numeric

Sensors 531
 Table 5-21 Flatbed sensors

Name Type Status

Flatbed Cover Sensor Input High/Low

Flatbed Y (length) short Sensor Input High/Low

Flatbed Y (length) long Sensor Input High/Low

Flatbed Cover Sensor Input High/Low

Table 5-22 ACR/CTD sensors

Code Name Type Status

112-0210 ACR Shutter Sensor Input High/Low

112-0211 ACR Shutter Sensor (through Input High/Low

motor running)

112-0300 Front ID Sensor - P Wave Input Numeric

Value

112-0310 Front ID Sensor - S Wave Input Numeric

Value

112-0320 Rear ID Sensor - P Wave Input Numeric

Value

112-0330 Rear ID Sensor - S Wave Input Numeric

Value

112-0340 Center ID Sensor - P Wave Input Numeric

Value

112-0350 Center ID Sensor - S Wave Input Numeric

Value

112-0210 ACR Shutter Sensor Input High/Low

112-0211 ACR Shutter Sensor (through Input High/Low

motor running)

Table 5-23 Finisher (Option) sensors

Item Code Name Type Status

Booklet End Fence 113-3000 Booklet End Fence Input High/Low

Home Sensor

Booklet Entrance 113-3100 Booklet Entrance Input High/Low

Sensor

Booklet Exit 113-3120 Booklet Exit Sensor Input High/Low

Booklet Fold 113-2202 Booklet Maker Input Installed/Not installed

Detection

Booklet Fold 113-3040 Booklet Blade Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Booklet Output Tray 113-2150 Booklet Output Tray Input High/Low

Sensor

532 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-23 Finisher (Option) sensors (continued)

Item Code Name Type Status

Booklet Paddle 113-3050 Booklet C-Fold Blade Input High/Low

Home Sensor

Booklet Paddle 113-3060 Booklet Diverter Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Booklet Paddle 113-3090 Booklet Paddle Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Booklet Paddle 113-3130 Booklet Presser Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Booklet Stapler 113-3010 Booklet Stapler Head Input High/Low

Sensor

Booklet Stapler 113-3020 Booklet Front Stapler Input High/Low

Cartridge Level Sensor

Booklet Stapler 113-3030 Booklet Rear Stapler Input High/Low

Cartridge Level Sensor

Booklet Tamper 113-3080 Booklet Tamper Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Booklet Tamper 113-3110 Booklet Tamper Sensor Input High/Low

Covers 113-0410 Front Cover Sensor Input High/Low

Covers 113-0420 Top Cover Sensor Input High/Low

Ejector 113-0461 Ejector1 Home Sensor Input High/Low

Ejector 113-0462 Ejector2 Home Sensor Input High/Low

Ejector 113-0463 Ejector2 Motor Sensor Input High/Low

End Fence 113-0361 End Fence Sensor Input High/Low

Entrance 113-0350 Entrance Sensor Input High/Low

Exit 113-0360 Exit Sensor Input High/Low

Finisher Connection 113-0351 Finisher Detection Input Installed/Not Installed

Sensor

Output Tray 113-0470 Paper Holding Sensor Input High/Low

Output Tray 113-0471 Output Tray Top of Input High/Low

Stack Sensor

Output Tray 113-0472 Output Tray Lower Limit Input High/Low

Sensor

Output Tray 113-0473 Output Tray Motor Input High/Low

Sensor

Paddle 113-0370 Paddle Home Sensor Input High/Low

Paper Support 113-0481 Paper Support Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Punch 113-0610 Punch Motor Sensor Input High/Low

Punch 113-0612 Punch Home Sensor Input High/Low

Punch 113-0620 Punch Waste Box Input Installed/Not Installed

Sensor

Sensors 533
 Table 5-23 Finisher (Option) sensors (continued)

Item Code Name Type Status

Punch 113-0621 Punch Waste Full Input High/Low

Sensor

Stapler 113-0430 Stapler Head Sensor Input High/Low

Stapler 113-0440 Stapler Cartridge Level Input High/Low

Sensor

Stapler 113-0451 Stapler Cartridge Input High/Low

Detection Sensor

Stapler 113-0491 Stapler Front Sensor Input High/Low

Stapler 113-0492 Stapler Rear Sensor Input High/Low

Stapler 113-0493 Stapler Front Pos Input High/Low

Sensor

Stapler 113-0494 Stapler Rear Pos Input High/Low

Sensor

Tamper 113-0380 Rear Tamper Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Tamper 113-0390 Front Tamper Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Bridge 113-2070 Bridge Entrance Input High/Low

Sensor

Bridge 113-2071 Bridge Exit Sensor Input High/Low

Bridge 113-2180 Bridge Door Sensor Input Closed/Open

Bridge 113-2200 Bridge Detection Input Installed/Not Installed

Buffer 113-2100 Buffer Sensor Input High/Low

Buffer 113-2210 Buffer Home Sensor Input High/Low

Manual Stapler 113-2160 Manual Staple Sensor Input High/Low

Manual Stapler 113-2161 Manual Staple Button Input High/Low

Sensor

Punch Detection 113-2201 Punch Detection Input Installed/Not Installed

Punch Detection 113-4000 Punch Scan Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Punch Detection 113-4060 Punch Type Detection1 Input High/Low

Punch Detection 113-4061 Punch Type Detection2 Input High/Low

SCU (Set Clam Unit) 113-2010 Paper Holding Home Input High/Low
Sensor

SCU (Set Clam Unit) 113-2141 Front Paper Holding Input High/Low
Sensor

SCU (Set Clam Unit) 113-2142 Rear Paper Holding Input High/Low
Sensor

534 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-24 Cover sensors

Code Name Type Status

102-0352 DCF Feed Cover Open Input Closed/Open

102-0435 Front Cover Sensor Input Closed/Open

102-0436 Side Cover Sensor Input Closed/Open

Table 5-25 Developer sensors

Code Name Type Status

111-0040 Yellow Toner Concentration Input Numeric

Sensor

111-0050 Magenta Toner Input Numeric

Concentration Sensor

111-0060 Cyan Toner Concentration Input Numeric

Sensor

111-0070 Black Toner Concentration Input Numeric

Sensor

Table 5-26 Drum sensors

Code Name Type Status

112-0100 Yellow Drum Home Sensor Input High/Low

112-0101 Yellow Drum Home Sensor Input High/Low

(through motor running)

112-0110 Magenta Drum Home Sensor Input High/Low

112-0111 Magenta Drum Home Sensor Input High/Low

(through motor running)

112-0120 Cyan Drum Home Sensor Input High/Low

112-0121 Cyan Drum Home Sensor Input High/Low

(through motor running)

112-0130 Black Drum Home Sensor Input High/Low

112-0131 Black Drum Home Sensor Input High/Low

(through motor running)

Table 5-27 Environmental sensors

Code Name Type Status

109-0012 Inner Temperature Sensor Input Numeric

109-0013 Outer Temperature Sensor Input Numeric

109-0014 Humidity Sensor Input Numeric

Sensors 535
 Table 5-28 Fuser sensors

Code Name Type Status

109-0000 Fuser Temperature A Sensor Input Numeric

109-0010 Fuser Temperature B Sensor Input Numeric

109-0400 Wrap Jam Sensor Input Numeric

109-0140 Fuser Gap Home Sensor Input High/Low

109-0141 Fuser Gap Home Sensor Input High/Low

(through motor running)

Table 5-29 LSU sensors

Code Name Type Status

110-0150 LSU HSync2 Sensor Input High/Low

110-0160 LSU HSync3 Sensor Input High/Low

110-0200 LSU Detection Input High/Low

109-0011 LSU Temperature Sensor Input Numeric

Table 5-30 Paper Path sensors

Item Code Name Type Status

Feed 102-0293 Feed2 Sensor Input High/Low

Output 101-0190 Out-Bin Full Sensor Input High/Low

Output 101-0191 Out-Bin2 Full Sensor Input High/Low

(Option)

Output Exit 102-0371 Exit2 Sensor Input High/Low

Duplex Jam 1 102-0380 Duplex Jam1 Sensor Input High/Low

Table 5-31 Power Supply sensors

Code Name Type Status

109-0200 Fuser Relay Sensor Input High/Low

109-0210 Zero Cross Period Input Numeric

101-1000 Power 24V Input Numeric

Table 5-32 TCU sensors

Code Name Type Status

100-0250 Waste Toner Full Sensor Input Numeric

104-0000 Waste Toner Detection Input Installed/Not Installed

Sensor

536 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-33 Toner Residual Amount sensors

Code Name Type Status

111-0045 Yellow Toner Residual Amount Input Numeric

Sensor

111-0055 Magenta Toner Residual Input Numeric

Amount Sensor

111-0065 Cyan Toner Residual Amount Input Numeric

Sensor

111-0075 Black Toner Residual Amount Input Numeric

Sensor

Table 5-34 Transfer sensors

Code Name Type Status

100-0090 ITB Engage Sensor Input High/Low

Table 5-35 Tray sensors

Item Code Name Type Status

Tray 1 102-0280 Tray 1 Paper Empty Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 2 102-0000 Tray 2 Open Sensor Input Closed/Open

Tray 2 102-0010 Tray 2 Paper Empty Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 2 102-0041 Tray 2 Paper Size Input Numeric

Sensor

Tray 2 102-0050 Tray 2 Stack Height Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 3 102-0070 Tray 3 Open Sensor Input Closed/Open

Tray 3 102-0080 Tray 3 Paper Empty Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 3 102-0111 Tray 3 Paper Size Input Numeric

Sensor

Tray 3 102-0120 Tray 3 Stack Height Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0730 Tray 4 Knock Up Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0731 Tray 4 Shift Tray Paper Input High/Low

Empty Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0732 Tray 4 Shift Tray Level Input High/Low

Sensor1

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0733 Tray 4 Shift Tray Level Input High/Low

Sensor2

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0734 Tray 4 Shift Plate Home Input High/Low

Sensor

Sensors 537
 Table 5-35 Tray sensors (continued)

Item Code Name Type Status

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0735 Tray 4 Shift Plate End Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0736 Tray 4 Gate Solenoid Input High/Low

Home Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0140 Tray 4 Open Sensor Input Closed/Open

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0150 Tray 4 Paper Empty Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0181 Tray 4 Paper Size Input Numeric 3 digits

Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0190 Tray 4 Stack Height Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0330 Tray 4 Door Open Input Closed/Open

Sensor

Tray 4 (Option) 102-0320 Tray 4 Feed Sensor Input High/Low

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0210 Tray 5 Open Sensor Input Closed/Open

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0220 Tray 5 Paper Empty Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0251 Tray 5 Paper Size Input Numeric

Sensor

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0260 Tray 5 Stack Height Input High/Low

Sensor

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0271 Tray 5 Level Sensor1 Input High/Low

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0272 Tray 5 Level Sensor2 Input High/Low

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0273 Tray 5 Detection Input Installed/Not Installed

Sensor1

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0274 Tray 5 Detection Input Installed/Not Installed

Sensor2

Tray 5 (Option) 102-0350 Tray 5 Door Open Input Closed/Open

Sensor

Table 5-36 Stacker sensors

Item Code Name Type Status

Stacker 113-1910 Bridge Entrance Input High/Low

Sensor

Stacker 113-1920 Bridge Exit Sensor Input High/Low

Stacker 113-1930 Stack Exit Sensor Input High/Low

Stacker 113-1940 Bridge Door Sensor Input Closed/Open

Stacker 113-1950 Stack Full Sensor Input High/Low

538 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Component tests
Use this menu to test components such as a motor, clutch, solenoid, fan, or bias, by selecting each
component’s callout on the control panel.

Select the callout and touch the Start button to run the component test.

NOTE: This image may differ from your control panel display.

IMPORTANT: Include this information when escalating related issues to the GBU engineer.

Table 5-37 Component types

Name Reference table

Document Feeder Motors Document Feeder Motor component tests

Scanner Motors Scanner Motor component tests

ACR/CTD ACR/CTD component tests

Finisher (Option) Finisher (Option) component tests

Developer Developer component tests

Drum Drum component tests

Duct/Reservoir Duct/Reservoir component tests

Fan Fan component tests

Fuser Fuser component tests

LSU LSU component tests

Paper Path Paper Path component tests

Power Supply Power Supply component tests

TCU TCU component tests

Toner Toner component tests

Transfer Transfer component tests

Trays Tray component tests

Component tests 539

 Table 5-37 Component types (continued)

Name Reference table

Stacker Stacker components tests

Table 5-38 Document Feeder Motor component tests

Name Type Status

ADF Tray Lift Motor Output Start/Stop

ADF Feed Motor Output Start/Stop

ADF Deskew Motor Output Start/Stop

ADF Pickup Clutch Output Start/Stop

ADF Deskew Clutch Output Start/Stop

ADF Pick Roller Up/Down Output Start/Stop

ADF Retard Motor Output Start/Stop

ADF Exit Motor Output Start/Stop

Table 5-39 Scanner Motor component tests

Name Type Status

Scanner Motor Output Start/Stop

Table 5-40 ACR/CTD component tests

Code Name Type Status

112-0200 ACR Shutter Motor Output On/Off

112-0220 ACR Shutter Open Output On/Off

112-0230 ACR Shutter Close Output On/Off

Table 5-41 Finisher (Option) component tests

Item Code Name Type Status

Booklet End Fence 113-3510 Booklet Fold Motor Output On/Off

Booklet End Fence 113-3520 Booklet End Fence Output On/Off

Solenoid

Booklet End Fence 113-3530 Booklet End Fence Output On/Off

Motor

Booklet Entrance 113-3500 Booklet Entrance Output On/Off

Motor

Booklet Entrance 113-3510 Booklet Fold Motor Output On/Off

Booklet Entrance 113-3520 Booklet End Fence Output On/Off

Solenoid

540 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-41 Finisher (Option) component tests (continued)

Item Code Name Type Status

Booklet Entrance 113-3530 Booklet End Fence Output On/Off

Motor

Booklet Fold 113-3590 Booklet C-Fold Blade Output On/Off

Motor

Booklet Paddle 113-3560 Booklet Diverter Motor Output On/Off

Booklet Paddle 113-3570 Booklet Presser Motor Output On/Off

Booklet Paddle 113-3580 Booklet Paddle Motor Output On/Off

Booklet Stapler 113-3600 Booklet Stapler Head Output On/Off

Motor

Booklet Tamper 113-3540 Booklet Tamper Motor Output On/Off

Booklet Tamper 113-3550 Booklet Blade Motor Output On/Off

Ejector 113-2530 Pre Ejector Motor Output On/Off

Ejector 113-2540 Post Ejector Motor Output On/Off

Entrance 113-2510 Paper Holding Motor Output On/Off

Entrance 113-2520 Entrance Motor - Output On/Off

Diverter

Entrance 113-2570 Entrance Motor - Output On/Off

Entrance

Exit 113-2500 Main Exit Cam Motor Output On/Off

Exit 113-2580 Exit Motor Output On/Off

Output Tray 113-2610 Main Output Tray Output On/Off

Motor

Paddle 113-2600 Paddle Motor Output On/Off

Paper Support 113-0571 Paper Support Motor Output On/Off

Punch 113-0610 Punch Motor Sensor Input High/Low

Punch 113-0600 Punch Motor Output On/Off

Punch 113-4500 Punch Scan Motor Output On/Off

Stapler 113-0550 Stapler Head Motor Output On/Off

Stapler 113-0581 Stapler Position Motor Output On/Off

Stapler 113-2620 Stapler Position Motor Output On/Off

Stapler 113-2621 Stapler Head Motor Output On/Off

Tamper 113-0520 Rear Tamper Motor Output On/Off

Tamper 113-0530 Front Tamper Motor Output On/Off

Tamper 113-2630 Front Tamper Motor Output On/Off

Tamper 113-2640 Rear Tamper Motor Output On/Off

Bridge 113-2550 Scan Gate Solenoid Output On/Off

Bridge 113-2560 Bridge Motor Output On/Off

Component tests 541

 Table 5-41 Finisher (Option) component tests (continued)

Item Code Name Type Status

Buffer 113-2660 Buffer Motor Output On/Off

Buffer 113-2670 Buffer Solenoid Output On/Off

Covers 113-2650 Top Cover LED - Blue Output On/Off

Covers 113-2651 Top Cover LED - Red Output On/Off

End Fence 113-2590 End Fence Motor Output On/Off

Table 5-42 Developer component tests

Code Name Type Status

111-0110 Yellow Toner Control Voltage Output On/Off

111-0120 Magenta Toner Control Output On/Off

Voltage

111-0130 Cyan Toner Control Voltage Output On/Off

111-0140 Black Toner Control Voltage Output On/Off

100-0070 YMC Deve Motor Input High/Low

100-0071 Black Deve Motor Input High/Low

Table 5-43 Drum component tests

Code Name Type Status

100-0046 Yellow Drum Motor Input High/Low

100-0047 Magenta Drum Motor Input High/Low

100-0048 Cyan Drum Motor Input High/Low

100-0049 Black Drum Motor Input High/Low

107-0166 Yellow Eraser Input High/Low

107-0167 Magenta Eraser Input High/Low

107-0168 Cyan Eraser Input High/Low

107-0169 Black Eraser Input High/Low

Table 5-44 Duct/Reservoir component tests

Code Name Type Status

111-0300 Yellow Toner Duct/Reservoir Output On/Off

Motor

111-0310 Magenta Toner Duct/ Output On/Off

Reservoir Motor

111-0320 Cyan Toner Duct/Reservoir Output On/Off

Motor

542 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-44 Duct/Reservoir component tests (continued)

Code Name Type Status

111-0330 Black Toner Duct/Reservoir Output On/Off

Motor

Table 5-45 Fan component tests

Code Name Type Status

100-0270 SMPS Fan Input High/Low

100-0271 SMPS Fan2 Input High/Low

Table 5-46 Fuser component tests

Code Name Type Status

109-0034 Fuser Motor - Forward Input High/Low

109-0031 Fuser Motor - Backward Output On/Off

Table 5-47 LSU component tests

Code Name Type Status

110-0000 LSU Motor1 Input High/Low

110-0320 LSU Shutter Open Output On/Off

110-0330 LSU Shutter Close Output On/Off

Table 5-48 Paper Path component tests

Item Code Name Type Status

Feed 100-0420 Tray 1 Feed Motor Output On/Off

Feed 101-0120 Tray 2 Feed Motor Output On/Off

Feed 101-0130 Tray 3 Feed Motor Output On/Off

Feed 100-0410 Registration Motor Output On/Off

Feed 101-0140 Tray 4 Feed Motor Output On/Off

(Option)

Feed 101-0150 Tray 5 Feed Motor Output On/Off

(Option)

Output 100-0430 Exit2 Motor - Forward Output On/Off

Output 100-0440 Exit2 Motor - Backward Output On/Off

Duplex 100-0140 Duplex Motor Output On/Off

Duplex 101-0280 Return Gate Solenoid Output On/Off

Component tests 543

 Table 5-49 Power Supply component tests

Item Code Name Type Status

Transfer 107-0033 THV(-) Bias Output On/Off

Transfer 107-0034 THV CC Bias Output On/Off

Transfer 107-0035 THV CV Bias Output On/Off

Transfer 107-0201 Yellow ITHV Bias Output On/Off

Transfer 107-0202 Magenta ITHV Bias Output On/Off

Transfer 107-0203 Cyan ITHV Bias Output On/Off

Transfer 107-0204 Black ITHV Bias Output On/Off

Drum 105-0000 Yellow MHV Bias Output On/Off

Drum 105-0010 Magenta MHV Bias Output On/Off

Drum 105-0020 Cyan MHV Bias Output On/Off

Drum 105-0030 Black MHV Bias Output On/Off

Developer 106-0000 Yellow Developer Bias Output On/Off

Developer 106-0010 Magenta Developer Output On/Off

Bias

Developer 106-0020 Cyan Developer Bias Output On/Off

Developer 106-0030 Black Developer Bias Output On/Off

Developer 106-0031 Black Developer AC Output On/Off

Bias

Developer 106-0032 Cyan Developer AC Output On/Off

Bias

Developer 106-0033 Magenta Developer AC Output On/Off

Bias

Developer 106-0034 Yellow Developer AC Output On/Off

Bias

Table 5-50 TCU component tests

Code Name Type Status

100-0240 Waste Toner Motor Output On/Off

100-0241 Waste Toner LED Output On/Off

Table 5-51 Toner component tests

Code Name Type Status

111-0000 Yellow Toner Dispense Motor Output On/Off

111-0010 Magenta Toner Dispense Output On/Off

Motor

111-0020 Cyan Toner Dispense Motor Output On/Off

544 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Table 5-51 Toner component tests (continued)

Code Name Type Status

111-0030 Black Toner Dispense Motor Output On/Off

111-0400 Yellow Toner Unlock Motor Output On/Off

111-0410 Magenta Toner Unlock Motor Output On/Off

111-0420 Cyan Toner Unlock Motor Output On/Off

111-0430 Black Toner Unlock Motor Output On/Off

Table 5-52 Transfer component tests

Code Name Type Status

100-0080 ITB Engage Motor Output On/Off

Table 5-53 Tray component tests

Item Code Name Type Status

Tray 1 Clutch 101-0270 Tray 1 Clutch Output On/Off

Tray 1 101-0271 Tray 1 Solenoid Output On/Off

Tray 1 101-0272 Tray 1 Pickup Clutch Output On/Off

Tray 2 100-0200 Tray 2 Pickup Motor - Output On/Off

Lift

Tray 2 100-0370 Tray 2 Pickup Motor - Output On/Off

Pickup

Tray 3 100-0210 Tray 3 Pickup Motor - Output On/Off

Lift

Tray 3 100-0380 Tray 3 Pickup Motor - Output On/Off

Pickup

Tray 4 (Option) 100-0220 Tray 4 Pickup Motor - Output On/Off

Lift

Tray 4 (Option) 100-0390 Tray 4 Pickup Motor - Output On/Off

Pickup

Tray 4 (Option) 101-0101 Tray 4 Shift Gate Output On/Off

Solenoid

Tray 4 (Option) 100-0232 Tray 4 Shift Motor Output On/Off

Tray 5 (Option) 100-0230 Tray 5 Pickup Motor - Output On/Off

Lift

Tray 5 (Option) 100-0400 Tray 5 Pickup Motor - Output On/Off

Pickup

Component tests 545

 Table 5-54 Stacker component tests

Item Code Name Type Status

Stacker 113-1910 Bridge Entrance Input High/Low

Sensor

Stacker 113-1920 Bridge Exit Sensor Input High/Low

Stacker 113-1930 Bridge Door Sensor Input High/Low

Stacker 113-1940 Stack Full Sensor Input High/Low

Stacker 113-1960 Scan Gate Solenoid Output On/Off

Stacker 113-1970 Bridge Motor Output On/Off

Stacker 113-1980 Stack Motor Output On/Off

TR Control Mode
Use this menu to correct transfer related problems. This menu can be used to change the transfer value
to optimize image quality for a certain type of paper.

Figure 5-39 Typical faulty images

● T1 Control Mode

– Process Speed: Default is Full. Select the appropriate speed for the paper type.

546 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 – T1 PWM: Default is 0. Each color can be adjusted from -20 to +20. For example:

○ Gray Spot: Increase T1 PWM value of the issued color.

○ Non-Cyclic White Line: Decrease T1 PWM value of the issued color.

○ OPC-Cyclic Ghost: Decrease T1 PWM value of the issued color.

● T2 Control Mode

– T2 PWM: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -20 to +20. For example:

○ Blur: Increase T2 PWM value.

○ Poor Transfer: Increase T2 PWM value.

○ Re-Transfer: Decrease T2 PWM value.

○ White Spot: Decrease T2 PWM value.

○ OPC Cyclic Ghost: Decrease T2 PWM value.

Drain
Use this menu to forcibly purge stressed toner from a development unit into the toner collection unit and
supply new toner to the development unit.

IMPORTANT: Use this feature to improve image problems, such as low density, that occur when many
low-coverage images are printed.

Drain 547
 Figure 5-40 Typical faulty images

● Off (default): Disable this function.

● On: Drain level will be set automatically.

● Level: As the level increases, the amount of toner drained will be increased.

Low-temperature Idling Mode

Use this menu to improve print quality in low temperatures (below 7°C/ (44.6 °F)). Environment quality
issues include rib marks (duplex), blisters in the printed image, or poor fusing, as show below.

548 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Figure 5-41 Typical faulty images

● Off (default): Disable this function.

● On: The printer will perform this function.

NOTE: When this function is enabled, the printer will perform the fuser idle for 4 to 10 minutes before
printing, depending on the outside temperature (below 7°C/ (44.6 °F)). Printing speed is therefore slower
than when this function is off.

Altitude Adjustment
Use this menu to choose the altitude of the place where the printer is located. The print quality is
affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level.

Figure 5-42 Typical faulty images

● Normal (default): 0 ~ 1,000 m (3,280 ft)

● High 1: 1,000 m (3,280 ft) ~ 2,000 m (6,561 ft)

● High 2: 2,000 m (6,561 ft) ~ 3,000 m (9,842 ft)

● High 3: 3,000 m (9,842 ft) ~ 4,000 m (13,123 ft)

Altitude Adjustment 549

 ● High 4: 4,000 m (13,123 ft) ~ 5,000 m (16,404 ft)

Humidity
Use this menu to troubleshoot print quality issues such as paper curl, dog ears, and poor paper stacking
in the stacker output bins.

Increase the Humidity level from High 1 to High 3 until the print quality issues are resolved.

NOTE: Printing speed will be slow when the Humidity level is set to High 3.

Figure 5-43 Typical faulty images

● Normal (default)

● High 1: Preheating Idling for 13 seconds before the first job and increased gap for paper transfer (150
mm (6 in), Simplex only)

● High 2: Preheating Idling for 18 seconds before the first job and increased gap for paper transfer
(200 mm (7.9 in), Simplex only)

● High 3: Preheating Idling for 20 seconds before the first job, increased gap for paper transfer (65 mm
(2.5 in), Simplex only), and 50% process speed slow-down

Footer
Use this menu to add printing information at the bottom of the printed page.

● Off (default): Disables this function.

● On: The printer performs this function.

PTT Test Mode

Use this menu to determine whether a fax transmission meets local standards.

Test Support
Use this menu to test the items listed below.

550 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 ● Continuous Scan

● Continuous Copy

● Raw Scan

● Continuous Print From USB

● Automatic Calibrations

● Runtime Configuration

Part Replacement Count

Use this menu to display the number of parts replaced.

Table 5-55 Part Replacement Count items

Item

Black Cartridge

Cyan Cartridge

Magenta Cartridge

Yellow Cartridge

Black Drum

Cyan Drum

Magenta Drum

Yellow Drum

Black Developer Unit

Cyan Developer Unit

Magenta Developer Unit

Yellow Developer Unit

Fuser Kit

Transfer Belt

Transfer Cleaning Unit

Transfer Roller

Tray 1 Roller Kit

Tray 2 Roller Kit

Tray 3 Roller Kit

Tray 4 Roller Kit (Option)

Tray 5 Roller Kit (Option)

Reset Supplies
Use this menu to reset the supplies counters.

Part Replacement Count 551

 IMPORTANT: After replacing a supply kit, use this function.

Table 5-56 Reset Supplies items

Item

Black Developer Unit

Cyan Developer Unit

Magenta Developer Unit

Yellow Developer Unit

Transfer Belt

Transfer Cleaning Unit

Transfer Roller

Tray 1 Roller Kit

Tray 2 Roller Kit

Tray 3 Roller Kit

Tray 4 Roller Kit (Option)

Tray 5 Roller Kit (Option)

Fax V.29 Speed

Use this menu to select Line 1 or 2 of V.29, which will transmit at 9600 bps for faxes over VoIP when the
VoIP connection is failing.

Maintenance menu
Use this menu to access features for maintaining the printer.

Table 5-57 Maintenance menu

First level Second level Third level

Backup/Restore

Import/Export

Calibration/Cleaning Advanced Calibration Support ACR Reference Adjustment

Calibration/Cleaning Advanced Calibration Support Auto Color Registration

Calibration/Cleaning Advanced Calibration Support Full Auto Color Registration

Calibration/Cleaning Advanced Calibration Support Custom Color

Calibration/Cleaning Advanced Calibration Support Auto Tone Adjustment

Calibration/Cleaning Advanced Calibration Support CTD Sensor Cleaning

Calibration/Cleaning Advanced Calibration Support Setting Standard Tone

Calibration/Cleaning Advanced Calibration Support Manual Tone Adjustment

Calibration/Cleaning Color Calibration

552 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Table 5-57 Maintenance menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level

Calibration/Cleaning Calibrate Scanner

Calibration/Cleaning ITB Heating Mode

USB Firmware Upgrade

Enhanced 1200 DPI Print Quality

License Management

Backup/Restore
Use this menu to create a backup copy of the product configuration and settings. Use the backup copy
to restore settings when configuration recovery is necessary.

Import/Export
Use this menu to export files that can be used to configure other devices. Select which settings,
contacts, or user accounts to include in the export. The files can be imported to other devices including
those with different capabilities. Any imported settings that are not available on the target device will be
ignored.

ACR Reference Adjustment

Use this menu to correct the color registration of the LSU unit when the LSU unit is replaced or
reinstalled.

● Start: The printer performs this function now.

● Set to Default: The correction value for color misalignment caused by the LSU unit is cleared and
reset to the initial state

Auto Color Registration

Use this menu to correct the color registration automatically when color misalignment occurs.

NOTE: You can select Start to manually perform this operation when the printer prints images such
as those shown below.

Backup/Restore 553
 Figure 5-44 Color registration errors

● Off: Disable this function.

● On (default): The printer will perform this function within the determined conditions. After selecting
“On”, you can select the condition(s) for the Automatic Color Registration.

– Page Condition: The printer will perform ACR based on the count of printed pages since the last
ACR. (Printed Pages:100 to 5000, Default: 500)

– LSU Temperature: The printer will perform ACR when the LSU temperature of the device
increases or decreases by the configured value since the last ACR. (Temperature increment:
1° to 10° C 33.8° to 50° F, Default: 3° C 37.4 F).

● Start: The printer performs this function now.

Full Auto Color Registration

Use this menu to the correct color registration of the printer automatically when color misalignment
occurs. This function is an enhanced version of the Auto Color Registration, and takes a few minutes to
complete.

NOTE: You can select Start to manually perform this operation when the printer prints images such
as those shown below.

554 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 Figure 5-45 Color registration errors

● Off: Disables this function.

● On (default): The printer will perform this function during boot up.

● Start: The printer performs this function immediately (after first selecting On).

Custom Color
Use this menu to adjust the color density manually in order to meet the customer's needs.

● Yellow: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -10 to +10.

● Magenta: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -10 to +10.

● Cyan: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -10 to +10.

● Black: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -10 to +10.

Auto Tone Adjustment

Use this menu to adjust color tone automatically.

● Off: Disables this function.

● On (Default): The printer will perform this function when the following determined conditions have
been met.

– After Pages Printed: The printer will perform this function based on the count of printed pages
since the last execution.

– After Period of Inactivity (Minutes): The printer will perform this function when the printer returns
from a power save mode and the rest time exceed the configured value.

– Adaptive: Unchecked as a default.

Custom Color 555

 ● Start: The printer performs this function now.

NOTE: Select Start to manually perform this operation when the control panel displays sensor failure
errors such as “CTD sensor calibration failure,” or when imaging parts such as the OPC drum,
development unit, or ITB unit are replaced or reinstalled.

CTD Sensor Cleaning

Use this menu to calibrate the CTD sensor after cleaning the CTD and ACR sensor, when the control
panel displays sensor errors such as “CTD sensor calibration failure” or “ACR sensor calibration failure.”

● Start: The printer performs this function immediately, and the sensor failure error message is
cleared from the control panel.

Setting Standard Tone

Use this menu to adjust the color tone to the standard tone set by the factory.

This function must be executed when the printer is first installed.

● Start: Perform this function by completing the following the steps.

1. Load A4 or Letter-size paper in a short-edge feeding (SEF) tray. Select Next to continue.

2. Confirm that the scanned ID chart is correct. Select Next to continue.

3. Load the scanned ID chart on the flatbed as indicated. After the page is loaded, select Next
continue.

4. After calibrating the scanner, confirm the results of the calibration. Select Finish to complete.

556 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 5. After completion, start the Auto Tone Adjustment so that the Standard Tone can be applied
immediately.

● Set to Default: Restores the Standard Tone setting to default values.

NOTE: Select Start to manually perform this operation after replacing the ITB unit or cleaning the
CTD sensor.

NOTE: When a problem occurs with the scanned ID chart, an error message displays. Check the
following items:

● Check the scanned ID chart for correct placement.

● Make sure that the chart direction is horizontal.

● Retry the Setting Standard Tone procedure.

Manual Tone Adjustment

Use this menu to adjust the color tone manually.

This function can adjust Highlights, Midtones, and Shadows.

● Yellow: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -5 to +5.

● Magenta: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -5 to +5.

● Cyan: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -5 to +5.

● Black: Default is 0. It can be adjusted from -5 to +5.

Color Calibration
Use this menu to perform a color calibration manually. This process is very similar to the Auto Color
Registration process.

● Start: The printer performs this function immediately.

Manual Tone Adjustment 557

 Calibrate Scanner
Use this menu when messages on the control panel direct you to run the calibration process.

● Start: The printer performs this function immediately.

ITB Heating Mode

This option allows you to heat the fuser at a selected time on selected days of the week.

This feature is Off by default.

When On is selected, you can set the time and days of the week when the fuser should be heated.

USB Firmware Upgrade

Use this menu to perform a firmware upgrade using a USB flash drive.

Insert the USB flash drive that contains a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and then follow the
on-screen instructions.

● Install: Executes the firmware upgrade.

Enhanced 1200 DPI Print Quality

Use this menu to control printed image quality and performance when printing with 1200 dpi.

● Off (default): Printing speed is improved, but the image quality is lower than when the Enhanced 1200
DPI Printer Quality option is enabled.

● On: Image quality is improved, but the printing speed is slower than when the Enhanced 1200 DPI
Printer Quality option is disabled.

License Management
Use this menu to install a speed license, which will configure the engine to print at an upgraded speed.

Use one of the following procedures to install the speed license.

● Install a speed license from the HP Cloud using the control panel.

IMPORTANT: When an inner finisher is installed, the printer cannot exceed 60 pages-per minute
(ppm). Do not install a speed license higher than 60 ppm for a printer with an inner finisher
installed.

1. Connect a network cable to the printer.

2. Turn the printer power on, and wait for it to initialize to the Ready state.

3. Verify that the printer has a valid IP address and a working internet connection.

NOTE: A proxy server might need to be configured now using the Embedded Web Server
(EWS) or manually at the control panel.

4. At the printer Home screen, scroll to and then touch the Support Tools button.

5. Select the License Management menu in the left-side navigation pane.

558 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

 6. Select License from HP Cloud under Upload and Install License.

IMPORTANT: A redemption code must be obtained from the HP Printer License Activation
and Management website. https://activation.jamangement.hp.com.

7. Type in the redemption code obtained from the HP Printer License Activation and Management
website.

8. Select the Register and Install button.

NOTE: The printer restarts as part of the installation process. Wait at least a few minutes
after the printer initializes to the Ready state to allow the speed license installation process to
finish completely.

● Install a speed license offline manually using the HP Printer License Activation and Management
web site.

IMPORTANT: When an inner finisher is installed, the printer cannot exceed 60 pages-per minute
(ppm). Do not install a speed license higher than 60 ppm for a printer with an inner finisher
installed.

1. Download the speed license file to the PC from the HP Cloud Server.

a. Open a browser and go to the HP Printer License Activation and Management website:
https://activation.jamanagement.hp.com.

b. Select the country/region and SIGN IN on the HP Partner Portal.

c. Select Activation speed for new HP LaserJets or select Product Number.

d. Type the printer serial number in the Device Serial Number field.

e. Use the drop-down menu to select the Device Product Number.

f. Type in the redemption code in the Redemption Code field.

NOTE: A redemption code must be obtained from the HP Printer License Activation and
Management website. https://activation.jamanagement.hp.com.

License Management 559

 g. Click the Register button.

h. When the registration is complete, download the speed license file to the computer, and
then transfer it to a USB storage device.

CAUTION: The license file must be saved in the root directory of the USB device. Do not
change the license file name.

2. Use the steps below to manually install the speed license.

a. Turn the printer power on, and wait for it to initialize to the Ready state.

b. Insert the USB into the USB port on the printer.

c. At the printer Home screen, scroll to and then touch the Support Tools button.

d. Select License from the USB under Upload and Install License.

e. Touch the Register and Install button.

IMPORTANT: The printer installs the highest speed license among the license files on the
USB device. Remove any license files for speeds above 60 ppm for a printer with an inner
finisher installed. Speed upgrades cannot be downgraded.

NOTE: If the USB device is not detected, remove the USB device and turn the printer
power off. Reinsert the USB device, and then turn the printer power on.

560 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Troubleshooting menu
Use this menu to access features for troubleshooting the printer.

Table 5-58 Troubleshooting menu

First level Second level

Reports Configuration/Status Pages

Reports Fax Reports

Reports Other Pages

Fax Tools Fax T.30 Trace Report

Fax Tools Fax V.34

Fax Tools JBIG Compression

Fax Tools Fax Speaker Mode

Fax Tools Fax Service Log

Fax Tools IP Fax Trace Report

Fax Tools IP Fax Log Level

Fax Tools IP Fax Multitasking

Print Quality Pages PQ Troubleshooting Pages

Print Quality Pages Color Band Test

Print Quality Pages Advanced Print Quality Pages

Event Log

Paper Path Page

Diagnostic Tests Run Fax Test

Retrieve Diagnostic Data

Retrieve Fax Diagnostic Data

Troubleshooting menu 561

 Configuration/Status Pages
Use this menu to display ( ) or print ( ) the information listed below.

NOTE: For more information on these reports, see Reports menu.

● Settings Menu Map

● Current Settings Page

● Configuration Page

● How to Connect Page

● Supplies Status Page

● Usage Page

● File Directory Page

● Web Services Status Page

● Color Usage Job Log

● HP Flex Build Configuration Page

● Event Log

● Paper Path Page

Fax Reports
Use this menu to display ( ) or print ( ) the information listed below.

● Fax Activity Log

● Billing Codes Report

● Blocked Fax List

● Fax Call Report

Other Pages
Use this menu to print ( ) the information listed below.

● Demonstration Page

● RGB Samples

● CMYK Sample

● PCL Font List

● PS Font List

● Secure Drum Data Erase

562 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Fax T.30 Trace Report
Use this menu to print the Fax trace reports with the selected conditions on each Line 1 or Line 2.

The T.30 trace is a printed report which produces a record of all the communications between the
sending and receiving fax machines for the last fax transmission or reception. The report has many
technical details which are usually beyond the scope of most users. However, the report contains
detailed error codes and other information that might be useful in troubleshooting a particular problem
related to sending or receiving a fax. The report contents might be requested by an HP service
representative when trying to determine the cause of a problem and will help to determine the
appropriate action.

● Never automatically print: The printer does not print the fax trace report.

● Print after every fax: The printer will print the fax trace report after every fax job.

● Print only after fax send jobs: The printer will print the fax trace report after sending a fax job.

● Print only after received faxes: The printer will print the fax trace report after receiving a fax job.

● Print only after fax send errors: The printer will print the fax trace report when a fax sending error
occurs.

● Print only after fax receive errors: The printer will print the fax trace report when a fax receiving error
occurs.

● Print only after any fax error: The printer will print the fax trace report when any fax error occurs.

● Print Now: The printer prints the fax trace report immediately.

Fax V.34
Use this menu to resolve a fax sending or receiving problem on each Line 1 or Line 2.

The V.34 setting is the modem protocol that the printer uses to send faxes. It is the worldwide standard
for full-duplex modems that send and receive data across telephone lines at up to 33,600 bits per
second (bps). The factory-set default for the V.34 setting is On.

You should change the V.34 setting only if you are having trouble sending a fax to or receiving a fax from
a particular device. Turning off the setting might be useful when you are trying to send a fax overseas, or
receive one from overseas, or if you are using a satellite telephone connection.

● Enable (default): The Fax V.34 is activated.

● Disable: The Fax V.34 is not activated.

JBIG Compression
Use this menu to resolve a fax sending problem when another receiving fax device cannot support it.

JBIG compression can reduce fax transmission times significantly when enabled. When enabled,
documents will be JBIG encoded when sending and receiving with another JBIG capable fax device.
When a fax is sent to or received from a non-JBIG capable device, other compression algorithms will be
used.

● On: JBIG compression is enabled.

● Off (default): JBIG compression is disabled.

Fax T.30 Trace Report 563

 Fax Speaker Mode
Use this menu to enable or disable the fax speaker mode.

● Normal (default): The fax modem speaker is turned on during dialing through the initial connection
and then shuts off.

● Diagnostic: The speaker is turned on and remains on for all fax communications until the setting is
returned to Normal mode.

Fax Service Log

Use this menu to print the detailed fax service log.

● Print: The printer prints the detailed fax service log.

IP Fax Trace Report

Use this menu to print the IP fax trace report.

● Never automatically print

● Print after every fax

● Print only after fax send jobs

● Print only after received faxes

● Print only after fax send errors

● Print only after fax receive errors

● Print after any fax error

IP Fax Log Level

Use this menu to print the IP fax log level.

● None

● Terse

● Verbose

IP Fax Multitasking
Use this menu for the IP fax multitasking.

● On

● Off

PQ Troubleshooting Pages
Use this menu to check the print quality with a printed test page.

● Print: The printer prints the PQ troubleshooting pages.

564 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the PQ troubleshooting pages. Review the PQ
troubleshooting pages, and perform the corresponding troubleshooting procedure below.

NOTE: The images below are only examples and may not exactly match your output. Black toner is
being used for clarity.

Toner smear
As shown below, the issue may vary in location and appearance.

Description

A portion of the image is smeared in the feed (horizontal) direction. The section that is smeared may be a
narrow or wide streak, and may extend across the entire page.

Most likely causes

● An internal part of the intermediate-transfer belt (ITB) unit is out of place and is smearing the black
toner over the surface of the ITB unit.

● Smears occur more commonly after a paper jam, or during the first daily printing in a high-
temperature, high-humidity environment.

● Torn edges of media caught in the ITB unit cleaning blade and not cleared after a paper jam can also
cause toner smear.

Troubleshooting and suggestions

1. If the smear was first observed after a paper jam, check the ITB unit for torn pieces of paper. Then
go to the next step.

2. Print approximately 10 pages to see if the smear clears. If the toner smear still can be observed, go
to the next step.

3. Replace the ITB unit.

4. After replacing the ITB unit, print another set of PQ troubleshooting pages.

5. Look at the new set of PQ troubleshooting test pages. If the issue is not resolved, contact HP.

PQ Troubleshooting Pages 565

 ITB cleaning blade streak
As shown below, the issue may vary in location and appearance.

Description

The page has one or more dark or brown streaks in the feed (horizontal) direction that extend across the
entire page (outside the printable area).

Most likely causes

● The cleaning blade in the intermediate-transfer belt (ITB) unit may be nicked or deformed.

Troubleshooting and suggestions

1. 1. Print 10-30 PQ troubleshooting pages to see if the streaks clear.

2. If the streaks continue, replace the ITB unit.

3. After replacing the ITB unit, print another set of PQ troubleshooting pages.

4. Look at the new set of PQ troubleshooting test pages. If the issue is not resolved, contact HP.

Sharp banding repeating

As shown below, the issue may vary in location and appearance.

566 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Description

Pages print with sharp, narrow, dark bands repeating.

Most likely causes

● The developer roller in the black image drum.

Troubleshooting and suggestions

1. Replace the black image drum.

2. After replacing the black image drum, print another set of PQ troubleshooting pages.

3. Look at the new set of test pages. If the issue is not resolved, contact HP.

Partial Missing color plane

As shown below, the issue may vary in location and appearance.

Description

PQ Troubleshooting Pages 567

 The background color of the black test page is missing toner. The boundary between where the toner is
present and not present creates a wavy pattern.

Most likely causes

● One of the transfer rollers in the intermediate-transfer belt unit does not have even pressure across
the belt.

● Toner level is low in the black image drum and there is a problem replenishing the toner from the
black toner cartridge.

Troubleshooting and suggestions

1. Check the ITB unit to see whether the bushings are correctly positioned.

2. Print another set of PQ troubleshooting pages.

3. Look at the new set of test pages. If the issue is not resolved, then check the printer toner cartridge.

4. Print and examine another set of PQ troubleshooting pages.

5. If the issue is not resolved by the black image drum test procedure, contact HP.

Color Band Test

Use this menu to print a color band test page.

● Copies: 1 to 30 (default:1)

● Print: The printer prints the color band test pages.

Advanced Print Quality Pages

Use this menu to print test pages with the selected test page type.

● Print: The printer prints the selected quality test pages

– EP Calibration Pattern2 Halftone

– Tone Curve Int Calibration YM Pattern

– Tone Curve Int Calibration CK Pattern

– Tone Curve Ext Measurement Page

– Black Mechanical Banding Page

– Cyan Mechanical Banding Page

– Magenta Mechanical Banding Page

– Color Registration Check for Motion

Event Log
Use this menu to display and print event logs such as an event code, date/time, cycles and repetitions on
the printer.

● Print ( ): The printer prints the event logs.

568 Chapter 5 Control panel menus

Paper Path Page
Use this menu to display and print a paper path usage on the printer.

● Print: The printer prints the paper path usage report.

Run Fax Test

Use this menu to perform tests on specific components within the product to determine whether the
components are functioning correctly.

The printer prints a fax test report. The report contains the following possible results.

● Pass: The report contains all of the current fax settings. The printer is ready to send and receive
faxes.

● Fail: The report indicates the nature of the error and contains information on how to resolve the
issue.

Retrieve Diagnostic Data

Use this feature to generate debug data and to retrieve that diagnostic data from the product.

Select from the following options:

● Create zipped debug information file: This option creates a .zip file that can be saved only to a USB
device.

● Create device data file: This option creates a device data file. By default it is sent to a USB drive.
Select Send to Email to send the file as an email instead.

Retrieve Fax Diagnostic Data

Use this menu to export Fax diagnostic data from the printer using a USB drive.

Insert a USB drive into the USB port. Click the Save button.

Paper Path Page 569

 6 Remove and replace

You will learn more about remove and replace.

Before servicing
Learn about ordering parts, using part lists. electrostatic precautions, and the HP service approch.

Order parts by authorized service providers

Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.

Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.

Table 6-1 Ordering

Item or provider Description

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your
computer, enter the printer IP address or host name
in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to
the HP SureSupply web site, which provides options for
purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.

Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part
is orderable.

How to use parts lists and diagrams

Learn how to use the parts lists and diagrams.

The figures in this chapter show the major sub-assemblies in the printer and their component parts.
A parts list table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. The table lists the item number, the
associated part number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a
field replacement unit (FRU).

NOTE: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical parts, pay
careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the part description. Doing so will make sure that the
selected part number is for the correct printer model.

570 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 NOTE: The abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components described as
a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and
sensors.

ESD precautions
Learn the importance of electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder
when removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If
an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground
before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

Service approach
Learn more about the service approach.

Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

Precautions when assembling and disassembling

● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage,
and current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the
machine, circuit overload, fire, or electric shock.

● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause
the printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.

● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This
printer contains different kinds of screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short
circuit or electric shock.

● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is
disassembled, dust might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There
are no serviceable parts inside the laser scanner assembly.

● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to
overheating and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.

Precautions when handling PCAs

Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a
PCA. Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

ESD precautions 571

 – Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before
touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or
cause electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors,
motors, or lamps, as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted
in their original positions.

– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If
an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal
chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches might easily break. Be careful when
releasing them. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is
latched.

Before performing service

Learn what to do before performing service.

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.

● Remove any finishing devices and the side HCI, if they are installed.

● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an
ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

● Remove the toner cartridges, if needed.

After performing service

Learn what to do after performing service.

● Verify that the service performed was successful.

● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

● Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new
issues.

● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

572 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:

Print-quality test
Learn about the print-quality test.

1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.

4. Print a configuration page.

5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print
quality defects.

6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.

Copy-quality test
Learn about the copy-quality test.

1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder, print a copy job, and then verify the results.

2. Place the configuration page on the flatbed glass, print a copy job, and then verify the results

Fax-quality test
Learn about the fax-quality test.

1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder.

2. Type a valid fax number, and send the fax job.

3. Verify that the send quality and the receive quality meet expectations.

Parts removal order

For procedures and/or steps that require identifying the right, left, or rear side of the printer, face the
front of the printer for correct orientation.

Essential adjustments when replacing or reinstalling the

supplies or LLCs
Adjustments required when replacing or reinstalling specific parts.

When replacing or disassembling-reinstalling the following major LLC parts that can affect print quality
among the parts installed in the device, essential processes must be performed to maintain optimal
printing quality.

Please be careful as registration problems or low-quality images may be output if the required elements
are not performed. Different processes may be required for each product or part.

Post-service test 573

 Applicable items
The following parts require essential adjustments when replaced.

LSU, Developer unit, ITB unit, Drum unit, Drum and developer drive assembly(or single drum motor), and
CPR assembly

LSU

● How to perform the ACR Reference Adjustment

● How to perform Auto Color Registration

● How to perform Auto Tone Adjustment, recommended to proceed 2 or 3 times

● How to set Standard Tone, optional

Developer unit or ITB

● How to perform Auto Color Registration

● How to perform Auto Tone Adjustment, recommended to proceed 2 or 3 times

● How to set Standard Tone, optional

● How to Reset Supplies

Drum unit, Drum and developer drive assembly, or CPR assembly

● How to perform Auto Color Registration

● How to perform Auto Tone Adjustment, recommended to proceed 2 or 3 times

● How to set Standard Tone, optional

● Reset Supplies

NOTE: HP provides not only the drum and developer drive assembly, but also the motor within this
part for service. When replacing this single motor, you must follow the same recommended process
above to operate the product in optimal condition.

How to perform the ACR Reference Adjustment

Use the following to adjust the ACR reference.

A pattern is printed out to determine the linearity characteristics of the main laser scanning direction,
and detailed laser scanning unit correction is performed by scanning this pattern. This function must be
performed after LSU replacement or LSU reinstalling.

1. Open the following menus:

● Service Tools

● Service - Access Code

● Advanced Service

● Calibration/Cleaning

● ACR Reference Adjustment

574 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Follow the guidance on the screen and perform the calibration process.

a. Select the “Start” button.

b. Load A4 size blank paper in Tray 3 LEF (long edge feeding) direction. Then touch Next.

How to perform the ACR Reference Adjustment 575

 c. A test pattern will print out, check the arrow direction on the printed image then touch Next.

d. Load the printed page on the flatbed as indicated, be sure to set the direction with arrow
direction. Then touch Next.

576 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 e. Calibration will be processed, then check whether the process has correctly finished.

NOTE: If the calibration process failed, the device will show an error message ( ).

● (0) - Success

● (1) (2) (3) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (ff) - pattern identification, engine, scanning error during the
process.

In this case, do the adjustment process again and check the hardware installment
condition again.

How to perform Auto Color Registration

Use this procedure to run the auto color registration.

Use this menu to correct the color registration automatically when color misalignment occurs.

Figure 6-1 Color registration errors

How to perform Auto Color Registration 577

 1. Open the following menus:

● Service Tools

● Service - Access Code

● Advanced Service

● Calibration/Cleaning

● Full Auto Color Registration (E786 /E877 series) or Auto Color Registration (E785 series)

2. Select the Start button to perform the calibration process immediately. It may take several minutes.

How to perform LSU Skew Adjustment

Use the following to adjust LSU skew.

In the case of the E786 and E785 series, image distortion caused by LSU must be manually corrected by
an engineer. The user directly performs the process of changing the value defined in “Skew” to 200±7 by
printing the Auto Color Registration report.

1. Open the following menus:

● Service Tools

● Service - Access Code

● Advanced Service

● Service Reports

578 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Check the “Auto Color Registration” menu, then select the Print button. An Auto Color Registration
page will be printed out.

3. Check the “Skew” values. If the output value is not 200±7, skew adjustment must be performed
manually.

a. Open the front door, then remove the Toner Collection Unit (TCU).

How to perform LSU Skew Adjustment 579

 b. Check the location of the hole to adjust the skew of the problematic color.

C
M
Y

c. Determine the value that needs to be adjusted through calculation.

Calculate formula: Skew value-200

(Examples)

● (1) Y skew value: 230, 230-200 = +30

● (2) M skew value: 220, 220-200 = +20

● (3) C skew value: 190, 190-200 = -10

d. Adjust the skew using the value calculated previously. At this time, 1 calculated value is 1 click.

● Calculated value = 0, No adjustment needed.

580 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Calculated value < 0: Rotate the driver in a counterclockwise (CCW) direction.

● Calculated value > 0: Rotate the driver in a clockwise (CW) direction.

(Examples)

● (1) Y skew value: +30, rotate 30 clicks in CW

● (2) M skew value: +20, rotate 20 clicks in CW

● (3) C skew value: -10, rotate 10 clicks in CCW

4. Print the Auto Color Registration page again. Check whether the adjusted Skew value is 200. If it is
not 200, repeat the above process to adjust.

How to perform Auto Tone Adjustment

Use the following to adjust the auto tone.

If the tone (density) of the printed image is not appropriate, use this function to adjust it for correct
expression.

It is recommended to perform this function when parts related to image output have been replaced or
reinstalled.

When this function is performed, a test pattern is drawn on the ITB, and the CPR sensor recognizes it
and automatically adjusts the concentration to produce optimal printing results.

1. Open the following menus:

● Service Tools

● Service - Access Code

● Advanced Service

● Calibration/Cleaning

● Auto Tone Adjustment

How to perform Auto Tone Adjustment 581

 2. Select the Start button to perform the calibration process immediately. It might take several
minutes.

3. It is recommended to perform 2 or 3 times.

How to set Standard Tone

Use the following process when setting standard tone.

If the tone (density) of the printed image is not appropriate, use this function to adjust it for correct
expression. It is recommended to perform this function when parts are related to the image.

This is an Optional procedure.

1. Open the following menus:

● Service Tools

● Service - Access Code

● Advanced Service

● Calibration/Cleaning

● Setting Standard Tone

582 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Select the Start button to perform the calibration process immediately.

a. Load new paper into Tray3 in the same orientation short edge first (SEF) as shown in the
picture then press the Next button.

How to set Standard Tone 583

 b. One sheet of test pattern is printed. Check if output page is printed correctly. Then touch Next.

c. Place the printed test pattern on the flatbed scanner. Make sure the arrow on the printout is
located in the upper left corner as shown in the picture. Touch Next to continue.

584 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 d. The Calibration procedure will be processed. Check whether the procedure completed
successfully.

NOTE: If the calibration process failed, the device will show an error message ( ).

● (0) - Success

● (1) (2) (3) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (ff) - pattern identification, engine, scanning error during the
process.

In this case, do the adjustment process again and check the hardware installment
condition again.

How to Reset Supplies

Use the following procedure to reset the supplies.

When replacing a supply that does not store usage-related data, you must access Service Tools to
initialize usage information. If you do not go through this process, you may not be able to use the product
properly for its entire life.

1. Open the following menus:

● Service Tools

● Service - Access Code

● Reset Supplies

2. Check the supply kit that needs to be reset and then press the Reset button.

NOTE: Selectable supply kits may vary depending on the product.

How to Reset Supplies 585

 Base printer
Learn about base printer parts removal and replacement.

Covers
Learn about base printer cover replacement.

Base covers
Review the base cover removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Rear upper cover

Learn about removing and replacing the rear upper cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the rear upper cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

586 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-2 Part information

Part number Part description

6EQ94-40014 Rear upper cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-2 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

Remove the controller cover 587

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-3 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-4 Remove the cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

588 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear lower cover

Learn about removing and replacing the rear lower cover.

View a video on how to replace the rear lower cover

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-3 Part information

Part number Part description

6EQ94-40004 Rear lower cover

Removal and replacement: Rear lower cover 589

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-5 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

590 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-6 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-7 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the rear lower cover 591

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-8 Remove the cover

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

592 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Controller cover

Learn about removing and replacing the controller cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the controller cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-4 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-61005 Controller cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Controller cover 593

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-9 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

594 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit rear cover

Learn about removing and replacing the exit rear cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the exit rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-5 Part information

Part number Part description

6EQ94-40009 Exit rear cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

●
Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

Removal and replacement: Exit rear cover 595

 ■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-10 Remove the cover

2. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-11 Remove the cover

596 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the left upper cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-12 Remove the cover

4. Remove the exit rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit rear cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-13 Remove the cover

Remove the left upper cover 597

 5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left top cover

Learn about removing and replacing the left top cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the left top cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

598 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-6 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04534B Left top cover

Required tools
● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the left top over

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-14 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the left top over 599

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left upper cover

Learn about removing and replacing the left upper cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-7 Part information

Part number Part description

6EQ94-40012 Left upper cover

600 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the left top over

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-15 Remove the cover

2. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

Remove the left top over 601

 2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-16 Remove eight screws

3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-17 Cover hook locations

602 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Release the cover from the right- to left side as shown below. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-18 Remove the cover

3. Remove the left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-19 Remove the cover

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the left upper cover 603

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left cover

Learn about removing and replacing the left cover.

View a video on how to replace the left cover

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

604 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-8 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-60115 Left cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the left top over

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-20 Remove the cover

2. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

Remove the left top over 605

 1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-21 Remove eight screws

3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-22 Cover hook locations

606 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Release the cover from the right- to left side as shown below. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-23 Remove the cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 607

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Middle upper cover

Learn about removing and replacing the middle upper cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the middle upper cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-9 Part information

Part number Part description

6EQ94-40017 Middle upper cover

Required tools
● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle upper cover.

■ Do the following:

● Rotate the control panel into the upright position (callout 1).

608 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Use a pair of tweezers to release the cover (callout 2), and then remove the cover (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-24 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 609

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right upper cover

Learn about removing and replacing the right upper cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the right upper cover.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-10 Part information

Part number Part description

6EQ94-40015 Right upper cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

610 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-25 Remove the cover

2. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 611

 1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-26 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-27 Remove one screw

612 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-28 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-29 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 613

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-30 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-31 Remove the keyboard

3. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

614 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-32 Remove two screws

2. Lay the control panel down, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-33 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 615

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-34 Disconnect the connector

4. Remove the right upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right upper cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-35 Remove four screws

616 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove one screw, and then carefully slide the cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-36 Remove the cover

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 617

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right rear cover

Learn about removing and replacing the right rear cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the right rear cover

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-11 Part information

Part number Part description

6EQ94-40006 Right rear cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

618 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-37 Remove three screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 619

 Figure 6-38 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

620 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right front cover

Learn about removing and replacing the right front cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the right front cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-12 Part information

Part number Part description

6EQ94-40005 Right front cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

Removal and replacement: Right front cover 621

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-39 Remove three screws

2. Open the right door, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-40 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

622 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right middle cover

Learn about removing and replacing the right middle cover assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the drum unit.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-13 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-60114 Right middle cover assembly

Removal and replacement: Right middle cover 623

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-41 Remove the cover

2. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

624 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-42 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-43 Remove one screw

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 625

 3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-44 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-45 Disconnect one connector

626 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-46 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-47 Remove the keyboard

3. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 627

 1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-48 Remove two screws

2. Lay the control panel down, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-49 Slide the cover

628 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-50 Disconnect the connector

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 629

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Hardware integration pocket (HIP) cover

Learn about removing and replacing the HIP cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the HIP cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-14 Part information

Part number Part description

6EQ94-40032 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HIP cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HIP cover.

630 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Use a pair of tweezers to release the cover. Remove the cover.

TIP: Position the tweezers as shown below.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-51 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 631

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Middle left cover

Learn about removing and replacing the middle left cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the middle left cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-15 Part information

Part number Part description

6EQ94-40031 Middle left cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

632 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-52 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 633

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit cover stacker

Learn about removing and replacing the exit cover stacker.

View a video of removing and replacing the exit cover stacker.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-16 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-60116 Exit cover stacker

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

634 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-53 Remove the cover

2. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-54 Remove the cover

Remove the exit cover stacker 635

 3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Inner cover

Learn about removing and replacing the inner cover.

IMPORTANT: Use the control panel to remove the toner cartridges before turning off the printer
power. See Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method) in this topic.

View a video of removing and replacing the inner cover.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

NOTE: Before turning the printer power off, use the control panel method to remove the tomer
cartridges. See the instructions in this section.

Turn the printer power off

636 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-17 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-60117 Inner cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03078622

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method) 637

 Figure 6-55 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-56 Remove the cover

638 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-57 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-58 Remove one screw

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 639

 3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-59 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-60 Disconnect one connector

640 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-61 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-62 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 641

 1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-63 Remove two screws

2. Lay the control panel down, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-64 Slide the cover

642 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-65 Disconnect the connector

5. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-66 Remove the cover

6. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

Remove the exit cover stacker 643

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-67 Remove three screws

2. Open the right door, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-68 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

644 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-69 Remove the TCU

8. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-70 Remove two screws

Remove the front cover 645

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-71 Remove the cover

9. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

■ Remove eight screws, and then pull the inner cover straight out and away form the printer to remove
it.

Figure 6-72 Remove the cover

646 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

10. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front lower cover

Learn about removing and replacing the front lower cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the front lower cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Unpack the replacement assembly 647

 Table 6-18 Part information

Part number Part description

6EQ94-40011 Front lower cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-73 Remove three screws

648 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Open the right door, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-74 Remove the cover

2. Remove the front lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front lower cover.

1. If Tray 2 and Tray 3 are installed, remove them now.

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-75 Remove the cover

Remove the front lower cover 649

 3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front cover assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the front cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the front cover.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

650 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-19 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-60118 Front cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-76 Remove two screws

Remove the front cover 651

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-77 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

652 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2, 3 color panel

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 or Tray 3 color panel.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-20 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-40022 Tray 2 color panel

5QJ94-40016 Tray 3 color panel

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 2, 3 color panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2, 3 color panel.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2, 3 color panel 653

 1. Remove the Tray 2 or Tray 3 cassette from the printer.

2. Push in on the hook, and then slide the panel as shown below to release it. Remove the color panel.

Figure 6-78 Remove the panel

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

654 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit stacker upper cover

Learn about removing and replacing the exit stacker upper cover.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-21 Part information

Part number Part description

6EQ94-40010 Exit stacker upper cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

Removal and replacement: Exit stacker upper cover 655

 ■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-79 Remove the cover

Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

656 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-80 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-81 Remove one screw

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 657

 3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-82 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-83 Disconnect one connector

658 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-84 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-85 Remove the keyboard

Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 659

 1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-86 Remove two screws

2. Lay the control panel down, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-87 Slide the cover

660 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-88 Disconnect the connector

Remove the exit stacker upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit stacker upper cover.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the exit stacker upper cover.

Figure 6-89 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the exit stacker upper cover 661

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Feeding system
Learn about feeding system parts removal and replacement.

Right door assembly

Learn about feeding system right door parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Right door assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the right door.

View a video of removing and replacing the right door.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

662 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-22 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02257A Right door assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 663

 1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-90 Remove three screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

664 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-91 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-92 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Remove the right door assembly 665

 Figure 6-93 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-94 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

666 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-95 Remove the door

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 667

 Removal and replacement: Right door front link
Learn about removing and replacing the right door front link.

View a video of removing and replacing the right door front link.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-23 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-03235A Right door front link

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

668 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-96 Remove three screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 669

 Figure 6-97 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-98 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

670 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-99 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-100 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 671

 Figure 6-101 Remove the door

3. Remove the right door front link

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door front link.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the right door front link.

Figure 6-102 Remove the door link

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

672 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door front damper

Learn about removing and replacing the right door front damper.

Video showing how to remove and replace right door front damper

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-24 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-01425A Right door front damper

Removal and replacement: Right door front damper 673

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-103 Remove three screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

674 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-104 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-105 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Remove the right door assembly 675

 Figure 6-106 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-107 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

676 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-108 Remove the door

3. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-109 Remove three screws

Remove the right front cover 677

 2. Open the right door, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-110 Remove the cover

4. Remove the front lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front lower cover.

1. If Tray 2 and Tray 3 are installed, remove them now.

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-111 Remove the cover

678 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Remove the right door front damper
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door front damper.

1. Remove two screws to release the right door front damper.

Figure 6-112 Remove two screws

2. Remove the right door front damper.

Figure 6-113 Remove the right door front damper

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the right door front damper 679

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Tray 1 unit
Learn about feeding system Tray 1 unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 unit

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 1 unit.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-25 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01869A Tray 1 unit

680 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-114 Remove three screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 681

 Figure 6-115 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-116 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

682 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-117 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-118 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 683

 Figure 6-119 Remove the door

3. Remove the secondary transfer (T2) unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the T2 unit.

1. Open the right door.

2. Release two hooks (from the rear side).

Figure 6-120 Release two hooks

684 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove the T2 unit.

Figure 6-121 Remove the T2 unit

4. Remove the duplex assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the duplex assembly.

1. Remove one screw on the holder.

Figure 6-122 Remove one screw

Remove the duplex assembly 685

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-123 Remove the cover

3. Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the duplex assembly.

Figure 6-124 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the Tray 1 unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 1 unit.

686 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove three screws and the cover.

Figure 6-125 Remove the cover

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-126 Remove one screw

Remove the Tray 1 unit 687

 3. Remove four screws (two on each side), and then remove the duplex lower assembly.

Figure 6-127 Remove four screws

688 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-128 Remove two screws

5. Remove two screws, and then remove the unit.

Figure 6-129 Remove two screws

Remove the Tray 1 unit 689

 6. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-130 Remove four screws

7. Unplug two connectors.

Figure 6-131 Unplug two connectors

690 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 8. Turn over the right door assembly and release the hinge from the Tray 1 unit.

Figure 6-132 Release the hinge

9. Push the Tray 1 unit to the right, and then remove it.

Figure 6-133 Push the Tray 1 unit to the right

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 691

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 paper empty sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 1 paper empty sensor.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-26 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Tray 1 paper empty sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

692 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-134 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Remove the right door assembly 693

 Figure 6-135 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-136 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

694 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-137 Remove the door

2. Remove the secondary transfer (T2) unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the T2 unit.

1. Open the right door.

2. Release two hooks (from the rear side).

Figure 6-138 Release two hooks

Remove the secondary transfer (T2) unit 695

 3. Remove the T2 unit.

Figure 6-139 Remove the T2 unit

3. Remove the duplex assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the duplex assembly.

1. Remove one screw on the holder.

Figure 6-140 Remove one screw

696 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-141 Remove the cover

3. Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the duplex assembly.

Figure 6-142 Remove the assembly

4. Remove the Tray 1 unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 1 unit.

Remove the Tray 1 unit 697

 1. Remove three screws and the cover.

Figure 6-143 Remove the cover

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-144 Remove one screw

698 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove four screws (two on each side), and then remove the duplex lower assembly.

Figure 6-145 Remove four screws

Remove the Tray 1 unit 699

 4. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-146 Remove two screws

5. Remove two screws, and then remove the unit.

Figure 6-147 Remove two screws

700 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

6. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-148 Remove four screws

7. Unplug two connectors.

Figure 6-149 Unplug two connectors

Remove the Tray 1 unit 701

 8. Turn over the right door assembly and release the hinge from the Tray 1 unit.

Figure 6-150 Release the hinge

9. Push the Tray 1 unit to the right, and then remove it.

Figure 6-151 Push the Tray 1 unit to the right

5. Remove the Tray 1 paper empty sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 1 paper empty sensor.

702 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Locate the Tray 1 paper empty sensor.

Figure 6-152 Locate the sensor

2. Use a pair of tweezers to release two tabs, and then remove sensor.

Figure 6-153 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 703

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 clutch

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 1 clutch.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 1 clutch.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-27 Part information

Part number Part description

JC47-00037A Electric clutch (Tray 1 clutch)

704 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-154 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

Remove the controller cover 705

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-155 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-156 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

706 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-157 Remove the cover

4. Remove the fuser fan duct assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser fan duct assembly.

■ Disconnect connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the fuser fan duct assembly.

Figure 6-158 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the drum and developer drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum and developer drive assembly.

Remove the fuser fan duct assembly 707

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-159 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect four connectors, remove seven screws, and then remove the drum and developer drive
assembly

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainers as needed.

Figure 6-160 Remove the assembly

6. Remove the registration drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration drive assembly.

708 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then remove the registration drive assembly.

Figure 6-161 Remove the assembly

7. Remove the Tray 1 clutch

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 1 clutch.

1. Remove three e-rings.

Figure 6-162 Remove three e-rings

Remove the Tray 1 clutch 709

 2. Slide the clutch as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-163 Remove the clutch

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

710 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 roller kit (pickup/forward/reverse)

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 1 roller kit.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 1 roller kit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-28 Part information

Part number Part description

5RC02-67001 Tray 1 roller kit

NOTE: This kit includes the pickup, forward, and reverse rollers.

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 1 roller kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 1 roller kit.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 roller kit (pickup/forward/reverse) 711

 1. Release the right- and left side tabs, and then remove the Tray 1 roller cover.

Figure 6-164 Remove the cover

2. Release one tab, and then remove the sensor cover.

Figure 6-165 Remove the cover

3. Use a pair of tweezers to release the locking tab, and then slide the roller off the shaft to remove it.

● Pickup roller: callout 1

● Forward roller: callout 2

● Reverse roller: callout 3

712 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-166 Remove the rollers

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 713

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Tray 2-3 units

Learn about feeding system Tray 2-3 units parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 or Tray 3

Learn about removing and replacing Tray 2 or Tray 3.

View a video of removing and replacing Tray 2.

View a video of removing and replacing Tray 3.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-29 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-60111 Tray 2

5QJ90-60119 Tray 3

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

714 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-167 Remove the tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3 715

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 pickup assembly.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-30 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01728A Tray 2 pickup assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

716 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the right rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-168 Remove three screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 717

 Figure 6-169 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-170 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

718 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-171 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-172 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 719

 Figure 6-173 Remove the door

3. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-174 Remove the tray

4. Remove the Tray 2 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2 pickup assembly.

720 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-175 Remove one screw

2. Rotate the left side of the assembly away from the printer, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-176 Disconnect one connector

Remove the Tray 2 pickup assembly 721

 3. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-177 Remove one screw

4. Rotate the left side of the assembly away from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire harness and connector.

Figure 6-178 Rotate the assembly away from the printer

722 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the assembly.

Figure 6-179 Remove the assembly

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 723

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2, 3 roller kit (pickup/forward/reverse)

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2/3 roller kit.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 roller kit.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 roller kit.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-31 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN66-67001 Tray 2/3 roller kit

NOTE: This kit includes the pickup, forward, and reverse rollers.

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

724 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3
Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-180 Remove the tray

2. Remove the Tray 2/3 roller kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2/3 roller kit.

1. Locate the return guide inside the tray opening, and then slide the black guide toward the front of
the printer until it stops.

CAUTION: The black guide is spring loaded. Be careful when sliding the guide to avoid dislodging
the spring.

Reinstallation tip: After installing replacement rollers, slightly slide the return guide towards the
rear of the printer to prevent paper jams.

Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3 725

 Figure 6-181 Slide the return guide

2. Use a pair of tweezers to release the locking tab, and then slide the roller off the shaft to remove it.

● Pickup roller: callout 1

● Forward roller: callout 2

● Reverse roller: callout 3

Figure 6-182 Remove the rollers

3. When the rollers are removed, be careful not to dislodge the couplers. If the couplers are dislodged,
install them on the shafts as shown below.

NOTE: The figure below shows the pickup assembly removed to more clearly show the rollers and
couplers.

726 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-183 Rollers and couplers installed

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 727

 Removal and replacement: Tray 2 empty and stack height sensors
Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 empty and stack height sensors.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 empty sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 stack height sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-32 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 2 empty sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 2 stack height sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

728 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-184 Remove three screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 729

 Figure 6-185 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-186 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

730 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-187 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-188 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 731

 Figure 6-189 Remove the door

3. Remove the Tray 2 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2 pickup assembly.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-190 Remove one screw

732 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Rotate the left side of the assembly away from the printer, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-191 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-192 Remove one screw

4. Rotate the left side of the assembly away from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire harness and connector.

Remove the Tray 2 pickup assembly 733

 Figure 6-193 Rotate the assembly away from the printer

5. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the assembly.

Figure 6-194 Remove the assembly

4. Remove the Tray 2 empty and stack height sensors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2 empty and stack height sensors.

734 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Locate the Tray 2 empty (callout 1) and stack height (callout 2) sensors on the pickup assembly.

Figure 6-195 Locate the sensors

2. Do the following:

NOTE: The black ESD insulator sheet does not need to be removed.

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the left (callout 2).

● Push the senor assembly as shown (callout 3) to release it.

Figure 6-196 Release the sensors

Remove the Tray 2 empty and stack height sensors 735

 3. Disconnect the connector and remove the sensor assembly.

Figure 6-197 Remove the sensors

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

736 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 open and paper size sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 open and paper size sensor.

NOTE: This procedure removes the front door for better access to the sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-33 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00018B Tray 2 open and paper size sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 open and paper size sensor 737
 ■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-198 Remove the tray

2. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-199 Remove two screws

738 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-200 Remove the cover

3. Remove the Tray 2 open and paper size sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2 open and paper size sensor.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-201 Remove two screws

Remove the Tray 2 open and paper size sensor 739

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the sensor assembly.

NOTE: The sensor assembly is located far back in the tray cavity. Hold the sensor as shown below
to easily disconnect (and reconnect at installation) the connector.

Figure 6-202 Remove the sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

740 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 pickup drive assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 pickup drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-34 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-64001 Tray 2 pickup drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup drive assembly 741

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-203 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-204 Remove the screw caps

742 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-205 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-206 Remove the cover

4. Remove the developer fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer fan assembly.

Remove the rear lower cover 743

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the developer fan assembly.

Figure 6-207 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the Tray 2 pickup drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2 pickup drive assembly.

■ Unplug one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the Tray 2 pickup drive assembly.

Figure 6-208 Remove the assembly

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

744 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup motor

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 pickup motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 pickup motor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup motor 745

 Table 6-35 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-64002 Drive-motor, step (Tray 2 pickup motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-209 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

746 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-210 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-211 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the rear lower cover 747

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-212 Remove the cover

4. Remove the developer fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer fan assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the developer fan assembly.

Figure 6-213 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the Tray 2 pickup drive motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2 pickup drive motor.

748 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Unplug one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the Tray 2 pickup motor.

Figure 6-214 Remove the motor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 749

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 pickup assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the 2cnd pickup assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the 2cnd pickup assembly.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-36 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01729A Tray3 pickup assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

750 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-215 Remove three screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 751

 Figure 6-216 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-217 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

752 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-218 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-219 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 753

 Figure 6-220 Remove the door

3. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-221 Remove the tray

4. Remove the Tray 3 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 pickup assembly.

754 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-222 Removeone screw

2. Rotate the left side of pickup assembly away from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire harness and connector.

Figure 6-223 Rotate the assembly away from the printer

Remove the Tray 3 pickup assembly 755

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the assembly.

Figure 6-224 Remove the assembly

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

756 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 empty and stack height sensors

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 3 empty and stack height sensors.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 empty sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 stack height sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-37 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 3 empty sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 3 stack height sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 empty and stack height sensors 757
 Remove the right rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-225 Remove three screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

758 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-226 Remove the cover

Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-227 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Remove the right door assembly 759

 Figure 6-228 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-229 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

760 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-230 Remove the door

Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-231 Remove the tray

Remove the Tray 3 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 pickup assembly.

Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3 761

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-232 Removeone screw

2. Rotate the left side of pickup assembly away from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire harness and connector.

Figure 6-233 Rotate the assembly away from the printer

762 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the assembly.

Figure 6-234 Remove the assembly

Remove the Tray 3 empty and stack height sensors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 empty and stack height sensors.

1. Locate the Tray 3 empty (callout 1) and stack height (callout 2) sensors on the pickup assembly.

Figure 6-235 Locate the sensors

2. Do the following:

NOTE: The black ESD insulator sheet does not need to be removed.

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

Remove the Tray 3 empty and stack height sensors 763

 ● Slide the sensor assembly to the left (callout 2).

● Push the senor assembly as shown (callout 3) to release it.

Figure 6-236 Release the sensors

3. Disconnect the connector and remove the sensor assembly.

Figure 6-237 Remove the sensors

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

764 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 open and paper size sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 3 open and paper size sensor.

NOTE: This procedure removes the front door for better access to the sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 3 open and paper size sensor.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 open and paper size sensor 765
 Table 6-38 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00018B Tray 3 open and paper size sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-238 Remove the tray

2. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

766 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-239 Remove two screws

2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-240 Remove the cover

3. Remove the Tray 3 open and paper size sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 open and paper size sensor.

Remove the Tray 3 open and paper size sensor 767

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-241 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the sensor assembly.

NOTE: The sensor assembly is located far back in the tray cavity. Hold the sensor as shown below
to easily disconnect (and reconnect at installation) the connector.

Figure 6-242 Remove the sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

768 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 pickup drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 3 pickup drive assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the tray 3 pickup drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 pickup drive assembly 769

 Table 6-39 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-64001 Tray 3 pickup drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-243 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

770 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-244 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-245 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the rear lower cover 771

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-246 Remove the cover

4. Remove the Tray 3 pickup drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 pickup drive assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the drive assembly.

Figure 6-247 Remove the drive assembly

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

772 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 pickup motor

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 3 pickup motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the tray 3 pickup motor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Tray 3 pickup motor 773

 Table 6-40 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-64002 Drive-motor step (Tray 3 pickup motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-248 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

774 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-249 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-250 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the rear lower cover 775

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-251 Remove the cover

4. Remove the Tray 3 pickup motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 pickup motor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-252 Remove the motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

776 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray heater

Learn about removing and replacing the tray heaters.

View a video of removing and replacing the tray heaters.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Tray heater 777

 Table 6-41 Part information

Part number Part description

Y1G22-67901 Tray heater 110V

Y1G22-67902 Tray heater 220V

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3

Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-253 Remove the tray

2. Remove the Tray heater

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray heater.

778 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-254 Remove one screw

2. Do the following:

● Slightly lift up on the front of the heater, and pull it toward the front of the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the heater. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire-harness connector.

● Disconnect one connector, and then remove the heater.

Figure 6-255 Remove the heater

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 779

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Feed drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the feed drive assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the feed drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

780 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-42 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01682A Feed drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-256 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

Remove the controller cover 781

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-257 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-258 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

782 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-259 Remove the cover

4. Remove the feed drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the feed drive assembly.

1. Release two clamps.

Figure 6-260 Release two clamps

Remove the feed drive assembly 783

 2. Remove three screws, disconnect one connector, and then remove the feed drive assembly

Figure 6-261 Remove the feed drive assembly

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

784 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Feed motor

Learn about removing and replacing the feed motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the feed motor.

Mean time to repair: 12 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-43 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00163A Motor, step (Feed motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Feed motor 785

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-262 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-263 Remove the screw caps

786 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-264 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-265 Remove the cover

4. Remove the feed drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the feed drive assembly.

Remove the rear lower cover 787

 1. Release two clamps.

Figure 6-266 Release two clamps

2. Remove three screws, disconnect one connector, and then remove the feed drive assembly

Figure 6-267 Remove the feed drive assembly

5. Remove the feed motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the feed motor.

788 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-268 Remove two screws

2. Release the belt, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-269 Remove the motor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 789

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray Feed 2 sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 feed sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the feed 2 sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-44 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Tray 2 feed sensor)

790 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-270 Remove three screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 791

 Figure 6-271 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-272 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

792 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-273 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-274 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 793

 Figure 6-275 Remove the door

3. Remove the Tray 2 feed sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 2 feed sensor.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the paper path guide.

Figure 6-276 Remove the guide

794 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw, disconnect one connector, and then remove the Tray 2 feed sensor.

Figure 6-277 Remove the sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 795

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray Feed 3 sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the tray 3 feed sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the feed 3 sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-45 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-01490 Photo interrupter (Tray 3 feed sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

796 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-278 Remove three screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 797

 Figure 6-279 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-280 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

798 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-281 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-282 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 799

 Figure 6-283 Remove the door

3. Remove the Tray 3 feed sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Tray 3 feed sensor.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-284 Remove one screw

800 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Rotate the left side of the assembly away from the printer, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-285 Disconnect one connector

3. Release three clamps (callout1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-286 Release clamps and remove screws

Remove the Tray 3 feed sensor 801

 4. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-287 Disconnect one connector

5. Release one tab, and then remove the Tray 3 feed sensor.

Figure 6-288 Remove the sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

802 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Registration unit and loop sensing unit

Learn about registration unit and loop sensing unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Registration unit

Learn about removing and replacing the registration unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the registration unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-46 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-60129 Registration unit

Registration unit and loop sensing unit 803

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

1. Turn the printer power on.

a. Connect the power cable.

b. Use the power switch to turn the power on.

2. Adjust the Regi-roller reset setting on the printer control panel to prevent print quality issues
when printing. For instructions, see Special instructions: Adjust the Regi-roller reset setting after
replacement

IMPORTANT: It is recommended to reset the values in the Regi-roller reset setting to prevent color
plane registration (CPR) print quality issues or wrinkled paper output when printing.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-289 Remove three screws

804 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-290 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-291 Disconnect one connector

Remove the right door assembly 805

 2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-292 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-293 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

806 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-294 Remove the door

3. Remove the registration unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration unit.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the paper path guide.

Figure 6-295 Remove the guide

Remove the registration unit 807

 2. Remove the gear cover.

Figure 6-296 Remove the gear cover

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-297 Remove two screws

4. Release the left side of the registration unit, rotate the left side away from the printer, and then
remove the registration unit.

TIP: The bushing and assembly are removed together.

Reinstallation tip: The left end of the registration unit shaft is shorter than the right end of the
shaft. When reinstalling the unit, insert the right end of the shaft first to make the assembly easier
to install.

808 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-298 Remove the unit

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 809

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

5. Special instructions: Adjust the Regi-roller reset setting after replacement

After replacing the registration unit, ensure to adjust the values in the Regi-roller reset setting using the
printer control panel.

IMPORTANT: It is recommended to reset the values in the Regi-roller reset setting to prevent color
plane registration (CPR) print quality issues or wrinkled paper output when printing.

1. From the Home screen of the control panel, select Support Tools.

2. Select Service, and then enter the Service Access Code.

3. Select Advanced Service , and then select the Advanced Diagnostics menu.

4. Select the Engine NVM Read/Write setting, and then select Regi-roller reset to adjust the values.

Table 6-47 Regi-roller reset option

Values Description

0 Reset

1 In Use

Figure 6-299 Regi-roller reset

810 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Registration sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the registration sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the registration sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-48 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter (registration sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Registration sensor 811

 1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-300 Remove three screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

812 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-301 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-302 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Remove the right door assembly 813

 Figure 6-303 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-304 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

814 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-305 Remove the door

3. Remove the registration unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration unit.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the paper path guide.

Figure 6-306 Remove the guide

Remove the registration unit 815

 2. Remove the gear cover.

Figure 6-307 Remove the gear cover

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-308 Remove two screws

4. Release the left side of the registration unit, rotate the left side away from the printer, and then
remove the registration unit.

TIP: The bushing and assembly are removed together.

Reinstallation tip: The left end of the registration unit shaft is shorter than the right end of the
shaft. When reinstalling the unit, insert the right end of the shaft first to make the assembly easier
to install.

816 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-309 Remove the unit

4. Remove the registration sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration sensor.

1. Remove two screws, and turn the sensor guide assembly over.

Figure 6-310 Remove two screws

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the registration sensor.

NOTE: Disconnect connectors as necessary.

Remove the registration sensor 817

 Figure 6-311 Remove the sensor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

818 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper dust holder assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the paper dust holder.

View a video of removing and replacing the paper dust holder.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-49 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00078C Paper dust holder assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the waste toner collection unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the waste toner collection unit (TCU).

1. Open the front door.

Removal and replacement: Paper dust holder assembly 819

 2. Push in on two tabs (callout 1) to release the unit, and then pull it straight out (callout 2) of the printer
to remove it.

Figure 6-312 Remove the duct

2. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-313 Locate the paper dust holder

820 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-314 Remove the assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 821

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Registration drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the registration drive assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the registration drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-50 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00443A Registration drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

822 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-315 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-316 Remove the screw caps

Remove the rear upper cover 823

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-317 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-318 Remove the cover

4. Remove the fuser fan duct assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser fan duct assembly.

824 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the fuser fan duct assembly.

Figure 6-319 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the drum and developer drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum and developer drive assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-320 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect four connectors, remove seven screws, and then remove the drum and developer drive
assembly

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainers as needed.

Remove the drum and developer drive assembly 825

 Figure 6-321 Remove the assembly

6. Remove the registration drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration drive assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then remove the registration drive assembly.

Figure 6-322 Remove the assembly

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

826 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Registration and Tray 1 motor

Learn about removing and replacing the registration and tray 1 motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the registration and Tray 1 motor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-51 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00123B Motor BLDC (registration and Tray 1 motor)

Removal and replacement: Registration and Tray 1 motor 827

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-323 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

828 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-324 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-325 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the rear lower cover 829

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-326 Remove the cover

4. Remove the registration and Tray 1 motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration and Tray 1 motor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the registration and Tray 1 motor.

Figure 6-327 Remove the motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

830 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Registration clutch

Learn about removing and replacing the registration clutch.

View a video of removing and replacing the registration clutch.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Registration clutch 831

 Table 6-52 Part information

Part number Part description

JC47-00037A Electric clutch (Registration clutch)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-328 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

832 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-329 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-330 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the rear lower cover 833

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-331 Remove the cover

4. Remove the fuser fan duct assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser fan duct assembly.

■ Disconnect connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the fuser fan duct assembly.

Figure 6-332 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the drum and developer drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum and developer drive assembly.

834 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-333 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect four connectors, remove seven screws, and then remove the drum and developer drive
assembly

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainers as needed.

Figure 6-334 Remove the assembly

6. Remove the registration drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration drive assembly.

Remove the registration drive assembly 835

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then remove the registration drive assembly.

Figure 6-335 Remove the assembly

7. Remove the registration clutch

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration clutch.

1. Remove three e-rings.

Figure 6-336 Remove three e-rings

836 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Slide the clutch as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-337 Remove the clutch

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 837

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer (T2) unit

Learn about removing and replacing the secondary transfer (T2) unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the T2 unit.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-53 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN65-67001 Secondary transfer (T2) unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the secondary transfer (T2) unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the T2 unit.

1. Open the right door.

838 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release two hooks (from the rear side).

Figure 6-338 Release two hooks

3. Remove the T2 unit.

Figure 6-339 Remove the T2 unit

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 839

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Loop sensor 1, 2

Learn about removing and replacing the loop sensor 1/2.

View a video of removing and replacing the loop sensor 1.

View a video of removing and replacing the loop sensor 2.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-54 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (loop sensor 1)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (loop sensor 2)

840 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the secondary transfer (T2) unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the T2 unit.

1. Open the right door.

2. Release two hooks (from the rear side).

Figure 6-340 Release two hooks

Remove the secondary transfer (T2) unit 841

 3. Remove the T2 unit.

Figure 6-341 Remove the T2 unit

2. Remove the loop sensor 1, 2

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the loop sensor 1, 2.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-342 Remove one screw

842 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release two hooks, and then remove the guide.

Figure 6-343 Remove the guide

4. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2).

Figure 6-344 Remove screws and disconnect connectors

Remove the loop sensor 1, 2 843

 5. Locate the loop 1 (callout 1) and loop 2 (callout 2) sensors.

Figure 6-345 Locate the sensors

6. Do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the left (callout 2).

● Remove the loop 1 sensor (callout 3).

Figure 6-346 Remove the sensor

NOTE: Repeat these steps to remove the loop 2 sensor.

844 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Loop sensor actuator

Learn about removing and replacing the loop sensor actuator.

View a video of removing and replacing the loop sensor actuator.

Mean time to repair: 6 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Unpack the replacement assembly 845

 Table 6-55 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-05625A Loop sensor actuator

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the loop actuator

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the loop actuator.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-347 Remove one screw

846 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release two hooks, and then remove the guide.

Figure 6-348 Remove the guide

3. Release the actuator and spring to remove the loop sensor actuator.

Figure 6-349 Remove the actuator

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 847

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door exit assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the right door exit assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the right door exit assembly.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-56 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01877A Right door exit assembly

848 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right door exit assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door exit assembly.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove two screws and the white-plastic molded parts.

Figure 6-350 Remove the guide

Remove the right door exit assembly 849

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right door exit assembly.

Figure 6-351 Remove the unit

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

850 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser out sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser out sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser out sensor.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-57 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (fuser out sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right door exit assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door exit assembly.

1. Open the right door.

Removal and replacement: Fuser out sensor 851

 2. Remove two screws and the white-plastic molded parts.

Figure 6-352 Remove the guide

3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right door exit assembly.

Figure 6-353 Remove the unit

2. Remove the fuser out sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser out sensor.

852 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove three screws and release the wire harness.

Figure 6-354 Remove three screws

2. Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the left (callout 3).

● Remove the fuser out sensor.

Figure 6-355 Remove the sensor

NOTE: Repeat these steps to remove the loop 2 sensor.

Remove the fuser out sensor 853

 3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Exit unit
Learn about exit unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Exit unit

Learn about removing and replacing the exit unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the exit unit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

854 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-58 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01876A Exit unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the exit unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit unit.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the exit unit 855

 2. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-356 Remove three screws

3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the exit unit.

NOTE: Release the wire harness retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-357 Remove the unit

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

856 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output bin 1 full sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the output bin 1 full sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the output bin 1 full sensor.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Output bin 1 full sensor 857

 Table 6-59 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (output bin 1 full sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the exit unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit unit.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-358 Remove three screws

858 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the exit unit.

NOTE: Release the wire harness retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-359 Remove the unit

2. Remove the output bin 1 full sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the output bin 1 full sensor.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-360 Disconnect one connector

2. Do the following:

NOTE: The black ESD insulator sheet does not need to be removed.

Remove the output bin 1 full sensor 859

 ● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 2).

● Remove the output bin 1 full sensor.

Figure 6-361 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

860 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Actuator-bin full exit

Learn about removing and replacing the actuator-bin full exit.

View a video of removing and replacing the actuator-bin full exit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-60 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-04339A Actuator-bin full exit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the actuator bin full exit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the actuator bin full exit.

Removal and replacement: Actuator-bin full exit 861

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the actuator bin full exit off of the shaft (callout 2).

Figure 6-362 Remove the actuator

2. Make sure that the spring is correctly installed on the actuator when reinstalling.

CAUTION: The spring can easily be dislodged when handling the actuator.

Figure 6-363 Check the spring

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

862 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Lever-actuator bin full exit and spring TS

Learn about removing and replacing the lever-actuator bin full exit and spring TS.

View a video of removing and replacing the lever-actuator bin full exit.

View a video of removing and replacing the actuator bin full exit spring TS.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-61 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-02278A Lever-actuator bin full exit

JC61-07185A Spring TS

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Lever-actuator bin full exit and spring TS 863
 ● Tweezers

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

Remove the actuator bin full exit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the actuator bin full exit.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the actuator bin full exit off of the shaft (callout 2).

Figure 6-364 Remove the actuator

2. Make sure that the spring is correctly installed on the actuator when reinstalling.

CAUTION: The spring can easily be dislodged when handling the actuator.

864 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-365 Check the spring

Remove the lever-actuator bin full exit and TS spring

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the lever-actuator bin full exit and TS spring.

■ Do the following:

● Carefully release the lever-actuator bin full exit (callout 1) from the actuator-bin full exit assembly
to remove it.

● Remove the TS spring (callout 2).

Figure 6-366 Remove the lever and spring

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the lever-actuator bin full exit and TS spring 865

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit stack guide

Learn about removing and replacing the exit stack guide.

View a video of removing and replacing the exit stack guide.

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

866 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-62 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01874A Exit stack guide

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the exit stack guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit stack guide.

■ Slide the exit stack guide to the right to remove it.

NOTE: It might take considerable force to slide the guide to the right.

Figure 6-367 Remove the guide

Remove the exit stack guide 867

 Reinstallation tip: Position the guide over the holder, and then slide it from right to left to install it.

Figure 6-368 Reinstall the guide

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

868 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Duplex unit
Learn about duplex unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Duplex assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the duplex assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the duplex assembly.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-63 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02292A Duplex assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Duplex unit 869

 1. Remove the right rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-369 Remove three screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

870 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-370 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-371 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Remove the right door assembly 871

 Figure 6-372 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-373 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

872 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-374 Remove the door

3. Remove the duplex assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the duplex assembly.

1. Remove one screw on the holder.

Figure 6-375 Remove one screw

Remove the duplex assembly 873

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-376 Remove the cover

3. Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the duplex assembly.

Figure 6-377 Remove the assembly

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

874 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Duplex jam sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the duplex jam sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the duplex jam sensor.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-64 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (duplex jam sensor)

Removal and replacement: Duplex jam sensor 875

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the duplex jam sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the duplex jam sensor.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-378 Remove one screw

876 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release two hooks, and then remove the guide.

Figure 6-379 Remove the guide

4. Press one clip (on the left side), and then remove the guide.

Figure 6-380 Remove the guide

Remove the duplex jam sensor 877

 5. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2).

Figure 6-381 Remove screws and disconnect connectors

6. Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the left (callout 3).

● Remove the duplex jam sensor.

Figure 6-382 Remove the sensor

878 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Duplex motor

Learn about removing and replacing the duplex motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the duplex motor.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Unpack the replacement assembly 879

 Table 6-65 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01687A Duplex motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-383 Remove three screws

880 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-384 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-385 Disconnect one connector

Remove the right door assembly 881

 2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-386 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-387 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

882 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-388 Remove the door

3. Remove the duplex motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the duplex motor.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-389 Remove the cover

Remove the duplex motor 883

 2. Remove two screws, disconnect one connector, and then remove the duplex motor.

Figure 6-390 Remove the motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

884 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Toner flow
Learn about toner flow parts removal and replacement.

Toner cartridge
Learn about toner cartridge parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Toner dispense and duct motor assembly (Y, M)
Learn about removing and replacing the toner dispense and duct motor assembly (Y, M).

View a video of removing and replacing the toner dispense and duct motor assembly (Y, M).

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-66 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01680A Toner dispense and duct motor assembly (Y, M)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Toner flow 885

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-391 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-392 Remove the screw caps

886 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-393 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-394 Remove the cover

4. Remove the left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

Remove the rear lower cover 887

 ■ Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-395 Remove the cover

5. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-396 Remove the rivets

6. Remove the hard disk

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD.

888 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the hard disk, and then remove the hard drive and
cradle together (callout 2).

Figure 6-397 Remove the HDD

7. Remove the formatter and formatter bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the formatter and formatter bracket.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

Figure 6-398 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the formatter and formatter bracket together.

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainers as necessary

Remove the formatter and formatter bracket 889

 Figure 6-399 Remove the bracket

8. Remove the toner cartridges (disassemble method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

NOTE: If the cartridges are being removed to gain access to a specific toner dispense and duct
motor assembly, only remove the toner cartridges associated with that specific motor assembly.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Rotate four screws counterclockwise, to mechanically release the toner cartridges. Remove the
toner cartridges from the front side of the printer.

Reinstallation tip: To prevent mechanical interference when installing the cartridges, first rotate
the screws clockwise to return them to the home position and then install the cartridges.

890 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-400 Remove the cartridges

9. Remove the toner dispense and duct motor assembly (Y, M)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner dispense and duct motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then remove the toner dispense and duct motor
assembly.

Figure 6-401 Remove the assembly

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the toner dispense and duct motor assembly (Y, M) 891
 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner dispense and duct motor assembly (C, K)
Learn about removing and replacing the toner dispense and duct motor assembly (C, K).

View a video of removing and replacing the toner dispense and duct motor assembly (C, K).

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-67 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01680A Toner dispense and duct motor assembly (C, K)

892 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-402 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

Remove the controller cover 893

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-403 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-404 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

894 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-405 Remove the cover

4. Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LVPS / FDB fan.

1. Disconnect three connectors.

Figure 6-406 Disconnect three connectors

Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly 895

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the fan.

Figure 6-407 Remove the fan

5. Remove the fuser fan duct assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser fan duct assembly.

■ Disconnect connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the fuser fan duct assembly.

Figure 6-408 Remove the assembly

6. Remove the drum and developer drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum and developer drive assembly.

896 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-409 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect four connectors, remove seven screws, and then remove the drum and developer drive
assembly

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainers as needed.

Figure 6-410 Remove the assembly

7. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

Remove the rivet-HDD 897

 ■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-411 Remove the rivets

8. Remove the hard disk

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD.

■ Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the hard disk, and then remove the hard drive and
cradle together (callout 2).

Figure 6-412 Remove the HDD

9. Remove the formatter and formatter bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the formatter and formatter bracket.

898 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

Figure 6-413 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the formatter and formatter bracket together.

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainers as necessary

Figure 6-414 Remove the bracket

10. Remove the toner cartridges (disassemble method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

NOTE: If the cartridges are being removed to gain access to a specific toner dispense and duct
motor assembly, only remove the toner cartridges associated with that specific motor assembly.

Remove the toner cartridges (disassemble method) 899

 1. Open the front cover.

2. Rotate four screws counterclockwise, to mechanically release the toner cartridges. Remove the
toner cartridges from the front side of the printer.

Reinstallation tip: To prevent mechanical interference when installing the cartridges, first rotate
the screws clockwise to return them to the home position and then install the cartridges.

Figure 6-415 Remove the cartridges

11. Remove the toner dispense and duct motor assembly (C, K)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner dispense and duct motor assembly.

900 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then remove the toner dispense and duct motor
assembly.

Figure 6-416 Remove the assembly

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 901

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner dispense motors (Y, M, C, K)

Learn about removing and replacing the toner dispense motors.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner dispense motors.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-68 Part information

Part number Part description

SS216-80501 Drive-motor step (toner dispense motors Y/M/C/K)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

902 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-417 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-418 Remove the screw caps

Remove the rear upper cover 903

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-419 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-420 Remove the cover

4. Remove the left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

904 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-421 Remove the cover

5. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-422 Remove the rivets

6. Remove the hard disk

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD.

Remove the rivet-HDD 905

 ■ Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the hard disk, and then remove the hard drive and
cradle together (callout 2).

Figure 6-423 Remove the HDD

7. Remove the formatter and formatter bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the formatter and formatter bracket.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

Figure 6-424 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the formatter and formatter bracket together.

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainers as necessary

906 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-425 Remove the bracket

8. Remove the toner dispense motors (Y, M, C, K)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner dispense motors.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the dispense motor.

NOTE: Repeat this step for each motor as necessary.

Figure 6-426 Remove the motor

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the toner dispense motors (Y, M, C, K) 907

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (control panel method)

Learn about removing and replacing the toner cartridges.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges using the control panel.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

No before performing service procedures required.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-69 Part information

Part number Part description

W9142-67005 Toner cartridge - Y standard yield

W9143-67005 Toner cartridge - M standard yield

908 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-69 Part information (continued)

Part number Part description

W9141-67006 Toner cartridge - C standard yield

W9140-67005 Toner cartridge - K standard yield

W9152-67007 Toner cartridge - Y high yield

W9153-67007 Toner cartridge - M high yield

W9151-67007 Toner cartridge - C high yield

W9150-67007 Toner cartridge - K high yield

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03078622

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method) 909

 Figure 6-427 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

910 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (disassemble method)

Learn about removing and replacing the toner cartridges.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges by disassembling.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-70 Part information

Part number Part description

W9142-67005 Toner cartridge - Y standard yield

W9143-67005 Toner cartridge - M standard yield

W9141-67006 Toner cartridge - C standard yield

W9140-67005 Toner cartridge - K standard yield

W9152-67007 Toner cartridge - Y high yield

W9153-67007 Toner cartridge - M high yield

W9151-67007 Toner cartridge - C high yield

W9150-67007 Toner cartridge - K high yield

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (disassemble method) 911

 ○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-428 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-429 Remove the screw caps

912 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-430 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-431 Remove the cover

4. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

Remove the rear lower cover 913

 ■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-432 Remove the rivets

5. Remove the hard disk

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD.

■ Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the hard disk, and then remove the hard drive and
cradle together (callout 2).

Figure 6-433 Remove the HDD

6. Remove the formatter and formatter bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the formatter and formatter bracket.

914 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

Figure 6-434 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the formatter and formatter bracket together.

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainers as necessary

Figure 6-435 Remove the bracket

7. Remove the toner cartridges (disassemble method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

NOTE: If the cartridges are being removed to gain access to a specific toner dispense and duct
motor assembly, only remove the toner cartridges associated with that specific motor assembly.

Remove the toner cartridges (disassemble method) 915

 1. Open the front cover.

2. Rotate four screws counterclockwise, to mechanically release the toner cartridges. Remove the
toner cartridges from the front side of the printer.

Reinstallation tip: To prevent mechanical interference when installing the cartridges, first rotate
the screws clockwise to return them to the home position and then install the cartridges.

Figure 6-436 Remove the cartridges

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

916 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner CRUM module assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the toner CRUM module assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner CRUM module assembly.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-71 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01822A Toner CRUM module assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Removal and replacement: Toner CRUM module assembly 917

 1. Remove the controller cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-437 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-438 Remove the screw caps

918 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-439 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-440 Remove the cover

4. Remove the left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

Remove the rear lower cover 919

 ■ Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-441 Remove the cover

5. Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LVPS / FDB fan.

1. Disconnect three connectors.

Figure 6-442 Disconnect three connectors

920 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the fan.

Figure 6-443 Remove the fan

6. Remove the fuser fan duct assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser fan duct assembly.

■ Disconnect connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the fuser fan duct assembly.

Figure 6-444 Remove the assembly

7. Remove the drum and developer drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum and developer drive assembly.

Remove the fuser fan duct assembly 921

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-445 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect four connectors, remove seven screws, and then remove the drum and developer drive
assembly

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainers as needed.

Figure 6-446 Remove the assembly

8. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

922 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-447 Remove the rivets

9. Remove the hard disk

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD.

■ Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the hard disk, and then remove the hard drive and
cradle together (callout 2).

Figure 6-448 Remove the HDD

10. Remove the formatter and formatter bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the formatter and formatter bracket.

Remove the hard disk 923

 1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

Figure 6-449 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the formatter and formatter bracket together.

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainers as necessary

Figure 6-450 Remove the bracket

11. Remove the toner dispense and duct motor assembly (C, K)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner dispense and duct motor assembly.

924 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then remove the toner dispense and duct motor
assembly.

Figure 6-451 Remove the assembly

12. Remove the toner dispense and duct motor assembly (Y, M)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner dispense and duct motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then remove the toner dispense and duct motor
assembly.

Figure 6-452 Remove the assembly

13. Remove the toner dispense and duct motor assembly (C, K)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner dispense and duct motor assembly.

Remove the toner dispense and duct motor assembly (Y, M) 925
 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then remove the toner dispense and duct motor
assembly.

Figure 6-453 Remove the assembly

14. Remove the toner CRUM module assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner CRUM module assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the toner CRUM module.

NOTE: Repeat this step for each module as necessary.

Figure 6-454 Remove the module

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

926 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Duct unit
Learn about duct unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Toner guide unit

Learn about removing and replacing the toner guide unit.

NOTE: Do not turn the printer power off until the first step (remove toner cartridges) of this procedure
is completed.

Mean time to repair: 40 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Duct unit 927

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-72 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-60072 Yellow toner guide unit

5QJ90-60072 Magenta toner guide unit

5QJ90-60072 Cyan toner guide unit

5QJ90-60072 Black toner guide unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03078622

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

928 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-455 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-456 Remove the cover

Remove the middle left cover 929

 3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-457 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-458 Remove one screw

930 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-459 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-460 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 931

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-461 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-462 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

932 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-463 Remove two screws

2. Lay the control panel down, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-464 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 933

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-465 Disconnect the connector

5. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-466 Remove the cover

6. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

934 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-467 Remove three screws

2. Open the right door, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-468 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 935

 2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-469 Remove the TCU

8. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-470 Remove two screws

936 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-471 Remove the cover

9. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

■ Remove eight screws, and then pull the inner cover straight out and away form the printer to remove
it.

Figure 6-472 Remove the cover

Remove the inner cover 937

 10. Remove the controller cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-473 Remove the cover

11. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-474 Remove the screw caps

938 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-475 Remove the cover

12. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-476 Remove the cover

13. Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LVPS / FDB fan.

Remove the rear lower cover 939

 1. Disconnect three connectors.

Figure 6-477 Disconnect three connectors

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the fan.

Figure 6-478 Remove the fan

14. Remove the fuser fan duct assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser fan duct assembly.

940 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the fuser fan duct assembly.

Figure 6-479 Remove the assembly

15. Remove the drum and developer drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum and developer drive assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-480 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect four connectors, remove seven screws, and then remove the drum and developer drive
assembly

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainers as needed.

Remove the drum and developer drive assembly 941

 Figure 6-481 Remove the assembly

16. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-482 Remove the rivets

17. Remove the hard disk

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD.

942 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the hard disk, and then remove the hard drive and
cradle together (callout 2).

Figure 6-483 Remove the HDD

18. Remove the formatter and formatter bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the formatter and formatter bracket.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

Figure 6-484 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the formatter and formatter bracket together.

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainers as necessary

Remove the formatter and formatter bracket 943

 Figure 6-485 Remove the bracket

19. Remove the toner dispense and duct motor assembly (Y, M)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner dispense and duct motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then remove the toner dispense and duct motor
assembly.

Figure 6-486 Remove the assembly

20. Remove the toner dispense and duct motor assembly (C, K)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner dispense and duct motor assembly.

944 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then remove the toner dispense and duct motor
assembly.

Figure 6-487 Remove the assembly

21. Remove the exit stacker upper cover prime

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit stacker upper cover prime.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-488 Remove four screws

Remove the exit stacker upper cover prime 945

 2. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-489 Remove five screws

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the exit stacker upper cover prime.

Figure 6-490 Remove the cover

22. Remove the toner guide unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner guide unit.

946 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-491 Remove two screws

2. Remove one gear.

Figure 6-492 Remove the gear

3. Before proceeding, take note of the following:

● Callout 1: Lever in the open position.

● Callout 2: Lever in the closed position.

Remove the toner guide unit 947

 Figure 6-493 Lever open/closed position

4. Place the lever in the open position.

Figure 6-494 Open the lever

948 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Open the connector cover.

Figure 6-495 Open the cover

6. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-496 Disconnect one connector

Remove the toner guide unit 949

 7. Slightly rotate the toner guide unit, and then pull it straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-497 Remove the unit

23. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

950 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner duct unit

Learn about removing and replacing the toner duct unit.

NOTE: Do not turn the printer power off until the first step (remove toner cartridges) of this procedure
is completed.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner duct unit.

Mean time to repair: 40 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-73 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ94-40001 Yellow toner duct unit

5QJ94-40001 Magenta toner duct unit

5QJ94-40001 Cyan toner duct unit

5QJ94-40001 Black toner duct unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Removal and replacement: Toner duct unit 951

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03078622

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Figure 6-498 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

952 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-499 Remove the cover

3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 953

 1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-500 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-501 Remove one screw

954 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-502 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-503 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 955

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-504 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-505 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

956 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-506 Remove two screws

2. Lay the control panel down, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-507 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 957

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-508 Disconnect the connector

5. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-509 Remove the cover

6. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

958 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-510 Remove three screws

2. Open the right door, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-511 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 959

 2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-512 Remove the TCU

8. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-513 Remove two screws

960 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-514 Remove the cover

9. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

■ Remove eight screws, and then pull the inner cover straight out and away form the printer to remove
it.

Figure 6-515 Remove the cover

Remove the inner cover 961

 10. Remove the toner duct unit
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner duct unit.

1. Remove one gear.

Figure 6-516 Remove the gear

2. Before proceeding, take note of the following:

● Callout 1: Lever in the open position.

● Callout 2: Lever in the closed position.

Figure 6-517 Lever open/closed position

962 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Place the lever in the open position.

Figure 6-518 Open the lever

4. Disconnect one connector, and then pull the developer unit out.

Figure 6-519 Disconnect one connector

Remove the toner duct unit 963

 5. Remove two screws, and then remove the duct unit. Removing the duct may require some force.

Figure 6-520 Remove the unit

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

964 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner duct motor (Y, M)

Learn about removing and replacing the toner duct motor (Y, M).

View a video of removing and replacing the toner dispense and duct motor (Y, M).

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-74 Part information

Part number Part description

SS216-80501 Toner duct motor (Y, M)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Toner duct motor (Y, M) 965

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-521 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-522 Remove the screw caps

966 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-523 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-524 Remove the cover

4. Remove the left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

Remove the rear lower cover 967

 ■ Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-525 Remove the cover

5. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-526 Remove the rivets

6. Remove the hard disk

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD.

968 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the hard disk, and then remove the hard drive and
cradle together (callout 2).

Figure 6-527 Remove the HDD

7. Remove the formatter and formatter bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the formatter and formatter bracket.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

Figure 6-528 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the formatter and formatter bracket together.

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainers as necessary

Remove the formatter and formatter bracket 969

 Figure 6-529 Remove the bracket

8. Remove the toner duct motor (Y, M)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner duct motor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the toner duct motor.

Figure 6-530 Remove the motor

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

970 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner duct motor (C, K)

Learn about removing and replacing the toner duct motor (C, K).

View a video of removing and replacing the toner dispense and duct motor (C, K).

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-75 Part information

Part number Part description

SS216-80501 Toner duct motor (C, K)

Removal and replacement: Toner duct motor (C, K) 971

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-531 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

972 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-532 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-533 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the rear lower cover 973

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-534 Remove the cover

4. Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LVPS / FDB fan.

1. Disconnect three connectors.

Figure 6-535 Disconnect three connectors

974 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the fan.

Figure 6-536 Remove the fan

5. Remove the fuser fan duct assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser fan duct assembly.

■ Disconnect connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the fuser fan duct assembly.

Figure 6-537 Remove the assembly

6. Remove the drum and developer drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum and developer drive assembly.

Remove the fuser fan duct assembly 975

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-538 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect four connectors, remove seven screws, and then remove the drum and developer drive
assembly

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainers as needed.

Figure 6-539 Remove the assembly

7. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

976 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-540 Remove the rivets

8. Remove the hard disk

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD.

■ Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the hard disk, and then remove the hard drive and
cradle together (callout 2).

Figure 6-541 Remove the HDD

9. Remove the formatter and formatter bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the formatter and formatter bracket.

Remove the hard disk 977

 1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

Figure 6-542 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the formatter and formatter bracket together.

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainers as necessary

Figure 6-543 Remove the bracket

10. Remove the toner duct motor (C, K)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner duct motor.

978 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the toner duct motor.

Figure 6-544 Remove the motor

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 979

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Toner collection unit

Learn about toner collection unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU)

Learn about removing and replacing the toner collection unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit.

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-76 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A83-67923 Toner collection unit

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

980 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-545 Remove the TCU

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 981

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit detection sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the TCU detection sensor.

NOTE: Do not turn the printer power off until the first step (remove toner cartridges) of this procedure
is completed.

View a video of removing and replacing the TCU detection sensor.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-77 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (TCU detection sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

982 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03078622

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Figure 6-546 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the left top over

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method) 983

 Figure 6-547 Remove the cover

3. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-548 Remove eight screws

984 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-549 Cover hook locations

4. Release the cover from the right- to left side as shown below. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-550 Remove the cover

4. Remove the HVPS

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HVPS.

Remove the HVPS 985

 1. Remove seven screws.

Figure 6-551 Remove seven screws

2. Release one hook, and then separate the HVPS from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to fully remove the HVPS. Wire harnesses still connect it to the printer.

Figure 6-552 Release the HVPS

986 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the HVPS.

Figure 6-553 Remove the PCA

5. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-554 Remove the cover

6. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

Remove the middle left cover 987

 NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-555 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-556 Remove one screw

988 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-557 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-558 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 989

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-559 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-560 Remove the keyboard

7. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

990 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-561 Remove two screws

2. Lay the control panel down, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-562 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 991

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-563 Disconnect the connector

8. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-564 Remove the cover

9. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

992 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-565 Remove three screws

2. Open the right door, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-566 Remove the cover

10. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 993

 2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-567 Remove the TCU

11. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-568 Remove two screws

994 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-569 Remove the cover

12. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

■ Remove eight screws, and then pull the inner cover straight out and away form the printer to remove
it.

Figure 6-570 Remove the cover

Remove the inner cover 995

 13. Remove the LSU fan assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LSU fan assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-571 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the LSU fan assembly.

NOTE: If the assembly is removed to gain access to another part, disconnect the connector only.

Figure 6-572 Remove the assembly

14. Remove the TCU detection sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU detection sensor.

996 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screw, and then remove the black-plastic panel.

Figure 6-573 Remove the panel

2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-574 Disconnect one connector

3. Do the following:

a. Release two hooks (callout 1).

b. Push in on the sensor hook (callout 2).

c. Remove the sensor from the LSU fan side of the printer (callout 3).

Remove the TCU detection sensor 997

 Figure 6-575 Remove the sensor

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

998 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the toner collection unit drive assembly.

NOTE: Do not turn the printer power off until the first step (remove toner cartridges) of this procedure
is completed.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

NOTE: This procedure requires removing the toner cartridges using the control panel method. Do this
prior to turning the power off. For more information, see Remove the toner cartridges (control panel
method) in this topic.

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-78 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00445A Toner collection unit drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) drive assembly 999
 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03078622

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Figure 6-576 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1000 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-577 Remove the cover

3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1001

 1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-578 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-579 Remove one screw

1002 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-580 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-581 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1003

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-582 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-583 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

1004 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-584 Remove two screws

2. Lay the control panel down, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-585 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1005

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-586 Disconnect the connector

5. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-587 Remove the cover

6. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

1006 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-588 Remove three screws

2. Open the right door, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-589 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1007

 2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-590 Remove the TCU

8. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-591 Remove two screws

1008 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-592 Remove the cover

9. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

■ Remove eight screws, and then pull the inner cover straight out and away form the printer to remove
it.

Figure 6-593 Remove the cover

Remove the inner cover 1009

 10. Remove the TCU drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU drive assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the TCU drive assembly.

Figure 6-594 Remove the assembly

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1010 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) motor

Learn about removing and replacing the toner collection unit motor.

NOTE: Do not turn the printer power off until the first step (remove toner cartridges) of this procedure
is completed.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit motor.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-79 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00166A Motor circuit step (toner collection unit motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) motor 1011

 1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03078622

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Figure 6-595 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1012 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-596 Remove the cover

3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1013

 1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-597 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-598 Remove one screw

1014 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-599 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-600 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1015

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-601 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-602 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

1016 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-603 Remove two screws

2. Lay the control panel down, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-604 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1017

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-605 Disconnect the connector

5. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-606 Remove the cover

6. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

1018 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-607 Remove three screws

2. Open the right door, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-608 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1019

 2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-609 Remove the TCU

8. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-610 Remove two screws

1020 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-611 Remove the cover

9. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

■ Remove eight screws, and then pull the inner cover straight out and away form the printer to remove
it.

Figure 6-612 Remove the cover

Remove the inner cover 1021

 10. Remove the TCU drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU drive assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the TCU drive assembly.

Figure 6-613 Remove the assembly

11. Remove the TCU motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU motor.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the TCU motor.

Figure 6-614 Remove the motor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1022 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) full sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the toner collection unit full sensor.

NOTE: Do not turn the printer power off until the first step (remove toner cartridges) of this procedure
is completed.

View a video of removing and replacing the toner collection unit full sensor.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

This procedure requires removing the toner cartridges using the control panel method. Do this prior to
turning the power off. For more information, see Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method) in
this topic.

Turn the printer power off

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) full sensor 1023
 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-80 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00492A Toner collection full sensor (toner collection unit full sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03078622

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

1024 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-615 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-616 Remove the cover

Remove the middle left cover 1025

 3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-617 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-618 Remove one screw

1026 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-619 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-620 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1027

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-621 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-622 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

1028 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-623 Remove two screws

2. Lay the control panel down, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-624 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1029

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-625 Disconnect the connector

5. Remove the left top over

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-626 Remove the cover

6. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1030 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-627 Remove eight screws

3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-628 Cover hook locations

Remove the left cover 1031

 4. Release the cover from the right- to left side as shown below. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-629 Remove the cover

7. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-630 Remove the cover

8. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

1032 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-631 Remove three screws

2. Open the right door, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-632 Remove the cover

9. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1033

 2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-633 Remove the TCU

10. Remove the paper dust holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the paper dust holder.

1. Locate the paper dust holder.

Figure 6-634 Locate the paper dust holder

1034 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release the assembly, and then pull the paper dust holder straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-635 Remove the assembly

11. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-636 Remove two screws

Remove the front cover 1035

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-637 Remove the cover

12. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

■ Remove eight screws, and then pull the inner cover straight out and away form the printer to remove
it.

Figure 6-638 Remove the cover

1036 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

13. Remove the TCU full sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU ful sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the TCU full sensor.

Figure 6-639 Remove the sensor

14. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Remove the TCU full sensor 1037

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Image creation
Learn about image creation parts removal and replacement.

Laser scanner unit (LSU)

Learn about laser scanner unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Laser scanner unit (LSU)

Learn about removing and replacing the LSU.

View a video of removing and replacing the LSU.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-81 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-05148A LSU

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

1038 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the left top over

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-640 Remove the cover

2. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

Remove the left top over 1039

 2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-641 Remove eight screws

3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-642 Cover hook locations

1040 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Release the cover from the right- to left side as shown below. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-643 Remove the cover

3. Remove the HVPS

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HVPS.

1. Remove seven screws.

Figure 6-644 Remove seven screws

2. Release one hook, and then separate the HVPS from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to fully remove the HVPS. Wire harnesses still connect it to the printer.

Remove the HVPS 1041

 Figure 6-645 Release the HVPS

3. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the HVPS.

Figure 6-646 Remove the PCA

4. Remove the LSU fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LSU fan assembly.

1042 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-647 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the LSU fan assembly.

NOTE: If the assembly is removed to gain access to another part, disconnect the connector only.

Figure 6-648 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the LSU unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LSU unit.

Remove the LSU unit 1043

 1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-649 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Slightly pull out the LSU, and then disconnect the film connector FFC. Remove the LSU

NOTE: Unlock the clip on the connector to remove the FFC.

Figure 6-650 Remove the LSU

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

1044 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Developer and drum

Learn about developer and drum parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Drum unit

Learn about removing and replacing the drum unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the drum unit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Developer and drum 1045

 Table 6-82 Part information

Part number Part description

W9075-67001 Drum unit (yellow)

W9075-67001 Drum unit (magenta)

W9075-67001 Drum unit (cyan)

W9074-67001 Drum unit (black)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

1046 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-651 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the drum unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum unit.

■ Rotate the locking lever down, and then pull the drum unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-652 Remove the unit

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the drum unit 1047

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Developer powder

Learn about filling or refilling the developer powder.

View a video of removing and replacing the developer powder.

IMPORTANT: This topic provides a method for filling a replacement developer unit, and a method for
refilling an empty (or near empty) in-service developer unit with developer powder.

● Method 1: Use this procedure to fill a replacement developer unit with developer powder.

NOTE: This method requires using a power screwdriver. If a power screwdriver is not available,
use method 2.

See Method 1: Fill a replacement developer unit with developer powder.

● Method 2: Use this procedure to refill an in-service developer unit with developer powder.

NOTE: This method does not require using a power screwdriver.

See Method 2: Refill an in-service developer unit with developer powder.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

1048 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-83 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-61010 Developer powder yellow kit

5QJ90-61011 Developer powder magenta kit

5QJ90-61012 Developer powder cyan kit

5QJ90-61013 Developer powder black kit

Required tools
● Power screwdriver

NOTE: If a power screwdriver is not available, use Method 2: Refill an in-service developer unit
with developer powder to fill or refill the developer powder.

● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1049

 2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-653 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the drum unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum unit.

■ Rotate the locking lever down, and then pull the drum unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-654 Remove the unit

3. Remove the developer unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer unit.

1050 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Before proceeding, take note of the open and closed position of the developer unit locking lever.

● Callout 1: Open position.

● Callout 2: Closed position.

Figure 6-655 Developer lever positions

2. Remove two screws, and then rotate the locking lever down to the closed position.

Figure 6-656 Rotate the locking lever

Remove the developer unit 1051

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then pull the developer unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-657 Remove the unit

4. Method 1: Fill a replacement developer unit with developer powder

Use the following procedure to fill a replacement developer unit with developer powder.

HP recommends using this method to fill a replacement developer unit with developer powder to avoid
contamination of the powder.

NOTE: This method of filling a replacement developer unit with developer powder requires a power
screwdriver. If this tool is not available, skip this step and go to Method 2: Refill an in-service developer
unit with developer powder.

TIP: If developer powder gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold
water. Hot water sets developer powder and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

1052 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Shake the developer powder bottle.

Figure 6-658 Shake the bottle

2. Remove the seal.

Figure 6-659 Remove the seal

3. Remove the seal and orange shipping tape.

IMPORTANT: Detach and save the white cap on the end of the developer unit.

Method 1: Fill a replacement developer unit with developer powder 1053

 Figure 6-660 Remove the seal and shipping tape

4. Attach the developer powder bottle to the developer unit.

Figure 6-661 Attach the bottle

1054 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Open the shutter.

Figure 6-662 Open the shutter

6. Attach the white cap (saved from a previous step) to the developer unit auger.

Figure 6-663 Attach the cap

7. Attach the power screwdriver to the white cap, slightly tilt the developer unit, and then slowly rotate
the auger counterclockwise to draw the developer powder out of the bottle and into the developer
unit. Continue this process until there is no powder remaining in the bottle.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that the power screwdriver is set to rotate counterclockwise before
attempting to rotate the auger.

Method 1: Fill a replacement developer unit with developer powder 1055

 Figure 6-664 Rotate the auger

8. When the bottle is empty, close the shutter and remove the bottle.

TIP: To check the level of powder in the bottle, hold it up to a light source.

Figure 6-665 Remove the bottle

5. Method 2: Refill an in-service developer unit with developer powder

Use the following procedure to refill an in-service developer unit with developer powder.

NOTE: Use this method to fill a replacement developer unit with powder if a power screwdriver is not
available. To fill a replacement developer unit with powder when a power screwdriver is available, HP
recommends using Method 1: Fill a replacement developer unit with developer powder.

1056 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

TIP: If developer powder gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in cold
water. Hot water sets developer powder and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

1. Shake the developer powder bottle.

Figure 6-666 Shake the bottle

2. Remove the seal.

Figure 6-667 Remove the seal

3. Place the developer unit on the plastic bag (provided in the kit), and then open the developer unit
cover.

IMPORTANT: Before refilling the in-service developer unit it must be completely emptied of
existing developer powder.

Method 2: Refill an in-service developer unit with developer powder 1057

 Be very cautions when emptying residual developer powder from the developer unit. Spilled
developer powder can be difficult or impossible to remove.

Figure 6-668 Open the cover

4. Remove the developer powder bottle cap.

Figure 6-669 Open the powder bottle

5. Carefully pour the developer powder into the developer unit.

TIP: If developer powder gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash in
cold water. Hot water sets developer powder and it might be difficult, or impossible, to remove.

1058 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-670 Fill the developer with powder

6. Close the developer unit cover.

Figure 6-671 Close the cover

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1059

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Drum and developer drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the drum and developer drive assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the drum and developer drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-84 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01674A Drum and developer drive assembly

1060 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-672 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

Remove the controller cover 1061

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-673 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-674 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1062 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-675 Remove the cover

4. Remove the fuser fan duct assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser fan duct assembly.

■ Disconnect connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the fuser fan duct assembly.

Figure 6-676 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the drum and developer drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum and developer drive assembly.

Remove the fuser fan duct assembly 1063

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-677 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect four connectors, remove seven screws, and then remove the drum and developer drive
assembly

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainers as needed.

Figure 6-678 Remove the assembly

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1064 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Developer unit

Learn about removing and replacing the developer unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the developer unit.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Developer unit 1065

 Table 6-85 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN58-67001 Developer unit (yellow)

5PN59-67001 Developer unit (magenta)

5PN60-67001 Developer unit (cyan)

5PN57-67001 Developer unit (black)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

1066 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-679 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the drum unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum unit.

■ Rotate the locking lever down, and then pull the drum unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-680 Remove the unit

3. Remove the developer unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer unit.

Remove the drum unit 1067

 1. Before proceeding, take note of the open and closed position of the developer unit locking lever.

● Callout 1: Open position.

● Callout 2: Closed position.

Figure 6-681 Developer lever positions

2. Remove two screws, and then rotate the locking lever down to the closed position.

Figure 6-682 Rotate the locking lever

1068 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then pull the developer unit out of the printer.

Figure 6-683 Remove the unit

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1069

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Drum motor (Y/M/C)

Learn about removing and replacing the drum motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the drum motor Y/M/C.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-86 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00123G Motor 24V (drum motor Y/M/C)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

1070 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-684 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-685 Remove the screw caps

Remove the rear upper cover 1071

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-686 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-687 Remove the cover

4. Remove the drum motor Y/M/C

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum motor.

1072 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Disconnect ten connectors.

Figure 6-688 Disconnect ten connectors

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the guide.

NOTE: Release wire harnesses as necessary.

Figure 6-689 Remove the guide

3. For each motor, do the following:

a. Locate the desired motor.

● Callout 1: C

● Callout 2: M

Remove the drum motor Y/M/C 1073

 ● Callout 3: Y

b. Remove three screws, and then remove the motor.

NOTE: The magenta and yellow drum motors have four mounting screws.

Figure 6-690 Remove the motors

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

1074 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Drum motor (K and ITB)

Learn about removing and replacing the drum motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the drum motor K and ITB.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-87 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00123G Motor 24V (drum motor K and ITB)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Drum motor (K and ITB) 1075

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-691 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-692 Remove the screw caps

1076 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-693 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-694 Remove the cover

4. Remove the drum motor K and ITB

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum and ITB motor.

Remove the rear lower cover 1077

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-695 Remove the motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1078 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Drum home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the drum home sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the drum home sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-88 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (drum home sensor Y/M/C/K)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Drum home sensor 1079

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-696 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-697 Remove the screw caps

1080 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-698 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-699 Remove the cover

4. Remove the drum home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the drum home sensor.

Remove the rear lower cover 1081

 1. Locate the desired sensor.

● Callout 1: K

● Callout 2: C

● Callout 3: M

● Callout 4: Y

Figure 6-700 Remove the motors

2. Remove the sensor as shown below.

Figure 6-701 Remove the sensor

1082 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Developer motor (K/Y/M/C)

Learn about removing and replacing the developer motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the developer motor Y/M/C.

View a video of removing and replacing the developer motor K.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1083

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-89 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00123B Motor BLDC (developer motor K/Y/M/C)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-702 Remove the cover

1084 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove the rear upper cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-703 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-704 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the rear upper cover 1085

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-705 Remove the cover

4. Remove the developer motor K/Y/M/C

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer motor.

1. Disconnect ten connectors.

Figure 6-706 Disconnect ten connectors

1086 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release the wire harnesses from the wire guide, remove four screws, and then remove the guide.

Figure 6-707 Remove the guide

3. Remove three screws, and then remove the developer motor.

● Callout 1: K

● Callout 2: C/M/Y

Figure 6-708 Remove the motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1087

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Image transfer belt (ITB)

Learn about image transfer belt parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB)

Learn about removing and replacing the ITB.

View a video of removing and replacing the ITB.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

1088 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-90 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-60051 Image-transfer belt (ITB)

430H4-67001 Image Transfer Kit

NOTE: The Image Transfer Kit includes the ITB and ITB cleaning unit
assemblies. HP recommends ordering and installing this kit at the
prescribed preventative maintenance intervals.

For more information, see PM table (Preventive Maintenance).

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1089

 2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-709 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the ITB cleaning unit kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB cleaning unit kit.

■ Remove one screw, and then pull the ITB cleaning unit straight out of the printer to remove it..

Figure 6-710 Remove the ITB cleaning unit

3. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1090 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-711 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-712 Release the hinge

Remove the right door assembly 1091

 3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-713 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-714 Remove the door

4. Remove the ITB

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB.

1092 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-715 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector, and then pull one lever forward.

Figure 6-716 Remove one screw and pull lever

Remove the ITB 1093

 3. Pull the ITB straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-717 Remove the ITB

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1094 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) engage motor

Learn about removing and replacing the ITB engage motor.

View a video of removing and replacing the ITB engage motor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-91 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00452A Drive-motor step (ITB engage motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) engage motor 1095
 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-718 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-719 Remove the screw caps

1096 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-720 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-721 Remove the cover

4. Remove the ITB engage motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB engage motor.

Remove the rear lower cover 1097

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the ITB engage
motor.

Figure 6-722 Remove the motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1098 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

ITB cleaning unit

Learn about ITB cleaning unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) cleaning unit kit
Learn about removing and replacing the ITB cleaning unit kit.

View a video of removing and replacing the ITB cleaning unit kit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-92 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN64-67001 ITB cleaning unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

ITB cleaning unit 1099

 1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-723 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the ITB cleaning unit kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB cleaning unit kit.

■ Remove one screw, and then pull the ITB cleaning unit straight out of the printer to remove it..

Figure 6-724 Remove the ITB cleaning unit

1100 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Color plane registration (CPR)

Learn about color plane registration parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Color plane registration (CPR) unit

Learn about removing and replacing the CPR unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR unit.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

Unpack the replacement assembly 1101

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-93 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-60137 Color plane registration (CPR) unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1102 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-725 Remove three screws

2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 1103

 Figure 6-726 Remove the cover

Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-727 Disconnect one connector

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

1104 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-728 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-729 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Remove the right door assembly 1105

 Figure 6-730 Remove the door

Remove the registration unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration unit.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the paper path guide.

Figure 6-731 Remove the guide

1106 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove the gear cover.

Figure 6-732 Remove the gear cover

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-733 Remove two screws

4. Release the left side of the registration unit, rotate the left side away from the printer, and then
remove the registration unit.

TIP: The bushing and assembly are removed together.

Reinstallation tip: The left end of the registration unit shaft is shorter than the right end of the
shaft. When reinstalling the unit, insert the right end of the shaft first to make the assembly easier
to install.

Remove the registration unit 1107

 Figure 6-734 Remove the unit

Remove the CPR unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the CPR unit.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-735 Remove four screws

1108 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove one e-ring.

Figure 6-736 Remove one e-ring

3. Slide the CPR unit shutter as shown below.

Figure 6-737 Slide the shutter

Remove the CPR unit 1109

 4. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-738 Remove one screw

5. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-739 Remove the cover

1110 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 6. Disconnect three connectors, and then remove the CPR unit.

Figure 6-740 Remove the unit

7. When reinstalling the CPR unit, make sure that the spring and unit are correctly positioned in the
printer.

Figure 6-741 Check the installation

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1111

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: CPR sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the CPR sensors.

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR front sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR center sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR rear sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1112 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-94 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00014A CPR sensor (Front, center, rear CPR sensors)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right rear cover.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-742 Remove three screws

Remove the right rear cover 1113

 2. Do the following:

a. Remove three rear lower cover screws.

b. Slightly separate the rear lower cover from the printer.

c. Open the right door, and then remove the right rear cover.

Figure 6-743 Remove the cover

2. Remove the right door assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door.

1. Open the right door, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-744 Disconnect one connector

1114 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Release the hinge.

CAUTION: The right door hinge is under tension and can be dangerous. To avoid personal injury,
be very careful when releasing the hinge.

Figure 6-745 Release the hinge

3. Release the right door front link.

Figure 6-746 Release the link

4. Remove the right door assembly.

NOTE: If a 2x520 DCF or HCI accessory is installed, do the following:

1. Open the lower access door.

Remove the right door assembly 1115

 2. Open the right door to almost 90 degrees, and then rotate it clockwise to remove it.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the door, do not lower it past 90 degrees when attempting to
remove it.

Figure 6-747 Remove the door

3. Remove the registration unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the registration unit.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the paper path guide.

Figure 6-748 Remove the guide

1116 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove the gear cover.

Figure 6-749 Remove the gear cover

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-750 Remove two screws

4. Release the left side of the registration unit, rotate the left side away from the printer, and then
remove the registration unit.

TIP: The bushing and assembly are removed together.

Reinstallation tip: The left end of the registration unit shaft is shorter than the right end of the
shaft. When reinstalling the unit, insert the right end of the shaft first to make the assembly easier
to install.

Remove the registration unit 1117

 Figure 6-751 Remove the unit

4. Remove the CPR unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the CPR unit.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-752 Remove four screws

1118 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove one e-ring.

Figure 6-753 Remove one e-ring

3. Slide the CPR unit shutter as shown below.

Figure 6-754 Slide the shutter

Remove the CPR unit 1119

 4. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-755 Remove one screw

5. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-756 Remove the cover

1120 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 6. Disconnect three connectors, and then remove the CPR unit.

Figure 6-757 Remove the unit

7. When reinstalling the CPR unit, make sure that the spring and unit are correctly positioned in the
printer.

Figure 6-758 Check the installation

5. Remove the CPR sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the CPR sensor.

1. Locate the desired sensor to remove.

● Callout 1: Front

● Callout 2: Center

Remove the CPR sensor 1121

 ● Callout 3: Rear

Figure 6-759 Identify the sensors

2. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the CPR sensor.

TIP: The connector might already have been disconnected during the CPR unit removal.

Figure 6-760 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

1122 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: CPR shutter drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the CPR shutter drive assembly.

NOTE: Do not turn off the printer power until after using the control panel to remove the toner
cartridges.

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR shutter drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: CPR shutter drive assembly 1123

 Table 6-95 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00894A CPR shutter drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03078622

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

1124 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-761 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-762 Remove the cover

Remove the middle left cover 1125

 3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-763 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-764 Remove one screw

1126 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-765 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-766 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1127

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-767 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-768 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

1128 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-769 Remove two screws

2. Lay the control panel down, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-770 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1129

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-771 Disconnect the connector

5. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-772 Remove the cover

6. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

1130 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-773 Remove three screws

2. Open the right door, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-774 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1131

 2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-775 Remove the TCU

8. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-776 Remove two screws

1132 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-777 Remove the cover

9. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

■ Remove eight screws, and then pull the inner cover straight out and away form the printer to remove
it.

Figure 6-778 Remove the cover

Remove the inner cover 1133

 10. Remove the CPR shutter drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the CPR shutter drive assembly.

■ Disconnect two connectors, remove two screws, and then remove the CPR shutter drive assembly.

Figure 6-779 Remove the assembly

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1134 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: CPR shutter motor

Learn about removing and replacing the CPR shutter motor.

NOTE: Do not turn off the printer power until after using the control panel to remove the toner
cartridges.

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR shutter motor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-96 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00078A Motor DC (CPR shutter motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Removal and replacement: CPR shutter motor 1135

 1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03078622

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Figure 6-780 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1136 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-781 Remove the cover

3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1137

 1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-782 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-783 Remove one screw

1138 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-784 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-785 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1139

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-786 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-787 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

1140 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-788 Remove two screws

2. Lay the control panel down, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-789 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1141

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-790 Disconnect the connector

5. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-791 Remove the cover

6. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

1142 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-792 Remove three screws

2. Open the right door, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-793 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1143

 2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-794 Remove the TCU

8. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-795 Remove two screws

1144 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-796 Remove the cover

9. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

■ Remove eight screws, and then pull the inner cover straight out and away form the printer to remove
it.

Figure 6-797 Remove the cover

Remove the inner cover 1145

 10. Remove the CPR shutter drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the CPR shutter drive assembly.

■ Disconnect two connectors, remove two screws, and then remove the CPR shutter drive assembly.

Figure 6-798 Remove the assembly

11. Remove the CPR shutter drive motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the CPR shutter drive motor.

1. Remove one gear.

Figure 6-799 Remove one gear

1146 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release one tab, and then remove the CPR shutter drive motor.

Figure 6-800 Remove the motor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1147

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: CPR shutter sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the CPR shutter sensor.

NOTE: Do not turn off the printer power until after using the control panel to remove the toner
cartridges.

View a video of removing and replacing the CPR shutter sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-97 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (CPR shutter sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1148 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03078622

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Figure 6-801 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method) 1149

 ■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-802 Remove the cover

3. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1150 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-803 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-804 Remove one screw

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1151

 3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-805 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-806 Disconnect one connector

1152 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-807 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-808 Remove the keyboard

4. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1153

 1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-809 Remove two screws

2. Lay the control panel down, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-810 Slide the cover

1154 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-811 Disconnect the connector

5. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-812 Remove the cover

6. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

Remove the exit cover stacker 1155

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-813 Remove three screws

2. Open the right door, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-814 Remove the cover

7. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

1156 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-815 Remove the TCU

8. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-816 Remove two screws

Remove the front cover 1157

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-817 Remove the cover

9. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

■ Remove eight screws, and then pull the inner cover straight out and away form the printer to remove
it.

Figure 6-818 Remove the cover

1158 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

10. Remove the CPR shutter drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the CPR shutter drive assembly.

■ Disconnect two connectors, remove two screws, and then remove the CPR shutter drive assembly.

Figure 6-819 Remove the assembly

11. Remove the CPR shutter drive sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the CPR shutter drive sensor.

1. Remove one gear.

Figure 6-820 Remove one gear

2. Release one tab, and then remove the CPR shutter drive motor.

● Disconnect one connector (not shown).

Remove the CPR shutter drive assembly 1159

 ● Release two tabs (callout 2)

● Push the sensor as shown (callout 2)

● Remove the CPR shutter drive sensor (callout 3).

Figure 6-821 Remove the sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

1160 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Fuser unit
Learn about fuser unit parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Fuser unit

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser unit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-98 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN50-67001 Fuser unit 100V

5PN61-67001 Fuser unit 110V

5PN62-67001 Fuser unit 220V

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Fuser unit 1161

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the fuser support bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser support bracket.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the fuser support bracket.

Figure 6-822 Remove the bracket

2. Remove the fuser assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser assembly.

1162 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove the fuser assembly.

Figure 6-823 Remove the fuser assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1163

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser and exit drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser and exit drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-99 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01678A Fuser and exit drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

1164 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-824 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-825 Remove the screw caps

Remove the rear upper cover 1165

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-826 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-827 Remove the cover

4. Remove the fuser fan duct assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser fan duct assembly.

1166 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the fuser fan duct assembly.

Figure 6-828 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the fuser and exit drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser and exit drive assembly.

■ Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the fuser and exit drive
assembly.

Figure 6-829 Remove the assembly

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the fuser and exit drive assembly 1167

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser motor

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser motor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-100 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00123B Motor BLDC (fuser motor)

1168 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-830 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

Remove the controller cover 1169

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-831 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-832 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1170 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-833 Remove the cover

4. Remove the fuser fan duct assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser fan duct assembly.

■ Disconnect connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the fuser fan duct assembly.

Figure 6-834 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the fuser motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser motor.

Remove the fuser fan duct assembly 1171

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then remove the fuser motor.

Figure 6-835 Remove the motor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1172 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor

Learn about removing and replacing the exit motor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-101 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01686A Drive-motor step (exit motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor 1173

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-836 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-837 Remove the screw caps

1174 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-838 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-839 Remove the cover

4. Remove the fuser fan duct assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser fan duct assembly.

Remove the rear lower cover 1175

 ■ Disconnect connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the fuser fan duct assembly.

Figure 6-840 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the exit motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit motor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor.

Figure 6-841 Remove the motor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1176 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser support bracket

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser support bracket.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-102 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07804A Fuser support bracket

Removal and replacement: Fuser support bracket 1177

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the fuser support bracket

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser support bracket.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the fuser support bracket.

Figure 6-842 Remove the bracket

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1178 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Environmental sensor, switch, and fan

Learn about environmental sensor, switch, and fan parts removal and replacement.

Base sensor, switch, and fan

Review the base sensor, switch, and fan removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Outer temperature humidity sensor assembly, sensor and holder
Learn about removing and replacing the outer temperature humidity sensor assembly, sensor, and
holder.

View a video of removing and replacing the outer temperature humidity sensor assembly.

NOTE: These videos show the E877 printer. The procedures are similar for the E826 printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

NOTE: This procedure requires removing the toner cartridges using the control panel method. Do this
prior to turning the power off. For more information, see Remove the toner cartridges (control panel
method) in this topic.

Environmental sensor, switch, and fan 1179

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-103 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-40002 Outer temperature humidity sensor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

1180 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-843 Remove three screws

2. Open the right door, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-844 Remove the cover

2. Remove the front lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front lower cover.

1. If Tray 2 and Tray 3 are installed, remove them now.

Remove the front lower cover 1181

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-845 Remove the cover

3. Remove the outer temperature humidity sensor assembly and sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the outer temperature humidity sensor assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-846 Disconnect one connector

1182 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release one hook, and then remove the outer temperature humidity sensor assembly.

Figure 6-847 Remove the sensor assembly

3. Optional step: Release one hook, and then separate the sensor from the holder to remove it.

Figure 6-848 Remove the sensor and holder

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1183

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: LVPS FDB fan assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the low-voltage power supply / fuser drive board (LVPS / FDB) fan.

View a video of removing and replacing the LVPS / FDB fan assembly.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-104 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01786A LVPS / FDB fan assembly

1184 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-849 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

Remove the controller cover 1185

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-850 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-851 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1186 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-852 Remove the cover

4. Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LVPS / FDB fan.

1. Disconnect three connectors.

Figure 6-853 Disconnect three connectors

Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly 1187

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the fan.

Figure 6-854 Remove the fan

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1188 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser fan duct assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the fuser fan duct assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser fan duct assembly.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-105 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-40125 Fuser fan duct assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Fuser fan duct assembly 1189

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-855 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-856 Remove the screw caps

1190 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-857 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-858 Remove the cover

4. Remove the fuser fan duct assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fuser fan duct assembly.

Remove the rear lower cover 1191

 ■ Disconnect connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the fuser fan duct assembly.

Figure 6-859 Remove the assembly

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1192 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: LSU fan

Learn about removing and replacing the laser scanner unit (LSU) fan.

View a video of removing and replacing the LSU fan.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-106 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01784A Frame sub-fan (LSU fan)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the left top over

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

Removal and replacement: LSU fan 1193

 ■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-860 Remove the cover

2. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-861 Remove eight screws

1194 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-862 Cover hook locations

4. Release the cover from the right- to left side as shown below. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-863 Remove the cover

3. Remove the HVPS

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HVPS.

Remove the HVPS 1195

 1. Remove seven screws.

Figure 6-864 Remove seven screws

2. Release one hook, and then separate the HVPS from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to fully remove the HVPS. Wire harnesses still connect it to the printer.

Figure 6-865 Release the HVPS

1196 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the HVPS.

Figure 6-866 Remove the PCA

4. Remove the LSU fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LSU fan assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-867 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the LSU fan assembly.

NOTE: If the assembly is removed to gain access to another part, disconnect the connector only.

Remove the LSU fan assembly 1197

 Figure 6-868 Remove the assembly

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1198 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Developer fan assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the developer fan assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the developer fan assembly.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-107 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-40126 Developer fan assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Developer fan assembly 1199

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-869 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-870 Remove the screw caps

1200 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-871 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-872 Remove the cover

4. Remove the developer fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the developer fan assembly.

Remove the rear lower cover 1201

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the developer fan assembly.

Figure 6-873 Remove the assembly

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1202 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front door switch assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the front door switch.

NOTE: Leave the printer power on until the first step is completed.

View a video of removing and replacing the front door switch.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

NOTE: Leave the printer power on until the first step is completed.

Turn the printer power off

NOTE: This procedure requires removing the toner cartridges using the control panel method. Do this
prior to turning the power off. For more information, see Remove the toner cartridges (control panel
method) in this topic.

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-108 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00466A Front door open switch

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Removal and replacement: Front door switch assembly 1203

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges (control panel method)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the toner cartridges.

■ At the printer control panel, do the following:

a. Select the Sign In item (located at the upper left corner of the control panel).

b. Select the Service Access Code item, and then enter the access code for the printer.

● 03078622

c. Select the Supplies item.

d. Open the front door.

e. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.

Figure 6-874 Eject the toner cartridge (control panel method)

2. Remove the left top over

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

1204 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-875 Remove the cover

3. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-876 Remove eight screws

Remove the left cover 1205

 3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-877 Cover hook locations

4. Release the cover from the right- to left side as shown below. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-878 Remove the cover

4. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

1206 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-879 Remove the cover

5. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1207

 1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-880 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-881 Remove one screw

1208 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-882 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-883 Disconnect one connector

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1209

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-884 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-885 Remove the keyboard

6. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

1210 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-886 Remove two screws

2. Lay the control panel down, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-887 Slide the cover

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1211

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-888 Disconnect the connector

7. Remove the exit cover stacker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the exit cover stacker.

■ Remove two screw caps and remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the exit cover stacker
(callout 2).

Figure 6-889 Remove the cover

8. Remove the right front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right front cover.

1212 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-890 Remove three screws

2. Open the right door, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-891 Remove the cover

9. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the TCU.

1. Open the front door

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1213

 2. Release two tabs (on each side of the TCU), and then pull the TCU straight out of the printer to
remove it.

Figure 6-892 Remove the TCU

10. Remove the front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-893 Remove two screws

1214 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Push in on the hook located at the right side of the cover (callout 1), and then remove the cover
(callouts 2/3).

Figure 6-894 Remove the cover

11. Remove the inner cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner cover.

■ Remove eight screws, and then pull the inner cover straight out and away form the printer to remove
it.

Figure 6-895 Remove the cover

Remove the inner cover 1215

 12. Remove the ITB cleaning unit kit
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ITB cleaning unit kit.

■ Remove one screw, and then pull the ITB cleaning unit straight out of the printer to remove it..

Figure 6-896 Remove the ITB cleaning unit

13. Remove the front door switch assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front door switch assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, \remove one screw, and then remove the front door switch assembly.

Figure 6-897 Remove the switch

14. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1216 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door switch assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the right door switch.

View a video of removing and replacing the right door switch.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Right door switch assembly 1217

 Table 6-109 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01467A Switch (right door switch assembly)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-898 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1218 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-899 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-900 Remove the cover

3. Remove the right door switch assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right door switch assembly.

1. Open the right door.

2. Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the right door switch assembly.

NOTE: Release the wire harness from the retainer.

Remove the right door switch assembly 1219

 Figure 6-901 Remove the switch

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1220 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Base control panel

Review the base control panel removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Control panel

Learn about removing and replacing the control panel.

View a video of removing and replacing the Control-panel assembly 25.6 cm 10.1 in 2nd.

View a video of removing and replacing the Control-panel assembly 20.3 cm 8 in.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-110 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK42-60104 Control-panel assembly 25.6 cm (10.1 in 2nd)

3SJ15-60101 Control-panel assembly 20.3 cm (8 in)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Base control panel 1221

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle upper cover.

■ Do the following:

● Rotate the control panel into the upright position (callout 1).

● Use a pair of tweezers to release the cover (callout 2), and then remove the cover (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-902 Remove the cover

2. Remove the control panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the control panel.

1222 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-903 Remove one screw

2. Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the control panel.

Figure 6-904 Remove the control panel

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1223

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

PCAs
Learn about printed circuit assembly (PCA) parts removal and replacement.

Main PCA
Learn about main printed circuit assembly (PCA) parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Formatter

Learn about removing and replacing the formatter.

View a video of removing and replacing the formatter.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1224 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-111 Part information

Part number Part description

6CF14-67003 PCA controller color (Formatter)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-905 Remove the cover

2 Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

Remove the controller cover 1225

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-906 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-907 Remove the cover

3 Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

1226 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-908 Remove the rivets

4 Remove the hard disk

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD.

■ Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the hard disk, and then remove the hard drive and
cradle together (callout 2).

Figure 6-909 Remove the HDD

5 Remove the formatter

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the formatter.

Remove the hard disk 1227

 1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.

Figure 6-910 Disconnect all connectors

2. Remove ten screws, and then remove the formatter.

Figure 6-911 Remove ten screws

1228 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. For replacement formatter installations: The trusted platform module (TPM) is not a replaceable
service part. Remove the TPM from the discarded formatter, and then install it on the replacement
formatter.

Figure 6-912 Formatter TPM

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1229

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Riser card and cradle

Learn about removing and replacing the riser card and cradle.

View a video of removing and replacing the riser card and cradle.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-112 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ01-60001 Riser card-EPS2.0 Riser for HDD

5851-7754 Cradle-Riser card

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

1230 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-913 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-914 Remove the rivets

3. Remove the hard disk

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD.

Remove the rivet-HDD 1231

 ■ Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the hard disk, and then remove the hard drive and
cradle together (callout 2).

Figure 6-915 Remove the HDD

4. Remove the riser card and cradle

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the riser card and cradle.

1. Release the clips on both ends of the cradle (callout 1), and then remove the riser card from the
HDD callout 2).

Figure 6-916 Remove the riser card

1232 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Release the hook.

Figure 6-917 Release the hook

3. Separate the riser card from the cradle.

Figure 6-918 Remove the riser card and cradle

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1233

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rivet-HDD

Learn about removing and replacing the hard-disk drive rivet.

View a video of removing and replacing the hard-disk drive rivet.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-113 Part information

Part number Part description

6ER04-40035 Rivet-HDD

1234 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-919 Remove the rivets

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the rivet-HDD 1235

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Cradle

Learn about removing and replacing the hard disk cradle.

View a video of removing and replacing the hard disk drive cradle.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-114 Part information

Part number Part description

5851-7753 Cradle-HDD

1236 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-920 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

Remove the controller cover 1237

 ■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-921 Remove the rivets

3. Remove the hard disk

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD.

■ Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the hard disk, and then remove the hard drive and
cradle together (callout 2).

Figure 6-922 Remove the HDD

4. Remove the hard disk from the cradle

Use the following procedure to remove the HDD from the cradle.

1238 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Release the clips on both ends of the cradle (callout 1), and then remove the riser card from the
HDD (callout 2).

Figure 6-923 Remove the riser card

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-924 Remove two screws

Remove the hard disk from the cradle 1239

 3. Separate the HDD from the cradle.

Figure 6-925 Remove the cradle

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1240 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Hard disk 500GB

Learn about removing and replacing the hard disk.

View a video of removing and replacing the hard disk drive.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-115 Part information

Part number Part description

933853-011 HDD 500G SED

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Hard disk 500GB 1241

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-926 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-927 Remove the rivets

3. Remove the hard disk

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD.

1242 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the hard disk, and then remove the hard drive and
cradle together (callout 2).

Figure 6-928 Remove the HDD

4. Remove the hard disk from the cradle

Use the following procedure to remove the HDD from the cradle.

1. Release the clips on both ends of the cradle (callout 1), and then remove the riser card from the
HDD (callout 2).

Figure 6-929 Remove the riser card

Remove the hard disk from the cradle 1243

 2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-930 Remove two screws

3. Separate the HDD from the cradle.

Figure 6-931 Remove the cradle

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1244 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Sub PCAs
Learn about sub printed circuit assembly (PCA) parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Accelerator card (optional)

Learn about removing and replacing the accelerator card.

View a video of removing and replacing the accelerator card.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-116 Part information

Part number Part description

6HN30-67001 Accelerator card

Sub PCAs 1245

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-932 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rivet-HDD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rivet-HDD.

1246 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Locate the HDD rivets near the formatter interface ports, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove
them.

Figure 6-933 Remove the rivets

3. Remove the hard disk and accelerator card assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HDD and accelerator card assembly.

1. Push in and lift up on the lever (callout 1) to release the assembly, and then remove the hard drive
and accelerator card together (callout 2).

Figure 6-934 Remove the HDD and accelerator card assembly

Remove the hard disk and accelerator card assembly 1247

 2. Release two clips (callout 1), and then separate the accelerator card form the riser card to remove it
(callout 2).

Figure 6-935 Remove the accelerator card

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1248 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: USB hub PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the USB hub PCA.

View a video of removing and replacing the USB hub PCA.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-117 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ04-60002 USB hub PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

Removal and replacement: USB hub PCA 1249

 ■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-936 Remove the cover

2. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1250 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-937 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-938 Remove one screw

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1251

 3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-939 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-940 Disconnect one connector

1252 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-941 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-942 Remove the keyboard

3. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1253

 1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-943 Remove two screws

2. Lay the control panel down, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-944 Slide the cover

1254 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-945 Disconnect the connector

4. Remove the USB hub PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the USB hub PCA.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the USB hub PCA.

Figure 6-946 Remove the PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the USB hub PCA 1255

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Island of data (IOD)

Learn about removing and replacing the IOD.

View a video of removing and replacing the IOD.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1256 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-118 Part information

Part number Part description

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-947 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

Remove the controller cover 1257

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-948 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-949 Remove the cover

3. Remove the IOD

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the IOD.

1258 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-950 Disconnect one connector

2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one rivet, and then remove the island of data.

CAUTION: Be careful when handling the rivet. Do not drop it into the printer engine.

Figure 6-951 Remove the PCA

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1259

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Echo PCA and rivet

Learn about removing and replacing the echo PCA.

View a video of removing and replacing the echo PCA.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-119 Part information

Part number Part description

T3U64-60001 Echo PCA

6ER04-40034 Rivet-Echo PCA

1260 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-952 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

Remove the controller cover 1261

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-953 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-954 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1262 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-955 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-956 Remove the cover

4. Remove the echo PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the echo PCA.

Remove the echo PCA 1263

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-957 Disconnect one connector

2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one rivet, and then remove the echo PCA.

CAUTION: Be careful when handling the rivet. Do not drop it into the printer engine.

Figure 6-958 Remove the PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

1264 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Power key

Learn about removing and replacing the power key PCA.

View a video of removing and replacing the power key PCA.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-120 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ33-60007 Power key PCA

Removal and replacement: Power key 1265

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the middle left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the middle left cover.

■ Remove two screws, rotate the control panel into the upright position, and then remove the cover
(callout 1).

Figure 6-959 Remove the cover

2. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1266 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-960 Remove one screw cap

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-961 Remove one screw

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1267

 3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-962 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-963 Disconnect one connector

1268 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-964 Remove four screws

6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-965 Remove the keyboard

3. Remove the right middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the right middle cover assembly.

Remove the right middle cover assembly 1269

 1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-966 Remove two screws

2. Lay the control panel down, and then slide the cover as shown below to separate it from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the cover. It is still attached to the printer by a
wire harness.

Figure 6-967 Slide the cover

1270 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the right middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-968 Disconnect the connector

4. Remove the power key PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the power key PCA.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-969 Remove one screw

Remove the power key PCA 1271

 2. Lift the PCA up, disconnect one connector, and then remove the power key PCA.

Figure 6-970 Remove the PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1272 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Keyboard (Flow models)

Learn about removing and replacing the keyboard.

NOTE: There are two types of physical keyboards (fold type and drawer type). Verify the type
keyboard to be serviced, and then follow the appropriate instructions in this topic.

View a video of removing and replacing the keyboard (fold type).

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes (fold or drawer type)

Service level: Medium (fold or drawer type)

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-121 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01742A Keyboard Assy-US English

JC93-01743A Keyboard Assy-UK English

63C82-67021 E7 Keyboard (Drawer type) Assy-US English

63C82-67023 E7 Keyboard (Drawer type) Assy-UK English

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Removal and replacement: Keyboard (Flow models) 1273

 Post service test

1. Remove the keyboard (fold type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (fold type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a drawer type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Rotate the keyboard up and out of the way, and then use a pair of tweezers to remove one screw
cap.

Figure 6-971 Remove one screw cap

1274 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-972 Remove one screw

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-973 Remove the cover

Remove the keyboard (fold type) 1275

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainer (callout 2).

Figure 6-974 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-975 Remove four screws

1276 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 6. Remove the keyboard.

Figure 6-976 Remove the keyboard

2. Remove the keyboard (drawer type)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the keyboard (drawer type).

NOTE: The optional keyboard is for flow models only. For all other models, skip this step.

For a fold type keyboard, skip this step.

1. Do the following:

● Rotate the control panel into the upright position (callout 1).

● Use a pair of tweezers to release the cover (callout 2), and then remove the top cover (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Remove the keyboard (drawer type) 1277

 Figure 6-977 Remove the cover

2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2, and then remove the control
panel (callout 3).

NOTE: Lift the control panel straight up to remove it.

Figure 6-978 Remove the control panel

3. Disconnect one connector.

IMPORTANT: The control panel mount bracket and the keyboard must be removed together. They
are attached to each other by a film cable.

1278 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-979 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-980 Remove four screws

5. Pull the mount bracket and keyboard assembly straight out and away from the printer to release it.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the printer by
two hooks.

Remove the keyboard (drawer type) 1279

 Figure 6-981 Release the assembly

6. Look up under the mount bracket and keyboard assembly to locate two hooks. Press in on each
hook, and then pull the assembly away form the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-982 Remove the assembly

7. Special instruction for a replacement keyboard

a. Dispose of the defective part. See

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1280 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 b. Unpack the replacement parts supplied in the service kit.

IMPORTANT: Only the control panel mount and keyboard assembly (callout 2) are required to
be installed.

Save the additional service kit parts (callouts 1/3/4) for other applications.

Figure 6-983 Service kit parts

CP mount &
2 Keyboard 3
USB HUB PCA

1
Keyboard
rail
4 HIP cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1281

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fax card (optional)

Learn about removing and replacing the fax card.

View a video of removing and replacing the fax card.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

NOTE: Fax card part numbers can vary by country/region. Check with your genuine HP parts supplier
if you are unsure of the correct fax card part number for your country/region.

Table 6-122 Part information

Part number Part description

7ZA08-67001 Single Fax 800 Accessory

5QK14-67001 Dual Fax 810 Accessory

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1282 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the controller cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-984 Remove the cover

2. Remove the fax card assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the fax card.

1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-985 Release the fax card

Remove the controller cover 1283

 2. Slightly rotate the fax card away from the formatter PCA (callout 1), and then slide it as shown
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 6-986 Remove the fax card

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1284 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Power supply PCAs

Learn about power supply printed circuit assembly (PCA) parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply (HVPS)

Learn about removing and replacing the HVPS.

View a video of removing and replacing the HVPS.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-123 Part information

Part number Part description

JC44-00212D High-Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Power supply PCAs 1285

 1. Remove the left top over
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left top cover.

■ Use a pair of tweezers to carefully release the cover, and then pull straight out to remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover on the printer, and then gently push it straight in to install it.

Figure 6-987 Remove the cover

2. Remove the left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the left cover.

1. Open the front cover (door) and all installed trays.

1286 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove eight screws.

Figure 6-988 Remove eight screws

3. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the mounting hooks on the inside of the cover.

Figure 6-989 Cover hook locations

Remove the left cover 1287

 4. Release the cover from the right- to left side as shown below. Remove the cover.

Figure 6-990 Remove the cover

3. Remove the HVPS

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HVPS.

1. Remove seven screws.

Figure 6-991 Remove seven screws

2. Release one hook, and then separate the HVPS from the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to fully remove the HVPS. Wire harnesses still connect it to the printer.

1288 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-992 Release the HVPS

3. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the HVPS.

Figure 6-993 Remove the PCA

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1289

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Learn about removing and replacing the LVPS.

View a video of removing and replacing the LVPS.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-124 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-60014 Low-Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), 110V

5QJ90-60015 Low-Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), 220V

1290 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-994 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

Remove the controller cover 1291

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-995 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-996 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1292 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-997 Remove the cover

4. Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LVPS / FDB fan.

1. Disconnect three connectors.

Figure 6-998 Disconnect three connectors

Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly 1293

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the fan.

Figure 6-999 Remove the fan

5. Remove the LVPS

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LVPS.

■ Do the following:

● Disconnect all of the connectors on the LVPS.

● Remove four screws.

● Remove the LVPS.

Figure 6-1000 Remove the PCA

1294 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser-drive board (FDB)

Learn about removing and replacing the FDB.

View a video of removing and replacing the FDB.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1295

 Table 6-125 Part information

Part number Part description

JC44-00210F Fuser-drive board (FDB), 110V

JC44-00211F Fuser-drive board (FDB), 220V

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1001 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1296 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1002 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1003 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

Remove the rear lower cover 1297

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1004 Remove the cover

4. Remove the LVPS FDB fan assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the LVPS / FDB fan.

1. Disconnect three connectors.

Figure 6-1005 Disconnect three connectors

1298 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the fan.

Figure 6-1006 Remove the fan

5. Remove the FDB

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the FDB.

■ Do the following:

● Disconnect all of the connectors and wire harness retainers on the FDB.

● Remove four screws.

● Remove the FDB.

Figure 6-1007 Remove the PCA

Remove the FDB 1299

 6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Integrated scanner asset (ISA)

Learn about ISA parts removal and replacement.

Whole unit
You will learn more about the ISA whole unit replacement.

200-Sheet ISA for z and dn bundles

Learn about ISA removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Integrated scanner for z and dn bundle (5QK36A/5QK35A)

Learn about removing and replacing the ISA.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

1300 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Service level: Medium

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit including the white backing.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-126 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK36-67001 HP LaserJet 240ipm 200-sheet Flow DADF scanner (z bundle)

5QK35-67001 HP LaserJet 180ipm 200-sheet DADF scanner (dn bundle)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the flatbed glass to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1301

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1008 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1009 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the ISA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the ISA.

1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: For the zero-force insertion (ZIF) flat-flexible cable (FFC) connectors, raise the locking clip
to release the cable.

1302 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1010 Disconnect three connectors

2. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1011 Remove two screws

3. Slide the ISA towards the front of the printer until it stops to release it.

NOTE: Sliding the ISA might require considerable force to release the mounting locks.

Remove the ISA 1303

 Figure 6-1012 Slide the ISA

4. Lift the ISA up and off of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: The ISA is heavy. Always use safe lifting practices. HP recommends more than one
person lift the ISA.

Figure 6-1013 Remove the ISA

5. When reinstalling the FFCs into the connectors, make sure to push down on the locking clip so that
the connector firmly grasps the cable film.

● Callout 1: Unlocked

● Callout 2: Locked

1304 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1014 Lock the FFC connector clip

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1305

 100-Sheet ISA
Learn about ISA removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Integrated scanner for Flex-build (5QK34A)

Learn about removing and replacing the ISA.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit including the white backing.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-127 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK34-67001 HP LaserJet 120ipm 100-sheet DADF scanner (flex bundle)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the flatbed glass to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1306 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screw caps, remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1015 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit including the white backing.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1016 Remove two screws

Remove the document feeder 1307

 2. Disconnect two connectors, remove one screw, and then remove the document feeder.

Figure 6-1017 Remove the document feeder

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1308 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

ADF (Automatic document feeder)

Learn about ADF parts removal and replacement.

200-Sheet ADF for dn bundle

Learn about ADF parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: ADF (200sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder.

IMPORTANT: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit (including the white backing
plate).

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit including the white backing.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

NOTE: The whole unit replacement parts below include the Kit - white backing A3 (5QJ90-67005).

Table 6-128 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-67011 Automatic document feeder (ADF) (Growler + ENT)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

ADF (Automatic document feeder) 1309

 ○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1018 Remove two screw caps

1310 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1019 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1020 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the retainer clip (callout 2) to disconnect one of the FFCs.

Remove the document feeder 1311

 Figure 6-1021 Remove the document feeder

3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1022 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1312 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

4. Special installation instructions: White backing plate

Use the following instructions to install the white backing plate

Special installation instructions: White backing plate 1313

 1. If the spring and suspension clip have become separated during shipping, install the spring on the
clip as shown below.

Figure 6-1023 Spring installed on the suspension clip

2. Position a suspension clip near the mounting feature on the document feeder, and then push it
straight in to install it.

Figure 6-1024 Install the suspension clip

1314 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove the protective film from the double-sided tape on the suspension clip.

Figure 6-1025 Expose the double-sided tape

4. Repeat these steps for the remaining eight suspension clips.

Figure 6-1026 Install the remaining suspension clips

5. Place the white backing plate on the flatbed glass.

NOTE: One corner of the white backing plate has an arrow embossed on it. Place that corner
towards the rear left corner of the flatbed glass.

Special installation instructions: White backing plate 1315

 Figure 6-1027 Place the white backing plate

6. Position the white backing plate so that the corner with the embossed arrow fits tightly up against
the flatbed glass frame.

NOTE: Make sure that the rear and left edges of the plate are firmly against the flatbed frame.

Figure 6-1028 Register the white backing plate against the frame

7. Fully close the document feeder to install the white backing plate.

NOTE: Open the document feeder and make sure the white backing plate is firmly attached.

1316 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1029 Close the document feeder

Removal and replacement: ADF CMF panel

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder color panel.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-129 Part information

Part number Part description

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

Removal and replacement: ADF CMF panel 1317

 ○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder color panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder color panel.

1. Open the document feeder.

2. Remove three screws (callout 1), release four tabs, and then remove the document feeder color
panel (callout 2).

Figure 6-1030 Remove the color panel

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1318 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF white backing kit (200sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder white backing plate.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-130 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-67005 Kit - white backing A3

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: ADF white backing kit (200sh) 1319

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder white backing

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder white backing.

1. Open the document feeder.

2. Disconnect nine hooks, and then remove the white backing.

Figure 6-1031 Remove the white backing

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1320 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3. Special installation instructions: White backing plate

Use the following instructions to install the white backing plate

1. If the spring and suspension clip have become separated during shipping, install the spring on the
clip as shown below.

Figure 6-1032 Spring installed on the suspension clip

Special installation instructions: White backing plate 1321

 2. Position a suspension clip near the mounting feature on the document feeder, and then push it
straight in to install it.

Figure 6-1033 Install the suspension clip

3. Remove the protective film from the double-sided tape on the suspension clip.

Figure 6-1034 Expose the double-sided tape

1322 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Repeat these steps for the remaining eight suspension clips.

Figure 6-1035 Install the remaining suspension clips

5. Place the white backing plate on the flatbed glass.

NOTE: One corner of the white backing plate has an arrow embossed on it. Place that corner
towards the rear left corner of the flatbed glass.

Figure 6-1036 Place the white backing plate

6. Position the white backing plate so that the corner with the embossed arrow fits tightly up against
the flatbed glass frame.

NOTE: Make sure that the rear and left edges of the plate are firmly against the flatbed frame.

Special installation instructions: White backing plate 1323

 Figure 6-1037 Register the white backing plate against the frame

7. Fully close the document feeder to install the white backing plate.

NOTE: Open the document feeder and make sure the white backing plate is firmly attached.

Figure 6-1038 Close the document feeder

Removal and replacement: ADF pickup roller kit (200sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder pickup roller kit.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

1324 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Before performing service
Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-131 Part information

Part number Part description

5851-7202 ADF roller kit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder pickup roller kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder pickup roller kit.

Remove the document feeder pickup roller kit 1325

 1. Release the latch, and then open the ADF top door.

Figure 6-1039 Opne the cover

2. Rotate the blue locking lever down.

Figure 6-1040 Rotate the lever

1326 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Slide the locking lever toward the front of the printer (callout 1), and then remove the pick roller
assembly (callout 2).

Figure 6-1041 Remove the roller assembly

4. Open the separation roller cover.

Figure 6-1042 Open the cover

Remove the document feeder pickup roller kit 1327

 5. Remove the separation roller.

Figure 6-1043 Remove the roller

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1328 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF PCA (200sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder printed circuit assembly (PCA).

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-132 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-67013 ADF PCA_ENT EASE board

5QJ90-67008 ADF PCA_WF EASE board (for flow)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

Removal and replacement: ADF PCA (200sh) 1329

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1044 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1045 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

1330 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1046 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the retainer clip (callout 2) to disconnect one of the FFCs.

Figure 6-1047 Remove the document feeder

Remove the document feeder 1331

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1048 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

3. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1049 Remove three screws

1332 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Open the ADF top cover, remove one screw, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1050 Remove the cover

4. Remove the document feeder PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder PCA.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors.

NOTE: One flat-flexible cable (FFC; callout 1) is connected to the PCA with a zero-insertion force
(ZIF) connector. Release the connector locking clip to remove the FFC.

Figure 6-1051 Disconnect connectors

Remove the document feeder PCA 1333

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA

Figure 6-1052 Remove the PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1334 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF flat-flexible cable (200sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder flat-flexible cable (FFC).

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-133 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-67009 ADF flat-flexible cable

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

Removal and replacement: ADF flat-flexible cable (200sh) 1335

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1053 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1054 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

1336 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1055 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the retainer clip (callout 2) to disconnect one of the FFCs.

Figure 6-1056 Remove the document feeder

Remove the document feeder 1337

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1057 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

3. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1058 Remove three screws

1338 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Open the ADF top cover, remove one screw, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1059 Remove the cover

4. Remove the document feeder FFC

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder FFC.

1. Disconnect the FFC.

NOTE: The FFC (callout 1) is connected to the PCA with a zero-insertion force (ZIF) connector.
Release the connector locking clip to remove the FFC.

Figure 6-1060 Disconnect the FFC

Remove the document feeder FFC 1339

 2. Remove the FFC.

Figure 6-1061 Remove the FFC

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1340 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF power cable (200sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder power cable.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-134 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-67010 ADF power cable

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

Removal and replacement: ADF power cable (200sh) 1341

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1062 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1063 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

1342 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1064 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the retainer clip (callout 2) to disconnect one of the FFCs.

Figure 6-1065 Remove the document feeder

Remove the document feeder 1343

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1066 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

3. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1067 Remove three screws

1344 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Open the ADF top cover, remove one screw, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1068 Remove the cover

4. Remove the document feeder power cable

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder power cable.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1069 Disconnect one connector

Remove the document feeder power cable 1345

 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cable.

Figure 6-1070 Remove the cable

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1346 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF hinge kit (200sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder hinge kit.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-135 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-67004 ADF hinge kit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder white backing

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder white backing.

1. Open the document feeder.

Removal and replacement: ADF hinge kit (200sh) 1347

 2. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the white backing mounting clips.

Figure 6-1071 Locate the clips

3. Disconnect nine clips, and then remove the white backing.

Figure 6-1072 Remove the white backing

2. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1348 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1073 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1074 Remove two screws and the cover

3. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

Remove the document feeder 1349

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1075 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the retainer clip (callout 2) to disconnect one of the FFCs.

Figure 6-1076 Remove the document feeder

1350 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1077 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

4. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1078 Remove three screws

Remove the document feeder rear cover 1351

 2. Open the ADF top cover, remove one screw, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1079 Remove the cover

5. Remove the document feeder hinge kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder hinge kit.

1. Remove five screw caps.

Figure 6-1080 Remove five screw caps

1352 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove six screws, and then remove the hinge.

Figure 6-1081 Remove the hinge

3. Remove nine screws, and then remove the hinges.

Figure 6-1082 Remove the hinges

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1353

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF hinge damper module (200sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder damper module.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-136 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-67006 Damper module

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1354 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder white backing

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder white backing.

1. Open the document feeder.

2. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the white backing mounting clips.

Figure 6-1083 Locate the clips

Remove the document feeder white backing 1355

 3. Disconnect nine clips, and then remove the white backing.

Figure 6-1084 Remove the white backing

2. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1085 Remove two screw caps

1356 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1086 Remove two screws and the cover

3. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1087 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the retainer clip (callout 2) to disconnect one of the FFCs.

Remove the document feeder 1357

 Figure 6-1088 Remove the document feeder

3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1089 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

4. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1358 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1090 Remove three screws

2. Open the ADF top cover, remove one screw, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1091 Remove the cover

5. Remove the document feeder hinge damper module

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder hinge damper module.

Remove the document feeder hinge damper module 1359

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1092 Remove two screws

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the hinge damper module.

Figure 6-1093 Remove the hinge damper module

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1360 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

100-Sheet ADF
Learn about ADF parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: ADF CMF panel (100sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder color panel.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-137 Part information

Part number Part description

100-Sheet ADF 1361

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder color panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder color panel.

1. Open the document feeder.

2. Remove three screws (callout 1), release four tabs, and then remove the document feeder color
panel (callout 2).

Figure 6-1094 Remove the color panel

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1362 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF pickup roller kit (100sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder pickup roller kit.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-138 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ83-67002 ADF roller kit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: ADF pickup roller kit (100sh) 1363

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder pickup roller kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder pickup roller kit.

1. Release the latch, and then open the ADF top door.

Figure 6-1095 Opne the cover

1364 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove the retard roller cover.

Figure 6-1096 Remove the retard roller cover

3. Remove the retard roller.

Figure 6-1097 Remove the roller

Remove the document feeder pickup roller kit 1365

 4. Release the pickup and forward roller retaining lever.

Figure 6-1098 Release the lever

5. Slide the roller assembly as shown below to remove it.

● Callout 1: Pickup roller

● Callout 1: Forward roller

Figure 6-1099 Remove the roller assembly

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1366 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF PCA (100sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder printed circuit assembly (PCA).

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-139 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ83-67004 ADF PCA

Removal and replacement: ADF PCA (100sh) 1367

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the scan cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1100 Remove two screw caps

1368 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1101 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit including the white backing.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1102 Remove two screws

Remove the document feeder 1369

 2. Disconnect two connectors, remove one screw, and then remove the document feeder.

Figure 6-1103 Remove the document feeder

3. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1104 Remove three screws

1370 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Open the ADF top cover, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-1105 Remove the cover

3. Rotate the right end of the cover away from the ADF, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1106 Remove the cover

4. Remove the document feeder PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder PCA.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors.

NOTE: The flat-flexible cable (FFC; callout 1) is connected to the PCA with a zero-insertion force
(ZIF) connector. Release the connector locking clip to remove the FFC.

Remove the document feeder PCA 1371

 Figure 6-1107 Disconnect connectors

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA

Figure 6-1108 Remove the PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1372 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF flat-flexible cable (100sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder sensor flat-flexible cable (FFC).

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-140 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ83-67005 ADF flat-flexible cable

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: ADF flat-flexible cable (100sh) 1373

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the scan cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1109 Remove two screw caps

1374 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1110 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit including the white backing.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1111 Remove two screws

Remove the document feeder 1375

 2. Disconnect two connectors, remove one screw, and then remove the document feeder.

Figure 6-1112 Remove the document feeder

3. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1113 Remove three screws

1376 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Open the ADF top cover, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-1114 Remove the cover

3. Rotate the right end of the cover away from the ADF, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1115 Remove the cover

4. Remove the document feeder ADF sensor FFC

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder ADF sensor FFC.

■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove the ADF sensor FFC.

NOTE: The flat-flexible cable (FFC) is connected to the PCA with a zero-insertion force (ZIF)
connector (callout 1). Release the connector locking clip to remove the FFC.

Remove the document feeder ADF sensor FFC 1377

 Figure 6-1116 Remove the FFC

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1378 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF power cable (100sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder power cable.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-141 Part information

Part number Part description

55QJ83-67006 ADF power cable

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the scan cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

Removal and replacement: ADF power cable (100sh) 1379

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1117 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1118 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit including the white backing.

1380 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1119 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect two connectors, remove one screw, and then remove the document feeder.

Figure 6-1120 Remove the document feeder

3. Remove the document feeder rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder rear cover.

Remove the document feeder rear cover 1381

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1121 Remove three screws

2. Open the ADF top cover, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-1122 Remove the cover

1382 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Rotate the right end of the cover away from the ADF, and then remove the ADF rear cover.

Figure 6-1123 Remove the cover

4. Remove the document feeder ADF power cable

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder ADF power cable.

■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove the ADF power cable.

NOTE: Release the cable from retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-1124 Remove the cable

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the document feeder ADF power cable 1383

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF hinge kit (100sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder hinge kit.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-142 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ83-67003 ADF hinge kit

1384 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the scan cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1125 Remove two screw caps

Remove the scan cover 1385

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1126 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit including the white backing.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1127 Remove two screws

1386 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect two connectors, remove one screw, and then remove the document feeder.

Figure 6-1128 Remove the document feeder

3. Remove the document feeder hinge kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder hinge kit.

■ Remove ten screws, and then remove the hinges.

Figure 6-1129 Remove the hinges

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the document feeder hinge kit 1387

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF white backing kit (110sh)

Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder white backing.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-143 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-67005 Kit - white backing A3

1388 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document correctly copies, scans, or
prints.

1. Remove the document feeder white backing

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder white backing.

1. Open the document feeder.

2. Before proceeding, take note of the location of the white backing mounting clips.

Figure 6-1130 Locate the clips

Remove the document feeder white backing 1389

 3. Disconnect nine clips, and then remove the white backing.

Figure 6-1131 Remove the white backing

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1390 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3. Special installation instructions: White backing plate

Use the following instructions to install the white backing plate

1. If the spring and suspension clip have become separated during shipping, install the spring on the
clip as shown below.

Figure 6-1132 Spring installed on the suspension clip

Special installation instructions: White backing plate 1391

 2. Position a suspension clip near the mounting feature on the document feeder, and then push it
straight in to install it.

Figure 6-1133 Install the suspension clip

3. Remove the protective film from the double-sided tape on the suspension clip.

Figure 6-1134 Expose the double-sided tape

1392 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Repeat these steps for the remaining eight suspension clips.

Figure 6-1135 Install the remaining suspension clips

5. Place the white backing plate on the flatbed glass.

NOTE: One corner of the white backing plate has an arrow embossed on it. Place that corner
towards the rear left corner of the flatbed glass.

Figure 6-1136 Place the white backing plate

6. Position the white backing plate so that the corner with the embossed arrow fits tightly up against
the flatbed glass frame.

NOTE: Make sure that the rear and left edges of the plate are firmly against the flatbed frame.

Special installation instructions: White backing plate 1393

 Figure 6-1137 Register the white backing plate against the frame

7. Fully close the document feeder to install the white backing plate.

NOTE: Open the document feeder and make sure the white backing plate is firmly attached.

Figure 6-1138 Close the document feeder

Flatbed Scanner (Tarot)

Learn about flatbed scanner parts removal and replacement.

Whole unit
Learn about the flatbed scanner whole unit replacement.

1394 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner whole unit
Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed whole unit.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-144 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ11-60103 Flatbed scanner (Tarot)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner whole unit 1395

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1139 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1140 Remove the screw caps

1396 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1141 Remove the cover

3. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1142 Remove two screw caps

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1397

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1143 Remove two screws and the cover

4. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1144 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

NOTE: Release the retainer clip (callout 2) to disconnect one of the FFCs.

1398 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1145 Remove the document feeder

3. Remove one screw to release a single-wire harness, and then lift the document feeder up to
remove it.

Figure 6-1146 Remove the document feeder assembly

IMPORTANT: Special installation instructions are included at the end of this topic (after the
unpack and recycle step).

To avoid damaging the ADF when it is reinstalled, make sure to carefully read and follow the
installation instructions.

5. Remove the flatbed scanner whole unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the flatbed scanner.

Remove the flatbed scanner whole unit 1399

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1147 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect three connectors.

Figure 6-1148 Disconnect three connectors

1400 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Push the flatbed towards the front of the printer to release it, and then remove the flatbed scanner
whole unit.

Figure 6-1149 Remove the whole unit

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1401

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Covers
Learn about the flatbed scanner covers replacement.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner rear cover

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-145 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ11-40008 Rear cover (Flatbed Tarot)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

1402 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1150 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1151 Remove two screws and the cover

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1403

 2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

PCA, harness, and sensor

Learn about the flatbed scanner PCA, harness, and sensor replacement.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner PCA assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed PCA.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

1404 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-146 Part information

Part number Part description

Y6V12-60035 Flatbed PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1152 Remove two screw caps

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1405

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1153 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the flatbed PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the flatbed PCA.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors.

Figure 6-1154 Disconnect all connectors

1406 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1155 Remove two screws

3. Remove the flatbed scanner PCA and bracket assembly.

Figure 6-1156 Remove the PCA

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1407

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner FFC 50 pin

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed FFC 50 pin.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-147 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ11-50021 Flatbed FFC 50 pin

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1408 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1157 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

Remove the controller cover 1409

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1158 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1159 Remove the cover

3. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

1410 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1160 Remove the cover

4. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1161 Remove two screw caps

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1411

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1162 Remove two screws and the cover

5. Remove the flatbed FFC 50 pin

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the flatbed FFC 50 pin.

■ Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the flatbed FFC 50 pin..

Figure 6-1163 Remove the FFC

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1412 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner FFC 68 pin

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed FFC 68 pin.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-148 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ11-50022 Flatbed FFC 68 pin

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner FFC 68 pin 1413

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1164 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1414 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1165 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1166 Remove the cover

3. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1415

 1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1167 Remove two screw caps

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1168 Remove two screws and the cover

4. Remove the flatbed FFC 68 pin

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the flatbed FFC 68 pin.

1416 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the flatbed FFC 68 pin.

Figure 6-1169 Remove the FFC

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1417

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner discrete power cable

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed power cable.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-149 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ11-50006 Flatbed discrete power cable

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

1418 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1170 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1171 Remove the screw caps

Remove the rear upper cover 1419

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1172 Remove the cover

3. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1173 Remove two screw caps

1420 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1174 Remove two screws and the cover

4. Remove the flatbed power cable

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the flatbed power cable.

■ Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the flatbed power cable.

Figure 6-1175 Remove the cable

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the flatbed power cable 1421

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner flatbed open sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed open sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-150 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (flatbed open sensor)

1422 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1. Remove two screw caps.

Figure 6-1176 Remove two screw caps

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1423

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1177 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the flatbed power cable

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the flatbed power cable.

■ Do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Separate the sensor from the flatbed (callout 2).

● Disconnect one connector (callout 3), and then remove the flatbed open sensor.

Figure 6-1178 Remove the sensor

1424 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Flatbed Scanner (CIS)

Learn about flatbed scanner parts removal and replacement.

Whole unit
Learn about the flatbed scanner whole unit replacement.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner whole unit

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed whole unit.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

Unpack the replacement assembly 1425

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-151 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ00-60103 Flatbed scanner (CIS)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

1426 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1179 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1180 Remove the screw caps

Remove the rear upper cover 1427

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1181 Remove the cover

3. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

■ Remove two screw caps, remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1182 Remove two screws and the cover

4. Remove the document feeder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the document feeder.

NOTE: This procedure removes the document feeder whole unit including the white backing.

1428 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1183 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect two connectors, remove one screw, and then remove the document feeder.

Figure 6-1184 Remove the document feeder

5. Remove the flatbed scanner whole unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the flatbed scanner.

Remove the flatbed scanner whole unit 1429

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1185 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-1186 Disconnect two connectors

1430 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Push the flatbed towards the front of the printer to release it, and then remove the flatbed scanner
whole unit.

Figure 6-1187 Remove the whole unit

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1431

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Covers
Learn about the flatbed scanner covers replacement.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner rear cover

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-152 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ83-40020 Rear cover (Flatbed CIS)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1432 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screw caps, remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1188 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1433

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

PCA, harness, and sensor

Learn about the flatbed scanner PCA, harness, and sensor replacement.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner PCA assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed PCA.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-153 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ00-60109 Flatbed PCA (CIS)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

1434 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screw caps, remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1189 Remove two screws and the cover

2. Remove the flatbed PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the flatbed PCA.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors.

Figure 6-1190 Disconnect all connectors

Remove the flatbed PCA 1435

 2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1191 Remove two screws

3. Remove the flatbed scanner PCA and bracket assembly.

Figure 6-1192 Remove the PCA

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1436 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner discrete power cable

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed power cable.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-154 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ11-50006 Flatbed discrete power cable (CIS)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner discrete power cable 1437

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1193 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1438 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1194 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1195 Remove the cover

3. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1439

 ■ Remove two screw caps, remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1196 Remove two screws and the cover

4. Remove the flatbed power cable

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the flatbed power cable.

■ Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the flatbed power cable.

Figure 6-1197 Remove the cable

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1440 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner FFC 68 pin

Learn about removing and replacing the flatbed FFC 68 pin.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-155 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ00-50010 Flatbed FFC 68 pin (CIS)

Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner FFC 68 pin 1441

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the controller cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the controller cover.

■ Loosen, but do not remove the thumbscrew at the right side of the cover, and then slide the cover as
shown to remove it.

Figure 6-1198 Remove the cover

2. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1442 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1199 Remove the screw caps

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1200 Remove the cover

3. Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the scan cover.

Remove the flatbed scanner rear cover 1443

 ■ Remove two screw caps, remove two screws, and then remove the scan cover.

Figure 6-1201 Remove two screws and the cover

4. Remove the flatbed FFC 68 pin

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the flatbed FFC 68 pin.

■ Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the flatbed FFC 68 pin.

Figure 6-1202 Remove the FFC

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1444 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Input device (workgroup)

Learn about input device (workgroup) parts removal and replacement.

DCF device (workgroup)

Learn about dual cassette feeder (workgroup) parts removal and replacement.

Covers
Review the DCF cover removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right cover.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

Input device (workgroup) 1445

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-156 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ98-40015 DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover.

1. Open the right door.

1446 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1203 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1447

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-157 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ98-40014 DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

1448 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1204 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1449

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) left cover

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) left cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-158 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ98-40017 DCF (Tray 4, 5) left cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) left cover.

1450 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1205 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1451

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-159 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ98-61006 DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover.

1. Open the right door.

1452 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1206 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door.

■ Slide the door as shown below, and then remove the right door.

Figure 6-1207 Remove the door

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door 1453

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4, 5 CMF panels

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4, 5 color panel.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-160 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK03-40033 Tray 4 CMF panel

1454 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-160 Part information (continued)

Part number Part description

5QK03-40035 Tray 5 CMF panel

Required tools
● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1208 Remove the cassette

Remove the Tray 4, 5 CMF panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 4, 5 CMF panel.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassettes.

Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette 1455

 2. Push the hook to release it.

Figure 6-1209 Release the hook

3. Slide the panel to the left to remove the tray CMF panel.

Figure 6-1210 Remove the panel

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1456 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Caster wheel

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) caster wheel.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-161 Part information

Part number Part description

6109-001138 Caster wheel

Removal and replacement: Caster wheel 1457

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the caster wheel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF caster wheel.

1. Remove the DCF from the printer.

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two screws (callout 1).

b. Rotate the caster wheel (callout 2) out of the way, and then remove two screws (callout 3).

c. Remove the caster wheel.

Figure 6-1211 Remove the caster

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1458 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Holder wheel kit

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) holder wheel kit.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-162 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-04871A Guide - adjust DCF

Removal and replacement: Holder wheel kit 1459

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the holder wheel kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF holder wheel kit.

1. Remove the DCF from the printer.

2. Turn the holder wheel counterclockwise to remove it.

Figure 6-1212 Remove the holder wheel

1460 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the holder wheel mounting bracket.

Figure 6-1213 Remove the bracket

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1461

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unit
Review the DCF unit parts removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4, 5 cassettes

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4, 5 cassette.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-163 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ98-61009 Tray 4 cassette

5QJ98-61007 Tray 5 cassette

Required tools
● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

1462 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1214 Remove the cassette

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1463

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Roller
Review the DCF roller removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: DCF roller kit

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4, 5 rollers.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-164 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN66-67001 DCF roller kit Tray 4

5PN66-67001 DCF roller kit Tray 5

Required tools
● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

1464 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1215 Remove the cassette

2. Remove the Tray 4, 5 rollers

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray rollers.

NOTE: The procedure for removing the rollers is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

1. Inside the tray cavity, slide the return guide toward the front of the printer until it stops.

Reinstallation tip: To prevent jams, make sure to slide the guide toward the rear of the printer after
installing replacement rollers.

Remove the Tray 4, 5 rollers 1465

 Figure 6-1216 Move the guide

2. Use a pair of tweezers to release the locking tab, and then slide the roller off the shaft to remove it.

● Pickup roller: callout 1

● Forward roller: callout 2

● Reverse roller: callout 3

Figure 6-1217 Remove the rollers

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1466 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Sensor
Review the DCF sensor removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4, 5 paper size sensors

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4, 5 paper size sensors.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Sensor 1467
 Table 6-165 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00018B Autosize sensor (Paper size Tray 4)

JC93-00018B Autosize sensor (Paper size Tray 5)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1218 Remove the cassette

1468 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove the Tray 4, 5 paper size sensors
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray paper size sensors.

NOTE: The procedure for removing the paper size sensors is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the paper size
sensor.

● Callout 3: Tray 4 paper size sensor

● Callout 4: Tray 5 paper size sensor

Figure 6-1219 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

Remove the Tray 4, 5 paper size sensors 1469

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4 pickup assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4 pickup assembly.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-166 Part information

Part number Part description

8GR90-60007 Tray 4 pickup assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

1470 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1220 Remove the cassette

2. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette 1471

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1221 Remove the cover

3. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door.

■ Slide the door as shown below, and then remove the right door.

Figure 6-1222 Remove the door

4. Remove the DCF right door open switch holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF right door open switch holder.

1472 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove one screw and then pull the switch and holder out.

Figure 6-1223 Pull out the switch and holder

5. Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 4 pickup assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1224 Disconnect one connector

Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly 1473

 2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1225 Remove two screws

3. Release one belt, and then remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly.

Figure 6-1226 Remove the assembly

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1474 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4 paper empty and stack height sensors
Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4 paper empty and stack height
sensors.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-167 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 4 paper empty sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 4 paper stack height sensor)

Removal and replacement: Tray 4 paper empty and stack height sensors 1475
 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1227 Remove the cassette

2. Remove the Tray 4, 5 paper empty and stack height sensors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray paper empty and stack height sensors.

NOTE: The procedure for removing the paper empty sensor or the paper stack height sensor is the
same for both sensors.

1. Locate the desired sensor to remove (on the Tray 4 pickup assembly).

● Callout 1: Tray 4, 5 paper stack height sensor

1476 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Callout 2: Tray 4, 5 paper empty sensor

Figure 6-1228 Locate the sensor

2. Do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the left (callout 2).

● Release the sensor.

Figure 6-1229 Release the sensor

Remove the Tray 4, 5 paper empty and stack height sensors 1477
 3. Disconnect one connector to remove the sensor.

Figure 6-1230 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1478 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF feed 4, 5 sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) feed sensor.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-168 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-01490 Photo interrupter (Feed 4,5 sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

Removal and replacement: DCF feed 4, 5 sensor 1479

 ■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1231 Remove the cassette

2. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1232 Remove the cover

3. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door.

1480 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Slide the door as shown below, and then remove the right door.

Figure 6-1233 Remove the door

4. Remove the DCF right door open switch holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF right door open switch holder.

■ Remove one screw and then pull the switch and holder out.

Figure 6-1234 Pull out the switch and holder

5. Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 4 pickup assembly.

Remove the DCF right door open switch holder 1481

 1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1235 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1236 Remove two screws

1482 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release one belt, and then remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly.

Figure 6-1237 Remove the assembly

6. Remove the feed Tray 4, 5 sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF eed Tray 4, 5 sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the feed sensor (callout 2).

NOTE: The sensor is located on the feed guide take away upper.

Figure 6-1238 Remove the sensor

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the feed Tray 4, 5 sensor 1483

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 5 pickup assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 5 pickup assembly.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1484 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-169 Part information

Part number Part description

8GR90-60007 Tray 5 pickup assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1239 Remove the cassette

2. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover.

Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette 1485

 1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1240 Remove the cover

3. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door.

■ Slide the door as shown below, and then remove the right door.

Figure 6-1241 Remove the door

4. Remove the DCF right door open switch holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF right door open switch holder.

1486 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove one screw and then pull the switch and holder out.

Figure 6-1242 Pull out the switch and holder

5. Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 4 pickup assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1243 Disconnect one connector

Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly 1487

 2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1244 Remove two screws

3. Release one belt, and then remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly.

Figure 6-1245 Remove the assembly

6. Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 4 pickup assembly.

1488 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1246 Remove two screws

2. Slightly separate the assembly from the DCF. disconnect one connector, and then remove the Tray
5 pickup assembly.

Figure 6-1247 Remove the assembly

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1489

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 5 paper empty and stack height sensors
Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 5 paper empty and stack height
sensors.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-170 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 5 paper empty sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 5 paper stack height sensor)

1490 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1248 Remove the cassette

2. Remove the Tray 4, 5 paper empty and stack height sensors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray paper empty and stack height sensors.

NOTE: The procedure for removing the paper empty sensor or the paper stack height sensor is the
same for both sensors.

1. Locate the desired sensor to remove (on the Tray 4 pickup assembly).

● Callout 1: Tray 4, 5 paper stack height sensor

Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette 1491

 ● Callout 2: Tray 4, 5 paper empty sensor

Figure 6-1249 Locate the sensor

2. Do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the left (callout 2).

● Release the sensor.

Figure 6-1250 Release the sensor

1492 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector to remove the sensor.

Figure 6-1251 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1493

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Motor
Review the DCF motor removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: DCF pickup drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup drive assembly.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-171 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-64001 DCF pickup drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1494 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1252 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF pickup drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF pickup drive assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the Tray 4 pickup drive assembly.

Figure 6-1253 Remove the assembly (Tray 4)

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover 1495

 2. Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the Tray 5 pickup drive
assembly.

Figure 6-1254 Remove the assembly (Tray 5)

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1496 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4 pickup motor

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 4 pickup motor.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-172 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-64002 Drive-motor step (Tray 4 pickup motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Tray 4 pickup motor 1497

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1255 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF Tray 4 pickup motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 4 pickup motor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the Tray 4 pickup motor.

Figure 6-1256 Remove the motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

1498 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 5 pickup motor

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) Tray 5 pickup motor.

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-173 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-64002 Drive-motor step (Tray 5 pickup motor)

Removal and replacement: Tray 5 pickup motor 1499

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1257 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF Tray 5 pickup motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 5 pickup motor.

1500 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the Tray 5 pickup motor.

Figure 6-1258 Remove the motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1501

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF feed drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) feed drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-174 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01801A DCF feed drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

1502 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1259 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF feed drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF feed drive assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive assembly.

Figure 6-1260 Remove the assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the DCF feed drive assembly 1503

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) feed motor

Learn about removing and replacing the dual cassette feeder (DCF) feed motor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-175 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-60023 DCF Tray 4, 5 feed motor

1504 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1261 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF feed drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF feed drive assembly.

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover 1505

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive assembly.

Figure 6-1262 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the DCF feed motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF feed motor.

■ Release the belt (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the feed motor.

TIP: It might be easier to release the belt if the screws are loosened or removed first.

Figure 6-1263 Remove the motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1506 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

PCA and harness

Review the DCF PCA and harness removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Tray heater

Learn about removing and replacing the DCF tray heaters.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

PCA and harness 1507

 Table 6-176 Part information

Part number Part description

Y1G22-67901 Tray heater 110V

Y1G22-67902 Tray heater 220V

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1264 Remove the cassette

1508 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3
Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1265 Remove one screw

2. Do the following:

● Slightly lift up on the front of the heater, and pull it toward the front of the printer.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the heater. It is still attached to the printer by
a wire-harness connector.

● Disconnect one connector, and then remove the heater.

Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3 1509

 Figure 6-1266 Remove the heater

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1510 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the DCF PCA.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-177 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW46-60001 DCF (Tray4, 5) PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) PCA 1511

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1267 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF PCA.

■ Disconnect all of the connectors (callout 1), remove four screws, and then remove the DCF PCA.

Figure 6-1268 Remove the PCA

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

1512 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door open switch holder assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the DCF right door open switch holder.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-178 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW46-40010 DCF (Tray4, 5) right door open switch holder

JC39-01696A DCF WG Door open switch sensor harness

Removal and replacement: DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door open switch holder assembly 1513
 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1269 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover.

1. Open the right door.

1514 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1270 Remove the cover

3. Remove the DCF right door open switch holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF right door open switch holder.

■ Remove one screw and then pull the switch and holder out.

Figure 6-1271 Pull out the switch and holder

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the DCF right door open switch holder 1515

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF IF harness

Learn about removing and replacing the DCF IF harness.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-179 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-01690A DCF IF harness

1516 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1272 Remove the cover

2. Remove the DCF IF harness

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF IF harness.

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover 1517

 1. Disconnect one connector on the DCF PCA.

Figure 6-1273 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect two connectors, release retainers as needed, and then remove the DCF IF harness.

Figure 6-1274 Remove the harness

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1518 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF motor harness

Learn about removing and replacing the DCF motor harness

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-180 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-01691A DCF motor harness

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: DCF motor harness 1519

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1275 Remove the cover

2. Remove the motor harness

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF motor harness.

1520 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect three connectors, release retainers as needed, and then remove the DCF motor harness.

Figure 6-1276 Remove the harness

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1521

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF sensor harness

Learn about removing and replacing the DCF sensor harness

NOTE: Remove the DCF from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-181 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-01692A DCF sensor harness

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

1522 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1277 Remove the cassette

2. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1278 Remove the cover

3. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right door.

Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) right cover 1523

 ■ Slide the door as shown below, and then remove the right door.

Figure 6-1279 Remove the door

4. Remove the DCF right door open switch holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF right door open switch holder.

■ Remove one screw and then pull the switch and holder out.

Figure 6-1280 Pull out the switch and holder

5. Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 4 pickup assembly.

1524 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1281 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1282 Remove two screws

Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly 1525

 3. Release one belt, and then remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly.

Figure 6-1283 Remove the assembly

6. Remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF Tray 4 pickup assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1284 Remove two screws

1526 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Slightly separate the assembly from the DCF. disconnect one connector, and then remove the Tray
5 pickup assembly.

Figure 6-1285 Remove the assembly

7. Remove the sensor harness

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF sensor harness.

■ Disconnect two connectors, release retainers as needed, and then remove the DCF sensor harness.

Figure 6-1286 Remove the harness

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the sensor harness 1527

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DCF size harness

Learn about removing and replacing the DCF size harness.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-182 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-01695A DCF size harness

1528 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray cassette.

NOTE: The procedure for removing a cassette is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

■ Partially pull the tray cassette out of the DCF, lift the front edge up, and then remove the cassette.

Figure 6-1287 Remove the cassette

2. Remove the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF (Tray 4, 5) rear cover.

Remove the Tray 4, 5 cassette 1529

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1288 Remove the cover

3. Remove the size harness

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF size harness.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1289 Disconnect one connector

1530 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect two connectors (inside the tray cavity), release retainers as needed, and then remove
the DCF size harness (from the rear of the DCF).

Figure 6-1290 Remove the harness

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1531

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

HCI (workgroup)
Learn about high capacity input (workgroup) parts removal and replacement.

Covers
Review the HCI cover removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) right cover

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) right cover.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-183 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ98-40024 HCI (Tray 4) right cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1532 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1291 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right cover 1533

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-184 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ98-40014 HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

1534 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1292 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1535

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) left cover

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) left cover.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-185 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ98-40025 HCI (Tray 4) left cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI left cover.

1536 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-1293 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1537

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) right door

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) right door.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-186 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ98-61014 HCI (Tray 4) right door

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right cover.

1538 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1294 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right door.

■ Rotate the left end of the door away from the HCI, and then remove the right door.

Figure 6-1295 Remove the door

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right door 1539

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) front CMF panel

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) front CMF panel.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-187 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40024 HCI (Tray 4) front CMF panel

1540 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) front CMF panel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI CMF panel.

■ Release one tab (callout 1), slide the panel to the left (callout 2), and then remove the front CMF panel

Figure 6-1296 Remove the panel

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the HCI (Tray 4) front CMF panel 1541

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Caster wheel

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) caster wheel.

NOTE: Remove the HCI from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-188 Part information

Part number Part description

6109-001138 Caster wheel

1542 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the caster wheel

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI caster wheel.

1. Remove the HCI from the printer.

2. Do the following:

a. Remove two screws (callout 1).

b. Rotate the caster wheel (callout 2) out of the way, and then remove two screws (callout 3).

c. Remove the caster wheel.

Figure 6-1297 Remove the caster

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the caster wheel 1543

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Holder wheel kit

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) holder wheel kit.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-189 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-04871A Guide - adjust HCI

1544 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the holder wheel kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI holder wheel kit.

1. Remove the HCI from the printer.

2. Turn the holder wheel counterclockwise to remove it.

Figure 6-1298 Remove the holder wheel

Remove the holder wheel kit 1545

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the holder wheel mounting bracket.

Figure 6-1299 Remove the bracket

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1546 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unit
Review the HCI unit parts removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) unit

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) unit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-190 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW48-67001 HCI (Tray 4) unit

NOTE: This is the whole unit replacement (WUR) part number.

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Unit 1547
 1. Remove Tray 2 or Tray 3
Use the following procedure to remove and replace Tray 2 or Tray 3.

NOTE: Tray 2 is shown in the figure below. However, removing Tray 3 is identical to Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray almost all of the way out of the printer, and then lift it up to remove it.

Figure 6-1300 Remove the tray

2. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI Tray 4 unit.

1548 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two thumbscrews.

Figure 6-1301 Remove two thumbscrews

2. Lift the printer off of the HCI unit, and then use the install guide included with the replacement HCI
to install it.

WARNING! The printer is heavy. HP recommends that four people lift the printer off of the HCI.

Figure 6-1302 Remove the HCI

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1549

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) cassette

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) cassette.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-191 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ98-61015 HCI (Tray 4) cassette

1550 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-1303 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the HCI cassette 1551

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) pickup assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) pickup assembly.

NOTE: Remove the HCI from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-192 Part information

Part number Part description

8GR90-60001 HCI (Tray 4) pickup assembly

1552 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1304 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right door.

Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right cover 1553

 ■ Rotate the left end of the door away from the HCI, and then remove the right door.

Figure 6-1305 Remove the door

3. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI Tray 4 pickup assembly.

1. Open the HCI cassette.

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1306 Remove two screws

1554 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove two screws, disconnect one connector, and then remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly.

Figure 6-1307 Remove the assembly

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1555

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Roller
Review the HCI roller removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) roller kit

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) Tray 4 rollers.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-193 Part information

Part number Part description

5PN66-67001 HCI Tray 4 roller kit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

1556 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-1308 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

Remove the Tray 4, 5 rollers

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the DCF tray rollers.

NOTE: The procedure for removing the rollers is the same for Tray 4 or Tray 5.

1. Inside the tray cavity, slide the return guide toward the front of the printer until it stops.

Reinstallation tip: To prevent jams, make sure to slide the guide toward the rear of the printer after
installing replacement rollers.

Remove the Tray 4, 5 rollers 1557

 Figure 6-1309 Move the guide

2. Use a pair of tweezers to release the locking tab, and then slide the roller off the shaft to remove it.

● Pickup roller: callout 1

● Forward roller: callout 2

● Reverse roller: callout 3

Figure 6-1310 Remove the rollers

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1558 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Sensor
Review the HCI sensor removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) feed sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) feed sensor.

NOTE: Remove the HCI from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Sensor 1559
 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-194 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-01490 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) feed sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1311 Remove the cover

Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

1560 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-1312 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right door.

■ Rotate the left end of the door away from the HCI, and then remove the right door.

Figure 6-1313 Remove the door

Remove the HCI (Tray 4) pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI Tray 4 pickup assembly.

Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right door 1561

 1. Open the HCI cassette.

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1314 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws, disconnect one connector, and then remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly.

Figure 6-1315 Remove the assembly

Remove the HCI feed sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI feed sensor.

1562 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-1316 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Remove the assembly, and the remove four screws.

Figure 6-1317 Remove four screws

Remove the HCI feed sensor 1563

 3. Slide the assemble as shown below.

Figure 6-1318 Slide the assembly

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the HCI feed sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-1319 Remove the sensor

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1564 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) paper empty and stack height sensors
Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) Tray 4 paper empty and stack height
sensors.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-195 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI Tray 4 paper empty sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI Tray 4 paper stack height sensor)

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) paper empty and stack height sensors 1565
 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the right cover.

Figure 6-1320 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) right door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right door.

1566 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Rotate the left end of the door away from the HCI, and then remove the right door.

Figure 6-1321 Remove the door

3. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) pickup assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI Tray 4 pickup assembly.

1. Open the HCI cassette.

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1322 Remove two screws

Remove the HCI (Tray 4) pickup assembly 1567

 3. Remove two screws, disconnect one connector, and then remove the Tray 4 pickup assembly.

Figure 6-1323 Remove the assembly

4. Remove the Tray 4 paper empty and stack height sensors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI tray paper empty and stack height sensors.

NOTE: The procedure for removing the paper empty sensor or the paper stack height sensor is the
same for both sensors.

1. Locate the desired sensor to remove (on the Tray 4 pickup assembly).

● Callout 1: Tray 4 paper stack height sensor

● Callout 2: Tray 4 paper empty sensor

Figure 6-1324 Locate the sensor

1568 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly to the left (callout 2).

● Release the sensor.

Figure 6-1325 Release the sensor

3. Disconnect one connector to remove the sensor.

Figure 6-1326 Remove the sensor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1569

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) knockup home and shift tray end sensors
Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) knockup home sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-196 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) knockup home sensor)

1570 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-196 Part information (continued)

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) shift tray end sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-1327 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI knockup home and shift tray end sensors
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI knockup home and shift tray end sensors.

Remove the HCI cassette 1571

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1328 Remove three screws

2. Turn the tray over, remove two screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1329 Remove two screws

1572 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1330 Remove four screws

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the knockup plate.

Figure 6-1331 Remove the plate

Remove the HCI knockup home and shift tray end sensors 1573
 5. Remove three screws, and then remove the shift tray.

Figure 6-1332 Remove the shift tray

6. Locate the desired sensor to remove.

● Callout 1: HCI shift tray end sensor

● Callout 2: HCI knockup home sensor

Figure 6-1333 Locate the sensor

1574 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 7. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then remove the sensor
(callout 3).

Figure 6-1334 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1575

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift tray empty and home sensors
Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) shift tray empty sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-197 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) shift tray empty sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) shift tray home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

1576 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-1335 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI shift tray empty and home sensors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI shift tray empty and home sensors.

1. Remove one sheet-metal plate (callout 1).

Figure 6-1336 Remove the plate

2. Locate the sensor.

● Callout 1: Shift tray empty sensor

Remove the HCI shift tray empty and home sensors 1577
 ● Callout 2: Shift tray home sensor

Figure 6-1337 Locate the sensor

3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the shift tray empty sensor (callout 2).

Repeat this step for the shift tray home sensor if necessary.

Figure 6-1338 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

1578 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift tray level sensor 1 and 2
Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) shift tray level sensor 1 and 2.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-198 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) shift tray level sensor 1)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) shift tray level sensor 2)

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift tray level sensor 1 and 2 1579
 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-1339 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI shift tray level sensor 1 and 2

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI shift tray level sensor 1 and 2.

1580 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then pull the assembly up to gain access to it..

Figure 6-1340 Access the assembly

2. Remove two screws, release two hooks, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1341 Remove the cover

3. Locate the desired sensor to remove.

● Callout 1: HCI (Tray 4) shift tray level sensor 1

● Callout 2: HCI (Tray 4) shift tray level sensor 1r

Remove the HCI shift tray level sensor 1 and 2 1581

 Figure 6-1342 Locate the sensor

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the shift tray level sensor (callout 2).

NOTE: Removing the shift tray level sensor 1 is shown below.

Figure 6-1343 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1582 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) tray open sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) tray open sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-199 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) tray open sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) tray open sensor 1583

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1344 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI tray open sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI tray open sensor.

1584 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the tray open sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-1345 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1585

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) gate solenoid home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) gate solenoid home sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-200 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI (Tray4) gate solenoid home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

1586 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-1346 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI gate solenoid home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI gate solenoid home sensor.

1. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then pull the assembly up to gain access to it.

Figure 6-1347 Access the assembly

Remove the HCI gate solenoid home sensor 1587

 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the gate solenoid home sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-1348 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1588 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI right door open switch holder assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the HCI right door open switch holder.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-201 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01385A HCI right door open switch holder

JC39-02601A HCI WG Door open switch sensor harness

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

Removal and replacement: HCI right door open switch holder assembly 1589
 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1349 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI right door open switch holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right door open switch holder.

1. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-1350 Remove two screws

1590 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1351 Remove two screws

3. Remove one screw and then pull the switch and holder out.

Figure 6-1352 Pull out the switch and holder

Remove the HCI right door open switch holder 1591

 4. Release two tabs (callout 1) and then remove the switch from the holder to remove it (callout 2).

Figure 6-1353 Remove the holder

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1592 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Motor
Review the HCI motor removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift and lift motors

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) shift lift motors.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-202 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00125A Motor, geared (HCI (Tray4) shift motor)

JC31-00109A Motor, geared (HCI (Tray4) lift motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

Motor 1593
 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1354 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI shift and lift motors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI shift and lift motor.

1. Disconnect two connectors, remove four screws,and then remove the motors and mounting plate.

Figure 6-1355 Remove the motors

2. Locate the desired motor.

● Callout 1: HCI (Tray 4) shift motor

● Callout 2: HCI (Tray 4) lift motor (Tray 4 elevating motor)

1594 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1356 Locate the motor

3. Remove three screws, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-1357 Remove the motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1595

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Shift plate

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) shift plate.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-203 Part information

Part number Part description

JC81-07481B Shift plate

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1596 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-1358 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI shift plate

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI shift plate.

Remove the HCI cassette 1597

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1359 Remove three screws

2. Turn the tray over, remove two screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1360 Remove two screws

1598 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-1361 Remove four screws

4. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the knockup plate.

Figure 6-1362 Remove the plate

Remove the HCI shift plate 1599

 5. Remove three screws, and then remove the shift tray.

Figure 6-1363 Remove the shift tray

6. Remove four screws, and then remove the shift plate.

Figure 6-1364 Remove the plate

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1600 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Knockup plate assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) knockup plate.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-204 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW48-60003 Knockup plate

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Knockup plate assembly 1601

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-1365 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI knockup plate assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI knockup plate.

1602 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1366 Remove three screws

2. Turn the tray over, remove two screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1367 Remove two screws

Remove the HCI knockup plate assembly 1603

 3. Remove four screws, and then remove the knockup plate.

Figure 6-1368 Remove four screws

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1604 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper gate

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) paper gate.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-205 Part information

Part number Part description

JC81-07478B Paper gate

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

Removal and replacement: Paper gate 1605

 ● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-1369 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI paper gate

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI paper gate.

1. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then pull the assembly up to gain access to it.

Figure 6-1370 Access the assembly

1606 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one spring, and then remove the paper gate.

Figure 6-1371 Remove the paper gate

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1607

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) feed motor drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) feed motor drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-206 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-60023 HCI (Tray 4) feed motor drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

1608 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1372 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI feed motor drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI feed motor drive assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the feed motor drive assembly.

Figure 6-1373 Remove the assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the HCI feed motor drive assembly 1609

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) pickup motor drive assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) pickup motor drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-207 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-64002 HCI (Tray 4) pickup motor drive assembly

1610 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1374 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI pickup motor drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI pickup motor drive assembly.

Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover 1611

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the pickup motor drive assembly.

Figure 6-1375 Remove the assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1612 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift gate solenoid

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) shift gate solenoid.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-208 Part information

Part number Part description

JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting (HCI (Tray 4) shift gate solenoid)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) shift gate solenoid 1613

 ● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-1376 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI shift gate solenoid

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI shift gate solenoid.

1. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then pull the assembly up to gain access to it.

Figure 6-1377 Access the assembly

1614 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws, release two hooks, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1378 Remove the cover

3. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-1379 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove two screws, and then remove the shift gate solenoid (behind the panel).

NOTE: Release the solenoid wire harness as needed.

Remove the HCI shift gate solenoid 1615

 Figure 6-1380 Remove the solenoid

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1616 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

PCA and harness

Review the HCI PCA and harness removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) PCA.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-209 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW48-60001 HCI (Tray 4) PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

PCA and harness 1617

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1381 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI PCA.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors.

Figure 6-1382 Disconnect all connectors

1618 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the PCA.

Figure 6-1383 Remove the PCA

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1619

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) sub PCA.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-210 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02792A HCI (Tray 4) sub PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

1620 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-1384 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI sub PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI sub PCA.

1. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then pull the assembly up to gain access to it.

Figure 6-1385 Access the assembly

Remove the HCI sub PCA 1621

 2. Remove two screws, release two hooks, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1386 Remove the cover

3. Disconnect all of the connectors.

Figure 6-1387 Disconnect all connectors

1622 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove two screws, and then remove the sub PCA.

Figure 6-1388 Remove the PCA

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1623

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI main IF harness

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) main IF harness.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-211 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02600A HCI main IF harness

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

1624 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1389 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI main IF harness

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI main IF harness.

■ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), release the harness from the retainers (callout 2), and then
remove the main IF harness.

Figure 6-1390 Remove the harness

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the HCI main IF harness 1625

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI motor IF (pick and feed)

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) motor IF.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-212 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02282A HCI motor IF

1626 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1391 Remove the cover

2. Remove the HCI right door open switch holder

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI right door open switch holder.

Remove the HCI (Tray 4) rear cover 1627

 1. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-1392 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1393 Remove two screws

1628 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove one screw and then pull the switch and holder out.

Figure 6-1394 Pull out the switch and holder

4. Release two tabs (callout 1) and then remove the switch from the holder to remove it (callout 2).

Figure 6-1395 Remove the holder

3. Remove the HCI motor IF (pick and feed)

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI motor IF.

■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove the motor IF.

NOTE: Release retainers as needed.

Remove the HCI motor IF (pick and feed) 1629

 Figure 6-1396 Remove the motor IF

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1630 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI inner drawer

Learn about removing and replacing the high capacity input (HCI) inner drawer IF.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-213 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02286A HCI inner drawer IF

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the HCI cassette

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI cassette.

■ Do the following: Pull the cassette out until it stops, and then locate the locking mechanisms on each
side.

● Pull the cassette out until it stops.

Removal and replacement: HCI inner drawer 1631

 ● Push down on the center of the right-side locking mechanism, and then rotate the left-side
locking mechanism lever to release the cassette.

● Pull the cassette straight out of the HCI to remove it.

Figure 6-1397 Remove the cassette

E700 series

E700 series

E800 series

E800 series

2. Remove the HCI inner drawer IF

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the HCI inner drawer IF.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1398 Remove two screws

1632 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the HCI inner drawer IF.

Figure 6-1399 Remove the inner drawer IF

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1633

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Output device
Learn about output device parts removal and replacement.

Stapler/stacker and (or) Booklet finisher

Learn about external finisher stapler/stacker or booklet finishers parts removal and replacement.

Cover
Review the external finisher cover removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Front door

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front door.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-214 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60106 Front door

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

1634 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1400 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1401 Remove the door

Remove the external finisher front door 1635

 2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Caster cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher caster cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1636 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-215 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-40018 Caster cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher caster cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the caster cover.

Figure 6-1402 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the external finisher caster cover 1637

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left lower cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher left lower cover.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-216 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60106 Left lower cover (stacker)

1638 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-216 Part information (continued)

Part number Part description

8GS05-60124 Left lower cover (booklet)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1403 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 1639

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1404 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1405 Remove three screws

1640 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1406 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1407 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher rear cover 1641

 Figure 6-1408 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1409 Remove the knob

1642 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1410 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-1411 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher caster cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster cover.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 1643

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the caster cover.

Figure 6-1412 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1413 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

1644 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1414 Release the cover

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-1415 Remove the cover

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1645

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left upper cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher left upper cover.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-217 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60118 Left upper cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1646 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1416 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 1647

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1417 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1418 Remove three screws

1648 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1419 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1420 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher rear cover 1649

 Figure 6-1421 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1422 Remove the knob

1650 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1423 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-1424 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher caster cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster cover.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 1651

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the caster cover.

Figure 6-1425 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1426 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

1652 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1427 Release the cover

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-1428 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 1653

 1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-1429 Lower the tray

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1430 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

1654 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1431 Release the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-1432 Remove the cover

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1655

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher booklet output tray.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-218 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60126 Booklet output tray

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1656 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher booklet output tray

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet output tray.

1. Rotate the tray up.

Figure 6-1433 Rotate the tray

Remove the external finisher booklet output tray 1657

 2. Pull the booklet output tray out and away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1434 Remove the tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1658 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top output tray

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher top output tray.

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-219 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40027 Top output tray

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher top output tray

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top output tray.

Removal and replacement: Top output tray 1659

 1. Rotate the tray up.

Figure 6-1435 Rotate the tray

2. Pull the top output tray out and away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1436 Remove the tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1660 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-220 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40028 Main output tray

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Main output tray 1661

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher main output tray

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray.

■ Release four tabs, and then remove the main output tray.

Figure 6-1437 Remove the tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1662 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-221 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60118 Rear cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Rear cover 1663

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1438 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

1664 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1439 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1665

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-222 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40019 Front cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1666 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1440 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1441 Remove the door

Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 1667

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1442 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1443 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1668 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1444 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1445 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1669

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Punch cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher punch cover.

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-223 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40030 Punch cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1670 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher punch cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the punch cover.

Figure 6-1446 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the external finisher punch cover 1671

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher top cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-224 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60108 Top cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1672 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1447 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 1673

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1448 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1674 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top door

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher top door.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-225 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60107 Top door

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Removal and replacement: Top door 1675

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1449 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1450 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher top door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top door.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

1676 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw from the bracket.

Figure 6-1451 Remove one screw

3. Slide the top door as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-1452 Remove the door

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1677

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right upper cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher right upper cover.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-226 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60109 Right upper cover

1678 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1453 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 1679

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1454 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher right upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher right upper cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove six screws, and then remove the right upper cover.

Figure 6-1455 Remove the cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1680 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front lower left cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front lower left cover.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Front lower left cover 1681

 Table 6-227 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40047 Front lower left cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1456 Remove the hinge pin

1682 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1457 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1458 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 1683

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1459 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1460 Remove the knob

1684 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1461 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-1462 Remove the cover

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 1685

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front lower right cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front lower right cover.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1686 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-228 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40048 Front lower right cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front lower right cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower right cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower right cover.

Figure 6-1463 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the external finisher front lower right cover 1687

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Shaft hinge - door

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher shaft hinge - door.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-229 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60107 Shaft hinge - door

1688 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher shaft hinge - door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher shaft hinge - door.

CAUTION: If both the upper and lower shaft hinges are removed the front door will not be attached to
the finisher.

1. Upper shaft hinge - door removal: Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

CAUTION: When the upper shaft hinge is removed the top of the front door is not attached to the
finisher. To avoid damage to the door, do not let the top of the door separate from the finisher.

Figure 6-1464 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher shaft hinge - door 1689

 2. Lower shaft hinge - door removalSupport the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and
then remove the front door

CAUTION: When the lower shaft hinge is removed the bottom of the front door is not attached to
the finisher. To avoid damage to the door, do not let the bottom of the door separate from the
finisher.

Figure 6-1465 Remove the hinge pin

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

1690 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Caster

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher caster.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher form the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-230 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07452A Caster

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher caster cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster cover.

Removal and replacement: Caster 1691

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the caster cover.

Figure 6-1466 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

1692 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1467 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-1468 Remove the caster

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1693

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Caster fix nut

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher caster fix nut.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher form the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-231 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07444A Caster fix nut

1694 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher caster cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the caster cover.

Figure 6-1469 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher caster fix nut

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster fix nut.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as needed.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Remove the external finisher caster cover 1695

 Figure 6-1470 Remove the nut

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1696 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet front cover

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher booklet front cover.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher form the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-232 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01478B Booklet front covert

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet front cover 1697

 2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-1471 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

1698 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Bridge unit (or) Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics

Review the external finisher bridge unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Bridge unit (or) Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher bridge unit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-233 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60110 Bridge unit

63C80-60109 Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Bridge unit (or) Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics 1699

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher bridge unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge unit.

1. Open the finisher front door.

Figure 6-1472 Open the door

2. Pull the lock straight out of the finisher to release it.

Figure 6-1473 Release the lock

1700 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Slightly separate the finisher and printer, and then disconnect two connectors (or) three
connectors in case of Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics.

Figure 6-1474 Disconnect two connectors on front side

Figure 6-1475 For Bridge with PQ Diagnostics, disconnect one connector on formatter.

Remove the external finisher bridge unit 1701

 4. Remove 1 screw.

NOTE: Bridge unit with PQ diagnostics shown. Standard bridge unit will only have one cable on left
side.

5. Slide the bridge unit off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1476 Remove the unit

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

1702 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge door sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher bridge door sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-234 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Bridge door sensor)

Removal and replacement: Bridge door sensor 1703

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher bridge unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge unit.

1. Open the finisher front door.

Figure 6-1477 Open the door

1704 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Pull the lock straight out of the finisher to release it.

Figure 6-1478 Release the lock

3. Slightly separate the finisher and printer, and then disconnect two connectors (or) three
connectors in case of Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics.

Figure 6-1479 Disconnect two connectors on front side

Remove the external finisher bridge unit 1705

 Figure 6-1480 For Bridge with PQ Diagnostics, disconnect one connector on formatter.

4. Remove 1 screw.

NOTE: Bridge unit with PQ diagnostics shown. Standard bridge unit will only have one cable on left
side.

1706 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Slide the bridge unit off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1481 Remove the unit

2. Remove the external finisher bridge door sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge door sensor.

■ Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 3).

● Push the senor assembly as shown (callout 4) to remove it.

Remove the external finisher bridge door sensor 1707

 Figure 6-1482 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1708 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge entrance sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher bridge entrance sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-235 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Sensor-RP (Bridge entrance sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher bridge unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge unit.

Removal and replacement: Bridge entrance sensor 1709

 1. Open the finisher front door.

Figure 6-1483 Open the door

2. Pull the lock straight out of the finisher to release it.

Figure 6-1484 Release the lock

1710 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Slightly separate the finisher and printer, and then disconnect two connectors (or) three
connectors in case of Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics.

Figure 6-1485 Disconnect two connectors on front side

Figure 6-1486 For Bridge with PQ Diagnostics, disconnect one connector on formatter.

Remove the external finisher bridge unit 1711

 4. Remove 1 screw.

NOTE: Bridge unit with PQ diagnostics shown. Standard bridge unit will only have one cable on left
side.

5. Slide the bridge unit off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1487 Remove the unit

2. Remove the external finisher bridge entrance sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge entrance sensor.

■ Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

1712 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 3).

● Push the senor assembly as shown (callout 4) to remove it.

Figure 6-1488 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1713

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge exit sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher bridge exit sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-236 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Bridge exit sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher bridge unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge unit.

1714 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Open the finisher front door.

Figure 6-1489 Open the door

2. Pull the lock straight out of the finisher to release it.

Figure 6-1490 Release the lock

Remove the external finisher bridge unit 1715

 3. Slightly separate the finisher and printer, and then disconnect two connectors (or) three
connectors in case of Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics.

Figure 6-1491 Disconnect two connectors on front side

Figure 6-1492 For Bridge with PQ Diagnostics, disconnect one connector on formatter.

1716 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove 1 screw.

NOTE: Bridge unit with PQ diagnostics shown. Standard bridge unit will only have one cable on left
side.

5. Slide the bridge unit off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1493 Remove the unit

2. Remove the external finisher bridge exit sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge exit sensor.

Remove the external finisher bridge exit sensor 1717

 1. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1494 Remove the cover

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the sheet-metal holder (callout 1).

Figure 6-1495 Remove the holder

1718 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Open the bridge door.

Figure 6-1496 Open the door

4. Remove thirteen screws, and then remove the inner cover.

Figure 6-1497 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher bridge exit sensor 1719

 5. Disconnect one connector, release one tab, and then remove the bridge exit sensor.

Figure 6-1498 Remove the sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1720 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher bridge motor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-237 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ19-80501 Bridge motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher bridge unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge unit.

Removal and replacement: Bridge motor 1721

 1. Open the finisher front door.

Figure 6-1499 Open the door

2. Pull the lock straight out of the finisher to release it.

Figure 6-1500 Release the lock

1722 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Slightly separate the finisher and printer, and then disconnect two connectors (or) three
connectors in case of Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics.

Figure 6-1501 Disconnect two connectors on front side

Figure 6-1502 For Bridge with PQ Diagnostics, disconnect one connector on formatter.

Remove the external finisher bridge unit 1723

 4. Remove 1 screw.

NOTE: Bridge unit with PQ diagnostics shown. Standard bridge unit will only have one cable on left
side.

5. Slide the bridge unit off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 6-1503 Remove the unit

2. Remove the external finisher bridge motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher bridge motor.

1724 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-1504 Remove the cover

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1505 Remove two screws

Remove the external finisher bridge motor 1725

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the bridge motor..

Figure 6-1506 Remove the motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1726 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Entrance unit
Review the external finisher entrance unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Entrance sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher entrance sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-238 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Sensor-RP (Entrance sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Entrance unit 1727

 1. Remove the external finisher front door
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1507 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1508 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1728 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1509 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1510 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 1729

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1511 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1512 Remove the cover

4. Remove the front lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the front lower cover.

1. If Tray 2 and Tray 3 are installed, remove them now.

1730 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1513 Remove the cover

5. Remove the rear upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear upper cover.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove the screw caps.

Figure 6-1514 Remove the screw caps

Remove the rear upper cover 1731

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1515 Remove the cover

6. Remove the rear lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the rear lower cover.

■ Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover.

Figure 6-1516 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

1732 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Figure 6-1517 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-1518 Remove the caster

Remove the external finisher caster 1733

 8. Remove the external finisher left lower cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1519 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1520 Release the cover

1734 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-1521 Remove the cover

9. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-1522 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 1735

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1523 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1524 Release the cover

1736 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-1525 Remove the cover

10. Remove the external finisher ejector unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector unit.

1. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the front tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-1526 Release the tamper

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 1737

 2. Remove two screws (located below the front tamper).

Figure 6-1527 Remove two screws

3. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the rear tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-1528 Release the tamper

1738 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Remove two screws (located below the rear tamper).

Figure 6-1529 Remove two screws

5. Do the following:

a. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening.

b. Locate the shaft, pull down to release it (callout 1), and then slide it as shown below (callout 2)
to remove it.

Figure 6-1530 Remove the shaft

6. Remove two screws, and then remove the ejector unit.

NOTE: Slightly lift up on the tampers to give the ejector unit clearance when removing it..

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 1739

 Figure 6-1531 Remove the unit

11. Remove the external finisher front tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper.

■ Disconnect three connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the front tamper.

NOTE: If the tamper unit is removed after the ejector unit to gain access to another assembly, the
screws have already been removed.

Figure 6-1532 Remove the tamper

12. Remove the external finisher entrance sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher entrance sensor.

1740 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect the connector

Figure 6-1533 Disconnect the connector

2. Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release two hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor as shown below (callout 3).

● Remove the entrance sensor.

Figure 6-1534 Remove the sensor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1741

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher entrance motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1742 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-239 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60104 Entrance motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1535 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher rear cover 1743

 Figure 6-1536 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher entrance motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher entrance motor assemnbly.

1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-1537 Disconnect connector and remove screws

1744 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Slightly separate the entrance motor assembly from the finisher chassis, remove the belt (callout 1),
and then remove the entrance motor assembly.

Figure 6-1538 Remove the assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1745

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher entrance motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-240 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ19-80501 Entrance motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1746 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1539 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1540 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher entrance motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher entrance motor assemnbly.

Remove the external finisher entrance motor assembly 1747

 1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-1541 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Slightly separate the entrance motor assembly from the finisher chassis, remove the belt (callout 1),
and then remove the entrance motor assembly.

Figure 6-1542 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the external finisher entrance motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher entrance motor.

1748 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then remove the entrance motor.

Figure 6-1543 Remove the motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1749

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Punch unit
Review the external finisher punch unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Punch unit

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher punch unit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-241 Part information

Part number Part description

Y1G10-67901 Punch unit (2-3 hole)

Y1G11-67901 Punch unit (2-4 hole)

Y1G12-67901 Punch unit (Swedish hole)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1750 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the external finisher punch unit
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher punch unit.

■ Disconnect two connectors, remove one screw, and then remove the punch unit.

Figure 6-1544 Remove the unit

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Remove the external finisher punch unit 1751

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Tray diverter unit

Review the external finisher tray diverter unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Top jam cover assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher top jam cover assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-242 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01455A Top jam cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1752 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1545 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1546 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor assembly.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 1753

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor assembly.

Figure 6-1547 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the external finisher top jam cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top jam cover assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1548 Remove two screws

1754 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Pull the top jam cover assembly out of the finisher.

Figure 6-1549 Remove the assembly

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1755

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher tray diverter.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-243 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07205A Tray diverter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1756 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1550 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1551 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor assembly.

Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly 1757

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor assembly.

Figure 6-1552 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the external finisher top jam cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top jam cover assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1553 Remove two screws

1758 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Pull the top jam cover assembly out of the finisher.

Figure 6-1554 Remove the assembly

4. Remove the external finisher tray diverter

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher tray diverter.

■ Carefully separate the tray diverter from the top jam cover assembly to remove it.

Figure 6-1555 Remove the diverter

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the external finisher tray diverter 1759

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top door open switch

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher top door open switch.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-244 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02631A Top door open switch

1760 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1556 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 1761

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1557 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher top door open switch

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top door open switch.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-1558 Remove one screw

1762 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Separate the top door open switch from the finisher, and then disconnect three connectors to
remove it.

Figure 6-1559 Remove the switch

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1763

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter cam

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher tray diverter cam.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-245 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01458A Tray diverter cam

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1764 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1560 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1561 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher entrance motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher entrance motor.

Remove the external finisher entrance motor 1765

 ■ Remove two screws, and then remove the entrance motor.

Figure 6-1562 Remove the motor

3. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1563 Remove the hinge pin

1766 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1564 Remove the door

4. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1565 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 1767

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1566 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1567 Remove the knob

1768 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1568 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher tray diverter home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher tray diverter home sensor.

1. Remove the green handle.

Figure 6-1569 Remove the handle

Remove the external finisher tray diverter home sensor 1769

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring (callout 1), and then remove the gear and belt (callout 2).

Figure 6-1570 Remove the gear and belt

3. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the sensor and bracket.

NOTE: If the tray diverter home sensor assembly is being removed to gain access to another part,
stop now.

Figure 6-1571 Remove the sensor and bracket

4. Do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 2).

● Remove the tray diverter home position sensor from the bracket.

1770 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1572 Remove the sensor

7. Remove the external finisher tray diverter cam

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher tray diverter cam

■ Carefully slide the tray diverter cam off of the shaft to remove it.

Figure 6-1573 Remove the cam

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the external finisher tray diverter cam 1771

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher tray diverter home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-246 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Tray diverter home sensor)

1772 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1574 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher rear cover 1773

 Figure 6-1575 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1576 Remove the hinge pin

1774 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1577 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1578 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 1775

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1579 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1580 Remove the knob

1776 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1581 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher tray diverter home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher tray diverter home sensor.

1. Remove the green handle.

Figure 6-1582 Remove the handle

Remove the external finisher tray diverter home sensor 1777

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring (callout 1), and then remove the gear and belt (callout 2).

Figure 6-1583 Remove the gear and belt

3. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the sensor and bracket.

NOTE: If the tray diverter home sensor assembly is being removed to gain access to another part,
stop now.

Figure 6-1584 Remove the sensor and bracket

4. Do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 2).

● Remove the tray diverter home position sensor from the bracket.

1778 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1585 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1779

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Top exit unit

Review the external finisher top exit unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Top exit sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher top exit sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-247 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Top exit sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1780 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1586 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1587 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor assembly.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 1781

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor assembly.

Figure 6-1588 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the external finisher top jam cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top jam cover assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1589 Remove two screws

1782 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Pull the top jam cover assembly out of the finisher.

Figure 6-1590 Remove the assembly

4. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1591 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 1783

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1592 Remove the door

5. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1593 Remove three screws

1784 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1594 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1595 Remove the knob

Remove the external finisher front cover 1785

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1596 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly.

■ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the main exit
cam motor assembly.

Figure 6-1597 Remove the assembly

8. Remove the external finisher top lower feed assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top lower feed assembly.

1786 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-1598 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1599 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top lower feed assembly 1787

 3. Pull the top lower feed assembly straight up and out of the finisher.

Figure 6-1600 Remove the assembly

9. Remove the external finisher top exit sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top exit sensor.

■ Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 3).

● Remove the top exit sensor (callout 4).

1788 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1601 Remove the sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1789

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher exit motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-248 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1790 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1602 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1603 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor assembly.

Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly 1791

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor assembly.

Figure 6-1604 Remove the assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1792 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher exit motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-249 Part information

Part number Part description

3SJ19-80501 Exit motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor 1793

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1605 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1606 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor assembly.

1794 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor assembly.

Figure 6-1607 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the external finisher exit motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor.

Figure 6-1608 Remove the motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the external finisher exit motor 1795

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Top output tray unit

Review the external finisher top output tray unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Top lower feed assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher top lower feed assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

1796 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-250 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01454A Top lower feed assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1609 Remove five screws

Remove the external finisher rear cover 1797

 2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1610 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor assembly.

Figure 6-1611 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the external finisher top jam cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top jam cover assembly.

1798 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1612 Remove two screws

2. Pull the top jam cover assembly out of the finisher.

Figure 6-1613 Remove the assembly

4. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 1799

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1614 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1615 Remove the door

5. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1800 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1616 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1617 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 1801

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1618 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1619 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly.

1802 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the main exit
cam motor assembly.

Figure 6-1620 Remove the assembly

8. Remove the external finisher top lower feed assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top lower feed assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-1621 Disconnect connector and remove screws

Remove the external finisher top lower feed assembly 1803

 2. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1622 Remove three screws

3. Pull the top lower feed assembly straight up and out of the finisher.

Figure 6-1623 Remove the assembly

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1804 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray extension

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher tray extension.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-251 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40029 Tray extension

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Tray extension 1805

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher top output tray

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top output tray.

1. Rotate the tray up.

Figure 6-1624 Rotate the tray

1806 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Pull the top output tray out and away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1625 Remove the tray

2. Remove the external finisher tray extension

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher tray extension.

■ Release two hooks, and then slide the tray extension away from the top output tray to remove it.

Figure 6-1626 Remove the tray extension

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the external finisher tray extension 1807

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top output tray paper full sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher top output tray paper full sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-252 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A Tray sensor kit (Top output tray paper full sensor)

1808 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1627 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher rear cover 1809

 Figure 6-1628 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1629 Remove the hinge pin

1810 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1630 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1631 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 1811

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1632 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1633 Remove the knob

1812 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1634 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray motor drive
assembly.

■ Disconnect two connectors, remove four screws, and then remove the main output tray motor drive
assembly.

Figure 6-1635 Remove the sensor

6. Remove the external finisher top output tray paper full sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top output tray paper full
sensor.

Remove the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly 1813
 1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-1636 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-1637 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1814 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Main exit unit

Review the external finisher main exit unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Main exit sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main exit sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-253 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Sensor-RP (Main exit sensor)

Main exit unit 1815

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1638 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

1816 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1639 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor assembly.

Figure 6-1640 Remove the assembly

3. Remove the external finisher top jam cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top jam cover assembly.

Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly 1817

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-1641 Remove two screws

2. Pull the top jam cover assembly out of the finisher.

Figure 6-1642 Remove the assembly

4. Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly.

1818 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the main exit
cam motor assembly.

Figure 6-1643 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the external finisher top lower feed assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top lower feed assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-1644 Disconnect connector and remove screws

Remove the external finisher top lower feed assembly 1819

 2. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1645 Remove three screws

3. Pull the top lower feed assembly straight up and out of the finisher.

Figure 6-1646 Remove the assembly

6. Remove the external finisher main exit sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main exit sensor.

1820 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the main exit sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-1647 Remove the sensor

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1821

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main exit cam motor assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-254 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01453A Main exit cam motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1822 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1648 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1649 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 1823

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1650 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1651 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1824 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1652 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1653 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly.

Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly 1825
 ■ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the main exit
cam motor assembly.

Figure 6-1654 Remove the assembly

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1826 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main exit cam home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main exit cam home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-255 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Main exit cam home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Main exit cam home sensor 1827

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1655 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1656 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1828 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1657 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1658 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 1829

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1659 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1660 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main exit cam motor assembly.

1830 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the main exit
cam motor assembly.

Figure 6-1661 Remove the assembly

5. Remove the external finisher main exit cam home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main exit cam home sensor.

■ Do the following:

● Release the hooks (callout 1).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 2).

● Remove the main exit cam home sensor from the bracket (callout 3).

Figure 6-1662 Remove the sensor

Remove the external finisher main exit cam home sensor 1831
 6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main exit cam motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main exit cam motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

1832 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-256 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-60117 Main exit cam motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1663 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 1833

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1664 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1665 Remove three screws

1834 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1666 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1667 Remove the knob

Remove the external finisher front cover 1835

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1668 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher main exit cam motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main exit cam motor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the main exit
cam motor.

Figure 6-1669 Remove the motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1836 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front door switch

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front door switch.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Front door switch 1837

 Table 6-257 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02309A Front door switch

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1670 Remove the hinge pin

1838 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1671 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1672 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 1839

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1673 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1674 Remove the knob

1840 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1675 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front door switch

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door switch.

1. Remove one screw, and then separate the switch and holder form the finisher.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the switch. It is still attached by cables to the
finisher.

Figure 6-1676 Separate the switch and holder form the finisher

Remove the external finisher front door switch 1841

 2. Separate the switch from the holder, and then disconnect two connectors to remove the front door
switch.

Figure 6-1677 Remove the switch

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1842 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Paddle unit
Review the external finisher paddle unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Paddle

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher paddle.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-258 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01480A Paddle

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Paddle unit 1843

 1. Remove the external finisher rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1678 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1679 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1844 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1680 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1681 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 1845

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1682 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1683 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1846 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1684 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1685 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 1847

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-1686 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher caster cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the caster cover.

Figure 6-1687 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

1848 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1688 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1689 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 1849

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-1690 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-1691 Lower the tray

1850 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1692 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1693 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 1851

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-1694 Remove the cover

9. Remove the external finisher paddle

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paddle.

■ Pull the paddle straight out to remove it.

Figure 6-1695 Remove the paddle

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1852 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paddle motor assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher paddle motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Paddle motor assembly 1853

 Table 6-259 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01461A Paddle motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1696 Remove the hinge pin

1854 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1697 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1698 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 1855

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1699 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1700 Remove the knob

1856 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1701 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paddle motor assembly.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

b. Remove two screws (callout 2).

c. Release the wire harness from the retainers (callout 3), and then remove the paddle motor
assembly.

Figure 6-1702 Remove the assembly

Remove the external finisher paddle motor assembly 1857

 5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paddle home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher paddle home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

1858 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-260 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Paddle home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1703 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 1859

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1704 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1705 Remove three screws

1860 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1706 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1707 Remove the knob

Remove the external finisher front cover 1861

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1708 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paddle motor assembly.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

b. Remove two screws (callout 2).

c. Release the wire harness from the retainers (callout 3), and then remove the paddle motor
assembly.

Figure 6-1709 Remove the assembly

1862 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Remove the external finisher paddle home sensory
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paddle home sensor.

■ Do the following:

a. Release the hooks (callout 1).

b. Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 2).

c. Remove the paddle home sensor from the bracket (callout 3).

Figure 6-1710 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

Remove the external finisher paddle home sensory 1863

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paddle motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher paddle motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-261 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Paddle motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

1864 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1711 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1712 Remove the door

Remove the external finisher front door 1865

 2. Remove the external finisher top cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1713 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1714 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1866 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1715 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1716 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher paddle motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paddle motor.

Remove the external finisher paddle motor 1867

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the paddle motor.

Figure 6-1717 Remove the motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1868 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1869

 End fence unit
Review the external finisher end fence unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: End fence home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher end fence home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-262 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (End fence sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1870 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1718 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1719 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 1871

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1720 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1721 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1872 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1722 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1723 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 1873

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1724 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1725 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

1874 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-1726 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher caster cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the caster cover.

Figure 6-1727 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher caster cover 1875

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1728 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1729 Release the cover

1876 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-1730 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-1731 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 1877

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1732 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1733 Release the cover

1878 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-1734 Remove the cover

9. Remove the external finisher ejector unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector unit.

1. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the front tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-1735 Release the tamper

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 1879

 2. Remove two screws (located below the front tamper).

Figure 6-1736 Remove two screws

3. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the rear tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-1737 Release the tamper

1880 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Remove two screws (located below the rear tamper).

Figure 6-1738 Remove two screws

5. Do the following:

a. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening.

b. Locate the shaft, pull down to release it (callout 1), and then slide it as shown below (callout 2)
to remove it.

Figure 6-1739 Remove the shaft

6. Remove two screws, and then remove the ejector unit.

NOTE: Slightly lift up on the tampers to give the ejector unit clearance when removing it..

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 1881

 Figure 6-1740 Remove the unit

10. Remove the external finisher front tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper.

■ Disconnect three connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the front tamper.

NOTE: If the tamper unit is removed after the ejector unit to gain access to another assembly, the
screws have already been removed.

Figure 6-1741 Remove the tamper

11. Remove the external finisher end fence home sensory

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher end fence home sensor.

1882 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove the end fence home sensor.

Figure 6-1742 Remove the sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1883

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: End fence motor assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher end fence motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-263 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01467A End fence motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1884 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1743 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1744 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 1885

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1745 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1746 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1886 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1747 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1748 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher end fence motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher end fence motor assembly.

Remove the external finisher end fence motor assembly 1887

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the end fence motor assembly.

Figure 6-1749 Remove the assembly

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1888 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: End fence motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher end fence motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-264 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (End fence motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: End fence motor 1889

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1750 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1751 Remove the door

2. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1890 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1752 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1753 Remove the cover

3. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 1891

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1754 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1755 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher end fence motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher end fence motor.

1892 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the end fence motor.

Figure 6-1756 Remove the motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1893

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1894 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch guide
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch guide.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-265 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-40019 Main output tray top of stack switch guide

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch guide 1895
 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1757 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1758 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1896 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1759 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1760 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 1897

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1761 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1762 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1898 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1763 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1764 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray motor drive
assembly.

Remove the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly 1899
 ■ Disconnect two connectors, remove four screws, and then remove the main output tray motor drive
assembly.

Figure 6-1765 Remove the sensor

6 Remove the external finisher paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paddle motor assembly.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

b. Remove two screws (callout 2).

c. Release the wire harness from the retainers (callout 3), and then remove the paddle motor
assembly.

1900 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1766 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch guide
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray top of stack
switch guide.

1. Remove four screws, and then remove the frame cover.

Figure 6-1767 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch guide 1901
 2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the top output tray.

Figure 6-1768 Remove the tray

3. Release two hooks.

Figure 6-1769 Release two hooks

1902 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove the main output tray top of stack switch guide.

Figure 6-1770 Remove the guide

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1903

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1904 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch lower guide
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch lower
guide.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-266 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-40020 Main output tray top of stack switch lower guide

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch lower guide 1905
 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1771 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1772 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1906 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1773 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1774 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 1907

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1775 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1776 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1908 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1777 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1778 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray motor drive
assembly.

Remove the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly 1909
 ■ Disconnect two connectors, remove four screws, and then remove the main output tray motor drive
assembly.

Figure 6-1779 Remove the sensor

6 Remove the external finisher paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paddle motor assembly.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

b. Remove two screws (callout 2).

c. Release the wire harness from the retainers (callout 3), and then remove the paddle motor
assembly.

1910 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1780 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch lower guide
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray top of stack
switch lower guide.

1. Remove four screws, and then remove the frame cover.

Figure 6-1781 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch lower guide 1911
 2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the top output tray.

Figure 6-1782 Remove the tray

3. Release two hooks.

Figure 6-1783 Release two hooks

1912 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove the main output tray top of stack switch guide.

Figure 6-1784 Remove the guide

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1913

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Tamper unit
Review the external finisher tamper unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front tamper.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-267 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00901A Front tamper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1914 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1785 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1786 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 1915

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1787 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1788 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1916 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1789 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1790 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 1917

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1791 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1792 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

1918 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-1793 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Remove the external finisher caster 1919

 Figure 6-1794 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-1795 Remove the caster

7. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

1920 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1796 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1797 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 1921

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-1798 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-1799 Lower the tray

1922 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1800 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1801 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 1923

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-1802 Remove the cover

9. Remove the external finisher front tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper.

■ Disconnect three connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the front tamper.

NOTE: If the tamper unit is removed after the ejector unit to gain access to another assembly, the
screws have already been removed.

Figure 6-1803 Remove the tamper

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1924 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front tamper home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor 1925

 Table 6-268 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Front tamper home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1804 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

1926 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1805 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1806 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 1927

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1807 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1808 Remove three screws

1928 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1809 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1810 Remove the knob

Remove the external finisher front cover 1929

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1811 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-1812 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

1930 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1813 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1814 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 1931

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-1815 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-1816 Lower the tray

1932 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1817 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1818 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 1933

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-1819 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher front tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper.

■ Disconnect three connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the front tamper.

NOTE: If the tamper unit is removed after the ejector unit to gain access to another assembly, the
screws have already been removed.

Figure 6-1820 Remove the tamper

9. Remove the external finisher front tamper home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper home sensor.

1934 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the tamper.

Figure 6-1821 Remove the tamper

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the bracket.

Figure 6-1822 Remove the bracket

3. Do the following:

a. Release the hooks (callout 1).

b. Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 2).

c. Remove the tamper home sensor from the bracket.

Remove the external finisher front tamper home sensor 1935

 Figure 6-1823 Remove the sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1936 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front tamper motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-269 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Front tamper motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor 1937

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1824 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1825 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1938 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1826 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1827 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 1939

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1828 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1829 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1940 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1830 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1831 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 1941

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-1832 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1833 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

1942 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1834 Release the cover

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-1835 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 1943

 1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-1836 Lower the tray

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1837 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

1944 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1838 Release the cover

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-1839 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher front tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper.

■ Disconnect three connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the front tamper.

NOTE: If the tamper unit is removed after the ejector unit to gain access to another assembly, the
screws have already been removed.

Remove the external finisher front tamper 1945

 Figure 6-1840 Remove the tamper

9. Remove the external finisher front tamper motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper motor.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the front tamper motor.

Figure 6-1841 Remove the motor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

1946 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher rear tamper.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-270 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00898A Rear tamper

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper 1947

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1842 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

1948 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1843 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1844 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 1949

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1845 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1846 Remove three screws

1950 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1847 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1848 Remove the knob

Remove the external finisher front cover 1951

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1849 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-1850 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

1952 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1851 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1852 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 1953

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-1853 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-1854 Lower the tray

1954 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1855 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1856 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 1955

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-1857 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear tamper.

■ Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-1858 Remove the tamper

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1956 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher rear tamper home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor 1957

 Table 6-271 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Rear tamper home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1859 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

1958 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1860 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1861 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 1959

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1862 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1863 Remove three screws

1960 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1864 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1865 Remove the knob

Remove the external finisher front cover 1961

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1866 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-1867 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

1962 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1868 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1869 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 1963

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-1870 Remove the cover

7. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-1871 Lower the tray

1964 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1872 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1873 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 1965

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-1874 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher front tamper home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper home sensor.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the tamper.

Figure 6-1875 Remove the tamper

1966 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the bracket.

Figure 6-1876 Remove the bracket

3. Do the following:

a. Release the hooks (callout 1).

b. Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 2).

c. Remove the tamper home sensor from the bracket.

Figure 6-1877 Remove the sensor

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1967

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher rear tamper motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

1968 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Table 6-272 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Rear tamper motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1878 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher rear cover 1969

 Figure 6-1879 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1880 Remove the hinge pin

1970 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1881 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1882 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 1971

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1883 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1884 Remove the knob

1972 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1885 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-1886 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 1973

 WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Figure 6-1887 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-1888 Remove the caster

1974 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

7. Remove the external finisher left lower cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1889 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1890 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 1975

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-1891 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-1892 Lower the tray

1976 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1893 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1894 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 1977

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-1895 Remove the cover

9. Remove the external finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear tamper.

■ Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-1896 Remove the tamper

10. Remove the external finisher front tamper motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front tamper motor.

1978 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then remove the front tamper motor.

Figure 6-1897 Remove the motor

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1979

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Stapler unit
Review the external finisher stapler unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Stapler unit

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher stapler unit.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-273 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00894A Stapler unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1980 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1898 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1899 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 1981

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1900 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1901 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1982 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1902 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1903 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 1983

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1904 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1905 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher stapler unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher stapler unit.

1984 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-1906 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the stapler
unit.

Figure 6-1907 Remove the unit

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1985

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Staple cartridge

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher staple cartridge.

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-274 Part information

Part number Part description

JC81-09882B Staple cartridge

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1986 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher staple unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher staple unit.

■ Grasp the blue handle, and then pull the staple cartridge straight out of the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1908 Remove the cartridge

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the external finisher staple unit 1987

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler front sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher stapler front sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-275 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Stapler front sensor)

1988 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1909 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher rear cover 1989

 Figure 6-1910 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1911 Remove the hinge pin

1990 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1912 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1913 Remove three screws

Remove the external finisher top cover 1991

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1914 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1915 Remove the knob

1992 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1916 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher stapler unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher stapler unit.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-1917 Disconnect connector and remove screws

Remove the external finisher stapler unit 1993

 2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the stapler
unit.

Figure 6-1918 Remove the unit

6. Remove the external finisher stapler front sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher stapler front sensor.

■ Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 3).

● Remove the stapler front sensor.

1994 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1919 Remove the sensor

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1995

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-front and mid-rear sensors

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher stapler mid-front and mid-rear sensors.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-276 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Stapler mid-front sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Stapler mid-rear sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1996 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1920 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1921 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 1997

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1922 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1923 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1998 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1924 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1925 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 1999

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1926 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1927 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher stapler unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher stapler unit.

2000 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-1928 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the stapler
unit.

Figure 6-1929 Remove the unit

6. Remove the external finisher stapler mid-front and mid-rear sensors

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher stapler mid-front and mid-rear
sensors.

1. Locate the desired sensor.

● Callout 1: Mid-front sensor

Remove the external finisher stapler mid-front and mid-rear sensors 2001
 ● Callout 2: Mid-rear sensor

Figure 6-1930 Locate the sensors

2. Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 3).

● Remove the stapler mid-front sensor.

NOTE: Repeat this step to remove the stapler mid-rear sensor if necessary.

Figure 6-1931 Remove the sensor

2002 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

7. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Manual staple sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher manual staple sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2003

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-277 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Stapler manual staple sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1932 Remove five screws

2004 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1933 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1934 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 2005

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1935 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1936 Remove three screws

2006 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1937 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1938 Remove the knob

Remove the external finisher front cover 2007

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1939 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher manual staple sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher manual staple sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the manual staple sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-1940 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2008 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher stapler position motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor 2009

 Table 6-278 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00163A Motor, step (Stapler position motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1941 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

2010 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1942 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1943 Remove the hinge pin

Remove the external finisher front door 2011

 2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1944 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1945 Remove three screws

2012 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1946 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1947 Remove the knob

Remove the external finisher front cover 2013

 2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1948 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher stapler unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher stapler unit.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-1949 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2014 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the stapler
unit.

Figure 6-1950 Remove the unit

6. Remove the external finisher stapler position motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher stapler position motor.

■ Remove two screws (callout 1), release the belt (callout 2), and then remove the stapler position
motor.

Figure 6-1951 Remove the motor

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the external finisher stapler position motor 2015

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2016 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Ejector unit
Review the external finisher ejector unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Ejector unit

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher ejector unit.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-279 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01802A Ejector unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Ejector unit 2017

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1952 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1953 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2018 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1954 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1955 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2019

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1956 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1957 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2020 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1958 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1959 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 2021

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-1960 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

2022 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1961 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-1962 Remove the caster

7. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2023

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1963 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1964 Release the cover

2024 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-1965 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-1966 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2025

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1967 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1968 Release the cover

2026 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-1969 Remove the cover

9. Remove the external finisher ejector unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector unit.

1. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the front tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-1970 Release the tamper

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2027

 2. Remove two screws (located below the front tamper).

Figure 6-1971 Remove two screws

3. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the rear tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-1972 Release the tamper

2028 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Remove two screws (located below the rear tamper).

Figure 6-1973 Remove two screws

5. Do the following:

a. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening.

b. Locate the shaft, pull down to release it (callout 1), and then slide it as shown below (callout 2)
to remove it.

Figure 6-1974 Remove the shaft

6. Remove two screws, and then remove the ejector unit.

NOTE: Slightly lift up on the tampers to give the ejector unit clearance when removing it..

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2029

 Figure 6-1975 Remove the unit

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2030 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Ejector sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher ejector sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-280 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Sensor-RP (Ejector sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Ejector sensor 2031

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-1976 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-1977 Remove the cover

2. Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2032 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-1978 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-1979 Remove the door

3. Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2033

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-1980 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-1981 Remove the cover

4. Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2034 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-1982 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-1983 Remove the cover

5. Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 2035

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-1984 Remove the cover

6. Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

2036 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-1985 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-1986 Remove the caster

7. Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2037

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1987 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1988 Release the cover

2038 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-1989 Remove the cover

8. Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-1990 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2039

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-1991 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-1992 Release the cover

2040 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-1993 Remove the cover

9. Remove the external finisher ejector unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector unit.

1. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the front tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-1994 Release the tamper

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2041

 2. Remove two screws (located below the front tamper).

Figure 6-1995 Remove two screws

3. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the rear tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-1996 Release the tamper

2042 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Remove two screws (located below the rear tamper).

Figure 6-1997 Remove two screws

5. Do the following:

a. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening.

b. Locate the shaft, pull down to release it (callout 1), and then slide it as shown below (callout 2)
to remove it.

Figure 6-1998 Remove the shaft

6. Remove two screws, and then remove the ejector unit.

NOTE: Slightly lift up on the tampers to give the ejector unit clearance when removing it..

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2043

 Figure 6-1999 Remove the unit

10. Remove the external finisher ejector sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector sensor.

1. Remove the ejector sensor cover.

Figure 6-2000 Release the cover

2. Carefully separate the ejector sensor from the ejector unit.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the sensor. It is still attached to the ejector unit
by a wire harness.

2044 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2001 Release the sensor

3. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the ejector sensor.

Figure 6-2002 Remove the sensor

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2045

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2046 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Ejector 1 home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher ejector 1 home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-281 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Ejector 1 home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Ejector 1 home sensor 2047

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2003 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2004 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2048 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2005 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2006 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2049

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2007 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2008 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2050 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2009 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2010 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 2051

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2011 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

2052 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2012 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2013 Remove the caster

7 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2053

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2014 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2015 Release the cover

2054 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2016 Remove the cover

8 Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2017 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2055

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2018 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2019 Release the cover

2056 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2020 Remove the cover

9 Remove the external finisher ejector unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector unit.

1. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the front tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2021 Release the tamper

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2057

 2. Remove two screws (located below the front tamper).

Figure 6-2022 Remove two screws

3. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the rear tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2023 Release the tamper

2058 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Remove two screws (located below the rear tamper).

Figure 6-2024 Remove two screws

5. Do the following:

a. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening.

b. Locate the shaft, pull down to release it (callout 1), and then slide it as shown below (callout 2)
to remove it.

Figure 6-2025 Remove the shaft

6. Remove two screws, and then remove the ejector unit.

NOTE: Slightly lift up on the tampers to give the ejector unit clearance when removing it..

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2059

 Figure 6-2026 Remove the unit

10 Remove the external finisher ejector 1 home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector 1 home sensor.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

b. Release the hook (callout 2).

c. Remove the ejector 1 home sensor (callout 3).

Figure 6-2027 Remove the sensor

2060 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

11 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2061

 Removal and replacement: Ejector 1 motor sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher ejector 1 motor sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-282 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Ejector 1 motor sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2062 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2028 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2029 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 2063

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2030 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2031 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2064 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2032 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2033 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2065

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2034 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2035 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2066 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2036 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Remove the external finisher caster 2067

 Figure 6-2037 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2038 Remove the caster

7 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

2068 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2039 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2040 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2069

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2041 Remove the cover

8 Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2042 Lower the tray

2070 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2043 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2044 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2071

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2045 Remove the cover

9 Remove the external finisher ejector unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector unit.

1. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the front tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2046 Release the tamper

2072 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws (located below the front tamper).

Figure 6-2047 Remove two screws

3. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the rear tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2048 Release the tamper

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2073

 4. Remove two screws (located below the rear tamper).

Figure 6-2049 Remove two screws

5. Do the following:

a. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening.

b. Locate the shaft, pull down to release it (callout 1), and then slide it as shown below (callout 2)
to remove it.

Figure 6-2050 Remove the shaft

6. Remove two screws, and then remove the ejector unit.

NOTE: Slightly lift up on the tampers to give the ejector unit clearance when removing it..

2074 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2051 Remove the unit

10 Remove the external finisher ejector 1 motor sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector 1 motor sensor.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

b. Release the hooks (callout 2).

c. Slide the senor as shown below (callout 3)

d. Remove the ejector 1 motor sensor.

Figure 6-2052 Remove the sensor

Remove the external finisher ejector 1 motor sensor 2075

 11 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2076 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Ejector 2 motor sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher ejector 2 motor sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-283 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Ejector 2 motor sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Ejector 2 motor sensor 2077

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2053 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2054 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2078 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2055 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2056 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2079

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2057 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2058 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2080 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2059 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2060 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 2081

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2061 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

2082 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2062 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2063 Remove the caster

7 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2083

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2064 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2065 Release the cover

2084 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2066 Remove the cover

8 Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2067 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2085

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2068 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2069 Release the cover

2086 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2070 Remove the cover

9 Remove the external finisher ejector unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector unit.

1. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the front tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2071 Release the tamper

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2087

 2. Remove two screws (located below the front tamper).

Figure 6-2072 Remove two screws

3. Remove three screws.

NOTE: Removing these screws allows the rear tamper to be moved out of the way when the
ejector unit is removed.

Figure 6-2073 Release the tamper

2088 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Remove two screws (located below the rear tamper).

Figure 6-2074 Remove two screws

5. Do the following:

a. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening.

b. Locate the shaft, pull down to release it (callout 1), and then slide it as shown below (callout 2)
to remove it.

Figure 6-2075 Remove the shaft

6. Remove two screws, and then remove the ejector unit.

NOTE: Slightly lift up on the tampers to give the ejector unit clearance when removing it..

Remove the external finisher ejector unit 2089

 Figure 6-2076 Remove the unit

10 Remove the external finisher ejector 2 motor sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher ejector 2 motor sensor.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

b. Release the hooks (callout 2).

c. Slide the senor as shown below (callout 3)

d. Remove the ejector 2 motor sensor.

Figure 6-2077 Remove the sensor

2090 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

11 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2091

 Main output tray unit
Review the external finisher main output tray unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-284 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40028 Main output tray

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher main output tray

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray.

2092 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Release four hooks, and then remove the main output tray.

Figure 6-2078 Remove the tray

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2093

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2094 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray top of stack sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-285 Part information

Part number Part description

1404-001417 Tray sensor kit (Main output tray top of stack sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack sensor 2095
 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2079 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2080 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2096 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2081 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2082 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2097

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2083 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2084 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2098 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2085 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2086 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 2099

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2087 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

2100 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2088 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2089 Remove the caster

7 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2101

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2090 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2091 Release the cover

2102 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2092 Remove the cover

8 Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2093 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2103

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2094 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2095 Release the cover

2104 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2096 Remove the cover

9 Remove the external finisher main output tray top of stack sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray top of stack
sensor.

■ Release two hooks, and then remove the main output tray top of stack sensor.

Figure 6-2097 Remove the sensor

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the external finisher main output tray top of stack sensor 2105
 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2106 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Main output tray lower limit sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray lower limit sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-286 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Main output tray lower limit sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray lower limit sensor 2107
 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2098 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2099 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2108 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2100 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2101 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2109

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2102 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2103 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2110 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2104 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2105 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 2111

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2106 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

2112 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2107 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2108 Remove the caster

7 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2113

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2109 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2110 Release the cover

2114 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2111 Remove the cover

8 Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2112 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2115

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2113 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2114 Release the cover

2116 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2115 Remove the cover

9 Remove the external finisher main output tray lower limit sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray lower limit
sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release one hook, and then remove the main output tray lower
limit sensor.

Figure 6-2116 Remove the sensor

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the external finisher main output tray lower limit sensor 2117
 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2118 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray motor sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-287 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Main output tray motor sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor sensor 2119

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2117 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2118 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher main output tray motor sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray motor sensor.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

2120 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 b. Release the hooks (callout 2).

c. Slide the senor as shown below (callout 3)

d. Remove the main output tray motor sensor (callout 4).

Figure 6-2119 Remove the sensor

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

Unpack the replacement assembly 2121

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2122 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor drive assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-288 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01415B Main output tray motor drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor drive assembly 2123
 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2120 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2121 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray motor drive
assembly.

2124 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect two connectors, remove four screws, and then remove the main output tray motor drive
assembly.

Figure 6-2122 Remove the sensor

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2125

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2126 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-289 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A Tray sensor kit (Main output tray top of stack switch)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch 2127
 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2123 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2124 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2128 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2125 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2126 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2129

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2127 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2128 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2130 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2129 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2130 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray motor drive
assembly.

Remove the external finisher main output tray motor drive assembly 2131
 ■ Disconnect two connectors, remove four screws, and then remove the main output tray motor drive
assembly.

Figure 6-2131 Remove the sensor

6 Remove the external finisher paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paddle motor assembly.

■ Do the following:

a. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

b. Remove two screws (callout 2).

c. Release the wire harness from the retainers (callout 3), and then remove the paddle motor
assembly.

2132 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2132 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher main output tray top of stack
switch.

1. Remove four screws, and then remove the frame cover.

Figure 6-2133 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher main output tray top of stack switch 2133
 2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the top output tray.

Figure 6-2134 Remove the tray

3. Release two hooks.

Figure 6-2135 Release two hooks

4. Release one hook, and then separate the senor from the assembly.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the switch. It is still attached to the finisher by a
wire harness and connector.

2134 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2136 Release the sensor

5. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the main output tray top of stack switch.

NOTE: Release the switch wire harness from the retainers as needed to remove the switch.

Figure 6-2137 Remove the switch

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2135

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2136 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Paper holding unit
Review the external finisher paper holding unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Front and rear paper holding sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher front and rear paper holding sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-290 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Front paper holding sensor)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Rear paper holding sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Paper holding unit 2137

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2138 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2139 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2138 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2140 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2141 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2139

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2142 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2143 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2140 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2144 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2145 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 2141

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2146 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

2142 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2147 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2148 Remove the caster

7 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2143

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2149 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2150 Release the cover

2144 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2151 Remove the cover

8 Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2152 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2145

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2153 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2154 Release the cover

2146 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2155 Remove the cover

9 Remove the external finisher front and rear paper holding sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front and rear paper holding
sensor.

1. Locate the desired sensor.

● Callout 1: Front paper holding sensor

● Callout 1: Rear paper holding sensor

Figure 6-2156 Locate the sensor

Remove the external finisher front and rear paper holding sensor 2147
 2. Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release two hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor as shown below (callout 3).

● Remove the front paper holding sensor.

NOTE: Repeat this step to remove the rear paper holding sensor if necessary

Figure 6-2157 Remove the sensor

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

2148 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2149

 Removal and replacement: Paper holding home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher paper holding home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-291 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Paper holding home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2150 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2158 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2159 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Remove the external finisher front door 2151

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2160 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2161 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2152 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2162 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2163 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

Remove the external finisher front cover 2153

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2164 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2165 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2154 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2166 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

Remove the external finisher caster 2155

 Figure 6-2167 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2168 Remove the caster

7 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

2156 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2169 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2170 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2157

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2171 Remove the cover

8 Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2172 Lower the tray

2158 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2173 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2174 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2159

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2175 Remove the cover

9 Remove the external finisher paper holding home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paper holding home sensor.

■ Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release two hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor as shown below (callout 3).

● Remove the paper holding home sensor.

2160 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2176 Remove the sensor

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2161

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2162 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Paper holding motor drive assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher paper holding motor drive assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-292 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01414A Paper holding motor drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding motor drive assembly 2163

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2177 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2178 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2164 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2179 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2180 Remove the door

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2165

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2181 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2182 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front cover.

2166 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2183 Remove the knob

2. Remove five screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 6-2184 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 2167

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2185 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher caster

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster.

WARNING! The external finisher is not stable when one or more casters are removed and can easily
tip over. To avoid personal injury or damage to the finisher, make sure to fully support the finisher when
removing a caster.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

2. Remove one fix nut.

NOTE: Use a 12mm spanner wrench to remove the nut.

2168 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2186 Remove the nut

3. Rotate the caster as shown below to remove it. Repeat these steps for the remaining casters as
needed.

Figure 6-2187 Remove the caster

7 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2169

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2188 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2189 Release the cover

2170 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2190 Remove the cover

8 Remove the external finisher left upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left upper cover.

1. Bring the main output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 6-2191 Lower the tray

Remove the external finisher left upper cover 2171

 2. Remove six screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2192 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2193 Release the cover

2172 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the left upper cover.

Figure 6-2194 Remove the cover

9 Remove the external finisher paper holding motor drive assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher paper holding motor drive
assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2195 Remove two screws

Remove the external finisher paper holding motor drive assembly 2173
 2. Disconnect one connector, release the wire harness from the retainer. and then remove the paper
holding motor drive assembly.

Figure 6-2196 Remove the assembly

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2174 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2175

 Buffer unit
Review the external finisher buffer unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Buffer solenoid assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher buffer solenoid assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-293 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01675A Buffer solenoid assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2176 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2197 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2198 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher right upper cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher right upper cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher right upper cover 2177

 2. Remove six screws, and then remove the right upper cover.

Figure 6-2199 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2200 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

2178 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2201 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher exit motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor assembly.

Figure 6-2202 Remove the assembly

5 Remove the external finisher top jam cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top jam cover assembly.

Remove the external finisher exit motor assembly 2179

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2203 Remove two screws

2. Pull the top jam cover assembly out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2204 Remove the assembly

6 Remove the external finisher buffer solenoid assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher buffer solenoid assembly.

2180 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2205 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the buffer solenoid assembly.

NOTE: Release the wire harness as necessary to remove the solenoid assembly.

Figure 6-2206 Remove the assembly

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2181

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2182 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Buffer motor
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher buffer motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-294 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01152A Drive-motor step (Buffer motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Removal and replacement: Buffer motor 2183

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2207 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2208 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2184 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2209 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2210 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher buffer motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher buffer motor.

Remove the external finisher buffer motor 2185

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2211 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the buffer motor.

Figure 6-2212 Remove the motor

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2186 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet finisher (only)

Learn about booklet finisher (only) parts removal and replacement.

Booklet finisher (only) 2187

 Booklet maker
Review the booklet finisher booklet maker removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet maker

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-295 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00905A Booklet maker

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2188 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2213 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2214 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2189

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2215 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2216 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

2190 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2217 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2218 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2191

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2219 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2220 Release the alignment pin

2192 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2221 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2222 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2193

 Figure 6-2223 Remove the booklet maker

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2194 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

5 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2224 Position the hooks on the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2195

 2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2225 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2226 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

2196 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Figure 6-2227 Attach the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2197

 Removal and replacement: Harness guide
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher harness guide.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-296 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01477A Harness guide

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2198 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2228 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2229 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2199

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2230 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2231 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

2200 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2232 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2233 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2201

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2234 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2235 Release the alignment pin

2202 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2236 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2237 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2203

 Figure 6-2238 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the booklet finisher PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher PCA.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2239 Remove two screws

2204 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 6-2240 Remove one screw

3. Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the booklet
finisher PCA.

Figure 6-2241 Remove the PCA

5 Remove the booklet finisher harness guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher harness guide.

Remove the booklet finisher harness guide 2205

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-2242 Remove four screws

2. Release twelve retainers, and then remove the harness guide.

Figure 6-2243 Remove the guide

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2206 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2207

 1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2244 Position the hooks on the rail

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2245 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

2208 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2246 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Figure 6-2247 Attach the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2209

 Booklet entrance unit
Review the booklet finisher booklet entrance unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance unit

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher entrance unit.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-297 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW51-60102 Booklet entrance unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2210 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2248 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2249 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2211

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2250 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2251 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

2212 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2252 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2253 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2213

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2254 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2255 Release the alignment pin

2214 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2256 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2257 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2215

 Figure 6-2258 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2259 Remove the cover

2216 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance unit
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher entrance unit.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2260 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2261 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance unit 2217

 3. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2262 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove the booklet entrance unit.

CAUTION: The spring and holder on the entrance unit are not captive. Do not lose them when
handling the unit.

Figure 6-2263 Remove the unit

2218 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Reinstall step: Make sure that the spring on the unit is correctly positioned on the chassis of the
booklet maker.

Figure 6-2264 Reinstall the unit

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2219

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2265 Position the hooks on the rail

2220 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2266 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2267 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2221

 Figure 6-2268 Attach the rail

2222 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher entrance sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-298 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Booklet entrance sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance sensor 2223

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2269 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2270 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2224 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2271 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2272 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2225

 1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2273 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2274 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2226 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2275 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2276 Release the alignment pin

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2227

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2277 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2278 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

2228 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2279 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2280 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2229

 5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance unit
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher entrance unit.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2281 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2282 Remove two screws

2230 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2283 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove the booklet entrance unit.

CAUTION: The spring and holder on the entrance unit are not captive. Do not lose them when
handling the unit.

Figure 6-2284 Remove the unit

Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance unit 2231

 5. Reinstall step: Make sure that the spring on the unit is correctly positioned on the chassis of the
booklet maker.

Figure 6-2285 Reinstall the unit

6 Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher entrance sensor.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the entrance actuator cover.

Figure 6-2286 Remove the cover

2232 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
entrance sensor (callout 3).

Figure 6-2287 Remove the sensor

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2233

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

8 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2288 Position the hooks on the rail

2234 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2289 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2290 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2235

 Figure 6-2291 Attach the rail

2236 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher entrance-presser motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-299 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01425A Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly 2237

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2292 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2293 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

2238 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2294 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance-presser motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher entrance-presser motor
assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the booklet entrance-presser
motor assembly.

Figure 6-2295 Remove the assembly

Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance-presser motor assembly 2239

 4 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2240 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance motor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher entrance motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-300 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01152A Drive-motor step (Booklet entrance motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance motor 2241

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2296 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2297 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2242 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2298 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2299 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2243

 1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2300 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2301 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2244 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2302 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2303 Release the alignment pin

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2245

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2304 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2305 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

2246 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2306 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2307 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2247

 5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance motor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher entrance motor.

■ Disconnect one connector. remove two screws, and then remove the entrance motor.

Figure 6-2308 Remove the motor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2248 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2309 Position the hooks on the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2249

 2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2310 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2311 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

2250 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Figure 6-2312 Attach the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2251

 Booklet paddle unit
Review the booklet finisher booklet paddle unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher paddle home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-301 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Booklet paddle home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2252 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2313 Remove the cover

2 Remove the booklet finisher booklet paddle home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher paddle home sensor.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2314 Disconnect one connector

Remove the booklet finisher booklet paddle home sensor 2253

 2. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the booklet paddle home sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-2315 Remove the sensor

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2254 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2255

 Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher paddle motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-302 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01430A Booklet paddle motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

2256 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2316 Remove the cover

2 Remove the booklet finisher booklet paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher paddle motor assembly.

1. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-2317 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the booklet finisher booklet paddle motor assembly 2257

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring.

Figure 6-2318 Remove the e-ring

3. Remove the belt and gear.

Figure 6-2319 Remove the belt and gear

2258 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove four screws, and then remove the booklet paddle motor assembly.

Figure 6-2320 Remove the assembly

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2259

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2260 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle motor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher paddle motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-303 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Booklet paddle motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle motor 2261

 c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2321 Remove the cover

2 Remove the booklet finisher booklet paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher paddle motor assembly.

1. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-2322 Disconnect two connectors

2262 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring.

Figure 6-2323 Remove the e-ring

3. Remove the belt and gear.

Figure 6-2324 Remove the belt and gear

Remove the booklet finisher booklet paddle motor assembly 2263

 4. Remove four screws, and then remove the booklet paddle motor assembly.

Figure 6-2325 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet paddle motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher paddle motor.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the booklet paddle motor.

Figure 6-2326 Remove the motor

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2264 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2265

 Booklet end fence unit
Review the booklet finisher booklet end fence unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher end fence home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-304 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Booklet end fence home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2266 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2327 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2328 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2267

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2329 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2330 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

2268 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2331 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2332 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2269

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2333 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2334 Release the alignment pin

2270 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2335 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2336 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2271

 Figure 6-2337 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2338 Remove the cover

2272 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet end fence home sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher end fence home sensor.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2339 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the shield-r lower.

Figure 6-2340 Remove the shield

Remove the booklet finisher booklet end fence home sensor 2273
 3. Move the upper jam guide out of the way.

Figure 6-2341 Move the guide

4. Lift up the booklet end fence.

Figure 6-2342 Lift the fence

2274 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the booklet end fence home sensor (callout
2).

Figure 6-2343 Remove the sensor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2275

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2344 Position the hooks on the rail

2276 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2345 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2346 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2277

 Figure 6-2347 Attach the rail

2278 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence motor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher end fence motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-305 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01155A Drive-motor step (Booklet end fence motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence motor 2279

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2348 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2349 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2280 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2350 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2351 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2281

 1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2352 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2353 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2282 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2354 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2355 Release the alignment pin

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2283

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2356 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2357 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

2284 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2358 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2359 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2285

 5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet end fence motor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher end fence motor.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2360 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the shield-r lower.

Figure 6-2361 Remove the shield

2286 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
end fence motor.

Figure 6-2362 Remove the motor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2287

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2363 Position the hooks on the rail

2288 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2364 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2365 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2289

 Figure 6-2366 Attach the rail

2290 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Booklet presser unit
Review the booklet finisher booklet presser unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher presser home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-306 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Booklet presser home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Booklet presser unit 2291

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2367 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2368 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

2292 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2369 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance-presser motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher entrance-presser motor
assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the booklet entrance-presser
motor assembly.

Figure 6-2370 Remove the assembly

Remove the booklet finisher booklet entrance-presser motor assembly 2293

 4 Remove the booklet finisher booklet presser home sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher presser home sensor.

■ Do the following:

● Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

● Release the hooks (callout 2).

● Slide the sensor assembly as shown below (callout 3).

● Remove the booklet presser home sensor from the bracket.

Figure 6-2371 Remove the sensor

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

2294 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2295

 Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher tamper.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-307 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01431A Booklet tamper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2296 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2372 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2373 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2297

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2374 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2375 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

2298 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2376 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2377 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2299

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2378 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2379 Release the alignment pin

2300 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2380 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2381 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2301

 Figure 6-2382 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2383 Remove the cover

2302 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher tamper.

1. Remove four screws and the sheet-metal plate.

Figure 6-2384 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2385 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper 2303

 3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2386 Remove two screws

4. Remove three screws and the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 6-2387 Remove three screws

2304 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2388 Remove two screws

6. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2389 Disconnect one connector

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper 2305

 7. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2390 Disconnect one connector

8. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2391 Remove two screws

2306 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

9. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2392 Remove three screws

10. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2393 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper 2307

 11. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2394 Remove two screws

12. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2395 Disconnect one connector

2308 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 13. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-2396 Disconnect connector and remove screws

14. Remove the booklet tamper.

Figure 6-2397 Remove the tamper

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2309

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

2310 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2398 Position the hooks on the rail

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2399 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2311

 3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2400 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Figure 6-2401 Attach the rail

2312 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher tamper home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-308 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Booklet tamper home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper home sensor 2313

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2402 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2403 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2314 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2404 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2405 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2315

 1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2406 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2407 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2316 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2408 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2409 Release the alignment pin

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2317

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2410 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2411 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

2318 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2412 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2413 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2319

 5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper home sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher tamper home sensor.

1. Remove four screws and the sheet-metal plate.

Figure 6-2414 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2415 Remove two screws

2320 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2416 Remove two screws

4. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2417 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper home sensor 2321

 5. Remove three screws and the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 6-2418 Remove three screws

6. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2419 Remove two screws

2322 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

7. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2420 Disconnect one connector

8. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2421 Disconnect one connector

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper home sensor 2323

 9. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2422 Remove two screws

10. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2423 Remove three screws

2324 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

11. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2424 Remove two screws

12. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2425 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper home sensor 2325

 13. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2426 Disconnect one connector

14. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-2427 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2326 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 15. Remove four screws (callout 1), remove the cover, and then remove the booklet tamper home
sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-2428 Remove the sensor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2327

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2429 Position the hooks on the rail

2328 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2430 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2431 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2329

 Figure 6-2432 Attach the rail

2330 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper motor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher tamper motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-309 Part information

Part number Part description

5QJ90-40126 Booklet tamper motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper motor 2331

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2433 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2434 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2332 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2435 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2436 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2333

 1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2437 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2438 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2334 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2439 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2440 Release the alignment pin

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2335

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2441 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2442 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

2336 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2443 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2444 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2337

 5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper motor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher tamper motor.

1. Remove four screws and the sheet-metal plate.

Figure 6-2445 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2446 Remove two screws

2338 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2447 Remove two screws

4. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2448 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper motor 2339

 5. Remove three screws and the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 6-2449 Remove three screws

6. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2450 Remove two screws

2340 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

7. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2451 Disconnect one connector

8. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2452 Disconnect one connector

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper motor 2341

 9. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2453 Remove two screws

10. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2454 Remove three screws

2342 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

11. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2455 Remove two screws

12. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2456 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper motor 2343

 13. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2457 Disconnect one connector

14. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-2458 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2344 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 15. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
tamper motor.

Figure 6-2459 Remove the motor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2345

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2460 Position the hooks on the rail

2346 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2461 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2462 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2347

 Figure 6-2463 Attach the rail

2348 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher tamper sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-310 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Sensor-RP (Booklet tamper sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper sensor 2349

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2464 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2465 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2350 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2466 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2467 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2351

 1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2468 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2469 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2352 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2470 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2471 Release the alignment pin

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2353

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2472 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2473 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

2354 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2474 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2475 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2355

 5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher tamper sensor.

1. Remove four screws and the sheet-metal plate.

Figure 6-2476 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2477 Remove two screws

2356 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2478 Remove two screws

4. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2479 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper sensor 2357

 5. Remove three screws and the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 6-2480 Remove three screws

6. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2481 Remove two screws

2358 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

7. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2482 Disconnect one connector

8. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2483 Disconnect one connector

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper sensor 2359

 9. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2484 Remove two screws

10. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2485 Remove three screws

2360 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

11. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2486 Remove two screws

12. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2487 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper sensor 2361

 13. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2488 Disconnect one connector

14. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 6-2489 Disconnect connector and remove screws

2362 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 15. Remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 6-2490 Remove the cover

16. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
tamper sensor (callout 3).

Figure 6-2491 Remove the sensor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2363

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

2364 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2492 Position the hooks on the rail

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2493 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2365

 3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2494 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Figure 6-2495 Attach the rail

2366 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Booklet stapler unit
Review the booklet finisher booklet stapler unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet stapler

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher stapler.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-311 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW51-40001 Booklet stapler

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Booklet stapler unit 2367

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2496 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2497 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2368 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2498 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2499 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2369

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2500 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2501 Remove the cover

4 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

2370 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2502 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2503 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2371

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2504 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2505 Release the alignment pin

2372 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2506 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2507 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2373

 Figure 6-2508 Remove the booklet maker

5 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2509 Remove the cover

2374 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

6 Remove the booklet finisher booklet staple cartridge
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet staple cartridge.

1. Open the front door, and then pull the booklet maker out.

2. Remove the booklet staple cartridge.

NOTE: Repeat this step for the remaining cartridge.

Figure 6-2510 Remove the cartridge

7 Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet staple cartridge 2375

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
diverter motor assembly.

Figure 6-2511 Remove the assembly

8 Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher c-fold blade assembly.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the c-fold blade assembly.

Figure 6-2512 Remove the assembly

9 Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher tamper sensor.

2376 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws and the sheet-metal plate.

NOTE: The c-fold blade assembly is shown installed in the figure below. How ever it was remove in
the previous step.

Figure 6-2513 Remove four screws

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-2514 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper sensor 2377

 3. Remove the black-plastic cover.

Figure 6-2515 Remove the cover

4. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2516 Disconnect one connector

2378 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2517 Remove five screws

6. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2518 Disconnect one connector

Remove the booklet finisher booklet tamper sensor 2379

 7. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-2519 Disconnect two connectors

8. Remove six screws, and then remove the booklet stapler.

Figure 6-2520 Remove the stapler

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2380 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

11 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2381

 1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2521 Position the hooks on the rail

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2522 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

2382 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2523 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Figure 6-2524 Attach the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2383

 Removal and replacement: Booklet staple cartridge
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher staple cartridge.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-312 Part information

Part number Part description

JC81-09881B Booklet staple cartridge

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the booklet finisher booklet staple cartridge

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet staple cartridge.

1. Open the front door, and then pull the booklet maker out.

2. Remove the booklet staple cartridge.

NOTE: Repeat this step for the remaining cartridge.

2384 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2525 Remove the cartridge

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2385

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2386 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Booklet fold unit
Review the booklet finisher booklet fold unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher c-fold blade assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-313 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01438A Booklet c-fold blade assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Booklet fold unit 2387

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2526 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2527 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2388 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2528 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2529 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2389

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2530 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2531 Remove the cover

4 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

2390 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2532 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2533 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2391

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2534 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2535 Release the alignment pin

2392 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2536 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2537 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2393

 Figure 6-2538 Remove the booklet maker

5 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2539 Remove the cover

2394 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

6 Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
diverter motor assembly.

Figure 6-2540 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher c-fold blade assembly.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the c-fold blade assembly.

Figure 6-2541 Remove the assembly

Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly 2395

 8 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

9 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

2396 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2542 Position the hooks on the rail

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2543 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2397

 3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2544 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Figure 6-2545 Attach the rail

2398 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher c-fold blade home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-314 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Booklet c-fold blade home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade home sensor 2399

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2546 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2547 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

2400 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2548 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher c-fold blade motor assembly.

1. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-2549 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade motor assembly 2401
 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-2550 Remove four screws

3. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring (callout 1), remove the gear (callout 2), and then release
the belt (callout 3).

Figure 6-2551 Release the belt

4. Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor assembly.

CAUTION: Do not pull on the shaft (callout 1) while removing the bracket and motor. The shaft
might become dislodged at the other end. If the shaft becomes dislodged, remove the booklet
finisher PCA shield and PCA bracket to reinstall the shaft.

2402 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2552 Remove the assembly

4 Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher c-fold blade home sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove the c-fold blade home sensor.

Figure 6-2553 Remove the sensor

Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade home sensor 2403
 5 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2404 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher c-fold blade motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-315 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01396A Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly 2405

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2554 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2555 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

2406 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2556 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher c-fold blade motor assembly.

1. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-2557 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade motor assembly 2407
 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-2558 Remove four screws

3. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring (callout 1), remove the gear (callout 2), and then release
the belt (callout 3).

Figure 6-2559 Release the belt

4. Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor assembly.

CAUTION: Do not pull on the shaft (callout 1) while removing the bracket and motor. The shaft
might become dislodged at the other end. If the shaft becomes dislodged, remove the booklet
finisher PCA shield and PCA bracket to reinstall the shaft.

2408 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2560 Remove the assembly

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2409

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2410 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher c-fold blade motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-316 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01154A Drive-motor step (Booklet c-fold blade motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor 2411

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2561 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2562 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

2412 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2563 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher c-fold blade motor assembly.

1. Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-2564 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade motor assembly 2413
 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-2565 Remove four screws

3. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring (callout 1), remove the gear (callout 2), and then release
the belt (callout 3).

Figure 6-2566 Release the belt

4. Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor assembly.

CAUTION: Do not pull on the shaft (callout 1) while removing the bracket and motor. The shaft
might become dislodged at the other end. If the shaft becomes dislodged, remove the booklet
finisher PCA shield and PCA bracket to reinstall the shaft.

2414 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2567 Remove the assembly

4 Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher c-fold blade motor.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the booklet c-fold blade motor.

Figure 6-2568 Remove the motor

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade motor 2415

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2416 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet blade home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher blade home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-317 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Booklet booklet blade home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet blade home sensor 2417

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2569 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2570 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2418 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2571 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2572 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2419

 1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2573 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2574 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2420 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2575 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2576 Release the alignment pin

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2421

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2577 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2578 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

2422 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2579 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2580 Remove the cover

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2423

 5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet blade home sensor
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet blade home sensor.

1. Remove four screws and the sheet-metal plate.

Figure 6-2581 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2582 Remove two screws

2424 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2583 Remove two screws

4. Remove three screws and the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 6-2584 Remove three screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet blade home sensor 2425

 5. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2585 Remove two screws

6. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2586 Disconnect one connector

2426 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

7. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2587 Disconnect one connector

8. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2588 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher booklet blade home sensor 2427

 9. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2589 Remove three screws

10. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2590 Remove two screws

2428 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

11. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2591 Remove two screws

12. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2592 Disconnect one connector

Remove the booklet finisher booklet blade home sensor 2429

 13. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the booklet blade home sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-2593 Remove the sensor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2430 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2594 Position the hooks on the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2431

 2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2595 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2596 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

2432 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Figure 6-2597 Attach the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2433

 Removal and replacement: Booklet blade motor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher blade motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-318 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00144A Motor BLDC (Booklet booklet blade motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2434 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2598 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2599 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2435

 2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2600 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet blade motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher blade motor.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2601 Remove two screws

2436 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2602 Remove two screws

3. Remove the right lower plate.

Figure 6-2603 Remove the plate

Remove the booklet finisher booklet blade motor 2437

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
blade motor.

Figure 6-2604 Remove the motor

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2438 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2439

 Removal and replacement: Booklet fold motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher fold motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-319 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01436A Booklet booklet fold motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2440 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2605 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2606 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2441

 2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2607 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet fold motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher fold motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then remove the booklet fold motor assembly.

Figure 6-2608 Remove the assembly

2442 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2443

 Removal and replacement: Booklet fold motor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher fold motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-320 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00144A Motor BLDC (Booklet booklet fold motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2444 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2609 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2610 Remove the cover

2 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2445

 2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2611 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet fold motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher fold motor.

2446 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
fold motor.

Figure 6-2612 Remove the motor

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2447

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2448 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Booklet diverter unit
Review the booklet finisher booklet diverter unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher diverter.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-321 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01398A Booklet diverter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Booklet diverter unit 2449

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2613 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2614 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2450 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2615 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2616 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2451

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2617 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2618 Remove the cover

4 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

2452 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2619 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2620 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2453

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2621 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2622 Release the alignment pin

2454 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2623 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2624 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2455

 Figure 6-2625 Remove the booklet maker

5 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2626 Remove the cover

2456 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

6 Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
diverter motor assembly.

Figure 6-2627 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the booklet finisher booklet c-fold blade assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher c-fold blade assembly.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the c-fold blade assembly.

Figure 6-2628 Remove the assembly

Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly 2457

 8 Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet diverter.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2629 Remove two screws

2. Remove one screw and the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 6-2630 Remove one screw

2458 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-2631 Remove one screw

4. Remove the connector cover, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2632 Disconnect one connector

Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter 2459

 5. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2633 Remove two screws

6. Remove the white-plastic bushing.

Figure 6-2634 Remove the bushing

2460 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

7. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring (callout 1), and then remove the actuator (callout 2).

Figure 6-2635 Remove the actuator

8. Remove the white-plastic bushing.

Figure 6-2636 Remove the bushing

Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter 2461

 9. Remove the booklet diverter.

Figure 6-2637 Remove the diverter

9 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2462 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

10 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2638 Position the hooks on the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2463

 2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2639 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2640 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

2464 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Figure 6-2641 Attach the rail

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2465

 Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher diverter home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-322 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Booklet booklet diverter home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2466 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2642 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2643 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2467

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2644 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2645 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

2468 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2646 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2647 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover 2469

 b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2648 Remove the cover

5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
diverter motor assembly.

Figure 6-2649 Remove the assembly

6 Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet diverter home sensor.

2470 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the booklet diverter home sensor.

Figure 6-2650 Remove the sensor

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2471

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2472 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher diverter motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-323 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01397A Booklet diverter motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor assembly 2473

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2651 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2652 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2474 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2653 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2654 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2475

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2655 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2656 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

2476 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2657 Remove the cover

5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
diverter motor assembly.

Figure 6-2658 Remove the assembly

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor assembly 2477

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2478 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher diverter motor.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-324 Part information

Part number Part description

JC81-09881B Booklet diverter motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor 2479

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2659 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2660 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2480 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2661 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2662 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2481

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2663 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2664 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher booklet finisher front cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher booklet finisher front cover.

1. Open the front door.

2. Do the following:

a. Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1).

2482 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 b. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to
remove it (callout 3).

c. Remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.

Figure 6-2665 Remove the cover

5 Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
diverter motor.

Figure 6-2666 Remove the motor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the booklet finisher booklet diverter motor 2483

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2484 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Booklet output tray unit
Review the booklet finisher booklet output tray unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher output tray.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-325 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60126 Booklet output tray

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the booklet finisher booklet output tray

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet output tray.

Booklet output tray unit 2485

 ■ Rotate the front of the tray up, and then pull it away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 6-2667 Remove the tray

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2486 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2487

 Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher output tray sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-326 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A Tray sensor kit (Booklet output tray sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2488 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2668 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2669 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2489

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2670 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2671 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2490 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2672 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2673 Remove the cover

4 Remove the external finisher front lower left cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front lower left cover.

1. Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Remove the external finisher front lower left cover 2491

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the front lower left cover.

Figure 6-2674 Remove the cover

5 Remove the external finisher caster cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher caster cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the caster cover.

Figure 6-2675 Remove the cover

6 Remove the external finisher left lower cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher left lower cover.

2492 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2676 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
cover.

Reinstallation tip: Position the cover under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 6-2677 Release the cover

Remove the external finisher left lower cover 2493

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the left lower cover.

Figure 6-2678 Remove the cover

7 Remove the booklet finisher booklet output tray sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet output tray sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the booklet output tray sensor (callout 2).

NOTE: Repeat this step for the remaining sensor (callout 3) if necessary.

Figure 6-2679 Remove the sensor

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2494 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2495

 PCA
Review the booklet finisher PCA removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Main PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher main PCA.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-327 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW55-60001 Booklet maker main PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2496 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2680 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2681 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher top cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher top cover.

Remove the external finisher top cover 2497

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2682 Remove three screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the top cover.

Figure 6-2683 Remove the cover

3 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

2498 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2684 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2685 Remove the cover

4 Remove the booklet finisher main PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher main PCA.

Remove the booklet finisher main PCA 2499

 ■ Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the booklet finisher
PCA.

Figure 6-2686 Remove the PCA

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2500 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2501

 Removal and replacement: PCA
Learn about removing and replacing the booklet finisher PCA.

NOTE: Remove the external finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-328 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW51-60001 Booklet maker PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher front door

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher front door.

2502 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Release, and then remove the upper hinge pin.

Figure 6-2687 Remove the hinge pin

2. Support the door, release and remove the lower hinge pin, and then remove the front door

Figure 6-2688 Remove the door

2 Remove the external finisher rear cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher rear cover.

Remove the external finisher rear cover 2503

 1. Remove five screws.

Figure 6-2689 Remove five screws

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Thread the power cord through the hole in the cover as it is removed (callout 1).

Figure 6-2690 Remove the cover

3 Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher booklet maker.

2504 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher.

Figure 6-2691 Slide the booklet maker out

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 6-2692 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2505

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet-metal.

Figure 6-2693 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2).

Figure 6-2694 Release the alignment pin

2506 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 6-2695 Slide the rail in

6. Remove one screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 6-2696 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while pulling the right rail away from the finisher chassis to
clear the sheet-metal. Remove the booklet maker unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to use the special installation instructions in this topic (located after the
unpack and recycle step).

Remove the booklet finisher booklet maker 2507

 Figure 6-2697 Remove the booklet maker

4 Remove the booklet finisher PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the booklet finisher PCA.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 6-2698 Remove two screws

2508 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 6-2699 Remove one screw

3. Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the booklet
finisher PCA.

Figure 6-2700 Remove the PCA

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2509

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

6 Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker

Use the following procedure to install the booklet finisher booklet maker.

NOTE: Use the special installation instructions to correctly install the booklet maker.

2510 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 6-2701 Position the hooks on the rail

2. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2702 Check rail alignment (1 of 2)

Special installation instructions: booklet finisher booklet maker 2511

 3. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail (callout 1).

Figure 6-2703 Check rail alignment (2 of 2)

4. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

NOTE: Continue the installation by reversing the removal steps.

Figure 6-2704 Attach the rail

Miscellaneous parts
Review the booklet finisher miscellaneous parts removal procedures.

2512 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Finisher mounting brackets
Learn about removing and replacing the external finisher mounting brackets.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-329 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01442A Finisher mount bracket

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the external finisher mounting brackets

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the external finisher mounting brackets.

Removal and replacement: Finisher mounting brackets 2513

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the external finisher mounting brackets.

Figure 6-2705 Remove the brackets

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2514 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Inner finisher
Learn about inner finisher parts removal and replacement.

Inner finisher 2515

 Whole unit and rail
Review the inner finisher whole unit and rail removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Inner finisher

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-330 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW49-67002 Inner finisher

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher.

2516 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2706 Disconnect one connector

2. Open the front cover, and then pull the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2707 Pull the handle

3. Do the following:

● Partially slide the inner finisher away from the printer.

● Release two locks on the slide rails.

● Slide the inner finisher completely off of the printer to remove it.

Remove the inner finisher 2517

 Figure 6-2708 Remove the unit

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2518 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2519

 Removal and replacement: Guide rails
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher guide rails.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher form the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-331 Part information

Part number Part description

6102-003354 Guide rail

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher.

2520 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2709 Disconnect one connector

2. Open the front cover, and then pull the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2710 Pull the handle

3. Do the following:

● Partially slide the inner finisher away from the printer.

● Release two locks on the slide rails.

● Slide the inner finisher completely off of the printer to remove it.

Remove the inner finisher 2521

 Figure 6-2711 Remove the unit

2 Remove the inner finisher guide rails

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher guide rails.

■ Remove six screws, and then remove the inner finisher guide rails.

Figure 6-2712 Remove the guide rails

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

2522 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2523

 Cover
Review the inner finisher cover removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Front cover assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher front cover assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-332 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60123 Front cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

2524 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2713 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2714 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2525

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2715 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2716 Remove the cover

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2526 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2527

 Removal and replacement: Top cover assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher top cover assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-333 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60125 Top cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2528 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2717 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2718 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2529

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2719 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2720 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2530 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2721 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2722 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2531

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2723 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-2724 Remove the cover

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2532 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2533

 Removal and replacement: Middle cover assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-334 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60124 Middle cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2534 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2725 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2726 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2535

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2727 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2728 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2536 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2729 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2730 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2537

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2731 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-2732 Remove the cover

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2538 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2539

 Removal and replacement: Punch cover assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-335 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60114 Punch cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2540 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2733 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-2734 Rotate the punch

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly 2541

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2735 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-2736 Remove the assembly

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2542 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2543

 Removal and replacement: Output tray assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher output tray assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-336 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60118 Output tray assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray assembly.

2544 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-2737 Remove four screws

2. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-2738 Open the cover

Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly 2545

 3. Press the paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-2739 Press the actuator

4. Lift up on the inner finisher output tray to remove it.

Figure 6-2740 Remove the tray

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2546 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2547

 Removal and replacement: PCA cover
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher PCA cover.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-337 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40004 PCA cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher PCA cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher PCA cover.

2548 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Lift up the inner finisher, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-2741 Remove two screws

2. Remove the inner finisher PCA cover.

Figure 6-2742 Remove the cover

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2549

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2550 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Finisher sub stay assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-338 Part information

Part number Part description

8GS05-60113 Finisher sub stay assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Removal and replacement: Finisher sub stay assembly 2551

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2743 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2744 Remove the handle

2552 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2745 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2746 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover 2553

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2747 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2748 Remove three screws

2554 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2749 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray assembly.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-2750 Remove four screws

Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly 2555

 2. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-2751 Open the cover

3. Press the paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-2752 Press the actuator

2556 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Lift up on the inner finisher output tray to remove it.

Figure 6-2753 Remove the tray

5 Remove the output tray frame

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray frame.

1. Rotate the output tray gear.

Figure 6-2754 Rotate the gear

Remove the output tray frame 2557

 2. Press the paper holding actuator, and then lift the inner finisher output tray frame up to remove it.

Figure 6-2755 Remove the frame

6 Remove the finisher sub stay assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2756 Remove two screws

2558 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2757 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2758 Remove two screws

Remove the finisher sub stay assembly 2559

 4. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

Figure 6-2759 Remove the assembly

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2560 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2561

 Removal and replacement: Rear cover - base
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher rear base cover.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-339 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40018 Rear base cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2562 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2760 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2761 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2563

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2762 Remove the cover

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2564 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2565

 Removal and replacement: Rear cover - punch
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher rear punch cover.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-340 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-40037 Rear punch cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2566 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2763 Remove the cover

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2567

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2568 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Lock release handle
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher lock release handle.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-341 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-04233A Lock release handle

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

Removal and replacement: Lock release handle 2569

 ■ Open the front door, remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2764 Remove the handle

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2570 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2571

 Removal and replacement: Main interface harness
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher main interface harness.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher form the printer.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-342 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02169A Main interface harness

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2572 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2765 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2766 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2573

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2767 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2768 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2574 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2769 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2770 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2575

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2771 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray assembly.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-2772 Remove four screws

2576 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-2773 Open the cover

3. Press the paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-2774 Press the actuator

Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly 2577

 4. Lift up on the inner finisher output tray to remove it.

Figure 6-2775 Remove the tray

5 Remove the output tray frame

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray frame.

1. Rotate the output tray gear.

Figure 6-2776 Rotate the gear

2578 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Press the paper holding actuator, and then lift the inner finisher output tray frame up to remove it.

Figure 6-2777 Remove the frame

6 Remove the finisher sub stay assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2778 Remove two screws

Remove the finisher sub stay assembly 2579

 2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2779 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-2780 Remove two screws

2580 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

Figure 6-2781 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the main interface harness

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher main interface harness.

■ Remove one screw, disconnect one connector, and then remove the inner finishermain interface
harness.

NOTE: Release wire harness retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-2782 Remove the harness

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the main interface harness 2581

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2582 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Exit bin full
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher exit bin full.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-343 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01546A Exit bin full

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher exit bin full

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher exit bin full.

Removal and replacement: Exit bin full 2583

 1. Disconnect one connector, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-2783 Disconnect connector and remove the screw

2. Slide the inner finisher exit bin full as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2784 Remove the assembly

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2584 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2585

 Punch unit
Review the inner finisher punch unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Hole punch

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher hole punch.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-344 Part information

Part number Part description

155P7-67001 Hole 2/3 punch

8GS05-60133 Hole 2/4 punch

8GS05-60134 Swedish punch

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2586 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2785 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher hole punch

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher hole punch.

1. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2786 Disconnect one connector

Remove the inner finisher hole punch 2587

 2. Open the door.

Figure 6-2787 Open the door

3. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-2788 Rotate the punch

2588 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

4. Release the retainer pin.

Figure 6-2789 Release the pin

5. Remove the hinge shaft.

Figure 6-2790 Remove the shaft

Remove the inner finisher hole punch 2589

 6. Lift up on the end of the inner finisher hole punch (callout 1), and then slide it as shown below
(callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 6-2791 Remove the punch

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2590 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2591

 Removal and replacement: Punch waste full sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher punch waste full.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-345 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Punch waste full sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2592 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2792 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2793 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2593

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2794 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-2795 Rotate the punch

2594 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2796 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-2797 Remove the assembly

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2595

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2798 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2799 Remove the handle

2596 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2800 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2801 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly 2597

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-2802 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-2803 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2598 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-2804 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-2805 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher punch waste full sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch waste full sensor.

Remove the inner finisher punch waste full sensor 2599

 1. Remove six screws.

Figure 6-2806 Remove six screws

2. Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the punch waste full sensor.

Figure 6-2807 Remove the sensor

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2600 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2601

 Entrance unit
Review the inner finisher entrance unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Entrance sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher entrance sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-346 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Entrance sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2602 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2808 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-2809 Rotate the punch

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly 2603

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2810 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-2811 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher entrance sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher entrance sensor.

2604 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-2812 Remove one screw

2. Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then separate the inner finisher entrance
sensor from the mounting bracket to remove it.

Figure 6-2813 Remove the sensor

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2605

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2606 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher entrance motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-347 Part information

Part number Part description

5QK09-60128 Entrance motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor assembly 2607

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2814 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-2815 Rotate the punch

2608 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2816 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-2817 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2609

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2818 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2819 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2610 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2820 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2821 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2611

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2822 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2823 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

2612 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-2824 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-2825 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the inner finisher middle roller 2613

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-2826 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-2827 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle lower guide.

2614 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove six screws, and then remove the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Figure 6-2828 Remove the guide

8 Remove the inner finisher entrance motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher entrance motor assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector.

NOTE: Release the wire harness from the retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-2829 Disconnect one connector

Remove the inner finisher entrance motor assembly 2615

 2. Remove the belt, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher entrance motor assembly.

Figure 6-2830 Remove the assembly

9 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2616 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2617

 Removal and replacement: Entrance motor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher entrance motor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-348 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00169B Motor, step (Entrance motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2618 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2831 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-2832 Rotate the punch

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly 2619

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2833 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-2834 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2620 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2835 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2836 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2621

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2837 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2838 Remove the handle

2622 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2839 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2840 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly 2623

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-2841 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-2842 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2624 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-2843 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-2844 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide 2625

 ■ Remove six screws, and then remove the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Figure 6-2845 Remove the guide

8 Remove the inner finisher entrance motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher entrance motor.

1. Disconnect one connector.

NOTE: Release the wire harness from the retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-2846 Disconnect one connector

2626 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove the belt, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher entrance motor.

Figure 6-2847 Remove the motor

9 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2627

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2628 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor timing belt
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher entrance motor timing belt.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-349 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00169B Entrance motor timing belt

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor timing belt 2629

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2848 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-2849 Rotate the punch

2630 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2850 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-2851 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2631

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2852 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2853 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher entrance motor timing belt

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher entrance motor timing belt.

■ Remove the inner finisher entrance motor timing belt.

NOTE: To begin, slip the belt off of the lower most gear when removing the belt.

2632 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2854 Remove the belt

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2633

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2634 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Entrance roller
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher entrance roller.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-350 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-04243A Entrance roller

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Entrance roller 2635

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2855 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-2856 Rotate the punch

2636 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2857 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-2858 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2637

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2859 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2860 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2638 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2861 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2862 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2639

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2863 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2864 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

2640 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-2865 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-2866 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the inner finisher middle roller 2641

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-2867 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-2868 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle lower guide.

2642 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove six screws, and then remove the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Figure 6-2869 Remove the guide

8 Remove the inner finisher entrance roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher entrance roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the gear, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-2870 Remove the e-ring, gear, and bushing

Remove the inner finisher entrance roller 2643

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-2871 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher entrance roller.

Figure 6-2872 Remove the roller

9 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2644 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2645

 Removal and replacement: Middle roller
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher middle roller.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-351 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-04243A Middle roller

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2646 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2873 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2874 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2647

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2875 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2876 Open the punch cover

2648 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2877 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2878 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2649

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2879 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-2880 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

2650 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-2881 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-2882 Remove the e-ring and bushing

Remove the inner finisher middle roller 2651

 3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-2883 Remove the roller

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2652 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2653

 Exit unit
Review the inner finisher exit unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Exit roller assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher exit roller assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-352 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01330A Exit roller assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

2654 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2884 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2885 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2655

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2886 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2887 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2656 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2888 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2889 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2657

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2890 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-2891 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher sub paddle assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher sub paddle assembly.

2658 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-2892 Remove one screw

2. Do the following:

● Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring.

● Remove the gear, belt, and bushing.

● Remove the sub paddle assembly.

Figure 6-2893 Remove the assembly

6 Remove the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly.

Remove the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly 2659

 1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

● Open the punch cover.

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the inner
finisher main paddle motor assembly.

Figure 6-2894 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the inner finisher exit roller assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher exit roller assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Release the belt.

● Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring.

● Remove the gear, and then remove the bushing.

2660 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-2895 Remove the e-ring, gear, and bushing

2. Remove the inner finisher exit roller assembly.

Figure 6-2896 Remove the roller

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2661

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2662 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Exit sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher exit sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-353 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Exit sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Exit sensor 2663

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2897 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-2898 Rotate the punch

2664 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2899 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-2900 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2665

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2901 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2902 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2666 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2903 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2904 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2667

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2905 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2906 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

2668 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-2907 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-2908 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the inner finisher middle roller 2669

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-2909 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-2910 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher exit sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher exit sensor.

2670 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove six screws, and then raise the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-2911 Remove six screws

2. Do the following:

● Remove one screw.

● Disconnect one connector.

● Remove the inner finisher ext sensor.

Figure 6-2912 Remove the sensor

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2671

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2672 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Exit sensor actuator
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher exit sensor actuator.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-354 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-04199A Exit sensor actuator

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Exit sensor actuator 2673

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2913 Remove the cover

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-2914 Rotate the punch

2674 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-2915 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-2916 Remove the assembly

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2675

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2917 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2918 Remove the cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2676 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2919 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2920 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2677

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2921 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2922 Remove the cover

Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

2678 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-2923 Remove the cover

Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-2924 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the inner finisher middle roller 2679

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-2925 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-2926 Remove the roller

Remove the inner finisher exit sensor actuator

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher exit sensor actuator.

2680 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove six screws, and then raise the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-2927 Remove six screws

2. Remove the inner finisher exit sensor actuator.

Figure 6-2928 Remove the actuator

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2681

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2682 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Exit motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher exit motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-355 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01331A Exit motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor assembly 2683

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2929 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2930 Remove the handle

2684 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2931 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2932 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher exit motor assembly.

1. Open the punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher exit motor assembly 2685

 2. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher exit motor
assembly.

Figure 6-2933 Remove the motor

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2686 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2687

 Removal and replacement: Exit motor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher exit motor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-356 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00169B Motor, step (Exit motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2688 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2934 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2935 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2689

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2936 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2937 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher exit motor assembly.

1. Open the punch cover.

2690 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher exit motor
assembly.

Figure 6-2938 Remove the motor

3 Remove the inner finisher exit motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher exit motor.

■ Remove two screws, and then separate the inner finisher exit motor from the mounting bracket to
remove it.

Figure 6-2939 Remove the motor

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the inner finisher exit motor 2691

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2692 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Paper support unit
Review the inner finisher paper support unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Rear paper support

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher rear paper support.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-357 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01310A Rear paper support

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Paper support unit 2693

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2940 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2941 Remove three screws

2694 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2942 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2943 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2695

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2944 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2945 Remove three screws

2696 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2946 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-2947 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 2697

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-2948 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher rear paper support

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear paper support.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2949 Remove three screws

2698 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector, release three hooks, and then remove the inner finisher rear paper
support.

Figure 6-2950 Remove the support

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2699

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2700 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Paper support home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher paper support home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-358 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Paper support home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Paper support home sensor 2701

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2951 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2952 Remove three screws

2702 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2953 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2954 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2703

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2955 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2956 Remove three screws

2704 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2957 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-2958 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 2705

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-2959 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher rear paper support

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear paper support.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2960 Remove three screws

2706 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector, release three hooks, and then remove the inner finisher rear paper
support.

Figure 6-2961 Remove the support

7 Remove the inner finisher paper support home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper support home sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the inner finisher paper support home sensor.

Figure 6-2962 Remove the sensor

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the inner finisher paper support home sensor 2707

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2708 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Paper support motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher paper support motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-359 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01312A Paper support motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Paper support motor assembly 2709

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2963 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2964 Remove three screws

2710 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2965 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2966 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2711

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2967 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2968 Remove three screws

2712 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2969 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-2970 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 2713

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-2971 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher rear paper support

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear paper support.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2972 Remove three screws

2714 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector, release three hooks, and then remove the inner finisher rear paper
support.

Figure 6-2973 Remove the support

7 Remove the inner finisher paper support motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper support motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher paper support
motor assembly.

Figure 6-2974 Remove the assembly

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the inner finisher paper support motor assembly 2715

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2716 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Paper support motor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher paper support motor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-360 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00802B Drive sub-motor step (Paper support motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Paper support motor 2717

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2975 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2976 Remove three screws

2718 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2977 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2978 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2719

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2979 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2980 Remove three screws

2720 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2981 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-2982 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 2721

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-2983 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher rear paper support

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear paper support.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2984 Remove three screws

2722 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector, release three hooks, and then remove the inner finisher rear paper
support.

Figure 6-2985 Remove the support

7 Remove the inner finisher paper support motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper support motor assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher paper support
motor assembly.

Figure 6-2986 Remove the assembly

8 Remove the inner finisher paper support motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper support motor.

Remove the inner finisher paper support motor assembly 2723

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher paper support
motor.

Figure 6-2987 Remove the motor

9 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2724 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2725

 Removal and replacement: Front paper support
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher front paper support.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-361 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01310A Front paper support

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2726 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2988 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2989 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2727

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-2990 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-2991 Open the punch cover

2728 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-2992 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2993 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2729

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-2994 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-2995 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

2730 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-2996 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher front paper support

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front paper support.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher front paper support..

Figure 6-2997 Remove the support

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the inner finisher front paper support 2731

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2732 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Paddle unit
Review the inner finisher paddle unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Main paddle assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher main paddle assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-362 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01327A Main paddle assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Paddle unit 2733

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-2998 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-2999 Remove three screws

2734 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3000 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3001 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2735

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3002 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3003 Remove three screws

2736 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3004 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

● Open the punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly 2737

 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the inner
finisher main paddle motor assembly.

Figure 6-3005 Remove the assembly

5 Remove the inner finisher main paddle home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher main paddle home sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher main paddle home
sensor.

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainer as necessary.

Figure 6-3006 Remove the sensor

2738 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

6 Remove the inner finisher main paddle assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher main paddle assembly.

1. Remove four paddles.

Figure 6-3007 Remove four paddles

2. Do the following:

● Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring.

● Remove the main paddle cam and bushing.

Remove the inner finisher main paddle assembly 2739

 Figure 6-3008 Remove the e-ring, cam, and bushing

3. Release the belt.

Figure 6-3009 Release the belt

2740 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove the main paddle shaft.

Figure 6-3010 Remove the shaft

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2741

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2742 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Sub paddle assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher sub paddle assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-363 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01336A Sub paddle assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Removal and replacement: Sub paddle assembly 2743

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3011 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3012 Remove the handle

2744 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3013 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3014 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover 2745

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3015 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3016 Remove three screws

2746 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3017 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3018 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher sub paddle assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher sub paddle assembly.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 2747

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-3019 Remove one screw

2. Do the following:

● Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring.

● Remove the gear, belt, and bushing.

● Remove the sub paddle assembly.

Figure 6-3020 Remove the assembly

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2748 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2749

 Removal and replacement: Main paddle home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher main paddle home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-364 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Main paddle home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2750 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3021 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3022 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2751

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3023 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3024 Open the punch cover

2752 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3025 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3026 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2753

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3027 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

● Open the punch cover.

2754 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the inner
finisher main paddle motor assembly.

Figure 6-3028 Remove the assembly

5 Remove the inner finisher main paddle home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher main paddle home sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher main paddle home
sensor.

NOTE: Release the wire harnesses from the retainer as necessary.

Figure 6-3029 Remove the sensor

Remove the inner finisher main paddle home sensor 2755

 6 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2756 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Main paddle motor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-365 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01331A Main paddle motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Removal and replacement: Main paddle motor assembly 2757

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3030 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3031 Remove the handle

2758 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3032 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3033 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher main paddle motor assembly 2759

 ● Open the punch cover.

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the inner
finisher main paddle motor assembly.

Figure 6-3034 Remove the assembly

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2760 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

End fence unit

Review the inner finisher end fence unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: End fence sensor

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher end fence sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-366 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter (End fence sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

End fence unit 2761

 1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3035 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3036 Remove the handle

2762 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3037 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3038 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover 2763

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3039 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3040 Rotate the punch

2764 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3041 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3042 Remove the assembly

4 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2765

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3043 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3044 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

2766 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3045 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher sub paddle assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher sub paddle assembly.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-3046 Remove one screw

2. Do the following:

● Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring.

● Remove the gear, belt, and bushing.

Remove the inner finisher sub paddle assembly 2767

 ● Remove the sub paddle assembly.

Figure 6-3047 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the inner finisher exit motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher exit motor assembly.

1. Open the punch cover.

2. Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher exit motor
assembly.

Figure 6-3048 Remove the motor

8 Remove the inner finisher bracket support guide and stay

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher bracket support guide and stay.

2768 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the bracket support guide.

Figure 6-3049 Remove the guide

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3050 Remove two screws

Remove the inner finisher bracket support guide and stay 2769
 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the bracket stay.

Figure 6-3051 Remove the stay

9 Remove the inner finisher end fence sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher end fence sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher end fence sensor.

Figure 6-3052 Remove the sensor

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2770 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2771

 Tamper unit
Review the inner finisher tamper unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher front tamper.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-367 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00899A Front tamper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2772 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3053 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3054 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2773

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3055 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3056 Open the punch cover

2774 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3057 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3058 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2775

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3059 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3060 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher front tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front tamper.

2776 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect two connectors, and then release two hooks.

Figure 6-3061 Disconnect connectors and release hooks

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher front tamper.

Figure 6-3062 Remove the tamper

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2777

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2778 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher front tamper motor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-368 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Front tamper motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor 2779

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3063 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3064 Remove three screws

2780 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3065 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3066 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2781

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3067 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3068 Remove three screws

2782 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3069 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3070 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher front tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front tamper.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 2783

 1. Disconnect two connectors, and then release two hooks.

Figure 6-3071 Disconnect connectors and release hooks

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher front tamper.

Figure 6-3072 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher front tamper motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front tamper motor.

2784 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher front tamper
motor.

Figure 6-3073 Remove the motor

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2785

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2786 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher front tamper home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-369 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Front tamper home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor 2787

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3074 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3075 Remove three screws

2788 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3076 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3077 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2789

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3078 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3079 Remove three screws

2790 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3080 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3081 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher front tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front tamper.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 2791

 1. Disconnect two connectors, and then release two hooks.

Figure 6-3082 Disconnect connectors and release hooks

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher front tamper.

Figure 6-3083 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher front tamper home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front tamper home sensor.

2792 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove the inner finisher front tamper home sensor.

Figure 6-3084 Remove the sensor

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2793

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2794 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher rear tamper.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-370 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00900A Rear tamper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper 2795

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3085 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3086 Remove three screws

2796 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3087 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3088 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2797

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3089 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3090 Remove three screws

2798 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3091 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3092 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 2799

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-3093 Remove the tamper

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2800 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2801

 Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher rear tamper motor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-371 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Rear tamper motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2802 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3094 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3095 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2803

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3096 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3097 Open the punch cover

2804 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3098 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3099 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2805

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3100 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3101 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

2806 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-3102 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper motor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper
motor.

Figure 6-3103 Remove the motor

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the inner finisher rear tamper motor 2807

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2808 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher rear tamper home sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-372 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Rear tamper home sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor 2809

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3104 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3105 Remove three screws

2810 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3106 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3107 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2811

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3108 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3109 Remove three screws

2812 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3110 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3111 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 2813

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-3112 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper home sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper home sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper home sensor.

Figure 6-3113 Remove the sensor

7 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2814 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2815

 Stapler unit
Review the inner finisher stapler unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Stapler assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher stapler assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-373 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW49-60003 Stapler assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

2816 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3114 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3115 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2817

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3116 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3117 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher stapler assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher stapler assembly.

2818 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect two connectors, remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher stapler assembly.

Figure 6-3118 Remove the assembly

3 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2819

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2820 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Staple cartridge
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher staple cartridge.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-374 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW49-40001 Staple cartridge

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher staple cartridge

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher staple cartridge.

Removal and replacement: Staple cartridge 2821

 ■ Open the front cover, and then pull the inner finisher staple cartridge out to remove it.

Figure 6-3119 Remove the cartridge

2 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2822 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2823

 Removal and replacement: Stapler position sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher stapler position sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher form the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-375 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Stapler position sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2824 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3120 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3121 Rotate the punch

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly 2825

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3122 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3123 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2826 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3124 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3125 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2827

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3126 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3127 Remove the handle

2828 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3128 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3129 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly 2829

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-3130 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3131 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2830 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3132 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-3133 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide 2831

 ■ Remove six screws, and then remove the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Figure 6-3134 Remove the guide

8 Remove the inner finisher stapler position sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher stapler position sensor.

1. Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the guide.

Figure 6-3135 Remove the guide

2832 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-3136 Remove one screw

3. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-3137 Remove one screw

Remove the inner finisher stapler position sensor 2833

 4. Disconnect four connectors.

Figure 6-3138 Disconnect four connectors

5. Remove the inner finisher staple position sensor.

● Callout 1: Front stapler position sensor

● Callout 2: Middle stapler position sensor

● Callout 3: Middle stapler position sensor

● Callout 4: Rear stapler position sensor

Figure 6-3139 Remove the sensor

2834 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

9 Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2835

 Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher stapler position motor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher form the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-376 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00999A Drive-motor step (Stapler position motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2836 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3140 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3141 Rotate the punch

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly 2837

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3142 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3143 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2838 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3144 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3145 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2839

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3146 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3147 Remove the handle

2840 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3148 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3149 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly 2841

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-3150 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3151 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2842 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3152 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-3153 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide 2843

 ■ Remove six screws, and then remove the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Figure 6-3154 Remove the guide

8 Remove the inner finisher stapler position motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher stapler position motor.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher stapler position
motor.

Figure 6-3155 Remove the motor

9 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2844 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Ejector unit
Review the inner finisher ejector unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Ejector

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher ejector.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher form the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Difficult

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Ejector unit 2845

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-377 Part information

Part number Part description

SS456-61001 Ejector

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3156 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

2846 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3157 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3158 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2847

 1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3159 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3160 Remove the handle

2848 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3161 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3162 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 2849

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3163 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher rear tamper

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear tamper.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher rear tamper.

Figure 6-3164 Remove the tamper

6 Remove the inner finisher rear paper support

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear paper support.

2850 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3165 Remove three screws

2. Disconnect one connector, release three hooks, and then remove the inner finisher rear paper
support.

Figure 6-3166 Remove the support

7 Remove the inner finisher ejector

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher ejector.

Remove the inner finisher ejector 2851

 ■ Remove the inner finisher ejector.

Figure 6-3167 Remove the ejector

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2852 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2853

 Output tray and paper holding unit
Review the inner finisher output tray and paper holding unit removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor assembly

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher output tray motor assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-378 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

2854 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Open the front door, remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3168 Remove the handle

2 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3169 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2855

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3170 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3171 Remove three screws

2856 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3172 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher cable guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher cable guide.

■ Remove three screws, and remove the inner finisher cable guide.

NOTE: Remove the wire harness as necessary.

Figure 6-3173 Remove the guide

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray motor assembly.

Remove the inner finisher cable guide 2857

 1. Open the punch cover.

2. Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher output tray
motor assembly.

Figure 6-3174 Remove the assembly

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2858 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2859

 Removal and replacement: Output tray motor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher output tray motor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-379 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00178B JC31-00144G (Output tray motor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

2860 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Open the front door, remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3175 Remove the handle

2 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3176 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2861

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3177 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3178 Remove three screws

2862 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3179 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher cable guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher cable guide.

■ Remove three screws, and remove the inner finisher cable guide.

NOTE: Remove the wire harness as necessary.

Figure 6-3180 Remove the guide

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray motor assembly.

Remove the inner finisher cable guide 2863

 1. Open the punch cover.

2. Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher output tray
motor assembly.

Figure 6-3181 Remove the assembly

5 Remove the inner finisher output tray motor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray motor.

■ Do the following:

● Release the belt (callout 1).

● Disconnect one connector (callout 2).

● Remove two screws (callout 3)

● Remove the inner finisher output tray motor.

2864 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Figure 6-3182 Remove the motor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2865

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2866 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher output tray motor sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-380 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Output tray motor sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor sensor 2867

 ■ Open the front door, remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3183 Remove the handle

2 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3184 Open the punch cover

2868 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3185 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3186 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2869

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3187 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher cable guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher cable guide.

■ Remove three screws, and remove the inner finisher cable guide.

NOTE: Remove the wire harness as necessary.

Figure 6-3188 Remove the guide

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray motor assembly.

2870 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Open the punch cover.

2. Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher output tray
motor assembly.

Figure 6-3189 Remove the assembly

5 Remove the inner finisher output tray motor sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray motor sensor.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the gear.

Figure 6-3190 Remove the gear

Remove the inner finisher output tray motor sensor 2871

 2. Remove the inner finisher output tray motor sensor.

Figure 6-3191 Remove the sensor

6 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2872 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2873

 Removal and replacement: Output tray lower limit switch assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-381 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01320A Finisher sub-tray, lower limit (Output tray lower limit switch assembly)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

2874 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Open the front door, remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3192 Remove the handle

2 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3193 Open the punch cover

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2875

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3194 Remove the handle

4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3195 Remove three screws

2876 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3196 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher PCA cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher PCA cover.

1. Lift up the inner finisher, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-3197 Remove two screws

Remove the inner finisher PCA cover 2877

 2. Remove the inner finisher PCA cover.

Figure 6-3198 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch
assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector.

NOTE: Release the wire harness from the retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-3199 Disconnect one connector

2878 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly.

Figure 6-3200 Remove the switch

5 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2879

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2880 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Output tray top of stack sensor kit
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher output tray top of stack sensor kit.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-382 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A Tray sensor kit (Output tray top of stack sensor kit)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Removal and replacement: Output tray top of stack sensor kit 2881
 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3201 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3202 Remove the handle

2882 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3203 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3204 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover 2883

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3205 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3206 Remove three screws

2884 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3207 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray assembly.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-3208 Remove four screws

Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly 2885

 2. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-3209 Open the cover

3. Press the paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-3210 Press the actuator

2886 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Lift up on the inner finisher output tray to remove it.

Figure 6-3211 Remove the tray

5 Remove the output tray frame

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray frame.

1. Rotate the output tray gear.

Figure 6-3212 Rotate the gear

Remove the output tray frame 2887

 2. Press the paper holding actuator, and then lift the inner finisher output tray frame up to remove it.

Figure 6-3213 Remove the frame

6 Remove the finisher sub stay assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3214 Remove two screws

2888 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3215 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3216 Remove two screws

Remove the finisher sub stay assembly 2889

 4. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

Figure 6-3217 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the inner finisher output tray top of tray sensor kit
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray top of tray sensor kit.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher output tray top of stack sensors.

Figure 6-3218 Remove the sensors

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2890 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2891

 Removal and replacement: Paper holding actuator
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher paper holding actuator.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-383 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01313A Paper holding actuator

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2892 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3219 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3220 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2893

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3221 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3222 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2894 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3223 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3224 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2895

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3225 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3226 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher cable guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher cable guide.

2896 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove three screws, and remove the inner finisher cable guide.

NOTE: Remove the wire harness as necessary.

Figure 6-3227 Remove the guide

6 Remove the inner finisher output tray motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray motor assembly.

1. Open the punch cover.

2. Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher output tray
motor assembly.

Figure 6-3228 Remove the assembly

Remove the inner finisher output tray motor assembly 2897

 7 Remove the inner finisher PCA cover
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher PCA cover.

1. Lift up the inner finisher, and then remove two screws.

Figure 6-3229 Remove two screws

2. Remove the inner finisher PCA cover.

Figure 6-3230 Remove the cover

8 Remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch
assembly.

2898 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect one connector.

NOTE: Release the wire harness from the retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-3231 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly.

Figure 6-3232 Remove the switch

9 Remove the inner finisher paper holding actuator

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper holding actuator.

Remove the inner finisher paper holding actuator 2899

 1. Remove one spring.

Figure 6-3233 Remove one spring

2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove two e-rings, and then remove the pin and bushing.

Figure 6-3234 Remove the e-rings, pin, and bushing

2900 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove the inner finisher paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-3235 Remove the actuator

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2901

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2902 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Paper holding kit
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher paper holding kit.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-384 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01314A Paper holding kit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding kit 2903

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3236 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3237 Remove the handle

2904 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3238 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3239 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover 2905

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3240 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3241 Remove three screws

2906 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3242 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3243 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher output tray motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray motor assembly.

1. Open the punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly 2907

 2. Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher output tray
motor assembly.

Figure 6-3244 Remove the assembly

6 Remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch
assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector.

NOTE: Release the wire harness from the retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-3245 Disconnect one connector

2908 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly.

Figure 6-3246 Remove the switch

7 Remove the inner finisher paper holding actuator

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper holding actuator.

1. Remove one spring.

Figure 6-3247 Remove one spring

Remove the inner finisher paper holding actuator 2909

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove two e-rings, and then remove the pin and bushing.

Figure 6-3248 Remove the e-rings, pin, and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-3249 Remove the actuator

8 Remove the inner finisher paper holding kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper holding kit.

2910 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3250 Remove two screws

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-3251 Remove one screw

Remove the inner finisher paper holding kit 2911

 3. Remove the inner finisher paper holding kit.

Figure 6-3252 Remove the kit

9 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2912 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2913

 Removal and replacement: Paper holding solenoid
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher paper holding solenoid.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-385 Part information

Part number Part description

JC33-00037A Solenoid, TDS (Paper holding solenoid)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

2914 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3253 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3254 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2915

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3255 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3256 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2916 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3257 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3258 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2917

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3259 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher top cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover assembly.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher top cover assembly.

Figure 6-3260 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher output tray motor assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray motor assembly.

1. Open the punch cover.

2918 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the inner finisher output tray
motor assembly.

Figure 6-3261 Remove the assembly

6 Remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch
assembly.

1. Disconnect one connector.

NOTE: Release the wire harness from the retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-3262 Disconnect one connector

Remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly 2919
 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher output tray lower limit switch assembly.

Figure 6-3263 Remove the switch

7 Remove the inner finisher paper holding actuator

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper holding actuator.

1. Remove one spring.

Figure 6-3264 Remove one spring

2920 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove two e-rings, and then remove the pin and bushing.

Figure 6-3265 Remove the e-rings, pin, and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-3266 Remove the actuator

8 Remove the inner finisher paper holding kit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper holding kit.

Remove the inner finisher paper holding kit 2921

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3267 Remove two screws

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-3268 Remove one screw

2922 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Remove the inner finisher paper holding kit.

Figure 6-3269 Remove the kit

9 Remove the inner finisher paper holding solenoid

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper holding solenoid.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher paper holding solenoid.

Figure 6-3270 Remove the solenoid

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the inner finisher paper holding solenoid 2923

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2924 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Paper holding sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher paper holding sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-386 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Paper holding sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding sensor 2925

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3271 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3272 Remove the handle

2926 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3273 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3274 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover 2927

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3275 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3276 Remove three screws

2928 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3277 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray assembly.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-3278 Remove four screws

Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly 2929

 2. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-3279 Open the cover

3. Press the paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-3280 Press the actuator

2930 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Lift up on the inner finisher output tray to remove it.

Figure 6-3281 Remove the tray

5 Remove the output tray frame

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray frame.

1. Rotate the output tray gear.

Figure 6-3282 Rotate the gear

Remove the output tray frame 2931

 2. Press the paper holding actuator, and then lift the inner finisher output tray frame up to remove it.

Figure 6-3283 Remove the frame

6 Remove the finisher sub stay assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3284 Remove two screws

2932 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3285 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3286 Remove two screws

Remove the finisher sub stay assembly 2933

 4. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

Figure 6-3287 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the inner finisher paper holding sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher paper holding sensor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the inner finisher paper holding sensor.

Figure 6-3288 Remove the sensor

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2934 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2935

 PCA and switch
Review the inner finisher PCA and switch removal procedures.

Removal and replacement: PCA

Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher PCA.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-387 Part information

Part number Part description

6GW49-60001 Inner finisher PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

2936 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ● Open the middle cover.

2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3289 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3290 Remove the handle

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2937

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3291 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3292 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2938 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3293 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3294 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2939

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3295 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray assembly.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-3296 Remove four screws

2940 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

2. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-3297 Open the cover

3. Press the paper holding actuator.

Figure 6-3298 Press the actuator

Remove the inner finisher output tray assembly 2941

 4. Lift up on the inner finisher output tray to remove it.

Figure 6-3299 Remove the tray

5 Remove the output tray frame

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher output tray frame.

1. Rotate the output tray gear.

Figure 6-3300 Rotate the gear

2942 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Press the paper holding actuator, and then lift the inner finisher output tray frame up to remove it.

Figure 6-3301 Remove the frame

6 Remove the finisher sub stay assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3302 Remove two screws

Remove the finisher sub stay assembly 2943

 2. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3303 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-3304 Remove two screws

2944 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove the inner finisher sub stay assembly.

Figure 6-3305 Remove the assembly

7 Remove the inner finisher PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher PCA.

1. Disconnect all of the connectors.

Figure 6-3306 Disconnect all connectors

Remove the inner finisher PCA 2945

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the inner finisher PCA.

Figure 6-3307 Remove the PCA

8 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2946 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2947

 Removal and replacement: Rear joint PCA
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher rear joint PCA.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-388 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02780A Inner finisher rear joint PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2948 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3308 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3309 Rotate the punch

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly 2949

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3310 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3311 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2950 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3312 Remove three screws

3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3313 Remove the cover

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2951

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3314 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3315 Remove the handle

2952 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3316 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3317 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly 2953

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-3318 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3319 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2954 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3320 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-3321 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide 2955

 ■ Remove six screws, and then remove the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Figure 6-3322 Remove the guide

8 Remove the inner finisher rear joint PCA

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear joint PCA.

■ Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the inner
finisher rear joint PCA.

Figure 6-3323 Remove the PCA

9 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2956 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2957

 Removal and replacement: Front cover switch
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher front cover switch.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-389 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-01610A Harness - cover open (Front cover switch)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2958 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3324 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3325 Remove three screws

Remove the inner finisher rear base cover 2959

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3326 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3327 Rotate the punch

2960 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3328 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3329 Remove the assembly

4 Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover assembly.

1. Do the following:

● Open the front door.

● Open the middle cover.

Remove the inner finisher front cover assembly 2961

 2. Open the punch cover (pull it out).

Figure 6-3330 Open the punch cover

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the lock release handle.

Figure 6-3331 Remove the handle

2962 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 4. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3332 Remove three screws

5. Open the top and middle covers, release one hook, and then remove the inner finisher front cover
assembly.

Figure 6-3333 Remove the cover

5 Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly 2963

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the inner finisher middle cover assembly.

Figure 6-3334 Remove the cover

6 Remove the inner finisher middle roller

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle roller.

1. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, remove the pulley, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3335 Remove the e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2964 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 2. Use a pair of tweezers to remove one e-ring, and then remove the bushing.

Figure 6-3336 Remove the e-ring and bushing

3. Remove the inner finisher middle roller.

Figure 6-3337 Remove the roller

7 Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Remove the inner finisher middle lower guide 2965

 ■ Remove six screws, and then remove the inner finisher middle lower guide.

Figure 6-3338 Remove the guide

8 Remove the inner finisher bracket support guide

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher bracket support guide.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the bracket support guide.

Figure 6-3339 Remove the guide

9 Remove the inner finisher front cover switch

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher front cover switch.

2966 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 1. Disconnect one connector.

NOTE: Release the wire harness from the retainers as necessary.

Figure 6-3340 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the inner finisher front cover switch.

Figure 6-3341 Remove the switch

10 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2967

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2968 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

Removal and replacement: Top cover switch
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher top cover switch.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-390 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-01610A Harness - cover open (Top cover switch)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

Removal and replacement: Top cover switch 2969

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3342 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher rear base cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear base cover.

1. Do the following:

● Open the top door.

● Open the middle cover.

2. Remove three screws.

Figure 6-3343 Remove three screws

2970 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. Release on hook, and then remove the inner finisher rear base cover.

Figure 6-3344 Remove the cover

3 Remove the inner finisher top cover switch

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher top cover switch.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-3345 Remove one screw

Remove the inner finisher top cover switch 2971

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the inner finisher top cover switch.

Figure 6-3346 Remove the switch

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2972 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2973

 Removal and replacement: Docking sensor
Learn about removing and replacing the inner finisher docking sensor.

NOTE: Remove the inner finisher from the printer.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-391 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-01610A Harness - cover open (Docking sensor)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1 Remove the inner finisher rear punch cover

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher rear punch cover.

2974 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Remove two screws, and then slide the inner finisher rear punch cover as shown below to remove it.

Figure 6-3347 Remove the cover

2 Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher punch cover assembly.

1. Release the lever (callout 1), and then rotate the punch away from the inner finisher (callout 2).

Figure 6-3348 Rotate the punch

Remove the inner finisher punch cover assembly 2975

 2. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-3349 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the hinge shaft, and then remove the punch cover assembly.

Figure 6-3350 Remove the assembly

3 Remove the inner finisher docking sensor

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the inner finisher docking sensor.

2976 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the inner finisher docking sensor (callout 2).

Figure 6-3351 Remove the sensor

4 Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2977

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Stacker or bridge unit with print quality diagnostics

Learn about output device parts removal and replacement.

Stacker assembly with print quality diagnostics

Learn about stacker with print quality diagnostics parts removal and replacement.

HP LaserJet Managed E826, E82650, E82660, E82670, HP Color LaserJet Managed E877, E87740, E87750, E87760,
E87770 - Removal and replacement: Stacker Unit with PQ diagnostics
Learn about removing and replacing the Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics whole unit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-392 Part information

Part number Part description

63C82-60117 Stacker unit

63C80-67001 SVC - Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

2978 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the stacker unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the output tray.

1. Remove the output tray.

a. Locate the output tray.

b. Lift the tray up, then remove the output tray.

2. Remove the stacker unit.

Remove the stacker unit 2979

 a. Remove 3 screws.

b. Remove 1 screw.

2980 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

c. Remove the cable cover while parting the unit from the engine slightly.

d. Unplug 3 cables.

Remove the stacker unit 2981

 e. Remove the stacker unit by pulling it out.

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2982 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Bridge unit with print quality diagnostics

Learn about the bridge unit with print quality diagnostics parts removal and replacement.

HP LaserJet Managed E826, E82650, E82660, E82670, HP Color LaserJet Managed E877, E87740, E87750, E87760,
E87770 - Removal and replacement: Bridge unit with PQ Diagnostics
Learn about removing and replacing the Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics whole unit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-393 Part information

Part number Part description

63C80-60109 Bridge Unit with PQ Diagnostics

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Tweezers

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Bridge unit with print quality diagnostics 2983

 Remove the stacker unit
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the output tray.

1. Remove the output tray.

a. Locate the output tray.

b. Lift the tray up, then remove the output tray.

2. Remove the stacker unit.

2984 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

a. Remove 3 screws.

b. Remove 1 screw.

Remove the stacker unit 2985

 c. Remove the cable cover while parting the unit from the engine slightly.

d. Unplug 3 cables.

2986 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 e. Remove the stacker unit by pulling it out.

Remove the bridge unit

Use the following procedure to remove and replace the bridge unit.

1. Remove mount bracket.

a. Release the cable stay clamp to free the cables.

Remove the bridge unit 2987

 b. Remove 4 machine screws.

c. Remove the mount bracket by pulling it out away from the printer.

NOTE: To avoid damaging or interference of cables, arrange the cables through the hole.

2. Remove the bridge unit with PQ diagnostics.

2988 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

 a. Remove 1 screw.

b. Remove the bridge unit with PQ diagnostics by pulling it out from the printer.

c.

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2989

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2990 Chapter 6 Remove and replace

7 Parts and diagrams

Printer parts information including exploded assembly diagrams and part number lists.

Base printer
Learn about the printer engine parts and assemblies.

Covers
Learn about base printer cover service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Covers

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer covers.

Parts and diagrams 2991

 Figure 7-1 Covers
18 1
3
8
4
24

6 2

22 10 9
22
7

17

23
12 11
20
21 16

19

15
25 14
13

29

27

26
28

Table 7-1 Covers

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, C1 6EQ94-40014 Rear upper cover 1

2, C2 6EQ94-40004 Rear lower cover 1

3, C3 6ER04-61005 Controller cover 1

4, C4 6EQ94-40009 Exit rear cover 1

2992 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-1 Covers (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

5, C5 JC63-04534B Left top cover 1

6, C6 6EQ94-40012 Left upper cover 1

7, C7 5QJ90-60115 Left cover 1

8, C9 6EQ94-40017 Middle upper cover 1

9, C10 6EQ94-40015 Right upper cover 1

10, C11 6EQ94-40006 Right rear cover 1

11, C12 6EQ94-40005 Right front cover 1

12, C13 5QJ90-60114 Right middle cover assembly 1

13 6EQ94-40013 Right middle cover 1

14 6EQ94-40029 Power key 1

15, P15 3SJ33-60007 PCA -power key 1

16, C14 6EQ94-40032 HIP cover 1

17, C15 6EQ94-40031 Middle left cover 1

18, C16 5QJ90-60116 Exit cover stacker 1

19, C17 5QJ90-60117 Inner cover 1

20, C18 6EQ94-40011 Front lower cover 1

21, C19 5QJ90-60118 Front cover assembly 1

22 JC61-04626A Tie stopper 1

23 6EQ94-40001 Front cover - Blue CMF Panel 1

23 5QJ90-40095 Front cover - Gray CMF Panel 1

23 5QJ90-40096 Front cover - Red CMF Panel 1

23 5QJ90-40097 Front cover - Green CMF Panel 1

23 5QJ90-40098 Front cover - Yellow CMF Panel 1

23 5QJ90-40099 Front cover - Purple CMF Panel 1

24, C22 6EQ94-40010 Exit stacker upper cover 1

25, U3 5QJ90-60111 Tray 2 cassette 1

26, C20 5QJ90-40022 Tray 2 cover - Blue CMF panel 1

26, C20 5QJ90-40087 Tray 2 cover - Gray CMF panel 1

26, C20 5QJ90-40088 Tray 2 cover - Red CMF panel 1

26, C20 5QJ90-40089 Tray 2 cover - Green CMF panel 1

26, C20 5QJ90-40090 Tray 2 cover - Yellow CMF panel 1

26, C20 5QJ90-40091 Tray 2 cover - Purple CMF panel 1

27, U4 5QJ90-60119 Tray 3 cassette 1

Parts and diagrams: Covers 2993

 Table 7-1 Covers (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

28, C21 5QJ94-40016 Tray 3 cover - Blue CMF panel 1

28, C21 5QJ94-40024 Tray 3 cover - Gray CMF panel 1

28, C21 5QJ94-40025 Tray 3 cover - Red CMF panel 1

28, C21 5QJ94-40026 Tray 3 cover - Green CMF panel 1

28, C21 5QJ94-40027 Tray 3 cover - Yellow CMF panel 1

28, C21 5QJ94-40028 Tray 3 cover - Purple CMF panel 1

29 63C82-67029 Card reader rotation adapter kit 1

Not Shown X3A92-67924 Kit-Screws c-clips e-clips kit 1

Tray 1
Learn about base printer Tray 1 service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Tray 1

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer Tray 1.

Figure 7-2 Tray 1

2 6

9
8
4

2994 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

 Table 7-2 Tray 1

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U1 JC95-02257A Right door assembly 1

2 JC66-03235A Right door front link 1

3, U2 JC90-01869A Tray 1 unit 1

4, K1 5RC02-67001 Tray 1 roller kit 1

5 0604-001381 Tray 1 paper empty sensor 1

6 JC66-01425A Right door front damper 1

7 JC93-00443A Registration drive assembly 1

8, M4 JC31-00123B Registration and tray 1 motor 1

9, CL1 JC47-00037A Electric clutch (Tray 1 clutch) 1

Tray 2, 3
Learn about base printer Tray 2, 3 service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Tray 2, 3

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer Tray 2, 3.

Tray 2, 3 2995
 Figure 7-3 Tray 2, 3
2 1

3
16
4

17
10

12
15
13

11 14
5

14

7 7
8 8
9 9

Table 7-3 Tray 2, 3

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U3 5QJ90-60111 Tray 2 cassette 1

2, U4 5QJ90-60119 Tray 3 cassette 1

3, S5 JC93-01408A Frame sub-sensor paper size RU (Tray 2 tray 1

open, paper size sensor)

4, S9 JC93-01408A Frame sub-sensor paper size RU (Tray 3 tray 1

open, paper size sensor)

5, U5 JC93-01728A Tray 2 pickup assembly 1

6, U10 JC93-01729A Tray 3 pickup assembly 1

7, S3 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 2, 3 stack height 2

sensor)

8, S6 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Tray 2, 3 paper empty 2

sensor)

9, K3 5PN66-67001 Tray 2, 3 roller kit 2

2996 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

 Table 7-3 Tray 2, 3 (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

10, S4 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Tray 2 feed sensor) 1

11, S8 0604-01490 Photo interrupter (Tray 3 feed sensor) 1

12, U9 5QJ90-64001 Tray 2 pickup drive assembly 1

13, U10 5QJ90-64001 Tray 3 pickup drive assembly 1

14, M2. M3 5QJ90-64002 Tray 2 pickup motor 1

14, M3 5QJ90-64002 Tray 3 pickup motor 1

15, U7 JC93-01682A Feed drive assembly 1

16, M1 JC31-00163A Feed motor 1

17, U7 Y1G22-67901 Tray heater 110V 1

17, U8 Y1G22-67902 Tray heater 220V 1

Registration and loop sensors and duplex

Learn about base printer registration and loop sensors and duplex service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Registration and loop sensors and duplex

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer registration and loop sensors and duplex.

Registration and loop sensors and duplex 2997

 Figure 7-4 Registration and loop sensors and duplex

14
13

11

12
1

2
10

9
3

6
7

5 5

Table 7-4 Registration and loop sensors and duplex

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U11 5QJ90-60129 Registration unit 1

2, S10 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Registration sensor) 1

3, U13 5PN65-67001 Second transfer (T2) assembly 1

4, U20 JC95-02292A Duplex unit 1

5, S11 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Loop sensor 1, 2) 1

5, S12 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Loop sensor 1, 2) a

6 JC66-05625A Loop actuator 1

7, S17 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Duplex jam 2 sensor) 1

8, M6 JC93-01687A Duplex motor 1

9, U14 JC90-01877A Right door exit assembly 1

2998 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-4 Registration and loop sensors and duplex (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

10, S13 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Fuser out sensor) 1

11, U15 JC93-00078C Paper dust holder assembly 1

12, U12 JC93-00443A Registration drive assembly 1

13, M4 JC31-00123B Registration and tray 1 motor 1

14, CL2 JC47-00037A Registration clutch 1

Parts and diagrams: Registration and loop sensors and duplex 2999
 Exit unit
Learn about base printer exit unit service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Exit unit (1 of 2)

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer exit unit (1 of 2).

Figure 7-5 Exit unit (1 of 2)

2
4
3

Table 7-5 Exit unit (1 of 2)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U16 JC90-01876A Exit unit 1

2 JC66-04339A Bin full exit actuator 1

3 JC66-02278A Bin full exit actuator lever 1

4 JC61-07185A Spring-TS 1

5 JC90-01874A Exit stack guide 1

6, S14 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Out bin 1 full sensor) 1

7, U57 JC93-01678A Fuser and exit drive assembly 1

8, M29 JC93-01686A Exit motor 1

3000 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Exit unit (1 of 2) 3001
 Parts and diagrams: Exit unit (2 of 2)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer exit unit (2 of 2).

Figure 7-6 Exit unit (2 of 2)

14

12

10
11

13

Table 7-6 Exit unit (2 of 2)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

9 Y1G23-67901 Second exit (Optional) 1

10 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Out bin full 2 sensor 1

[Optional])

11 JC93-00802A Exit 2 motor (Optional) 1

12 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Duplex jam 1 sensor 1

[Optional])

13 JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting (Return gate solenoid) 1

14 6GW52A HP LaserJet WG Job Separator (Optional) 1

Toner cartridge
Learn about base printer toner cartridge service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Toner

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer toner.

3002 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

 Figure 7-7 Toner
1
2
3
4

7
5 6 8
5
5 9
5

10
11

Table 7-7 Toner

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U23 W9142-67005 Yellow toner cartridge -Standard yield 1

1, U27 W9152-67007 Yellow toner cartridge -High yield 1

2, U24 W9143-67005 Magenta toner cartridge -Standard yield 1

2, U28 W9153-67007 Magenta toner cartridge -High yield 1

3, U25 W9141-67006 Cyan toner cartridge -Standard yield 1

3, U29 W9151-67007 Cyan toner cartridge -High yield 1

4, U26 W9140-67005 Black toner cartridge -Standard yield 1

4, U30 W9150-67007 Black toner cartridge -High yield 1

5, U31 JC93-01822A Toner CRUM module assembly 4

6, U21 JC93-01680A Yellow, magenta toner supply motor assembly 1

7, M7 SS216-80501 Yellow toner dispense motor 1

8. M8 SS216-80501 Magenta toner dispense motor 1

9, U22 JC93-01680A Cyan, black toner supply motor assembly 1

10, M9 SS216-80501 Cyan toner dispense motor 1

11, M10 SS216-80501 Black toner dispense motor 1

Duct assembly
Learn about base duct assembly service parts.

Duct assembly 3003

 Parts and diagrams: Duct assembly
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer duct assembly.

Figure 7-8 Duct assembly

5 10
6
7
8

1
2
3
4 9

11

12

Toner residual amount sensors

are attached to the
toner guide units

Table 7-8 Duct assembly

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U36 5QJ90-60072 Yellow toner guide unit 1

2, U37 5QJ90-60072 Magenta toner guide unit 1

3, U38 5QJ90-60072 Cyan toner guide unit 1

4, U39 5QJ90-60072 Black toner guide unit 1

5, U42 5QJ94-40001 Yellow toner duct unit 1

6, U33 5QJ94-40001 Magenta toner duct unit 1

7, U34 5QJ94-40001 Cyan toner duct unit 1

8, U35 5QJ94-40001 Black toner duct unit 1

9, U21 JC93-01680A Yellow, magenta toner supply motor assembly 1

10, M11 SS216-80501 Yellow, magenta toner duct motor 1

11, U22 JC93-01680A Cyan, black toner supply motor assembly 1

12, M12 SS216-80501 Cyan, black toner duct motor 1

3004 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Toner collection unit (TCU)
Learn about base printer TCU service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Toner collection unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer toner collection unit.

Figure 7-9 Toner collection unit

2
1

Table 7-9 Toner collection unit

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U40 X3A83-67923 Toner collection unit 1

2, S24 JC93-00492A Toner collection unit full sensor 1

3, S23 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Toner collection unit 1

detection sensor)

4, U41 JC93-00445A Toner collection unit drive assembly 1

5, S24 JC31-00166A Toner collection unit motor

Laser scanner unit (LSU)

Learn about base printer LSU service parts.

Toner collection unit (TCU) 3005

 Parts and diagrams: laser scanner unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer laser scanner unit.

Figure 7-10 Laser scanner unit

Table 7-10 Laser scanner unit

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U42 JC97-05148A Laser scanner unit (LSU) 1

Developer
Learn about base printer developer service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Developer

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer developer.

3006 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Figure 7-11 Developer
1
2
3
4

6
7

Table 7-11 Developer

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U47 5PN58-67001 Yellow developer unit 1

Not shown, 5QJ90-61010 Yellow developer powder kit 1

K4

2, U48 5PN59-67001 Magenta developer unit 1

Not shown, 5QJ90-61011 Magenta developer powder kit 1

K5

3, U49 5PN60-67001 Cyan developer unit 1

Not shown, 5QJ90-61012 Cyan developer powder kit 1

K6

4, U50 5PN57-67001 Black developer unit 1

Not shown, 5QJ90-61013 Black developer powder kit 1

K7

5, U51 JC93-01674A Drum and developer drive assembly 1

6, M23 JC31-00123B Motor BLDC (Yellow, magenta, cyan developer 1

motor)

7, M24 JC31-00123B Motor BLDC (Black developer motor) 1

Parts and diagrams: Developer 3007

 Drum
Learn about base printer drum service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Drum

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer drum.

Figure 7-12 Drum

1
2
3
4

10
13 11
12
6

8 7

Table 7-12 Drum

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U43 W9075-67001 Yellow drum unit 1

2, U44 W9075-67001 Magenta drum unit 1

3, U45 W9075-67001 Cyan drum unit 1

4, U46 W9074-67001 Black drum unit 1

5, U51 JC93-01674A Drum and developer drive assembly 1

6, M19 JC31-00123G Yellow drum motor 1

7, M20 JC31-00123G Magenta drum motor 1

8. M21 JC31-00123G Cyan drum motor 1

3008 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

 Table 7-12 Drum (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

9, M22 JC31-00123G Black drum and ITB motor 1

10, S31 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Yellow drum home sensor) 1

11, S32 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Magenta drum home 1

sensor)

12, S33 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Cyan drum home sensor) 1

13, S34 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Black drum home sensor) 1

ITB
Learn about base printer ITB service parts.

Parts and diagrams: ITB

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer ITB.

ITB 3009
 Figure 7-13 ITB
1

2
8

5
6

Table 7-13 ITB

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, K8 430H4-67001 ITB and cleaning unit kit 1

2, U52 5QJ90-60051 Image-transfer belt (ITB) 1

3, U54 5PN64-67001 ITB cleaning unit 1

4, U51 JC93-01674A Drum and developer drive assembly 1

5, M25 JC93-00452A ITB engage motor 1

6, M22 JC31-00123G Motor BLDC (Black drum and ITB motor) 1

3010 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

 Table 7-13 ITB (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

7, S34 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Black drum home sensor) 1

8 JC93-00494A Main-front package HV frame 1

CPR
Learn about base printer CPR service parts.

Parts and diagrams: CPR

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer color plane registration.

Figure 7-14 CPR

7
4

3
6

Table 7-14 CPR

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 5QJ90-60137 Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit 1

2 JC32-00014A CPR sensor (Front CPR sensor) 1

3 JC32-00014A CPR sensor (Center CPR sensor) 1

4 JC32-00014A CPR sensor (Rear CPR sensor) 1

5 JC93-00894A CPR shutter drive assembly 1

6 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (CPR shutter sensor) 1

CPR 3011
 Table 7-14 CPR (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

7 JC31-00078A Motor DC (CPR shutter motor) 1

Fuser
Learn about base printer fuser service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Fuser

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer fuser.

Figure 7-15 Fuser

1 4

Table 7-15 Fuser

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U56-1 5PN50-67001 Fuser unit -100V 1

1, U56-2 5PN61-67001 Fuser unit -110V 1

1, U56-3 5PN62-67001 Fuser unit -220V 1

2 JC61-07804A Fuser support bracket 1

3, U57 JC93-01678A Fuser and exit drive assembly 1

4, M28 JC31-00123B Fuser motor 1

3012 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Sensor and fan
Learn about base printer sensor and fan service parts.

Parts and diagrams: Sensor and fan

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer sensor and fan.

Figure 7-16 Sensor and fan

6 6

9
4

Table 7-16 Sensor and fan

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, S47 1404-001417 Thermistor (Inner temperature sensor) 1

2, U58, S48 5QJ90-40002 Outer environment sensor assembly 1

3, U59, F1 JC93-01786A LVPS FDB fan assembly 1

4, U60, F2 5QJ90-40125 Fuser fan assembly 1

5, U62. F5 5QJ90-40126 Dev fan assembly 1

6, F3 JC31-00160C Right door fan 1

7, U61, F4 JC93-01784A LSU fan assembly 1

8, S49 JC93-00466A Front door open switch (Front door switch 1

assembly)

9, S50 JC93-01467A Switch (Right door switch assembly) 1

Sensor and fan 3013

 PCA
Learn about base printer PCA service parts.

Parts and diagrams: PCA

Parts diagram and parts list for the PCA.

Figure 7-17 PCA

12 16
10
11 14
17 11
13
18

5 20

1
6

7 3
2

15
9
19

15.1

Table 7-17 PCA

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, U64 3SJ15-60101 Control-panel assembly 20.3 cm (8 in) 1

1, U63 5QK42-60104 Control-panel assembly 25.6 cm (10.1 in 2nd) 1

2, P11-1 5QJ90-60015 Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), 220V 1

2, P11-2 5QJ90-60014 Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), 110V 1

3014 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-17 PCA (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

3, P12-1 JC44-00211F Fuser drive board (FDB), 220V 1

3, P12-2 JC44-00210F Fuser drive board (FDB), 110V 1

4, P10 JC44-00212D High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) 1

5, P1 6CF14-67003 Formatter 1

6, P7 3SJ06-60001 Island of Data (IOD) 1

7, P8 T3U64-60001 (Not orderable and Echo PCA (Not orderable and not used in printer.) 1
not used in printer.)

8 6ER04-40034 (Not orderable and Rivet-Echo PCA (Not orderable and not used in 1
not used in printer.) printer.)

9, P6 3SJ04-60002 USB Hub PCA 1

10, P5-1 933853-011 Hard disk 500GB SED 1

10, P5-1 733M6-69001 Solid-state drive 256GB 1

11 6ER04-40035 Rivet-HDD 1

12 5851-7753 Cradle-HDD 1

13 5851-7754 Cradle-Riser Card 1

14, P3-1 3SJ01-60001 Riser for HDD 1

14, P3-2 4XN67-67001 SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit 1

14, P3-3 3SJ02-60001 Riser for HDD, USB ports, Accelerator 1

15, U60-1 JC93-01742A Keyboard Assy-US English 1

15, U60-2 JC93-01743A Keyboard Assy-UK English 1

15.1, U60-3 63C82-67021 Keyboard (drawer type) Assy – E7 series US English 1

15.1, U60-4 63C82-67023 Keyboard (drawer type) Assy – E1 series US English 1

Not shown 5851-6019 Keyboard overlay kit (FR, IT, RU, DE,ES,UK Kybd) 1

Not shown 5851-6020 Keyboard overlay kit (FR-CN, ES-LA, ES,US Kybd) 1

Not shown 5851-6021 Keyboard overlay kit (FR-SW, DE-SW, DA,UK Kybd) 1

Not shown 5851-6022 Keyboard overlay kit (ZHTW, ZHCN) 1

Not shown 5851-6023 Keyboard overlay kit (ES, PT) 1

Not shown 5851-6024 Keyboard overlay kit (JA-KG, JA-KT) 1

16, P4 6HN30-67001 Accelerator (Optional) 1

17, P18-1 7ZA08-67001 Single Fax Card (WW) (Optional) 1

17, P18-2 7ZA09-67001 Single Fax Card (BBU) (Optional) 1

17, P18-3 5QK14-67001 Dual Fax Card (WW) (Optional) 1

17, P18-4 7ZA07-67001 Dual Fax Card (BBU) (Optional) 1

18, P2 3SJ03-60001 (Not Orderable) TPM 1

Parts and diagrams: PCA 3015

 Table 7-17 PCA (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

19, P13 3SJ33-60007 Power key PCA 1

20, P5-2 B5L32-60004 eMMC 32G 1

ADF / Image scanner assembly

Learn about the ADF and sub-scanner parts and assemblies.

Image scanner assembly (ISA)

Learn about the integrated-scanner assembly parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: ISA

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer ISA.

Figure 7-18 ISA

3 2
1

3016 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-18 ISA

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 3SJ11-40008 Cover Rear 1

2 3SJ11-60105 HP LaserJet 240ipm 200 sheet Flow DADF 1

Scanner

2 3SJ11-60101 HP LaserJet 180ipm 200 sheet DADF Scanner 1

2 3SJ00-60101 HP LaserJet 120ipm 100 sheet DADF Scanner 1

3 5QJ90-67012 200sh flow ADF 1

3 5QJ90-67011 200sh ADF 1

3 5QJ83-67007 100sh ADF 1

4 3SJ11-60103 Tarot platen 1

4 3SJ00-60103 CIS platen 1

Parts and diagrams: ISA 3017

 200sh ADF
Learn about the 200sh ADF parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (1 of 2)

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer ADF.

Figure 7-19 200sh ADF (1 of 2)

Table 7-19 200sh ADF (1 of 2)

Ref No, Part number Description Qty

Callout

1, C605 5QJ90-40056 ADF Blue CMF panel 1

1, C605 5QJ90-40108 ADF Gray CMF panel 1

1, C605 5QJ90-40109 ADF Red CMF panel 1

1, C605 5QJ90-40110 ADF Green CMF panel 1

1, C605 5QJ90-40111 ADF Yellow CMF panel 1

1, C605 5QJ90-40112 ADF Purple CMF panel 1

3018 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (2 of 2)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer ADF.

Figure 7-20 200sh ADF (2 of 2)

5
7
3
1

Table 7-20 200sh ADF (2 of 2)

Ref No, Part number Description Qty

Callout

1, K601 5851-7202 ADF roller kit 1

3, P601-1 5QJ90-67013 200sh ENT ADF PCA 1

3, P601-2 5QJ90-67008 200sh ADF WF PCA (flow) 1

4 5QJ90-67009 ADF FFC cable to SSA 1

5 5QJ90-67010 ADF Power cable 1

6, K602 5QJ90-67004 Hinge Kit 1

7 5QJ90-67006 Damper module 1

8, K603 5QJ90-67005 A3 White Backing Kit 1

Parts and diagrams: 200sh ADF (2 of 2) 3019

 100sh ADF
Learn about the 100sh ADF parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: 100sh ADF (1 of 2)

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer ADF.

Figure 7-21 100sh ADF (1 of 2)

Table 7-21 100sh ADF (1 of 2)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 5QJ90-40056 ADF Blue CMF panel 1

1 5QJ90-40108 ADF Gray CMF panel 1

1 5QJ90-40109 ADF Red CMF panel 1

1 5QJ90-40110 ADF Green CMF panel 1

1 5QJ90-40111 ADF Yellow CMF panel 1

1 5QJ90-40112 ADF Purple CMF panel 1

3020 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: 100sh ADF (2 of 2)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer ADF.

Figure 7-22 100sh ADF (2 of 2)

4
2
1

Table 7-22 100sh ADF (2 of 2)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 5QJ83-67002 ADF roller kit 1

2 5QJ83-67004 100sh ADF PCA 1

3 5QJ83-67005 ADF FFC cable to platen 1

4 5QJ83-67006 ADF power cable 1

5 5QJ83-67003 ADF hinge kit 1

6 5QJ90-67005 White backing kit 1

Tarot platen
Learn about the tarot platen parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: Tarot platen

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer tarot platen.

Parts and diagrams: 100sh ADF (2 of 2) 3021

 Figure 7-23 Tarot platen

3
2
1

Table 7-23 Tarot platen

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1, S803 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (ADF open sensor) 1

2, P811 Y6V12-60035 Tarot platen PCA 1

3 3SJ11-50006 Discrete power cable 1

4 5QK08-67011 SVC-Flat Cable, Tarot SCB 50pin 1

5 5QK08-67012 SVC-Flat Cable, Tarot SCB 68pin 1

CIS platen
Learn about the CIS platen parts and assemblies.

3022 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: CIS platen
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer CIS platen.

Figure 7-24 CIS platen

3
2
1

Table 7-24 CIS platen

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (ADF open sensor) 1

2 3SJ00-60109 CIS platen PCA 1

3 3SJ11-50006 Discrete power cable 1

4 3SJ00-50010 Platen FFC 68 pin 1

5 5QJ83-40036 Guide FFC 1

Parts and diagrams: CIS platen 3023

 Input devices
Learn about input device parts and assemblies.

3024 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Workgroup Dual cassette feeder (DCF, Tray 4, 5)
Learn about the DCF parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: DCF (1 of 2)

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer DCF.

Figure 7-25 DCF (1 of 2)

0
7

2
4

9 10

9
6 1 9 10

Table 7-25 DCF (1 of 2)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

0 6GW46-67001 DCF 1

1 5QJ98-40015 DCF right cover 1

2 5QJ98-40014 DCF rear cover 1

3 5QJ98-40017 DCF left cover 1

4 5QJ98-61006 DCF right door 1

5 5QJ98-61009 Tray 4 cassette 1

6 5QK03-40033 Tray 4 Blue CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40026 Tray 4 Gray CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40042 Tray 4 Red CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40043 Tray 4 Green CMF panel 1

Workgroup Dual cassette feeder (DCF, Tray 4, 5) 3025

 Table 7-25 DCF (1 of 2) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

6 8GR90-40044 Tray 4 Yellow CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40045 Tray 4 Purple CMF panel 1

7 5QJ98-61007 Tray 5 cassette 1

8 5QK03-40035 Tray 5 Blue CMF panel 1

8 8GR90-40025 Tray 5 Gray CMF panel 1

8 8GR90-40046 Tray 5 Red CMF panel 1

8 8GR90-40047 Tray 5 Green CMF panel 1

8 8GR90-40048 Tray 5 Yellow CMF panel 1

8 8GR90-40049 Tray 5 Purple CMF panel 1

9 6109-001138 Caster wheel 1

10 JC61-04871A Guide Adjust 1

3026 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: DCF (2 of 2)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer DCF.

Figure 7-26 DCF (2 of 2)

6
5
7

2
18
1 3
17
8 4
10 16
11 5
9

13 13

12 12

14 15
14 15

Table 7-26 DCF (2 of 2)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 5QJ98-61009 Tray 4 cassette 1

2 5QJ98-61007 Tray 5 cassette 1

3 5QJ90-64001 Tray 4 pickup drive assembly 1

4 5QJ90-64001 Tray 5 pickup drive assembly 1

5 5QJ90-64002 Tray 4, 5 pickup motor 1

6 JC93-00018B Tray 4 tray open, paper size sensor 1

7 JC93-00018B Tray 5 tray open, paper size sensor 1

8 JC93-01801A DCF feed drive assembly 1

9 5QJ90-60023 DCF feed motor 1

10 8GR90-60007 Tray 4 pickup assembly 1

Parts and diagrams: DCF (2 of 2) 3027

 Table 7-26 DCF (2 of 2) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

11 8GR90-60007 Tray 5 pickup assembly 1

12 5PN66-67001 Tray 4, 5 roller kit 1

13 0604-001490 Prefeed 4, 5 sensor 1

14 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (DCF paper empty sensor) 1

15 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (DCF stack height sensor) 1

16 6GW46-40010 DCF WG_Right door open switch holder assy 1

16 JC39-01696A DCF WG_Door open switch sensor and 1

harness

17 6GW46-60001 PCA-DCF Workgroup 1

18 Y1G22-67901 Tray heater 110V (not shown) 1

18 Y1G22-67902 Tray heater 220V (not shown) 1

3028 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Workgroup High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4)
Learn about the HCI parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: HCI (1 of 2)

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer HCI.

Figure 7-27 HCI (1 of 2)

6 3

7
4 8

7
1 7 8

Table 7-27 HCI (1 of 2)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

0 6GW48-67001 HCI 1

1 5QJ98-40024 HCI right cover 1

2 5QJ98-40014 HCI rear cover 1

3 5QJ98-40025 HCI left cover 1

4 5QJ98-61014 HCI right door 1

5 5QJ98-61012 Tray 4 1

6 5QK09-40024 Tray 4 Blue CMF panel 1

Workgroup High Capacity Input tray (HCI, Tray 4) 3029

 Table 7-27 HCI (1 of 2) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

6 8GR90-40024 Tray 4 Gray CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40050 Tray 4 Red CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40051 Tray 4 Green CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40052 Tray 4 Yellow CMF panel 1

6 8GR90-40053 Tray 4 Purple CMF panel 1

7 6109-001138 Caster wheel 1

8 JC61-04871A Guide adjust 1

3030 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: HCI (2 of 2)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer HCI.

Figure 7-28 HCI (2 of 2)

13

12 8
11 9
10

1
4
23 24

25
19
5
3 26
2

7
14
20
21 22

15
16

17 18

Table 7-28 HCI (2 of 2)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 5QJ98-61012 Tray 4 1

2 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI knock-up home sensor) 1

3 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI shift tray end sensor) 1

4 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI shift tray home sensor) 1

5 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI shift tray empty sensor) 1

6 JC81-07481B HCI shift plate 1

7 6GW48-60003 Knock-up plate assembly 1

8 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI shift tray level sensor 1) 1

9 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI shift tray level sensor 2) 1

10 JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting (HCI shift gate solenoid) 1

Parts and diagrams: HCI (2 of 2) 3031

 Table 7-28 HCI (2 of 2) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

11 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI shift gate solenoid 1

home sensor)

12 JC81-07478B Paper shift gate 1

13 JC92-02792A PBA-Shift tray level 1

14 8GR90-60001 HCI pickup assembly 1

15 5PN66-67001 HCI roller kit 1

16 0604-01490 Photo interrupter (HCI feed sensor) 1

17 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI paper empty sensor) 1

18 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI stack height sensor) 1

19 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI tray open sensor) 1

20 JC90-01385A Right door open switch holder assy 1

JC39-02601A DCF Dpt_Door open switch sensor and 1

harness

21 5QJ90-60130 HCI pickup motor drive assembly 1

22 JC93-01801A HCI feed motor drive assembly 1

23 JC31-00109A Motor, geared (HCI tray lift motor) 1

24 JC31-00125A Motor, geared (HCI paper shift motor) 1

25 6GW48-60001 PCA-HCI Workgroup 1

26 Y1G22-67901 Tray heater 110V (not shown) 1

27 Y1G22-67902 Tray heater 220V (not shown) 1

Output device
Learn about output device parts and assemblies.

3032 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Inner finisher
Learn about the inner finisher parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (1 of 5)

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer inner finisher.

Figure 7-29 Inner finisher (1 of 5)

2
2

Table 7-29 Inner finisher (1 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 6GW49-67002 Inner Finisher 1

2 6102-003354 Guide rail 1

3 JC90-01546A Exit bin full 1

Inner finisher 3033

 Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (2 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer inner finisher.

Figure 7-30 Inner finisher (2 of 5)

5
4

7 6

3 1
2

8
13

10
12
9
11

Table 7-30 Inner finisher (2 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 5QK09-60123 Front cover assy 1

2 5QK09-60125 Top cover assy 1

3 5QK09-60124 Middle cover assy 1

4 8GS05-60114 Punch cover assembly 1

5 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Entrance sensor) 1

6 155P7-67001 Hole 2/3 punch (optional) 1

3034 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-30 Inner finisher (2 of 5) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

6 155P8-67001 Hole 2/4 punch (optional) 1

6 155P9-67001 Swedish punch (optional) 1

7 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Entrance sensor) 1

8 5QK09-60118 Output tray assy 1

9 5QK09-40004 PCA cover 1

10 8GS05-60113 Left cover assy 1

11 5QK09-40018 Rear cover -base 1

12 5QK09-40037 Rear cover -punch 1

13 JC66-04233A Lock release handle 1

Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (2 of 5) 3035

 Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (3 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer inner finisher.

Figure 7-31 Inner finisher (3 of 5)

7 9

10
16

20
18 8

15
6 11

5
14
1 2
3

4 17
13

12
19

Table 7-31 Inner finisher (3 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 0604-001415 Photo interrupter (Exit sensor) 1

2 JC66-04199A Exit sensor actuator 1

3 5QK09-60128 Entrance motor assy 1

4 JC31-00169B Motor, step (Entrance motor) 1

5 6602-003644 Entrance motor timing belt 1

6 JC66-04243A Entrance roller 1

7 JC66-04243A Middle roller 1

8 JC90-01334B Output tray motor assy 1

9 JC31-00178B Motor DC (Output tray motor) 1

10 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Output tray motor sensor) 1

3036 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-31 Inner finisher (3 of 5) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

11 JC90-01320A Output tray lower limit switch assy 1

12 JC82-01039A Output tray top of stack sensor kit 1

13 JC90-01313A Paper holding actuator 1

14 JC90-01314A Paper holding kit 1

15 JC33-00037A Electric clutch (Paper holding solenoid) 1

16 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Paper holding sensor) 1

17 6GW49-60001 Inner finisher PCA 1

18 JC92-02780A Rear joint PCA 1

19 JC39-01610A Harness - cover open (Front cover switch) 1

20 JC39-01610A Harness - cover open (Top cover switch) 1

Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (3 of 5) 3037

 Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (4 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer inner finisher.

Figure 7-32 Inner finisher (4 of 5)

8 11
10

7
4

4 4
4 1 2
9 6

3
15
13
14
12
16

17

18

11

Table 7-32 Inner finisher (4 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 6GW49-60003 Stapler assembly 1

2 6GW49-40001 Staple cartridge 1

3 JC93-00999A Drive-motor step (Stapler position motor) 1

4 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Stapler position sensor) 1

5 JC90-01330A Exit roller assy 1

6 JC90-01331A Exit motor assy 1

7 JC31-00169B Motor, step (Exit motor) 1

8 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (End fence sensor) 1

9 JC90-01327A Main paddle 1

3038 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-32 Inner finisher (4 of 5) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

10 JC82-01038A Main paddle kit 1

11 JC90-01336A Sub paddle assy 1

12 JC66-04218A Gear rack pinion 1

13 JC66-04201A Actuator home paddle 1

14 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Main paddle home sensor) 1

15 JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Main paddle motor) 1

16 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (Punch waste full sensor) 1

17 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (finisher docking sensor) 1

18 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (punch waste box sensor) 1

Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (4 of 5) 3039

 Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (5 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer inner finisher.

Figure 7-33 Inner finisher (5 of 5)

10

11
1
3

13

12
2
4

7
5

Table 7-33 Inner finisher (5 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 SS456-61001 Ejector 1

3040 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-33 Inner finisher (5 of 5) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

2 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Ejector1 home sensor) 1

3 JC90-01310A Front paper support 1

4 JC90-01311A Rear paper support 1

5 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Paper support home 1

sensor)

6 JC90-01312A Paper support motor assy 1

7 JC93-00802B Drive sub-motor step (Paper support motor) 1

8 JC82-00899A Front tamper 1

9 JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Front tamper motor) 1

10 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Front tamper home sensor) 1

11 JC82-00900A Rear tamper 1

12 JC93-01001A Drive-motor step (Rear tamper motor) 1

13 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (Rear tamper home sensor) 1

Parts and diagrams: Inner finisher (5 of 5) 3041

 Stapler/Stacker finisher
Learn about the stapler/stacker parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

Parts diagram and parts list for the stapler/stacker finisher.

Figure 7-34 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

17
0

16

18

23 23

19
13 11

22

12
13 2
24
21
24 20
6 25
4
9
23
7 8
23 7
23
23
5 10

3042 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-34 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

0 6GW55-67001 Stapler/Stacker finisher 1

1 JC90-01442A Finisher mount bracket 1

2 5QK09-60106 Front door 1

3 8GS05-40018 Caster cover 1

4 8GS05-60122 Left lower cover 1

5 0604-001415 Main output tray lower limit sensor 1

6 8GS05-60118 Left upper cover 1

7 JC82-01039A Main output tray top of stack sensor 1

8 0604-001393 Front paper holding sensor 1

9 0604-001393 Rear paper holding sensor 1

10 0604-001393 Paper holding home sensor 1

11 5QK09-40027 Top output tray 1

12 5QK09-40028 Main output tray 1

14 5QK09-40029 Tray extension 1

14 5QK09-40021 Rear cover 1

15 5QK09-40030 Punch cover 1

16 5QK09-60108 Top cover 1

17 5QK09-60107 Top door 1

18 5QK09-60109 Right upper cover 1

19 5QK09-40019 Front cover 1

20 5QK09-40020 Front lower cover 1

21 5QK09-40047 Front lower left cover 1

22 5QK09-40048 Front lower right cover 1

23 JC61-07452A Caster 1

24 JC61-07444A Caster fix nut 1

25 JC66-04767A Shaft hinge - door 1

Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4) 3043

 Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)
Parts diagram and parts list for the stapler/stacker finisher.

Figure 7-35 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

11

10

43 22

47
42 9

17
18
46
45

48

18 19

12 13

44

23 20
25
36

24 21

Table 7-35 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

9 8GS05-60104 Entrance motor assembly 1

10 Y1G10-67901 Punch unit 2-3 hole 1

10 Y1G11-67901 Punch unit 2-4 hole 1

10 Y1G12-67901 Punch unit Swedish hole 1

11 JC90-01455A Top jam cover assembly 1

12 JC90-01458A Tray diverter cam 1

13 0604-001415 Tray diverter home sensor 1

17 8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly 1

3044 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-35 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

18 JC82-01039A Top output tray paper full sensor 1

19 JC39-02309A Front door switch 1

20 JC90-01453A Main exit cam motor assembly 1

21 0604-001393 Main exit cam home sensor 1

22 JC90-01480A Paddle 1

23 JC90-01461A Paddle motor assembly 1

24 0604-001393 Paddle home sensor 1

25 JC90-01467A End fence motor assembly 1

36 0604-001415 Manual staple senor 1

42 JC90-01415B Main output tray motor drive assembly 1

43 0604-001393 Main output tray motor sensor 1

44 JC39-02316A Main output tray top of stack switch 1

45 JC90-01414A Paper holding motor drive assembly 1

46 JC93-01152A Buffer motor 1

47 JC90-01675A Buffer solenoid assembly 1

48 6GW55-60001 Main PCA 1

Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4) 3045

 Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)
Parts diagram and parts list for the stapler/stacker finisher.

Figure 7-36 Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

15
2
3
5

16

14 1

Table 7-36 Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 5QK09-60110 Bridge unit 1

2 0604-001393 Bridge door sensor 1

3 JC32-00020A Bridge entrance sensor 1

4 0604-001393 Bridge exit sensor 1

5 3SJ19-80501 Bridge motor 1

14 JC90-01454A Top lower feed assembly 1

15 JC32-00020A Main exit sensor 1

16 0604-001393 Top exit sensor 1

17 8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly 1

3046 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)
Parts diagram and parts list for the stapler/stacker finisher.

Figure 7-37 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

29

27 26

28 6
37 34
44
33
30
32

39 38 7 35
31

8
40
41

Table 7-37 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

6 JC82-00901A Front tamper 1

7 0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor 1

8 JC93-01001A Front tamper motor 1

26 JC82-00898A Rear tamper 1

27 0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor 1

28 JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor 1

29 JC82-00894A Staple unit 1

30 JC81-09882B Staple cartridge 1

31 0604-001393 Staple front sensor 1

32 0604-001393 Staple mid-front sensor 1

33 0604-001393 Staple mid-rear sensor 1

34 0604-001393 Staple rear sensor 1

Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4) 3047

 Table 7-37 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

35 JC31-00163A Staple position motor 1

37 JC90-01802A Ejector unit 1

38 JC32-00020A Ejector sensor 1

39 0604-001415 Ejector1 home sensor 1

40 0604-001415 Ejector1 motor sensor 1

41 0604-001415 Ejector2 motor sensor 1

3048 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Booklet finisher
Learn about the booklet finisher parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (1 of 5)

Parts diagram and parts list for the printer booklet finisher.

Figure 7-38 Booklet finisher (1 of 5)

1

18

17
0
16

19
15
25
12 25 20

14

13 25
23
21
25
2
14
24 22 26
7 24
24
24
3
5

6 28 8 10
28
9
4 8

11
27

Table 7-38 Booklet finisher (1 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

0 6GW51-67001 Booklet finisher 1

1 JC90-01442A Finisher mount bracket 1

2 5QK09-60104 Booklet maker unit 1

3 5QK09-60106 Front door 1

4 8GS05-40018 Caster cover 1

5 8GS05-60124 Left lower cover (Booklet) 1

6 0604-001415 Main output tray lower limit sensor 1

Booklet finisher 3049

 Table 7-38 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

7 8GS05-60118 Left upper cover 1

8 JC82-01039A Main output tray top of stack sensor 1

9 0604-001393 Front paper holding sensor 1

10 0604-001393 Rear paper holding sensor 1

11 0604-001393 Paper holding home sensor 1

12 5QK09-40027 Top output tray 1

13 5QK09-40028 Main output tray 1

14 5QK09-40029 Tray extension 1

15 5QK09-40021 Rear cover 1

16 5QK09-40030 Punch cover 1

17 5QK09-60108 Top cover 1

18 5QK09-60107 Top door 1

19 5QK09-60109 Right upper cover 1

20 5QK09-40019 Front cover 1

21 5QK09-40020 Front lower cover 1

22 5QK09-40047 Front lower left cover 1

23 5QK09-40048 Front lower right cover 1

24 JC61-07452A Caster 1

25 JC61-07444A Caster fix nut 1

26 JC66-04767A Shaft hinge - door 1

27 8GS05-60126 Booklet output tray 1

28 JC82-01039A Booklet output tray sensor 1

3050 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (2 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer booklet finisher.

Figure 7-39 Booklet finisher (2 of 5)

11

1
12

10

17
9

13
15
14 14
26

18
16

2
25
19
23 20 27

3
4

24

5 8

7
21

Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (2 of 5) 3051

 Table 7-39 Booklet finisher (2 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 0604-001415 Booklet entrance sensor 1

2 JC90-01425A Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly 1

3 0604-001393 Booklet paddle home sensor 1

4 JC90-01430A Booklet paddle motor assembly 1

5 JC90-01432A Booklet end fence 1

6 0604-001393 Booklet end fence home sensor 1

7 JC93-01155A Booklet end fence motor 1

8 0604-001393 Booklet presser home sensor 1

9 JC90-01431A Booklet tamper 1

10 0604-001393 Booklet tamper home sensor 1

11 JC93-01155A Booklet tamper motor 1

12 JC32-00020A Booklet tamper sensor 1

13 8GS05-60126 Booklet stapler 1

14 JC81-08274A Booklet stapler cartridge 1

15 JC93-01163A Booklet blade 1

16 0604-001393 Booklet blade home sensor 1

17 JC90-01435A Booklet blade motor assembly 1

18 JC90-01436A Booklet fold motor assembly 1

19 JC61-07366A Booklet c-fold blade 1

20 JC90-01396A Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly 1

21 0604-001393 Booklet c-fold blade home sensor 1

22 JC90-01398A Booklet diverter 1

23 JC90-01397A Booklet diverter motor assembly 1

24 0604-001415 Booklet diverter home sensor 1

25 JC32-00020A Booklet exit sensor 1

26 6GW51-60001 Booklet maker PCA 1

27 JC90-01478B Booklet front cover 1

3052 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (3 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer booklet finisher.

Figure 7-40 Booklet finisher (3 of 5)

11

10

43 22

47
42 9

17
18
46
45

48

18 19

12 13

44

23 20
25
36

24 21

Table 7-40 Booklet finisher (3 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

9 8GS05-60104 Entrance motor assembly 1

10 Y1G10-67901 Punch unit 2-3 hole 1

10 Y1G11-67901 Punch unit 2-4 hole 1

10 Y1G12-67901 Punch unit Swedish hole 1

11 JC90-01455A Top jam cover assembly 1

12 JC90-01458A Tray diverter cam 1

13 0604-001415 Tray diverter home sensor 1

17 8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly 1

Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (3 of 5) 3053

 Table 7-40 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

18 JC82-01039A Top output tray paper full sensor 1

19 JC39-02309A Front door switch 1

20 JC90-01453A Main exit cam motor assembly 1

21 0604-001393 Main exit cam home sensor 1

22 JC90-01480A Paddle 1

23 JC90-01461A Paddle motor assembly 1

24 0604-001393 Paddle home sensor 1

25 JC90-01467A End fence motor assembly 1

36 0604-001415 Manual staple senor 1

42 JC90-01415B Main output tray motor drive assembly 1

43 0604-001393 Main output tray motor sensor 1

44 JC39-02316A Main output tray top of stack switch 1

45 JC90-01414A Paper holding motor drive assembly 1

46 JC93-01152A Buffer motor 1

47 JC90-01675A Buffer solenoid assembly 1

48 6GW55-60001 Main PCA 1

3054 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (4 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer booklet finisher.

Figure 7-41 Booklet finisher (4 of 5)

15
2
3
5

16

14 1

Table 7-41 Booklet finisher (4 of 4)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 5QK09-60110 Bridge unit 1

2 0604-001393 Bridge door sensor 1

3 JC32-00020A Bridge entrance sensor 1

4 0604-001393 Bridge exit sensor 1

5 3SJ19-80501 Bridge motor 1

14 JC90-01454A Top lower feed assembly 1

15 JC32-00020A Main exit sensor 1

16 0604-001393 Top exit sensor 1

17 8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly 1

Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (4 of 5) 3055

 Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (5 of 5)
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer booklet finisher.

Figure 7-42 Booklet finisher (5 of 5)

29

27 26

28 6
37 34
44
33
30
32

39 38 7 35
31

8
40
41

Table 7-42 Booklet finisher (5 of 5)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

6 JC82-00901A Front tamper 1

7 0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor 1

8 JC93-01001A Front tamper motor 1

26 JC82-00898A Rear tamper 1

27 0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor 1

28 JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor 1

29 JC82-00894A Staple unit 1

30 JC81-09882B Staple cartridge 1

31 0604-001393 Staple front sensor 1

32 0604-001393 Staple mid-front sensor 1

33 0604-001393 Staple mid-rear sensor 1

34 0604-001393 Staple rear sensor 1

3056 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-42 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

35 JC31-00163A Staple position motor 1

37 JC90-01802A Ejector unit 1

38 JC32-00020A Ejector sensor 1

39 0604-001415 Ejector1 home sensor 1

40 0604-001415 Ejector1 motor sensor 1

41 0604-001415 Ejector2 motor sensor 1

Parts and diagrams: Booklet finisher (5 of 5) 3057

 Print Quality Diagnostics output devices
Learn about the Print Quality Diagnostics finisher parts and assemblies.

Parts and diagrams: Stapler/Stacker finisher or Booklet finisher with Print Quality Diagnostics
Parts diagram and parts list for the Stapler/Stacker finisher or Booklet finisher with Print Quality
Diagnostics.

Figure 7-43 Parts and diagrams: Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics
3

1 2

Table 7-43 Print Quality Diagnostics

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 63C82-70001 Stapler/Stacker finisher with Print Quality 1

Diagnostic

2 63C81-70001 Booklet finisher with Print Quality Diagnostic 1

3 63C80-60109 Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 1

3058 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics
Parts diagram and parts list for the printer Print Quality Diagnostics.

Figure 7-44 Parts and diagrams: Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics

Table 7-44 Print Quality Diagnostics

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 63C82-67027 Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics 1

2 63C80-60109 Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 1

3 63C82-60117 Exit Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 1

Parts and diagrams: Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics 3059

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Exit motor JC93-01686A Exit unit (1 of 2) on page 3000

200sh ADF WF PCA (flow) 5QJ90-67008 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3019

200sh ENT ADF PCA 5QJ90-67013 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3019

A3 White Backing Kit 5QJ90-67005 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3019

ADF Blue CMF panel 5QJ90-40056 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3018

ADF Blue CMF panel 5QJ90-40056 100sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3020

ADF FFC cable to SSA 5QJ90-67009 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3019

ADF Gray CMF panel 5QJ90-40108 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3018

ADF Gray CMF panel 5QJ90-40108 100sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3020

ADF Green CMF panel 5QJ90-40110 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3018

ADF Green CMF panel 5QJ90-40110 100sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3020

ADF Power cable 5QJ90-67010 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3019

ADF Purple CMF panel 5QJ90-40112 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3018

ADF Purple CMF panel 5QJ90-40112 100sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3020

ADF Red CMF panel 5QJ90-40109 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3018

ADF Red CMF panel 5QJ90-40109 100sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3020

ADF Yellow CMF panel 5QJ90-40111 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3018

ADF Yellow CMF panel 5QJ90-40111 100sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3020

ADF roller kit 5851-7202 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3019

ADF roller kit 5QJ83-67002 100sh ADF (2 of 2) on page 3021

Accelerator (Optional) 6HN30-67001 PCA on page 3014

Actuator home paddle JC66-04201A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Bin full exit actuator JC66-04339A Exit unit (1 of 2) on page 3000

Bin full exit actuator lever JC66-02278A Exit unit (1 of 2) on page 3000

Black developer powder kit 5QJ90-61013 Developer on page 3007

Black developer unit 5PN57-67001 Developer on page 3007

Black drum and ITB motor JC31-00123G Drum on page 3008

Black drum unit W9074-67001 Drum on page 3008

Black toner cartridge -High yield W9150-67007 Toner on page 3003

3060 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Black toner dispense motor SS216-80501 Toner on page 3003

Black toner duct unit 5QJ94-40001 Duct assembly on page 3004

Black toner guide unit 5QJ90-60072 Duct assembly on page 3004

Booklet blade JC93-01163A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet blade home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet blade motor assembly JC90-01435A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet c-fold blade JC61-07366A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet c-fold blade home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly JC90-01396A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet diverter JC90-01398A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet diverter home sensor 0604-001415 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet diverter motor assembly JC90-01397A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet end fence JC90-01432A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet end fence home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet end fence motor JC93-01155A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet entrance sensor 0604-001415 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly JC90-01425A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet exit sensor JC32-00020A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet finisher 6GW51-67001 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Booklet finisher with Print Quality Diagnostic 63C81-70001 Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3058

Booklet fold motor assembly JC90-01436A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet front cover JC90-01478B Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet maker PCA 6GW51-60001 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Alphabetical parts list 3061

 Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Booklet maker unit 5QK09-60104 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Booklet output tray 8GS05-60126 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Booklet output tray sensor JC82-01039A Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Booklet paddle home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet paddle motor assembly JC90-01430A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet presser home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet stapler 8GS05-60126 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet stapler cartridge JC81-08274A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet tamper JC90-01431A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Booklet tamper sensor JC32-00020A Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

Bridge entrance sensor JC32-00020A Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

Bridge entrance sensor JC32-00020A Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

Bridge motor 3SJ19-80501 Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

Bridge motor 3SJ19-80501 Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

Bridge unit 5QK09-60110 Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

Bridge unit 5QK09-60110 Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

3062 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 63C80-60109 Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3058

Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 63C80-60109 Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3059

Buffer motor JC93-01152A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Buffer motor JC93-01152A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Buffer solenoid assembly JC90-01675A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Buffer solenoid assembly JC90-01675A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

CIS platen PCA CIS platen on page 3023

CPR sensor JC32-00014A CPR on page 3011

CPR sensor JC32-00014A CPR on page 3011

CPR sensor JC32-00014A CPR on page 3011

CPR shutter drive assembly JC93-00894A CPR on page 3011

Card reader rotation adapter kit 63C82-67029 Covers on page 2992

Caster JC61-07452A Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Caster JC61-07452A Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Caster cover 8GS05-40018 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Caster cover 8GS05-40018 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Caster fix nut JC61-07444A Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Caster fix nut JC61-07444A Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Caster wheel 6109-001138 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

Caster wheel 6109-001138 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit 5QJ90-60137 CPR on page 3011

Control-panel assembly 20.3 cm 8 in 3SJ15-60101 PCA on page 3014

Control-panel assembly 25.6 cm 10.1 in 2nd 5QK42-60104 PCA on page 3014

Controller cover 6ER04-61005 Covers on page 2992

Cover Rear 3SJ11-40008 ISA on page 3017

Cradle-HDD 5851-7753 PCA on page 3014

Cradle-Riser Card 5851-7754 PCA on page 3014

Cyan developer powder kit 5QJ90-61012 Developer on page 3007

Alphabetical parts list 3063

 Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Cyan developer unit 5PN60-67001 Developer on page 3007

Cyan drum motor JC31-00123G Drum on page 3008

Cyan drum unit W9075-67001 Drum on page 3008

Cyan toner cartridge -High yield W9151-67007 Toner on page 3003

Cyan toner cartridge -Standard yield W9141-67006 Toner on page 3003

Cyan toner dispense motor SS216-80501 Toner on page 3003

Cyan toner duct unit 5QJ94-40001 Duct assembly on page 3004

Cyan toner guide unit 5QJ90-60072 Duct assembly on page 3004

Cyan, black toner duct motor SS216-80501 Duct assembly on page 3004

Cyan, black toner supply motor assembly JC93-01680A Toner on page 3003

Cyan, black toner supply motor assembly JC93-01680A Duct assembly on page 3004

DCF 6GW46-67001 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

DCF Dpt_Door open switch sensor and harness HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

DCF left cover 5QJ98-40017 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

DCF rear cover 5QJ98-40014 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

DCF right cover 5QJ98-40015 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

DCF right door 5QJ98-61006 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

Damper module 5QJ90-67006 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3019

Dev fan assembly 5QJ90-40126 Sensor and fan on page 3013

Discrete power cable CIS platen on page 3023

Discrete power cable 3SJ11-50006 Tarot platen on page 3022

Drive sub-motor step JC93-00802B Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

Drive-motor step JC93-00999A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Drive-motor step JC93-01001A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Drive-motor step JC93-01001A Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

Drive-motor step JC93-01001A Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

Drum and developer drive assembly JC93-01674A Developer on page 3007

Drum and developer drive assembly JC93-01674A Drum on page 3008

Drum and developer drive assembly JC93-01674A ITB on page 3010

Dual Fax Card (BBU) (Optional) 7ZA07-67001 PCA on page 3014

Dual Fax Card (WW) (Optional) 5QK14-67001 PCA on page 3014

3064 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Duplex motor JC93-01687A Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

Duplex unit JC95-02292A Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

Echo PCA (Not orderable and not used in printer.) T3U64-60001 (Not PCA on page 3014
orderable and not used in
printer.)

Ejector SS456-61001 Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

Ejector sensor JC32-00020A Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Ejector sensor JC32-00020A Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Ejector unit JC90-01802A Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Ejector unit JC90-01802A Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Ejector1 home sensor 0604-001415 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Ejector1 home sensor 0604-001415 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Ejector1 motor sensor 0604-001415 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Ejector1 motor sensor 0604-001415 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Ejector2 motor sensor 0604-001415 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Ejector2 motor sensor 0604-001415 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Electric clutch JC33-00037A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

Electric clutch JC47-00037A Tray 1 on page 2995

End fence motor assembly JC90-01467A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

End fence motor assembly JC90-01467A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Entrance motor assembly 8GS05-60104 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Entrance motor assembly 8GS05-60104 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Entrance motor assy 5QK09-60128 Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

Entrance motor timing belt 6602-003644 Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

Alphabetical parts list 3065

 Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Entrance roller JC66-04243A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

Exit 2 motor (Optional) JC93-00802A Exit unit (2 of 2) on page 3002

Exit Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics 63C82-60117 Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3059

Exit bin full JC90-01546A Inner finisher (1 of 5) on page

3033

Exit cover stacker 5QJ90-60116 Covers on page 2992

Exit motor assembly 8GS05-60106 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Exit motor assembly 8GS05-60106 Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

Exit motor assembly 8GS05-60106 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Exit motor assembly 8GS05-60106 Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

Exit motor assy JC90-01331A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Exit rear cover 6EQ94-40009 Covers on page 2992

Exit roller assy JC90-01330A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Exit sensor actuator JC66-04199A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

Exit stack guide JC90-01874A Exit unit (1 of 2) on page 3000

Exit stacker upper cover 6EQ94-40010 Covers on page 2992

Exit unit JC90-01876A Exit unit (1 of 2) on page 3000

Feed drive assembly JC93-01682A Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Feed motor JC31-00163A Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Finisher mount bracket JC90-01442A Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Finisher mount bracket JC90-01442A Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Formatter 6CF14-67003 PCA on page 3014

Frame sub-sensor paper size RU JC93-01408A Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Frame sub-sensor paper size RU JC93-01408A Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Front cover 5QK09-40019 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Front cover 5QK09-40019 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Front cover - Blue CMF Panel 6EQ94-40001 Covers on page 2992

Front cover - Gray CMF Panel 5QJ90-40095 Covers on page 2992

3066 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Front cover - Green CMF Panel 5QJ90-40097 Covers on page 2992

Front cover - Purple CMF Panel 5QJ90-40099 Covers on page 2992

Front cover - Red CMF Panel 5QJ90-40096 Covers on page 2992

Front cover - Yellow CMF Panel 5QJ90-40098 Covers on page 2992

Front cover assembly 5QJ90-60118 Covers on page 2992

Front cover assy 5QK09-60123 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

Front door 5QK09-60106 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Front door 5QK09-60106 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Front door open switch JC93-00466A Sensor and fan on page 3013

Front door switch JC39-02309A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Front door switch JC39-02309A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Front lower cover 5QK09-40020 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Front lower cover 5QK09-40020 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Front lower cover 6EQ94-40011 Covers on page 2992

Front lower left cover 5QK09-40047 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Front lower left cover 5QK09-40047 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Front lower right cover 5QK09-40048 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Front lower right cover 5QK09-40048 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Front paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Front paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Front paper support JC90-01310A Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

Front tamper JC82-00899A Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

Front tamper JC82-00901A Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Front tamper JC82-00901A Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Alphabetical parts list 3067

 Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Front tamper motor JC93-01001A Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Front tamper motor JC93-01001A Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Fuser and exit drive assembly JC93-01678A Exit unit (1 of 2) on page 3000

Fuser and exit drive assembly JC93-01678A Fuser on page 3012

Fuser drive board (FDB), 110V JC44-00210F PCA on page 3014

Fuser drive board (FDB), 220V JC44-00211F PCA on page 3014

Fuser fan assembly 5QJ90-40125 Sensor and fan on page 3013

Fuser motor JC31-00123B Fuser on page 3012

Fuser support bracket JC61-07804A Fuser on page 3012

Fuser unit -100V 5PN50-67001 Fuser on page 3012

Fuser unit -110V 5PN61-67001 Fuser on page 3012

Fuser unit -220V 5PN62-67001 Fuser on page 3012

Gear rack pinion JC66-04218A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Guide Adjust JC61-04871A DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

Guide FFC CIS platen on page 3023

Guide adjust JC61-04871A HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

Guide rail 6102-003354 Inner finisher (1 of 5) on page

3033

HCI 6GW48-67001 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

HCI feed motor drive assembly JC93-01801A HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

HCI left cover 5QJ98-40025 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

HCI pickup assembly 8GR90-60001 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

HCI pickup motor drive assembly 5QJ90-60130 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

HCI rear cover 5QJ98-40014 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

HCI right cover 5QJ98-40024 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

HCI right door 5QJ98-61014 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

HCI roller kit 5PN66-67001 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

HCI shift plate JC81-07481B HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

HIP cover 6EQ94-40032 Covers on page 2992

HP LaserJet 180ipm 200 sheet DADF Scanner 3SJ11-60101 ISA on page 3017

HP LaserJet WG Job Separator (Optional) 6GW52A Exit unit (2 of 2) on page 3002

3068 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Hard disk 500GB SED 933853-011 PCA on page 3014

Harness - cover open JC39-01610A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

Harness - cover open JC39-01610A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) JC44-00212D PCA on page 3014

Hinge Kit 5QJ90-67004 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3019

Hole 2/3 punch (optional) 155P7-67001 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

Hole 2/4 punch (optional) 155P8-67001 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

ITB and cleaning unit kit 430H4-67001 ITB on page 3010

ITB cleaning unit 5PN64-67001 ITB on page 3010

ITB engage motor JC93-00452A ITB on page 3010

Image-transfer belt (ITB) 5QJ90-60051 ITB on page 3010

Inner Finisher 6GW49-67002 Inner finisher (1 of 5) on page

3033

Inner cover 5QJ90-60117 Covers on page 2992

Inner finisher PCA 6GW49-60001 Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

Island of Data (IOD) 3SJ06-60001 PCA on page 3014

Keyboard (drawer type) Assy – E1 series US English PCA on page 3014

Keyboard (drawer type) Assy – E7 series US English PCA on page 3014

Keyboard Assy-UK English JC93-01743A PCA on page 3014

Keyboard Assy-US English JC93-01742A PCA on page 3014

Keyboard overlay kit (ES, PT) 5851-6023 PCA on page 3014

Keyboard overlay kit (FR, IT, RU, DE,ES,UK Kybd) 5851-6019 PCA on page 3014

Keyboard overlay kit (FR-CN, ES-LA, ES,US Kybd) 5851-6020 PCA on page 3014

Keyboard overlay kit (FR-SW, DE-SW, DA,UK Kybd) 5851-6021 PCA on page 3014

Keyboard overlay kit (JA-KG, JA-KT) 5851-6024 PCA on page 3014

Keyboard overlay kit (ZHTW, ZHCN) 5851-6022 PCA on page 3014

Kit-Screws c-clips e-clips kit X3A92-67924 Covers on page 2992

Knock-up plate assembly 6GW48-60003 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

LSU fan assembly JC93-01784A Sensor and fan on page 3013

LVPS FDB fan assembly JC93-01786A Sensor and fan on page 3013

Laser scanner unit (LSU) JC97-05148A Laser scanner unit on page

3006

Alphabetical parts list 3069

 Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Left cover 5QJ90-60115 Covers on page 2992

Left cover assy 8GS05-60113 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

Left lower cover 8GS05-60122 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Left lower cover (Booklet) 8GS05-60124 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Left top cover JC63-04534B Covers on page 2992

Left upper cover 8GS05-60118 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Left upper cover 8GS05-60118 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Left upper cover 6EQ94-40012 Covers on page 2992

Lock release handle JC66-04233A Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

Loop actuator JC66-05625A Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), 110V 5QJ90-60014 PCA on page 3014

Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), 220V 5QJ90-60015 PCA on page 3014

Magenta developer powder kit 5QJ90-61011 Developer on page 3007

Magenta developer unit 5PN59-67001 Developer on page 3007

Magenta drum motor JC31-00123G Drum on page 3008

Magenta drum unit W9075-67001 Drum on page 3008

Magenta toner cartridge -High yield W9153-67007 Toner on page 3003

Magenta toner cartridge -Standard yield W9143-67005 Toner on page 3003

Magenta toner dispense motor SS216-80501 Toner on page 3003

SS216-80501

Magenta toner duct unit 5QJ94-40001 Duct assembly on page 3004

Magenta toner guide unit 5QJ90-60072 Duct assembly on page 3004

Main PCA 6GW55-60001 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Main PCA 6GW55-60001 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Main exit cam home sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Main exit cam home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Main exit cam motor assembly JC90-01453A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Main exit cam motor assembly JC90-01453A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

3070 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Main exit sensor JC32-00020A Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

Main exit sensor JC32-00020A Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

Main output tray 5QK09-40028 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Main output tray 5QK09-40028 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Main output tray lower limit sensor 0604-001415 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Main output tray lower limit sensor 0604-001415 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page
3049

Main output tray motor drive assembly JC90-01415B Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Main output tray motor drive assembly JC90-01415B Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page
3053

Main output tray motor sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Main output tray motor sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Main output tray top of stack sensor JC82-01039A Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Main output tray top of stack sensor JC82-01039A Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page
3049

Main output tray top of stack switch JC39-02316A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Main output tray top of stack switch JC39-02316A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page
3053

Main paddle JC90-01327A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Main paddle kit JC82-01038A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Main-front package HV frame JC93-00494A ITB on page 3010

Manual staple senor 0604-001415 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Manual staple senor 0604-001415 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Middle cover assy 5QK09-60124 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

Middle left cover 6EQ94-40031 Covers on page 2992

Middle roller JC66-04243A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

Middle upper cover 6EQ94-40017 Covers on page 2992

Alphabetical parts list 3071

 Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Motor BLDC JC31-00123B Developer on page 3007

Motor BLDC JC31-00123B Developer on page 3007

Motor BLDC JC31-00123G ITB on page 3010

Motor DC JC31-00078A CPR on page 3011

Motor DC JC31-00178B Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

Motor, geared JC31-00109A HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Motor, geared JC31-00125A HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Motor, step JC31-00169B Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

Motor, step JC31-00169B Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Outer environment sensor assembly 5QJ90-40002 Sensor and fan on page 3013

Output tray assy 5QK09-60118 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

Output tray lower limit switch assy JC90-01320A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page
3036

Output tray motor assy JC90-01334B Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

Output tray top of stack sensor kit JC82-01039A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page
3036

PBA-Shift tray level JC92-02792A HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

PCA -power key 3SJ33-60007 Covers on page 2992

PCA cover 5QK09-40004 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

PCA-HCI Workgroup 6GW48-60001 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Paddle JC90-01480A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Paddle JC90-01480A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Paddle motor assembly JC90-01461A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Paddle motor assembly JC90-01461A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Paper dust holder assembly JC93-00078C Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

Paper holding actuator JC90-01313A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

3072 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Paper holding home sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Paper holding home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Paper holding kit JC90-01314A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

Paper holding motor drive assembly JC90-01414A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Paper holding motor drive assembly JC90-01414A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Paper shift gate JC81-07478B HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Paper support motor assy JC90-01312A Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Exit unit (1 of 2) on page 3000

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Exit unit (2 of 2) on page 3002

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Exit unit (2 of 2) on page 3002

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Toner collection unit on page

3005

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Drum on page 3008

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Drum on page 3008

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Drum on page 3008

Alphabetical parts list 3073

 Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Drum on page 3008

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 ITB on page 3010

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 CPR on page 3011

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Tarot platen on page 3022

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 CIS platen on page 3023

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

Photo interrupter 0604-001415 Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

3074 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Photo interrupter 0604-01490 Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Photo interrupter 0604-01490 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Platen FFC 68 pin CIS platen on page 3023

Power key 6EQ94-40029 Covers on page 2992

Power key PCA 3SJ33-60007 PCA on page 3014

Punch cover 5QK09-40030 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Punch cover 5QK09-40030 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Punch cover assembly 8GS05-60114 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

Punch unit 2-3 hole Y1G10-67901 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Punch unit 2-3 hole Y1G10-67901 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Punch unit 2-4 hole Y1G11-67901 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Punch unit 2-4 hole Y1G11-67901 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Punch unit Swedish hole Y1G12-67901 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Punch unit Swedish hole Y1G12-67901 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Rear cover 5QK09-40021 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Rear cover 5QK09-40021 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Rear cover -base 5QK09-40018 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

Rear cover -punch 5QK09-40037 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

Rear joint PCA JC92-02780A Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

Rear lower cover 6EQ94-40004 Covers on page 2992

Rear paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Rear paper holding sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Rear paper support JC90-01311A Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

Rear tamper JC82-00898A Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Alphabetical parts list 3075

 Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Rear tamper JC82-00898A Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Rear tamper JC82-00900A Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Rear upper cover 6EQ94-40014 Covers on page 2992

Registration and tray 1 motor JC31-00123B Tray 1 on page 2995

Registration and tray 1 motor JC31-00123B Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

Registration clutch JC47-00037A Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

Registration drive assembly JC93-00443A Tray 1 on page 2995

Registration drive assembly JC93-00443A Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

Registration unit 5QJ90-60129 Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

Right door assembly JC95-02257A Tray 1 on page 2995

Right door exit assembly JC90-01877A Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

Right door fan JC31-00160C Sensor and fan on page 3013

Right door front damper JC66-01425A Tray 1 on page 2995

Right door front link JC66-03235A Tray 1 on page 2995

Right door open switch holder assy JC90-01385A HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Right front cover 6EQ94-40005 Covers on page 2992

Right middle cover 6EQ94-40013 Covers on page 2992

Right middle cover assembly 5QJ90-60114 Covers on page 2992

Right rear cover 6EQ94-40006 Covers on page 2992

Right upper cover 5QK09-60109 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Right upper cover 5QK09-60109 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Right upper cover 6EQ94-40015 Covers on page 2992

Riser for HDD 3SJ01-60001 PCA on page 3014

3076 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Riser for HDD, USB ports, Accelerator 3SJ02-60001 PCA on page 3014

Rivet-Echo PCA (Not orderable and not used in printer.) 6ER04-40034 (Not PCA on page 3014
orderable and not used in
printer.)

Rivet-HDD 6ER04-40035 PCA on page 3014

SVC-Flat Cable, Tarot SCB 50pin 5QK08-67011 Tarot platen on page 3022

SVC-Flat Cable, Tarot SCB 68pin 5QK08-67012 Tarot platen on page 3022

SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit 4XN67-67001 PCA on page 3014

Second exit (Optional) Y1G23-67901 Exit unit (2 of 2) on page 3002

Second transfer (T2) assembly 5PN65-67001 Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

Shaft hinge - door JC66-04767A Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Shaft hinge - door JC66-04767A Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Single Fax Card (BBU) (Optional) 7ZA09-67001 PCA on page 3014

Single Fax Card (WW) (Optional) 7ZA08-67001 PCA on page 3014

Solenoid, lifting JC33-00031B Exit unit (2 of 2) on page 3002

Solenoid, lifting JC33-00031B HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Spring-TS JC61-07185A Exit unit (1 of 2) on page 3000

Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics 63C82-67027 Print Quality Diagnostics on

page 3059

Staple cartridge 6GW49-40001 Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Staple cartridge JC81-09882B Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Staple cartridge JC81-09882B Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Staple front sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Staple front sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Staple mid-front sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Staple mid-front sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Staple mid-rear sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Staple mid-rear sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Staple position motor JC31-00163A Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Alphabetical parts list 3077

 Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Staple position motor JC31-00163A Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Staple rear sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Staple rear sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Staple unit JC82-00894A Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Staple unit JC82-00894A Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

Stapler assembly 6GW49-60003 Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Stapler/Stacker finisher 6GW55-67001 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Stapler/Stacker finisher with Print Quality Diagnostic 63C82-70001 Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3058

Sub paddle assy JC90-01336A Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

Swedish punch (optional) 155P9-67001 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

Switch JC93-01467A Sensor and fan on page 3013

TPM 3SJ03-60001 (Not PCA on page 3014

Orderable)

Tarot platen PCA Y6V12-60035 Tarot platen on page 3022

Thermistor 1404-001417 Sensor and fan on page 3013

Tie stopper JC61-04626A Covers on page 2992

Toner CRUM module assembly JC93-01822A Toner on page 3003

Toner collection unit X3A83-67923 Toner collection unit on page

3005

Toner collection unit drive assembly JC93-00445A Toner collection unit on page
3005

Toner collection unit full sensor JC93-00492A Toner collection unit on page
3005

Toner collection unit motor JC31-00166A Toner collection unit on page

3005

Top cover 5QK09-60108 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Top cover 5QK09-60108 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Top cover assy 5QK09-60125 Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

Top door 5QK09-60107 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

3078 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Top door 5QK09-60107 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Top exit sensor 0604-001393 Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

Top exit sensor 0604-001393 Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

Top jam cover assembly JC90-01455A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Top jam cover assembly JC90-01455A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Top lower feed assembly JC90-01454A Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

Top lower feed assembly JC90-01454A Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

Top output tray 5QK09-40027 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Top output tray 5QK09-40027 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Top output tray paper full sensor JC82-01039A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Top output tray paper full sensor JC82-01039A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page
3053

Tray 1 paper empty sensor 0604-001381 Tray 1 on page 2995

Tray 1 roller kit 5RC02-67001 Tray 1 on page 2995

Tray 1 unit JC90-01869A Tray 1 on page 2995

Tray 2 cassette 5QJ90-60111 Covers on page 2992

Tray 2 cassette 5QJ90-60111 Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Tray 2 cover - Blue CMF panel 5QJ90-40022 Covers on page 2992

Tray 2 cover - Gray CMF panel 5QJ90-40087 Covers on page 2992

Tray 2 cover - Green CMF panel 5QJ90-40089 Covers on page 2992

Tray 2 cover - Purple CMF panel 5QJ90-40091 Covers on page 2992

Tray 2 cover - Red CMF panel 5QJ90-40088 Covers on page 2992

Tray 2 cover - Yellow CMF panel 5QJ90-40090 Covers on page 2992

Tray 2 pickup assembly JC93-01728A Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Tray 2 pickup drive assembly 5QJ90-64001 Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Tray 2 pickup motor 5QJ90-64002 Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Tray 2, 3 roller kit 5PN66-67001 Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Tray 3 cassette 5QJ90-60119 Covers on page 2992

Tray 3 cassette 5QJ90-60119 Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Alphabetical parts list 3079

 Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Tray 3 cover - Blue CMF panel 5QJ94-40016 Covers on page 2992

Tray 3 cover - Gray CMF panel 5QJ94-40024 Covers on page 2992

Tray 3 cover - Green CMF panel 5QJ94-40026 Covers on page 2992

Tray 3 cover - Purple CMF panel 5QJ94-40028 Covers on page 2992

Tray 3 cover - Red CMF panel 5QJ94-40025 Covers on page 2992

Tray 3 cover - Yellow CMF panel 5QJ94-40027 Covers on page 2992

Tray 3 pickup assembly JC93-01729A Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Tray 3 pickup drive assembly 5QJ90-64001 Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Tray 3 pickup motor 5QJ90-64002 Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Tray 4 5QJ98-61012 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

Tray 4 5QJ98-61012 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Tray 4 Blue CMF panel 5QK03-40033 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

Tray 4 Blue CMF panel 5QK09-40024 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

Tray 4 Gray CMF panel 8GR90-40024 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

Tray 4 Gray CMF panel 8GR90-40026 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

Tray 4 Green CMF panel 8GR90-40043 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

Tray 4 Green CMF panel 8GR90-40051 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

Tray 4 Purple CMF panel 8GR90-40045 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

Tray 4 Purple CMF panel 8GR90-40053 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

Tray 4 Red CMF panel 8GR90-40042 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

Tray 4 Red CMF panel 8GR90-40050 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

Tray 4 Yellow CMF panel 8GR90-40044 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

Tray 4 Yellow CMF panel 8GR90-40052 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

Tray 4 cassette 5QJ98-61009 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

Tray 4 cassette 5QJ98-61009 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

Tray 4 pickup assembly 8GR90-60007 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

Tray 4 pickup drive assembly 5QJ90-64001 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

Tray 4, 5 roller kit 5PN66-67001 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

Tray 5 Blue CMF panel 5QK03-40035 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

Tray 5 Gray CMF panel 8GR90-40025 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

Tray 5 Green CMF panel 8GR90-40047 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

Tray 5 Purple CMF panel 8GR90-40049 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

Tray 5 Red CMF panel 8GR90-40046 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

Tray 5 Yellow CMF panel 8GR90-40048 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

3080 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-45 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Tray 5 cassette 5QJ98-61007 DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

Tray 5 cassette 5QJ98-61007 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

Tray 5 pickup assembly 8GR90-60007 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

Tray 5 pickup drive assembly 5QJ90-64001 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

Tray diverter cam JC90-01458A Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Tray diverter cam JC90-01458A Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Tray diverter home sensor 0604-001415 Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Tray diverter home sensor 0604-001415 Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Tray extension 5QK09-40029 Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

Tray extension 5QK09-40029 Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Tray heater 110V Y1G22-67901 Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Tray heater 110V (not shown) Y1G22-67901 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

Tray heater 110V (not shown) Y1G22-67901 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Tray heater 220V Y1G22-67902 Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Tray heater 220V (not shown) Y1G22-67902 DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

Tray heater 220V (not shown) Y1G22-67902 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

USB Hub PCA 3SJ04-60002 PCA on page 3014

Yellow developer powder kit 5QJ90-61010 Developer on page 3007

Yellow developer unit 5PN58-67001 Developer on page 3007

Yellow drum motor JC31-00123G Drum on page 3008

Yellow drum unit W9075-67001 Drum on page 3008

Yellow toner cartridge -High yield W9152-67007 Toner on page 3003

Yellow toner cartridge -Standard yield W9142-67005 Toner on page 3003

Yellow toner dispense motor SS216-80501 Toner on page 3003

SS216-80501

Yellow toner guide unit 5QJ90-60072 Duct assembly on page 3004

Yellow, magenta toner duct motor SS216-80501 Duct assembly on page 3004

Yellow, magenta toner supply motor assembly JC93-01680A Toner on page 3003

Yellow, magenta toner supply motor assembly JC93-01680A Duct assembly on page 3004

eMMC 32G B5L32-60004 PCA on page 3014

Alphabetical parts list 3081

 Numerical parts list
Table 7-46 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

CIS platen PCA CIS platen on page 3023

DCF Dpt_Door open switch sensor and harness HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Discrete power cable CIS platen on page 3023

Guide FFC CIS platen on page 3023

Keyboard (drawer type) Assy – E1 series US English PCA on page 3014

Keyboard (drawer type) Assy – E7 series US English PCA on page 3014

Platen FFC 68 pin CIS platen on page 3023

SS216-80501 Magenta toner dispense motor Toner on page 3003

SS216-80501

SS216-80501 Yellow toner dispense motor Toner on page 3003

SS216-80501

0604-001381 Photo interrupter Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

0604-001381 Photo interrupter Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

0604-001381 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

0604-001381 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

0604-001381 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

0604-001381 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

0604-001381 Tray 1 paper empty sensor Tray 1 on page 2995

0604-001393 Booklet blade home sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

0604-001393 Booklet c-fold blade home sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

0604-001393 Booklet end fence home sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

0604-001393 Booklet paddle home sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

0604-001393 Booklet presser home sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

0604-001393 Booklet tamper home sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

0604-001393 Bridge door sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

0604-001393 Bridge door sensor Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

3082 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Bridge exit sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

0604-001393 Bridge exit sensor Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

0604-001393 Front paper holding sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

0604-001393 Front paper holding sensor Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

0604-001393 Main exit cam home sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

0604-001393 Main exit cam home sensor Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

0604-001393 Main output tray motor sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

0604-001393 Main output tray motor sensor Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

0604-001393 Paddle home sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

0604-001393 Paddle home sensor Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

0604-001393 Paper holding home sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

0604-001393 Paper holding home sensor Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Exit unit (1 of 2) on page 3000

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Exit unit (2 of 2) on page 3002

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Exit unit (2 of 2) on page 3002

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Toner collection unit on page

3005

Numerical parts list 3083

 Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Drum on page 3008

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Drum on page 3008

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Drum on page 3008

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Drum on page 3008

0604-001393 Photo interrupter ITB on page 3010

0604-001393 Photo interrupter CPR on page 3011

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Tarot platen on page 3022

0604-001393 Photo interrupter CIS platen on page 3023

0604-001393 Photo interrupter DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

0604-001393 Photo interrupter DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

0604-001393 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

3084 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

0604-001393 Rear paper holding sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

0604-001393 Rear paper holding sensor Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

0604-001393 Staple front sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

0604-001393 Staple front sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

0604-001393 Staple mid-front sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

0604-001393 Staple mid-front sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

0604-001393 Staple mid-rear sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

0604-001393 Staple mid-rear sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

0604-001393 Staple rear sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

0604-001393 Staple rear sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

0604-001393 Top exit sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

0604-001393 Top exit sensor Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

0604-001415 Booklet diverter home sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

0604-001415 Booklet entrance sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

0604-001415 Ejector1 home sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

0604-001415 Ejector1 home sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

0604-001415 Ejector1 motor sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

0604-001415 Ejector1 motor sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

0604-001415 Ejector2 motor sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

Numerical parts list 3085

 Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001415 Ejector2 motor sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

0604-001415 Main output tray lower limit sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

0604-001415 Main output tray lower limit sensor Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page
3049

0604-001415 Manual staple senor Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

0604-001415 Manual staple senor Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

0604-001415 Photo interrupter Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

0604-001415 Tray diverter home sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

0604-001415 Tray diverter home sensor Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

0604-01490 Photo interrupter Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

0604-01490 Photo interrupter HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

1404-001417 Thermistor Sensor and fan on page 3013

155P7-67001 Hole 2/3 punch (optional) Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

155P8-67001 Hole 2/4 punch (optional) Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

155P9-67001 Swedish punch (optional) Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

3SJ01-60001 Riser for HDD PCA on page 3014

3SJ02-60001 Riser for HDD, USB ports, Accelerator PCA on page 3014

3SJ03-60001 (Not TPM PCA on page 3014

Orderable)

3SJ04-60002 USB Hub PCA PCA on page 3014

3SJ06-60001 Island of Data (IOD) PCA on page 3014

3SJ11-40008 Cover Rear ISA on page 3017

3SJ11-50006 Discrete power cable Tarot platen on page 3022

3SJ11-60101 HP LaserJet 180ipm 200 sheet DADF Scanner ISA on page 3017

3SJ15-60101 Control-panel assembly 20.3 cm 8 in PCA on page 3014

3SJ19-80501 Bridge motor Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

3SJ19-80501 Bridge motor Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

3SJ33-60007 PCA -power key Covers on page 2992

3SJ33-60007 Power key PCA PCA on page 3014

3086 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

430H4-67001 ITB and cleaning unit kit ITB on page 3010

4XN67-67001 SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit PCA on page 3014

5851-6019 Keyboard overlay kit (FR, IT, RU, DE,ES,UK Kybd) PCA on page 3014

5851-6020 Keyboard overlay kit (FR-CN, ES-LA, ES,US Kybd) PCA on page 3014

5851-6021 Keyboard overlay kit (FR-SW, DE-SW, DA,UK Kybd) PCA on page 3014

5851-6022 Keyboard overlay kit (ZHTW, ZHCN) PCA on page 3014

5851-6023 Keyboard overlay kit (ES, PT) PCA on page 3014

5851-6024 Keyboard overlay kit (JA-KG, JA-KT) PCA on page 3014

5851-7202 ADF roller kit 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3019

5851-7753 Cradle-HDD PCA on page 3014

5851-7754 Cradle-Riser Card PCA on page 3014

5PN50-67001 Fuser unit -100V Fuser on page 3012

5PN57-67001 Black developer unit Developer on page 3007

5PN58-67001 Yellow developer unit Developer on page 3007

5PN59-67001 Magenta developer unit Developer on page 3007

5PN60-67001 Cyan developer unit Developer on page 3007

5PN61-67001 Fuser unit -110V Fuser on page 3012

5PN62-67001 Fuser unit -220V Fuser on page 3012

5PN64-67001 ITB cleaning unit ITB on page 3010

5PN65-67001 Second transfer (T2) assembly Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

5PN66-67001 HCI roller kit HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

5PN66-67001 Tray 2, 3 roller kit Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

5PN66-67001 Tray 4, 5 roller kit DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

5QJ83-67002 ADF roller kit 100sh ADF (2 of 2) on page 3021

5QJ90-40002 Outer environment sensor assembly Sensor and fan on page 3013

5QJ90-40022 Tray 2 cover - Blue CMF panel Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-40056 ADF Blue CMF panel 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3018

5QJ90-40056 ADF Blue CMF panel 100sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3020

5QJ90-40087 Tray 2 cover - Gray CMF panel Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-40088 Tray 2 cover - Red CMF panel Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-40089 Tray 2 cover - Green CMF panel Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-40090 Tray 2 cover - Yellow CMF panel Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-40091 Tray 2 cover - Purple CMF panel Covers on page 2992

Numerical parts list 3087

 Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

5QJ90-40095 Front cover - Gray CMF Panel Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-40096 Front cover - Red CMF Panel Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-40097 Front cover - Green CMF Panel Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-40098 Front cover - Yellow CMF Panel Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-40099 Front cover - Purple CMF Panel Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-40108 ADF Gray CMF panel 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3018

5QJ90-40108 ADF Gray CMF panel 100sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3020

5QJ90-40109 ADF Red CMF panel 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3018

5QJ90-40109 ADF Red CMF panel 100sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3020

5QJ90-40110 ADF Green CMF panel 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3018

5QJ90-40110 ADF Green CMF panel 100sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3020

5QJ90-40111 ADF Yellow CMF panel 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3018

5QJ90-40111 ADF Yellow CMF panel 100sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3020

5QJ90-40112 ADF Purple CMF panel 200sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3018

5QJ90-40112 ADF Purple CMF panel 100sh ADF (1 of 2) on page 3020

5QJ90-40125 Fuser fan assembly Sensor and fan on page 3013

5QJ90-40126 Dev fan assembly Sensor and fan on page 3013

5QJ90-60014 Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), 110V PCA on page 3014

5QJ90-60015 Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), 220V PCA on page 3014

5QJ90-60051 Image-transfer belt (ITB) ITB on page 3010

5QJ90-60072 Black toner guide unit Duct assembly on page 3004

5QJ90-60072 Cyan toner guide unit Duct assembly on page 3004

5QJ90-60072 Magenta toner guide unit Duct assembly on page 3004

5QJ90-60072 Yellow toner guide unit Duct assembly on page 3004

5QJ90-60111 Tray 2 cassette Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-60111 Tray 2 cassette Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

5QJ90-60114 Right middle cover assembly Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-60115 Left cover Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-60116 Exit cover stacker Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-60117 Inner cover Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-60118 Front cover assembly Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-60119 Tray 3 cassette Covers on page 2992

5QJ90-60119 Tray 3 cassette Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

5QJ90-60129 Registration unit Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

3088 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

5QJ90-60130 HCI pickup motor drive assembly HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

5QJ90-60137 Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit CPR on page 3011

5QJ90-61010 Yellow developer powder kit Developer on page 3007

5QJ90-61011 Magenta developer powder kit Developer on page 3007

5QJ90-61012 Cyan developer powder kit Developer on page 3007

5QJ90-61013 Black developer powder kit Developer on page 3007

5QJ90-64001 Tray 2 pickup drive assembly Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

5QJ90-64001 Tray 3 pickup drive assembly Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

5QJ90-64001 Tray 4 pickup drive assembly DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

5QJ90-64001 Tray 5 pickup drive assembly DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

5QJ90-64002 Tray 2 pickup motor Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

5QJ90-64002 Tray 3 pickup motor Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

5QJ90-67004 Hinge Kit 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3019

5QJ90-67005 A3 White Backing Kit 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3019

5QJ90-67006 Damper module 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3019

5QJ90-67008 200sh ADF WF PCA (flow) 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3019

5QJ90-67009 ADF FFC cable to SSA 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3019

5QJ90-67010 ADF Power cable 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3019

5QJ90-67013 200sh ENT ADF PCA 200sh ADF (2 of 2) on page

3019

5QJ94-40001 Black toner duct unit Duct assembly on page 3004

5QJ94-40001 Cyan toner duct unit Duct assembly on page 3004

5QJ94-40001 Magenta toner duct unit Duct assembly on page 3004

5QJ94-40016 Tray 3 cover - Blue CMF panel Covers on page 2992

5QJ94-40024 Tray 3 cover - Gray CMF panel Covers on page 2992

5QJ94-40025 Tray 3 cover - Red CMF panel Covers on page 2992

5QJ94-40026 Tray 3 cover - Green CMF panel Covers on page 2992

5QJ94-40027 Tray 3 cover - Yellow CMF panel Covers on page 2992

5QJ94-40028 Tray 3 cover - Purple CMF panel Covers on page 2992

5QJ98-40014 DCF rear cover DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

5QJ98-40014 HCI rear cover HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

Numerical parts list 3089

 Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

5QJ98-40015 DCF right cover DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

5QJ98-40017 DCF left cover DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

5QJ98-40024 HCI right cover HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

5QJ98-40025 HCI left cover HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

5QJ98-61006 DCF right door DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

5QJ98-61007 Tray 5 cassette DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

5QJ98-61007 Tray 5 cassette DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

5QJ98-61009 Tray 4 cassette DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

5QJ98-61009 Tray 4 cassette DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

5QJ98-61012 Tray 4 HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

5QJ98-61012 Tray 4 HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

5QJ98-61014 HCI right door HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

5QK03-40033 Tray 4 Blue CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

5QK03-40035 Tray 5 Blue CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

5QK08-67011 SVC-Flat Cable, Tarot SCB 50pin Tarot platen on page 3022

5QK08-67012 SVC-Flat Cable, Tarot SCB 68pin Tarot platen on page 3022

5QK09-40004 PCA cover Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

5QK09-40018 Rear cover -base Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

5QK09-40019 Front cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

5QK09-40019 Front cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

5QK09-40020 Front lower cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

5QK09-40020 Front lower cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

5QK09-40021 Rear cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

5QK09-40021 Rear cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

5QK09-40024 Tray 4 Blue CMF panel HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

5QK09-40027 Top output tray Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

5QK09-40027 Top output tray Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

5QK09-40028 Main output tray Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

3090 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

5QK09-40028 Main output tray Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

5QK09-40029 Tray extension Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

5QK09-40029 Tray extension Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

5QK09-40030 Punch cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

5QK09-40030 Punch cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

5QK09-40037 Rear cover -punch Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

5QK09-40047 Front lower left cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

5QK09-40047 Front lower left cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

5QK09-40048 Front lower right cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

5QK09-40048 Front lower right cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

5QK09-60104 Booklet maker unit Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

5QK09-60106 Front door Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

5QK09-60106 Front door Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

5QK09-60107 Top door Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

5QK09-60107 Top door Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

5QK09-60108 Top cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

5QK09-60108 Top cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

5QK09-60109 Right upper cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

5QK09-60109 Right upper cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

5QK09-60110 Bridge unit Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

5QK09-60110 Bridge unit Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

5QK09-60118 Output tray assy Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

Numerical parts list 3091

 Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

5QK09-60123 Front cover assy Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

5QK09-60124 Middle cover assy Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

5QK09-60125 Top cover assy Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

5QK09-60128 Entrance motor assy Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

5QK14-67001 Dual Fax Card (WW) (Optional) PCA on page 3014

5QK42-60104 Control-panel assembly 25.6 cm 10.1 in 2nd PCA on page 3014

5RC02-67001 Tray 1 roller kit Tray 1 on page 2995

6102-003354 Guide rail Inner finisher (1 of 5) on page

3033

6109-001138 Caster wheel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

6109-001138 Caster wheel HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

63C80-60109 Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3058

63C80-60109 Bridge unit with Print Quality Diagnostics Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3059

63C81-70001 Booklet finisher with Print Quality Diagnostic Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3058

63C82-60117 Exit Stacker unit with Print Quality Diagnostics Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3059

63C82-67027 Stacker with Print Quality Diagnostics Print Quality Diagnostics on

page 3059

63C82-67029 Card reader rotation adapter kit Covers on page 2992

63C82-70001 Stapler/Stacker finisher with Print Quality Diagnostic Print Quality Diagnostics on
page 3058

6602-003644 Entrance motor timing belt Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

6CF14-67003 Formatter PCA on page 3014

6EQ94-40001 Front cover - Blue CMF Panel Covers on page 2992

6EQ94-40004 Rear lower cover Covers on page 2992

6EQ94-40005 Right front cover Covers on page 2992

6EQ94-40006 Right rear cover Covers on page 2992

6EQ94-40009 Exit rear cover Covers on page 2992

6EQ94-40010 Exit stacker upper cover Covers on page 2992

6EQ94-40011 Front lower cover Covers on page 2992

6EQ94-40012 Left upper cover Covers on page 2992

6EQ94-40013 Right middle cover Covers on page 2992

3092 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

6EQ94-40014 Rear upper cover Covers on page 2992

6EQ94-40015 Right upper cover Covers on page 2992

6EQ94-40017 Middle upper cover Covers on page 2992

6EQ94-40029 Power key Covers on page 2992

6EQ94-40031 Middle left cover Covers on page 2992

6EQ94-40032 HIP cover Covers on page 2992

6ER04-40034 (Not Rivet-Echo PCA (Not orderable and not used in printer.) PCA on page 3014
orderable and not used in
printer.)

6ER04-40035 Rivet-HDD PCA on page 3014

6ER04-61005 Controller cover Covers on page 2992

6GW46-67001 DCF DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

6GW48-60001 PCA-HCI Workgroup HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

6GW48-60003 Knock-up plate assembly HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

6GW48-67001 HCI HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

6GW49-40001 Staple cartridge Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

6GW49-60001 Inner finisher PCA Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

6GW49-60003 Stapler assembly Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

6GW49-67002 Inner Finisher Inner finisher (1 of 5) on page

3033

6GW51-60001 Booklet maker PCA Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

6GW51-67001 Booklet finisher Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

6GW52A HP LaserJet WG Job Separator (Optional) Exit unit (2 of 2) on page 3002

6GW55-60001 Main PCA Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

6GW55-60001 Main PCA Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

6GW55-67001 Stapler/Stacker finisher Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

6HN30-67001 Accelerator (Optional) PCA on page 3014

7ZA07-67001 Dual Fax Card (BBU) (Optional) PCA on page 3014

7ZA08-67001 Single Fax Card (WW) (Optional) PCA on page 3014

7ZA09-67001 Single Fax Card (BBU) (Optional) PCA on page 3014

8GR90-40024 Tray 4 Gray CMF panel HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

Numerical parts list 3093

 Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

8GR90-40025 Tray 5 Gray CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

8GR90-40026 Tray 4 Gray CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

8GR90-40042 Tray 4 Red CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

8GR90-40043 Tray 4 Green CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

8GR90-40044 Tray 4 Yellow CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

8GR90-40045 Tray 4 Purple CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

8GR90-40046 Tray 5 Red CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

8GR90-40047 Tray 5 Green CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

8GR90-40048 Tray 5 Yellow CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

8GR90-40049 Tray 5 Purple CMF panel DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

8GR90-40050 Tray 4 Red CMF panel HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

8GR90-40051 Tray 4 Green CMF panel HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

8GR90-40052 Tray 4 Yellow CMF panel HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

8GR90-40053 Tray 4 Purple CMF panel HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

8GR90-60001 HCI pickup assembly HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

8GR90-60007 Tray 4 pickup assembly DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

8GR90-60007 Tray 5 pickup assembly DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

8GS05-40018 Caster cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

8GS05-40018 Caster cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

8GS05-60104 Entrance motor assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

8GS05-60104 Entrance motor assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

8GS05-60106 Exit motor assembly Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

8GS05-60113 Left cover assy Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

8GS05-60114 Punch cover assembly Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

8GS05-60118 Left upper cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

3094 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

8GS05-60118 Left upper cover Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

8GS05-60122 Left lower cover Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

8GS05-60124 Left lower cover (Booklet) Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

8GS05-60126 Booklet output tray Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

8GS05-60126 Booklet stapler Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

933853-011 Hard disk 500GB SED PCA on page 3014

B5L32-60004 eMMC 32G PCA on page 3014

JC31-00078A Motor DC CPR on page 3011

JC31-00109A Motor, geared HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

JC31-00123B Fuser motor Fuser on page 3012

JC31-00123B Motor BLDC Developer on page 3007

JC31-00123B Motor BLDC Developer on page 3007

JC31-00123B Registration and tray 1 motor Tray 1 on page 2995

JC31-00123B Registration and tray 1 motor Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

JC31-00123G Black drum and ITB motor Drum on page 3008

JC31-00123G Cyan drum motor Drum on page 3008

JC31-00123G Magenta drum motor Drum on page 3008

JC31-00123G Motor BLDC ITB on page 3010

JC31-00123G Yellow drum motor Drum on page 3008

JC31-00125A Motor, geared HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

JC31-00160C Right door fan Sensor and fan on page 3013

JC31-00163A Feed motor Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

JC31-00163A Staple position motor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

JC31-00163A Staple position motor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

JC31-00166A Toner collection unit motor Toner collection unit on page

3005

JC31-00169B Motor, step Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

JC31-00169B Motor, step Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

JC31-00178B Motor DC Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

Numerical parts list 3095

 Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC32-00014A CPR sensor CPR on page 3011

JC32-00014A CPR sensor CPR on page 3011

JC32-00014A CPR sensor CPR on page 3011

JC32-00020A Booklet exit sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

JC32-00020A Booklet tamper sensor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

JC32-00020A Bridge entrance sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

JC32-00020A Bridge entrance sensor Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

JC32-00020A Ejector sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

JC32-00020A Ejector sensor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

JC32-00020A Main exit sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

JC32-00020A Main exit sensor Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting Exit unit (2 of 2) on page 3002

JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

JC33-00037A Electric clutch Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

JC39-01610A Harness - cover open Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

JC39-01610A Harness - cover open Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

JC39-02309A Front door switch Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

JC39-02309A Front door switch Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

JC39-02316A Main output tray top of stack switch Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

JC39-02316A Main output tray top of stack switch Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page
3053

JC44-00210F Fuser drive board (FDB), 110V PCA on page 3014

JC44-00211F Fuser drive board (FDB), 220V PCA on page 3014

JC44-00212D High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) PCA on page 3014

JC47-00037A Electric clutch Tray 1 on page 2995

JC47-00037A Registration clutch Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

JC61-04626A Tie stopper Covers on page 2992

3096 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC61-04871A Guide Adjust DCF (1 of 2) on page 3025

JC61-04871A Guide adjust HCI (1 of 2) on page 3029

JC61-07185A Spring-TS Exit unit (1 of 2) on page 3000

JC61-07366A Booklet c-fold blade Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

JC61-07444A Caster fix nut Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

JC61-07444A Caster fix nut Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

JC61-07452A Caster Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

JC61-07452A Caster Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

JC61-07804A Fuser support bracket Fuser on page 3012

JC63-04534B Left top cover Covers on page 2992

JC66-01425A Right door front damper Tray 1 on page 2995

JC66-02278A Bin full exit actuator lever Exit unit (1 of 2) on page 3000

JC66-03235A Right door front link Tray 1 on page 2995

JC66-04199A Exit sensor actuator Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

JC66-04201A Actuator home paddle Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

JC66-04218A Gear rack pinion Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

JC66-04233A Lock release handle Inner finisher (2 of 5) on page

3034

JC66-04243A Entrance roller Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

JC66-04243A Middle roller Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

JC66-04339A Bin full exit actuator Exit unit (1 of 2) on page 3000

JC66-04767A Shaft hinge - door Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

JC66-04767A Shaft hinge - door Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

JC66-05625A Loop actuator Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

JC81-07478B Paper shift gate HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

JC81-07481B HCI shift plate HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

JC81-08274A Booklet stapler cartridge Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Numerical parts list 3097

 Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC81-09882B Staple cartridge Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

JC81-09882B Staple cartridge Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

JC82-00894A Staple unit Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

JC82-00894A Staple unit Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

JC82-00898A Rear tamper Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

JC82-00898A Rear tamper Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

JC82-00899A Front tamper Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

JC82-00900A Rear tamper Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

JC82-00901A Front tamper Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

JC82-00901A Front tamper Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

JC82-01038A Main paddle kit Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

JC82-01039A Booklet output tray sensor Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

JC82-01039A Main output tray top of stack sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

JC82-01039A Main output tray top of stack sensor Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page
3049

JC82-01039A Output tray top of stack sensor kit Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page
3036

JC82-01039A Top output tray paper full sensor Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

JC82-01039A Top output tray paper full sensor Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page
3053

JC90-01310A Front paper support Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

JC90-01311A Rear paper support Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

JC90-01312A Paper support motor assy Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

JC90-01313A Paper holding actuator Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

JC90-01314A Paper holding kit Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

3098 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC90-01320A Output tray lower limit switch assy Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page
3036

JC90-01327A Main paddle Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

JC90-01330A Exit roller assy Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

JC90-01331A Exit motor assy Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

JC90-01334B Output tray motor assy Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

JC90-01336A Sub paddle assy Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

JC90-01385A Right door open switch holder assy HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

JC90-01396A Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

JC90-01397A Booklet diverter motor assembly Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

JC90-01398A Booklet diverter Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

JC90-01414A Paper holding motor drive assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

JC90-01414A Paper holding motor drive assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

JC90-01415B Main output tray motor drive assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

JC90-01415B Main output tray motor drive assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page
3053

JC90-01425A Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

JC90-01430A Booklet paddle motor assembly Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

JC90-01431A Booklet tamper Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

JC90-01432A Booklet end fence Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

JC90-01435A Booklet blade motor assembly Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

JC90-01436A Booklet fold motor assembly Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

JC90-01442A Finisher mount bracket Stapler/Stacker finisher (1 of 4)

on page 3043

JC90-01442A Finisher mount bracket Booklet finisher (1 of 5) on page

3049

Numerical parts list 3099

 Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC90-01453A Main exit cam motor assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

JC90-01453A Main exit cam motor assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

JC90-01454A Top lower feed assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (3 of 4)

on page 3046

JC90-01454A Top lower feed assembly Booklet finisher (4 of 4) on page

3055

JC90-01455A Top jam cover assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

JC90-01455A Top jam cover assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

JC90-01458A Tray diverter cam Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

JC90-01458A Tray diverter cam Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

JC90-01461A Paddle motor assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

JC90-01461A Paddle motor assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

JC90-01467A End fence motor assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

JC90-01467A End fence motor assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

JC90-01478B Booklet front cover Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

JC90-01480A Paddle Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

JC90-01480A Paddle Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

JC90-01546A Exit bin full Inner finisher (1 of 5) on page

3033

JC90-01675A Buffer solenoid assembly Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

JC90-01675A Buffer solenoid assembly Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

JC90-01802A Ejector unit Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

JC90-01802A Ejector unit Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

JC90-01869A Tray 1 unit Tray 1 on page 2995

JC90-01874A Exit stack guide Exit unit (1 of 2) on page 3000

JC90-01876A Exit unit Exit unit (1 of 2) on page 3000

3100 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC90-01877A Right door exit assembly Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

JC92-02780A Rear joint PCA Inner finisher (3 of 5) on page

3036

JC92-02792A PBA-Shift tray level HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

JC93-00078C Paper dust holder assembly Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

JC93-00443A Registration drive assembly Tray 1 on page 2995

JC93-00443A Registration drive assembly Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

JC93-00445A Toner collection unit drive assembly Toner collection unit on page
3005

JC93-00452A ITB engage motor ITB on page 3010

JC93-00466A Front door open switch Sensor and fan on page 3013

JC93-00492A Toner collection unit full sensor Toner collection unit on page
3005

JC93-00494A Main-front package HV frame ITB on page 3010

JC93-00802A Exit 2 motor (Optional) Exit unit (2 of 2) on page 3002

JC93-00802B Drive sub-motor step Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

JC93-00894A CPR shutter drive assembly CPR on page 3011

JC93-00999A Drive-motor step Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step Inner finisher (4 of 5) on page

3038

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

JC93-01001A Drive-motor step Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

JC93-01001A Front tamper motor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

JC93-01001A Front tamper motor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor Stapler/Stacker finisher (4 of 4)

on page 3047

JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor Booklet finisher (5 of 5) on page

3056

JC93-01152A Buffer motor Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

JC93-01152A Buffer motor Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

JC93-01155A Booklet end fence motor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

Numerical parts list 3101

 Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC93-01155A Booklet tamper motor Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

JC93-01163A Booklet blade Booklet finisher (2 of 5) on page

3052

JC93-01408A Frame sub-sensor paper size RU Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

JC93-01408A Frame sub-sensor paper size RU Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

JC93-01467A Switch Sensor and fan on page 3013

JC93-01674A Drum and developer drive assembly Developer on page 3007

JC93-01674A Drum and developer drive assembly Drum on page 3008

JC93-01674A Drum and developer drive assembly ITB on page 3010

JC93-01678A Fuser and exit drive assembly Exit unit (1 of 2) on page 3000

JC93-01678A Fuser and exit drive assembly Fuser on page 3012

JC93-01680A Cyan, black toner supply motor assembly Toner on page 3003

JC93-01680A Cyan, black toner supply motor assembly Duct assembly on page 3004

JC93-01680A Yellow, magenta toner supply motor assembly Toner on page 3003

JC93-01680A Yellow, magenta toner supply motor assembly Duct assembly on page 3004

JC93-01682A Feed drive assembly Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

JC93-01686A Exit motor Exit unit (1 of 2) on page 3000

JC93-01687A Duplex motor Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

JC93-01728A Tray 2 pickup assembly Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

JC93-01729A Tray 3 pickup assembly Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

JC93-01742A Keyboard Assy-US English PCA on page 3014

JC93-01743A Keyboard Assy-UK English PCA on page 3014

JC93-01784A LSU fan assembly Sensor and fan on page 3013

JC93-01786A LVPS FDB fan assembly Sensor and fan on page 3013

JC93-01801A HCI feed motor drive assembly HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

JC93-01822A Toner CRUM module assembly Toner on page 3003

JC95-02257A Right door assembly Tray 1 on page 2995

JC95-02292A Duplex unit Registration and loop sensors

and duplex on page 2998

JC97-05148A Laser scanner unit (LSU) Laser scanner unit on page

3006

SS216-80501 Black toner dispense motor Toner on page 3003

SS216-80501 Cyan toner dispense motor Toner on page 3003

SS216-80501 Cyan, black toner duct motor Duct assembly on page 3004

3102 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

SS216-80501 Yellow, magenta toner duct motor Duct assembly on page 3004

SS456-61001 Ejector Inner finisher (5 of 5) on page

3040

T3U64-60001 (Not Echo PCA (Not orderable and not used in printer.) PCA on page 3014
orderable and not used in
printer.)

W9074-67001 Black drum unit Drum on page 3008

W9075-67001 Cyan drum unit Drum on page 3008

W9075-67001 Magenta drum unit Drum on page 3008

W9075-67001 Yellow drum unit Drum on page 3008

W9141-67006 Cyan toner cartridge -Standard yield Toner on page 3003

W9142-67005 Yellow toner cartridge -Standard yield Toner on page 3003

W9143-67005 Magenta toner cartridge -Standard yield Toner on page 3003

W9150-67007 Black toner cartridge -High yield Toner on page 3003

W9151-67007 Cyan toner cartridge -High yield Toner on page 3003

W9152-67007 Yellow toner cartridge -High yield Toner on page 3003

W9153-67007 Magenta toner cartridge -High yield Toner on page 3003

X3A83-67923 Toner collection unit Toner collection unit on page

3005

X3A92-67924 Kit-Screws c-clips e-clips kit Covers on page 2992

Y1G10-67901 Punch unit 2-3 hole Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Y1G10-67901 Punch unit 2-3 hole Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Y1G11-67901 Punch unit 2-4 hole Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Y1G11-67901 Punch unit 2-4 hole Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Y1G12-67901 Punch unit Swedish hole Stapler/Stacker finisher (2 of 4)

on page 3044

Y1G12-67901 Punch unit Swedish hole Booklet finisher (3 of 5) on page

3053

Y1G22-67901 Tray heater 110V Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Y1G22-67901 Tray heater 110V (not shown) DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

Y1G22-67901 Tray heater 110V (not shown) HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Y1G22-67902 Tray heater 220V Tray 2, 3 on page 2996

Y1G22-67902 Tray heater 220V (not shown) DCF (2 of 2) on page 3027

Y1G22-67902 Tray heater 220V (not shown) HCI (2 of 2) on page 3031

Y1G23-67901 Second exit (Optional) Exit unit (2 of 2) on page 3002

Numerical parts list 3103

 Table 7-46 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

Y6V12-60035 Tarot platen PCA Tarot platen on page 3022

3104 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams

8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR)
diagrams

Learn more about electrical mechanical relationships diagrams.

Base printer
Learn about base printer electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Tray 1

Learn about the Tray 1 electrical mechanical relationships.

Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams 3105

 Figure 8-1 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram Tray 1

Tray 1 solenoid
JC33-00029B (SL1)

5QJ90-50006 Tray 1 clutch

JC47-00037A (CL1)

JC39-02766A
JC39-02764A

JC39-02767A
Tray 1 paper empty sensor
0604-0011381 (S1)

EMR diagrams: Tray 2/3

Learn about the Tray 2/3 electrical mechanical relationships.

3106 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-2 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram Tray 2/3 (1 of 2)

Tray 2 paper size sensor

JC93-00018B (S5)

Tray 3 paper size sensor

JC93-00018B (S9)

Tray 2 feed sensor

0604-001381 (S4)

JC39-02113A

JC39-02779A

JC39-02792A

EMR diagrams: Tray 2/3 3107

 Figure 8-3 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram Tray 2/3 (2 of 2)

Tray 2 pickup motor

5QJ90-64002 (M2)

Tray 3 pickup motor

5QJ90-64002 (M3)
Feed motor
JC31-00163A (M1)

JC39-01589A

Tray 3 feed sensor

0604-001490 (S8)

Tray 2 stack height sensor

0604-001393 (S3)

JC39-01588A

Tray 2 paper empty sensor

0604-001393 (S2)
5QK02-5000

Tray 3 stack height sensor

0604-001393 (S7)

JC39-01588A
Tray 3 paper empty sensor
0604-001393 (S6)

EMR diagrams: Registration and loop sensors

Learn about the registration and loop sensors electrical mechanical relationships.

3108 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-4 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram registration and loop sensors

Registration clutch
JC47-00037A (CL2) Registration clutch
JC31-00123B (M4)

Registration sensor
0604-001381 (S10)

JC39-01632A

JC39-02085A

JC39-02764A

Duplex motor
JC93-01687A (M6)

Fuser out sensor

0604-001393 (S13)

JC39-02766A

JC39-01027A

Loop sensor JC39-02767A

0604-001393 (S11, S12)

JC39-01603A

Duplex jam 2 sensor

0604-001393 (S17)

EMR diagrams: Exit unit

Learn about the exit unit electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Exit unit 3109

 Figure 8-5 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram exit unit (1 of 2)

Exit motor
JC93-01686A (M29

JC39-02754A

JC39-02756A

JC39-01607A

Out bin 1 full sensor

0604-001393 (S14)

3110 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-6 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram exit unit (2 of 2)

Duplex jam 2 sensor

Exit 2 motor 0604-001393 (S16)
JC93-00802A (M5)

Out bin 2 full sensor

0604-001393 (S15)

JC39-02756A

Return gate solenoid

JC33-00031B (SL2)

EMR diagrams: Toner cartridge

Learn about the toner cartridge electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Toner cartridge 3111

 Figure 8-7 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram toner cartridge

Yellow toner dispense motor

SS216-80501 (M7)

Magenta toner dispense motor

SS216-80501 (M8)

Cyan toner dispense motor

SS216-80501 (M9)

Black toner dispense motor

SS216-80501 (M10)

JC39-02759A

JC39-02757A

5QJ94-50001

Yellow, magenta, cyan, black toner cartridge CRUM

NA (P19)

EMR diagrams: Toner Duct

Learn about the toner duct electrical mechanical relationships.

3112 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-8 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram toner duct

JC39-02757A

JC39-02759A

Black, cyan duct motor

Yellow, magenta duct motor
SS216-80501 (M12)
SS216-80501 (M11)

JC39-02761A JC39-02760A

Yellow toner depletion detection sensor

JC32-00024A (S19)

Magenta toner depletion detection sensor

JC32-00024A (S20)

Cyan toner depletion detection sensor

JC32-00024A (S21)

Black toner depletion detection sensor

JC32-00024A (S22)
JC39-02761A

EMR diagrams: Toner collection unit

Learn about the toner collection unit electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Toner collection unit 3113

 Figure 8-9 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram toner collection unit

Toner collection unit motor

JC31-00166A (M13)

Toner collection unit detection sensor

0604-001393 (S23)

Toner collection unit full sensor

JC93-00492A (S24)

JC39-02080A

JC39-02753A

EMR diagrams: LSU

Learn about the lsu electrical mechanical relationships.

3114 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-10 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram LSU

JC39-02774A

LSU JC97-05148A

LSU motor (M14)

LSU shutter motor (M15)
LSU shutter open sensor (S25)
LSU shutter close sensor (S26)
LSU temperature sensor (S27)
LSU LD power (S28) 5QJ90-50002
LSU Hsync 1, 2 (S29)
LSU Hsync 3, 4 (S30)

LD_FAILURE_DETECT_n

OUT_FAN_OPC_R
con_DETECT_FAN_OPC_R_n
DG ND
NC

EMR diagrams: Developer

Learn about the developer electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Developer 3115

 Figure 8-11 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram developer (1 of 2)

Yellow toner concentration sensor

5QJ90-60001 (S31)

€‚ƒ„€ „†ƒ‚‡ ˆ†ƒˆ‚ƒ„‡€„‰†ƒ Š‚ƒŠ†‡

‹ŒŽ‘1 (S32)

Cyan toner concentration sensor

5QJ90-60001 (S33)

Black toner concentration sensor

5QJ90-60001 (S34)

JC39-01675A

JC39-02080A

3116 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-12 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram developer (2 of 2)

Yellow, magenta, cyan developer motor

JC31-000123B (M23)

Black developer motor

JC31-000123B (M24)

JC93-02769A

EMR diagrams: Drum

Learn about the drum electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Drum 3117

 Figure 8-13 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram drum

Yellow drum home sensor

0604-001393 (S35)

Magenta drum home sensor

0604-001393 (S36)

Cyan drum home sensor

0604-001393 (S37) Yellow drum motor
JC31-00123G (M19)
Black drum home sensor
0604-001393 (S38) Magenta drum motor
JC31-00123G (M20)

Cyan drum motor

JC31-00123G (M21)

Black drum and ITB motor

JC39-02772A JC31-00123G (M22)

JC39-02764A

JC39-02773A

EMR diagrams: ITB

Learn about the ITB electrical mechanical relationships.

3118 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-14 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram ITB

T1 engage motor
JC93-00452A (M25)

ITB engage sensor

0604-001381 (S39)

JC39-02764A

JC39-01629A

JC39-02756A

EMR diagrams: CPR

Learn about the CPR electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: CPR 3119

 Figure 8-15 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram CPR

Rear CPR sensor

JC31-00078A (M42)

CPR shutter sensor CPR shutter motor Center CPR motor

0604-001393 (S43) JC31-00078A (M27) JC31-00078A (M41)

Front CPR sensor

JC31-00078A (M40)

5QJ90-50009

JC39-02753A

EMR diagrams: Fuser

Learn about the fuser electrical mechanical relationships.

3120 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-16 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram fuser

Fuser
(100V) 5PN50-67001
(110V) 5PN51-67001
(220V) 5PN52-67001

Thermostat (S44)
Thermistor (S45)
Wrap jam sensor (S46)
Fuser gap home sensor (S47)

Fuser motor
JC31-000123B (M28)

JC39-02754A

EMR diagrams: Sensor and fan

Learn about the sensor and fan electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Sensor and fan 3121

 Figure 8-17 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram sensor and fan (1 of 2)

Inner temperature sensor

1404-001417 (S47)

5678/

Developer fan
5QJ90-40126 (F)

JC39-02779A Outer temperature

and humidity sensor
5QJ90-40002 (S48)

JC39-02774A
LSU fan
JC93-01784A (F4)

JC39-02753A

3122 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-18 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram sensor and fan (2 of 2)

JC3902767A

Right door fan R

JC31-00160C (F3)
Right door open switch
JC93-01467A (S50)

JC39-01610A Right door fan L

JC31-00160C (F3)
Fuser fan
5QJ90-40125 (F2)

Front door open switch

JC93-00466A (S49)
JC3902766A

JC39-02756A

JC39-02080A

EMR diagrams: PCA

Learn about the PCA electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: PCA 3123

 Figure 8-19 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (1 of 8)

Control panel 8 in
3SJ15-60101 (P21-2)
8"

Control panel base PCA

3SJ15-60001 (P20)
Control panel 10.1 in 2cnd
5QK42-60104 (P21-1)

Power key
3SJ33-60007 (P13)
USB hub PCA
JC39-02781A
3SJ04-60002 (P6)

JC39-02780A

Keyboard PCA
(fold type)
Keyboard PCA
5QK47-60001
(drawer type)
5QK47-60002

Main-J5

Figure 8-20 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (2 of 8)

IMPORTANT: Echo PCA T3U64-60001 and 3SJ11-60108 Cable-FFC 6-Conductor Echo PCA parts are
not orderable and removed from printers manufactured after April 2024.

3124 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

EMR diagrams: PCA 3125
 Figure 8-21 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (3 of 8)

FAX (P18)
Dual Fax 810: 5QK14A
Dual Fax 811: 7ZA07A
Single Fax 800: 7ZA08A
Single Fax 801: 7ZA09A €
‚ƒ„ ‚-60001 (P2)
(not orderable)

EMMC (P5)
B5L32-60004

3126 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-22 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (4 of 8)

Riser (P3)
Riser for HDD: 3SJ01-60001
SVC-Internal USB Expansion Kit: 4XN67-67001
Riser for HDD, USB ports, Accelerator: 3SJ02-60001

Accelerator
6HN30-67001 (P4)

HDD
933853-011 (P5-1)

EMR diagrams: PCA 3127

 Figure 8-23 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (5 of 8)

LVPS (P11)
(110V) 5QJ90-60014
(220V) 5QJ90-60015

Island of data (IOD)

3SJ06-60001 (P7)

FDB
(110V) JC44-00210F (P12-2)
(220V) JC44-00211F (P12-1)
HVPS
JC44-00212D (P10)

JC39-02779A

JC39-02779A

3128 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-24 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (6 of 8)

Eraser
NA (P16)

Drum CRUM
NA (P17)

5QJ90-50008

JC39-02772A

EMR diagrams: PCA 3129

 Figure 8-25 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (7 of 8)

Toner cartridge CRUM

NA (P19)

5QJ94-50001

Fuser CRUM
NA (P17)

JC39-02757A

JC39-02754A

3130 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

 Figure 8-26 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA (8 of 8)

3SJ11-50006

3SJ11-50022

Platen PCA

Tarot HS platen PCA: 3SJ32-60104 (P801)

Tarot platen PCA: Y6V12-60035 (P811)
CIS platen PCA: 3SJ00-60109 (P821)

3SJ11-50021

Input devices
Learn about input devices for electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Input devices

Learn about the input devices electrical mechanical relationships.

Input devices 3131

 Figure 8-27 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram input devices

sHCI
6GW56-60001
(P301)

DCF
6GW47-60001 (P101)

JC39-02187A

HCI
6GW57-60001
(P201)

Output devices
Learn about output devices for electrical mechanical relationships.

EMR diagrams: Inner finisher

Learn about the inner finisher electrical mechanical relationships.

3132 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-28 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (1 of 10)

€‚ƒ„ †‡ˆ‚

!"#$%&'(#)

*‡ˆ €‡+‚ƒ‚‡,
%(%-$%%'".'ƒ/0#1'2

!"#$%&'(()

!"#$%&'3-)

EMR diagrams: Inner finisher 3133

 Figure 8-29 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (2 of 10)

()‘’Œ*•Ž+

€€‚ƒ„ †‡ˆ‰Š€‹†‚„‚ˆ
ŒŒŽŒŒ‘’‘†“”’•Œ–
()‘’Œ*•Ž+

!‰ƒ†"#‚$„†%ˆ&†‚„‚ˆ
ŒŒŽŒŒ‘’‘†“”’'–

3134 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-30 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (3 of 10)
JC39-02176A

JC39-02166A

Exit sensor
0604-001415 (S971)

Output tray lower

limit switch
JC90-01320A (S957)

JC39-02178A

Finisher docking
sensor
0604-001393 (S970) Front cover switch
JC39-01610A (S953)

Rear joint PCA JC39-02173A

JC39-02172A
JC92-02780A

EMR diagrams: Inner finisher 3135

 Figure 8-31 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (4 of 10)

JC39-02176A
Output tray motor
JC90-01334B
(M954)

Output tray motor sensor

0604-001393 (S956)

JC39-02168A

Paper holding sensor

0604-001393 (S959)

JC39-02175A

Top cover switch

JC39-01610A
(S965)

Paper holding solenoid

JC33-00037A (SL951)

JC39-02180

Output tray top of

stack sensor
(transmitter)

JC82-01039A
(S958)

Output tray top of

stack sensor
(receiver)

JC82-01039A (S963)

3136 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-32 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (5 of 10)

JC39-02176A

End fence sensor

0604-001381 (S967)

Main paddle motor

JC93-01001A (M953)

Stapler position motor

EMR diagrams: Inner finisher 3137

 Figure 8-33 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (6 of 10)

JC39-02168A

Exit motor
JC31-001369B (M952)

Main paddle motor

JC93-01001A (M953)

JC39-02177A
Main paddle home
sensor
0604-001393 (S954)

3138 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-34 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (7 of 10)

Stapler position sensor

4 x 0604-001393 (S952)

Main paddle motor

Punch waste full JC93-01001A (M953)
sensor
0604-001381 (S969) Stapler position
motor
JC93-00999A (M951)

JC39-02177A

Stapler position motor

Stapler amount

JC39-02177A

Staple joint PCA

JC92-02772A

Rear joint PCA

JC39-02172A JC92-02780A JC39-02173A

EMR diagrams: Inner finisher 3139

 Figure 8-35 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (8 of 10)

JC39-01336A JC39-02165A
Ejector 2 home sensor
0604-001393 (S960)

Ejector 1 home sensor JC39-01127A

0604-001393 (S966)

Ejector 1 motor
JC93-00998A (M957)

Ejector 2 motor
JC93-01168A (M956)
Ejector 2 motor
sensor
0604-001393 (S961)

3140 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-36 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (9 of 10)

Paper support home

sensor
0604-001393 (S962)

Paper support motor

JC93-00802B (M958)

JC39-02179A JC39-02176A

EMR diagrams: Inner finisher 3141

 Figure 8-37 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram inner finisher (10 of 10)

Front tamper home sensor

0604-001393 (S955)

Front tamper motor JC39-02167A JC39-02168A

JC93-01001A (M959)

10

JC39-02175A JC39-02176A

Rear tamper home

sensor
0604-001393 (S964)

Rear tamper motor

JC93-01001A (M955)

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher

Learn about the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher electrical mechanical relationships.

3142 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-38 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram bridge unit

Bridge exit sensor

0604-01393
(S903)

Bridge motor
Bridge door sensor 3SJ19-8-501
0604-01393
(S902) Bridge
entrancesensor
0604-01393
(S902)

6GW51-50001 6GW51-50003

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3143

 Figure 8-39 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram punch unit

JC39-02314A

JC81-08505A

Punch unit (P902

2-3: Y1G10-67901
2-4: Y1G11-67901
Swedish: Y1G12-67901

3144 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-40 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram entrance unit
Entrance motor assembly
8GS05-60104 (M912)

JC81-02313A

Entrance sensor
JC32-00020A
(S912)

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3145

 Figure 8-41 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram tray diverter unit

JC81-02313A

Tray diverter home sensor

0604-001415 (S904)

3146 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-42 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram top exit

Top exit sensor

0604-001393 (S911)

JC39-02322A JC39-02313A

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3147

 Figure 8-43 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram top output tray unit

JC39-02313A

Top output tray paper full

sensor (receiver)
JC82-01039A (S958)

Top output tray paper full

sensor (transmitter)
JC82-01039A (S958)

JC39-02322A

3148 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-44 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram main exit (1 of 2)

JC39-02312A

Exit motor assembly

3SJ19-80501 (M913)

Main output tray top of

stack sensor
JC82-01039A (S920)

JC39-02319A

JC39-02319A
Main output tray lower limit
sensor
0604-~001415 (S906)

JC39-02319A JC39-02325A

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3149

 Figure 8-45 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram main exit (2 of 2)
Main exit sensor
JC32-00020A (S910) (M913)

JC39-02322A

JC39-02313A

Main exit cam motor assembly

JC90-01453A

JC39-02313A

Main exit cam home sensor

0604-001393 (S907)

3150 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-46 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram paddle unit

Paddle motor
JC93-01001A (M901)
Paddle home sensor
0604-001393 (S909) JC39-02313A

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3151

 Figure 8-47 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram end fence unit

End fence motor

JC93-01001A (M903)

JC39-023~13A

End fence home sensor

0604-001393 (S907)

JC39-02318A

3152 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-48 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram tamper unit
Rear tamper home sensor
0604-1393 (S906)

Rear tamper motor

JC93-01001A (M903)

Front tamper home sensor

0604-1393 (S906)

JC39-02313A

Front tamper motor

JC93-01001A (M904)

JC39-02318A

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3153

 Figure 8-49 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram stapler unit

Manual staple sensor

0604-1415 (S927)

JC39-02315A

JC39-02330A

Stapler mid-rear sensor

0604-001393 (S925)

Stapler rear sensor

0604-001393 (S930)

Stapler mid-front sensor

0604-001393 (S924)

Stapler position motor Stapler front sensor

JC93-00163A (M908) 0604-001393 (S921)

JC39-02318A

3154 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-50 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram ejector unit

JC39-02317A JC39-02324A

JC39-02326A

Ejector sensor
JC32-00000A (S914)

Ejector1 home sensor

0604-001415 (S927)

Ejector1 motor sensor

0604-001415 (S927)
Ejector2 motor sensor
0604-001415 (S923)

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3155

 Figure 8-51 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram main output tray unit

Main output tray motor

JC90-01415B (M911)

Main output tray motor

sensor
0604-001393 (S933)

JC39-02312A

JC39-02316A

Main output tray

top of stack switch
JC39-02316A (S934)

3156 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-52 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram paper holding unit

JC39-02319A

Paper holding motor

8GS05-60104 (M907)

Rear paper holding

sensor
0604-001393 (S931)
Front paper holding
sensor
0604-001393 (S917)

Paper holding
home sensor
0604-001393 (S922)

JC39-02319A JC39-02325A

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3157

 Figure 8-53 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram buffer unit

Buffer
home sensor
0604-001393 (S933) Buffer sensor
JC32-00020A (S913)

Buffer solenoid
JC33-00038A (SL901)

Buffer motor
JC93-01152A (M910)

JC39-02575A

3158 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

Figure 8-54 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram door switch

JC39-02631A

Top door switch

JC31-0231A (M910)

JC39-02325A

Front door switch

JC39-02309A (S918)

EMR diagrams: Stapler-stacker finisher and booklet finisher 3159

 Figure 8-55 Electrical mechanical relationship diagram PCA

JC39-02325A

Booklet maker PCA

6GW51-60001 (P902)

Manual staple PCA

JC92-02789A (P901)

JC39-02325A

JC39-02345A

JC39-02313A

3160 Chapter 8 Electrical mechanical relationships (EMR) diagrams

A Certificate of Volatility

Review the certificates of volatility for the printer.

Certificate of Volatility
Learn about the product certificate of volatility.

Figure A-1 Certificate of Volatility (1 of 3)

Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP Color LaserJet Managed Managed Hewlett Packard Company
MFP E786dn 5QJ90A= E786dn 11311 Chinden Blvd
HP Color LaserJet Managed
5QJ94A= E786z Boise, ID 83714
Flow MFP E786z

Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No Used for temporary storage When the printer is powered off
DDR4 DRAM 6GB during the process of jobs, the memory is erased.
and for applications that are
running on the OS. (Note:
Total memory on formatter
consists of 6GB.)

Certificate of Volatility 3161

 Figure A-2 Certificate of Volatility (2 of 3)
Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD EEPROM 32 KB Yes No Backup device for critical There are no steps to clear
system counters and product this data.
configuration information.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
SPI Flash 8MB Yes No Contains the boot code and There are no steps to clear
factory product configuration this data.
data required for the device
to function.
User modifications are
limited to downloading
digitally signed HP firmware
images.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
TPM 2.0 NVRAM Flash 7206 bytes Yes No Stores HP-signed immutable ID Drive lock password can be
certificate and associated changed through the device
RSA key pair in locked embedded web server
memory, engine speed interface and/or Preboot Menu
configuration data, of the Control Panel.
SED (self-encrypting drive) drive No other data stored on
lock password. the TPM 2.0 Flash can be cleared.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD Engine EEPROM 32 KB Yes No Stores device lifecycle data There are no steps to clear
(e.g. device page counts), this data.
consumables information,
device specific printing handler
data (e.g. fusing, EP,
paper handler),
toner supply control data,
device configuration data
(e.g. margin info),
device maintenance information
(e.g. calibration data)

Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HDD 500GB Yes No Store customer data, OS, There are several ways to erase
applications, digitally signed this:
firmware images, persistent data, 1. Secure Storage Erase - Erases
and temporary data used for temporary files and job data by
processing and system functions. overwriting information one or
three
times
2. Secure Disk Erase - Industry
standard ATA Secure Erase.
Overwrites all data on the hard
drive.
3. Secure File Erase - Erases files
when jobs finish processing by
overwriting them one or three
times.

3162 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility

Figure A-3 Certificate of Volatility (3 of 3)
USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e. Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. USB ports can be disabled.
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.
RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics? (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:
Other Transmission Capabilities
Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Product contains an integrated Wi-Fi/NFC accessory modules consisting of a Wi-Fi 802.11n and Near Field
Communication (NFC) radio. The Wi-Fi portion acts in Access Point mode ONLY and provides AP client connection
capability. NFC is used to pass NDEF tag data (Wi-Fi SSID, WPA configuration data). The latter is used to enable
wireless direct print for mobile devices.
Frequency: 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz Bandwidth:

Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):

Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n (Wi-Fi) NFC Tag Type 4 ISO14443B Compliant (NFC)
Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Fax
Specifications: Fax modem max speed 33.6kbps
Author Information
Name Title Email Business Unit
Hewlett Packard Company Technical Marketing Eng [email protected] Print Hardware Systems
(PHS)
Date Prepared: March 8, 2022

Certificate of Volatility 3163

 Glossary of terms

802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the
IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).

802.11b/g/n
802.11b/g/n can share the same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up
to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices might occasionally suffer
interferences from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.

AC
An electric current that reverses its direction many times a second at regular intervals. For example, the
110V line current found in a typical US electrical wall receptacle.

AC Control Module (PageWide)

The AC Control Module controls the heating elements in the airflow assembly. Functions include voltage
monitoring (ensuring correct operation in a low-quality-power environment), isolation (low voltage heater
control signals are isolated from the high voltage AC power for safety), AC switching (power is switched
on/off to the heater), and heating element configuration (heating element configuration is changed
between series and parallel for temperature predictability).

ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a device that automatically feeds an original sheet (or multiple
sheets) of paper into the image scanner. The document feeder is a component of the integrated
scanner assembly (ADF and image scanner).

Airflow System (PageWide)

The airflow system conditions the printed pages to avoid page curling due to the ink on the page. The
airflow system functionally consists of a fan and heating elements. The pressurized air is blown on the
page through the nozzles that are placed on the paper path of the airflow system between print and
eject zone.

BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically.
This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The
BOOTP servers assigns an IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables “diskless
workstation” computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system.

CCD
A Charged Coupled Device (CCD) is the scanner module which enables a scan job. A CCD locking
mechanism is used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when the printer is moved.

CIS
A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) scanner captures an image using the printer's optical path. Red, green,
and blue LEDs sequentially illuminate a small strip of the document (often called a raster line), and the
optical system captures each color in a single row of Charged Coupled Device (CCD) sensors that cover
the entire page width.

3164 Glossary of terms

Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints
an entire set before printing additional copies.

Control Panel
The control panel is a flat, typically vertical panel or screen where the user can control and/or monitor
the printer. The control panel is found on the front of the printer.

Coverage
Coverage is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5%
coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. If the paper or original has
complicated images or a large amount of text, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner
usage will be as much as the coverage.

DC
An electric current flowing in one direction only. Typically, a low voltage load current supplied to an
electrical assembly.

DCC
The DC controller (DCC) controls the operation of the printer sub-systems and electrical components.
the DCC sends out various signals to operate motors, solenoids, and other printer components based
on the print command and image data that the host computer sends the formatter.

Default
The value or setting that is in effect when a printer is unboxed, reset, or initialized.

DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server
provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information
required by the client host to participate on an IP network. The DHCP also provides a mechanism for
allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.

Digital Send Software

Digital send software allows a mufti-function printer (MFP) to scan and send information quickly and
securely to email, network folders, other printers, and fax services.

DIMM
A Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) is a small circuit board that holds memory. The DIMM stores all
data within the printer, such as printing data and received fax data.

DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally,
higher DPI results in a higher resolution (more visible detail in the image and a larger file size).

Duplex
A mechanism that automatically turns over a sheet of paper so that the printer can print (or scan) on
both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a duplex unit can print on both sides of the paper during
one print cycle.

Glossary of terms 3165

 Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally, the
printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of
print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month
the printer limit is 2,400 pages a day (assuming 20 working days/month).

Dynamic Security
Dynamic Security is a toner cartridge design and process for authenticating genuine HP supplies. HP
printers use toner cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a non-HP
chip, or modified chip, or non-HP circuitry might not work (now or in the future).

e-Duplex
Single-pass electronic duplex (e-Duplex) printer use two separate scan modules to scan the front-side
and back-side of an e-duplex copy job page in a single pass through the document feeder.

EMC
EMC is a measure of a device's ability to operate as intended in its shared operating environment while,
at the same time, not affecting the ability of other equipment within the same environment to operate as
intended.

EMI
EMI is the electromagnetic energy which affects the functioning of an electronic device. Electronic
devices (like printers) are a source of EMI. Because it is rare for electronics to operate in isolation,
products are generally engineered to function in the presence of some amount of EMI.

eMMC
An embedded Multi-Media Card is a compact memory device consisting of NAND flash memory and a
simple storage controller.

Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates
the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first
system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior. This is different from simulation,
which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state.

EPS
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) is a PostScript (PS) code file which is used for storing font and vector
graphic image information.

ESD
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) is a sudden flow of electricity between two electrically charged objects
caused by contact, an electrical short, or dielectric breakdown. Discharge of built up static electricity.

Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines
wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access
control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. Ethernet
has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to present.

Ferrite
A ferrite is used to reduce the amount of radio frequency noise (or interference) in a wire or cable. A
ferrite enables proper EMC/EMI performance for regulatory purposes.

3166 Glossary of terms

FFC
Flat Flexible Cables (FFCs) are designed for Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA) to PCA connections (for
example, connecting a fax PCA to the formatter).

FIH
A Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) is a port that enables HP multifunction printers (MFPs) to use third-
party devices to extend the capabilities of the MFP.

Firmware
The formatter stores the printer firmware. A remote firmware upgrade process is used to overwrite and
upgrade the firmware.

Flash memory
Flash memory is non-volatile, meaning it retains stored data even when the power is turned off.

Flow integrated scanner assembly

A printer scanner assembly that includes a slide-out external physical keyboard.

Formatter (LaserJet)
The formatter controls printer functions like receiving and processes print data, developing and
coordinating data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA, storing font and customer
configuration information, communicating with the host computer, and monitoring control panel
functions and relaying printer status information through the control panel.

FTP
FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol. FTP is a protocol designed for transferring files over the Internet.
Files stored on an FTP server can be accessed using an FTP client, such as a web browser, FTP software
program, or a command line interface.

Fuser Unit
The fuser unit is part of a laser printer that adheres the toner onto the printed page. It consists of a
heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and
pressure to make sure that the toner stays on the paper permanently (which is why paper is warm when
it comes out of a laser printer).

Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. A
gateway is used to connect two different computer networks, especially a connection to the Internet.

Grayscale
Shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of a color image printed in monochrome. Colors
are represented by a range of gray shades from white to black.

Halftone
Halftone is a way of reproducing a photograph or other image in which the various tones of gray or color
are produced by variously sized dots of ink or toner. Halftone simulates grayscale by varying the number
of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller
number of dots.

HDD
A Hard-Disk Drive (HDD) (commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk) is a non-volatile storage
device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.

Glossary of terms 3167

 IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional
organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity.

Image scanner
The image scanner (or Sub Scanner Assembly) contains the components to digitally scan an original
source document. The image scanner is a component of the integrated scanner assembly (ADF and
image scanner).

IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that a device uses in order to identify and
communicate with other devices on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.

IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a method of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the
number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete in one minute.

IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing and managing print jobs,
media size, resolution, etc. IPP can be used locally, or over the internet to reach hundreds of printers. IPP
also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a capable and secure printing
solution.

ISA
The Integrated Scanner Assembly (ISA) includes the document feeder and image scanner.

ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body
composed of representatives from national standards bodies. In produces world-wide industrial and
commercial standards.

JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or
quality. It was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used for
other images.

JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a commonly used standard method of loss compression for
photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide
Web.

LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying
directory services running over TCP/IP.

LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that can indicate the status of a printer
(formatter LEDs) or a component in a contact image sensor (CIS) scanner that helps capture an image.

LEDM
Low end data model (LEDM) provides one consistent data representation method and defines the
dynamic and capabilities tickets shared between clients and devices, as well as the access protocol,
event, security, and discovery methods.

3168 Glossary of terms

LPDC
Late point differentiation configuration (LPDC) allows the channel partner to configure the speed to the
printer depending on the customer’s order. LPDC configuration is stored on the Trusted Platform Module
(TPM).

LVPS - SMPS
Low Voltage Power Supplies (LVPS) and Switching Mode Power Supplies (SMPS) supply direct current
(DC) voltages to various printer components and assemblies.

MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC
address is a unique 48–bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (for
example, 00–00–0c-34–11–4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by
the manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on a large network.

MEt
HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) effectively doubles the standard memory through a variety
of font- and data-compression methods. MEt is available only in Printer Command Language (PCL) mode;
it is not functional when printing in PostScript (PS) mode.

MFP
A Multi Function Printer (MFP) is a printer that incorporates multiple functionalities in a single physical
body. For example, an MFP printer can scan, digitally send, fax, copy, and print.

MHV
Miniature High Voltage (MHV) is designed for high voltage applications of BNC connectors (DC voltage
between 500 V and 5 kV).

Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a
carrier signal to decode transmitted information.

MPCA (PageWide)
The MPCA integrates both formatter (LaserJet) and engine control electronics (DC controller) into a
single assembly. The Main PCA (MPCA) controls printer functions like receiving and processes print
data, developing and coordinating data placement, storing font and customer configuration information,
communicating with the host computer, and monitoring control panel functions and relaying printer
status information through the control panel.

NAND
NAND is not an acronym (the term is short for NOT AND a Boolean operator and logic gate). NAND
(flash) memory is non-volatile, meaning it retains stored data even when the power is turned off.

NVRAM
Nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM) is used to store I/O and information about the print
environment configuration (stored data even when the power is turned off).

OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam
emitted from a laser printer. It is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape. An imaging
unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface during its usage in the printer, and it should
be replaced appropriately due to wear from contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning
mechanism, and paper.

Glossary of terms 3169

 Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph, or text which is copied, reproduced, or
translated to produce additional copies. The original itself is not copied or derived from something else.

PCA
Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA). Once the printed circuit board (PCB) is complete, electronic components
must be assembled to form a functional printed circuit assembly or PCA.

PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer
protocol. PCL has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early Inkjet printers, PCL has
been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printers and laser printers.

PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems. A PDF
represents two dimension documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.

PJL
Printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of printer configuration, in addition to the standard PCL
and PostScript (PS). With standard cabling, the printer can use PJL to perform a variety of functions like
dynamic I/O switching, context-sensitive switching, and isolation of print environment settings from one
print job to the next.

PML
Printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration of the printer and status read-back
from the printer through the I/O ports.

PostScript (PS)
PostScript (PS) is a Page Description Language (PDL) and programming language used primarily in
electronic and desktop publishing. PostScript is run in an interpreter to generate an image.

PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning
the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute.

Print Media
Media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, scanner, fax, or
copier.

Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.

Printhead (PageWide)
The printhead converts the digital firing instructions from the printer electronics into properly formed
and timed microscopic drops of the four ink colors.

Printhead Wiper (PageWide)

The printhead wiper system keeps the printhead nozzles firing correctly throughout the life of the printer
as it performs the wiping and capping functions. The wiping function cleans the nozzles of ink residue
and particulates. The capping function keeps the nozzles moist during storage and when the printer is
idle.

3170 Glossary of terms

Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer
between two computing endpoints.

RAM
Random Access Memory (RAM) is the printer memory device where the data in current use is kept so it
can be quickly retrieved by the device's processor. This memory is an important factor in avoiding errors
and printing documents properly. Printer memory is used to store, and process print jobs as they are
sent to the printer from a computer. After printing, the job is cleared from the memory to make room
for more print jobs. Printer memory is directly linked to two print characteristics: speed and print quality.
More memory allows you to print faster and print larger, high-quality graphics.

REDI sensor
An optical reflective edge detection interrupter (REDI) sensor. Usually used in conjunction with mirrors
to sense the presence or absence of paper in the paper path. These sensors are carefully aligned and
calibrated at the factory, so care must be taken when servicing these sensors.

Resolution
The sharpness of an image is measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the DPI, the greater the
resolution.

SCB
The Scanner Control Board (SCB) controls the functions of the image scanner components in the Sub
Scanner Assembly (SSA).

Service fluid and aerosol management systems (PageWide)

There are two types of service fluid, shipping fluid and ink. The service fluid management system is
contained entirely within the duplex module. Service fluid is discharged as droplets from the printhead,
and then collected in a container inside the duplex module. Some of the droplets are called aerosol
because they are lighter than air. Aerosol can float inside the printer and collect on the lens of optical
sensors, producing false failures. The aerosol management system transports the aerosol and collects
it in a safe place. Aerosol management consists of an aerosol fan, mounted on the rear wall of the air
flow assembly, which creates air flow that pulls the aerosol through the holes in the platen and into the
aerosol filter inside the duplex module.

SFP
A single-function printer only processes print jobs sent from a host computer or from an USB port on the
printer.

SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports,
and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. SMB also provides an authenticated
inter-process communication mechanism.

SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for email transmissions across the internet. SMTP
is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipient of a message is specified, and the
message text is transferred. It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to
the server.

SODIMM
Small outline dual in-line memory module (SODIMM) is a thin profile memory storage device (a smaller
alternative to a standard DIMM device).

Glossary of terms 3171

 SSA
The Sub-Scanner Assembly is the image scanner component of the Integrated Scanner Assembly (ISA,
which includes the document feeder and the image scanner).

Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the
address is the network address and which part is the host address.

TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP) are the set of communications
protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the internet and most commercial networks run.

TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bit mapped image format. TIFF describes image
data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images use tags, keywords defining the characteristics
of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for
pictures that have been made by various image processing applications.

Toner Cartridge
A bottle or container that holds toner, which is used in a machine like a printer. Toner is a powder used
in laser printers and photocopiers. The toner forms the text and images on printed paper. Toner can be
fused by a combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind the fibers in the paper.

TPM
The HP Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a security accessory for printers. The TPM strengthens
protection of encrypted credentials and data stored on your printer. Certificate private keys are both
generated by and protected by the TPM. Once installed, the printer and the TPM are sealed, and the
printer owns the TPM. The TPM may not be moved to another device without losing its ownership from
the original printer. Installing a TPM accessory might necessitate a firmware upgrade. The TPM prevents
the printer from starting if the TPM is missing. If the TPM is removed from the printer, a control-panel
error message appears indicating that the TPM is missing.

NOTE: The TPM is not a service part for some printer models. Check the printer service manual to determine if
the TPM is a replaceable service part.

TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with TWAIN-
compliant software, a scan can be initiated from the program. TWAIN is an image capture API for
Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.

URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the internet. The
first part of the address indicates what protocol to use. The second part specifies the IP address or the
domain name where the resource is located.

USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to
connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a
single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.

Walk-up USB
Some printers support direct printing from a USB flash drive (the walk-up USB port is usually near the
control panel).

3172 Glossary of terms

Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by
transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282. Watermarks have been
used by paper makers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other
government documents to discourage counterfeiting.

XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language (PDL) and a new
document format developed by Microsoft. This has benefits for portable document and electronic
documents. It is an XML-based specification based on a new print path and vector-based, device-
independent document format.

ZIF Connector
Zero insertion force (ZIF) connectors use a mechanical locking method to secure Flat Flexible Cables
(FFCs) to a Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA).

Glossary of terms 3173

 Index

Symbols/Numerics ADF – 100sh Flow 181 deskew unit 175

ADF cover 181 document feeder hinges
100sh ADF
ADF PCA 190 operation 179, 189
parts and diagrams 3020
ADF roller 184 document feeder simplex
100sh ADF 1 of 2
ADF sensors 183 operation 176
parts 3020
ADF solenoid 184 lift plate unit 173
100sh ADF 2 of 2
ADF system motor 184 pickup unit 174
parts 3021
document feeder simplex scan and exit unit 176
200sh ADF
operation 187 ADF cover – 100sh 181
parts and diagrams 3018
lift plate unit 185 ADF cover – 100sh Flow 181
200sh ADF 1 of 2
pickup unit 186 ADF cover – 200sh 168
parts 3018
scan and exit unit 186 ADF cover – 200sh Flow 168
200sh ADF 2 of 2
ADF – 200-sheet ADF FFC
parts 3019
ADF unit 168 automatic document
520-sheet trays
ADF workflow 170 feeder 1335
jams 388
ADF – 200-sheet Flow ADF image scanner cleaning –
76.00.24 404
ADF unit 168 200sh 180, 190
ADF workflow 170 ADF image scanner cleaning –
A
ADF – 200sh 168 200sh Flow 180, 190
accelerator 149 ADF cover 168 ADF PCA – 100sh 190
accelerator card ADF image scanner ADF PCA – 100sh Flow 190
removal and cleaning 180, 190 ADF PCA – 200sh 180
replacement 1245 ADF PCA 180 ADF PCA – 200sh Flow 180
accessories ADF roller 171 ADF roller – 100sh Flow 184
dimensions 1, 6 ADF sensors 170 ADF roller – 200sh 171
weight 1, 6 ADF solenoid 171 ADF roller – 200sh Flow 171
acoustic specifications 1, 6 ADF system motor 171 ADF sensor FFC
actuator-bin full exit ADF system overview 170, 183 automatic document
removal and replacement 861 deskew operation 179, 188 feeder 1373
ADF deskew unit 175 ADF sensors – 100sh 183
100-sheet 1361 document feeder hinges ADF sensors – 100sh Flow 183
removal and operation 179, 189 ADF sensors – 200sh 170
replacement 1309 document feeder simplex ADF sensors – 200sh Flow 170
ADF – 100-sheet operation 176 ADF solenoid – 100sh Flow 184
ADF unit 182 lift plate unit 173 ADF solenoid – 200sh 171
ADF workflow 183 pickup unit 174 ADF solenoid – 200sh Flow 171
ADF – 100-sheet Flow scan and exit unit 176 ADF system motor – 100sh
ADF unit 182 ADF – 200sh Flow 168 Flow 184
ADF workflow 183 ADF cover 168 ADF system motor – 200sh 171
ADF – 100sh 181 ADF image scanner ADF system motor – 200sh
ADF cover 181 cleaning 180, 190 Flow 171
ADF PCA 190 ADF PCA 180 ADF system overview –
ADF sensors 183 ADF roller 171 200sh 170, 183
document feeder simplex ADF sensors 170 ADF system overview – 200sh
operation 187 ADF solenoid 171 Flow 170, 183
lift plate unit 185 ADF system motor 171 ADF unit – 100-sheet 182
pickup unit 186 ADF system overview 170, 183 ADF unit – 100-sheet Flow 182
scan and exit unit 186 deskew operation 179, 188 ADF unit – 200-sheet 168

3174 Index
ADF unit – 200-sheet Flow 168 automatic document feeder registration and loop sensors
ADF workflow – 100-sheet 183 pickup roller kit and duplex, service
ADF workflow – 100-sheet removal and replacement, 100- parts 2997
Flow 183 sheet ADF 1363 remove and replace parts 586
ADF workflow – 200-sheet 170 removal and replacement, sensor, service parts 3013
ADF workflow – 200-sheet 5QJ90-67011, toner cartridge, service
Flow 170 5QJ90-67012 1324 parts 3002
ADF, 100sh automatic document feeder power toner collection unit, service
parts and diagrams 3020 cable parts 3005
ADF, 100sh 1 of 2 removal and tray 1, service parts 2994
parts 3020 replacement 1341 tray 2, 3, service parts 2995
ADF, 100sh 2 of 2 removal and replacement, 100- Base printer 42
parts 3021 sheet ADF 1379 before servicing
ADF, 200-sheet automatic document feeder ESD precautions 570
dn bundle 1309 printed circuit assembly how to use part lists 570
ADF, 200sh removal and replacement, 100- ordering parts 570
parts and diagrams 3018 sheet ADF 1367 remove and replace 570
ADF, 200sh 1 of 2 removal and replacement, service approach 570
parts 3018 5QJ90-67011, bin, output
ADF, 200sh 2 of 2 5QJ90-67012 1329 locating 1
parts 3019 automatic document feeder booklet diverter unit 295
ADF, CIS platen sensor FFC operation 297
parts and diagrams 3022 removal and overview 295
ADF, tarot platen replacement 1373 booklet end fence unit 281
parts and diagrams 3021 automatic document feeder white operation 283
after-service checklist 571, 572 backing overview 282
authorized service providers, removal and booklet entrance unit 278
parts 570 replacement 1319, 1388 overview 278
automatic document feeder booklet exit unit 297
100-sheet 1361 B overview 297
200-sheet dn bundle 1309 booklet finisher
backup error
removal and booklet maker, remove and
32.WX.YZ error 361, 403
replacement 1309 replace 2188
reset error 361, 403
removal and replacement, diverter unit, remove and
restore error 361, 403
5QJ90-67011, replace 2449
base printer
5QJ90-67012 1309 electrical mechanical
covers, remove and
automatic document feeder color relationships
replace 586
panel diagrams 3142
covers, service parts 2991
removal and end fence unit, remove and
CPR, service parts 3011
replacement 1317, 1361 replace 2266
developer, service parts 3006
automatic document feeder entrance unit, remove and
drum, service parts 3008
damper module replace 2210
duct assembly, service
removal and replacement, fold unit, remove and
parts 3003
5QJ90-67011, replace 2387
electrical mechanical
5QJ90-67012 1354 miscellaneous parts, remove
relationships 3105
automatic document feeder FFC and replace 2512
exit unit , service parts 3000
removal and output tray unit, remove and
fan, service parts 3013
replacement 1335 replace 2485
fuser, service parts 3012
automatic document feeder hinge paddle unit, remove and
ITB, service parts 3009
kit replace 2252
laser scanner unit, service
removal and replacement, 100- parts and diagrams 3049,
parts 3005
sheet ADF 1384 3058
parts and diagrams 2991
removal and replacement, PCA, remove and
PCA, service parts 3014
5QJ90-67011, replace 2496
5QJ90-67012 1347

Index 3175
 presser unit, remove and booklet finisher diverter motor booklet finisher staple cartridge
replace 2291 removal and removal and
stapler unit, remove and replacement 2479 replacement 2384
replace 2367 booklet finisher diverter motor booklet finisher stapler
booklet finisher 1 of 5 assembly removal and
parts 3049 removal and replacement 2367
booklet finisher 3 of 5 replacement 2473 booklet finisher tamper
parts 3053 booklet finisher end fence home removal and
booklet finisher 4 of 5 sensor replacement 2296
parts 3055 removal and booklet finisher tamper home
booklet finisher 5 of 5 replacement 2266 sensor
parts 3056 booklet finisher end fence motor removal and
booklet finisher booklet blade removal and replacement 2313
home sensor replacement 2279 booklet finisher tamper motor
removal and booklet finisher entrance motor removal and
replacement 2417 removal and replacement 2331
booklet finisher booklet blade replacement 2241 booklet finisher tamper sensor
motor booklet finisher entrance sensor removal and
removal and removal and replacement 2349
replacement 2434 replacement 2223 booklet finisher, only
booklet finisher booklet diverter booklet finisher entrance unit removal and
home sensor removal and replacement 2187
removal and replacement 2210 booklet fold unit 290
replacement 2466 booklet finisher entrance-presser operation 293
booklet finisher booklet fold motor motor assembly overview 290
removal and removal and booklet maker 217, 278
replacement 2444 replacement 2237 booklet diverter unit 295
booklet finisher booklet fold motor booklet finisher harness guide booklet end fence unit 281
assembly removal and booklet entrance unit 278
removal and replacement 2198 booklet exit unit 297
replacement 2440 booklet finisher main PCA booklet finisher, remove and
booklet finisher booklet maker removal and replace 2188
removal and replacement 2496 booklet fold unit 290
replacement 2188 booklet finisher output tray booklet output tray unit 299
booklet finisher booklet maker removal and booklet paddle unit 280
PCA replacement 2485 booklet presser unit 283
removal and booklet finisher output tray sensor booklet stapler unit 287
replacement 2502 removal and booklet tamper unit 285
booklet finisher c-fold blade replacement 2488 bridge unit 237
assembly booklet finisher paddle home covers 223
removal and sensor detailed specifications 217
replacement 2387 removal and overview 226
booklet finisher c-fold blade home replacement 2252 stapler-stacker finisher 239
sensor booklet finisher paddle motor booklet maker PCA 305
removal and removal and booklet or stapler/stacker finishers
replacement 2399 replacement 2261 removal and
booklet finisher c-fold blade motor booklet finisher paddle motor replacement 1634
removal and replacement 2411 assembly booklet output tray unit 299
booklet finisher c-fold blade motor removal and operation 300
assembly replacement 2256 overview 299
removal and booklet finisher presser home booklet paddle unit 280
replacement 2405 sensor overview 280
booklet finisher diverter removal and booklet presser unit 283
removal and replacement 2291 operation 285
replacement 2449 overview 283

3176 Index
booklet staple unit clutches Calibrate/Cleaning menu 361,
staple and staple registration clutch 831 372, 406
cartridge 288 Tray 1 clutch 704 Cold Reset Paper 515
booklet stapler unit 287 color plane registration Color Band Test 568
operation 289 remove and replace parts 1101 Color Calibration 557
overview 287 Color Plane Registration (CPR) Component tests 539
booklet tamper unit 285 unit 123 Configuration/Status
operation 287 Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit Pages 562
overview 285 operation 126 Consumables Access
bridge unit 237 Color Plane Registration (CPR) unit Control 516
external finisher, remove and overview 123 Copy menu (MFP only) 361,
replace 1699 color plane registration sensors 372, 406, 467
overview 237 removal and replacement 1112 Counts 512
print quality diagnostic 352 color plane registration shutter Coverage Report 513
buffer unit 273 drive assembly CPMD 361
external finisher, remove and removal and CTD Sensor Cleaning 556
replace 2176 replacement 1123 Custom Color 555
operation 276 color plane registration shutter Drain 547
overview 273 driving 127 Engine NVM Read/Write 528
color plane registration shutter Enhanced 1200 DPI Print
C motor Quality 558
removal and Event Log 511, 568
cables
replacement 1135 Fax menu (fax models
automatic document feeder,
color plane registration shutter only) 361, 372, 406, 505
power 1341
sensor Fax Reports 562
automatic document feeder,
removal and Fax Service Log 564
power, 100-sheet ADF 1379
replacement 1148 Fax Speaker Mode 564
Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control
color plane registration unit Fax T.30 Trace Report 563
panel 361, 372, 406
removal and replacement 1101 Fax V.29 Speed 552
cassette 44
Color Toner Density (CTD) Fax V.34 563
caution vi
operation 127 Finisher Adjustment 519
certificate of volatility 3161
component test Footer 550
Channel partners
special mode test 361, 369, Full Auto Color
WISE 391
371 Registration 554
checklists
components Humidity 550
after-service 571, 572
diagnostic tests 361, 369, 371 Import/Export 553
preservice 571, 572
connector error IP fax log level 564
CIS platen
65.WX.YZ error 361, 404 IP fax multitasking 564
cover 195
control panel 136, 138 IP fax trace report 564
motor 195
10.1 inch 136 ITB Heating Mode 558
parts 3023
8 inch 136, 138 JBIG Compression 563
parts and diagrams 3022
ACR Reference License Management 558
PCA 196
Adjustment 553 locating 1
sensor 195
ACS Page Adjustment 517 locating features 4
CIS Platen 194
Advanced Print Quality Low Alerts 515
CIS platen cover 195
Pages 568 Low-temperature Idling
CIS platen motor 195
Altitude Adjustment 549 Mode 548
CIS platen PCA 196
Auto Color Registration 553 Maintenance menu 552
CIS platen sensor 195
Auto Tone Adjustment 555 Manual Tone Adjustment 557
cleaning page 361, 372, 406
Backup/Restore 553 Other Pages 562
cleaning the paper dust stick 30
Backup/Restore menu 361, overview 136, 138
cleaning the scan glass 30
372, 406 Paper Path Page 569
cleaning unit kit, ITB
Buckle Adjustment 518 Part Replacement Count 551
removal and
Calibrate Scanner 558 PQ Troubleshooting
replacement 1099
Pages 564

Index 3177
 Print Adjustment 517 Copy menu (MFP only), control inner finisher, remove and
Print menu 361, 372, 406, 509 panel 361, 372, 406, 467 replace 2524
PTT Test Mode 550 copy specifications 1, 6 left cover 604
removal and CoV left top cover 598
replacement 1221 certificate of volatility 3161 left upper cover 600
Reports menu 361, 372, 406, cover middle left 632
423 inner finisher 311 middle upper cover 608
Reset Engine NVM 527 covers parts 2991
Reset Supplies 551 base printer, remove and rear lower 589
Reset Supplies Level 515 replace 586 rear upper 586
Retrieve Diagnostic Data 569 base printer, service removal and replacement,
Retrieve Fax Diagnostic parts 2991 external finisher booklet
Data 569 controller 593 front cover 1697
Run Fax Test 569 DCF left cover 1450 removal and replacement,
Scan menu 476 DCF rear cover 1448 external finisher booklet
Scan menu (MFP only) 361, DCF right cover 1445 output tray 1656
372, 406 DCF right door 1452 removal and replacement,
Scanner Settings 513 DCF Tray 4, 5 color panel 1454 external finisher
Sensors 530 DCF, remove and replace 1445 caster 1691
Serial Number 514 document feeder color removal and replacement,
Service ID 514 panel 1317, 1361 external finisher caster
Service menu 510 dual cassette feeder left cover 1636
Service Reports 517 cover 1450 removal and replacement,
Setting Standard Tone 556 dual cassette feeder rear external finisher caster fix
Settings menu 361, 372, 406, cover 1448 nut 1694
425 dual cassette feeder right removal and replacement,
Software Version 516 cover 1445 external finisher front
Supplies menu 361, 372, 406, dual cassette feeder right cover 1666
509 door 1452 removal and replacement,
Test Support 550 dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5 external finisher front
TR Control Mode 546 color panel 1454 door 1634
Trays menu 361, 372, 406, 510 exit cover stacker 634 removal and replacement,
troubleshooting menu 361, exit rear cover 595 external finisher front lower
372, 406 exit stacker upper cover 655 left cover 1681
Troubleshooting menu 561 external finisher, remove and removal and replacement,
USB Firmware Upgrade 558 replace 1634 external finisher front lower
USB Firmware Upgrade flatbed scanner 1402, 1432 right cover 1686
menu 361, 372, 406 front cover 650 removal and replacement,
control panel base PCA 162 front lower cover 647 external finisher left lower
control panel diagnostic hardware integration pocket cover 1638
flowcharts 361, 364 [HIP] 630 removal and replacement,
control panel menus 361, 372, HCI, remove and replace 1532 external finisher left upper
406 high capacity input front CMF cover 1646
control panel messages 402 panel 1540 removal and replacement,
control panel PCA 161 high capacity input left external finisher main output
control panel base PCA 162 cover 1536 tray 1661
control panel PCA – 10.1 high capacity input rear removal and replacement,
inch 162 cover 1534 external finisher punch
control panel PCA – 8 inch 163 high capacity input right cover 1670
control panel PCA – 10.1 inch 162 cover 1532 removal and replacement,
control panel PCA – 8 inch 163 high capacity input right external finisher rear
controller cover door 1538 cover 1663
removal and replacement 593 HIP 630 removal and replacement,
conventions used vi inner cover 636 external finisher right upper
cover 1678

3178 Index
removal and replacement, right middle assembly 623 DCF 1 of 2
external finisher shaft hinge - right rear cover 618 parts 3025
door 1688 right upper cover 610 DCF 2 of 2
removal and replacement, stapler-stacker finisher and parts 3027
external finisher top booklet maker 223 DCF caster wheel
cover 1672 tray 1 unit 680 removal and
removal and replacement, tray 2 color panel 653 replacement 1457
external finisher top tray 3 color panel 653 DCF feed drive assembly
door 1675 covers 1 of 2 removal and
removal and replacement, theory of operation 42 replacement 1502
external finisher top jam covers 2 of 2 DCF feed motor
cover assembly 1752 theory of operation 43 removal and
removal and replacement, CPMD 402 replacement 1504
external finisher top output CPR DCF feed sensor
tray 1659 electrical mechanical removal and
removal and replacement, HCI relationships replacement 1479
front CMF panel 1540 diagrams 3119 DCF holder wheel kit
removal and replacement, HCI parts 3011 removal and
left cover 1536 removal and replacement 1101 replacement 1459
removal and replacement, HCI remove and replace parts 1101 DCF IF harness
rear cover 1534 CPR sensors removal and
removal and replacement, HCI removal and replacement 1112 replacement 1516
right cover 1532 CPR shutter motor DCF left cover
removal and replacement, HCI removal and removal and
right door 1538 replacement 1135 replacement 1450
removal and replacement, inner CPR shutter sensor DCF motor harness
finisher front cover removal and removal and
assembly 2524 replacement 1148 replacement 1519
removal and replacement, inner CRUM module assembly DCF PCA
finisher middle cover removal and replacement 917 removal and replacement 1511
assembly 2534 current settings pages 361, 372 DCF pickup drive assembly
removal and replacement, inner removal and
finisher output tray D replacement 1494
assembly 2544 DCF rear cover
DC controller communication error
removal and replacement, inner removal and
55.WX.YZ error 361, 404
finisher PCA cover 2548 replacement 1448
DC controller firmware error
removal and replacement, inner DCF right cover
70.WX.YZ error 361, 404
finisher punch cover removal and
DCF 42
assembly 2540 replacement 1445
covers, remove and
removal and replacement, inner DCF right door
replace 1445
finisher rear base removal and
harness, remove and
cover 2562 replacement 1452
replace 1507
removal and replacement, inner DCF right door open switch holder
motor, remove and
finisher rear punch removal and replacement 1513
replace 1494
cover 2566 DCF sensor harness
PCA, remove and replace 1507
removal and replacement, inner removal and
roller, remove and
finisher sub replacement 1522
replace 1464
stayassembly 2551 DCF size harness
sensor, remove and
removal and replacement, inner removal and
replace 1467
finisher top cover replacement 1528
unit parts, remove and
assembly 2528 DCF Tray 4 paper empty sensor
replace 1462
right door 662 removal and
DCF (workgroup)
right door front damper 673 replacement 1475
removal and
right door front link 668
replacement 1445
right front cover 621

Index 3179
 DCF Tray 4 paper stack height Department Dual Cassette Feeder engine 361, 369, 370
sensor (DCF, Tray 4, 5) fax 361
removal and cover 198 image management 361
replacement 1475 roller 201 LED 361, 369
DCF Tray 4 pickup assembly unit 200 print test patterns 361
removal and Department High Capacity Input scanner 361
replacement 1470 tray (HCI, Tray 4) diagrams
DCF Tray 4 pickup motor cover 207 use parts lists and
removal and motor 212 diagrams 570
replacement 1497 motor operation 214 digital sending error (firmware)
DCF Tray 4, 5 cassette operation 213 44.WX.YZ error 361, 403
removal and PCA 215 dimensions
replacement 1462 roller 209 accessories 1, 6
DCF Tray 4, 5 color panel sensors 210 printer 1, 6
removal and unit 209 diverter unit 323
replacement 1454 deskew operation – 200sh 179, booklet finisher, remove and
DCF Tray 4, 5 paper size sensors 188 replace 2449
removal and deskew operation – 200sh operation 324
replacement 1467 Flow 179, 188 overview 323
DCF Tray 4, 5 rollers deskew unit – 200sh 175 diverter unit operation 324
removal and deskew unit – 200sh Flow 175 diverter unit overview 323
replacement 1464 determine problem source 361 document feeder
DCF Tray 5 paper empty sensor developer jams 385
removal and electrical mechanical locating 1
replacement 1490 relationships document feeder / image scanner
DCF Tray 5 paper stack height diagrams 3115 assembly
sensor parts 3006 parts and diagrams 3016
removal and developer and drum document feeder error
replacement 1490 remove and replace 31.WX.YZ error 361, 403
DCF Tray 5 pickup assembly parts 1045 document feeder hinges operation
removal and developer and drum unit – 200sh 179, 189
replacement 1484 driving 114 document feeder hinges operation
DCF Tray 5 pickup motor developer and drum unit – 200sh Flow 179, 189
removal and operation 113 document feeder simplex
replacement 1499 developer and drum unit operation – 100sh 187
DCF tray heaters overview 108 document feeder simplex
removal and developer drive assembly operation – 100sh Flow 187
replacement 1507 removal and document feeder simplex
DCF, Tray 4, 5 198 replacement 1060 operation – 200sh 176
cover 198 developer fan document feeder simplex
feeding system workflow 199 removal and operation – 200sh Flow 176
motor operation 205 replacement 1199 document feeder skew (LX du
motors 203 developer motor Y/M/C models) 361
operation 204 removal and drive system 42
PCA 206 replacement 1083 drivers, supported 1, 6
roller 201 developer powder. drives
sensors 202 removal and feed drive assembly 780
unit 200 replacement 1048 tray 2 pickup drive
decoding developer unit 108 assembly 741
message 361 developer unit. tray 3 pickup drive
defeating removal and assembly 769
interlocks 361, 369, 370 replacement 1065 drum
definitions and terms diagnostics electrical mechanical
glossary 3164 adjustment 361 relationships
component 361, 369, 371 diagrams 3117

3180 Index
 parts 3008 dual cassette feeder holder wheel dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5
drum CRUM PCA 159 kit cassette
drum drive assembly removal and removal and
removal and replacement 1459 replacement 1462
replacement 1060 dual cassette feeder IF harness dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5 color
drum home sensor removal and panel
removal and replacement 1516 removal and
replacement 1079 dual cassette feeder left cover replacement 1454
drum motor K and ITB removal and dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5
removal and replacement 1450 paper size sensors
replacement 1075 dual cassette feeder motor removal and
drum motor Y/M/C harness replacement 1467
removal and removal and dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5
replacement 1070 replacement 1519 rollers
drum unit 108 dual cassette feeder PCA removal and
removal and removal and replacement 1511 replacement 1464
replacement 1045 dual cassette feeder pickup drive dual cassette feeder Tray 5 paper
dual cassette feeder 42 assembly empty sensor
covers, remove and removal and removal and
replace 1445 replacement 1494 replacement 1490
harness, remove and dual cassette feeder rear cover dual cassette feeder Tray 5 paper
replace 1507 removal and stack height sensor
motor, remove and replacement 1448 removal and
replace 1494 dual cassette feeder right cover replacement 1490
parts and diagrams 3025 removal and dual cassette feeder Tray 5 pickup
PCA, remove and replace 1507 replacement 1445 assembly
roller, remove and dual cassette feeder right door removal and
replace 1464 removal and replacement 1484
sensor, remove and replacement 1452 dual cassette feeder Tray 5 pickup
replace 1467 dual cassette feeder right door motor
unit parts, remove and open switch holder removal and
replace 1462 removal and replacement 1513 replacement 1499
dual cassette feeder (workgroup) dual cassette feeder sensor dual cassette feeder tray heaters
removal and harness removal and
replacement 1445 removal and replacement 1507
dual cassette feeder 1 of 2 replacement 1522 duct assembly
parts 3025 dual cassette feeder size harness parts 3004
dual cassette feeder 2 of 2 removal and duct unit
parts 3027 replacement 1528 remove and replace parts 927
dual cassette feeder caster wheel dual cassette feeder Tray 4 paper duplex assembly
removal and empty sensor removal and replacement 869
replacement 1457 removal and duplex jam sensor
dual cassette feeder feed drive replacement 1475 removal and replacement 875
assembly dual cassette feeder Tray 4 paper duplex motor
removal and stack height sensor removal and replacement 879
replacement 1502 removal and duplex unit 78
dual cassette feeder feed motor replacement 1475 driving 81
removal and dual cassette feeder Tray 4 pickup operation 80
replacement 1504 assembly overview 78
dual cassette feeder feed sensor removal and remove and replace parts 869
removal and replacement 1470 duplex unit driving 81
replacement 1479 dual cassette feeder Tray 4 pickup duplex unit operation 80
motor duplex unit overview 78
removal and duplexer error
replacement 1497 69.WX.YZ error 361, 404

Index 3181
 E end fence unit operation 333 loop sensing unit, remove and
end fence unit overview 332 replace parts 803
easy-access USB port
engine LSU, remove and replace
locating 1
color plane registration, remove parts 1038
echo PCA 156
and replace parts 1101 main PCAs, remove and replace
removal and
covers, remove and parts 1224
replacement 1260
replace 586 main printed circuit assembly,
ejector unit 264, 340
covers, service parts 2991 remove and replace
external finisher, remove and
CPR, remove and replace parts 1224
replace 2017
parts 1101 PCA, service parts 3014
inner finisher, remove and
CPR, service parts 3011 PCAs, remove and replace
replace 2845
developer and drum, remove parts 1224
operation 266, 342
and replace parts 1045 power supply PCAs, remove and
overview 264, 340
developer, service parts 3006 replace parts 1285
ejector unit operation 342
diagnostics 361, 369, 370 power supply printed circuit
ejector unit overview 340
drum, service parts 3008 assembly, remove and
electrical mechanical relationships
duct assembly, service replace parts 1285
base printer 3105
parts 3003 printed circuit assembly,
electrical mechanical
duct unit, remove and replace remove and replace
relationships diagrams 3105
parts 927 parts 1224
booklet finisher 3142
duplex unit, remove and replace registration and loop sensors
CPR 3119
parts 869 and duplex, service
developer 3115
environmental sensor, switch, parts 2997
drum 3117
and fan 1179 registration unit, remove and
exit unit 3109
exit unit , service parts 3000 replace parts 803
fuser 3120
exit unit, remove and replace remove and replace parts 586
inner finisher 3132
parts 854 sensor, service parts 3013
input devices 3131
fan, service parts 3013 sub PCAs, remove and replace
ITB 3118
feeding system, remove and parts 1245
lsu 3114
replace parts 662 sub printed circuit assembly,
output devices 3132
feeding system, right door remove and replace
PCA 3123
assemblies remove and parts 1245
registration and loop
replace parts 662 toner cartridge, remove and
sensors 3108
feeding system, Tray 1 unit replace parts 885
sensor and fan 3121
remove and replace toner cartridge, service
stapler-stacker finisher 3142
parts 680 parts 3002
toner cartridge 3111
feeding system, Tray 2-3 units toner collection unit, remove
toner collection unit 3113
remove and replace and replace parts 980
toner duct 3112
parts 714 toner collection unit, service
tray 1 3105
fuser unit, remove and replace parts 3005
tray 2/3 3106
parts 1161 toner flow, remove and replace
electrical specifications 1, 6
fuser, service parts 3012 parts 885
electrostatic discharge (ESD) 571
image creation, remove and tray 1, service parts 2994
Embedded Jetdirect error
replace parts 1038 tray 2, 3, service parts 2995
80.WX.YZ error 361, 404
image transfer belt, remove and engine error (LaserJet)
eMMC 154
replace parts 1088 46.WX.YZ error 361, 403
end fence unit 255, 332
ITB cleaning unit, remove and 63.WX.YZ error 361, 404
booklet finisher, remove and
replace parts 1099 engine error (PageWide)
replace 2266
ITB, remove and replace 61.WX.YZ error 361, 404
external finisher, remove and
parts 1088 engine, printer
replace 1870
ITB, service parts 3009 parts and diagrams 2991
inner finisher, remove and
laser scanner unit, remove and entrance unit 239, 321
replace 2761
replace parts 1038 booklet finisher, remove and
operation 256, 333
laser scanner unit, service replace 2210
overview 255, 332
parts 3005

3182 Index
 external finisher, remove and external booklet 2 of 5 external finisher bridge unit
replace 1727 parts 3051 removal and
inner finisher, remove and external finisher replacement 1699
replace 2602 bridge unit, remove and external finisher buffer motor
overview 239, 321 replace 1699 removal and
entrance unit overview 321 buffer unit, remove and replacement 2183
environmental sensor 134 replace 2176 external finisher buffer solenoid
environmental sensor, fan, switch covers, remove and assembly
overview 134 replace 1634 removal and
environmental sensor, switch, and ejector unit, remove and replacement 2176
fan replace 2017 external finisher caster
remove and replace end fence unit, remove and removal and
parts 1179 replace 1870 replacement 1691
eraser PCA 160 entrance unit, remove and external finisher caster cover
error replace 1727 removal and
fault 361 main exit unit, remove and replacement 1636
ESD electrostatic discharge replace 1815 external finisher caster fix nut
(ESD) 571 main output tray unit, remove removal and
Ethernet (RJ-45) and replace 2092 replacement 1694
locating 3 paddle unit, remove and external finisher ejector 1 home
event log 361, 372 replace 1843 sensor
clear using touchscreen control paper holding unit, remove and removal and
panel 361, 372 replace 2137 replacement 2047
find links to information 375 punch unit, remove and external finisher ejector 1 motor
event log error (firmware) replace 1750 sensor
42.WX.YZ error 361, 403 stapler unit, remove and removal and
exit cover stacker replace 1980 replacement 2062
removal and replacement 634 tamper unit, remove and external finisher ejector 2 motor
exit motor replace 1914 sensor
removal and replacement 1173 top exit unit, remove and removal and
exit rear cover replace 1780 replacement 2077
removal and replacement 595 top output tray unit, remove and external finisher ejector sensor
exit stack guide replace 1796 removal and
removal and replacement 866 tray diverter unit, remove and replacement 2031
exit stacker upper cover replace 1752 external finisher ejector unit
removal and replacement 655 external finisher booklet front removal and
exit unit 71, 325 cover replacement 2017
electrical mechanical removal and external finisher end fence home
relationships replacement 1697 sensor
diagrams 3109 external finisher booklet output removal and
inner finisher, remove and tray replacement 1870
replace 2654 removal and external finisher end fence motor
overview 71, 325 replacement 1656 removal and
removal and replacement 854 external finisher bridge door replacement 1889
remove and replace parts 854 sensor external finisher end fence motor
exit unit 1 of 2 removal and assembly
parts 3000 replacement 1703 removal and
exit unit 2 of 2 external finisher bridge entrance replacement 1884
parts 3002 sensor external finisher entrance motor
exit unit driving 77 removal and removal and
exit unit operation 76 replacement 1709 replacement 1746
exit unit overview 71, 325 external finisher bridge exit sensor external finisher entrance motor
exploded parts views, use parts removal and replacement 1714 assembly
lists and diagrams 570 external finisher bridge motor removal and
removal and replacement 1721 replacement 1742

Index 3183
 external finisher entrance sensor external finisher main exit cam external finisher paddle motor
removal and motor removal and
replacement 1727 removal and replacement 1864
external finisher exit motor replacement 1832 external finisher paddle motor
removal and external finisher main exit cam assembly
replacement 1793 motor assembly removal and
external finisher exit motor removal and replacement 1853
assembly replacement 1822 external finisher paper holding
removal and external finisher main exit sensor home sensor
replacement 1790 removal and removal and
external finisher front cover replacement 1815 replacement 2150
removal and external finisher main output tray external finisher paper holding
replacement 1666 removal and motor drive assembly
external finisher front door replacement 1661, 2092 removal and
removal and external finisher main output tray replacement 2163
replacement 1634 lower limit sensor external finisher punch cover
external finisher front door switch removal and removal and
removal and replacement 2107 replacement 1670
replacement 1837 external finisher main output tray external finisher punch unit
external finisher front lower left motor drive assembly removal and
cover removal and replacement 1750
removal and replacement 2123 external finisher rear cover
replacement 1681 external finisher main output tray removal and
external finisher front lower right motor sensor replacement 1663
cover removal and external finisher rear paper
removal and replacement 2119 holding sensor
replacement 1686 external finisher main output tray removal and
external finisher front paper top of stack sensor replacement 2137
holding sensor removal and external finisher rear tamper
removal and replacement 2095 removal and
replacement 2137 external finisher main output tray replacement 1947
external finisher front tamper top of stack switch external finisher rear tamper home
removal and removal and sensor
replacement 1914 replacement 2127 removal and
external finisher front tamper external finisher main output tray replacement 1957
home sensor top of stack switch guide external finisher rear tamper
removal and removal and motor
replacement 1925 replacement 1895 removal and
external finisher front tamper external finisher main output tray replacement 1968
motor top of stack switch lower guide external finisher right upper cover
removal and removal and removal and
replacement 1937 replacement 1905 replacement 1678
external finisher left lower cover external finisher mounting external finisher shaft hinge - door
removal and brackets removal and
replacement 1638 removal and replacement 1688
external finisher left upper cover replacement 2513 external finisher staple cartridge
removal and external finisher paddle removal and
replacement 1646 removal and replacement 1986
external finisher main exit cam replacement 1843 external finisher stapler front
home sensor external finisher paddle home sensor
removal and sensor removal and
replacement 1827 removal and replacement 1988
replacement 1858

3184 Index
external finisher stapler manual external finisher tray diverter cam duplex unit driving 81
staple sensor removal and duplex unit operation 80
removal and replacement 1764 duplex unit overview 78
replacement 2003 external finisher tray diverter exit unit driving 77
external finisher stapler mid-front home sensor exit unit operation 76
sensor removal and exit unit overview 71
removal and replacement 1772 job separator 75
replacement 1996 external finisher tray extension loop sensing overview 66
external finisher stapler mid-rear removal and loop sensor 70
sensor replacement 1805 main components and
removal and external finisher, booklet maker functions 44
replacement 1996 parts and diagrams 3049, motors 49
external finisher stapler position 3058 MP feeder assembly 44
motor external finisher, stapler/stacker overview 44
removal and parts and diagrams 3042 pickup unit 44
replacement 2009 registration unit 44, 69
external finisher stapler unit F registration unit driving 70
removal and registration unit overview 66
fan error
replacement 1980 remove and replace parts 662
58.WX.YZ error 361, 404
external finisher stapler/stacker or right door assemblies, remove
fans 134
booklet finishers and replace parts 662
developer fan, removal and
removal and roller 46
replacement 1199
replacement 1634 rollers 44
FDB fan, removal and
external finisher top cover second exit unit driving 78
replacement 1184
removal and second unit overview 73
fuser fan duct, removal and
replacement 1672 sensor, motor, and
replacement 1189
external finisher top door solenoid 44
laser scanner unit fan 1193
removal and sensors 47
LVPS fan 1184
replacement 1675 solenoids 49
parts 3013
external finisher top door open Tray 1 50
fax card
switch Tray 1 unit, remove and replace
removal and
removal and parts 680
replacement 1282
replacement 1760 Tray 2 cassette 56
Fax menu (fax models only), control
external finisher top exit sensor Tray 2 pickup assembly 57
panel 361, 372, 406, 505
removal and Tray 2-3 units, remove and
FDB
replacement 1780 replace parts 714
removal and
external finisher top jam cover Tray 3 cassette 56
replacement 1295
assembly Tray 3 pickup assembly 57
FDB fan
removal and workflow 45
removal and
replacement 1752 feeding system information 44,
replacement 1184
external finisher top lower feed 55
feed drive assembly
assembly duplex unit 78
removal and replacement 780
removal and exit unit 71
feed motor
replacement 1796 loop sensing 66
removal and replacement 785
external finisher top output tray registration unit 66
Tray 2 62
removal and Tray 1 unit 50
Tray 3 62
replacement 1659 Tray 2 unit 55
feed roller
external finisher top output tray Tray 3 unit 55
Tray 2 62
paper full sensor feeding system overview 44
Tray 3 62
removal and feeding system workflow 45
feed sensor
replacement 1808 finisher main PCA - shared 302
Tray 2 62
external finisher tray diverter firmware communication error
Tray 3 62
removal and 49.WX.YZ error 361, 403
feeding system 42, 44
replacement 1756 firmware install error
cassette 44
99.WX.YZ error 361, 404

Index 3185
 hard disk error 361, 404 fold unit driving 133
remote firmware upgrade booklet finisher, remove and overview 128
error 361, 404 replace 2387 removal and replacement 1161
flatbed CIS, FFC 68 pin formatter 142 remove and replace parts 1161
removal and locating 1, 2 temperature control 131
replacement 1441 removal and wrap jam sensor 132
flatbed CIS, PCA replacement 1224 fuser unit temperature
removal and formatter lights 361, 369 control 131
replacement 1434 front cover fuser wrap jam sensor 132
flatbed CIS, power cable removal and replacement 650
removal and front door G
replacement 1437 locating 1
General Settings menu, control
flatbed CIS, rear cover front door switch
panel 361, 372, 406, 425
removal and removal and
general specifications 1, 6
replacement 1432 replacement 1203
glass cleaning
flatbed CIS, whole unit front lower cover
image scanner and flat-bed
removal and removal and replacement 647
glass 193, 196
replacement 1425 fuser
glossary
flatbed scanner electrical mechanical
terms and definitions 3164
covers 1402, 1432 relationships
harness 1404, 1434 diagrams 3120 H
PCA 1404, 1434 jams 390
sensor 1404, 1434 parts 3012 hard disk
whole unit replacement 1394, release operation 131 removal and replacement 1241
1425 fuser and exit drive assembly hard disk cradle
flatbed scanner (CIS) removal and removal and
removal and replacement 1164 replacement 1236
replacement 1425 fuser CRUM PCA 161 hard disk drive 153
flatbed scanner (Tarot) fuser drive assembly 42 hard disk partition error
removal and fuser drive board 98.WX.YZ error 361, 404
replacement 1394 removal and hard-disk drive rivet
flatbed scanner system 42 replacement 1295 removal and
flatbed, FFC 50 pin Fuser Drive Board (FDB) 167 replacement 1234
removal and fuser drive board fan hardware configuration 42, 139
replacement 1408 removal and accelerator 149
flatbed, FFC 68 pin replacement 1184 control panel base PCA 162
removal and fuser driving 133 control panel PCA 161
replacement 1413 fuser error control panel PCA – 8 inch 163
flatbed, open sensor 41.WX.YZ error 361, 403 drum CRUM PCA 159
removal and laser scanner error 361, 403 echo PCA 156
replacement 1422 paper path error 361, 403 eMMC 154
flatbed, PCA fuser error (LaserJet) eraser PCA 160
removal and 50.WX.YZ error 361, 404 formatter 142
replacement 1404 fuser fan duct fuser CRUM PCA 161
flatbed, power cable removal and Fuser Drive Board (FDB) 167
removal and replacement 1189 hard disk drive 153
replacement 1418 fuser motor High Voltage Power Supply
flatbed, rear cover removal and (HVPS) 164
removal and replacement 1168 Island Of Data (IOD) 155
replacement 1402 fuser out sensor keyboard PCA 157
flatbed, whole unit removal and replacement 851 Lower Voltage Power Supply
removal and fuser release operation 131 (LVPS) 166
replacement 1395 fuser support bracket overview 139
flow ADF skew (LX du removal and replacement 1177 paper size sensor PCA 159
models) 361 fuser unit 128 PCA overview 139

3186 Index
 power key PCA 157 covers, remove and HCI lift motor
riser card 147 replace 1532 removal and
riser card for HDD 148 harness, remove and replacement 1593
riser card for HDD, USB ports, replace 1617 HCI main IF harness
and accelerator board 149 motor, remove and removal and
solid-state drive 150 replace 1593 replacement 1624
storage 150 PCA, remove and replace 1617 HCI motor IF
SVC-internal USB expansion roller, remove and removal and
kit 148 replace 1556 replacement 1626
toner cartridge CRUM sensor, remove and HCI paper gate
PCA 160 replace 1559 removal and
Toner Collection Unit full sensor unit parts, remove and replacement 1605
PCA 158 replace 1547 HCI PCA
Trusted Platform Module HCI (workgroup) removal and replacement 1617
(TPM) 147 removal and HCI pickup assembly
USB hub PCA 155 replacement 1532 removal and
hardware configuration HCI 1 of 2 replacement 1552
information 139 parts 3029 HCI pickup motor drive
hardware configurationcontrol HCI 2 of 2 removal and
panel PCA – 10.1 inch 162 parts 3031 replacement 1610
hardware integration pocket (HIP) HCI cassette HCI right cover
locating 1 removal and removal and
hardware integration pocket (HIP) replacement 1550 replacement 1532
is not functioning 361, 364, HCI caster wheel HCI right door
368 removal and removal and
hardware integration pocket [HIP] replacement 1542 replacement 1538
removal and replacement 630 HCI feed motor drive HCI right door open switch holder
harnesses removal and removal and
DCF, remove and replace 1507 replacement 1608 replacement 1589
flatbed scanner 1404, 1434 HCI feed sensor HCI right rear
HCI, remove and replace 1617 removal and removal and
removal and replacement, DCF replacement 1559 replacement 1534
IF harness 1516 HCI front CMF panel HCI rollers
removal and replacement, dual removal and removal and
cassette feeder IF replacement 1540 replacement 1556
harness 1516 HCI gate solenoid home sensor HCI shift gate solenoid
removal and replacement, dual removal and removal and
cassette feeder motor replacement 1586 replacement 1613
harness 1519 HCI holder wheel kit HCI shift motor
removal and replacement, dual removal and removal and
cassette feeder sensor replacement 1544 replacement 1593
harness 1522 HCI inner drawer IF HCI shift plate
removal and replacement, dual removal and removal and
cassette feeder size replacement 1631 replacement 1596
harness 1528 HCI knockup home sensor HCI shift tray empty sensor
removal and replacement, high removal and removal and
capacity input inner drawer replacement 1570 replacement 1576
IF 1631 HCI knockup plate HCI shift tray end sensor
removal and replacement, high removal and removal and
capacity input main IF replacement 1601 replacement 1570
harness 1624 HCI left rear HCI shift tray home sensor
removal and replacement, high removal and removal and
capacity input motor replacement 1536 replacement 1576
IF 1626
HCI 42

Index 3187
 HCI shift tray level sensor 1 and 2 unit parts, remove and high capacity input motor IF
removal and replace 1547 removal and
replacement 1579 high capacity input (workgroup) replacement 1626
HCI sub PCA removal and high capacity input paper gate
removal and replacement 1532 removal and
replacement 1620 high capacity input 1 of 2 replacement 1605
HCI Tray 4 paper empty sensor parts 3029 high capacity input PCA
removal and high capacity input 2 of 2 removal and replacement 1617
replacement 1565 parts 3031 high capacity input pickup
HCI Tray 4 paper stack height high capacity input cassette assembly
sensor removal and removal and
removal and replacement 1550 replacement 1552
replacement 1565 high capacity input caster wheel high capacity input pickup motor
HCI tray open sensor removal and drive
removal and replacement 1542 removal and
replacement 1583 high capacity input feed motor replacement 1610
HCI unit drive high capacity input rear cover
removal and removal and removal and
replacement 1547 replacement 1608 replacement 1534
HCI, Tray 4 207 high capacity input feed sensor high capacity input right cover
cover 207 removal and removal and
motor 212 replacement 1559 replacement 1532
motor operation 214 high capacity input front CMF high capacity input right door
operation 213 panel removal and
PCA 215 removal and replacement 1538
roller 209 replacement 1540 high capacity input right door open
sensors 210 high capacity input gate solenoid switch holder
sub PCA 216 home sensor removal and
unit 209 removal and replacement 1589
workflow 208 replacement 1586 high capacity input rollers
HDD high capacity input holder wheel removal and
removal and replacement 1241 kit replacement 1556
HDD, cradle removal and high capacity input shift gate
removal and replacement 1544 solenoid
replacement 1236 high capacity input inner drawer IF removal and
HDD, riser card and cradle removal and replacement 1613
removal and replacement 1631 high capacity input shift motor
replacement 1230 high capacity input knockup home removal and
Help button sensor replacement 1593
locating 4 removal and high capacity input shift plate
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port replacement 1570 removal and
locating 3 high capacity input knockup plate replacement 1596
high capacity input removal and high capacity input shift tray
covers, remove and replacement 1601 empty sensor
replace 1532 high capacity input left cover removal and
harness, remove and removal and replacement 1576
replace 1617 replacement 1536 high capacity input shift tray end
motor, remove and high capacity input lift motor sensor
replace 1593 removal and removal and
parts and diagrams 3029 replacement 1593 replacement 1570
PCA, remove and replace 1617 high capacity input main IF high capacity input shift tray home
roller, remove and harness sensor
replace 1556 removal and removal and
sensor, remove and replacement 1624 replacement 1576
replace 1559

3188 Index
high capacity input shift tray level Color Plane Registration (CPR) blurred image 361
sensor 1 and 2 unit operation 126 flow ADF or ADF skew (LX du
removal and Color Plane Registration (CPR) models) 361
replacement 1579 unit overview 123 foggy image 361
high capacity input sub PCA color plane registration shutter jitter image 361
removal and driving 127 light image 361
replacement 1620 Color Toner Density (CTD) light lines, vertical 361
high capacity input tray 42 operation 127 periodic black dots,
high capacity input Tray 4 paper developer and drum unit 108 horizontal 361
empty sensor developer and drum unit periodic black lines,
removal and driving 114 horizontal 361
replacement 1565 developer and drum unit periodic light/dark dots,
high capacity input Tray 4 paper operation 113 horizontal 361
stack height sensor developer and drum unit periodic light/dark lines,
removal and overview 108 horizontal 361
replacement 1565 fuser driving 133 poor fusing 361
high capacity input tray open fuser release operation 131 skewed image 361
sensor fuser unit 128 stain on back side 361
removal and fuser unit overview 128 standard tone, setting 361
replacement 1583 fuser unit temperature uneven pitch 361
high capacity input unit control 131 white lines, vertical 361
removal and fuser wrap jam sensor 132 image scanner
replacement 1547 Image Transfer Belt (ITB) 115 covers, flatbed 1402, 1432
High Voltage Power Supply Image Transfer Belt (ITB) harness, flatbed 1404, 1434
(HVPS) 164 driving 117 PCA, flatbed 1404, 1434
high voltage power supply Image Transfer Belt (ITB) sensor, flatbed 1404, 1434
PCA 42 operation 117 whole unit replacement 1394,
high-voltage power supply Image Transfer Belt (ITB) 1425
removal and overview 115 image scanner and flat-bed glass
replacement 1285 ITB cleaning unit 121 cleaning 193, 196
hinge kit ITB cleaning unit image scanner assembly
automatic document feeder, operation 122 parts and diagrams 3016
100-sheet ADF 1384 ITB cleaning unit overview 121 Image Scanner Assembly (ISA)
automatic document feeder, Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) 102 ADF – 100sh 181
5QJ90-67011, Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) ADF – 100sh Flow 181
5QJ90-67012 1347 adjusting skew error 106 ADF – 200sh 168
Home button Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) ADF – 200sh Flow 168
locating 4 operation 104 CIS Platen 194
home button is Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) Tarot Platen 191
unresponsive 361, 364, 367 overview 102 image scanner assembly/
HP internal users motor 101 document feeder
WISE 391 overview 98 parts and diagrams 3016
HP Jetdirect print server remove and replace image transfer belt
lights 361, 369 parts 1038 removal and
HVPS Second Transfer (T2) Unit 119 replacement 1088
removal and Second Transfer (T2) unit remove and replace
replacement 1285 operation 120 parts 1088
Second Transfer (T2) unit Image Transfer Belt (ITB) 115
I overview 119 Image Transfer Belt (ITB)
sensors 99 driving 117
ILSB, theory 350
workflow 98 Image Transfer Belt (ITB)
image creation 42, 98
image creation information 98, operation 117
Color Plane Registration (CPR)
102, 108, 115, 119, 121, 123, 128 Image Transfer Belt (ITB)
unit 123
image quality 404 overview 115
black lines, vertical 361

Index 3189
 image transfer belt engage motor punch unit, remove and inner finisher entrance sensor
removal and replace 2586 removal and
replacement 1095 rail, remove and replace 2516 replacement 2602
individual component rear joint PCA 349 inner finisher exit bin full
diagnostics 361, 369 removal and removal and
information replacement 2515, 2516 replacement 2583
general 361 staple and staple inner finisher exit motor
print reports 361 cartridge 338 removal and
software version 361 stapler unit 336 replacement 2688
supply status 361 stapler unit, remove and inner finisher exit motor assembly
inline scanner bridge unit, replace 2816 removal and
theory 350 switch, remove and replacement 2683
inner cover replace 2936 inner finisher exit roller assembly
removal and replacement 636 tamper unit 334 removal and
inner finisher 307 tamper unit, remove and replacement 2654
cover 311 replace 2772 inner finisher exit sensor
covers, remove and whole unit, remove and removal and
replace 2524 replace 2516 replacement 2663
detailed specifications 307 inner finisher 1 of 5 inner finisher exit sensor actuator
diverter unit 323 parts 3033 removal and
ejector unit 340 inner finisher 2 of 5 replacement 2673
ejector unit, remove and parts 3034 inner finisher front cover assembly
replace 2845 inner finisher 3 of 5 removal and
electrical mechanical parts 3036 replacement 2524
relationships inner finisher 4 of 5 inner finisher front cover switch
diagrams 3132 parts 3038 removal and
end fence unit 332 inner finisher 5 of 5 replacement 2958
end fence unit, remove and parts 3040 inner finisher front paper support
replace 2761 inner finisher detailed removal and
entrance unit 321 specifications 307 replacement 2726
entrance unit, remove and inner finisher docking sensor inner finisher front tamper
replace 2602 removal and removal and
exit unit 325 replacement 2974 replacement 2772
exit unit, remove and inner finisher ejector inner finisher front tamper home
replace 2654 removal and sensor
main PCA 347 replacement 2845 removal and
output tray 343 inner finisher end fence sensor replacement 2787
output tray, remove and removal and inner finisher front tamper motor
replace 2854 replacement 2761 removal and
overview 313 inner finisher entrance motor replacement 2779
paddle unit 329 removal and inner finisher guide rails
paddle unit, remove and replacement 2618 removal and
replace 2733 inner finisher entrance motor replacement 2520
paper holding unit 343 assembly inner finisher hole punch
paper holding unit, remove and removal and removal and
replace 2854 replacement 2607 replacement 2586
paper support unit 327 inner finisher entrance motor inner finisher lock release handle
paper support unit, remove and timing belt removal and
replace 2693 removal and replacement 2569
parts and diagrams 3033 replacement 2629 inner finisher main interface
PCA 347 inner finisher entrance roller harness
PCA, remove and removal and removal and
replace 2936 replacement 2635 replacement 2572
punch unit 318

3190 Index
inner finisher main paddle inner finisher paper holding sensor inner finisher staple cartridge
assembly removal and removal and
removal and replacement 2925 replacement 2821
replacement 2733 inner finisher paper holding inner finisher stapler assembly
inner finisher main paddle home solenoid removal and
sensor removal and replacement 2816
removal and replacement 2914 inner finisher stapler position
replacement 2750 inner finisher paper support home motor
inner finisher main paddle motor sensor removal and
assembly removal and replacement 2836
removal and replacement 2701 inner finisher stapler position
replacement 2757 inner finisher paper support motor sensor
inner finisher main PCA 347 removal and removal and
inner finisher middle cover replacement 2717 replacement 2824
assembly inner finisher paper support motor inner finisher sub paddle assembly
removal and assembly removal and
replacement 2534 removal and replacement 2743
inner finisher middle roller replacement 2709 inner finisher sub stay assembly
removal and inner finisher PCA removal and
replacement 2646 removal and replacement 2551
inner finisher output tray assembly replacement 2936 inner finisher top cover assembly
removal and inner finisher PCA cover removal and
replacement 2544 removal and replacement 2528
inner finisher output tray lower replacement 2548 inner finisher top cover switch
limit switch assembly inner finisher punch cover removal and
removal and assembly replacement 2969
replacement 2874 removal and input accessory error
inner finisher output tray motor replacement 2540 67.WX.YZ error 361, 404
removal and inner finisher punch waste full input device (workgroup)
replacement 2860 sensor removal and
inner finisher output tray motor removal and replacement 1445
assembly replacement 2592 input devices
removal and inner finisher rear base cover DCF, Tray 4, 5 198
replacement 2854 removal and electrical mechanical
inner finisher output tray motor replacement 2562 relationships
sensor inner finisher rear joint PCA 349 diagrams 3131
removal and removal and HCI, Tray 4 207
replacement 2867 replacement 2948 parts and diagrams 3024
inner finisher output tray top of inner finisher rear paper support workgroup stand 197
stack sensor kit removal and Input devices 197
removal and replacement 2693 input/output error
replacement 2881 inner finisher rear punch cover 40.WX.YZ error 361, 403
inner finisher overview 313 removal and Integrated Scan Asset (ISA) 168
motor and solenoid 316 replacement 2566 integrated scanner assembly
PCA 317 inner finisher rear tamper flatbed (CIS), removal and
roller 317 removal and replacement 1425
sensor 314 replacement 2795 flatbed (Tarot), removal and
workflow 313 inner finisher rear tamper home replacement 1394
inner finisher paper holding sensor removal and
actuator removal and replacement 1300
removal and replacement 2809 integrated scanner asset
replacement 2892 inner finisher rear tamper motor 100-sheet, whole unit
inner finisher paper holding kit removal and replacement 1306
removal and replacement 2802
replacement 2903

Index 3191
 200-sheet z and dn bundles, removal and replacement job pipeline error
whole unit flatbed, whole unit 1395 (firmware) 361, 403
replacement 1300 whole unit replacement 1300 job parser error (firmware)
removal and replacement ISA, 100-sheet 47.WX.YZ error 361, 403
5QK34 1306 whole unit replacement 1306 printer calibration error 361,
removal and replacement ISA, 200-sheet 403
5QK36, 5QK35 1300 z and dn bundles, whole unit job separator 75
whole unit replacement 1300 replacement 1300
integrated-scanner assembly island of data K
parts 3016 removal and
keyboard
interface ports replacement 1256
removal and
locating 2, 3 Island Of Data (IOD) 155
replacement 1273
interlocks ITB
keyboard PCA 157
defeating 361, 369, 370 electrical mechanical
kits
internal diagnostics error relationships
tray 1 roller 711
90.WX.YZ error 361, 404 diagrams 3118
tray 2/3 rollers 724
video display error 361, 404 parts 3009
Kits
IOD 155 removal and
ITB cleaning unit kit 1099
removal and replacement 1088
replacement 1256 remove and replace L
ISA parts 1088
parts 3016 ITB cleaning unit 121 LAN port
parts and diagrams 3016 remove and replace locating 3
removal and parts 1099 laser scanner assembly 42
replacement 1300 ITB cleaning unit kit laser scanner error (LaserJet)
removal and replacement removal and 51.WX.YZ error 361, 404
5QK34 1306 replacement 1099 52.WX.YZ error 361, 404
removal and replacement ITB cleaning unit operation 122 laser scanner unit
5QK36, 5QK35 1300 ITB cleaning unit overview 121 parts 3006
removal and replacement removal and
flatbed , rear cover 1432 J replacement 1038
removal and replacement remove and replace
jam error (LaserJet)
flatbed CIS, FFC 68 parts 1038
13.WX.YZ error 361, 403
pin 1441 laser scanner unit fan
jam error (PageWide)
removal and replacement removal and
13.WX.YZ error 361, 403
flatbed CIS, PCA 1434 replacement 1193
jams
removal and replacement Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) 102
520-sheet trays 388
flatbed CIS, power Adjusting the skew error 106
auto-navigation 384
cable 1437 Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)
causes of 385
removal and replacement operation 104
document feeder 385
flatbed CIS, whole Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)
fuser 390
unit 1425 overview 102
locations 361, 383
removal and replacement LEDs
output bin 390
flatbed, FFC 50 pin 1408 See lights
right door 390
removal and replacement left cover
Tray 1 387
flatbed, FFC 68 pin 1413 removal and replacement 604
Tray 2 388
removal and replacement left top cover
Tray 3 388
flatbed, open sensor 1422 removal and replacement 598
Jetdirect print server
removal and replacement left upper cover
lights 361, 369
flatbed, PCA 1404 removal and replacement 600
job accounting error (firmware)
removal and replacement lever-actuator bin full exit
48.WX.YZ error 361, 403
flatbed, power cable 1418 removal and replacement 863
job management error
removal and replacement lift plate unit – 100sh 185
(firmware) 361, 403
flatbed, rear cover 1402 lift plate unit – 100sh Flow 185
lift plate unit – 200sh 173

3192 Index
lift plate unit – 200sh Flow 173 external finisher, remove and Custom Color 555
lights replace 1815 Drain 547
formatter 361, 369 operation 251 Engine NVM Read/Write 528
troubleshooting with 361, 369 overview 250 Enhanced 1200 DPI Print
local area network (LAN) main output tray unit 267 Quality 558
locating 3 external finisher, remove and Event Log 511, 568
loop sensing 66 replace 2092 Fax (fax models only) 361, 372,
overview 66 overview 267 406, 505
loop sensing unit main printed circuit assembly Fax Reports 562
remove and replace parts 803 remove and replace Fax Service Log 564
loop sensor 70 parts 1224 Fax Speaker Mode 564
operation 70 maintenance 30 Fax T.30 Trace Report 563
loop sensor 1/2 machine cleaning for Fax V.29 Speed 552
removal and replacement 840 maintenance 30 Fax V.34 563
loop sensor actuator preventive maintenance 30 Finisher Adjustment 519
removal and replacement 845 maintenance counts Footer 550
low voltage power supply 42 part replacement count 361 Full Auto Color
low-voltage power supply Maintenance menu, control Registration 554
removal and panel 552 General Settings 361, 372,
replacement 1290 maintenance parts 1, 6, 17 406, 425
low-voltage power supply fan manual staple PCA 306 Humidity 550
removal and memory error Import/Export 553
replacement 1184 82.WX.YZ error 361, 404 IP fax log level 564
Lower Voltage Power Supply EMMC error 361, 404 IP fax multitasking 564
(LVPS) 166 hard disk error 361, 404 IP fax trace report 564
lsu menu ITB Heating Mode 558
electrical mechanical Support Tools menu 510 JBIG Compression 563
relationships menu map 361, 372 License Management 558
diagrams 3114 menus, control panel Low Alerts 515
LSU ACR reference Low-temperature Idling
parts 3006 adjustment 553 Mode 548
removal and ACS Page Adjustment 517 Maintenance 552
replacement 1038 Advanced Print Quality Manage Trays 361, 372, 406,
remove and replace Pages 568 510
parts 1038 Altitude Adjustment 549 Manual Tone Adjustment 557
LSU fan Auto Color Registration 553 Other Pages 562
removal and Auto Tone adjustment 555 Paper Path Page 569
replacement 1193 Backup/Restore 553 Part Replacement Count 551
LVPS Buckle Adjustment 518 PQ Troubleshooting
removal and Calibrate Scanner 558 Pages 564
replacement 1290 Calibrate/Cleaning 361, 372, Print 361, 372, 406, 509
LVPS fan 406 Print Adjustment 517
removal and Cold Reset Paper 515 PTT Test Mode 550
replacement 1184 Color Band Test 568 Reports 361, 372, 406, 423
Color Calibration 557 Reset Engine NVM 527
M Component tests 539 Reset Supplies 551
Configuration/Status Reset Supplies Level 515
machine cleaning for
Pages 562 Retrieve Diagnostic Data 569
maintenance 30
Consumables Access Retrieve Fax Diagnostic
cleaning the ADF) 30
Control 516 Data 569
cleaning the paper dust
Copy (MFP only) 361, 372, 406, Run Fax Test 569
stick 30
467 Scan 476
cleaning the scan glass 30
Counts 512 Scan (MFP only) 361, 372, 406
main exit unit 250
Coverage Report 513 Scanner Settings 513
CTD Sensor Cleaning 556 Sensors 530

Index 3193
 Serial Number 514 removal and replacement, removal and replacement,
Service 510 booklet finisher end fence external finisher exit motor
Service ID 514 motor 2279 assembly 1790
Service Reports 517 removal and replacement, removal and replacement,
Setting Standard Tone 556 booklet finisher entrance external finisher front
Software Version 516 motor 2241 tamper motor 1937
Supplies 361, 372, 406, 509 removal and replacement, removal and replacement,
Test Support 550 booklet finisher entrance- external finisher main exit
TR Control Mode 546 presser motor cam motor 1832
Troubleshooting 561 assembly 2237 removal and replacement,
USB Firmware Upgrade 558 removal and replacement, external finisher main exit
middle left cover booklet finisher paddle cam motor assembly 1822
removal and replacement 632 motor 2261 removal and replacement,
middle upper cover removal and replacement, external finisher main output
removal and replacement 608 booklet finisher paddle tray motor drive
miscellaneous parts motor assembly 2256 assembly 2123
booklet finisher, remove and removal and replacement, removal and replacement,
replace 2512 booklet finisher tamper external finisher paddle
motor error (LaserJet) motor 2331 motor 1864
59.WX.YZ error 361, 404 removal and replacement, DCF removal and replacement,
motors feed motor 1504 external finisher paddle
CPR shutter sensor 1135 removal and replacement, DCF motor assembly 1853
DCF, remove and replace 1494 Tray 4 pickup motor 1497 removal and replacement,
developer motor Y/M/C 1083 removal and replacement, DCF external finisher paper
drum motor K and ITB 1075 Tray 5 pickup motor 1499 holding motor drive
drum motor Y/M/C 1070 removal and replacement, dual assembly 2163
duplex motor 879 cassette feeder feed removal and replacement,
exit motor 1173 motor 1504 external finisher rear tamper
feed motor 785 removal and replacement, dual motor 1968
fuser motor 1168 cassette feeder Tray 4 removal and replacement,
HCI, remove and replace 1593 pickup motor 1497 external finisher stapler mid-
image transfer belt engage removal and replacement, dual front and mid-rear
motor 1095 cassette feeder Tray 5 sensors 2009
registration motor 827 pickup motor 1499 removal and replacement, HCI
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, lift motor 1593
booklet finisher booklet external finisher bridge removal and replacement, HCI
blade motor 2434 motor 1721 shift motor 1593
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement, inner
booklet finisher booklet fold external finisher buffer finisher entrance
motor 2444 motor 2183 motor 2618
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement, inner
booklet finisher booklet fold external finisher end fence finisher entrance motor
motor assembly 2440 motor 1889 assembly 2607
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement, inner
booklet finisher c-fold blade external finisher end fence finisher entrance motor
motor 2411 motor assembly 1884 timing belt 2629
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement, inner
booklet finisher c-fold blade external finisher entrance finisher exit motor 2688
motor assembly 2405 motor 1746 removal and replacement, inner
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, finisher exit motor
booklet finisher diverter external finisher entrance assembly 2683
motor 2479 motor assembly 1742 removal and replacement, inner
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, finisher front tamper
booklet finisher diverter external finisher exit motor 2779
motor assembly 2473 motor 1793

3194 Index
 removal and replacement, inner O OXPd/Web kit error
finisher main paddle motor 45.WX.YZ error 361, 403
on/off button
assembly 2757
locating 1
removal and replacement, inner P
operating systems, supported 1,
finisher output tray
6 paddle unit 252, 329
motor 2860
operating-environment range booklet finisher, remove and
removal and replacement, inner
printer 11 replace 2252
finisher output tray motor
option specifications 1, 6, 19, 22 external finisher, remove and
assembly 2854
optional configurations 1, 6, 19 replace 1843
removal and replacement, inner
options list 1, 6, 19 inner finisher, remove and
finisher paper support
orderable parts 570 replace 2733
motor 2717
other errors operation 254, 331
removal and replacement, inner
drive unit 361 overview 252, 329
finisher paper support motor
electrical circuit 361 paddle unit operation 331
assembly 2709
feeding system 361 paddle unit overview 329
removal and replacement, inner
flow ADF 361 page error
finisher rear tamper
fuser 361 21.WX.YZ error 361, 403
motor 2802
image system 361 paper
removal and replacement, inner
laser scanner assembly 361 jams 385
finisher stapler position
scanner 361 paper dust holder
motor 2836
outer temperature humidity sensor removal and replacement 819
toner collection unit
assembly, sensor and holder paper handling error (LaserJet)
motor 1011
removal and replacement 1179 56.WX.YZ error 361, 404
toner dispense motor assembly
output accessory error paper handling specifications 1,
(C, K) 892
66.WX.YZ error 361, 404 6
toner dispense motor assembly
output bin paper holding unit 270, 343
(Y, M) 885
clear jams 390 external finisher, remove and
toner dispense motors 902
locating 1 replace 2137
toner duct motor (C, K) 971
output bin 1 full sensor inner finisher, remove and
toner duct motor (Y, M) 965
removal and replacement 857 replace 2854
toner duct motor assembly (C,
output device operation 272, 346
K) 892
parts and diagrams 3032 overview 270, 343
toner duct motor assembly (Y,
removal and paper jams
M) 885
replacement 1634 520-sheet trays 388
tray 1 motor 827
output devices 217 document feeder 385
tray 2 pickup motor 745
booklet maker 217 fuser 390
tray 3 pickup motor 773
electrical mechanical locations 361, 383
multipurpose feeder
relationships output bin 390
assembly 44
diagrams 3132 right door 390
ILSB 350 Tray 1 387
N
inline scanner bridge unit 350 Tray 2 388
Near Field Communication error inner finisher 307 Tray 3 388
81.WX.YZ error 361, 404 stapler-stacker finisher 217 paper size sensor PCA 159
Bluetooth error 361, 404 stapler-stacker finisher and paper support unit 327
external I/O card error 361, booklet maker 217 inner finisher, remove and
404 output tray 343 replace 2693
internal EIO error 361, 404 inner finisher, remove and overview 327
wireless error 361, 404 replace 2854 Paper support unit
network and software operation 346 operation 328
specifications 1, 6, 18 overview 343 Paper support unit operation 328
network interface 1, 6, 18 output tray unit paper support unit overview 327
no control panel sound 361, 364, booklet finisher, remove and paper transfer belt unit 42
366 replace 2485 parts 570
note vi 100sh ADF 1 of 2 3020

Index 3195
 100sh ADF 2 of 2 3021 toner 3002 parts list and diagrams, how to
200sh ADF 1 of 2 3018 toner collection unit 3005 use 570
200sh ADF 2 of 2 3019 tray 1 2994 parts, miscellaneous
booklet finisher 1 of 5 3049 tray 2, 3 2995 booklet finisher, remove and
booklet finisher 3 of 5 3053 use parts lists and replace 2512
booklet finisher 4 of 5 3055 diagrams 570 parts, order by authorized service
booklet finisher 5 of 5 3056 parts and diagrams providers 570
CIS platen 3023 100sh ADF 3020 parts, orderable 570
covers 2991 200sh ADF 3018 parts, ordering 570
CPR 3011 ADF / image scanner PCA 302, 347
DCF 1 of 2 3025 assembly 3016 automatic document feeder,
DCF 2 of 2 3027 base printer 2991 100-sheet ADF 1367
developer 3006 base printer, covers 2991 automatic document feeder,
drum 3008 base printer, CPR 3011 5QJ90-67011,
dual cassette feeder 1 of base printer, developer 3006 5QJ90-67012 1329
2 3025 base printer, drum 3008 booklet maker 305
dual cassette feeder 2 of base printer, duct electrical mechanical
2 3027 assembly 3003 relationships
duct assembly 3004 base printer, exit unit 3000 diagrams 3123
exit unit 1 of 2 3000 base printer, fan 3013 finisher main - shared 302
exit unit 2 of 2 3002 base printer, fuser 3012 inner finisher main 347
external booklet 2 of 5 3051 base printer, ITB 3009 inner finisher rear joint 349
fan 3013 base printer, laser scanner manual staple 306
fuser 3012 unit 3005 PCA overview 139
HCI 1 of 2 3029 base printer, PCA 3014 PCAs
HCI 2 of 2 3031 base printer, registration and accelerator card 1245
high capacity input 1 of 2 3029 loop sensors and booklet finisher, remove and
high capacity input 2 of 2 3031 duplex 2997 replace 2496
inner finisher 1 of 5 3033 base printer, sensor 3013 DCF, remove and replace 1507
inner finisher 2 of 5 3034 base printer, toner echo PCA 1260
inner finisher 3 of 5 3036 cartridge 3002 fax card 1282
inner finisher 4 of 5 3038 base printer, toner collection FDB 1295
inner finisher 5 of 5 3040 unit 3005 flatbed scanner 1404, 1434
integrated-scanner base printer, tray 1 2994 formatter 1224
assembly 3016 base printer, tray 2, 3 2995 fuser drive board 1295
ISA 3016 booklet finisher 3049, 3058 HCI, remove and replace 1617
ITB 3009 CIS platen 3022 high-voltage power
laser scanner unit 3006 DCF 3025 supply 1285
LSU 3006 document feeder / image HVPS 1285
PCA 3014 scanner assembly 3016 inner finisher, remove and
print quality diagnostics 3058, dual cassette feeder 3025 replace 2936
3059 engine, printer 2991 IOD 1256
registration and loop sensors HCI 3029 island of data 1256
and duplex 2997 high capacity input 3029 low-voltage power
sensor 3013 image scanner supply 1290
stapler/stacker finisher 1 of assembly 3016 LVPS 1290
4 3042 image scanner assembly / parts 3014
stapler/stacker finisher 2 of ADF 3016 power key PCA 1265
4 3044 inner finisher 3033 removal and replacement,
stapler/stacker finisher 3 of input devices 3024 booklet finisher booklet
4 3046 ISA 3016 finisher main PCA 2496
stapler/stacker finisher 4 of output device 3032 removal and replacement,
4 3047 stapler/stacker 3042 booklet finisher booklet
tarot platen 3021 tarot platen 3021 maker PCA 2502
TCU 3005 parts and diagrams, using 570

3196 Index
 removal and replacement, precautions inner finisher, remove and
DCF 1511 replacing parts 571 replace 2586
removal and replacement, dual preservice checklist 571, 572 operation 243, 321
cassette feeder 1511 presser unit overview 241, 318
removal and replacement, high booklet finisher, remove and punch unit operation 321
capacity input PCA 1617 replace 2291 punch unit overview 318
removal and replacement, high print bar error (PageWide)
capacity input sub 62.WX.YZ error 361, 404 Q
PCA 1620 print drivers, supported 1, 6
quality, image 404
removal and replacement, inner Print menu, control panel 361,
finisher PCA 2936 372, 406, 509 R
removal and replacement, inner print quality
finisher rear joint test 571, 573 rail
PCA 2948 print quality diagnostic inner finisher, remove and
remove and replace bridge unit 352 replace 2516
parts 1224 operation 359 real-time clock error
USB hub PCA 1249 stacker unit 356 11.WX.YZ error 361, 403
PCAs, main workflow 351 rear lower cover
remove and replace print quality diagnostic removal and replacement 589
parts 1224 overview 351 rear upper cover
PCAs, power supply print quality diagnostics 350 removal and replacement 586
remove and replace parts 3058, 3059 Regi-roller reset 810
parts 1285 print quality troubleshooting 361 registration and loop sensors
PCAs, sub flow ADF skew adjust 361 electrical mechanical
remove and replace image quality 361 relationships
parts 1245 other errors 361 diagrams 3108
pickup assembly, 2cnd print specifications 1, 6 registration and loop sensors and
removal and replacement 750 Print Test Page 361, 372, 406, 425 duplex
pickup assembly, tray 2 printed circuit assembly parts 2997
removal and replacement 716 automatic document feeder, registration clutch
pickup unit 44 100-sheet ADF 1367 removal and replacement 831
pickup unit – 100sh 186 automatic document feeder, registration drive assembly
pickup unit – 100sh Flow 186 5QJ90-67011, removal and replacement 822
pickup unit – 200sh 174 5QJ90-67012 1329 registration motor
pickup unit – 200sh Flow 174 remove and replace removal and replacement 827
ports parts 1224 registration sensor
locating 3 printer removal and replacement 811
post-service tests 571, 573 dimensions 1, 6 registration unit 44, 66, 69
power operating-environment operation 69
consumption 1, 6 range 11 overview 66
power key PCA 157 weight 1, 6 removal and replacement 803
removal and printer engine remove and replace parts 803
replacement 1265 parts and diagrams 2991 registration unit driving 70
power subsystem 361 printer memory error operation 70
power supply 20.WX.YZ error 361, 403 removal and replacement
troubleshooting 361 Process Cleaning Page 361, 372, accelerator card 1245
power supply printed circuit 406 actuator-bin full exit 861
assembly Product installation 30 automatic document feeder
remove and replace Product maintenance 30 color panel 1317, 1361
parts 1285 product number automatic document feeder
power-on troubleshooting locating 1 damper module,
overview 361 location 2 5QJ90-67011,
pre-boot menu options 361, 372, punch unit 241, 318 5QJ90-67012 1354
406 external finisher, remove and automatic document feeder
find links to information 375 replace 1750 FFC 1335

Index 3197
 automatic document feeder booklet finisher diverter control panel 1221
hinge kit, 100-sheet motor 2479 controller cover 593
ADF 1384 booklet finisher diverter motor DCF (workgroup) 1445
automatic document feeder assembly 2473 DCF caster wheel 1457
hinge kit, 5QJ90-67011, booklet finisher end fence DCF feed drive assembly 1502
5QJ90-67012 1347 home sensor 2266 DCF feed motor 1504
automatic document feeder booklet finisher end fence DCF feed sensor 1479
pickup roller kit, 100-sheet motor 2279 DCF holder wheel kit 1459
ADF 1363 booklet finisher entrance DCF IF harness 1516
automatic document feeder motor 2241 DCF left cover 1450
pickup roller kit, booklet finisher entrance DCF motor harness 1519
5QJ90-67011, sensor 2223 DCF PCA 1511
5QJ90-67012 1324 booklet finisher entrance DCF pickup drive
automatic document feeder unit 2210 assembly 1494
power cable 1341 booklet finisher entrance- DCF rear cover 1448
automatic document feeder presser motor DCF right cover 1445
power cable, 100-sheet assembly 2237 DCF right door 1452
ADF 1379 booklet finisher harness DCF right door open switch
automatic document feeder guide 2198 holder 1513
printed circuit assembly, 100- booklet finisher main DCF sensor harness 1522
sheet ADF 1367 PCA 2496 DCF size harness 1528
automatic document feeder booklet finisher output DCF Tray 4 paper empty
printed circuit assembly, tray 2485 sensor 1475
5QJ90-67011, booklet finisher output tray DCF Tray 4 paper stack height
5QJ90-67012 1329 sensor 2488 sensor 1475
automatic document feeder booklet finisher paddle home DCF Tray 4 pickup
sensor FFC 1373 sensor 2252 assembly 1470
automatic document feeder booklet finisher paddle DCF Tray 4 pickup motor 1497
white backing 1319, 1388 motor 2261 DCF Tray 4, 5 cassette 1462
automatic document feeder, booklet finisher paddle motor DCF Tray 4, 5 color panel 1454
5QJ90-67011, assembly 2256 DCF Tray 4, 5 paper size
5QJ90-67012 1309 booklet finisher presser home sensors 1467
booklet finisher booklet blade sensor 2291 DCF Tray 4, 5 rollers 1464
home sensor 2417 booklet finisher staple DCF Tray 5 paper empty
booklet finisher booklet blade cartridge 2384 sensor 1490
motor 2434 booklet finisher stapler 2367 DCF Tray 5 paper stack height
booklet finisher booklet diverter booklet finisher tamper 2296 sensor 1490
home sensor 2466 booklet finisher tamper home DCF Tray 5 pickup
booklet finisher booklet fold sensor 2313 assembly 1484
motor 2444 booklet finisher tamper DCF Tray 5 pickup motor 1499
booklet finisher booklet fold motor 2331 DCF tray heaters 1507
motor assembly 2440 booklet finisher tamper developer drive
booklet finisher booklet sensor 2349 assembly 1060
maker 2188 booklet finisher, only 2187 developer fan 1199
booklet finisher booklet maker cleaning unit kit, ITB 1099 developer motor Y/M/C 1083
PCA 2502 color plane registration developer powder 1048
booklet finisher c-fold blade sensors 1112 developer unit 1065
assembly 2387 color plane registration shutter drum drive assembly 1060
booklet finisher c-fold blade drive assembly 1123 drum home sensor 1079
home sensor 2399 color plane registration shutter drum motor K and ITB 1075
booklet finisher c-fold blade motor 1135 drum motor Y/M/C 1070
motor 2411 color plane registration shutter drum unit 1045
booklet finisher c-fold blade sensor 1148 dual cassette feeder
motor assembly 2405 color plane registration (workgroup) 1445
booklet finisher diverter 2449 unit 1101

3198 Index
dual cassette feeder caster dual cassette feeder Tray 5 external finisher entrance
wheel 1457 pickup motor 1499 motor assembly 1742
dual cassette feeder feed drive dual cassette feeder tray external finisher entrance
assembly 1502 heaters 1507 sensor 1727
dual cassette feeder feed duplex assembly 869 external finisher exit
motor 1504 duplex jam sensor 875 motor 1793
dual cassette feeder feed duplex motor 879 external finisher exit motor
sensor 1479 echo PCA 1260 assembly 1790
dual cassette feeder holder exit cover stacker 634 external finisher front
wheel kit 1459 exit motor 1173 cover 1666
dual cassette feeder IF exit rear cover 595 external finisher front
harness 1516 exit stack guide 866 door 1634
dual cassette feeder left exit stacker upper cover 655 external finisher front door
cover 1450 exit unit 854 switch 1837
dual cassette feeder motor external finisher booklet front external finisher front lower left
harness 1519 cover 1697 cover 1681
dual cassette feeder PCA 1511 external finisher booklet output external finisher front lower
dual cassette feeder pickup tray 1656 right cover 1686
drive assembly 1494 external finisher bridge door external finisher front paper
dual cassette feeder rear sensor 1703 holding sensor 2137
cover 1448 external finisher bridge external finisher front
dual cassette feeder right entrance sensor 1709 tamper 1914
cover 1445 external finisher bridge exit external finisher front tamper
dual cassette feeder right sensor 1714 home sensor 1925
door 1452 external finisher bridge external finisher front tamper
dual cassette feeder right door motor 1721 motor 1937
open switch holder 1513 external finisher bridge external finisher left lower
dual cassette feeder sensor unit 1699 cover 1638
harness 1522 external finisher buffer external finisher left upper
dual cassette feeder size motor 2183 cover 1646
harness 1528 external finisher buffer solenoid external finisher main exit cam
dual cassette feeder Tray 4 assembly 2176 home sensor 1827
paper empty sensor 1475 external finisher caster 1691 external finisher main exit cam
dual cassette feeder Tray 4 external finisher caster motor 1832
paper stack height cover 1636 external finisher main exit cam
sensor 1475 external finisher caster fix motor assembly 1822
dual cassette feeder Tray 4 nut 1694 external finisher main exit
pickup assembly 1470 external finisher ejector 1 home sensor 1815
dual cassette feeder Tray 4 sensor 2047 external finisher main output
pickup motor 1497 external finisher ejector 1 motor tray 1661, 2092
dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5 sensor 2062 external finisher main output
cassette 1462 external finisher ejector 2 motor tray lower limit sensor 2107
dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5 sensor 2077 external finisher main output
color panel 1454 external finisher ejector tray motor drive
dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5 sensor 2031 assembly 2123
paper size sensors 1467 external finisher ejector external finisher main output
dual cassette feeder Tray 4, 5 unit 2017 tray motor sensor 2119
rollers 1464 external finisher end fence external finisher main output
dual cassette feeder Tray 5 home sensor 1870 tray top of stack
paper empty sensor 1490 external finisher end fence sensor 2095
dual cassette feeder Tray 5 motor 1889 external finisher main output
paper stack height external finisher end fence tray top of stack
sensor 1490 motor assembly 1884 switch 2127
dual cassette feeder Tray 5 external finisher entrance
pickup assembly 1484 motor 1746

Index 3199
 external finisher main output external finisher top door 1675 HCI (workgroup) 1532
tray top of stack switch external finisher top door open HCI cassette 1550
guide 1895 switch 1760 HCI feed motor drive 1608
external finisher main output external finisher top exit HCI feed sensor 1559
tray top of stack switch lower sensor 1780 HCI front CMF panel 1540
guide 1905 external finisher top jam cover HCI gate solenoid home
external finisher mounting assembly 1752 sensor 1586
brackets 2513 external finisher top lower feed HCI holder wheel kit 1544
external finisher paddle 1843 assembly 1796 HCI inner drawer IF 1631
external finisher paddle home external finisher top output HCI knockup home
sensor 1858 tray 1659 sensor 1570
external finisher paddle external finisher top output tray HCI knockup plate 1601
motor 1864 paper full sensor 1808 HCI left cover 1536
external finisher paddle motor external finisher tray HCI lift motor 1593
assembly 1853 diverter 1756 HCI main IF harness 1624
external finisher paper holding external finisher tray diverter HCI motor IF 1626
home sensor 2150 cam 1764 HCI paper gate 1605
external finisher paper holding external finisher tray diverter HCI PCA 1617
motor drive assembly 2163 home sensor 1772 HCI pickup motor drive 1610
external finisher punch external finisher tray HCI rear cover 1534
cover 1670 extension 1805 HCI right cover 1532
external finisher punch fax card 1282 HCI right door 1538
unit 1750 FDB 1295 HCI right door open switch
external finisher rear FDB fan 1184 holder 1589
cover 1663 feed drive assembly 780 HCI shift gate solenoid 1613
external finisher rear paper feed motor 785 HCI shift motor 1593
holding sensor 2137 flatbed , rear cover 1432 HCI shift plate 1596
external finisher rear flatbed CIS, FFC 68 pin 1441 HCI shift tray empty
tamper 1947 flatbed CIS, PCA 1434 sensor 1576
external finisher rear tamper flatbed CIS, power cable 1437 HCI shift tray end sensor 1570
home sensor 1957 flatbed CIS, whole unit 1425 HCI shift tray home
external finisher rear tamper flatbed, FFC 50 pin 1408 sensor 1576
motor 1968 flatbed, FFC 68 pin 1413 HCI shift tray level sensor 1 and
external finisher right upper flatbed, open sensor 1422 2 1579
cover 1678 flatbed, PCA 1404 HCI sub PCA 1620
external finisher shaft hinge - flatbed, power cable 1418 HCI Tray 4 paper empty
door 1688 flatbed, rear cover 1402 sensor 1565
external finisher staple flatbed, whole unit 1395 HCI Tray 4 paper stack height
cartridge 1986 formatter 1224 sensor 1565
external finisher stapler front front cover 650 HCI tray open sensor 1583
sensor 1988 front door switch 1203 HCI Tray pickup
external finisher stapler manual front lower cover 647 assembly 1552
staple sensor 2003 fuser and exit drive HCI Tray rollers 1556
external finisher stapler mid- assembly 1164 HCI Tray unit 1547
front sensor 1996 fuser drive board 1295 HCIF caster wheel 1542
external finisher stapler mid- fuser fan duct 1189 high capacity cassette 1550
rear sensor 1996 fuser motor 1168 high capacity input
external finisher stapler fuser out sensor 851 (workgroup) 1532
position motor 2009 fuser support bracket 1177 high capacity input caster
external finisher stapler fuser unit 1161 wheel 1542
unit 1980 hard disk 1241 high capacity input feed motor
external finisher stapler/stacker hard disk cradle 1236 drive 1608
or booklet finishers 1634 hard-disk drive rivet 1234 high capacity input feed
external finisher top hardware integration pocket sensor 1559
cover 1672 [HIP] 630

3200 Index
high capacity input front CMF high capacity input Tray 4 paper inner finisher lock release
panel 1540 empty sensor 1565 handle 2569
high capacity input gate high capacity input Tray 4 paper inner finisher main interface
solenoid home stack height sensor 1565 harness 2572
sensor 1586 high capacity input tray open inner finisher main paddle
high capacity input holder sensor 1583 assembly 2733
wheel kit 1544 high capacity input unit 1547 inner finisher main paddle
high capacity input inner high-voltage power home sensor 2750
drawer IF 1631 supply 1285 inner finisher main paddle
high capacity input knockup HVPS 1285 motor assembly 2757
home sensor 1570 image transfer belt 1088 inner finisher middle cover
high capacity input knockup image transfer belt engage assembly 2534
plate 1601 motor 1095 inner finisher middle
high capacity input left inner cover 636 roller 2646
cover 1536 inner finisher 2515, 2516 inner finisher output tray
high capacity input lift inner finisher docking assembly 2544
motor 1593 sensor 2974 inner finisher output tray lower
high capacity input main IF inner finisher ejector 2845 limit switch assembly 2874
harness 1624 inner finisher end fence inner finisher output tray
high capacity input motor sensor 2761 motor 2860
IF 1626 inner finisher entrance inner finisher output tray motor
high capacity input paper motor 2618 assembly 2854
gate 1605 inner finisher entrance motor inner finisher output tray motor
high capacity input PCA 1617 assembly 2607 sensor 2867
high capacity input pickup inner finisher entrance motor inner finisher output tray top of
assembly 1552 timing belt 2629 stack sensor kit 2881
high capacity input pickup inner finisher entrance inner finisher paper holding
motor drive 1610 roller 2635 actuator 2892
high capacity input rear inner finisher entrance inner finisher paper holding
cover 1534 sensor 2602 kit 2903
high capacity input right inner finisher exit bin full 2583 inner finisher paper holding
cover 1532 inner finisher exit motor 2688 sensor 2925
high capacity input right inner finisher exit motor inner finisher paper holding
door 1538 assembly 2683 solenoid 2914
high capacity input right door inner finisher exit roller inner finisher paper support
open switch holder 1589 assembly 2654 home sensor 2701
high capacity input inner finisher exit inner finisher paper support
rollers 1556 sensor 2663 motor 2717
high capacity input shift gate inner finisher exit sensor inner finisher paper support
solenoid 1613 actuator 2673 motor assembly 2709
high capacity input shift inner finisher front cover inner finisher PCA 2936
motor 1593 assembly 2524 inner finisher PCA cover 2548
high capacity input shift inner finisher front cover inner finisher punch cover
plate 1596 switch 2958 assembly 2540
high capacity input shift tray inner finisher front paper inner finisher punch waste
empty sensor 1576 support 2726 full 2592
high capacity input shift tray inner finisher front inner finisher rear base
end sensor 1570 tamper 2772 cover 2562
high capacity input shift tray inner finisher front tamper inner finisher rear joint
home sensor 1576 home sensor 2787 PCA 2948
high capacity input shift tray inner finisher front tamper inner finisher rear paper
level sensor 1 and 2 1579 motor 2779 support 2693
high capacity input sub inner finisher guide rails 2520 inner finisher rear punch
PCA 1620 inner finisher hole cover 2566
punch 2586

Index 3201
 inner finisher rear rear lower cover 589 tray 1 paper empty
tamper 2795 rear upper cover 586 sensor 692
inner finisher rear tamper home registration clutch 831 tray 1 roller kit 711
sensor 2809 registration drive tray 1 unit 680
inner finisher rear tamper assembly 822 tray 2 color panel 653
motor 2802 registration motor 827 tray 2 empty sensor 728
inner finisher staple registration sensor 811 tray 2 feed sensor 790
cartridge 2821 registration unit 803 tray 2 open and paper size
inner finisher stapler right door 662 sensor 737
assembly 2816 right door exit assembly 848 tray 2 or tray 3 714
inner finisher stapler position right door front damper 673 tray 2 pickup assembly 716
motor 2836 right door front link 668 tray 2 pickup drive
inner finisher stapler position right door switch 1217 assembly 741
sensor 2824 right front cover 621 tray 2 pickup motor 745
inner finisher sub paddle right middle cover tray 2 stack height sensor 728
assembly 2743 assembly 623 tray 2/3 roller kit 724
inner finisher sub stay right rear cover 618 tray 3 color panel 653
assembly 2551 right upper cover 610 tray 3 empty sensor 757
inner finisher top cover riser card and cradle 1230 tray 3 feed sensor 796
assembly 2528 secondary transfer (T2) tray 3 open and paper size
inner finisher top cover unit 838 sensor 765
switch 2969 spring, lever-actuator bin full tray 3 pickup drive
input device (workgroup) 1445 exit 863 assembly 769
integrated scanner asset TCU detection sensor 982 tray 3 pickup motor 773
5QK34 1306 toner cartridges, control tray 3 stack height sensor 757
integrated scanner asset panel 908 tray heaters 777
5QK36, 5QK35 1300 toner cartridges, USB hub PCA 1249
IOD 1256 disassemble 911 removal order
island of data 1256 toner collection unit 980 removing order 571, 573
ITB 1088 toner collection unit detection remove and replace
ITB cleaning unit kit 1099 sensor 982 before servicing 570
keyboard 1273 toner collection unit drive Remove and replace 570
laser scanner unit 1038 assembly 999 remove and replace parts
laser scanner unit fan 1193 toner collection unit full base printer 586
left cover 604 sensor 1023 color plane registration 1101
left top cover 598 toner collection unit CPR 1101
left upper cover 600 motor 1011 developer and drum 1045
lever-actuator bin full exit 863 toner CRUM module duct unit 927
loop sensor 1/2 840 assembly 917 duplex unit 869
loop sensor actuator 845 toner dispense motor assembly environmental sensor, switch,
low-voltage power (C, K) 892 and fan 1179
supply 1290 toner dispense motor assembly exit unit 854
LSU 1038 (Y, M) 885 feeding system 662
LVPS 1290 toner dispense motors 902 feeding system, right door
LVPS fan 1184 toner duct motor (C, K) 971 assemblies 662
middle left cover 632 toner duct motor (Y, M) 965 feeding system, Tray 1
middle upper cover 608 toner duct motor assembly (C, unit 680
outer temperature humidity K) 892 feeding system, Tray 2-3
sensor assembly, sensor toner duct motor assembly (Y, units 714
and holder 1179 M) 885 fuser unit 1161
output bin 1 full sensor 857 toner duct unit 951 image creation 1038
output device 1634 toner guide unit 927 image transfer belt 1088
paper dust holder 819 Tray 1 clutch 704 ITB 1088
pickup assembly, 2cnd 750 tray 1 motor 827 ITB cleaning unit 1099
power key PCA 1265 laser scanner unit 1038

3202 Index
 loop sensing unit 803 RJ-45 port security error
LSU 1038 locating 3 33.WX.YZ error 361, 403
main PCAs 1224 rollers sensor
main printed circuit automatic document feeder removal and replacement, inner
assembly 1224 pickup roller kit, 100-sheet finisher output tray top of
PCAs 1224 ADF 1363 stack sensor kit 2881
power supply PCAs 1285 automatic document feeder sensor and fan
power supply printed circuit pickup roller kit, electrical mechanical
assembly 1285 5QJ90-67011, relationships
printed circuit assembly 1224 5QJ90-67012 1324 diagrams 3121
registration unit 803 DCF, remove and replace 1464 sensor error
sub PCAs 1245 HCI, remove and replace 1556 54.WX.YZ error 361, 404
sub printed circuit removal and replacement, 58.WX.YZ error 361, 404
assembly 1245 DCF 1464 sensors
toner cartridge 885 removal and replacement, actuator-bin full exit 861
toner collection unit 980 HCI 1556 automatic document feeder
toner flow 885 removal and replacement, inner sensor FFC 1373
removing parts finisher entrance base printer service parts,
checklists 571, 572 roller 2635 registration and loop
replacing parts removal and replacement, inner sensors and duplex 2997
precautions 571 finisher exit roller CPR sensors 1112
Reports menu, control panel 361, assembly 2654 CPR shutter sensor 1148
372, 406, 423 removal and replacement, inner DCF, remove and replace 1467
revision history iii finisher middle roller 2646 drum home sensor 1079
right door duplex jam sensor 875
jams 390 S flatbed scanner 1404, 1434
locating 1 fuser out sensor 851
scan and exit unit – 100sh 186
removal and replacement 662 HCI, remove and replace 1559
scan and exit unit – 100sh
right door exit assembly lever-actuator bin full exit 863
Flow 186
removal and replacement 848 loop sensor 1/2 840
scan and exit unit – 200sh 176
right door front damper loop sensor actuator 845
scan and exit unit – 200sh
removal and replacement 673 outer temperature humidity
Flow 176
right door front link sensor 1179
Scan menu (MFP only), control
removal and replacement 668 outer temperature humidity
panel 361, 372, 406
right door switch sensor assembly 1179
Scan menu, control panel 476
removal and replacement 1217 outer temperature humidity
scan specifications 1, 6
right front cover sensor holder 1179
scanner
removal and replacement 621 output bin 1 full sensor 857
workflow 191
right middle cover assembly parts 3013
scanner error
removal and replacement 623 registration sensor 811
30.WX.YZ error 361, 403
right rear cover removal and replacement
scanning system
removal and replacement 618 flatbed, open sensor 1422
components 42
right upper cover removal and replacement,
second exit unit driving 78
removal and replacement 610 booklet finisher booklet
Second Transfer (T2) unit 119
riser card 147 blade home sensor 2417
Second Transfer (T2) unit
riser card and cradle removal and replacement,
operation 120
removal and booklet finisher booklet
Second Transfer (T2) unit
replacement 1230 diverter home sensor 2466
overview 119
riser card for HDD 148 removal and replacement,
second unit
riser card for HDD, USB ports, and booklet finisher c-fold blade
overview 73
accelerator board 149 home sensor 2399
second unit overview 73
rivet, hard-disk drive removal and replacement,
secondary transfer (T2) unit
removal and booklet finisher end fence
removal and replacement 838
replacement 1234 home sensor 2266

Index 3203
 removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement,
booklet finisher entrance external finisher entrance external finisher tray diverter
sensor 2223 sensor 1727 home sensor 1772
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, removal and replacement, HCI
booklet finisher output tray external finisher front paper feed sensor 1559
sensor 2488 holding sensor 2137 removal and replacement, HCI
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, gate solenoid home
booklet finisher paddle external finisher front sensor 1586
home sensor 2252 tamper home sensor 1925 removal and replacement, HCI
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, knockup home sensor 1570
booklet finisher presser external finisher main exit removal and replacement, HCI
home sensor 2291 cam home sensor 1827 shift tray empty
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, sensor 1576
booklet finisher tamper external finisher main exit removal and replacement, HCI
sensor 2349 sensor 1815 shift tray end sensor 1570
removal and replacement, DCF removal and replacement, removal and replacement, HCI
paper size 1467 external finisher main output shift tray home
removal and replacement, DCF tray lower limit sensor 2107 sensor 1576
Tray 4 paper empty removal and replacement, removal and replacement, HCI
sensor 1475, 1490 external finisher main output shift tray level sensor 1 and
removal and replacement, DCF tray motor sensor 2119 2 1579
Tray 4 paper stack height removal and replacement, removal and replacement, HCI
sensor 1475 external finisher main output Tray 4 paper empty
removal and replacement, DCF tray top of stack sensor 1565
Tray 5 paper stack height sensor 2095 removal and replacement, HCI
sensor 1490 removal and replacement, Tray 4 paper stack height
removal and replacement, dual external finisher paddle sensor 1565
cassette feeder feed home sensor 1858 removal and replacement, HCI
sensor 1479 removal and replacement, tray open sensor 1583
removal and replacement, external finisher paper removal and replacement, inner
external finisher bridge door holding home sensor 2150 finisher docking
sensor 1703 removal and replacement, sensor 2974
removal and replacement, external finisher rear paper removal and replacement, inner
external finisher bridge holding sensor 2137 finisher end fence
entrance sensor 1709 removal and replacement, sensor 2761
removal and replacement, external finisher rear tamper removal and replacement, inner
external finisher bridge exit home sensor 1957 finisher entrance
sensor 1714 removal and replacement, sensor 2602
removal and replacement, external finisher stapler removal and replacement, inner
external finisher ejector 1 front sensor 1988 finisher exit sensor 2663
home sensor 2047 removal and replacement, removal and replacement, inner
removal and replacement, external finisher stapler finisher exit sensor
external finisher ejector 1 manual staple actuator 2673
motor sensor 2062 sensor 2003 removal and replacement, inner
removal and replacement, removal and replacement, finisher front tamper home
external finisher ejector 2 external finisher stapler mid- sensor 2787
motor sensor 2077 front and mid-rear removal and replacement, inner
removal and replacement, sensors 1996 finisher main paddle home
external finisher ejector removal and replacement, sensor 2750
sensor 2031 external finisher top exit removal and replacement, inner
removal and replacement, sensor 1780 finisher output tray motor
external finisher end fence removal and replacement, sensor 2867
home sensor 1870 external finisher top output removal and replacement, inner
tray paper full sensor 1808 finisher paper holding
sensor 2925

3204 Index
 removal and replacement, inner service parts options list 1, 6, 19
finisher paper support home base printer, covers 2991 paper handling
sensor 2701 base printer, CPR 3011 specifications 1, 6
removal and replacement, inner base printer, developer 3006 print specifications 1, 6
finisher rear tamper home base printer, drum 3008 scan specifications 1, 6
sensor 2809 base printer, duct software and solutions 1, 6, 18
removal and replacement, inner assembly 3003 software specifications 1, 6, 18
finisher stapler position base printer, exit unit 3000 supplies 1, 6, 16
sensor 2824 base printer, fan 3013 spring, lever-actuator bin full exit
spring, lever-actuator bin full base printer, fuser 3012 removal and replacement 863
exit 863 base printer, ITB 3009 SSA
TCU detection sensor 982 base printer, laser scanner flatbed (CIS), removal and
toner collection unit detection unit 3005 replacement 1425
sensor 982 base printer, PCA 3014 flatbed (Tarot), removal and
toner collection unit full base printer, registration and replacement 1394
sensor 1023 loop sensors and stacker unit
tray 1 paper empty 692 duplex 2997 print quality diagnostic 356
tray 2 empty sensor, removal base printer, sensor 3013 staple and staple cartridge 262,
and replacement 728 base printer, toner 288, 338
tray 2 feed sensor 790 cartridge 3002 stapler unit 260, 336
tray 2 open and paper size base printer, toner collection booklet finisher, remove and
sensor, removal and unit 3005 replace 2367
replacement 737 base printer, tray 1 2994 external finisher, remove and
tray 2 stack height sensor, base printer, tray 2, 3 2995 replace 1980
removal and sHCI 42 inner finisher, remove and
replacement 728 side high capacity input tray 42 replace 2816
tray 3 empty sensor, removal Sign In button operation 263, 339
and replacement 757 locating 4 overview 260, 336
tray 3 feed sensor 796 Sign Out button staple and staple
tray 3 open and paper size locating 4 cartridge 262, 338
sensor, removal and Skew, adjusting stapler unit operation 339
replacement 765 Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) 106 stapler unit overview 336
tray 3 stack height sensor, software and solutions 1, 6, 18 stapler-stacker and booklet maker
removal and solenoids staple and staple
replacement 757 removal and replacement, cartridge 262
serial number external finisher buffer stapler-stacker finisher 217, 239
locating 1, 2 solenoid assembly 2176 bridge unit 237
service and support removal and replacement, high buffer unit 273
WISE 391 capacity input shift gate covers 223
service approach 571 solenoid 1613 detailed specifications 217
precautions 571 removal and replacement, inner ejector unit 264
service functions finisher paper holding electrical mechanical
capture log 361 solenoid 2914 relationships
debug log 361 solid-state drive 150 diagrams 3142
envelope rotate 361 solve problems end fence unit 255
main memory clear 361 control panel messages 402 entrance unit 239
transfer assembly control 361 CPMD 402 main exit unit 250
Service menu, control panel 510 specifications 1, 6 main output tray unit 267
service mode 361 copy specifications 1, 6 overview 226
diagnostics 361 electrical and acoustic 1, 6 paddle unit 252
entering service mode 361 general specifications 1, 6 paper holding unit 270
information 361 maintenance parts 1, 6, 17 punch unit 241
maintenance counts 361 network interface 1, 6, 18 stapler unit 260
mode menu tree 361 network specifications 1, 6, 18 stapler-stacker finisher 239
service functions 361 options 1, 6, 19 tamper unit 257

Index 3205
 top exit unit 247 switch T
top output tray unit 248 front door 134
T2
tray diverter unit 244 right door 134
removal and replacement 838
stapler-stacker finisher and switches
tamper unit 257, 334
booklet maker 217 front door switch 1203
external finisher, remove and
booklet maker 278 inner finisher, remove and
replace 1914
bridge unit 237 replace 2936
inner finisher, remove and
covers 223 removal and replacement, DCF
replace 2772
detailed specifications 217 right door open switch
operation 259, 335
overview 226 holder 1513
overview 257, 334
PCA 302 removal and replacement, dual
tamper unit operation 335
stapler-stacker finisher 239 cassette feeder right door
tamper unit overview 334
stapler-stacker finisher and open switch holder 1513
tarot platen
booklet maker unit removal and replacement,
cover 192
overview 226 external finisher front door
motor 193
motors and solenoids 232 switch 1837
parts 3021
PCAs 236 removal and replacement,
parts and diagrams 3021
rollers 235 external finisher main output
PCA 194
sensor 227 tray top of stack
sensor 193
workflow 226 switch 2127
workflow 191
stapler/stacker finisher removal and replacement,
Tarot Platen 191
parts and diagrams 3042 external finisher main output
tarot platen cover 192
stapler/stacker finisher 1 of 4 tray top of stack switch
tarot platen motor 193
parts 3042 guide 1895
tarot platen PCA 194
stapler/stacker finisher 2 of 4 removal and replacement,
tarot platen sensor 193
parts 3044 external finisher main output
tarot platen workflow 191
stapler/stacker finisher 3 of 4 tray top of stack switch lower
TCU
parts 3046 guide 1905
parts 3005
stapler/stacker finisher 4 of 4 removal and replacement,
removal and replacement 980
parts 3047 external finisher top door
TCU detection sensor
stapler/stacker or booklet finishers open switch 1760
removal and replacement 982
removal and removal and replacement, HCI
temperature/humidity
replacement 1634 right door open switch
sensor 134
static, precautions for 571 holder 1589
terms and definitions
storage 150 removal and replacement, high
glossary 3164
eMMC 154 capacity input right door
tests
hard disk drive 153 open switch holder 1589
post-service 571, 573
sub printed circuit assembly removal and replacement, inner
print-quality 571, 573
remove and replace finisher front cover
theory of operation
parts 1245 switch 2958
accelerator 149
supplies removal and replacement, inner
Color Plane Registration (CPR)
toner cartridges, control finisher output tray lower
unit 123
panel 908 limit switch assembly 2874
color plane registration shutter
toner cartridges, removal and replacement, inner
driving 127
disassemble 911 finisher top cover
Color Toner Density (CTD)
toner duct unit 951 switch 2969
operation 127
toner guide unit 927 right door switch 1217
control panel 136, 138
supplies error (LaserJet) system error (LaserJet)
control panel base PCA 162
10.WX.YZ error 361, 403 62.WX.YZ error 361, 404
control panel PCA 161
supplies error (PageWide) system requirements
control panel PCA – 10.1
17.WX.YZ error 361, 403 minimum 1, 6
inch 162
Supplies menu, control panel 361,
control panel PCA – 8 inch 163
372, 406, 509
covers 1 of 2 42
SVC-internal USB expansion
covers 2 of 2 43
kit 148

3206 Index
developer and drum unit 108 Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) Trusted Platform Module
developer and drum unit overview 102 (TPM) 147
driving 114 Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) skew USB hub PCA 155
developer and drum unit adjustment 106 tip vi
operation 113 Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)( 102 toner
developer and drum unit loop sensing 66 parts 3002
overview 108 Lower Voltage Power Supply toner cartridge 85
drum CRUM PCA 159 (LVPS) 166 electrical mechanical
duplex unit 78 paper size sensor PCA 159 relationships
echo PCA 156 PCA overview 139 diagrams 3111
eMMC 154 power key PCA 157 remove and replace parts 885
environmental sensor, fan, registration unit 66 toner cartridge CRUM PCA 160
switch overview 134 riser card 147 toner cartridge operation 87
eraser PCA 160 riser card for HDD 148 toner cartridge overview 85
exit unit 71 riser card for HDD, USB ports, toner cartridge unlock driving 88
feeding system motors 49 and accelerator board 149 toner cartridges, control panel
feeding system overview 44 Second Transfer (T2) unit 119 removal and replacement 908
feeding system roller 46 Second Transfer (T2) unit toner cartridges, disassemble
feeding system sensors 47 operation 120 removal and replacement 911
feeding system solenoids 49 Second Transfer (T2) unit toner collection unit
formatter 142 overview 119 electrical mechanical
fuser CRUM PCA 161 solid-state drive 150 relationships
Fuser Drive Board (FDB) 167 storage 150 diagrams 3113
fuser driving 133 SVC-internal USB expansion parts 3005
fuser unit 128 kit 148 removal and replacement 980
fuser unit overview 128 toner cartridge 85 remove and replace parts 980
fuser unit temperature toner cartridge CRUM Toner Collection Unit (TCU) 94
control 131 PCA 160 Toner Collection Unit (TCU)
fuser wrap jam sensor 132 toner cartridge operaton 87 overview 94
hard disk drive 153 toner cartridge overview 85 toner collection unit detection
hardware configuration 139 toner cartridge unlock sensor
High Voltage Power Supply driving 88 removal and replacement 982
(HVPS) 164 Toner Collection Unit (TCU) 94 toner collection unit drive
image creation motors 101 toner collection unit assembly
image creation overview 98 driving 98 removal and replacement 999
image creation workflow 98 Toner Collection Unit full sensor toner collection unit driving 98
Image Transfer Belt (ITB) 115 PCA 158 toner collection unit full sensor
Image Transfer Belt (ITB) toner collection unit removal and
driving 117 operation 96 replacement 1023
Image Transfer Belt (ITB) toner dispense 88 Toner Collection Unit full sensor
operation 117 toner duct 89 PCA 158
Image Transfer Belt (ITB) toner duct driving 94 toner collection unit motor
overview 115 toner duct operation 93 removal and replacement 1011
imge creation sensors 99 toner duct overview 89 toner collection unit operation 96
Integrated Scan Asset toner flow motors 83 toner CRUM module assembly
(ISA) 168 toner flow overview 81 removal and replacement 917
Island Of Data (IOD) 155 toner flow sensors 82 toner dispense 88
ITB cleaning unit 121 toner flow system 84 toner dispense motor assembly (C,
ITB cleaning unit toner flow workflow 81 K)
operation 122 toner residual amount sensor removal and replacement 892
ITB cleaning unit overview 121 operation 92 toner dispense motor assembly (Y,
keyboard PCA 157 Tray 1 unit 50 M)
Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) Tray 2 unit 55 removal and replacement 885
operation 104 Tray 2/3 unit overview 55 toner dispense motors
Tray 3 unit 55 removal and replacement 902

Index 3207
 toner duct 89 toner duct 89 Tray 2
electrical mechanical toner flow workflow 81 feed motor 62
relationships toner guide unit feed roller 62
diagrams 3112 removal and replacement 927 feed sensor 62
toner duct driving 94 toner residual amount sensor jams 388
toner duct motor (C, K) operation 92 jams, clearing 361
removal and replacement 971 tools, additional locating 1
toner duct motor (Y, M) troubleshooting 375 paper size sensor 62
removal and replacement 965 top exit unit 247 tray heater 62
toner duct motor assembly (C, K) external finisher, remove and Tray 2 cassette 56
removal and replacement 892 replace 1780 tray 2 color panel
toner duct motor assembly (Y, M) overview 247 removal and replacement 653
removal and replacement 885 top output tray unit 248 Tray 2 driving 65
toner duct operation 93 external finisher, remove and tray 2 empty sensor
toner duct overview 89 replace 1796 removal and replacement 728
toner duct unit overview 248 tray 2 feed sensor
removal and replacement 951 touchscreen removal and replacement 790
toner flow 81 locating features 4 tray 2 open and paper size sensor
main components and touchscreen blank, white, or dim removal and replacement 737
functions 81 (no image) 361, 364 Tray 2 operation 63
motor 81 touchscreen has an unresponsive Tray 2 paper size sensor 62
motors 83 zone 361, 364, 365 tray 2 pickup assembly
overview 81 TPM 147 removal and replacement 716
remove and replace parts 885 tray 1 Tray 2 pickup assembly 57
sensor 81 base printer, service tray 2 pickup drive assembly
sensors 82 parts 2994 removal and replacement 741
system 84 electrical mechanical tray 2 pickup motor
workflow 81 relationships removal and replacement 745
toner flow information 81, 84 diagrams 3105 tray 2 stack height sensor
toner flow motor 81 parts 2994 removal and replacement 728
toner flow motors 83 Tray 1 Tray 2 tray heater 62
toner flow sensor 81 jams 387 Tray 2 unit 55
toner flow sensors 82 jams, clearing 361 driving 65
toner flow system locating 1 operation 63
toner cartridge operation 87 Tray 1 clutch tray 2, 3
toner cartridge overview 85 removal and replacement 704 base printer, service
toner cartridge unlock Tray 1 empty sensor 53 parts 2995
driving 88 tray 1 motor parts 2995
Toner Collection Unit (TCU) removal and replacement 827 tray 2/3
overview 94 tray 1 paper empty sensor electrical mechanical
toner collection unit removal and replacement 692 relationships
driving 98 Tray 1 pickup roller 53 diagrams 3106
toner collection unit tray 1 roller kit tray 2/3 roller kit
operation 96 removal and replacement 711 removal and replacement 724
toner dispense 88 Tray 1 solenoid 53 Tray 2/3 unit
toner duct driving 94 tray 1 unit overview 55
toner duct operation 93 removal and replacement 680 tray 3
toner duct overview 89 Tray 1 unit 50 removal and replacement 714
toner residual amount sensor driving 55 Tray 3
operation 92 operation 53 feed motor 62
toner flow system overview 50 feed roller 62
information 85, 89, 94 Tray 1 unit driving 55 feed sensor 62
toner flow unit Tray 1 unit operation 53 jams 388
toner cartridge 85 tray 2 jams, clearing 361
Toner Collection Unit (TCU) 94 removal and replacement 714 locating 1

3208 Index
 paper size sensor 62 power 361 sensors 202
tray heater 62 process 361 Workgroup High Capacity Input
Tray 3 cassette 56 Troubleshooting menu, control tray (HCI, Tray 4) 207
tray 3 color panel panel 561 sub PCA 216
removal and replacement 653 troubleshooting tools workflow 208
Tray 3 driving 65 control panel messages 402 workgroup stand 197
tray 3 empty sensor CPMD 402
removal and replacement 757 Trusted Platform Module
tray 3 feed sensor (TPM) 147
removal and replacement 796
tray 3 open and paper size sensor U
removal and replacement 765
understand lights on the formatter
Tray 3 operation 63
formatter lights 361, 369
Tray 3 paper size sensor 62
understand the lights on the
tray 3 pickup assembly
formatter
removal and replacement 750
HP Jetdirect LEDs 361, 369
Tray 3 pickup assembly 57
unit parts
tray 3 pickup drive assembly
DCF, remove and replace 1462
removal and replacement 769
HCI, remove and replace 1547
tray 3 pickup motor
USB hub PCA 155
removal and replacement 773
removal and
tray 3 stack height sensor
replacement 1249
removal and replacement 757
USB port
Tray 3 tray heater 62
locating 3
Tray 3 unit 55
Use Requested Tray 361, 372,
driving 65
406, 425
operation 63
tray diverter unit 244 W
external finisher, remove and
replace 1752 warning vi
operation 246 Web-based Interactive Search
overview 244 Engine (WISE)
tray heaters HP internal users and Channel
removal and replacement 777 partners 391
tray motor error (LaserJet) weight
60.WX.YZ error 361, 404 accessories 1, 6
tray selection - use requested printer 1, 6
tray 361, 372, 406, 425 white backing 1319, 1388
trays whole unit
jams, clearing 361 inner finisher, remove and
locating 1 replace 2516
removal and replacement, whole unit replacement
DCF 1462 flatbed scanner 1394, 1425
tray 2 or tray 3, remove and integrated scanner
replace 714 asset 1300
tray heaters, remove and WISE
replace 777 HP internal users and Channel
Trays menu, control panel 361, partners 391
372, 406, 510 Workgroup Dual Cassette Feeder
troubleshooting 404 (DCF, Tray 4, 5) 198
additional tools 375 feeding system workflow 199
checklist 361, 372 motor operation 205
control panel checks 361, 364 motors 203
jams 383, 385 operation 204
lights, using 361, 369 PCA 206

Index 3209